sme $ a ® S, ” Ae Wha nad eaTecneen Awan einen * J sae abe. Pes ae ae a “44 mae | er | 14 «aes i me ret JOURNAL OF THE ROYAL PIGROSCOPICAL - SOCIETY : CONTAINING ITS TRANSACTIONS AND PROCEEDINGS, AND A SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO Zo@OrE © Gor, -ASSINe 2 @ PAIN asa (principally Invertebrata and Cryptogamia), MiIiGROSCOPS. ac: Edited by FRANK CRISP, LLB. B.A,, One of the Secretaries of the Society and a Vice-President and Treasurer of the Linnean Society of London ; WITH THE ASSISTANCE OF THE PUBLICATION COMMITTEE AND A. W. BENNETT, M.A., B.Sc., F.L.S., F, JEFFREY BELL, M.A., F.ZS., Lecturer on Botany at St. Thomas's Hospital, Professor of Comparative Anatomy in King’s College, JOHN MAYALL, Joy., F.Z.8., R. G. HEBB, M.A., M.D. (Cazéaé)., AND J, ARTHUR THOMSON, M.A., Lecturer on Zoology in the School of Medicine, Edinburgh, FELLOWS OF THE SOCIETY. FOUR ol Eig |e Fi Aak 1888. PUBLISHED FOR THE SOCIETY BY WILLIAMS & NORGATE, LONDON AND EDINBURGH. To need -iges. Part 4 4. _-—s AUGUST. eo eatee Be. JOURNAL «| | OF THE : : ROYAL - MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY: CONTAINING ITS TRANSACTIONS AND PROCEEDINGS, AND A SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO MOO nO CS Aa DD SBOtAwS (principally Invertebrata and Cryptogamia), MICROSCOPY, Sc. Edited by FRANK CRISP, LL.B. B.A, One of the Secretaries of the Society and a Vice-President and Treasurer of the Linnean Society of London; WITH THE ASSISTANCE OF THE PUBLICATION COMMITTEE AND A. W. BENNETT, I.A., B.Sc., F.L.S., F. JEFFREY BELL, M.A., F.ZS., ~ Lecturer on Botany at St. Thomas's Hospital, Professor of Comparative Anatomy in KE ing’s College, JOHN MAYALL, Joy., F.ZS., R. G. HEBB, M.A., M.D. (Caniad.), : - AND 2 J. ARTHUR THOMSON, M.A., é ee Lecturer on Zoology in the School of Medicine, Edinburgh, : FELLOWS OF THE SOCIETY, WILLIAMS & NORGATE, LONDON AND EDINBURGH. =. NAT Via ey 4 PRINTED BY WM: CLOWES AND SONS, LIMITED] ee [STAMFORD STREET AND CHARING cRoss: CONTENTS. ——~ TRANSACTIONS oF THE SoorrTy— V1I0L—Appirions to THz Knowirpcr or tur Carponirerous Fora- mintFeRA. By the Rev. Walter ae F.G:S. os ae Bi VILL ‘and TR) seein Sees SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES. ZOOLOGY. A, VERTEBRATA :—Embryology, Histology, and General. a. Embryology. “Wurtman, C, O.— Kinetic Phenomena of the Bag seks esachrnst sent Feoundution ‘BAG Nace, W.—Heman Ovum .. ee Esner, ¥. Aa sty ree of Mammats Sk alta ae Orr, H.—LZmbryology of Lizard... ANE Oe Ty a Pe Fy Ag oy ee Sonwinck—Gastrula of Amphibians .. PE ete ee PROT BT POT GortrEe, A.—Development of Petromyzon fluviatilis ae igo bi ap hae toe Gurren, F.—Egg-shell of Lepadogaster .. WaT ori Corin, G., & E. Berarp—Albuminaid Constituents of White of Egg PE LIEBERMANN, L.—Embryochemical Investigations wa hee teh ce eee cit Sara 8. Histology. BoveEkrt, T.—Cell-Studies fe -e ee ee ee oe «e we ee ae oe ee oe FieyimnG GN.) on the Gee oi. 6a os ge iba Pan een ee ne aa es EP ScHorrLaANnDER, T.—Cell-division .. PENS MESS Mag es Se ea Wapever, W.—Karyokinesis and Heredity y oR Sak oases Ge ous sheer Pyare Errera, L L.— Cellular Statics oe oe oe ‘ ae ** . Micupi, A.—Fusion of Lymphatic Cells into ‘Plasmodia iene inti, eae Paneru, 3.—Secreting Cells of Intestinal sb curate gee is i Dadar, H.—Spinal Ganglion-cells. .. < ang Jakimoviron, J.—Axis-cylinder and Nerve-cells . be y. General. Biscuit, O.—Growth by Intussusception .. ASE ey Br S.urrer, C. P.—Remarkable Case of Mutualism.. hee, : B. INVERTEBRATA. Crupxor, M. L.—Blood of Invertebrata .. Cuun, C.—Pelagic Animals at Great Depths and their Relations to the ‘Surface Fuuna SreINeRr—Physiology of Nervous System Pr aA es ere aes eee Mollusca. a. Cephalopoda. Buake, J. F.—Shell-growth in Cephalopoda... .. 12 an ve eg Saparier, A.—Spermatozoa of Eledone moschata.. .. e. « Sp es ahie B. Pteropoda. Kame, G.—Musculature of Heteropoda and Pteropoda .. y: Gastropoda. mitn, A. A.—Abnormal Growth in Haliotis ACAZE-DutuiERs, H. pe—Testacella FL&1scuMann, A.— Absorption by Water vs -‘Feipe, A. M.—Dorsal Appendages .. (: 3223 se 6. Lamellibranchista. Porsctare, P.—Lamellibranchiata without gills .. +. im Broos, So-called Eyes of Tridacna and Disuvsies of Pseudochlorophyll Cor- les in the Vascular System of Lamellibranchs .. 0, =» es ss + Ssarr, B.—Phylogeny of Lamellibranchs on pane ape say Ve ae Gane Ge ook es ; Hasetorr, B.—Crystullene EYE oaks ans Saab cee ene we Molluscoida, B. Polyzoa. Kononser, A.—S, pabeainkigencitéin WCE oe Sse a ey eed a een —Freaewater Polyzon SUP See MEA ue Oe Bak Tae DEAE SM eat ee - Arthropoda. Bcc, i mie of Tnsbele Od APQONMIAE ag ES ae Sas ee a. Insecta. Gaanen, V.— Poly pody of Irsect Embryos s. 0s es oe ; aes _ Rats, eS vom—Dermal Sensory Organ of Insects 2. ss ve ae ten we - Sonm, E .—_Sub-aquatie Respiration .. .. .% se Emery, C.—So-called Digestive Stomach of some Anis SUPP SO go ous be Foret, A A.— Senses of Ants oe ee oe ee oe oe se oe ee oe ee ~Vurson, E.—Parthenogenesis in Bombyx Mole eagle es Gacsee eras . Puaryer, G.—Karyokénesis tn Lepidoptera .. .. seem eee Urecu, F.—Decrease of Weight in Winter: Pupz of Pontia ‘brassicn . Sek Sewanee 6 ‘VoritsKkow, A.—Development in Egg of Musca vomitoria .. 1. 0 ae nos ‘Henxinc; H— Early Stages in ces abs og Bagg 1] Ba OT peer a Rabe rare nia Ng CH Witt, L. eng sae of Aphides.. oo 68 2° oa ay on oe ‘ ¥- Arachnida, Cee G. W. & E. G@.—Mental Powers of Spiders Rare Sapp eek eotea eek Soe '. > Samnr-Remy, G.—Brain of Phalangida’ 2.0 ks ee a ae ee we ee : 6. Prototracheata, ~ Sepewrer, A. ES aaacarenk of the Genus Peripatus .. i SHELDON, es ees of Peripatus capensis and P. nove Dealandix =e sean e, Crustacea. MACKAY, Ww. J.—Intercoxal Lobe of certain Crayfishes 4. +. sv - +0 om ve Herrics, F. H.—Development.of Alpheus .. Norpovist, O.—Moina bathycolor and the greatest depths, at which Cladocera are found . ee ee oe ma) oe os 2° oe ae se 22 os ov aq oe Warnes a, Annelida. = Flava, W. naan of Veriilia cxspitosa and Hupometus a _ Brpparp, F. E. —Reproductive Organs of Phreoryctes —«. =f Bourne, G. C.—Kleinenberg on Development of Lopadork ynchus es bares tees ~ KUKENTHAL, W.—Ezxperiments on Harthworms .. +s 2s 00 os ee wes * Ko Acin, N.—Russtan: Lumbrieidaz S566 ce aa es eww ee es os - Etsen, G.—New Annelid, Sutroa rostrata... Se Rear Pane pres, A. O— Two new Aquatic Worms from North ‘America.. Sot alg eect ¢8 B: Nemathelminthes. : Kunrsourrny; N.—Fertilization Of SPORTS CS nahi Tere w er ml te ee ae Vee wigs ee - Ewxsanow, S. M.—Intestinal Epithelium of Ascaris Bae eaeeet rane oak tae >Vesporsny, ¥'.—Studies on Gorduidz 1. . PE a acer eNO MEP Va en ee = Cyan, J.—Anguillulide of the Onions, x9 we we ge ee eee be ee a) Bos, Suet ene EU ASLMN I= fa nas Seas ak Sag ea ee ne ¥: Platyhelminthes. oe Hie P E _—Embryogeny of Fresh-water ah i ap lee Reg ee a te EE W.—Lateral Organs... ~ + Heeler takee Fades meer weak: s . Frarrson, G.—Bulharzia. 2.1. eo eS aes baer te TC ey (“459 5. Incertszs Sedis. Scummxkewitscn, W.—Balanoglossus Mereschkovshkit .. ss sp ee ne new GREEFF, L. von—‘ Challenger’ Myzostomida oe oe * * * * * “* Echinodermata. FLeiscHMANnn, A.—Development of Egg of Echinocardium cordatum «1 4,» Sarasin, P. & F.—Renal Organ of Echinoida .. ost.) “ool Lew lee Betz, F. Jerrrey—Remarkable Ophiurid from Bhasils oo. ae Lupwie, H.—New and Old Holothurians 4. 12 ee ee ae te a ee ee Ceelenterata. Fewxes, J. W.—New Mode of Life among Meduse 1... 2s ee tp ee 7 $5 e Medusz from New England”... cu0 0 se a ee ee a New Physophore ... « Pee ae ines OE re Tras 5 Fow LER, G. H.—New Pennatula from the Bahamas +o Be pene Li tenle tees FISCHER, P.—Actinizx of Coasts of France .. .. ae het Sar 58 BLocuMANN, F., & C. Hireer—Gonactinia prolifera Re re Ee ara HAAcks, W.—Nature of Polyparium .. «. Pi CSR A BF ctr Porifera. Denpy, A.—Comparative Anatomy of Sponges .. 4. se ne ae we et MacMunn, C. A.—Chromatology of Sponges 4. su et ue ew Torsent, E.—Gemmules of Silictspongiz .. s« ve bu wee te tes Noti—Silicoblasts... ss ta We.tner, M.—Survival of Spongiilx after Development of ‘Swarm-larve 4. vs Riptey, 8. O., & A. Denpy— Challenger’ Sponges... .. elas Protozoa. Birscuu’s Protozoa .. eee GreBper, A.—Multinucleate Infusoria Gee Cdn wes hea Mosics, K.—Folliculina ampulla .. re Ree aa Sroxes, A. C.—Fresh-water Infusoria of the United States <2. 35 Dove Bianco, H.—New Foraminifera Bp NG ge gied toh ee reba, hips Sge ee Wierzesskr, A .—Psorospermium Haeckelit Oe ew nfs one Grass, B., & W. ScuewiaKkorr—Megastoma entericum a” eae Ss Cee ee BOTANY. A. GENERAL, including the Anatomy and Physiology of the Phanerogamia. a. Anatomy, (1) Cell-structure and Protoplasm. STRASBURGER, E.—Division of the Nucleus, Cell-division, and Impreqnation .. .. Korscne_t, E.—Relation between the Function and Position of the Nucleus ... .. Janse, J. M.—Permeability of Protoplasm .. ei Fiscner, A., J. Wiesner, & F. Krasser—Albuminous feaction of Cell-wall ay Ampronn, H.—Pleochromism of coloured Cell-walls. 2. 20 ww) ee as on we (2) Other Cell-contents (including Secretions). Baccanimi, P.—Spherocrystals 25> 6 ee os ew) we 0 fo Tassi, F Nectar of Rhododendron med ec ee 2 Se pee sas ons, 0 Waener, E.—Tannin in the Crassulacexr .. oo Mintz, A.—Oceurrence of the Elements of Sugar of Milk in Plants. an We ante TscuincH, A.—Development of some Seeretions and their Receptacles .. .. (3) Structure of Tissues, Lestois, A.—Secretory Canals and Secretory Reservoirs .. Mitier, C.—Seereting Canals of Umbelliferx and Araliacez contained in ‘the Phloem Scuirer, R. P. C.—Influence of the Turgidity of the Epidermal Cells on the Stomata Wituiamson, W. C.—Anomalous Cells in the Interior of the Tissue of “sea Plants Dovtior, H.—Periderm of the Leguminose .. _.. ses tee Avetta, C.—Anomalies in the Structure of the Roots of Dicotyledons s dp ot Sn Big eet oady a 2 she seg eee Filiaces, and ‘ter iacex oc we oe (4) Structure of Organs, Lierat, M.—RRoots of Aracezw.. . TarFeL, F. y.— Mechanical Protection of Bulbs ; Scort, D. H.—Floating-roots of Sesbania aculeata Y Tiecuem, P. yan, & P. Picut—Tubereles on the Roots of Leguiminose - (obo): PAGE FW acon: P. Beate of Hisiourun = berAca sais he a wo OOS ae M.—Anatomical Structure oy th the foe ‘of Orchideze 608 ‘Noack, F.—Injluence of Climate on the Cuticularization and d Thickening oy the Leaves of some Conifer 2... + Pests parte ah OC se OOS -BEAUVISAGE—Bracts of Cruciferz .. Be Se Sa eee iho) ara Ne 7 RAC eres 9) - Scuvitz, O.—Physiological Anatomy of Stipules Bis Va eri te eee P. A.—Foliar Sheath of the Salicornie Baer ee ons Went, F.—Embryo-sac of Rosacex PSSA Serer eaten as Prtit, L.—Petiole of Dicotyledons .. .. es - Mancin, Lovis—Development of Flowers in fe tad Ae ee : Scuumann, K.—Morphology of the Flowers of Canna .. Soe Vash oe ae One eer nee OLE Cuopat, R.—Diagrain of the Flower of Crucifere ea ae ve ys 2S Batiuon, H.—Ovules of Grasses i gig oS Pe Ee EES ee oe AD Se a OLE Batrour, 1. B.— Replum in Cructfer® .22 20 ek as ee ae a te ee GT Garon, A: G.—Fruit of Solanacew ... eet oe adi en eseniis 1 OLE DINGLER, H.—Motion of rotating Winged Fruits and Seeds... UeaS oes aes ee Ole B. Physiology. ; a) Reproduction and Germination. Cee A.—Pollination and Distribution of the Sexual Organs .. Pee Oe ~ Baresoy, ANNA--—Effect of Cross-fertilization on Inconspicuous Flowers... .. . 612 - SANCZEWSKI, E. DeE—Germination of Anemone apennina ., .. 1. ws es -~= 618 -HILprEBRAND, F.—Germination of Oxalis rubella., 1.0 200 ue aes ee = MGuiter, F.— Germination of the Bicuiba .. .. Pontos sees OLS GREEN, J. R.—Germination of the Tuber of the Jerusalem Artichoke. SEE ra (2) Nutrition and Growth (including Movements of Fluids). ARCANGELI, G.—Injluence of Light on the Growth of Leaves .. 614 Liepsonrr, G.—Supply e Food Constituents at Pilon ent Loree of the Growth of DAOAE. 9 ne Gis wad is as a8 on eae Olt 2 (3) Irritability. ~ Garpiner, W.— Power uf Contractility exhibited by the Protoplasm of certain Cells 614 _ Wortmann, J.—Movements of Irritation of Multicellular Organs .. .« sor LD - Gopiewss!, E.—Tfrritability of Growing Parts of Plants»... «2 4. 1. se) G15- Oxtver, F. W.—Sensitive Labellum of Masdevallia muscosa .. .. ess? se) GIG (4) Chemical Changes Gneluding Respiration and Fermentation). ; BRN, B.—Formation of Nitric Acid in Plants... 22. sa see ee we ~~ «G6 : Sees Ses G Desert Flora ie Per aie aha a - Deruer's (W.) Laboratory Course of Vegetable Physiology ie SOP foe 5 aes eee OEM Bie H. pE—Isotonie Coefficient of Glycerin .. ge PCG Sete ee eno B. CRYPTOGAMTA. Cryptogamia Vascularia. ean F, O.—Oophyte of Trichomanes .. 617 ~ CAMPBELL, D.- “H.— Development of Onoclea Strattcopteri is Hagin. “(Steuthiapteris germnica Wiild.) Se sferetes 618 .- Mourine, W Branching of the Frond ‘of Pobiis ae ee EBS _.. Benzz, W.—Leavesof Polypodiacee — .. Soe Ran eR; Cae EIS ee ET OND - Daccomo, G.—Aspidol from Aspidium- Foliaqied es fas? Sic OED ~ Leckerc pu SABLon—Selaginella depicaply li ROE tase Rae SW AR oo OLD ~Soums-Lavpacy’ Ss Introduction to Fossil AS ONUB Ya ee Re se ere yn EO BAD nea cigs hee eee Bes Muscinesw. SEE aiEEnr— Petstome of Masses yo 0 Sah ate ee eee oat bate ae BLO eM: Dee Sphagnace’ 0 2 wey we ee ee ee Eee ae a G2T pens ; - Yichenes. — : ae : “. AWarnto, it: Cladonta “7. See aeee GAG aS OUR, ER Ot GON _ ‘Sypow’s f) Lichens of Germany. Fe aw COE RY TO ae ie eds Pee ge eee AL y f . x : ree = Bier. . é a; ; a Woonwonns, ww. i Apioad Cell of Pueue ss eo re lee a eae dt nw COT Scutrr, F.—Phycoerythrin. .. .. PR eo es ge be eee tae Oe Jounson, T.—Procarp and -Cystocarp of ‘Gracilaria ee or, CMAN eae chee OO BiceLow, R. P.—Frond of Champia parvula .. ee nee in ae 628 “LAGERHEIM, G.—Development of Hydrurus .. 2.0 6. oe os ue ee ew 628 (02) ASKENASY, E.— Development of Pediastrum.. ‘4. ++ es ee ee we Weser, VAN Bossp—Alge# parasitic on the Sloth.. 6. +s ee ae te Overton, C. E.—Conjugation of Spirogyra .. Ae hae F Lacerurim, G.—Uronema, a new genus of Chilorozoosporeat py aes ame Wite’s (N.) Contributions Ca Algalogy sc: tisis. ees faige gto 2G de ures. ee Hanserre’s (A.) Alga-flora of Bohemia at eee hie, tk apes aay eS Hatvcr anv Ricurer’s Phycotheca wniversalis ., 2. se ae ae Der Ton anp Levi's Venetian aca ht Bat? oad cents es wal home Scutitr, F.—Chextoceros .. OF. ba ale ee awl ae ues Ratrray, J.— Varieties of Aulacodiseug a ee sk ae ks oe Fungi. Roitanp, L.—Blue Coloration of Fungi by Todine .. ee ee ewe Karsten, H.—Clussification and Description of Fungi... ws we we VUILLEMIN, P.— Biological Studies of Fungi ae Hecke, E.—Formation of tavo * aide hymenta in Polyporus applanatve.. Fiscuer, E.—Stretching of the Receptacle of the-Phalloidet. _.. o Masser, G.—Revision of the Genus Bovisla.. .. eA eve Fricuov— Formation of the Asei in Physalospora Bidwellii fs Thine tae Dvrovur, L.—Development and Fructification of Triehocladium .. .. Seynes, J. pE—Ceriemyces and Fibrillaria.. © .. ve Saccarpo, P. A.—New Genus of Sphzxriaceous Pyrenomyedtes.- at Sat Se Berese, A. N.—New Genus Peltospheria ..- .. repr Atay Bovupter—New Mucedinex . -- *e oe oe * Brriese, A. N.—Clathrospora ‘and 'Pyrenophora Pres et oe Saleem J.—New Papulaspora 5 50 ie es on jl ann” lh ee Maents, P.—Sehinzia ... Bruits pe pee es Rovumerevrre, C.— Fungus Parasitic onthe Plane... ss ws ve os SanrorD, E.—Anatomy of the Common Cedar-apple .. -. ee ee we Protophyta. Sacre M.—Cellular Envelope of the Filamentous Nostocacez Pa Ftee Borzi, A.— Development of Mischococcus confervicola .. .. ++ ee. we LA@ERHEIM, G.—Stlichococens bacillaris.. 6. 4. ke ete we De Toni, G. B.— Remarkable Flos-aqux es oa ae koe PERRONcITO, E. & Varaupa, L,— Pa te of . auf” » ee isnes ARCANGELI, G.—Sacchiromyces minor .. Sas WAssERzUG, E.—Spores of the Ferments ss os ‘Fomascuek, A.—Symbiosis of Bacteria with Glaocapaa polydermatica ae ARLOING, S.— Presence of a Phlogogenous matter in the Cultures of certain Microbes Garier—Chromo-aromatic Wiergbes = oe Oe ten at Soe ee te eae Havser, G.—Sarcina of the Lungs. ad Borvoni-Urrrepvuzzi, G.—New Pathogenic Di Microphyte in Men and Animals SPeLiMaNN & HavsHALTER—Dissemination of Bacillus by Flies .. + MICROSCOPY. e«, Instruments, Accessories, &c. (1) Stands, Zetss’s (C.) IFa, Microscope (Fig.96)°.. 4: «sive fee oe ta ee Baxccuin’s Microscope (Fig. 97) .. ee Sate a na tia el, Sede ae GatiLe0’s Microscopes (Figs. 98 and 99) Sasa AEs ne aCe reilee cae JosLot’s Microscope (Fig. 100)... eis ae ee Hensoipr's (M.) Reading Microscopes (Figs. 102 and 402) ee eee (2) Eye-pieces and Objectives. Vocrer, H.. W.—Hartnack's new Objective... +. as 00 | aw eee (3) Illuminating and other Apparatus, Hitcenpdorr’s Auwranograph (Fig. 103)... CuarMan, F. T.—Slide for observing Soap-bubble Films (Fig. 104) .. ss Senaren’s Hot-water Circulation Stage and Swift's Pee (Fig. 105) BErrRrany’s Refractometer 9 .. 0 oe ne ae ee SSecreee (4) Pui alee Ne Lxr1z’s small Photo-micrographic Apparatus (Fig. 106)... 1. « s. Puosst’s Focusing Arrangement (Fig. 107) .. el oR nee Carranica, 5.—Jnstantancous Photomicrography ee haar epph ee eae (5) Microscapical Optics and Manipulation. oad oe se aes, (6) Miscellaneous. ~ oe CO FAO, F.—American Microscopes. pal Citoger girl tga acy aa nk ea ae 108 Deatu of Mr. Wee ne iva 2 os Mani an Mag ce a wg Sime hae ee eT many ee ee : . g. Technique. (1) Collecting Objects, including Culture Processes. JacoBl, E.—Preparation of Nutritive Media «es on ewe te wet FREUDENREICH, H.—Preparing Agar-agar_ .. ee fae ee, oes ~ Rasxin, M.—Milk-peptone-gelatin for cultivating Patingente Micro-organisma PEN, N. W.—Vessel for the Culture of Low Organisms (Pig. 2 ee eiwe (2). Preparing Objects. ; MisonToip, A. Spee scecnlGit of Parts and Organs of Animals deawae Maen mee oie Mie L. v.—Two new Methods for preparing Nerve-cellg 4. 21 00 +s Bionp1, D.—New Method for the Microscopical Study of the Blood... «1 oss. Ranvier, L.—Preparation and Staining of the Spinal Cord .. .. ae Cutarvel, G.— Demonstrating the Canalicular Prolongations a Bone-cor: puscles ue PaLapino, G.—Prepuring Mammalian Ovaries... +. ss “2 net ae - JOURDAN, E.—Preparing and Staining Annelida.. .. .« - <- _ Fratronr, J.—Preparing Polygordius .. .. Zacuarias’ (O.) Method of Preparing Eqgs of Aare megalocephala _. Bovert’s (T.). Method of Preparing the Eggs Sos Ascaris rele nnae ’ Keuier, C. C.—Isolating Foraminifera .. PES my see Branvt, K.—Prepuring Spherozoa .. spies naam A Coe aie Kine, J. D. —Preparation and Mounting of Ferns, Lacernemm, G.— Application of Lactic Acid to the Ezamination es ‘Algae Temrere’ 8 (J.) Preparations of Diatoms .. Age See (8) Cutting, including Tabeiding.: : Duvat, M.—Collodion for Imbedding in Embryology... 2. +» s+ ess ae? Scuwase’s Sliding Microtome (Fig. 109) _ Zwsarpemaker, H.—Accessory to the Cambridge Rocking Microtome igs. 110 PAGE 652 6o4 655 696 656 657 658 658 659. 660 661 662 662 662 663 664 - 664 665 665 666 667 667 668 676 c and }11) ... ts 666 Bomrvs, H. C. — Inexpensive Section-smoother (Fig. 112) .. See on ree ee ee OLE _ Apsruy, J—Preparing Long Series of Sections with Celloidin cs. br ae 670 - Prorer Thickness of Microscopical Sections .. Peres ea Gon eee OEE - Netsser, A.—Preparing Sections from Test-tube Cultivationa wes ae we 671 (4) Staining and Injecting. f Gray, W. M.—Double-staining of Nucleated Blood-corpuscles .. .. 4, +. +.» 673 Ktune, W.—Staining Nerve-endings with Gold Chloride... 2. 4. 0. ee OTB » Boccarnt, G. —Staining-Nerve-endings with Gold Chloride ie 674 SCHIEFFERDECKER, P.— Weigert’s Hamatoxylin Method as ‘applied to other than Nervous Tissues :. Re aii ae Se ad eee eg wee EN - Bizzozmro, G., & G. Vassate—Staining Mitoses So 674 Zimmerman, A.—Staining Leucoplasts, Protein-granules, Bordered Pit Membranes, _ . and Woody Tissue - .. ta Vids toe) OLS Wetlcrrt, C.—New Method for ‘Staining ‘Fibrin and Micro-organisms ie ease LOE “PLatNer, G.—New Nuclear Stain and Note on Fixation ..0 «2 0s 20 00 ee. 675 Lewin, A.—Baumgarten’s Method of Triple-staining .. 4. 25 25 (as te 0s ~—66 _ Bases, V.—Anilin-oil Safranin Sclution ... en on se os ee ee wks Griespacnu, H.—Metanil-yellow. bbe eae ey Sag gaa OLE -Brauns, R.—Simple Method for daring Methylen Iodide ee tia eran’ cee cae LF Borpen, W. C.— Carmine Injections Penis sip Rosin’s, Lacaze-Duruiers’, & FARAB@UF’ s “Injecting Byringes (Figs. 113-115) - 678 Foi, H—Collin’s Antomatic Cannula-holder (Fig. 116) 2. 4. ve «> +s. 680 (5)- Mounting, including Slides, Preservative ies ee BRAMWELL, Brrom—Half-clearing method of preparing Nerve Sections . 680 Port, A.— Adaptation of Kaiser’ & gelatin for. arranging “microscopic preparations - in rows . os) fee 680. KELxer, C. C. — Puri ‘fication of Tolw Balsam for Micr oscopical Purposes we) ae (OGL pees L.—Hot Plate Apparatus (Figs. 117 and eee Baste ee ee a ee. OE (6) Miscellaneous, . es H., T. Lonearp, & G. Rrepiin— Method oe Calculating the tapsiaty ae OF, Bacterial Increase (Fig. 119)- .. 682 ie Se E. C. aes of Water used for Br reaving as regards Micro- organisms. ~ 685 5 Paocespises OF THE Socmy Rak eign th Vow oe dak enue BSP ee: I.—APERTURE TABLE. . Corresponding Angle (2 u) for Limit of Resolving Power, in Lines to an Inch. Wumericwill: .si.020. ule oa ee cee ee Monoch ti Aperture. Air Water as Ate White Light. (Blue) Light. Photography. (nsinu=a)|; (n=1°00). | (M= 1°33). | = 1°52). (a Tine &.) Ma} (A Line F}) & Gest Lines 1:52 si é 180° 0’ | 146,543 | 158,845 | 193,087 1:51 me 166° 51’ | 145,579. |. 157,800. | 191.767 1-50 3 Ss 161° 23’ | 144.615 | 156,755 | 190.497 1:49 “4 # 157° 12’ | 148,651 | 155.710 | 189,297 1:48 * 5 153° 39’ | 142,687 | 154,665 | 187,957 1:47 : a 150° 32’ | 141,723 | 153,620 | 186,687 1:46 3 ~ 147° 42" | 140,759 | 152,575 | 185,417 1:45 Se ¥ 145° 6 | 139.795 | 151.530 |. 184147 1:44 % . 142° 39" | 138.830 | 150,485 | 182.877 1°43 ; is 140° 99" | 137,866 | 149.440 | 181,607 1:42 “a % 138° 12’ | 136,902 | 148,395 | 180,337 1:41 i * 136° 9’ | 135,938 | 147,350 | 179,067 1:40 i x 134° 10° | 134,974 | 146,305 | 177,797 1:39 i 2 132° 16" | 1342010 | 1452260 | 176,527 1:38 5 Ss 130° 26" | 133,046 | 144,215 | 175,257 1:37 = = 128° 40’ | 1322082 | 143.170 | 173,987 1:36 0% sg 126° 58’ | 131,118 | 142,125 |. 172,717 1:35 3 = 125° 18' | 130,154 | 141,080 -| 171,447 1-33 ae eect ior im rie tas mer ee eae 1-32 3 165° 56’| 120° 83" | 127,261 | 137.944 | 167.637 1:31 Su 160° 6’, 119° 3’ | 126,297 |. 136,899 | 166,367 1-30 2 155° 38” | 117° 35’ | 125,838 | 135,854 | 165,097 1:29 " 151° 50’| 116° ‘s' | 124,369 | 134,809 | 163,827 1:28 bs 148° 49°! 114° 44" | 123.405 | 133.764 | 162,557 1:27 “ 145° 27’} 113° 21’ | 122.441 | 132/719 | 161,287 1:26 “ 142° 39’} 111° 59’ | 121.477 |- 131,674 | 160,017 1:25 .. . | 140° 3} 110° 39° | 120,513 130,629 158,747 1:24 > 137° 36'| 109° 20’ | 119,548 | 129,584 | 157,477 1-23 % 135° 17'| 108° 2" | 118.584 | 128.539 | 156,207 1:22 1 133° 4’| 106° 45’ | 117,620 | 127,494 | 154,937 1-20 een ey ee ce pe ts Be A A oe yi Bren ao 1:19 3 196° 58'| 103° 9° | 1142738 124°359 | 151,128 1:18 i 125° 3'| 101° 40’ | 113,764 | 123°314 | 149,857 1:17 3 123° 13'| 100° 38’ | 112,799 | 122,269 | 148,588 1:16 x 121° 96'| 99° 99° | 111,835 | 121,924 | 147,317 1:15 * 119° 41'| 98° 20° | 110.872 | 120,179 | 146,048 1-14 w: 118° 0| -97° 11 | 109,907 | 119,134 | 144,777 1:13 = 116° 20'| 96° 2 | 108.943 | 118,089 | 143,508 tit ‘ys Paes apt apogee tagieie: toa totean Gla eile ie ia Baeeee ieee Bee eel foe OM Bere 1:08 a 108° 36’| 90° 34’ | 1o4'193 | 112,864 | 187,158 Be aa] Gee |e uae 1:05 S 1° Jerk ee BY PG a 1097729 | 1337348 1-04 ie 102° 53'| 86° 21 | 100,266 | 108,684 | 132,078 1-03 5 101° 30"| 85° 19’ | 99.302 | 107.639 | 130,808 1:02 s 100° 10'| 84° 18’ | 98,338 | 106,593 | 129,538 1-01 98° 50’| 83° 17’ | 97,374 | 105,548 | 128,268 1:00 || 180°. 0’ 97° 31°] 82° 17" 96,410 | 104,503 | 126,998 0:99 || 163° 48’ 96° 12'| , 81° 17° 95,446 | 103,458 | 125,728 0:98 || 157° 2° 94° 56’ | 80° 17’ 94,482 | 102,413 | 124,458 0°97 |} 151° 52’ | 93° 40’| 79° 18” 93,518 | 101,368 | 123,188 0:96 || 147° 29° 92° 24"| 78° 20’ 92,554 |} 100,323 | 121,918 0-95 |} 143° 36’ | 91°.10"| 77° 29" 91,590 99,278 | 120,648 0°94 || 140° 6’. | — 89° 56’| 76° 24’ 90, 625 98,233 | 119,378 0:93 || 136° 52’ 88° 44'| 75° 27’ 89, 661 97,188 | 118,108 0°92 |}-133° 51’ 87° 32’| 74° 30’ | 88,697 $6,143 | 116,838 0°91. || 131° 0! 86° 20°] 73° 33" 87,733 95,098 | 115,568 0:90 || 128° 19’ 85° 10’| 72° 36’ | 86,769 94,053. | 114,298 0:89 || 125° 45’ 84° 0"} 71° 40° 85, S05 93,008 | 113,028 0°88 |} 123° 17’ 82° 51’| 70° 44" | 84,841 91,963 | 111,758 re . . *-. . . . . . . . . i=) — bo APERTURE TABLE—continued. ‘Corresponding Angle (2 w) for Limit of Resolving Power, in Lines to an Inch. Denes Pieter ie eS fenton Ss WNtmtaaatngl tating Aperture.|| Air Water pe ha White Light. Xplne) Light. | Photography.} (ae), rae rege NG ey ee (A = 0°5269 m, | (A =.0°4861 p,| (A = 074000 pe, ee aa cm sin t= G:)|) (at = 1°00). e 133). | (= 3°62). Line E.) Line F.): near Line h.) G) - 0°87 120° 55’ 81° 42’ 69° 49’ 83,877 90,918 110,488 "TdT 1°149 0:86 118° 38! 80° 34’ 68° 54’ 82,913 - 89,873 109,218 *740 1-163 ~ 0°85 116° 25’ 192 3t 68°. 0! 81,949 $8,828 107,948 *723 1-176 0°84 ~ |} 114° 17’ 78°20! 67°. 6’ 80,984 87,783 106,678 *706 1-190 - - 0°83 112° 12! 77°14". 66° 12’ 80,020 86,738 105,408 | “689 1-205 0°82 110° 10’ 76°. 8’ 65° 18’ 79,056 85,693 104,138 "672 1°220 0:81 108° 10’ Poo = Bie 64° 24’ - 78,092 84,648 102, 868 "656 1-235 0-80 106°. 16’ 73° 58’ 63°-ol! 77 5128 83,6035 + 101,598 *640 1°250 0:79 104° 292’ 720-53" 62° 38’ 76,164 82,558 100,328 624 1-266 0:78 102° 31’ 71° 49° 61° 45’ 75,200 81,513 99,058 ~*608 1-282 0:77 || 100° 42’ 70° 45° 60° 52’ 74, 236 80,468 97,788 *593 1-299 0:76 98° 56’ 69° 42’ 60° 0’ Tas 2lars 79,423 96,518 “578 | 1:316 -- 0°75 fact a 68° 40’ B90 °. BF 72,308 78,378 95,248 “563 1-333 0°74 95°: 28! 67°. 37’ 58° 16’ 71,3438 17,333 93,979 *548 1°351 0-73 93° 46’ 66°. 34’ 57° 24’ 70,379 76,288 92,709 °533 1:370 0°72 3 A 65° 32’ 56° 32’ 69,415 7d, 242 91,439 °518 1°389 0°-71— 90° 28’ 64° 32’ 55° 41’ 68,451 74,197 90,169 “504 1°408 © 0:70 88° 51 63°31" 54° 50’ 67,487 78,152 88,899 -490 1-429 0:69 87° 16’ 62° 30’ 53° 59’ 66,523 72,107 87,629 |} ~:476 1:449 0°68 85° 41’ 61° 30’ Hears i 65,559 © 71,062 86,359 | *462 1-471 0°67 . 84° 8! 60° 30’ Layee ey 64,595 70,017 85,089 | 449 1°493 ‘0:66. 82° 36’ 59° 30’ 51° 28’ 63,631 68,972 83,819 "436 1°515 0-65 81° 6! 58° 30’ 50° 38’ 62,667 67,927 82,549 | °423 1-538 0°64 79° 36’ Die. ole 49° 48’ 61,702 66,882 81,279 - *410° ff 1+562 0°63 78° 6’ 56° 32’ 48° 53’ 60,738 65, 837 80,009 *397 1°587 0°62 76° 38’ 55° 34’ 48° 9! 59,774 64,792 78,739 “384 1°613 0:61 75°10’ 54° 36’. | 47° 19° 58,810 63,747 77,469 *372 1°639 0:60. 73° 44! 53° 38’ 46° 30’ 57,846 62,702 76,199 *360 | 1-667 0:59 722.18! 52° 40’ 45° 40° 56,881 61, 657 74,929 “348 | 1°695 0-58 70° 54’ 51° 42’ 44° 51’ 55,918 60,612 73,659 “336 | 1-724 0:57 69° 30’ 50° 45’ 449-9" 54,954 59,567 72,389 °325 1-754 0:56 68° - 6’ 49° 48’ 43°. 14’ 93,990 98,522 7i,119 “314 1°786 0°55 66° 44! 49° 51’ 42°. 25! 53,026 57,477 69,849 *303 1°818 0:54 65° 22’ 47° 5A’ | 41° 37’ 52,061 56,432 68,579 “292 1°852 0°53 64° 0’ 46° 58’ 40° 48’ 51,097. 55,387 67,309 *281 1-887 0:52 62° 40! 46°. 2? 40° 0’ 90,133 54,342 66,039 -270 1°923 0-51. 61° 20° 45° 6! Doe 12" 49,169 53, 297 64,769 -260 | 1-961 0°50 60° 0° 44° 10’ 38° 24’ 48,205 52, 252 63,499 *250 2°000 0°48 - 572.22! 42° 18' 36° 49’ 46,277 50,162 60,959 *230 | 2-083 - 0:46 54° 47’ 40° 28" 35° 15! 44,349 48,072 58,419 +212 | 2°174 - O-45- 53° 30’ 39° 33! 34° 27’ 43,385 47,026 97,149 +203 2-222 (0°44 52° 13° 38° 38’ 38° 40’ 42,420 45,981 95,879 *194 2°273- 0-42: |} 49° 40’ 36° 49! 32°59 40,492 43,891 53,339 176 2-381 ~ 0-40 | 47° is ea ora 1 30° 31’ 38,064 41,801 50,799 -160 27500 0:38 44° 40’ |. 38° 12’ |. 28° 57’ 36,636 39,711 48,259 °144 2°632 20°36} 42° 12’ 31° 24 27° 24! 34,708 37,621 49,719 -130 | 2°778 - 0°35- 40° 58! 30° 30’ 26° 38’ 33, 744 36,576 44,449 °123° | 2°857— 0°34 39° 44" VAS is y (ee Winey Soares 32,779 35,531 43,179 °116 2°941 0°32 37° 20° 272°51! 24° 18’ | 30,851 33,441 40,639 102 37125 0°30 34° 56! 26°. 4’ 22° 46’ 28,923 31,351 38,099 *090 3°333 0:28 -B2° 32’ 24°18’ |- 21° 14’ 26,995 29,261 — 39,509 *078 3:571 0:26. 30° 10’ | 22° 337 19° 42’ 25, 067 27,171 33,019 "068 | 3:846 0°25 — 28° 58’ -21°-40’ | 1-18° 56! 24,103 © 26,126 31,749 “063 4-000 0°24 || 27° 46’ 20° 48’ 18° 10’ 23,188 25,081 30,479 “058 4-167 0°22 25° 26! 19° -2’ }--16° 38’ 21,210 22,991 27,940 *048 4°545 ~0:20— 23° 4! |-- 17° 18’ Lee 19,282 20,901 | 25,400 -040 57000 0-18 20° 44’ 15° 34’ 13° 36" 17,354 | 18,811 22,860° | *032 9°555 0-16 18° 24’ 13° 50’ 120 c5'> 15,426 16,721 | 20,320 *026 6°250 0°15 P17 14! 12° 58’ 11° 19’ 14,462 ~ 15,676 19,050 j= +023 6°667 50:14 16° - 5' 12°. 6’ | 10° 34’ 13,498 14,630 17,78) “020 7T°143 °Q-12 13° 47% 10° 22' 9° 4’ 11,570 | 12,540 ~* 15,240 “014 | 8-333 - . 0°10 AVS 29" coherent] igs bazar: of 264s: 10,450 12,700 “010 - 10-000 — 0:08 — OO ee Gerba 6S Be I 7,713 _ 8,360 10,160 “006. -J12°500 0-06. 6° 53! 5° 10’ 4° 32! 5,789. 6,270 7,620 ‘004 (16-667 0°05. AANA: AOEBE = 8S AGE 4,821 0,225 6,300 "003. 920-000 ( 10 ) GREATLY REDUCED PRICES OBJECT-GLASSES MANUFACTURED BY R. & J. BECK, 68, CORNHILL, LONDON, E.C. PRICES OF BEST ACHROMATIC OBJECT-GLASSES. | Angle. ) a s | Linear magnifying-power, with 10-inch No. | Focal length. | aper Price. | body-tube and eye-pieces. : ture, | eae ae ee | aes, | No. 1.| No. 2.| No. 3.No. 4.| No. 5. o | £5. d. | | ) | 100 4inches .. .. 9 | " 2 7 ro} 164 - 30 ) 40 50 101} Sinches .. «. 74 \ ; 102 | Sinches .. .. | 12 . 210 0 a ees Bl Ae 103 2 inches * ee Io ; | | 104 2inches .. -.| 17 | 210 0 } bi be Sc td Beet pegs 8 105. 13 inch Fe A Se ! 3 2 rs | 30 48 go | 120 150 106 | 2 inch p25] 2 107 , 2 inch 32 | 210 0 } Le Pree Bene Se c, | 35° 108 inch + | 45 | 210 0} 100} 160) 3001 400} 500 109 + inch. - | 65 4 0 QO°§ 125 } .200; 375-}| 500} -625 110° + inch s 1-95 | B&B O O-§ 150) 240; 450 600 750 111. iinch 75} 810 0} 200 | 320°} 600} 800 | 5000 112 iinch |} 120 | 410 O}. 250) 400.) 750} 1000] 1250 113 | 2 inch | 130 | & O O§ 400}. 640 | 1200 | 1600} 2000 114 , 5, imn. | 10 | 5 6 Q% 500; B00! 1590 2000] 2500 115 + imm., | 10 | 8 O O | 750 | 1200 | 2250 | 3000 375° 116 | 3 imm. | 180 (10-0 0. 1000 | 1600 | 3000 ; 4000 | 5000 117 3 inch. | 160 | 20 0 O-§ 2000 | 6000 | 8000 | To,0co ~ ECONOMIC ACHROMATIC OBJECT-GLASSES, APPLICABLE TO ALL INSTRUMENTS MADE WITH THE Untrvyersat Screw. : Angi! ) MAGNIFYING-POWER, | : | of -| | with 6-inch body and |No. | Foecallength. | aper-| Price. ! eye-pieces, . ture, | oo ) | about | No, 1.| No. 2.; No. as eee rae es oe Ie a Be ee : ° i caer Mgeey | i / | 150 | Sinches= .. 2.) 6 | 1 0-0 | 312 15-} 27 | 351+ 2inehes .2 -.. ] 8 7-1 0-0 8 23 41 352) Dinch “..- 20-4 18 | 28 OS ee 61 | 106 (1583 | finch’... .. .. | 38 4-1 5°O | -90-} 116: | 205 154 : mehias 43 2< 80 1-5-0 170 *} 2205} 415 155 iinch «2s 2. | 110°} 2 5 O-} 250 <1 330°) 630 | 156 © 3 inch Soo was ve 4 110°4 310 0-7 350 | 450 | 800 | 157 | 3, imm. -. «+ | 180 | 6 O © 7-654 | 844-1500 -] Revised Catalogue sent on application to R. & J. BECK, GS, Cornhill. th.¢ Imp. Camb. Sci. Inst Co. mY — ARPRONIPF?TR A ItTa 1 . NTT 5 VARBONIFE ROUS fORAMINIFBRA. =Venan- ae ONIFE Re YU By Ba VAR JAN 20 1903. JOURNAL. sasanen OF THE ROYAL MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY. AUGUST 1888. TRANSACTIONS OF THE SOCIETY. VIII.— Additions to the Knowledge of the Carboniferous Foranunifera. By the Rev. Water Howcuiy, F.G.S. ; (Read 18th June, 1888.) Puates VIII. anp IX. RESEARCHES in relation to the Carboniferous Foraminifera of the North of England were begun by the author in 1873, and some of the earlier EXPLANATION OF PLATES. Puate VIII. Figs. 1, 2—Hyperammina elongata, var. clavatula, nov. x 60 diam. a at oe — vagans, Brady x 50 diam. » 4—Placopsilina cenomana, d’Orbigny sc cc -- X 3d diam. 5» * 9.—Lituola rotundata, sp.nov. .. : oc oc -- X 50diam. > oO ~ , transverse section. x 50 diam. » 1.—Lituola Bennicana, Brady ; x 55 diam. Vertical section showing the coarse perforation of the test. » 8, 9.—Webbina fimbriata, sp. noy. A or oc x 100 diam. a LO: ‘—Endothyra circumplicata, sp. nov. ac -» 40 diam. a, b, the two lateral aspects of the test. sale —_— —_— , transparent section showing the septal plane of the last convolution at right angles to that of the earlier whorls.. oe ae 2 so 8k GH) Clana PuaTe IX. 5, 12.—Endothyra conspicua, sp. nov.. 2c ae Bo GH Gini: » 13.—— radiata, var. Tateana, nov. ae a -- - 40 diam: a, lateral aspect ; b, peripheral aspect. » 14.—-— x 40 diam. Weathered specimen exhibiting the double septal partitions. > 15.— — —, transparent section iG a . 45 diam. 5 16.— Webbina irregularis, d@Orbigny, attached specimen 22) a0 diam: ey LT -— , inferior surface of two detached chambers x 35 diam. 5, 18.—Archelagena Howchiniana, Brady, sp. c x 45 diam. Transparent section through a group showing ‘interseptal communication. 5, 19.—Stacheia moriformis, sp. Dov. .. x 35 diam. 5 20.— - , transparent section x 60 diam. » 21.—WNodosaria (D.) farcimen, Soldani sp.. x 60 diam. a, lateral aspect; 6, apertural end. : », 22.—Patellina Bradyana, sp. nov. .. 58 ar a «6 Ga diam. Lateral aspect of a tall specimen. ho a, lateral aspect of a short pucenee x 55 diam. 6, inferior face of another shell : - XX 65 diam. » 24.——- , transverse section BF a Eoordiam. 25.— ——-— —_——,, ; longitudinal section x 55 diam. 1888. Ce ee tone 534 Transactions of the Society. results were included and acknowledged by Mr. H. B. Brady, F.R.S., in his ‘ Monograph of the Carboniferous and Permian Foraminifera,’ published in the Paleontographical Society’s volume for 1876. The publication of a general treatise on the subject, by so competent an authority, offered great facilities for workers in this interesting although somewhat difficult paleontological study. In 1876 the author of the present paper began a systematic investigation of the microzoic beds of Carboniferous age over an extended area of the North of England. The country thus geologically examined may be roughly stated as extending from the Wansbeck to the Wear, in a north and south direction, and from a line a little east of Corbridge, on the east, to Greenhead, on the west. ‘The vertical range of the geological section concerned extends from the highest calcareous bed of the district down to the “P” Limestone of the Ordnance Geological Survey map. Within the limits of the vertical section, 80 distinct calcareous beds are included and separately denominated, and in their examination for Foraminifera, results have been tabulated from 83 localities and 242 separate washings. Although every available argillo-calcareous horizon in this series was placed under examination, only five samples throughout the entire vertical range were found to yield no trace of Foraminifera. The district, as defined above, is generally rich in microzoa, whilst some geological horizons are extraordinarily so. The labour of gathering, preparing, and examining so much material, together with manipulating many hundreds of transparent sections necessary to determine doubtful forms, can only be appreciated by those who have had experience in working out these or similar minute palozoic organisms. The object of the present communication is to place on record some of the more interesting forms, either new to science or previously unobserved in rocks of paleozoic age, met with during my investiga- tions. I may add that in addition to the species enumerated in the following pages, there are a number of other organisms, which I have some ground for believing to be foraminiferal ; but as the evidence of their affinity is scarcely sufficient to carry conviction to those less accustomed to handle the obscure and often much altered fossil microzoa of these palzozoic limestones, it appears safest for the present to leave them undescribed. I must express my great indebtedness to Mr. H. B. Brady, not only for many valuable hints and the trouble he has taken in the pre- liminaries of publication, but also in seeing this paper through the press, a service all the more valuable in that it was cheerfully rendered and that without it the difficulties of publishing these notes at so great a distance, I fear, would have been insuperable. Mr. Rogers, of Adelaide, has also placed me under great obligation in drawing the objects, in the first instance, from nature, a work in which he has shown great patience and accuracy. Carboniferous Foraminifera. By Rev. W. Howchin. 535 Family ASTRORHIZID/. Sub-family Rhabdamminine. Genus Hyprramuina, Brady. Hyperammina elongata, var. clavatula,noy. Plate VIII. figs. I, 2. Test free, clavate in form; primordial end inflated, rounded and closed; tubular extension straight or only slightly curved, of uniform diameter throughout, and short; sometimes marked externally by slightly depressed transverse lines. Texture finely arenaceous. Walls thin, smooth on both exterior and interior surfaces. Aperture, the epen end of tubular extension. Short diameter of tube 1/130 in. Length 1/30 in. The discovery of Hyverammina in the Jurassic rocks of Switzer- land, by Dr. Haeusler, and, almost concurrently, that of a vermiculate fossil in the Silurian of Scotland (Girvanella) by Messrs. Nicholson and Etheridge, which Mr. H. B. Brady thinks more than probable may belong to the same genus, indicate a high probability that some representatives of this very simple form might occur in the rich microzoic beds of the Carboniferous Limestone. The organism now described seems, in all respects, very characteristic, and comes so near the smooth examples of H. elongata, Br., that it can hardly be specifi- cally distinguished from that form. It differs, however, in its minute dimensions, the proportionately larger size of its primordial chamber, and its shorter contour. With regard to the last mentioned feature it is just possible that the Carboniferous examples fail to show the entire length of the tube. Its minute size and delicate proportions render it very liable to breakage in the mechanical operations of cleaning the material; but, on the other hand, I have not detected a single frag- ment in the material searched that would be recognized as a fractured portion of the organism. Distribution.—It was noted in seven samples of material, embracing the Great Limestone and the “ D,” “ H,’ “I,” and “J” Limestones of the Cowburn and Tipalt districts. It is more or less scarce except in the overlying shale of the Great Limestone at Clowes Gill. It maintains a remarkable uniformity of character throughout the geological section, and cannot well be mistaken for any other form. Hyperammina vagans, Brady. Plate VIII. fig. 3. An adherent vermiform test of arenaceous texture ; consisting of a primordial chamber (not clearly defined in the Carboniferous speci- mens) and a tubular extension, the latter disposed either in more or less closely set parallel lines or growing wildly and irregularly ; always either attached to the surface of some foreign body or forming of itself acervuline masses, the diameter of the tube being about 1/800 in. It has not been an easy matter to assign a place to this minute and very irregular organism. It occurs in confused masses, and it is 2P 2 536 Transactions of the Society. rarely that a specimen can be found showing the primordial cell, the latter haying been generally obscured by the subsequent growth of the tubular portion. Prof. Nicholson and Mr. R. Etheridge, jun., in their monograph of “The Silurian Fossils of the Girvan District,’ have described a minute vermiform object [Girvanella problematica| which appears closely to resemble the above. With the hope that Mr. Etheridge would be able to determine their identity, or otherwise, I sent him some examples of the Carboniferous form. Mr. Etheridge was much struck with their apparent resemblance, but as he only knew the Silurian object from polished sections, his determination could go no further. In assigning this little fossil to Hyperammina vagans, it is need- ful to state that though its zoological characters and general habit correspond with those of the recent species the diameter of the tube is much smaller than that of any living specimen hitherto described. Further, that in some instances the transverse fracture of the tube, and the apparent absence of proper investment on the attached side, suggests an aflinity with the genus Webbina; though in other cases this is not apparent. Distribution.—Only known from the “D” Limestone of the Tipalt in which it is by no means a rare form. Family LITUOLIDZ. Sub-family Lituoline. Genus Puacorsizina, d’Orbigny. Placopsilina cenomana, @’Orbigny. Plate VIII. fig. 4. The “D” Limestone, which has added so much to our knowledge of the Paleozoic Foraminifera, is especially rich in adherent forms. Amongst these there occur some few which exhibit a close resem- blance in texture and habit of growth to the above species. ‘The test is somewhat coarsely arenaceous, imperfect on the side of attachment, generally more or less spiral in manner of growth (though often a very open spiral), and exhibits at irregular intervals constrictions of the testaceous tube, suggestive of septal divisions. The tube varies considerably in size in different individuals, varying from 1/200 in., or less, to 1/75 in. in diameter. The drawing given in Plate VIII. fig. 13 may be taken as an average specimen. Distribution —Only known in connection with the “D” Lime- ae Tipalt, growing adherent to small fragments of shell and other objects. Genus Lirvona, Lamarck. Lituola rotundata, sp. nov. Plate VIII. figs. 5, 6. _ Test free, globular, subglobular, or, more rarely, subcylindrical ; spiral, nautiloid, more or less asymmetrical, consisting of about five or Carboniferous Foraminifera. By Rev. W. Howchin. 587 six chambers, four of which are commonly visible externally ; chambers globose, increasing rapidly in size, the final segment very large, slichtly overlapping and generally equal in size to the rest of the shell, giving a ventricose appearance to the oral extremity. Septal divisions often confused and labyrinthic. External surface rough. Aperture compound or cribriform, very distinct, and situated on the convex surface of final segment. Diameter of globose example 1/50 in. ; subcylindrical, 1/30 in., long diameter. This form is easily distinguished from Lituola Bennieana, Br. by its much smaller size, more rounded form, the fewness of its chambers, their greater inflation, and the position of its compound aperture. The aperture, which generally is very clearly visible, occurs, not on an incurved septal face, but on the convex part of the final segment, suggestive of a rectilinear growth. Fig. 5, whilst a fairly typical example in other respects, exhibits this feature in a less degree than the average number of specimens. The tendency to variation in this species is in the direction of a partial uncoiling of the spire, and some individuals even exhibit intermediate gradations with the crozier- shaped members of the genus. A comparison of the transparent vertical section given of L. Bennieana, Plate VIII. fig. 7, with a similar section given of the present species, Plate VIII. fig. 6, will give a fair idea of the distinctive features of their internal structure. The only form with which L. rotundata is likely to be confounded in the Carboniferous shales, is Valvulina bulloides, Br. I have not had the good fortune to obtain this latter form from the district concerned in the present investigations ; but, judging from Mr. Brady’s excellent drawings, the concave surface of the oral extremity of Valvulina bulloides, as well as the very distinctive apertures, in each case, would be easy guides to their identification. is Distribution.—It is not a very frequent form. It is rare in the Great Limestone of Curry Hill, Allendale; moderately common in the “D” Limestone of the Tipalt, and was recognized in transparent sections of the “ K’’ Limestone, Cowburn. Lituola Bennieana, Brady. Plate VIII fig. 7. In the schemes of classification where the perforate or imperforate character of the test was made a ground of primary division among the Foraminifera, the genus Lituola was placed among the “Imper- forata.” Mr. Brady's reasons for rejecting this principle of classi- fication receive from time to time additional justification. The artificial nature of this method of division has received conspicuous illustration in that, whilst the Lituolide are normally imperforate, the large Carboniferous species, L. Bennieana, is frequently coarsely perforate. This has been demonstrated by several sections made both in horizontal and vertical directions, in which the perforate character of the test is equally manifest. Plate VIII. fig. 7 is one such section, taken vertically, which also shows, in this individual, an aperture at the inner margin of the terminal segment. 538 Transactions of the Society. The chambers are much more numerous than in L. rotundata (nearly double) and less globose. Long diameter 1/28 in. Distribution.—I have notes of the occurrence of this fine species in twelve samples of material, viz. the Felltop Limestone, at Wolf Hills, near Haltwhistle; First Lower Felltop, Thornbrough; Great Lime- stone, of Allendale; Small Limestone, of Nenthead ; “D” Limestone, of Tipalt and Cowburn valleys; and the “J” Limestone, in Tipallt. In the Thornbrough quarry I obtained it from five horizons, and in the majority of these it was a common form. Sub-family Trochamminine. Genus Wespina, d’Orbigny. Webbina hemispherica, Jones, Parker, and Brady. In the rich material of the “D” Limestone there are frequent examples of a monothalamous and adherent Foraminifer which appear to me to belong to this species. The test is convex and imperfect on the side of its attachment. The degree of convexity varies from a somewhat low relief to almost subglobular. The margin is at times slightly spreading, and not unfrequently exhibits a clear space between some parts of the edge of the test and the object to which it is attached. It is a minute form, not exceeding 1/50 in. in diameter. It is an interesting feature to find this rare form, which has hitherto only been known in the living state as dredged off the coast of Durham, and as a fossil by a single specimen from the Suffolk Crag, with so high an antiquity as these Palzozoic examples confer upon the species. Distribution—Only known in the Carboniferous rocks in con- nection with the “D” Limestone, Tipalt. Webbina fimbriata, sp. nov. Plate VIII. figs. 8, 9. Test thin, adherent; in shape, convex or subconical; normally monothalamous, sometimes two or three grouped together and con- nected by minute stoloniferous tubes; margin attenuated, spreading, and deeply notched, giving the test a fringed or stellate appearance. Stellate projections numerous, short, raised, and tubular, sometimes open at their extremities. Diameter of test 1/100 in. This is a very pretty little shell, and makes a conspicuous object by its white colour shown on a dark background. ‘The test is to all appearance finely arenaceous and very thin, and owing to this latter fact most of the examples have the test broken at the apex, as shown in one of the figures. Some of the fractures probably date from a period prior to the fossilization of the specimens. Its habit of growth, in throwing out tubular extensions from a primordial chamber, gives it a likeness to Webbina clavata, and it is more closely isomorphic with Placopsilina vesicularis, Brady ; but it differs from the former species in the number and stellate form which these tubular processes assume, as well as in their very short length, seldom exceeding a length greater than the diameter of the chamber from which they emanate; whilst the finely Carboniferous Foraminifera. By Rev. W. Howchin. 589 arenaceous texture of the test at once distinguishes it from the coarser Placopsiline species. ‘The radiating tubuli undoubtedly formed the general apertures of the test, they sometimes bifurcate, and there is commonly a thin film or weblike extension of the testaceous envelope partly covering the spaces separating the tubuli. Distribution.—It is rather a common form in the “ D” Limestone, where it is found attached to a great variety of objects, but I have not found it at any other horizon in the district. Webbina irregularis VOrbigny. Plate IX. figs. 16, 17. There can be little doubt, I think, that figs. 16 and 17 represent examples of this species. Although differing in some respects from the recent form, they carry clearly marked Trochamminina character- istics. The test is typically, although not constantly, oval in shape ; finely arenaceous in structure, smooth externally, and imperfect on the side of attachment. The segments are arranged in a moniliform order, and sometimes in several parallel and adjoining series of such an order of arrangement. The features of divergence from the modern examples of the species, exhibited by the Carboniferous specimens, are in the direction of a greater thickness of test, the stoloniferous con- nection between the chambers is often imperfectly developed, the division of segments being at times marked by a simple constriction of the test rather than by stoloniferous tubes; whilst in many examples there is an approach to the cylindrical form by the margin of the chambers almost coalescing on their under sides when the object on which they have grown has been a column of small diameter. These divergences may be regarded as features of minor conse- quence where the general agreement to the type is so close. Average size of segments, long diameter 1/75 in.; short diameter 1/125 in. Distribution.—Very rare in Great Limestone of Blagill, Allendale, but common in the “D” Limestone of the Cowburn and Tipalt outcrops. Sub-family Endothyrine. Genus ARCHELAGENA, noy. Syn. Lagena (in part), Brady. Shell parasitic or free; either monothalamous or polythalamous. Chambers inflated ; ovate, subglobular, or irregular in shape. Poly- thalamous examples confused in arrangement. Test thicker than in the typical Lagenidx; finely perforated. Texture either entirely cal- careous or with only a small proportion of included arenaceous particles. Aperture at the termination of a short neck ; in parasitic examples the orifice may be defective on the side of attachment, and is then a semicircular, slightly produced lip. The genus now described may be regarded as bearing a similar relation to Lagena that Nodosinella bears to Nodosaria. In both cases we probably possess ancestral, generalized types, from which have diverged distinct lines of modification leading up to more specialized 540 Transactions of the Society. forms of recent times. The not unfrequent duplication, seen im aberrant examples among recent Lagenx, may, perhaps, be instances of reversion to type, as seen in the polythalamous examples of Carboniferous times, and included in the present genus. Archzlagena Howchiniana, Brady, sp. Plate IX. fig. 18. Mr. Brady’s description of the monothalamous examples of this species is a very accurate one, and needs no adjustment. A more extended acquaintance with this form has, however, shown that it is much more commonly polythalamous than monothalamous in its habit of growth. The chambers usually number from two to twelve, and, in rare cases, even up to nearly twenty, and are irregularly grouped around the axis of growth. ‘lhe method of growth is apparently by budding. ‘lhe chambers differ greatly in relative size, and many show more or less distortion in shape by compression through the concurrent growth of adjoming segments. ‘There may be one or more general orifice to each group of united segments, the latter communi- cating by interseptal apertures. Possessing the morphological and structural characteristics now described, Archxlagena Howchiniana can no longer be consistently regarded as belonging to a genus which is essentially monothalamous. On the other hand, Lagena Parkeriana, and L. Lebouriana, although exhibiting in test structure some points of resemblance to the forms classed under the present species, have never been met with except as single-chambered and free examples, and may therefore be left, at least for the present, in the position assigned them by Mr. Brady. Distribution—Not very common; recorded in connection with twelve washings from the following:—First Lower Felltop, at Penpeugh ; at various localities and horizons of Great Limestone; and from the “D” Limestone of Tipalt and Cowburn, the last-named limestone being the best bed for the form. Genus Enporuyra, Phillips. Endothyra conspicua, sp. nov. Plate IX. fig. 12. Test nearly circular in lateral outline, compressed, slightly asymmetrical bi-laterally, composed of about three convolutions, all of which are more or less visible exteriorly. Segments inflated, sub- globular, from ten to twelve in the outer whorl. Diameter of large specimens 1/20 to 1/16 in. This is an interesting variety in which the usually embracing character of the genus is but feebly developed. It has probably its closest relationship with EH. Bowmanz, some examples of which exhibit a considerable umbilical depression not embraced in the fold of the outer convolution. It is, however, easily distinguished from the latter species, by its more circular outline, its more numerous and globular- shaped segments, and, more particularly, in the exposure of the inner whorls which are often visible throughout their entire convolutions. In Carboniferous Foraminifera. By Rev. W. Howchin. 541 E. ammonoides there is the same exposure of the inner whorls by the only slightly embracing character of the test, but its minute size and the number of its convolutions and septal divisions at once distinguish it from the present species. This departure from the normal character of the genus, shown by EL. conspicua, is not likely to have arisen from starved conditions as some of the individuals attain a larger size, exceeding those of H. Bowmand, whilst the beds in which they occur are somewhat rich in Foraminifera. Distribution.—Rare in the “J ” Limestone of the Tipalt, and in a limestone, low in the series, situated in a burn between The Banks and Lannercost, occurring at three horizons in the limestone, in one of which it is moderately common. Endothyra circumplicata, sp. nov. Plate VIII. figs. 10, 11. Test free, subglobular, irregularly spiral, embracing ; composed of three or more convolutions, which, instead of following the same plane of growth throughout, become twisted, so that the later convolutions are formed more or less at right angles to the plane of the earlier segments. Segments numerous, and in their later growths enlarging rapidly and becoming ventricose. Later chambers subdivided near their umbilical margins by transverse septa. Septal divisions marked externally either by depressed lines or slight limbation. Test plicate. Exterior surface smooth; white or reddish-white. Texture finely arenaceous, and in some cases (?) perforate. The final segment has a protruding lip forming its convex or outer margin, with a correspond- ing lip or ridge transverse to the peripheral margin and parallel to the inner margin of the septal plane. Aperture distinct, oval. Diameter 1/25 in. This striking variety exhibits an extreme of inequilateral growth. In its large size and globose form it somewhat resembles Endothyra crassa. ‘The latter includes the “nearly symmetrical,” large, globose Endothyrz of the Carboniferous rocks, whilst H. circwmplicata is extremely unsymmetrical, and from this cause exhibits considerable divergence in internal structure from its more equilateral congeners. The umbilical axis is not unfrequently shifted in position by the inequilateral plan of growth to the peripheral margin. Transparent sections show in many instances a remarkable confusion in the arrangement of the earlier chambers with successive foldings, amount- ing in some cases to two, three, or four plications of the shell substance ; and in the expanded chambers of the final whorl, transverse septa, giving rise to small chamberlets, near the umbilical margins of the terminal segments. The last segment is sometimes much contracted by vertical compression towards the aperture, taking the form of a slit which, with its pouting margins and great obliquity of the septal plane, gives the shell a very grotesque appearance. ‘he shelly investment, consequent upon the laminated construction of the test, is very stout in comparison with the other Endothyre, especially in its earlier convolutions, and has a clear, smooth, and sometimes 542 Transactions of the Society. lossy surface. The test, whilst finely arenaceous, exhibits great uniformity of structure, and when viewed in section by transmitted light exhibits a peculiar white opacity of texture not commonly seen in members of this genus. Distribution. — It is a form apparently much limited in dis- tribution. Recorded in four samples, three of these belonging to the “‘T)” limestone of the Cowburn and Tipalt districts, and the other in “ K” limestone, near West Stone Folds, Cowburn. In the “D” limestone it is common. Endothyra radiata, var. Tateana, nov. Plate IX. figs. 13-15. Test free, nautiloid, nearly circular in peripheral outline, com- pressed laterally, embracing, umbilicus sunken, slightly inequi- lateral, peripheral margin thin or subcarinate ; convolutions numerous, five to six in fully grown examples; chambers very narrow and numerous, from 25 to 40 in last convolution; septal walls double ; sutural lines slightly excavated ; septation sometimes indistinct and often showing considerable irregularity in arrangement on exterior surface. ‘I'exture finely arenaceous with large proportion of calcareous cement. Diameter of fully grown specimen 1/25 in. A fine variety of Endothyra, ditfermg in some minor particulars from HE. radiata. ‘The shell attains about twice the diameter of typical specimens of the latter species ; it is more symmetrical and compressed, and the segments are more numerous and less regular, often showing crenulations, meeting at various angles on the surface of the test. The duplication of the septal walls is also an important feature, and one that has not been observed in connection with any other members of the genus. It is well seen, not only in transparent sections of this form (Plate IX. fig. 15), but in those examples which have been subjected to a degree of weathering, as shown in fiz. 14 of the same plate. The double septation gives a higher character to the genus than was at first imdicated, and is another feature confirmatory of Mr. Brady’s opinion, expressed when working out this interesting paleozoic type, of the close analogy which the genus bears to the more recent and distinctly calcareous Rotaline series, with which Endothyra in its various modifications is closely isomor- hie. 4 I have great pleasure in associating this variety with the name of the late Mr. George Tate, I'.G.S., of Alnwick, who was one of the earliest and most enthusiastic students of the palzeontology of North- umberland. Distribution.—Endothyra radiata, var. Tateana is not uncommon in the lower Carboniferous beds of south-west Northumberland. It was noted in the upper beds of the Great Limestone at Blagill, Alston ; but all of the twenty-four localities in which it has been observed, with the exception just noted, are at horizons included between the «B” and “N” limestones of the Cowburn and Tipalt valleys. Carboniferous Foraminifera. By Rev. W. Howchin. 543 Genus Stacuera, Brady. Stacheia moriformis, sp. nov. Plate IX. figs. 19, 20. Test parasitic (or free?); globular, subglobular, or, more rarely, elongate or complanate in shape. Chambers larger than those of allied species, more or less rounded in outline, and often showing a roughly concentric or spiral arrangement of segments around the axis of growth. Chambers of the superficial layer inflated and tumid, raised in hemispherical bosses upon the surface of the test; walls very thin, often abraded on their convex surfaces so as to expose the darker material fillmg the interior of the chambers. Diameter of globose examples, from 1/30 in. to 1/25 in. This species is pretty constant in character, and cannot well be confounded with any other of the Carboniferous Foraminifera. Its globular form and conspicuously inflated chambers are ready means of identification, It is often impossible in the other members of this genus to mark any superficial indications of the septal divisions, and when distinguished they are made apparent only by a faint areolation or mottled appearance of the exterior surface: but in Stacheca mort- formis the superficial chambers are not unfrequently elevated to the extent of half their diameter. The test is not nearly so compact asin the allied species, and the chambers are relatively larger, whilst the shelly investment is remarkably thin. In this respect, and from a greater or less tendency to a spiral arrangement in building up the test, there is some morphological analogy to the acervuline modifications of Planorbulina, especially when 8. moriformis has grown parasitically on a flat surface ; but the subarenaceous and im- perforate characters of the test show its affinity to be with the Endothyrinz rather than the recent perforate and hyaline forms. Distribution.—Stacheia moriformis is not very common in point of number of specimens, but is widely distributed through the Carboniferous Limestones of the North of England. It occurs in fifty- two washings gathered from the following horizons :—First Lower Felltop, Second Lower Felltop, Great Limestone, Four-fathom Lime- stone, and the “ D,” “ BE,” “G,” “J,” “N,” and “O” Limestones. Family LAGENID i. Sub-Family Nodosarine. Genus Noposar1a, Lamarck. Nodosaria (Dentalina) farcimen, Soldani. Plate IX. fig. 21, a, b. Amongst the many interesting forms which the “D” limestone has revealed must be included the above species. Its lowest strati- graphical record hitherto known has been the Upper Permian, where it is found associated with several other cognate forms. No unquestionable Nodosarian had been found in rocks older than the Permian. It is, therefore, of some interest to secure examples of this common recent species so far back as the Carboniferous Limestone. In 544 Transactions of the Society. the Permian seas it was scarce, and apparently was still more rare in Carboniferous times, when the arenaceous types were in the ascendant. Only one undoubted example of this species was obtained from the material searched, but with the exception of exhibiting a mineraliza- tion corresponding to the much older formation from which it was obtained, it does not materially differ from the examples of later age. It is a minute shell with a clear calcareous appearance. ‘Test slightly compressed laterally. The chambers, which are elliptical in shape, number six, in a curved linear series, and increase somewhat rapidly in size in the direction of growth. Septal lines marked by oblique and rather deep constrictions. Primordial end apiculate. Length 1/28 in. Distribution.—Only known from the “D” Limestone, Tipalt; rare. Family ROTALID/. Sub-family Rotaline. Genus Patenuina, Williamson. Patellina Bradyana, sp. nov. Plate IX. figs, 22-25, Test free; conical; trochoid; primordial end obtusely pointed ; transverse section circular; length equal to two or three times the diameter of the test; inferior side slightly concave; external surface limbate, exhibiting numerous annular, semi-annular, or spiral whorls of raised shell-substance alternating with lines of depression ; depressed areas bridged by minute crenulations of the test, which, as raised transverse lines, connect the limbate septal ridges. Internal structure a simple, undivided and continuous spiral chamber (or alternating semi-annular chambers?). Chamber cavity compressed. Umbilical region extending almost the entire length of the shell and of nearly equal diameter throughout, filled with uniform shell-substance. Con- volutions of spire varying from five to twelve; average number ten. Aperture a narrow slit, extending from the periphery to the umbilical margin. Umbilicus depressed ; or, frequently, marked by a raised lip extending from the umbilical termination of the orifice, forming a low, semicircular wall defining the central portions of the test. Length about 1/88 in.; diameter, at base, 1/100 in. This is, perhaps, the most interesting find in the present group of new forms. The oldest record of Patellina has not, hitherto, extended beyond the Cretaceous formations, in which, as well as in rocks of early Tertiary age, the genus was represented by shells of relatively large size and complicated structure. ‘The common recent species, P. corrugata, exhibits to some extent the subdivision of chambers by secondary septa, so remarkably developed in some of the earlier forms. The - Carboniferous examples are of a simpler type, and do not possess any subdivision of the chamber cavities. Mr. H. B. Brady, in the “Challenger Foraminifera,” describes a new recent species, Patellina campaneformis, which shows the same simple and undivided chamber Carboniferous Foraminifera. By Rev. W. Howchin. 545 (or chambers) as in P. Bradyana, and it seems probable that the palzozoic form has its nearest relationship with this interesting but extremely rare species of the present day. ‘The recent species combines the twofold plan of growth, of semi-annular, crescentic seg- ments in the early whorls, with a true spiral form of chamber in the later whorls. From a careful examination of several transparent sections of the test of P. Bradyana I cannot satisfy myself that it conforms to the normal type, with respect to an alternating series of semi-annular segments, but appears to exhibit the generic characters under the simplest possible form, that of a non-segmented spiral chamber with the spire drawn out from the primordial plane ‘to that of an elongated cone. Its spiral growth gives it a likeness to P. Cooke, although wanting the subdivision of chambers seen in that species. The bridging of the lines of depression by shelly matter, between the raised sutures on the external surface, may have been the foreshadow- ing of that modification of the type which, in later ages, became more definite in the subdivision of the chamber cavities. The chief varia- tions to which the Carboniferous form is subject are in the height of the spire, the occasional irregularities of the limbate outlines of the chamber walls—the latter, at times, being subject to interruption or coalescence—or an abnormal constriction or inflation of the test at some stage of its growth, producing more or less distortion of outline. . The umbilical region is filled with calcareous shell-substance which in section has a mottled appearance, but is unsegmented. The only species with which Patellina Bradyana is likely to be confounded in Carboniferous material are Valvulina palzotrochus or V. Youngi, but P. Bradyana has ashorter transverse diameter in comparison with its length than either of these forms, its numerous limbate sutures are also distinctive, whilst the respective apertures and internal structures are widely different. As the most striking addition to our knowledge of Carboniferous Foraminifera, I have much gratification in associating with the species the name of Mr. H. B. Brady, to whose researches we are indebted for the first systematic treatment of this group of paleeozoic fossils, Distribution.—Only known from the “D” Limestone of the Tipalt and Cowburn outcrops. With this species I may fitly conclude my notes. In the present series details have been given of four genera and of thirteen species and varieties not previously known as Carboniferous fossils, some of them of peculiar interest. As has already been stated I have still a number of specimens which appear to me to belong to the Foramini- fera, and if so to types hitherto undescribed, but these I withhold for the moment in the hope of obtaining further evidence respecting them. ADELAIDE, SOUTH AUSTRALIA, August 1887. 546 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO ZOOLOGY AND BOTAN (principally Invertebrata and Cryptogamia), MICROSCOPY, &c., INCLUDING ORIGINAL COMMUNICATIONS FROM FELLOWS AND OTHERS.* ZOOLOGY. A. VERTEBRATA :—Embryology, Histology, and General. a. Embryology.t Kinetic Phenomena of the Egg during Maturation and Fecunda- tion.t—Dr. C. O. Whitman finds that the odkinetic phenomena are diversiform in the extreme, rarely present regular form-series, and so stand in marked contrast with nuclear metamorphoses, which, every- where, both in plant and animal cells, exhibit a most remarkable uniformity. With regard to the movements of the germinal vesicle and pronuclei, the author, from the unique character of many of these cytokinetic displays, refuses to consider them as the direct effect of nuclear influence. Any hypothesis that refuses to admit that the cyto- plasm is endowed with subtle powers of its own, is unable to account for the characteristic difference between telolecithal and centrolecithal eggs. The remarkable phenomena observed in developing eggs must be due to the interaction of nuclear and cytoplasmic forces. There is little evidence, in the explanation which is usually given, to support the view that the pronuclear asters attract each other. When, however, a careful analysis is made, we find three facts which can be said to furnish indisputable evidence of attraction between the pronuclei. These are— (1) The curved path of the male pronucleus in the amphibian egg; (2) The meeting of the pronuclei before reaching the centre of equili- brium ; and (3) The centrifugal movement of the earlier pronucleus to meet the more lately formed pronucleus. The author amplifies these oints. : In discussing the receptivity of the ovum for spermatozoa, the dis- tinction between receptivity and accessibility is very generally ignored. Dr. Whitman believes that the period of receptivity may be said to date from the moment the conditions of centripetal attraction are reversed in the germinal vesicle. A period of non-saturation begins with the centri- * The Society are not intended to be denoted by the editorial “ we,” and they do not hold themselves responsible for the views of the authors of the papers noted, nor for any claim to novelty or otherwise made by them. The object of this part of the Journal is to present a summary of the papers as actually published, and to describe and illustrate Instruments, Apparatus, &c., which are either new or have not been previously described in this country. + This section includes not only papers relating to Embryology properly so called, but also those dealing with Evolution, Development, and Reproduction, and allied subjects. ¢ Journ. of Morphol., i. (1887) pp. 227-52. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 547 fugal movement of the germinal vesicle, and terminates with the penetra- tion of the spermatic body. As soon as all the elements of saturation are present, external manifestations of centripetal attraction cease, and there remains only the work of internal equilibration, which ends with the centripetal march of the pronuclei. From this point of view it is idle to talk about mechanical con- trivances for preventing the admission of supernumerary spermatozoa, as if the receptivity of the ovum were not self-regulating. The idea that the spermatozoon remains passive until after the extrusion of the polar globules seems to be quite erroneous. In the copulation of the sexual cells, the most interesting point is that attraction between the ooplasm and the spermatozoon can manifest itself at a distance. This fact is, however, not quite unique, for some- thing analogous is seen in the attraction between the pronuclei. There are, it seems, two distinct kinds of attraction; there is that of one nuclear body upon another, which may be called nuclear attraction, and the action of nuclear bodies on the ooplasm which manifests itself in astral lines, and which may be called centripetal attraction. The at- traction of the egg for the spermatozoon is probably polar, and the place of penetration a predetermined point or region. On this point, however, the evidence is very conflicting ; the most important memoir on this point is that of Kupffer and Benecke on the fertilization of the egg of the lamprey. The important points in this and in other essays are indicated by Dr. Whitman. Human Ovum.*—Dr. W. Nagel gives a full account of his observa- tions on that rare subject of satisfactory investigation—the human ovum. The principal results have been already noticed.t The first part of the lengthy paper is taken up with historical reference to previous observations, of which a full bibliography is appended. After describing his material and mode of investigation, the author discusses and figures the primordial ovum and primary follicle, the subsequent growth of both of these, and the conditions observable in maturity. In the latter, he describes (1) the epithelium of the ovum; (2) the zona pellucida; (3) a perivitelline space; (4) a narrow, clear cortical zone of the vitellus ; (5) a broader, finely granular, protoplasmic zone ; (6) a central deutoplasmic zone; (7) the germinal vesicle and spot. The ovary of a newly born child and that of an ape (Macacus) are described, and many relevant questions are incidentally discussed. Spermatogenesis of Mammals.{—Prof. V. v. Ebner communicates an important memoir on the spermatogenesis of mammals, in which he resumes the investigation which he busied himself with seventeen years ago. He discusses in the first two chapters the nomenclature employed by investigators, the material and method of investigation, and the actual state of the question. In a third chapter he investigates the relation of the basal nuclei of the spermatoblasts to the cells of Sertoli and the spermatogonia of vy. La Valette St. George. Fourthly he shows in what cells within the testicular canals division is really to be observed. Then he discusses the granular excretions of the spermatoblasts, the absorption of the fat by Sertoli’s cells, and the general physiology of the spermato- blasts. The last chapter is occupied with a description of the topo- * Arch. f. Mikr. Anat., xxxi. (1888) pp. 342-423 (2 pls.). + See this Journal, 1887, p. 932. t Tom. cit., pp. 236-92 (3 pls.). 548 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO graphical distribution of the various developmental stages, and with a discussion of the conclusions to be drawn from these. The true spermatogonia are the cells of the peripheral layer. They multiply in that position by indirect division. The spermatogonia grow into spermatocytes (= Henle’s cells) each of which, after double division, produces four spermatides (= sperm-cells). Then a large number of spermatides, originating from several spermatogonia, come into associa- tion with a follicular cell (= Sertoli’s cell), and form a spermatogemma (= spermatoblast). In this finally the spermatosomata (= spermatozoa) develope from the spermatides. By this von Ebner declares his deter- mination to abide, unless some firmly established counter observations are forthcoming. Embryology of Lizard.*—Dr. H. Orr has worked chiefly at the development of Anolis sagrzi, but has also examined some stages of Spherodactylus notatus and Liocephalus carinatus. The notochord arises by a differentiation of the linear median area of the dorsal wall of the primitive intestine ; and this condition seems to be primitive, for the notochord continues as far as the anterior extremity of the intestine. The mode of development of the notochord and hypophysis seems to point to some peculiar relation between the two organs; with these the muscular elements of the head are intimately related. At an early stage there is seen to be a median connection of the head-cavities and notochord, which the author proposes to call the cceelenteric zone. The first appearance of the tip of the notochord, the celenteric zone and head-cavities, is in the form of a small mass of cells, apparently budded from the hypoblast. This mass is fused with the epiblast. In some individuals the notochord and ccelenteric zone separate from the epiblast at the same time, though retaining connection with each other. In other individuals the ccelenteric zone separates from the epiblast much earlier than does the notochord, and disappears ; while the notochord remains a long time connected with the epiblast or hypophysis. ‘I'he oral fusion of epiblast and hypoblast is effected very early. The gill-cleft rudiments first appear as paired pouch-like protrusions from the dorso-lateral parts of the alimentary canal; the first and second are the first and second clefts, and are the first to acquire an external open- ing; then, in order, the third and fourth, but the fifth rudiment does not seem to get an external opening. The part of the alimentary canal from which the gill-clefts open is, comparatively, extremely large. On the ventral surface of the large gill-chamber the first rudiment of the thyroid gland appears. In horizontal section it has a circular outline; it is a compact thickening of the wall of the gill-chamber, and its cells are arranged radially. The caudal intestine appears to continue to grow in the neurenteric region, even after its anterior part behind the anus has atrophied; this atrophy obtains from before backwards, and for a time the proximal end seems to atrophy about as fast as the distal end grows. The segmentation of the mesoblast into somites is effected from before backwards, and the first somite appears at just the distance behind the ear that would equal the space occupied by one somite. With regard to the mode of origin of the segmental duct, about which much has been recently written, Dr. Orr states that near the region of the neurenteric canal, opposite that part of the unsegmented mesoblast which has not * Journ. of Morphology, i, (1887) pp. 311-63 (5 pls.). ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 549 yet divided into a dorsal and a ventral part, there appears a small linear thickening of the epiblast. This thickening is the same on either side, and lies horizontally and a little above the level in which the intermediate cell-mass is to appear. Posteriorly this epiblastic thickening fades away, but in the direction of the head it becomes more marked, and appears in cross-section as a distinct semicircular clump of five to eight cells adhering to the epiblast. A little further forward it becomes gradually separated from the epiblast, and lies as a solid cord about midway between the epiblast and the rudiment of the Wolffian body. Still further forward the cord of cells acquires a lumen, and lies in contact with the Wolffian body, so that it is now easily recognizable as the segmental duct. The development of the circulatory system agrees generally with the account given by Shipley of the same system in Petro- myzon. This portion of the paper concludes with an account of the development of the brain. In the second part the bearing of the facts of the development of the Lizard on certain speculations regarding the phylogeny of the Vertebrata is pointed out. Gastrula of Amphibians.*-—Dr. Schwinck discusses the nature of the gastrula in amphibian development. Bufo vulgaris, Rana temporaria, and Triton alpestris were investigated. The clearest results were obtained from the study of Bufo; frog ova are more difficult. The general con- clusion established is that the whole of the endoderm, including the dorsal portion, arises from a differentiation of yolk-cells. The gastrula of Amphibians occupies a midway position between that of Selachia and that of Amphioxus. In all, the dorsal blastopore wall is the more active, and it is there that the formation of endoderm first begins. ‘“ At the close of gastrulation, an archigastrula might be hypothetically formed from the amphigastrula by supposing the yolk-cells to be replaced by a single layer of endoderm.” Development of Petromyzon fluviatilis.j;—Prof. A. Goette has a preliminary notice of his observations on the development of Petromyzon fluviatilis. Gastrulation is effected as in the Amphibia; the archenteron commences with the prostoma, which lies beneath the germinal cavity ; its dorsal wall becomes differentiated into ecto- and endoderm, and this differentiation is continued on to the lateral parts of the thick lower half. The mesoderm does not appear till gastrulation is complete, when it is developed in the dorsal endoderm. ‘This is at first multilaminate, and the lower layer gives rise to mesodermal plates. Segmentation of the mesoderm commences in the anterior portion of the region of the trunk, and is thence continued backwards and forwards. The notochord is developed in the way described by Calberla; its hinder end has at first no definite termination, but is lost in the cell- mass at the dorsal margin of the prostoma, where the ectoderm passes into the endoderm. There is no neurenteric canal in the embryos or larvee of Petromyzon; the prostoma becomes the anus, and the primitive lumen of the mid-gut is replaced by a second which arises more deeply, while the primitive lumina of the fore- and hind-gut are retained. The spinal nerves do not arise in the way described by Sagemelhl ; the several rudiments of the spinal nerves become, secondarily, dorso- * Biol. Centralbl., viii. (1888) pp. 29-31. + Zool. Anzeig., xi. (1888) pp. 160-3. 1888. 2 Q 550 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO lateral appendages of the medullary tube, but they are not outgrowths of it, but purely epidermal structures. The first rudiments give rise to the dorsal roots and their ganglia, while the ventral roots do not arise till later ; they are not, either, independent outgrowths of the medullary tube, but connections between it and the adjacent ganglia, which gra- dually become drawn out into cords. The rami dorsales grow out from the upper end of the ganglia, and the separation, therefore, into sensory and motor fibres does not correspond with the development of the dorsal and ventral roots. In addition to the spinal nerves, and independently of their rudiments, the lateral nerve appears as an epidermal ganglionie mass which, later on, becomes connected with the root of the vagus, and grows out horizontally backwards; there are also five ganglionic bodies within the mesoderm or above the gill-pouches, which only secondarily enter into connection with one another, and with the vagus; they give off branchial branches. The whole peripheral nervous system does not therefore arise as one, nor even from one and the same germinal layer. The histogenesis of the nervous system of Petromyzon is essentially similar to that of the Amphibia; the nerve-fibres and nerve-cells appear separately, and only become connected secondarily. The formation of mesodermal segments is continued as far as the most anterior end of the head; as in the Amphibia, the head consists of four mesodermal segments; they give rise to the trigeminal, facial- auditory, glossopharyngeal, and vagus nerves; the hypoglossus is re- garded as the first spinal nerve of the trunk. The eight gill-sacs are homologues of the inner gill-sac of the anurous Amphibia ; the “ enteric gills” of the lamprey are therefore essentially distinct from the ordinary “ dermal gills” of Fishes and Amphibians. The heart is developed behind the branchial region below the cesophagus, so that the pericardial cavity communicates superiorly with the ccelom; the endocardium is formed by the endoderm, and the blood is formed in the ventral endoderm behind the rudiment of the liver. In correspondence with the position of the heart the pronephros lies exactly above the pericardiae cavity. Egg-shell of Lepadogaster.* —M. F. Guitel has investigated the mode of attachment of the eggs of Lepadogaster. With moderate mag- nification a small clear circle surrounded by a dark zone may be seen at the centre of the base of the shell of LE. bimaculatus. Towards the centre a number of small rods may be seen to converge. They are cylindrical and bifurcated, and are longest at the edge, where they project around the base of the egg. At the moment when the egg is laid, the two terminal filaments of each small eylinder are soft, and they easily fix themselves to the least asperities of the surface to which they are applied ; they then harden, and the egg is thus firmly attached to the substratum on which the mother has deposited it. The author finds that this fixation apparatus is secreted by the follicle of the egg, the follicle itself being derived from the germinal epithelium. Moreover, the secretion is on the hemisphere of fixation, and this is always the one which is directed outwards. In a perfectly ripe ovary all the eggs have the hemi-ellipsoidal form of the deposited egg, and they are all attached to the wall of the gland by the surface which, after oviposition, will be fixed by means of the fixing-apparatus. * Comptes Rendus, cy. (1887) pp. 876-8. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 551 Albuminoid Constituents of White of Egg.*—MM. G. Corin and E. Berard have investigated the albuminoid constituents of the white of egg. They find that of those which are coagulable by heat two belong to the class of globulins and three to that of true albumins; the quan- tity of peptones increases with the age of the egg. There is a colouring matter which is not coagulated by heat, but is taken up by every coagulation which occurs in it. The albumins strictly so-called have, when made opalescent by an increase of temperature, a property which has hitherto been supposed to be peculiar to globulins; that, namely, of being precipitated by sulphate of magnesia. It is possible that albumin, just before coagulation, passes through a stage in which it has the composition and properties of globulins. Embryochemical Investigations.{|—Prof. L. Liebermann has inves- tigated some of the less well known constituents of the egg of the fowl. He finds that the germinal disc chiefly consists of albuminoid bodies, belonging apparently to the globulin group; there seem to be also smaller quantities of lecithin or some similar substance. Few fatty acids were found in the yolk. The fat of the egg consists of a mixture of a solid and a fluid fat with some cholesterin. The firm fat consists chiefly of tripalmitin with, probably, a very little stearine; the fluid or true oil of the egg is a glyceride. Both are much poorer in carbon than other animal fats. The fat of fresh unhatched egg does not contain any considerable quantity of free fatty acids, which are, however, developed to a considerable extent during hatching. Fowls’ eggs do not contain any appreciable quantity of organic phosphates,—there is, however, a relatively large quantity of calcium which probably exists in the form of calcic albuminate; there is no direct evidence of the presence of sulphates; the quantity of chlorine is variable, but it is not certain on what the variability depends. There may be other inorganic consti- tuents, but, if so, their amount must be very small. The albumen of the egg is capable of forming, in the presence of strong acids, phosphates with the phosphoric acid, while, in the presence of dilute acids, soluble organic phosphates are formed. In the second portion of the essay the metastasis of the egg while being hatched is dealt with. The embryo itself always becomes richer in mineral matters, fat, and albumen, but the dry substance of the whole contents of the egg, taken as a whole, diminishes considerably; the con- siderable increase in the fat of the chick is not due to the formation of fresh fat, but is chiefly dependent on the fact that what remains of the nutrient yolk is taken up into the abdominal cavity of the chick. The constituents of the egg are used up regularly during the period of hatching; the quantity of mineral matter remains almost unaltered. Notwithstanding the taking up of oxygen, there is a loss in the amount of that gas. The loss in weight suffered by the egg is obscured by the evaporation of water; the undeveloped egg loses more water than the developed, and on the last day of hatching the ripe chick in the egg contains more water than an equal quantity of untertilized egg-matter. The embryo uses up oxygen, of which a part only becomes carbonic acid ; this indicates the formation of a fresh quantity of water. The special chemistry of the embryonic body is next dealt with. In * Bull. Acad. R. Sci. Belg., lvii. (1888) pp. 643-62. { Arch. f. d. Gesammt. Physiol. (Pfliiger) xliii. (1888) pp. 71-151. Ze, 2 Q 552 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO it, just as much as in freely living animals, the firm substance increases considerably at the expense of the watery; the inorganic constituents take but a very small share in this increase. At the beginning of deve- lopment there are formed tissues which are very rich in water, and this richness of water steadily diminishes as development goes on. |The substances soluble in water are so disposed that their absolute quantity increases with increasing development, while their relative quantity (as compared with the other constituents) diminishes. It is just the reverse with the constituents which are soluble in alcohol. The fatty matters undergo considerable increase. The quantity of albumens and albu- minoids which are insoluble in water absolutely increases as develop- ment goes on, but relatively the quantity remains almost unchanged. Among other points dealt with by the author are the presence of mucin, the quantity of hemoglobin, and the composition of the embryonic feathers and of bone as compared with those of older forms. B. Histology.* Cell-Studies.jt—Herr T. Boveri believes that the course of karyo- kinetic division may be generally described in the following terms :— The chromatic nuclear material becomes collected together into a definite number of isolated pieces of a form characteristic of the kind of cell—the chromatic elements; an achromatic filamentar figure is formed into two poles, either from the substance of the nucleus or from that of the cell. The chromatic elements, so far as their number, form, and size allow it, are deposited in the equatorial plane of the achromatic figure; the chromatic elements divide into two halves, one of which makes its way towards either pole; the daughter elements break up in the framework of the new nuclei. In the ova of Ascaris lumbricoides the germinal vesicle has, in the earliest stage, the typical structure of the resting nucleus, and we are justified in supposing that the chromatic elements arise from the frame- work in exactly the same way as in other cases, though the details cannot be certainly made out in consequence of the small size of the object. The arrangement of the elements in an equatorial plate, their transverse division, and the formation of daughter-plates are effected in just the same way as they are now known to be in other cases, and especially in the ova of Arthropods. The only point of difference is the relation of the daughter-elements which remain in the egg after the expulsion of the first polar globule, for these remain isolated, and so are the direct mother-elements of the next spindle. In the germinal vesicle of the ovum of Ascaris megalocephala (Carnoy’s type) two independent portions of chromatin are found in the earliest known stage; though nothing is certainly known of their mode of formation, it may be assumed that they are derived from a typical nuclear framework. This conversion, however, of the reticulum into the chromatic elements, which in other cells and in some ova (A. lumbri- coides) directly precedes division, appears in most eggs to take a long time. The important difference in the eggs of the type of Van Beneden is that there is but one chromatic element; this seems to be unique. There are many reasons for supposing that the division of the chro- * This section is limited to papers relating to Cells and Fibres. + Jenaisch. Zeitschr. f. Naturwiss., xxi. (1887) pp. 423-515 (4 pls.). ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETO. 553 matic elements sometimes happens at a time when there is no indication of the achromatic figures of division. The most striking of these cases has been lately described by Flemming. Similar phenomena have been observed by the author in the eggs of Ascaris. In the germinal vesicle of A. lumbricoides the twenty-four rods exhibit the most distinct transverse division, long before the germinal vesicle begins to be converted into the spindle. ‘ After considering several cases in different forms the author expresses his belief that they form parts of a series in the degeneration of the process of nuclear and cellular division. In the case of Corydalis cava, described by Strasburger, the process is least rudimentary; two typical daughter nuclei arise, but these again fuse into a single nucleus; in Thysanozoon and A. megalocephala daughter stars or plates are formed, but at once pass into a single resting nucleus. In the cells of Flemming and Carnoy there is a division of the chromatic elements, but no arrangement in two groups. Herr Boveri suggests that in the parthenogenetic eggs described by Weismann as having only one directive corpuscle we have to do with the same process as in the eggs of Ascarids; there are two divisions, but the second is limited to division of the chromatic elements. If this be so, the parthenogenetic development is not to be regarded as dependent on the suppression of the development of the second directive corpuscle, but by its retention in the egg, and the fusion of its nucleus with the ovarian nucleus. The second directive corpuscle may then be regarded as playing the part of the spermatozoon, and it may be said that parthenogenesis is due to fertilization by the second directive cor- uscle. In the achromatic nuclear figure the mode of origin of the spindle, and the complete want of polar rays are of significance. The often dis- cussed question whether the nuclear spindle is derived from the substance of the nucleus or of the cell may, in the case of Carnoy’s type of A. megalocephala, be certainly decided in favour of the former. A number of points in Carnoy’s account of the phenomena of matura- tion of the ova of Nematodes are discussed, and corrections offered. Flemming on the Cell.*—Prof. N. Flemming has been investigating the cellular division in the spermatocytes of Salamandra maculosa. He finds that these cells exhibit a remarkable dimorphism of mitosis; in the heterotypical form the chromatic formations exhibit metakinesis. The two forms, the other of which may be called homeotypical, are sometimes found together, but, as a rule, the heterotypical form is found in the first multiplication of the testicular epithelium after fecundation (April or May). In both types the chromatic filaments undergo a longitudinal division. All the differences, it should be remarked, pre- sented by mitosis, whether in spermatocytes or other kinds of cells, are simple peculiarities of form and aspect, and are in no way fundamental. In the heterotypical form the extremities of one pair of divided filaments unite in the same way as in the egg of Ascaris megalocephala; the united parts are, later on, placed at the equator, and when they become definitely separated, one might believe that the separation of the loops was effected transversely, whereas it is due to longitudinal division. * Abstract in Arch. Zool. Expér. et Gén., v. (1887) pp. xxxiii.-y. Original source not cited. 554 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO Finally, a second longitudinal division of the filaments takes place in the daughter-cells during the Diaster-phase. In the homeeotypical form the divided filaments, after separating from one another, during metakinesis, remain for a long time in the region of the equator. The appearance of the figures might lead to the erroncous opinion that there had been no longitudinal fission of the filaments. The number of primary segments is, in both types, only half of that which it is in the mitosis of other kinds of cells of Salamandra (twelve instead of twenty-four). All the differences are reduced to one chief fact—the prolongation of the process united to a special form of metakinesis, that is to say from that phase in which the unfolded segments separate from one another to form the two groups of daughter figures. These special forms are found, with very similar characters, in the egg of Ascaris (according to Van Beneden), and probably (according to Carnoy) in the spermatocytes of Arthropoda. As yet they have only been found in sexual cells. These observations throw light on the remark of Carnoy that the characteristic phenomena of karyokinesis are variable and that no case appears to be essential. It is possible that in the small spermatocytes of Arthropods the first longitudinal division of the filaments escaped Carnoy’s notice, and so led him to a generalization which Flemming shows to be inexact. Cell-division.*—Dr. T. Schottliinder reports the results of his re- searches on nuclear and cell-division in the endothelium of the inflamed cornea. His principal conclusions are as follows :— (1) In some cases irritation of the frog cornea by chloride of zine simply causes rapid decomposition of the endothelium. This happens with prolonged irritation, or with weak animals. (2) With moderate irritation and strong animals certain changes are seen from the second day onwards, which seem to be progressive, and doubtfully suggest amoeboid movements of the cells, or direct segmentation, or direct frag- mentation. (3) From the seventh day the mitotic changes of regenera- tion begin, and continue till the fifteenth day. (4) The mitoses are for the most part typical. The anaphases are remarkable for the splitting of the achromatic connecting threads, which appears to mark the completion of division, and recalls the cell-plate formation in plants. (5) Various abnormal cellular figures occur, especially characterized by varied disposition of the chromatic loops. (6) Multiple nuclear division rarely but really occurs, both in regular fashion and with certain irregularities of procedure. (7) Among the deviations from the typical mitosis must be noted certain figures which may possibly represent indirect fragmentation. Karyokinesis and Heredity.t—Prof. W. Waldeyer has lately pub- lished a series of papers on the phenomena of karyokinesis and their relation to the problems of heredity. He confines himself for the most part to a summary of past researches, in which the results and divergences of Hertwig, van Beneden, Nussbaum, Carnoy, Weismann, * Arch. f. Mikr. Anat., xxxi. (1888) pp. 426-82 (1 pl.). + ‘Ueber die Karyokinese und ihre Bedeutung fiir die Vererbung,’ Leipzig, 1887. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETO. 500 and Zacharias are stated and criticized. Naturally much space is devoted to a discussion of the much disputed question of the behaviour ef the pronuclei. Cellular Statics.*—Prof. L. Errera has investigated the statics of ceell-form, comparing them with soap-bubbles. It is interesting to notice that in the same year (1887), Leblanc, Fuchs, Hrrera, and Berthold were independently at work on the same problem. At the moment of appearance the cell-membrane is extremely thin, delicate, plastic, and changeable in its particles. Like similar fluid lamelle, it tends to assume that form which wouid be taken by a weightless fluid lamella under the same conditions, and to exhibit a minimal surface and constant curvature. Apart from the mere shape of the cell, questions of division, wall-formation, and the like are discussed in a suggestive way. Even the thirteen conclusions, however, involve technicalities which hardly admit of compression. Fusion of Lymphatic Cells into Plasmodia.;—M. A. Michel does not accept the explanation of Mr. Geddes, by which the fusion of lymph- cells of Lumbricus is compared to that seen in Myxomyceies. 'The lymph when first collected contains a large number of flattened branched cells; after a few minutes’ exposure to the air these become spherical in form, with pointed projections; some elongate and ramify into proto- plasmic prolongations, which constantly change their form, especially if placed in a warm chamber at 30°. In about half an hour these cells form a plexus; there is a gradual concentration. At the end of two or three hours there are only rounded masses with peripheral prolongations. The free cells give out a transparent protoplasmic layer which is often much vacuolated and of such delicacy that its boundaries can only be made out with difficulty ; some of the cells meet and form a continuous layer with spaced granular centres, each with a nucleus, or they form fine complicated or amceboid plexuses. Finally, the masses die at the end of some hours, and break up into rounded elements, each of which has its nucleus. The author points out that, even in the warm chamber, the living masses have no general movements; the only changes which occur are due to the general contraction and rupture ef very extended filaments. If isolated moving cells are carefully followed it will be seen that, among the massed cells, some will separate from and leave the fused mass. These masses, when observed with a high magnifying power, do not present the homogeneity which would be exhibited if the fusion were real. The circular strie which may be noticed suggest that there has been a tangential displacement of imprisoned cells. The best results are obtained with the vapour of osmic acid, and staining with picro-carminate of ammonia ; chromo-nitric liquid (Perenyi’s fluid) shows the distinct cells with their nuclei. In addition to the objections raised by these considerations, the author points out that death occurs successively at different points, and that each element may be made to swell by water into an agglomeration of vesicles pressed one against another, and he concludes that the fusion of the cells is only pseudo-plasmodic. * Biol. Centralbl, vii. (1888) pp. 728-31 (60 Versamml. Deutsch. Naturf. Wiesbaden, 1887). t Comptes Rendus, cvi. (1888) pp. 1555-8. 556 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO Secreting Cells of Intestinal Epithelium.*—Herr J. Paneth has made a detailed investigation of the histology of the secreting cells of epithelium of the small intestine. The subjects of research were mainly newt and mouse. By far the fittest staining reagent was safranin, used after Pfitzner’s method. His chief conclusions are as follows :— The goblet cells of the small intestine arise from ordinary epithelial cells. The secretion appears first in the form of granules. A portion of the protoplasm and the nucleus persist but undergo certain changes. If a reticulum be found in the theca of these goblet-cells, it is not proto- plasmic, but consists of secretion. After the secretion is emptied, the goblet-cell becomes again epithelial. ' In the crypts of various mammalian intestines, secreting cells occur which are neither goblet-cells, nor mucous, nor pancreatic. They lie at the bottom of the crypts, and are filled with granules of variable, and often large, size. Spinal Ganglion-cells.;—Herr H. Daae has investigated the spinal ganglion-cells of mammals, and especially those of the horse. His chief results are as follows:—The spinal ganglion-cells of the horse are so far unipolar, since each cell is associated with one large nerve-fibre. But only in some cases is this process undivided. Often it divides within or outside the capsule into many thin medullary fibres, which may ramify and form by the union of their smaller branches a coil. From this there issue, in variable number, terminal fibres, without medullary sheath, and in connection with the body of the cell. These the author calls “origin fibres.” Where only two such origin fibres are present the cells are therefore bipolar, and the poles lie apart. Where there are more than two origin fibres, the cells are multipolar, even though the multiple processes unite into one main fibre. The peculiar ramification and reunion of the fibres in the aforesaid coil appears to have been hitherto overlooked. Axis-cylinder and Nerve-cells.{—Dr. J. Jakimovitch has investi- gated, by the silver nitrate method, the histology of the nervous system. His objects of investigation ranged from mammals to fishes, and also included insects. A short summary of the history of past research is prefixed. The chief conclusions arrived at are as follows:—The axis-cylinder and the nerve-cell are constructed on the same type. The latter is only a nucleated enlargement of the former. Both consist of delicate fibrils and an intermediate substance. The primitive fibrils include two distinct substances; a clear unstained component alternates with a brown-stained material, so as to produce a striated appearance. The stained substance is dense, elastic, and more solid than the clear sub- stance. The two may be separated by maceration, and the primitive fibril is resolved into nervous particles (“ particules nerveuses ”), which form the primitive elements. They are irregularly disposed in the cylinder and cell in the resting state; but group themselves to form striz during activity. The strie are nowise artificial ; their state varies after death. The same essential appearances are seen throughout the series. * Arch, f. Mikr. Anat., xxxi. (1888) pp. 113-91 (8 pls.). ¢ Ibid., pp. 223-35 (2 pls.). } Journ. de PAnat. et de la Physiol., xxiii. (1888) pp. 142-68 (1 pl.). ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 557 y. General.* Growth by Intussusception.j — Prof. O. Biitschli discusses the general question whether we must suppose a growth of the plasma by intussusception. He states the well-known theory, and notes its general acceptance, and the recent criticism. Whatever be true of starch-grains and cell-wall, in regard to the plasma itself intussusception has seemed to most the only possible mode of growth. But the modern recognition of the reticular, vacuolate, or webbed structure of protoplasm seems to Biitschli to suggest another possibility. Like others, he distinguishes in the Protozoon body two substances—the web-forming plasma proper, the included more fluid chylema. The existence of such structures makes it quite possible that newly formed plasma molecules are directly apposed to the extremely fine walls of the plasmic web. Remarkable Case of Mutualism.{—Dr. C. P. Sluiter describes a remarkable case of mutualism, in which two species of Trachichthys (or Amphiprion) live with certain large tropical Actinie. The fishes swim about between the numerous tentacles, notwithstanding the presence of numerous stinging organs. Here the fishes appear to be safe against the attacks of larger fishes, and they never go far from their hosts. While there can be no difficulty in seeing the advantage to the fish, there is but little in detecting the benefit to the Actinian. The continual move- ments of the fish bring about an advantageous change of water; and it has been observed that one species brings food to the Actinian. B. INVERTEBRATA. Blood of Invertebrata.§S—M. L. Cuénot, after some remarks on the general composition and function of blood, gives a brief account of the results of his observations on various groups. Notwithstanding the statements of Foettinger and Howell, he denies the existence of hemo- globin in Echinoderms; in them the amcebocytes are almost the only nutrient parts of the blood. In Insects the liquid of the coelom contains a dissolved albuminoid, varying in colour, which has both respiratory and nutrient functions. In the blood there are a number of typical amoebocytes, which are produced by a large gland which completely surrounds the heart, and even extends over the aleform muscles; this gland is formed of a connective stroma filled with nuclei and fine granu- lations. These nuclei gradually surround the albuminogenous ferment, and escape from the gland. This lymphatic gland is found in the larve as well as in the imagines of all orders of Insects, with the single excep- tion of Chironomus plumosus, in which there is hemoglobin. In Scorpions the lymphatic gland is an elongated body, situated on the dorsal part of the nerve-chain; it seems to be merely a spongy diverticulum of the dorsal artery of the nerve-chain. In the crayfish, crab, and Pagurus the blood-fluid, in addition to its ordinary albuminoids, contains amcebocytes with a yellowish ferment; these are produced by a gland which is situated in the gill, and which is so arranged that the just oxygenated blood traverses it, and carries * This section is limited to papers which, while relating to Vertebrata, have a direct or indirect bearing on Invertebrata also. + Biol. Centralbl., vii. 44888) pp. 161-4. t Zool. Anzeig., xi. (1888) pp. 240-3. § Arch. Zool. Exper. et Gén., v. (1888) pp. xliii.—vii. 558 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO away the ripe elements that have been formed in it. The gland is merely a connective reticulum in which nuclei are scattered. In Mollusca the lymphatic gland is generally placed near the respiratory apparatus ; in Gastropods it varies considerably in position and relation. In the Oligocheta the amcebocytes are formed by the so-called hepatic layers of the intestine; in Hirudinea they form the bothryoidal tissue of Ray Lankester; the cells are often of large size, and contain large yellow or greenish granules. The blood of Gephyreans has a re- markable likeness to that of lower Vertebrates, well marked amcebocytes with a yellow ferment and nucleated corpuscles containing a colourless liquid different from hemoglobin being found in it; in the Tunicata there appear to be two kinds of elements, but they are very different from those of Vertebrates, Pelagic Animals at Great Depths and their Relations to the Surface Fauna.*—Dr. C. Chun has made a number of interesting and important observations on pelagic animals living at great depths, which are reviewed by Prof. Alexander Agassiz.f From a depth of 1300 metres Dr. Chun brought up a large pelagic fauna; small craspedote Meduse, Ctenophores, Tomopteride, Sagitte, Alciopide, larvee of Decapod Crus- tacea, Appendiculari#, Pteropoda, and small transparent Cephalopods. Dr. Chun assumes that there were no currents at the spots whence he obtained his rich hauls, but Prof. Agassiz thinks there is nothing to show that when so near the shore as he was there is not a more or less active interchange of the fauna from the shore slopes to that of greater depths. If a deep-sea pelagic fauna should be found in the deep water of oceanic basins it would help to explain the manner in which the deep- sea fauna obtains its food. Prof. Agassiz thinks that Chun’s results merely prove that in a close sea (the Mediterranean) near shore there is, even at considerable depths, a great mixture of true deep-sea types and surface pelagic animals which sink at certain times far beyond the limits usually assigned to them. Many of the so-called surface pelagic types have been proved by deep-sea expeditions to be the young of abyssal species. Chun has, however, clearly proved that many embryonic stages of surface pelagic animals are only found at considerable depths. Deep-sea fishing with a properly closing net promises to be a material help to embryological investigations. Dr. Chun considers that the great increase of temperature at the surface compels surface pelagic animals to seek cooler depths; while allowing this for some groups, Prof. Agassiz thinks that the calm or ruffled condition of the surface is a more powerful influence. It is only on calm nights that a good harvest of surface animals can be obtained. In his own experience of surface collecting Prof. Agassiz “never met with such prodigious masses of surface pelagic animals as on the hottest days of our dredging expeditions. When the sea happened to be smooth as glass under a blazing tropical sun it seemed as if the water was nearly solid as far as the eye could reach with countless surface animals of all sorts.” Prof. Agassiz thinks. that there is nothing to show that the more active deep-sea Crustacea, Fishes, Cephalopods, Pteropods, Annelids, * Bibliotheca Zoologica, i. (4to, Cassel, 1888) pp. 1-66 (5 pls.). + Amer. Journ, Sci., xxxv. (1888) pp. 420-4. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 559 Acalephs, Polyps, Rhizopods have not a considerable range, and may pass either vertically or near the bottom through layers of water of very considerable differences of temperature and pressure. It is to be borne in mind that nearly all the Radiolaria which Dr. Chun took with a tow-net at a depth of 300 fathoms have also been collected at the surface, and the same is true of some other forms. The author seems to have demonstrated for surface pelagic animals a far greater bathymetrical range than they were known to have, and one which, perhaps, corresponds to the wide bathymetrical range of many so-called deep-sea types, which extend from the greatest depths at which animals have been dredged almost to the regions of the littoral belt. Dr. Chun gives an account of the development of Ctenophora, and shows that the Cydippe-form of Bolina, after the degeneration of the genital organs, which are fully developed soon after leaving the egg- envelope, is developed into the Bolina-form; this peculiar mode of reproduction he calls Dissogonie. Physiology of Nervous System.*—Herr Steiner has made some experiments on nervous functions among Invertebrates. The cerebral ganglion of the crayfish is shown to be the general locomotor centre. In the leech, however, this is not the case; the removal of the cerebral ganglia made no great difference; even separated portions crept about. In Pterotrachea mutica, a conveniently transparent mollusc, the removal of the central ganglion made no difference, but movement ceased with the destruction of the pedal. The latter is the general and the only locomotor centre of the body. One side of the pedal ganglion was removed in the pelagic Cymbulia, which then exhibited circular move- ments on the injured side. Removal of the cerebral ganglion in Octopus vulgaris stopped voluntary and spontaneous nutrition, but the reflex action of the eye persisted. The removal on one side of the anterior portions of the sub-cesophageal ganglion led to circular movements as in Cymbulia. In Appendicularia the tail ganglion is the locomotor centre. Mollusca. a. Cephalopoda. Shell-growth in Cephalopoda.—Professor J. F. Blake ¢ urges that Mr. F. A. Bather, whose communication has been already noticed,{ has added nothing of value to what he himself taught as to the morphology of the shell in the Introduction to his work on ‘ British Fossil Cephalopods.’ Mr. F. A. Bather § replies that Prof. Blake now appears to accept the view which it was his object to defend rather than originate—namely, that successive chitinous membranes are given off by the body-surface and subsequently calcified, but that that is not the teaching of the Pro- fessor’s monograph. Prof. Blake criticizes the suggestion that the membranes of the septa are typically continuous with those of the shell- wall, but it is urged that not only are the two descriptions that he gives inconsistent with one another, but both are in disagreement with the facts of the case. Objection was also taken to the assumption that the lamelle of Sepia are homologous with the septa of a Belemnite- phragmocone, but this is an old view first taught by Voltz in 1830, held by many first-rate observers, and supported by original observations on Mr. Bather’s part. * Biol. Centralbl., vii, (1888) pp. 732-3 (60 Versamml. Deutsch. Naturf. Wies- baden, 1887). } Ann, and Mag. Nat. Hist., i. (1888) pp. 376-80. t Ante, p. 397. § Tom. cit., i. 888) pp. 421-7. 560 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO Spermatozoa of Eledone moschata.*—M. A. Sabatier finds a double method of spermatogenesis in Eledone moschata, comparable to that already observed in some Gastropods by MM. Koehler and Robert. In one set, the head is formed by a fine, very regular spiral ; in the other kind, the head, which is much longer, is a simple straight or very irregular sinuous filament. In the spermatoblasts which give rise to the spiriform spermatozoa the chromatin of the nucleus is condensed at the centre of the cell into a mass which is at first globular, but soon becomes club- shaped. The nuclear membrane becomes invisible, and the chromatic rod is situated at the centre of the cell, which also becomes elongated. The cytoplasm which surrounds the rod becomes very delicate, and becomes largely aggregated round the thinner end of the club-shaped body. The thicker end of the latter frees itself from the body of the cell, and gets at its end a very fine colourless filament which appears to be formed by the elongation of part of the cytoplasm ; this is the tail of the spermatozoon. As the rod elongates it becomes more and more delicate, till at last its massive form gives place to a spire with regular turns, which are at first close, and gradually separate from one another. The filiform spermatozoa are developed after a different fashion. The chromatin of the spermatoblasts becomes condensed at the periphery of the nucleus, close to the nuclear membrane. It is at first an are which elongates as it grows. ‘I'he cell becomes ovoid, and the chromatin narrows at one extremity, which carries a mass of granular protoplasm. The remainder remains rolled round a clear, spherical mass; it next elongates and loses its spiral form, when the spermatozoon appears as & chromatic filament with a very long tail, and attached by its base to a mass of granular cytoplasm, which, in its turn, disappears. M. Sabatier’s observations on Eledone have confirmed him in the opinion he long since expressed that the vermiform spermatozoa of Paludina are true colonies of spermatozoa, corresponding to a group of spermatozoa, the heads of which have become fused, while the tails have remained distinct. 8. Pteropoda. Musculature of Heteropoda and Pteropoda.t—Herr G. Kalide has investigated the musculature of the Heteropoda and Pteropoda with the view of throwing light on the morphology of the foot of Mollusca. In the former the musculature of the trunk consists of two muscular strata lying one above the other; the fibres of the upper layer pass from above forwards to below backwards, and those of the lower layer from below forwards to above backwards. In the caudal region, the visceral sac, and the proboscis, this musculature has a longitudinal direction. Above it there is a circular muscle which covers the greater part of the body (Carinaria), or is limited to the proboscis (Pterotrachea). The fin has its own musculature, which is connected with the spindle-muscle. The author thinks that sufficient attention has not been given to the fact that the musculature of the fin has no connection with that of the trunk, while that of the anterior processes of the body passes continuously into the trunk. If the fin of the Heteropoda be homologous with any part of the body of any other Molluse, that part must have a similar arrange- * Comptes Rendus, evi. (1888) pp. 954-6. { Zeitschr. f. Wiss. Zool., xlvi. (1888) pp. 337-77. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 561 ment of its muscular fibres. In this connection an investigation must be made into the morphology of the Pteropoda; in them, too, there is a great differentiation of the foot, leading to the formation of two laterally placed fins—the epipodium of Huxley—and, in some, to the distinction of a horseshoe-shaped and a conical piece in the median part of the foot. As in Heteropods, the fin-musculature of Pteropods is formed by rays from the spindle-muscle; by this character and by the independence of the whole fin-musculature of the musculature of the body, the fins of Pteropods are shown to be homologous with those of Heteropods. It has not yet been demonstrated that these fins are derived, onto- genetically, from the foot. The protopodium of all Molluscs is a mere outpushing of the body-wall into which the ccelom is merely continued. In the Heteropoda this protopodium is separated from the body by the caudal portion and carried backwards. This caudal portion is a structure quite similar to the protopodium, in so far as it is a mere prolongation of the body-wall, although filled by gelatinous material. The intercalation of the caudal portion may be regarded as due to the growth of the tissue at the base of the protopodium, and this region may be looked upon as part of the organ which corresponds to the developed protopodium. If this be so, there is nothing surprising in the musculature of the body passing directly into the tail. The arrangement of the muscles of the fin seem to show that it is not a differentiation of the protopodium, but a formation sui generis. While we regard the tail as an outgrowth of the body, due to local growth, the fins of Heteropods and Pteropods must be looked upon as an outgrowth of the spindle-muscle, or of a part thereof; the body-wall having been broken through in such a way that the newly-formed structures are only accompanied by the epidermis and the gelatinous cuticle. When we ask if there is in Gasteropods or Lamellibranchs any organ homologous to the fins of Pteropods or Heteropods, we find that in them, as in all Molluscs save Cephalopods, the first rudiment of the foot is the protopodium, which is the only differentiation on the ventral surface of the embryo. No other differentiations appear, or, in other words, there is no deutopodium. vy. Gastropoda. Abnormal Growth in Haliotis.;—Mr. EH. A. Smith gives a descrip- tion of an example of the Japanese Haliotis gigantea, which is remarkable for having two rows of perforations in the shell instead of one. Four of the holes of the outer or normal series are open, while all those of the inner series are closed or filled up. Mr. Smith supposes that the edge of the mantle at this particular point was accidentally notched in early life (or from congenital defect), and that the notch was not deep. It is probably correct to suppose that the perforations are for the purpose of conveying water to the gills, and to some extent, for the extrusion of feeces. As there are neither gills nor anus beneath the abnormal series of holes, they had no special function to perform, and so became closed up as soon as possible. In figures of H. tuberculata given by Cuvier and by Fischer a tentacle may be seen to be protruded through each of the last six or seven perforations; in no specimen or species examined by Mr. Smith are there ever more than three tentacles, and these are always similarly located. * Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., i. (1888) pp. 419--21. 562 SUMMARY OF OURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO Testacella.*—Prof. H. de Lacaze-Duthiers has published an in- teresting memoir on this Gastropod. Altered though its organization may be, and displaced as are some of its organs, it is still possible to associate it with the rest of the Pulmonata. Though the mantle and shell are very small they both remain as evidence of the parts which are so well developed in allied groups. The only portion of the body which they protect is the true respiratory cavity. The details of anatomical peculiarities may be largely explained by the drawing down of the mantle and shell, and the elevation of the liver and the organs of reproduction. These two fundamental modifications are the cause of others which are no less important. Thus, when the organ of respiration, which is always intimately connected with the central organ of circulation, changes its place, the heart invariably follows it, and comes to occupy such position as the lung leaves free for it. The same thing happens to the kidney, which is always attached to the pericardium. As arule the marginal folds of the mantle are quite close to the head, which they often protect, and in consequence of this, the pallial nerves are short. But in Testacella, the mantle is separated from the head, and consequently from the nerve-centres; the pallial nerves are, therefore, of greater length, though they preserve their fixed relations. Long and delicate nerves, such as those of the foot, float in the general cavity, and are only recognizable by their origins and insertions. “ The connections of the nervous system are so constant and imperative, that to follow a nerve is to take in hand the thread of Ariadne which guides and conducts us to the part which it is required to determine, and which, at first, might be misunderstood, in consequence of the trans- formation it has undergone.” The same is true of the arteries. The heart being removed to the lower part of the body, the organs which have in consequence been dis- placed, have, so to speak, carried the arteries with them. A very interesting relation is presented by the passage across the cesophageal collar of the termination of the ascending aorta. The pedal artery, crossing above the pedal ganglia, ought te pass in front of them to redescend and nourish the foot as far as its lower extremity. This isa constant arrangement in the Pulmonata, but in Testacella, owing to the length of the course which it has to take, the aorta gives off an accessory branch at the middle of its length, which opens freely with the true pedal vessel, and so makes up for the insufliciency of supply which is due to the too great length of the latter. Here there is deformation due to elongation, but the relations are fixed, and the parts, modified though they are, have been able to preserve this same relation. The superiority of the value of characters which are drawn from con- nections over those furnished by diversity of forms and deviations from the normal is shown by the relative position of the heart and lung in the economy of Testacella. The fixed connection of the two organs is seen in the connection between the auricle and the efferent vessel of the lung, but the relative position of the two, as regards the rest of the body, depends on changes effected in the body in consequence of the displace- ment of some of the viscera. Whatever be the cause of the change which it has undergone, we cannot but recognize that Testacella is atrophied in some of its parts and disproportionately developed in others. As compared with a slug, we * Arch. Zool. Expér. et Gén., v. (1887) pp. 459-596 (12 pls.). ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 563 see that the mantle is in both rudimentary, and has become unable to secrete a shell sufficiently large to form a protection for a whorl of viscera. In the slug, the mantle retains its dorsal position, and is at about the middle of the axis of the body; in Testacella it is terminal and ventral. In the slug the viscera pass into the foot, in Testacella into the neck; but in both the distribution of the nerves enables us to establish the true nature of the parts which have been modified to the purpose of new functions, and which have become irrecognizable. In con- clusion Prof. M. Lacaze-Duthiers urges that, if modifications in the position of some organs can change the general physiognomy and external appearance of an animal, it is no less true that we ought not to regard their displacement as affording a criterion of the highest value for the characterization of classificatory divisions. Although the heart and lung are altered in relation to the whole, they are not altered in their relation to one another ; the heart is always intercalated between the body which it has to nourish, and the lung from which it draws its freshened blood. In so natural a group as the Pulmonata it is sometimes behind, sometimes beside, sometimes in front of the lung, but its absolute position does not alter. The corollary from this is that classifications based on the rela- tive situation of lungs and heart ought to be revised. Absorption of Water.*—Herr A. Fleischmann returns to the old question of the taking in of water by molluscs. The affirmative position maintained by Delle Chiaje was supported by the observations of Koll- mann and Griesbach ; criticism has, however, weakened the latter, but the recent researches of Schiemenz f seem to settle the question definitely. To the latter and to his own investigations the author refers, Schiemenz has described with great definiteness the water-pores found on the foot of Natica josephina. They are minute (7-8 » in maximum diameter), below them strong closing muscles are aggregated, from them minute cavities extend into the foot. As to the physiology, Schiemenz sets aside any mixture of water and blood, declares the vascular system of Natica to be closed; the elements of the foot (muscles, nerves, glan- dular cells) are all inclosed and protected from the water by a limiting membrane which surrounds vascular lacune. The membrane also ex- tends below the epithelium, and gives off protrusions including blood- sinuses between the epithelial cells. The water is taken in as follows :—the vessels of the foot are richly filled with blood; the muscles become tense ; cavities are left between them, and into these the water enters. When a sufficient quantity has passed in, the closing muscles shut the pores, the animal moves with its tense foot. Schiemenz has also noted, in another case, the modifications produced in the blood by the introduction of water, and concludes that where the vascular system and the histological system are not inclosed, there can be no entrance of water. With the results reached by Schiemenz, Fleischmann entirely agrees. He refers to the researches of Roule and Grobben, which go against the existence of pores, and believes that in most cases the blood and the vascular sphincters are of themselves sufficient to explain the erection of the foot. He maintains as before, in spite of Roule’s denial, the certain existence of the ‘‘ Keber venous valves.” * Biol. Centralbl., vii. (1888) pp. 713-7. + MT. Zool. Stat. Neapel, vii. (1888) pp. 423-72. 564 SUMMARY OF OURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 3. Lamellibranchiata. Lamellibranchiata without gills.*—M. P. Pelseneer has been able to confirm the remarkable observation of Mr. Dall that Cuspidaria has no gills. On raising the mantle one finds oneself in the presence of a mus- cular surface which Dall regarded as the body-wall. This surface is a partition which separates a dorsal from a ventral chamber ; it is traversed by the foot, and extends from one adductor to the other; on either side it is connected with the mantle, which is continuous along its whole length ; posteriorly it is connected with the partition which separates the two siphons. The visceral mass is found in the dorsal chamber. The labial palps are present, but are very small. The study of the allied genera Lyonsiella, Poromya, and Silenia has resulted in the unexpected discovery that the muscular septum is a modified gill. In Lyonsiella abyssicola the gills are united to the mantle, fused with one another behind the foot, and then joined to the division between the two siphons; but the structure of the gills is preserved. In Poromya there is a similar partition, but this is muscular; on either side, however, there are two groups of branchial lamelle, separated from one another by clefts which allow of a communication between the two pallial chambers. In Silenia the reduction is still greater, for the branchial lamelle have disappeared, and the clefts have become arranged in three separate groups. In Cuspidaria reduction is brought to an extreme. M. Pelseneer proposes to form a separate group for the last three genera, and to call it the Septibranchia ; Cuspidaria must form the type of Dall’s family Cuspidariide. So-called Eyes of Tridacna and Occurrence of Pseudochlorophyll Corpuscles in the Vascular System of Lamellibranchs.t—Herr J. Brock gives an account of the so-called eyes which aid so largely in giving a splendid coloration to the margins of the mantle of living species of Tridacna. They form an irregular row of differently coloured points, and look like gems. The method employed by Vaillant did not permit him to successfully investigate the minute structure of these organs. The larger wart-like elevations which are found at some distance from the margin of the mantle agree in structure with the mantle itself. In the warts, however, there are a few peculiarly constructed minute organs which might be taken for eyes. These bodies are flask-shaped, and have their long axis perpendicular to the surface of the epithelium ; the whole organ is surrounded by a thin membrane in which fusiform nuclei are scattered. Within are large cells, also with a distinct mem- brane, and containing clear, and probably highly refractive protoplasm. These transparent cells are surrounded by a layer which is characterized by its great irregularity, and the component cells of which contain coarsely granular protoplasm. No nerve was in any case seen to pass to a flask-shaped organ. The author is unable to make any suggestion as to the function of these organs, but he thinks it may be confidently asserted that they are not optic. It is much more probable that they are luminous organs; if the cells of the outer layer have the faculty of shining, the more trans- parent inner cells may act as prisms. The only bodies which can be * Comptes Rendus, evi. (1888) pp. 1029-31. + Zeitschr. f. Wiss. Zool., xlvi. (1888) pp, 270-88 (1 pl.), Transl. Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., i. (1888) pp. 435-52. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 565 said to resemble them in structure are the so-called eyes on the tentacles of Cardium, and these are possibly luminous organs. All the available interstices of the mantle-margin of a Tridacna were found to be densely packed with “‘ green cells” or pseudochlorophyll corpuscles. These, which are certainly true cells, have a distinct nuclear framework, which is very deeply coloured by Grenacher’s alum- carmine. The nucleus is ordinarily spherical, but sometimes oblong or reniform, and not unfrequently, especially in alcoholic preparations, strikingly stellate. Increase by transverse division was also observed. There is some reason for believing in the presence of a special (cellu- lose?) envelope. The green colouring matter is fixed by chromic acid, but extracted by alcohol; it is not generally diffused through the protoplasm, but localized in small round corpuscles, which are dis- tributed through the cells in variable numbers. It was not possible to decide definitely whether the corpuscles are situated in the vacuoles or in the protoplasm, but more probably they lie in the latter. These symbionts are not, as is generally the case, found in the cells of the host, but float freely in the cavities of the system of blood-lacune. The protoplasm of the blood-corpuscles was found to have distinctly separated into two different constituents, a perfectly hyaline part, in which the nucleus was always situated excentrically, and a “ proto- plasmatic ” part which showed a very marked fibrous coagulation. This was observed in all of those specimens which had been treated respec- tively with chromic acid, alcohol, and osmium. In addition to the ordinary amceboid blood-cells, there were a few bodies which were very characteristic of the blood; these were rounded, or oval, lobate, or otherwise irregularly formed cells, the protoplasm of which was so completely filled with strongly refractive granules of a fatty nature that no cell-nucleus could be found. These ‘“ granule-cells” usually attain twice or three times the size of the ordinary blood-cell, and they often lie close to the walls of the blood-lacune, in recess-like depressions. These cells have a very remarkable resemblance to certain cells of the interstitial connective substance of the Pulmonata, which were first de- scribed by Semper. It is probable that in both cases the cells have some relation to glycogen, or a glycogen-like compound. With regard to the much discussed question as to intercellular spaces in the epithelium of Mollusca, Herr Brock states that of his three Tridacne, the osmium and chromic acid specimens did not present the smallest interstices between the individual cells, while the spirit specimen had the whole epithelium traversed by numerous large typical intercellular spaces. As only one of these can represent the natural condition, the comparative value of the preservative fluids has to be ~ taken into consideration. ‘The author declares against the spirit and the spaces. Phylogeny of Lamellibranchs.*—Dr. B. Sharp submits some con- siderations on the phylogenetic classification of Lamellibranchs. He regards the entire group as degenerate, as derived from Gastropoda, and as represented in primitive form by forms like Nucula and Trigonia. The loss of one adductor is referred to mechanical causes. This is followed through Mytilus and Pinna to Ostrea. A passage from regular to irregular shell is to be seen in the fresh-water forms. Unio repre- * Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philad., 1888, pp. 121-4. 1888. 22 566 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO sents a fresh-water Mytilus, and a form that closely resembles the oyster can be traced through Avtheria to Muelleria. In another direction the author traces development from the central Arca types to the extreme of Aspergillum. In this procedure, Lucina, Cardium, Venus, Mya, Solen, Macha, Teredo, Gastrochzena, and Clavagella, are discussed. In the first branch towards Ostrea, the fulcrum moves from a position between the two equally large adductors, toward the oral pole of the body. This brought the anterior adductor in a line with the fulerum and posterior adductor, where, being of no use, it disappeared. In the other direction, development is in the antero-posterior direction, the shell, however, not taking part in the growth until a form is reached where the shell is exceedingly small and the animal protected by a sup- plementary deposit of carbonate of lime. Crystalline Style.*—Herr B. Haseloff has made some very interest- ing observations on the formation of the crystalline style in mussels. Acting on the suggestion of Prof. Mébius that the structure in question represented reserve food-material, the author made experiments with Mytilus edulis. The structure seems in natural conditions to be almost ~ constantly present. In some specimens, however, which were set apart and starved, the style disappeared in a few days, and that the more completely, the more complete the fasting. The demonstration was completed, however, by re-feeding some mussels of the same set as those in which the style had disappeared; the result seemed to be the re- appearance of the style. Some observations by Hazay agree with those of the author, and the supposition of Prof. Mobius that the crystalline style represents reserve material seems quite justified. Herr Haseloff does not regard it as a secretion, but a chemical modification of surplus food. Molluscoida. B. Polyzoa. Spermatogenesis in Alcyonella.j—Prof. A. Korotneff has studied the development of the spermatozoa in Alcyonella fungosa, which seems . to be a particularly fit object for the investigation of spermatogenesis. The main steps of the process, which exhibits the well-known stages named by v. la Valette St. George, has been already summarized; but a few other results may be recorded. Head, neck, and tail develope independently, and are secondarily united. In the sperm of Ascaris, the amceboid portion is the much shortened tail, which here is more complex than usual, and includes several fibrils instead of only one. Referring to van Beneden’s obser- vation that the fibrils of an Ascaris sperm were cross-striped, Korotnetf characterizes a spermatozoon as “a free-living, highly specialized muscle-cell.” Fresh-water Polyzoa.{—Dr. K. Kriipelin has monographed the fresh- water Polyzoa of Germany. The part published treats of the morphology and systematic. The history of research is first discussed, then the * Biol. Centralbl., vii. (1888) pp. 683-4. t+ Arch. f. Miky. Anat., xxxi. (1888) pp. 334-47 (1 pl.). t he Naturwiss. Hamburg, x. (7 pls.). Cf. Biol. Centralbl., vii. (1887) pp. 724-5. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 567 general facts of colony-forming and classification, in a third chapter the anatomy, in a fourth the conditions of life. The detailed classifica- tion and the phylogenetic probabilities form the subjects of the conclud- ing chapters. Herr Krapelin does not believe in the existence of a continuous phylogenetic series including all modern forms, The ctenostomatous genera Victorella, Pottsiella, and Paludicella stand in close relationship; the group of Phylactolemata has arisen from Paludicella-like Ctenostomata, starting from Fredericella. Among the higher Phylactolemata parallel differentiation may be observed; thus the genera Lophopus, Pectinatella, and Cristatella form each in their way the terminal point of a series. The greatest advances in the phylogeny are marked by the families Fredericellide, Plumatellide, and Crista- tellide. The genera Plumatella, Lophopus, and Pectinatella are insepar- able, and must all be referred to the family Plumatellide. A diagnostic table of the genera is appended. Arthropoda. Embryology of Insects and Arachnids.”—The late Mr. A. T. Bruce, from his observations on the development of Insects and Arachnids, was led to certain views as to the relations of tracheates. He was of opinion that Pertpatus and the Myriopoda, from the absence of wings and other primitive characters, may fairly be considered the most primitive tracheates. Some Myriopods exhibit indications of a hexapod stage in their development, and they may, therefore, be related to the wingless Hexapods. The mode of origin of the endoderm is not very important for classificatory purposes, as it is very likely moditied by the presence or absence of food-yolk. The mesoderm of Peripatus grows forwards from an undifferentiated cell-mass at the posterior end of the embryo; the mesoderm arising from the “ primitive cumulus” of Spiders also grows forward from an undifferentiated cell-mass at the posterior end of the embryo. But this resemblance must not be taken to indicate any close relationship, for in the Crustacea the mesoderm has a similar mode of growth. In the higher insects the yolk-cells appear to represent the inner layer of the gastrula, and are consequently equivalent to the endoderm of lower forms; the true endoderm is functional only during embryonic life in absorbing the yolk, and takes little or no part in the formation of the digestive tract. In these tracheates the layer which corresponds to the mesoblast of Arachnids and of Peripatus has usurped the functions of the true endoderm. In endeavouring to separate the different divisions of the Arthropod phylum, anatomical characters as well as embryological phases must be - taken into consideration. The possession of a single well-developed pair of antenne, of tracheal invaginations, and of embryonic membranes, together with the existence of a hexapod stage in their development, afford sufficient ground for regarding Myriopods as lowly-organized or degenerate Insects. Peripatus perhaps belongs to the same category, but its embryonic membranes do not appear to correspond fully to those of Insects. Arachnids, in all probability, never possessed antenne, for all their appendages, like those of Limulus, are at one period post-oral, and are not innervated by the supra-cesophageal ganglion. * ¢Observations on the Embryology of Insects and Arachnids, 4to, Baltimore, 1887, 31 pp. and 6 pls. 2R2 568 SUMMARY OF OURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO The antenne of insects are shown by their innervation to correspond to the first pair of crustacean antenne ; the bilobed upper lip of insects is innervated from the second division of the supra-cesophageal ganglion which forms part of the cireumcesophageal commissure. In the Nauplius- stage, the second pair of crustacean antenne is innervated from the circumcesophageal commissure, and a comparison may fairly be drawn between the paired upper lip of Insects, and the second pair of crustacean antenne. Mr. Bruce regards the antenne of the Insecta and Crustacea as probably homologous structures which ally the two groups. The amnion of Insects and Arachnids is probably homologous and allies the two groups, but they and the Crustacea may not have arisen one from the other, but each independently from a common source. The trachex of Insects and Arachnids are probably analogous, not homologous, structures; this may be concluded from the fact that the trache of the latter are derived from the lung-books, which are involuted appendages. a. Insecta. Polypody of Insect Embryos.*—Prof. V. Graber considers that the abdominal appendages which are found on the germinal stripe of various Insects, and which in their mode of development, completely resemble the typical or thoracic legs, are homologous with them. These embryonic abdominal appendages have been most accurately observed in certain Orthoptera, such as Gryllotalpa, Mantis, and Blatta, Neuroptera as Neophalax, and Coleoptera as Hydrophilus and Melolontha. In most cases they are only found on the first segment of the abdomen, but in some forms they are also found on the second, and even (in rare cases) on the third. Melolontha is the only form in which they have been found on all except the last two or three segments, but it is not im- probable that polypody, or, better, pantopody obtains in Hydrophilus and the Bee. The abdominal appendages are always unjointed, and, as compared with the thoracic, quite rudimentary ; those of the first segment appear simultaneously, or almost so, with those of the thorax, but the others, when developed, only appear later. With the possible exception of the appendages seen by Kowalevsky in Lepidoptera, they are all confined to the embryonic period. Even within this the length of their existence varies considerably, and the hinder appendages are very transitory. The extent and mode of development of the first pair also vary a great deal; they may either undergo a gradual reduction, or be converted into flat saccules filled internally by loosely arranged cells, which, by constric- tion at the base, become attached to the body by a hollow stalk. In most cases the saccules are only one-third of the length of the legs, but in the Cockchafer they cover nearly the whole of the ventral surface. The conditions under which these organs appear make it probable that they are merely the remnants of appendages, or, in other words, that Insects (or Spiders) are derived from ancestors which had well-developed extremities of definite function on their abdomen. These organs were probably all similar, but it may have been that, in adaptation to definite conditions of life, the saccules had the function of gills, or, in other words, the ancestors of Insects and Spiders may have been heteropodous, and been allied to the Crustacea that have posterior branchial sacs. * Morphol. Jahrb., xiii. (1888) pp. 586-615 (2 pls.). ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 569 Dermal Sensory Organ of Insects.*—Dr. O. vom Rath has published én extenso an account of his observations on the dermal sensory organs of Insects, the preliminary notice of which we have already reported.t As to the physiology of these organs little is definitely known, and as the structure of the various organs is essentially the same, nothing can be concluded therefrom. The most important position is that of the antennez; here we find sensory hairs, cones, and membranous canals. With most authors, Dr. vom Rath thinks that the olfactory sense is located in the sensory cones, and perhaps also in the membranous canals, and that the hairs have a tactile function. The function of the canals appears to be one which is well developed in a few Insects only, as they are only occasionally present; where they are found they are present in large numbers; it is not likely that they are of an auditory nature, and it is more probable that they serve for the perception of definite odours, or fulfil an unknown function. It is only in rare cases that it can be definitely asserted that there is an orifice at the anterior end of the cones, and this point seems therefore to be of little physiological significance. The chitin at the anterior end of the cone is in any case thin and pale, and is probably affected by chemical and physical influences; treatment with dilute potash easily dissolves the chitinous membrane, when the cone is laid open. Where the cones stand in chitinous pits and do not reach the surface we cannot suppose that there is any tactile function, but rather an olfactory. If this be so, and if there are different kinds of cones, we may suppose that these have somewhat different functions. It is possible that some serve for the perception of the feeble odours of distant objects, and others for those that are nearer. On the palpi cones and hairs are alone found; Leydig was certainly justified in declaring that their anatomical structure shows that the palpi have the same or similar functions to the antenne. Dr. vom Rath believes that the cones are olfactory organs, and probably perceive not- distant odours. The cones on the maxilla, labium, epipharynx, and hypopharynx seem to be gustatory organs. Sub-aquatic Respiration.{—Herr E. Schmid has studied minutely, in Donacia crassipes, the mode of breathing to which Siebold called attention as common among the larve and pup of beetles, i. e. extract- ing air from the air-passages of submerged water-plants. Pupa-cases, found by him attached to the roots of the water-lily, were observed to be filled with air. A hole in the side of the case next the root corresponded exactly to a deep canal passing through many of the air-passages of the root. This canal had evidently been bored by the insect, and the consequent pressure had caused the air to pass into ~ the cocoon. The larve have two main tracheal trunks opening into two sickle-shaped chitinous appendages on the abdomen. ‘These appendages are used, apparently, for boring into a plant so as to allow air from its air-passages to pass into the trachex of the insect. When the insect escapes from the cocoon it is borne to the surface by the air surrounding it and imprisoned in the hairs on its ventral surface. The same mode of breathing may be observed in the genus Hemonia. * Zeitschr. f. Wiss. Zool., xlvi. (1888) pp. 413-54 (2 pls.). + See this Journel, ante, p. 210. : { Entom. Zeitschr., xxxi. (1887) pp. 325-34. Cf. Naturforscher, xxi. (1888) p- 193. 570 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO A butterfly—Paraponyza stratiolata—fills its cocoon with air, probably in the same way, for the leaf to which it is attached is often pierced with numerous canals. Dorsal Appendages.*— Miss A. M. Fielde reports finding at Swatow, in still pools of fresh water, an insect or insect-larva which bore on its back four longitudinal rows of jointed appendages, of nearly the same length as its body, and capable of being raised, lowered, or bent, either by the insect or by external pressure. ‘T'he colour varies with the habitat from pale green to black. The head is flat, with a pair of large eyes made up of six ocelli; the antenne are short and six-jointed, and the biting mouth-parts strong and horny. The three thoracic segments bear three pairs of six-jointed legs ending in a long claw. The abdomen has nine segments, the last bearing ventrally a pair of long, sharp, jointed styles. The body is cylindrical, tapering posteriorly, with the ventral surface flattened. All the segments except the last bear dorsally four tapering jointed tubes. The main tracheal trunks run, one on each side, between the proximal ends of these two rows of appendages, through which they send long straight branches. So-called Digestive Stomach of some Ants.t—Prof. C. Emery has examined the stomach of most genera of Camponotide and Dolichoderidx, as well as several Cryptoceride, and some members of other groups. In the first of these the crop is succeeded by the calyx, in which are four calycinal lamelle, held together by a continuation of the crop. Further back are valves, and still further back there is an enlargement. Between this apparatus and the chyle-intestine there is a narrow tube which ends in the latter by a knob. Between the four lamelle the intermediate membrane forms four folds which project into the lumen of the cup ; at the open concavities of the folds are the bundles of longitudinal muscles. The whole is surrounded by the circularly arranged transverse muscu- lature. In every section of a lamella we may distinguish a median portion and two wings; the former contains a groove, which is sharply limited externally, but seems internally to lose itself gradually on the wings. In these two layers may be recognized, the outer of which, as well as the wall of the groove, should be regarded as the continuation of the chitinous membrane of the crop; the striation which is observed is the expression of fine pore-canals. The inner layer of the wings is formed by small very closely packed chitinous hairs. In the valves there are clefts, and these the author looks upon as the continuation of the clefts which connect the groove of the lamelle with their free surface; there is no homologue of the wings in the region of the valves. The musculature of the stomach, which has been correctly described by Forel, consists of longitudinal and transverse bundles; the latter form a powerful system of constrictors: the greater part of the longitudinal bundles are continued on to the crop, and become lost in its muscular network. After describing a number of forms, the author proceeds to discuss the morphology and physiology of what should be called the pumping stomach. In the Camponotide and such Dolichoderide as have a “conical bell,’ the organ consists of parts which have two different * Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philad., 1888, pp. 129-30 (1 pl.). + Zeitschr, f, Wiss. Zool., xlvi. (i888) pp. 378-412 (3 pls.). ZOCLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. aval functions. By the action of the muscles of the crop the entrance to the stomach is closed, so as to stop the flow of the contents of the crop to the bell or enlargement; by the pressure of the transverse musculature of the stomach the contents of the enlargement are emptied into the ehyle-intestine, while the return into the crop is prevented. In the Dolichoderide and Plagiolepidinez the closure in both cases is effected by the valves. The longitudinal musculature is only found in such stomachs as are not elongated or too compressed; in many of the Dolichoderidz the stomach is very short, and there is no longitudinal musculature at all. The primitive type, from which the various forms of stomach have been evolved, may be imagined to have been an elastic chitinous tube, provided with four longitudinal folds, and surrounded by longitudinal and transverse muscles; the primitive function was probably the peri- staltic contraction of this musculature, by means of which an incomplete pumping action was effected. The genus Dolichoderus is a very lowly differentiated form, but a more indifferent stage is found in the Ponerides and Myrmicide, where the crop is continued backwards into a cylin- drical or conical tube, from which the longitudinal muscles appear to be wanting. The author gives a phylogenetic table, in which is exhibited his view of the relationship of the genera he has examined. Senses of Ants.*—M. Aug, Forel, in an appendix to his former memoir, first corrects an error in regard to the absorption of the ultra- violet rays, and then cites two recent works which confirm the con- clusions previously arrived at by him. Mr. G. W. Peckham affirms, after numerous experiments, that wasps do not hear, but that they have memory and a sense of smell, and that they possess no such mysterious instinct of direction as is indicated in the terms “bee-line” and ‘‘wasp-line.” If they are far away, they can only find their nests by seeking for them. Handl maintains, with Forel and in opposition to Graber, that animals do not perceive colours by their skin. Finally, M. Forel gives an account of a series of experiments made by him upon ants. These have led him slightly to modify his former opinion, and to conclude that, though, in general, they use both senses, and are entirely lost without their antennz, without eyes they may succeed in finding their way back to their nest if the task be not too difficult. Parthenogenesis in Bombyx mori.j—Signor E. Verson draws atten- tion to a suggestion { that’ it might be possible to produce the silkworm parthenogenetically. He points out that this parthenogenetic develop- - ment does not go further than the formation of the serous membrane. After an experience of twenty years he feels confident that no real parthenogenesis can obtain in the silkworm. Karyokinesis in Lepidoptera.s—Herr G. Platner has studied karyo- kinesis in the spermatocytes of some Lepidoptera, and bases on it a theory of cell-division. The author believes that the separation of the * Rec. Zool. Suisse, iv. (1888) pp. 515-23. + Zool. Anzeig., xi. (1888) pp. 263-4. t By Prof. Krause in the ‘ Jahresber. iiber die Leistungen u. Fortschritte in, der Ges. Medicin.’ § Internat. Monatschrift f. Anat. u. Hist., ili. pp. 8341-98 (2 pis.). 572 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO daughter-elements on the dislocation of the equatorial plate is the result of a circulating streaming; he supposes that the spindle-shaped fibres form a continuous coil, and that a stream of fluid circulates in them in a definite direction. If we suppose that the daughter-clements pass along the fibres and are moved by the stream, it follows that they must separate from one another in opposite directions. The changes in the form and position of the spindles are believed to be the result of the mechanical action of the fluid moving away from the poles. If the asters arise primarily their origin is independent of the direction in which the stream of nutrient fluid traverses the cell, and the spindles are developed at right angles to it. The changes in the position of the nucleus are due to the same cause. The formation of the coil and the arrangement of the equatorial plate are believed to be the result of protoplasmic streams which traverse the nucleus in a definite direction. The achromatic substance is considered to be the active element in karyokinesis, the phenomena of which cannot be explained by supposing the existence of opposing forces. Division of the protoplasm is looked upon as a purely mechanical process; the constriction and separation of dividing animal-cells being a simple mechanical consequence of the elongation of the nuclear spindle. Decrease of Weight in Winter Pupe of Pontia brassice.*—Herr F. Urech has made a number of elaborate observations on the weight of the pupe of Pontia brassice. He finds that this weight steadily diminishes. If the temperature surrounding the pupe be kept constant, the decrease is increased towards the end of the pupal stage, and especially so a few days before escape; if the temperature be raised moderately, the duration of the pupal stage diminishes ; dry air has an abbreviating influence on the duration of this stage. Development in Egg of Musca vomitoria.t— Dr. A. Voeltzkow has a preliminary communication on the development of Musca vomitoria. The blastoderm is formed simultaneously over the whole periphery of the egg, and no cells remain internally. The polar cells lie at the hinder pole of the egg, and by their presence push the cells of the blastoderm inwards, so that a conical process projects into the interior of the egg. From this cone blastoderm-cells break off, which wander into the interior, and form the so-called yolk-cells; these, in Musca, mainly serve to break up the yolk. The formation of the germinal layers commences with an invagina- tion of the blastoderm on the whole of the ventral surface, and an almost completely closed tube is so formed. The germ-stripes are drawn over on the dorsal surface by the development of dorsal folds. The three layers arise by the constriction and subsequent flattening out of the tubes. The rudiment of the hind-gut now appears as an invagina- tion of the dorsal ectoderm in the hinder third of the egg. The cesophageal invagination does not appear till somewhat later. The amnion is formed simultaneously with the rudiment of the hind-gut, and later on it forms the greater part of the back of the embryo. The polar cells wander on to the dorsal surface, and pass into the hind-gut ; their later fate has not yet been made out. The mid-gut is formed by two lateral thickenings of the endoderm, just behind the blind end of the cesophagus; the lateral pads so * Zool. Anzeig., xi. (1888) pp. 205-12. + Ibid., pp. 235-6. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 573 developed extend, later on, throughout the whole length of the egg. They all grow dorsally and ventrally, and so come to completely inclose the yolk and form the epithelium of the mid-gut. The ccelom is formed by the separation of these pads from the mesoderm. The traches arise as segmental invaginations, which extend back- wards and forwards, and unite into one longitudinal trunk ; the segmental invagination-orifices close up. The nervous system arises in three parts, a median invagination of the ventral surface of the ectoderm, and two lateral thickenings. Karly Stages in Development of Egg of Fly.* Dr. H. Henking has investigated the early stages in the development of the fly’s egg, with especial reference to free nuclear formation. In the prepared unripe egg the germinal vesicle may be seen as a colourless sphere floating in the egg-contents, which are distinctly coloured by carmine ; it has a sharp, simply contoured wall, and contains very fine granules and some clear vesicles, as well as an excentric and distinctly coloured germinal spot, which is provided with vacuoles, The large nuclei of the nutrient cells are very striking, and are very rich in chromatin; these cells and nuclei have almost altogether disappeared from ripe eggs; their chromatin has probably been taken up by the egg-cell. In the ripe egg there is but a rudiment of the germinal vesicle in the shape of a small coloured corpuscle surrounded by a clear space. Only a few observations were made on the polar globules. In most cases of fertili- zation it would seem that four spermatozoa enter the egg. Nothing definite can be said as to the fate of the female chromatin substance. The first yolk-cells are formed in two clouds of protoplasm by free cell-formation. The first two cleavage-nuclei appear as clear bodies with an equatorial zone of distinct chromatin filaments; the succeeding divisions follow very rapidly, owing to the number and rapidity of the divisions of the embryonic cells. By free nuclear formation, the author means all those cases of the formation of nuclei, in which the substance of the mother nucleus does not pass directly, and unaltered, into the daughter-nuclei. The drop- like bodies which are seen in the developing egg must not be called by the same name as the nuclei which contain chromatin, for they have not the same chemical composition. The former have no membrane. The supernumerary spermatozoa break up, and the first primitive nuclei arise in their place. The disappearance of the marginal portions of chromatin, and the formation of a colourless spot is explained by the chromatin having entered into another chemical combination. When there have been chromatin particles formed from the spermatozoa, cleavage-spindle, and yolk, there may arise free nuclei which take part in the conversion of yolk nuclein into nuclear nuclein. Development of Aphides.t—Herr L. Will reports the results of his recent investigation of the important but difficult subject of the develop- ment of the viviparous aphides. (1) Gastrulation—The blastoderm, as the author and Metschnikoff have previously noted, does not overgrow the whole of the surface, but leaves a roundish spot at the lower pole. At the margin of this lower aperture, an active proliferation occurs; the new-formed cells are * Zeitschr. f. Wiss. Zool., xlvi. (1888) pp. 289-336 (4 pls.). + Biol, Centralbl., viii. (1888) pp. 148-55. 7 574 SUMMARY OF OURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO separated off, and wander into the yolk and represent the endoderm of the true gastrula. The Aphides thus preserve a primitive character. (2) Apical plates and bilateral symmetry.—The blastoderm thickens at the apical pole to form the apical plate, which mainly gives origin to the brain. JBilateral symmetry is soon established, and is due to differences of growth and to displacement in the outer germinal layer. One half of the blastoderm diminishes greatly to form a thin skin, the serosa ; the other side thickens greatly, especially in the apical plate. As the thickening increases, the whole portion is markedly shortened, and the apical plate displaced until it occupies the inferior pole of the egg. The result is the establishment of symmetrical halves, and this is soon emphasized by the median division of the plate into two apical lobes. (8) The germinal streak and the secondary yolk.—The appearance of the latter obscures the relations of the former. The secondary yolk penetrates the egg from the outside, but can only do so by the apposi- tion of the still open blastopore against the follicular epithelium, and by its conerescence with the same. In abnormal cases this does not occur, and such ova are most instructive. As in other Bilateralia, the closure of the blastopore seems non-concentric, an inconspicuous elevation over the blastopore forms a short germinal streak. Details are given to show that in extant aphides the germinal streak is established upon the previous blastopore. Will also emphasizes that the secondary yolk does not really affect the endoderm cells. (4) Reproductive rudiments and mesoderm.—Directly after the appear- ance of the at first cylindrical germinal streak, certain indifferent cells on the thickened side of the germinal cylinder towards the apical plate, in- crease in size, multiply rapidly, and form the reproductive rudiments. Thereafter the mesoderm is formed by a process of invagination within a groove, along the median line of the thickened side of the germinal cylinder. The formation of endoderm and mesoderm in Aphis are two successive stages of one and the same process of gastrulation. (5) The embryonic membranes in these and other insects are to be regarded as modifications of portions of the blastoderm, and of the germinal streak, which were already present in rudiment in pre-existent forms. (6) Segments and body-cavity. Transverse grooves are seen in the mesoderm plate, which divides into two lateral strands. These leave the median line free except in the region of the future mouth. The cavities of the segments arise by a folding of the single sheathed mesoderm in consequence of the formation of appendages. They all open medianly. A primary body-cavity arises as a cleft between the blastoderm and the apposed portion of the germinal streak. A secondary body-cavity appears from the above folds, but the details of this can hardly be given. The whole parietal mesoderm is utilized for mus- culature, The intestinal peritoneum alone remains along with the endodermic fatty body to line the final body-cavity. (7) The products of the layers. The endoderm constitutes the mid-gut, part remains in the secondary yolk, the rest forms fatty body and blood. The mesoderm forms the peritoneal sheath of the gut, the heart, and above all the musculature. The ectoderm forms trachex, epithelium of mouth and hind-gut, skin, sense-organs, and nervous system. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETO. ; 575 yy. Arachnida. Mental Powers of Spiders.*—Mr. G. W. and Mrs. EB. G. Peckham have made a large number of observations on the mental powers of spiders. Sense of Smell. Three species (Argyroepeira hortorum, Dolomedes tenebrosus, and Herpyllus ecclesiasticus) did not respond to the tests. In all other cases it was evident that the scent was perceived by the spiders. Sense of Hearing. All the Epeirids responded promptly to the tests, being evidently alarmed by the sound of the tuning-fork, but the spiders that make no web gave not the slightest heed to the sound. It is suggested that this difference may be partly explained by the difference in the feeding habits of the two groups. Maternal Emotions. Notwithstanding many efforts the authors never found one of the Lycoside that was constant in her affection for as long as forty-eight hours. A female of Clubiona pallens, however, remembered her eggs for this length of time, and when they were returned to her, she spun a web over them in the corner of the box in which they were placed. Theridiwm globosum had the best memory for her cocoon; after. fifty-one hours’ absence she at once went to the eggs, and touched them with her legs. Several species of Attide and Thomiside did not remember their cocoons for twenty-four hours, although these spiders, which do not carry the egg-sac about with them, remain near it for from fifteen to twenty days. Sense of Sight. It is well known that spiders are supposed not to see their own cocoons at a very short distance ; the authors explain this by describing how the cocoon is made without its maker ever even seeing it, and they come to the conclusion that the use of the sense of touch is necessary for the spider to be able to perceive the cocoon. Colour Sense. ‘There is a marked preference for red, and there can be no doubt that some spiders have a distinct colour sense. Feigning Death. The authors consider the gist of the matter to be this; certain Epeiride, when alarmed, drop from the web and remain quiet for a longer or shorter time, their concealment being greatly assisted by the protective colouring which is present to some extent in nearly all of them. This amounts to nothing more than that when another spider runs to a place of safety, an Epeirid drops a greater or less distance to a place of safety. Both then remain quiet, unless dis- turbed, in which case the first spider trusts to its powers of running, while the Epeirid often (but not invariably) finds its best chance of safety in keeping quiet unless it is actually abused ; the habit of keeping quiet also insures the spider’s safe return to its web when the danger is over. There is no need to call in “ kataplexy ” to explain the origin or development of a habit which can be so easily explained by natural selection alone. The habit is found in its greatest development among the comparatively sluggish Hpeiridx, whereas it is badly developed or lacking in the running and jumping spiders which are able to move with astonishing rapidity. Mistakes of Spiders. Spiders were found to be much less clever than supposed, in regard to the recognition of their cocoons, little pith-balls leading them quite astray. If allowed a choice a Lycosid will select the * Journ. of Morphology, i. (1887) pp. 383-419, 576 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO cocoon rather than the pith-ball, but in the absence of the former will content herself either with a pith-ball or a web-covered shot. The carrying of the latter indicates a poorly developed muscular sense. Brain of Phalangida.*—M. G. Saint-Rémy has examined the brains of Phalangium opilio, and P. parietinum. He finds that the brain may be divided into two ganglionic regions; the optic ganglion which gives rise to a pair of optic nerves, and a rostro-mandibular ganglion from which arise an unpaired nerve which passes to the rostrum, and a pair of mandibular nerves which go to the chelicere. Though the brain of the Phalangida is much simpler than that of Insects or Crustacea it has some points in common with them which are of some importance. At the origin of each optic nerve there is a lobe, of comparatively complicated structure, which is altogether comparable to what is known as the optic ganglion in Insects; the same lobe, ina simpler condition, has been observed in the Scorpion and in Spiders. In the optic ganglion of the Arachnida there are, further, ganglionic nuclei which seem to be found in sensorial ganglia only, and have been observed in Insects, Crustacea, and Myriopoda. 5. Prototracheata. Monograph of the Genus Peripatus.}—Mr. A. Sedgwick has prepared a monograph of the genus Peripatus, which is based on the examination of a considerable number of specimens. He has been able to establish a definite series of characters which distinguish quite sharply all the species found in one area of distribution from those found in others. The number of walking-legs varies considerably within the same species, and a large number of individuals are required to determine the limits of the variation. The other specific characters are very inconspicuous, and relate simply to the texture and tint of the skin. A general account is given of the genus, within which, as is pointed out, there is no gradation; the number of species is small, and the cha- racteristics of the genus are equally sharply marked in all. The long continuance of this ancient form may be explained by its peculiar habits of life—habitual avoiding of the light of day, and seeking the obscurity and protection afforded by spaces beneath stones and under the bark of trees. It is an animal of striking beauty: “the exquisite sensitiveness and constantly changing form of the antenne, the well-rounded plump body, the eyes set like small diamonds on the side of the head, the delicate feet, and, above all, the rich colouring and velvety texture of the skin, all combine to give these animals an aspect of quite exceptional beauty.” 4 South Africa there are four species—P. capensis, P. balfouri, and P. brevis from Table Mountain, and P. moseleyi from near Williamstown. The Australasian species are P. nove Zealandize from New Zealand, and P. leuckarti from Queensland, Australia. From the Neotropical Region P. edwardsii from Caracas, P. im thurmi of Sclater (or P. demeraranus, as Mr. Sedgwick proposes to call it) from Demerara, P. trinidadensis (P. edwardsii Kennel) and P. torquatus, described by v. Kennel from Trinidad, and P. juliformis from St. Vincent ; the Chilian species may be called P. chilensis ; Schmarda has given a short description of P. quitensis * Comptes Rendusg, evi. (1888) pp. 1429-31. + Quart. Journ. Mier. Sci., xxviii. (1888) pp. 431-93 (7 pls.). ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 577 from Quito, Ecuador. Some specimens in the British and Copenhagen Museums cannot be specifically determined. The author has some doubts as to the locality of the species described by Horst from Sumatra (P. sumatranus), as it has a number of the characters of Neotropical species. Anatomy of Peripatus capensis and P. nove Zealandie.*—Miss L. Sheldon has some notes on the points in which these two species differ from P. edwardsit. P. capensis always seems to have crural glands in all but the first pair of legs; in P. nove Zealandiz they seem to be quite wanting, while in P. edwardsi they are found on some of the legs of the male. In P. nove Zealandiz the external aperture of the generative apparatus is placed on the ventral surface of the body in front of the last pair of legs, and there are no segmental organs in this pair; in P. capensis the generative aperture is placed at the posterior end of the body, and the last pair of legs has segmental organs. In P. nove Zealandize the accessory glandular tubes lie more laterally in the body than in P. capensis, and they also differ in opening quite independently of the vas deferens. This duct is much shorter in P. capensis than in P. nove Zealandiz ; and this difference appears to be due to the very great difference between the spermatophores of the two species; in P. nove Zealandiz the duct very closely resembles that of P. edwardsit. The ovarian funnel described in P. edwardsii is not found in the New Zealand species. e. Crustacea. Intercoxal Lobe of certain Crayfishes.;—Mr. W. J. Mackay has ex- amined certain appendages connected with the branchie of Astacopsis Franklinii, which have been figured but not described by Prof. Huxley. These bodies, which may be called the intercoxal lobes, have the upper portion of the anterior face attached to the arthrodial membrane, while the lower surface of the anterior face is attached to the base of the coxopodite, which is smooth and convex. The lower portion of the surface first exposed when the base of the podobranch is removed, is covered with setze which project prominently from its surface; the anterior face is concave, and is so well able to fit on the convex base of the coxopodite. The whole arrangement is such as to lead us to suppose that the inter- coxal lobe acts as a valve between the thoracic limbs and the branchio- stegite, and prevents the too ready entrance of foreign bodies. In Astacus jluviatilis the only representative of this lobe is a small hard ridge on the arthrodial membrane of the fourth pair of legs; in Homarus vulgaris the lobes occur in the limbs of the 9th to the 13th segments. No repre- sentative of this structure was found in any anomurous or brachyurous crustacean which was examined. Development of Alpheus.j;—Mr. F. H. Herrick has been able to make a complete study of the development of Alpheus. He has been convinced that the germinal layers in the early stages of development have not the significance which is usually assigned to them. “The mass of cells which results from gastrulation, some of which are poured into the yolk, is an unspecialized indifferent layer, and cannot be regarded * Quart, Journ. Micr. Sci., xxviii. (1888) pp. 495-9. + Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S. Wales, ii. (1888) pp. 967-9. ¢ Johns-Hopkins Univ. Circ., vii. (1888) pp. 36-7. 578 SUMMARY OF OURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO as mesoderm and endoderm in the sense in which these terms are used.” The ectoderm is, by its position and function, more clearly defined from the first. The enveloping chorion functions as an egg-sac. When the fertilized nucleus divides, its products pass towards the surface until a syncytium of eight nuclei is formed; the yolk segments over the whole surface simultaneously into the same number of partial pyramids ; each of these latter has a large nucleus at its base, while its apex fuses with the common yolk-mass in the interior of the egg. After a time, by retardation in one half, the egg loses its radial symmetry, and becomes two-sided, When the primitive blastoderm is formed, a general migration of nuclei takes place from the surface to the yolk within; this is followed by a partial secondary segmentation of the food-yolk into balls. The gastrula is modified, a slight invagination occurring where the superficial cells are thickest; the included cells multiply rapidly, and form a mass of similar elements, some of which pass into the yolk. 'The protoplasm surrounding the nuclei of these cells is prolonged into a reticulum which incloses myriads of small yolk-fragments, and probably digests them intercellularly. At the beginning of the egg-nauplius period, when numerous yolk- cells have passed forward and joined the inner surface of the embryonic ectoderm, certain new bodies begin to appear in great numbers. These are the secondary mesoderm cells, and they arise by a process of endo- genous growth from the embryonic cells or nuclei, and chiefly from the wandering cells. Some of them appear to become ordinary mesoderm cells, while others seem to be converted directly into blood-corpuscles. The plasticity of the embryonic cells and layers and the comparative slowness with which they are clearly differentiated are very striking ; the cell-mass developed round the blastopore cannot be artificially divided into layers. The endoderm, which does not appear definitely till comparatively late, is developed from yolk-cells which assume a peripheral position. Moina bathycolor and the greatest depths at which Cladocera are found.*—Dr. O. Nordqvist refers to Herr J. Richard’s paper on Moina bathycolor Vernet, and points out that last year he suggested that this form was probably the same as Ilyocryptus acutifrons Sars. Ilyo-* eryptus, Alona, and Eurycercus are the Cladocera which are found at greatest depths—as far as 200 metres down. Vermes. a, Annelida. Embryology of Vermilia cespitosa and Eupomatus elegans.,— Mr. W. A. Haswell has some notes on the development of these two Annelids, in both of which artificial impregnation was readily effected. In Vermilia segmentation is equal and regular, as in Serpula and Pomatoceros. 'The blastopore, which is at first nearly terminal, becomes shifted to that side of the larva which will be the ventral; at the same time it becomes elongated and slit-like, the anterior end of the slit widening to form the mouth, while the anus is formed near the posterior end at a somewhat later stage. When the process of invagination * Zool. Anzeig., xi. (1888) pp. 264-5. } Proc. Linn. Soc. N. 8. Wales, i. (1888) pp. 1032-4. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 579 commences the larva is uniformly covered with cilia; the cephalic end soon loses them, but becomes surrounded just in front of the mouth by a strong preoral ciliated band. The epiblast of the cephalic end becomes thinner than the rest, except in the centre, where a group of thicker cells remains to give rise to the cerebral ganglion. From the broader anterior end of the pyriform embryo one or sometimes two long and slender motionless flagella occasionally grow out; the alimentary canal becomes densely ciliated internally, and a few irregularly placed cells are to be found between the epi- and hypoblast, which are probably the foundations of the middle layer. In the course of the third day the preoral circlet of cilia becomes elevated on a distinct, slightly oblique ridge, and a reniform eye-spot becomes developed at a little distance from the ganglion, with which it is connected by a fibrous strand. 10 22:5 5°6 14°] 12 27°0 6°2 13-0 15 34:0 6°6 i BG 18 40°5 70 oo 24 54°0 75 739 NS The intensity of light, taking that of the 3-line objective as = 1, is for the objectives of 6, 12, 18, 24 lines focal length, 0°53, 0-25, 0-144, 0-091 respectively. With screw Microscopes, objectives of less than 8-15 lines focal length have rarely been employed, in spite of the advantages which they would realize. It is advisable with the strongest objectives, and even if possible with the others, to use orthoscopic eye-pieces which give greater definition of image near the borders of the field. To test the relative advantages of short and long focal length in the objective, a comparison was made between a Microscope of the author’s construction, and a theodolite Microscope, with an objective of 30 mm. focal length, 6*7 mm. free aperture, and (as it stood 38°6 mm. from the scale) 10° angular aperture. The magnifying power was 40 (objective. 3°5 and eye-piece 11°3). The total length from the scale to the end of the eye-piece was 20°5 em. The other Microscope had a length of 95 mm. from the scale to the end of the eye-piece, magnifying power = 50 (objective 3:6, eye-piece 14), focal length of objective = 5 lines, angular aperture = 20°. It was found that with the smaller Microscope the intensity of light was three times as great as with the larger. There are cases in which for special reasons long Microscopes are desirable or necessary, as with dividing machines where the heat of the body is to be avoided, or where it is necessary to read from a distance, The angular aperture may here be increased by using an objective com- posed of two weaker lenses of greater diameter so as to gain light; or the tube may be lengthened by a terrestrial eye-piece (with erect image) without weakening the objective; or the light may be increased by setting the Microscope at an angle to the plane of the scale. This last contrivance, which "is so convenient with vernier lenses, can only be applied to Microscopes to a limited extent. The inclined position serves to reflect light from the silvered scale into the lens or Microscope; so that the divisions appear as sharply defined black lines upon a bright white ground. In the normal position of the Microscope, when it is perpendicular to the scale, the angles of incidence and reflection must both be 90°, i.e. the light must come vertically downwards; this is effected by the illuminator. If the Microscope is inclined backwards the field is brighter, but the divisions are not visible in their whole length, but only in a small part. In practice, however, a backward inclination of 10° may be attained; the light incident between 80° and 90° is then reflected from the scale directly into the Microscope and ZOCLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 643 gives a much brighter field, while the above-mentioned objection, which in no way diminishes the accuracy of the measurements, has also a certain advantage; for since powerful Microscopes are very sensitive in respect of exact focusing, the plane of the scale must be accurately perpendicular to the axis of the Microscope, or the image will not remain clear during a complete rotation; whereas with the inclined position one part is always in focus. ; Describing the special advantages of his own arrangement of the Microscope which has now béen largely used since 1879, the author says: “The great advantage is simplicity; the few divisions of the micrometer are easily taken in by the eye, so that no other method of measurement is so rapid. Further subdivisions or transverse lines are unnecessary and troublesome, and do not increase the accuracy. A portion of the scale of the instrument is separated by the Microscope into 100 parts; one-tenth of these are read by the direct divisions of the micrometer, and the tenths of the latter by estimation. The reading is not conducted in any other way except for special purposes. If, for example, a circle is divided by one-sixth of a degree, or at intervals of ten minutes, and the micrometer contains ten equal intervals which occupy exactly one division of the circle, each such interval cor- responds to one minute. If the latter can by estimation be subdivided into tenths (by practice even into half-tenths) the unit of reading is six (or three) seconds. Fig. 101 shows the sixth division of a degree on the circle near the ten divisions of the micrometer. The divisions of the circle are numbered from degree to degree with 0 to 9, either by the pantograph or with figures made as small as possible and as near as possible to the lines so that at least one number shall be visible in the Microscope whose field covers more than one degree. It is not then necessary to use a special index or a lens to read the angle; for the principal numbers at each 10 degrees may be made large and placed outside the silver strip where they can be easily seen with the naked eye. If the circle is not covered the illuminator will at once show whether the reading is between 10 and 20 or 30 and 40, &c., and the single degrees are given by the divisions in the Microscope. If the circle is covered it will be necessary to have, in addition to the two small apertures for the Microscopes, a larger one inclosing about 15 degrees, at a point 90° from them, and having in the middle of its glass a black line by which the approximate angle is read off. Sup- posing that this line shows the reading to be between 30° and 40°, and that the micrometer stands as shown in the figure, the reading will be 33° 37':3 or 33° 87' 18”. In the inverting Microseope the division on the circle always runs towards the long or zero mark of the micrometer, i.e. from left to right when the numbers of the horizontal circle run from right to left. The divisions of the micrometer are reckoned from zero point in the opposite direction, from right to left. With vertical circles where the numbers go from left to right, because the circle turns with the telescope, every- thing is reversed; in the right-hand Microscope alone the graduations are reckoned from right to left or downwards, and the micrometer divisions upwards; in the left-hand Microscope the graduations are read upwards and the micrometer downwards. For small instruments it is convenient to have the scale divided at intervals of 20 minutes; a micrometer division is then equivalent to 2 minutes; in this case it is 644 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO not necessary to take the mean of the two Microscope readings since their sum will give the mean directly. A glance into the Microscopes is sufficient to give the mean of the readings and scarcely occupies a quarter of the time necessary for vernier readings. The scale gradua- tions, which cannot be made so fine upon metal as the micrometer graduations upon glass, and which are magnified three to five times by the objective, appear much broader than the latter. With ordinary instruments which are finely divided a line on the scale covers at least Fia, 101. 80 seconds to one minute, and from this fact would result a source of error if means were not found to obviate it. Instead of using the whole breadth of the mark the attention is confined to the same edge of it, namely that which is on the right-hand side towards the long mark. It is still better if the graduations terminate at one end in a point, such as is generally produced by the graving tool; but the pointed end should always be that at which the divisions are level, and not towards the pro- longations of the whole degrees and half degrees. The tenths, &e., can then be very accurately estimated if the micrometer divisions project beyond the pointed ends (fig. 101).” : The divisions should be short (not more than 1/2 mm. in length), and as fine as possible; the exact coincidence of ten divisions in the micrometer with one division of the scale is secured as nearly as possible by preliminary calculations and then made absolute by a slight movement of the objective-tube. With powerful Microscopes it is desirable to have some simple and ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 645 steady means of focusing; on this point the author says: “In place of the ordinary ring with clamp enclosing the Microscope tube, I apply above and below two segments /1' (fig. 102) which accurately fit the tube, most closely however at the edges, so that they are not quite in contact in the middle. The upper one, next to the eye-piece O and micrometer, Fie. 102. is only fixed to the holder H by a screw so that it can be turned slightly. The other, which is broader at its lower end, has a square pin, which passes through the holder, and is also secured by a screw; it can be slightly moved sideways by two milled head screws n to bring the reading accurately to 180°. Into the two bearings Jl’ the Microscope-tube T is placed and is held in position by a screw s which passes into the Microscope-tube; for this purpose a thick ring r, having a screw thread _ for s,is let into the tube. s is not to be turned so far as to fix the Microscope. Between T and H, and attached to the latter, is a small lever h turning on a screw; through this s passes and can be slightly raised or lowered by touching the end of the lever after slightly loosen- ing s, which is finally screwed up tight. In this way I obtain a satisfactory fine-adjustment by simple means.” To clean the micrometer, if necessary, the upper part of the Micro- scope unscrews. The connecting-piece v contains the micrometer m which is to be adjusted parallel to the scale. This would generally be done by rotating the tube in the rings which hold it, but with the above fe-adjustment the tube cannot turn, and it is necessary to elongate v so that it passes down inside T and fits accurately in the lower part of the 1888. 7) 5 646 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO tube and can be rotated with it. m is fixed in position by the screw a. The eye-piece is movable, to suit different eyes. The illuminator # is screwed to the holder of the objective b, and is turned towards the light by a small handle c. The scale should be covered with thin glass brought as near to it as possible in order that the illuminator may not be further from the scale than is necessary. The author claims that his method of reading has also the advantage that errors in the dividing are at once detected by the failure of coin- cidence between the micrometer divisions and those of the scale, and he concludes with the results of some observations with a theodolite of 13-5 cm. diameter divided to one-third of a degree, which showed the mean error in an angular measurement to be + 3”, and the maximum error + 5”, Lreacu, W.—The Lantern Microscope. (Cf. this Journal, 1887, pp. 1019-21.) Trans. and Ann. Rep. Manchester Micr. Soc., 1887, pp. 52-7 (1 fig.). Quinn, E. P.—The Advantages and Deficiencies of the Lantern Microscope. Trans. and Ann. Rep. Manchester Micr. Soc., 1887, pp. 26-7. (2) Eye-pieces and Objectives. Hartnack’s new Objective.—We transcribe the following paragraph verbatim :*— “ A new objective, after calculations of Dr. Schréder, has been pro- duced by Professor Hartnack, in Potsdam, whose microscopic objectives enjoy a well-deserved reputation, and which is destined to fill out the place between the photographic aplanat and the microscopic system. The weak microscopic systems, which are ordinarily applied, if more extended microscopic objects, histological preparations, polished stones, and metals are to be photographed, have besides their proportionate light-weakness and their chemical focus, a very moderate expansion of the evenly illuminated available picture field, comprising hardly more than 6 to 8 degrees. The small aplanats, which are used for the same purpose, require very strong diaphragms and give a picture field with little plane. The new objective, which is furnished without diaphragms, comprises an extremely large picture angle of almost 26°, and covers to the edge of the field with almost equal sharpness and without the least trace of chemical focus. The instrument, which I have tested, has an equivalent focal distance of about 50 mm., and forms a sharp object of nearly 4 sq. em. The light power is quite extraordinary ; for enlargements 10 to 15 times by ordinary 15-candle gaslight the exposure was 3 to 8 seconds upon bromide of silver gelatin. The instruments, whose general intro- duction is only to be desired, can also be executed in other sizes, as for instance from 4 to 6 inches equivalent focal distance.” Penny, W. G.—Eye-pieces—Physical Aberration and Distortion. Engl. Mech.. XLVII. (1888) p. 215 (1 fig.). (8) INuminating and other Apparatus. Hilgendorf’s Auxanograph.t — This instrument, devised by Dr. F. Hilgendorf, isa micropantograph designed to produce outline sketches (orthogonal projections) of small objects down to less than 1 mm. on an increased scale of from 2 to 10. The four arms Wb, W V, ZY, X Y (fig. 103), are supported on long * Dr. H. W. Vogel in *‘ Anthony’s Photographic Bulletin,’ 1888, p, 230. + Zeitsehr. f. Instrumentenk,, vii. (1887) pp. 290-1 (1 fig.). ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 647 vertical axes at W, X, Z, Y, above a drawing board; at f is a rod, held by drawing pins, which serves as the fixed point about which the whole instrument turns in drawing; the paper is placed under the pencil at b ; the object is at d under a lens which is carried bya diopter in ZY, and which has a cross engraved upon Fic. 103. its upper surface. The pencil at b is moved by the W. x hand in such a way as always to keep the centre of the cross upon the outline of the object as it appears to the eye aboved. The scale of the drawing may be varied by sliding the rod f and the lens d along their bars; the points fd b are to be always in the 7 an same straight line. Between Vand Zareslotscor- ||, f responding to an amplification of 2, 5/2, 8, 4, 6, 8, and 10 respectively, and the lens is adjusted by means of a scale along ZY having its zero pointat V7 Z. The board being set horizontal by a level, and the upper opening of the tube being adjustable, the line joining the two openings may be made vertical by a plummet, so that the line of vision is always perpendicular to the plane of the drawing. The lens is made horizontal by means of a pendulum movement about the screw which fixes the lens-holder to the tube. The lens may also be adjusted by means of a horizontal mirror placed below it, the engraved cross being made to coincide with its image seen in the mirror. When higher powers are used the object is to be raised by a support to the correct focal distance. When a large object is being drawn, the long axis at Y may be replaced by a short one ; and in this case the bar X Y may be pro- longed beyond Y, and fitted with a long axis at its end. The instrument is designed “rather with a view to practical con- venience than to realize with mathematical accuracy the exact repro- duction of an object.” Slide for observing Soap-bubble Films.*—A simple means for showing soap-films by the Microscope, may, Mr. F. T. Chapman points Fic. 104. out, consist of a thin strip of wood (3 in. by 1 in.), or other material, with a metal plate secured to it. The plate should have one end * Read before the Washington Microscopical Society. Cf. Amer. Mon. Mier Journ., ix, (1888) pp. 81-2 (1 fig). Zax 2 648 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO bent upward from the strip at an angle of 45°, and have a square hole through it. The film increases in brilliancy as it grows thin. The light should be thrown on the film from above, so that the beam will be reflected up the tube of the instrument. The proper angle can readily be found by trial. The following are some directions for making suitable soap- bubbles :— (1) Shave Marseilles (Castille) soap and dry thoroughly in the sun or ona stove. (2) Put the dried shavings ina bottle with alcohol of exactly 80 per cent. strength (specific gravity 0°865), sufficient to form a saturated solution at 60° Fahr., the solution then marking 74° on the centesimal alcoholometer, with a density of 0°880. The solution must be made cold, as warm alcohol would dissolve too much soap, and the solution would solidify when cool. (3) Make a mixture of glycerin and water, so as to mark 17:1° Baumé, or have a density of 1°35 at 68° Fahr. This solution can be made of equal parts of the most concentrated glycerin and water, and it is well to heat the solution in a water-bath. (4) To make the final solution, take 100 parts, by volume, of the glycerin solution (3) to 25 parts of the soap solution (2), mix and boil to expel alcohol. When cool, pour into a graduate and add water to equal 100 volumes. Then filter several times to remove oleate of lime. Common glycerin is apt to make the solution turbid on account of the presence of gypsum and lime. A funnel with a plug of cotton makes the best filter, as the flow can be regulated by the tightness of the cotton in the funnel. Soap-bubbles, not more than 4 in. in diameter. and sup- ported on a tripod under a bell-glass, are said to last for an hour. The preparation is suitable for Plateau’s experiments with thin. films, soap- bubbles, &e. Plateau’s soap-bubble solution is prepared as follows :— Dissolve one part of Marseilles soap in 40 parts of water (rain or distilled), which may be warmed. When cool, filter through very porous filter paper and add Price’s glycerin in the proportion of 11 parts of glycerin to 15 parts of the soap solution. Shake thoroughly, and allow the solution to stand for seven days where the temperature will not fall below 67° Fahr. Then cool to 37° Fahr. and filter, keeping a bottle of ice in the funnel. The first parts filtered should be refiltered, using very porous filter paper. Halbrook’s brown oil silk soap, or his Gallipoli soap, and Sheering and Glatz’s glycerin work very well. Long standing and decantation from sediment may take the place of the second filtration. After all the trouble, the mixture may not give very good results. An excellent soap-bubble solution may be formed by a compound of oleate of soda and pure glycerin. Bubbles 2 feet in diameter may be blown, and bubbles have been kept under glass for 48 hours. A good and easily prepared solution may be made by shaving 4 oz. of Marseilles, or better, of pure oil soap, and placing it in a quart of distilled or rain-water, Shake until a saturated solution is formed, and let it settle for a few hours. The solution should then be clear. If otherwise, pour off the water, and add fresh water to the same soap and try again. To the clear solution add about one-half the quantity of glycerin that is absolutely pure. The presence of the least quantity of acid in the glycerin is fatal to good results and therefore it is recom- ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 649 mended that for any soap-bubble solution the ingredients be the best and purest obtainable, and that chemically pure glycerin be used. Schafer’s Hot-water Circulation Stage and Swift's Regulator.— Prof. H. A. Schifer’s hot stage (fig. 105), consists simply of a metal box with a pipe at each end; hot water entering by the lower end, and flowing away at the upper. Messrs. Swift and Son use as a regulator for maintaining an even temperature what is practically the same apparatus as was described in Fig. 105. READINGTON this Journal, 1887, p. 316, a pipe for the gas leading into a tube with mercury, whence it flows by another pipe to the gas-jet beneath the water reservoir, the milled head screw regulating the height of the mercury in the tube in the first instance. Bertrand’s Refractometer.*—In order to measure the index of refrac- tion of pyroxene, amphibole, &c., which is > 1:69 with this apparatus,{ M. E. Bertrand has made the hemispherical lens of flint glass (n = 1-962), and proposes as moistening fluid methylen iodide (n = 1-75), the refractive index of which might possibly be increased by dissolving other substances in it. * Bull. Soc. Franc. Min., x. (1887) pp. 140-1. + See this Journal, 1887, p. 469. 650 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO SEAMAN.—Exhibition of Lamp and Vertical Illuminator. (He said, “You may remember that some time ago I showed a vertical illuminator made by Mr. Chas. Fasoldtof Albany. I have here a slide of his rulings, which contains 19 bands, from 5000 to 120,000 to the inch, which is no doubt a very excellent specimen of this kind of work, similar to the cele- brated Nobert plates. I have no hesitation in saying that on an object of this kind, with an immersion-lens, the definition obtained by this illuminator is superior to anything I have ever seen, and that by its means the human vision may be pushed to its utmost limit.” Amer. Mon. Micr. Journ., TX. (1888) p. 97. (4) Photomicrography. Leitz’s small Photomicrographic Apparatus.—This, fig. 106, is an adaptation of several somewhat similar forms which have been already Fie. 106. = a G""7”ZZZZ ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 651 described. Its speciality consists in attaching the camera to a rod which is extensible in a socket (with a clamp screw), by which means the camera can be made to fit any Microscope, whatever its height. Plossl’s Focusing Arrangement.—Messrs. S. Pléssl apply to their photomicrographic camera the fine-adjustment shown in fig. 107. Fic. 107. ————— = —=—==>= This is practically a very large form of the Jackson fine-adjustment, the lever which raises and depresses the movable nose-piece being actuated by a large rod with a “ Hooke’s joint,” the handle of which is at the end of the camera. _ It appears to us (without having practically tested the point), that the enormous leverage of the focusing rod must add greatly to the difficulty of focusing. Instantaneous Photomicrography.* — Sig. S. Capranica comes to the following conclusions as the results of his experiments on instanta- neous photomicrography :— (1) Rapid photography 1/20 of a second, or very rapid 1/200 of a second, can be obtained with the photographic Microscope if very high powers and immersion lenses be used. (2) By means of a special shutter and a particular arrangement, any number of successive negatives of the movements of an object can be obtained just as, macroscopically, the flight of birds, and the rapid move-= ments of other animals (Marey, Maybridge, &c.), have been. (8) By the method of successive positions, the author has succeeded in reproducing upon the same sheet the different planes of any prepara- tion, obtaining thus a photograph unique in its entirety. The author particularly calls the attention of microscopists to the results noticed in (2), as they are entirely new and susceptible of numerous and important applications in the study of the Infusoria and of all living micro-organisms. Kirt, T.—Ueber Mikrophotographien. (On Photomicrographs.) Oesterr. Monatschr. f. Therheithk., 1888, No. 6, 18 pp. Miuuer, N. J. C.—Atlas der Holzstructur dargestellt in Mikrophotographien. (Atlas of wood structure represented in photomicrographs.) 21 pls. and 60 figs., 4to, Halle, 1888. * Journ. de Microgy., xii, (1888) p. 227. 652 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO Simmons, W. J.—Magnification in Photomicrographs. Sci.-Gossip, 1888, p. 162. Wa.ums.ey, W. H.—Photomicrography and the making of Lantern Slides. Anthony’s Phot. Bulletin, XTX. (1888) pp. 281-3. (5) Microscopical Optics and Manipulation. BLACKBURN, W.—Diffraction Spectra. Trans, and Ann. Rep. Manchester Mier. Soc., 1887, pp. 58-60. Crisp, F.—Micromillimetre. [Announcement of the decision of the Council and Fellows, ante, p. 503. Nature, XXX VIII. (1888) p. 221. NELSon, E. M.— [Nomenclature of eye-pieces and objectives—Relation of aperture to power, Xe. ; also letters by T. F. S., F. D’Agen, and A.S. Z.] Engl. Mech., XLVI. (1888) pp. 190-1, 216. Royston-Picort, G. W.—Microscopical Advances. XXXVII., XX XVIII. [Researches in high-power definition—Attenuated lines, circles and dots.] Engl. Mech., XLVI. (1888) pp. 293 ( 2 figs.), 447 (1 fig.). Ricker, A. W.—Micro-millimetre. [Reply to Mr. Crisp’s letter, supra.] Nature, XX XVIII. (1888) p. 244. SaLomons, D.—Note on Depth of Focus. Journ. and Trans. Phot, Soc. Gr. Britain, XII. (1888) pp. 160-5. (6) Miscellaneous. American Microscopes.*—Mr. C. F. Cox in his inaugural address as President of the New York Microscopical Society, said that it was “not long since some professed advocates of the popularization of science went through the form of reading us microscopists out of the general body of scientists, on the ground that we were not entitled to fellowship or encouragement because we were only ‘amateurs’ (that is say, lovers of science), were ‘hangers on to the regular scientific army,’ were ‘universal gatherers, and were ‘ undertaking to divide the sciences according to the tools used;’ and we were spoken of contemptuously as ‘delighting in a formidable and extensive deal of brass stand” To most of these charges it was hardly necessary to put in any formal defence, for it was obvious that the animus of the attack upon us was the old-fashioned delusion that there is some kind of merit in doing scientific work with poor appliances. But another phase of this general notion has recently manifested itself in a vigorous onslaught upon American Microscopes, for which, with evident appropriateness, the vehicle selected has been the journal which three years ago promulgated the now celebrated bull of excommunication. According to the latest champion of scientific orthodoxy, who declares that he has ‘seen and examined a great many different stands, and the lenses of many manu- facturers, ‘it is undesirable to recommend a student to purchase any Microscope whatsoever of American manufacture, but it is desirable ‘to always counsel him to obtain, if possible, one of the German or French instruments, which, as nearly as I can make out, conform to the common model of twenty-five or thirty years ago. The general objection to American stands seems to be that they furnish more mechanism than the particular worker who wrote the complaint happens to require for his particular work. He makes a more specific charge, however, that they have a joint in the body by means of which they may be tipped out of a vertical position, when the makers ought to have * Journ. New York Micr. Soc., iv. (1888) pp. 106-15. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 653 known that he and his pupils never care to tip their Microscopes; and another specification is made of the fact that the length of the tube has not been determined solely with reference to the height of the ,table or the chair which this rather exacting critic commonly employs; at least this is the inference I draw from his demand that tubes should never be made longer than suits his convenience. Now, I presume you find it as difficult as I do to understand why all supposed faults are laid at the doors of American manufacturers; for surely all bad Microscopes are not American, even if all American Microscopes are bad. But the unreasonable and sweeping denunciation in which this somewhat self-opinionated iconoclast indulges is only another illustration of the familiar phenomenon of blotting out all the rest of the world by holding a comparatively small object close to one’s eye; for here is an acknowledged expert in histology, who is so com- pletely absorbed in his speciality as to be entirely oblivious to, or regard- less of, the instrumental needs of all other branches of microscopy. In common with others who have lately made public display of their ignorance of the vastness and variety of microscopical research, he would actually prescribe ‘for one that uses the Microscope for real work’ a single simple pattern which, as you may imagine, would be pretty strictly limited to the requirements of his own restricted field of investigation. Instruments which perhaps meet the demands of different classes of observers are ‘constructed with a view of entrapping in- experienced purchasers.’ Unfortunately, this sort of narrow opposition to the inevitable elaboration of scientific implements is not a thing which decreases with the general increase of knowledge. It has accompanied every step in the development of the Microscope and its accessories, and I suppose it will go right on in the future; for I can hardly imagine a time when some specialist will not think it praiseworthy to contemn ‘the latest improvements,’ and take personal pride in pointing to the results of his own labours accomplished by the use of only the simplest mechanical aids. Within a short time we have heard learned sermons preached upon the superiority of specimens prepared without the employment of circular cover-glasses, and, of course, without the assistance of the turn- table. It was admitted that they were not very attractive to the naked eye; but then there was ‘no nonsense’ about them, they were intended ‘for use!’ So, too, we have witnessed a later contest over the micro- tome. What earnest homilies we have listened to upon the superlative excellence of the German method of free-hand section-cutting, and how positively we have been assured that all mechanical section-cutters were - only delusions and snares. I have to admit that some of the later developments of this accessory are rather formidable-looking engines which seem capable almost of cutting timber for commercial purposes ; but I notice that the gentleman who denounces all American Microscopes as being too complicated, is himself the inventor of one of those elaborate slicing machines. Yet the automatic microtome plainly has come to stay, so have the mechanical stage, the swinging substage, and many other contrivances over which we have seen battle waged. Shall we ever forget the terrific struggle with which the homogeneous- immersion lens was obliged to win its way to a footing in the micro- scopical world? Men of no small importance blocked the road, not 654 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO with drawn swords, but with drawn diagrams which most certainly proved, if they proved anything, that an angle of more than 180° was an optical impossibility, and that, no matter what people might think they saw, they at all events could not see round a corner; for, as old John Trumbull wrote,— ‘Optics sharp it needs, I ween, To see what is not to be seen.’ But now how perverse and prejudiced all that opposition seems, and how simple and reasonable the new system of numerical aperture is seen to be! Before our time the fight was fought over the binocular body, the achromatic objective, and even the compound principle itself.” The author then quotes from Hill’s ‘ Essays in Natural History and Philosophy ’ (1752), a passage in which the general superiority of the simple over the compound Microscope is insisted upon, and refers to an “amusing case of circumstantial mendacity, or of clever fiction,” quoted from Father Noel D’Argonne* in that curious work attributed to Dr. John Campbell, entitled ‘Hermippus Redivivus, or the Sage’s Triumph over Old Age and the Grave, in which is mentioned a Microscope which not only showed the atoms of Epicurus and the subtile matter of Des Cartes, but the secret of personal sympathy and antipathy which was shown to depend on the similarity or contrariety of the perspired vapours. A recent writert has also described “an original arrangement of lenses,” by which he has “hit upon the awful discovery of the departing soul with its astral covering!” These matters were introduced by the author into the subject with which he was dealing, because he “ cannot see anything better in under- rating the value of our mechanical appliances than in over-estimating the capabilities of our lenses.” Death of Mr. Webb.—We regret to have to record the death of Mr. Webb, the well-known engraver of the Lord’s Prayer in characters so minute that the whole Bible could (in the case of one slide in our possession) be written fifty-nine times in a square inch, In this and similar feats Mr. Webb was without a rival, and his name may fitly be linked with that of Nobert as one of the great masters of the art of minute engraving with a diamond on glass. American Postal Microscopical Club. [Comments on 13th Ann. Report.] The Microscope, VIII. (1888) p. 149. BIDWELL, W. D.—The Microscope in Medicine. Amer. Mon, Micr. Journ., 1X. (1888) pp. 108-9. Bowman, F. H.—Does Science aid Faith? II. [Contains illustrations drawn from the Microscope. Christian World Pulpit, 1888, May 30th, pp. 348-50. Couvreur, E.—Le Microscope et ses Applications a l'étude des Vegétaux et des Animaux. (The Microscope and its applications to the study of plants and animals.) 390 pp. and 112 figs., 8vo, Paris, 1888. Examinations in Microscopy. (“The examination in microscopy passed by the graduating class of the St. Louis College of Pharmacy, and published in the ‘ National Druggist,’ is * ‘Mélange Vhistoire et de litérature, par M. de Vigneul-Marville,’ Paris, 1700. + ‘The Hidden Way across the Threshold,’ by J. C. Street, Boston. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 655 _ a model of its kind.. We are certain of 51 Ph.G.’s who know something of the use of the Microscope.” | The Microscope, VIII. (1888) p. 156. Italian Microscopical Society. (Just formed; articles and papers are to be published in Latin, French, English, and German, Secretary, Sigr. J. Platania, 14, Via S. Giuseppe, Acireale, Sicily. ] Sci.-Gossip, 1888, p. 139. Munchausen still alive. [While the following is too outrageous rubbish for the pages of the Summary, it ought not to go quite unrecorded. “A weekly and much-read paper has the following bit of veracity: The Human Blood.— Professor Bronson (an American) states, that if a drop of human blood be subjected to examination by the hydrogen Microscope, and magnified some 20,000,000 of times, all the species of animals now existing on the earth, or that have existed during the different stages of creation for thousands of years past will be then discovered. In the blood of a healthy person all the animalcula are quiet and peaceable; but in the blood of a diseased person they are furious, raging, and preying upon each other. That man contains within himself all the principles of the universe; also, that, if a dead cat be thrown into a pool of stagnant water, and allowed to dissolve there, a drop of water taken from any part of the pool, will show as above, every species of animal of the cat kind that has ever existed on the earth, raging and destroying one another, the bodies of all the lower animals being thus made animalcula similar to themselves, and the body of man being compounded of all that is below in the scale of creation.’ ”’] Sci.-Gossip, 1888, p. 142. QuinN, E. P.—The use of the Microscope in the examination of Rock Sections by Polarized Light. Trans. and Ann. Rep. Manchester Micr Soc., 1887, pp. 60-1. Zentmayer, J., Obituary of. Queen’s Micr. Bulletin, VY. (1888) p. 9. 8. Technique.* (1) Collecting Objects, including Culture Processes. Preparation of Nutritive Media.t—Dr. EH. Jacobi prepares agar, gelatin and Fucus as nutritive media as follows :—The test-tubes, flasks, &e., are first cleaned and stopped with cotton-wool, and then heated for 24 hours in a Papin’s digester over a gas-burner. The cotton-wool must nowhere touch the sides of the digester. The temperature inside reaches to about 150°. (1) In making agar-agar, the ordinary agar is cut into small pieces, and (a) either 1} litre of cold meat infusion with 15 gr. (1 per ma peptone, 7:5 gr. (0°5 per cent.) NaCl, and 15-22°5 gr. (1-14 per cent. agar, or (b) 13 litre of water, 7:5 (0-5 per cent.) Kemmerich’s meat- peptone, 15 gr. (1 per cent.) peptone, and 15-22°5 gr. agar, are boiled in a metal saucepan over the open fire until the agar is perfectly dissolved, which happens in about 3/4 hour. The water lost by evaporation is re- placed and the solution rendered slightly alkaline by means of carbonate or phosphate of soda. The fluid is then poured into flasks and steamed until the albuminous matters have separated out; if neutralized with sodium phosphate. this happens in about 2 hours; if with carbonate of soda, the time is longer. Filtration is effected in a few minutes. A tube holding about 14 litre, about 70 cm. long and 6 cm. in diameter, is * This subdivision contains (1) Collecting Objects, including Culture Pro- cesses; (2) Preparing Objects; (3) Cutting, including Imbedding and Microtomes; (4) Staining and Injecting; (5) Mounting, including slides, preservative fluids, &c. ; (6) Miscellaneous. + Centralbl. f. Bakteriol. u. Parasitenk., iii. (1888) pp. 538-40. 656 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO closed at its lower end by a layer of cotton-wool 5 em. thick; the fluid is then poured in and the upper end closed with a caoutchoue plug, in which is an opening for a glass tube. To the glass tube is connected a rubber bellows which, when worked, compresses the air inside the tube, so that the agar soon runs out quite clear, and is then sterilized in the usual manner. (2) For preparing gelatin, 1} litre of water, 22:5 gr. (14 per cent.) Kemmerich’s meat-peptone, and 45 gr. (3 per cent.) peptone, are boiled for some minutes in a metal pan over the open fire and then cooled down to 50°-60° C. In this mass are dissolved 225 gr. (15 per cent.) gelatin, and the solution neutralized with carbonate of soda. The whole mass is then shaken with the white of an egg and steamed for 1/2 hour; the albumen and other substances are precipitated, and then filtration is done in the way described above. The water-clear gelatin is then distributed into flasks and sterilized in the usual manner. (3) For preparing a fucus mass, the same directions as were given for agar must be followed, except that 25 per cent. Fucus crispus is used. Before neutralization it must be strained through a cloth, as Fucus crispus is not so perfectly soluble as agar. Preparing Agar-agar.*—Dr. E. Freudenreich prepares agar, and at the same time shortens the process in the following manner:—1 per cent. of agar is added to meat infusion, and the mixture boiled on the open fire until the agar is quite dissolved. The solution is then neu- tralized and afterwards reboiled until the albuminous matters are preci- pitated. So much of the solution as will be required to fill a flask or test-tube is then poured into a funnel with paper filter and placed in a steam sterilizer, and the temperature raised to about 110°, and in about one hour the glass vessel will have received its proper quantity of clear agar. Of course, several flasks, &c., may be got ready at the same time. When complete the vessels are plugged with cotton-wool, and in this way one sterilization is saved. Milk-peptone-gelatin for cultivating Pathogenic Micro-organisms.t —Mdlle. M. Raskin prepares milk-peptone-gelatin by warming 1000 cem. of new milk to 60°-70° C., and then adding 60-70 gr. of solid gelatin. When the gelatin is dissolved the solution is boiled until complete coagulation of the casein has taken place. It is then strained through a linen cloth into a wide glass vessel, in order that the fat may ascend to the surface without difficulty, and when it has settled the fat is skimmed off. When freed from the fat the mixture is heated and 1 per cent. peptone added, and then soda to neutralization. The addition of NaCl increases the nutritive value of the quite clear transparent gelatin. The preparation of milk-peptone-agar is somewhat more complicated. To 1000 cem. of milk are added 50 cem. gelatin and five to seven pieces of agar cut up small. After standing for fourteen hours at the ordinary room temperature, the mixture is boiled for three hours until the casein is coagulated; the rest of the procedure is as in the foregoing preparation. In preparing milk-casein-gelatin and milk-casein-agar, 150 ccm. of * Centralbl. f. Bakteriol. u. Parasitenk., iii. (1888) pp. 797-8. + Petersburger Med. Wochenschrift, 1887, pp. 20-43. Cf. Centralbl. f. Bacteriol. u. Parasitenk., iii. (1888) pp. 568-9, ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETO. 657 pure 8 per cent. casein solution, quite free from fat, are mixed with 350 ccm. of a filtered mixture of whey and 12 per cent. gelatin or 1:75 per cent. agar. The whole mass is then heated to 60° C. and transferred to test-tubes. To prepare milk-albumen-gelatin and milk-albumen-agar the peptone is replaced by a saturated solution of sodium albuminate. With the foregoing media cultivation experiments were made with Bacillus mallet, B. Typh. abdom., comma bacillus, B. tussis convuls. The authoress states that glanders-bacillus developes luxuriantly on the milk-peptone media at 37°-38° C. On the second day after inocula- tion a thick dull-white crust forms on the agar surface. In three to four days the colour is amber to orange, the deeper layers being brownish- red. The authoress is disposed to regard these milk media as being very favourable to the growth of certain microbes which on others do not betray any special characteristics. Vessel for the Culture of Low Organisms.*—Herr N. W. Diakonow has constructed an apparatus, of which the following is a description, for the culture of low organisms, the special object being to prevent the intrusion of bacteria and other foreign bodies. The apparatus (fig. 108) consists of a vessel composed of two parts, a bulb A provided with two necks, and a burette B, connected with one another by a caoutchouc tube in such a way that the burette moves easily from side Fic. 108. to side. ‘To the lower end of the burette, which must be supplied with a glass tube of equal diameter with the upper portion of the neck of the bulb, is fused a short and narrow glass tube running out into a capillary prolongation. The upper part of the burette is again connected with a narrow glass tube by means of a caou- tchouc tube shut off by a stop-cock, the glass tube being widened at its upper end for the reception of a wad. The size of the entire apparatus may be adapted to the requirements of the experiments ; for fungi cultivated on a nutrient solution only 10-15 ccm. in quantity, the height need not exceed 15-17 cm.; the bulb then having a capacity of about 70-80 and the burette of about 8-5 ccm. It is especially needful that the apparatus should be so constructed that, after the sterilizing of the nutrient solution, no foreign organisms can enter it. In using the apparatus, the burette and the solution to be introduced into it must first of all be sterilized. For this purpose the whole burette with its capillary pro- longation is dipped into boiling water, which is sucked up to the upper bulb containing the wad; this process is repeated several times. The * Ber. Deutsch. Bot. Gesell., vi. (1888) pp. 52-4 (1 fig.). 658 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO burette is then immediately immersed in the hot solution, filled with it, and placed in connection with the bulb A; and the nutrient solution in A is then further sterilized by long boiling. After the sterilized nutrient solution has become cold, it is neutralized from the burette until the red colour has almost entirely disappeared ; and the germs are then introduced into A through the lower neck. The exchange of gases between the interior of the apparatus and the external air can take place only through this neck, which is stopped by a wad. In experiments where quantitative estimation is required, the burette B may be replaced by another, represented at the right of fig. 108, Pureren, M. D. v.—Ueber Bereitung fester Nahrungsgemische fiir Mikroben aus der Milch. (On the preparation of solid nutrient media for microbes from milk.) Wratsch, 1888, pp. 281-4 (Russian). (2) Preparing Objects. Preservation of Parts and Organs of Animals.*—Dr. A. Misch- told praises highly Giacomini’s method of preserving organs, both normal and pathological. The parts retain their normal size and ap- pearance and remain perfectly supple, so that they can be placed in any osition. : With time the volume diminishes about 1/20, but the weight is in- creased by 150-200 grm. in consequence of the impregnation. The procedure is as follows :—The organ, for example a whole brain, is first of all injected through an artery with a saturated filtered solution of chloride of zinc, and then placed in a solution of this until the brain has sunk down to the bottom of the vessel. During this time (about eight days) it is advisable to strip off the membranes, otherwise rusty patches appear along the course of the vessels. The brain is then placed in strong spirit for ten or twelve days, or until it has sunk to the bottom. The spirit must be changed two or three times. It is next placed in pure glycerin, to which 1 per cent. of carbolic acid is added, until it again sinks to the bottom. The preparation should be turned over several times, and when saturated with glycerin should be exposed to the air for several days upon a layer of cotton-wool to dry. It is finally coated over with a thin layer of a solution of gummi elasticum or guttapercha in benzin. For prepara- tions other than brains an 8 per cent. zinc chloride solution is advised, and for still smaller ones a solution half as strong. Two new Methods for preparing Nerve-cells.tj —(1) Instantaneous preparation.—Prof. L. v. Thanhoffer takes a small piece from the grey substance and presses it between two cover-glasses, so that when drawn apart there adheres to both a thin layer of nervous matter. The cover- glass is then heated in the flame of a spirit-lamp or of a gas-jet until the nervous layer has assumed a blackish-brown colour, and a distinct smell of burning is perceptible. The preparation is then mounted in xylol- dammar. The nerve-cells and the nuclei of the neuroglia-cells, as well as the blood-vessels and their nuclei, are very clearly seen in such pre- parations. (2) Double cover-glass preparation—To produce permanent and * Morskoi Sbornik, Supplement, 1886, pp. 207-9. Cf. Zeitschr. f. Wiss. Mikr., iv. (1887) pp. 375-6 * Zeitschr. f. Wiss, Mikr., iv. (1887) pp. 467-9. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 699 stained preparations of nerve-tissue, the author squeezes a piece of grey substance about the size of a hemp-seed between two cover-glasses. The double cover is then placed for 15 days in picrocarmine, four days in absolute alcohol, and then for two days in oil of cloves and xylol apiece, and lastly fixed up with xylol dammar, which is poured over the cover- glasses. After the dammar varnish is dried the surface of the cover- glass is cleansed of the resin. New Method for the Microscopical Study of the Blood.*—Tho methods hitherto employed in preparing the blood for microscopical examination have aimed either at the production of fresh or of dry pre- parations. Preparations of the first class are not permanent, and those of the second class never exhibit the morphological elements intact. Dr. D. Biondi has worked out a method which combines the advantages, and is free from the defects, of previous methods. ‘I'he problem was to find the means of perfect fixation, preservation, imbedding, and mounting —in other words, a method by which the blood could be treated as a solid tissue. The method is equally useful in the study of other organic fluids, and has been successfully employed in tracing the changes that take place in the maturation of the spermatozoa. It may doubtless be used to advantage in the study of Infusoria, as suggested by Biondi. The point of chief interest in Biondi’s method is the use of agar as an imbedding material. Agar is a vegetable gelatin obtained from Gracilaria lichenoides and Gigartina speciosa, and has already been successfully employed for some time by Koch in bacteriological investi- gations. Among the different sorts of agar, the columnar form (Siulen- Agar) is considered the best. A perfectly transparent solution is required, in the preparation of which great care must be taken. This may be accomplished in the following manner:—Place two parts of agar in 100 parts of distilled water, leaving it to soften for twenty- four hours at the ordinary room temperature ; then heat to boiling on the sand-bath until the agar is all dissolved. The evaporation of the water may be checked by closing the flask with a cork provided with a long glass tube. Add carbonate of sodium to the point of weak alkaline re- action, and boil for an hour in a steam apparatus. Pour the solution into long slender test-tubes, and leave from 12-24 hours at a temperature of 50° to 60° C. The solution separates into two layers, the upper of which is quite clear, and this layer alone can be used for imbedding purposes. But clarification must be carried still farther before it is fit for use. The clear portion of the solution is next to be heated to about 40°, white of egg added, the mixture shaken up several times in the course of ten minutes, boiled for an hour in the steam apparatus, and then filtered. The reaction should then be tested, and, if necessary, carbonate of sodium added until the solution is neutralized. Exact neutralization is necessary, in view of the staining fluid to be employed.] It is important that the mass should be kept sterile up to the moment of using, as otherwise a large number of micro-organisms may develope in it and render it worthless for the finer uses. It is advisable, there- fore, to keep the mass in test-tubes, limiting the quantity placed in each to the probable requirements of a single imbedding operation. For a single preparation of the blood five cmm. of the mass is sufficient. The * Arch. f. Mikr. Anat., xxxi. (1887) p. 103. Cf. Amer. Natural., xxii. (1888) pp- 379-81. 660 SUMMARY OF OURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO test-tubes should be cleansed with hydrochloric acid and then washed with distilled water. After receiving the agar solution, the tubes are closed with cotton, and then sterilized in the steam apparatus for half an hour daily on three successive days. As the preparation of the agar mass is somewhat complicated, much time and trouble may be saved by turning this work over to some apothecary. The best medium of fixation for the elements of blood is a 2 per cent. solution of osmic acid. Ifa drop of blood from the frog be examined in this medium under the Microscope, it will be seen that both the red and the white corpuscles are perfectly preserved in form and structure. The red corpuscles become a little paler than in the living condition, and are slightly browned. The corpuscles of mammalian blood are isolated and seen to greater advantage than in any other medium of fixation. As it is important that the acid should be perfectly clear and free from all impurities, it is well to filter before using. Method of Procedure.—(1) By the aid of a clean pipette, take a little blood from the heart of a frog, and allow two drops to fall into five ecm. of osmic acid (2 per cent.). Shake a little—the sooner the better—in order to separate the elements and scatter them through the whole body of the acid. After standing a while, the blood-corpuscles will be found at the bottom of the tube, the deeper layer being formed mainly of red corpuscles, which sink first by virtue of their greater specific gravity. Exposure, 1-24 hours. (2) The process of fixation completed, four to five drops of the mixture of blood and osmic acid are allowed to fall from a pipette into the melted agar, which is kept fluid at a temperature of 35°-37° C. By rotating the test-tube the blood-corpuscles are distributed through the agar, and then the whole is poured into a paper box, as in the ordinary paraffin method of imbedding. Within a few minutes the mass stiffens and may be removed from the box to 85 per cent. alcohol for hardening. In three to six days the mass is hard enough for sectioning, and may be inclosed in elder-pith and cut with the microtome. If finer sections are required than can be obtained in this way, the agar block may be imbedded in paraffin in the following manner:—The block is to be transferred from the 85 per cent. alcohol to bergamot oil (24 hours), then direct to soft paraffin kept at a tempera- ture of 45° C. After one to two hours, the imbedding process may be completed in the usual way. As the agar is saturated with paraffin, very fine sections may be obtained ; and these may be freed from paraffin with the usual solvents, and then stained. (83) Sections thus prepared may be safely treated with nearly all staining media. Methyl-green, methyl-blue, fuchsin, safranin, &c., give the most reliable results. The agar itself is stained only by the most intense anilin dyes (e.g. gentian-violet), but in such cases it loses its colour quickly in alcohol, or in any other decolorizing fluid. (4) Sections may be clarified, preparatory to mounting, in balsam or dammar, in clove oil, origanum oil, bergamot oil, creosote, &ce. , Xylol alone should not be used as it causes the sections to curl. Preparation and Staining of the Spinal Cord.*—Prof. L. Ranvier, who has been making observations on the transformation of nerves with * Journ. de Mierogr., xii. (1888) pp. 142-4. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 661 Schwann’s sheath to nerves without the sheath at the point of union of the anterior and posterior roots with the spinal cord, examined trans- verse sections of the cord in the following manner :—The dorsal region of a calf was chosen because the direction of the roots are more perpendicular to the axis of the cord than in other parts. Segments 1 to 14 cm., with the corresponding roots, were placed in a solution of bichromate of ammonia, renewed two or three times during the course of a year. Jt requires quite a year to harden cord in bichromate of ammonia, but the process may be hastened by using successively bichro- mate of ammonia and chromic acid, according to Deiter’s method. Sections were then made with an ordinary microtome perpendicular to the axis of the cord, and afterwards deeply stained with picrocarminate of ammonia. The sections having remained in 0:1 per cent. picro- carminate of ammonia are too deeply stained, and the colour must be removed with formic acid. This acid is of the usual strength and dissolves part of the carmine, leaving the sections a rose colour. The decolorizing action is extremely valuable, inasmuch as it is very slow, and acts unequally on certain elements which retain carmine more than others. The formula for the formic acid solution is equal parts of ordinary formic acid and alcohol at 36°. In twenty-four hours the sections are sufficiently decolorized; they are then placed in absolute alcohol, cleared up in oil of cloves, and mounted in balsam or dammar. All the nuclei of the neuroglia are admirably distinct, but the fibres are usually quite decolorized. The axis-cylinders are rose, and not red, but less decolorized than the neuroglia fibres. The neuroglia nuclei are able to withstand a prolonged action of the formic acid and spirit mixture, and their greater abundance in the grey matter than in the white matter of the cord is strikingly shown. The neuroglia nuclei may also be stained with purpurin or with Boehm’s hematoxylin, which, from lapse of time, has become brownish. As this stains all the elements, everything but the neuroglia nuclei must be decolorized by means of acetic acid diluted with an equal volume of water or of spirit. A better result can be obtained from a logwood solution made from the deposit from Boehm’s hematoxylin. This deposit is washed with dis- tilled water and dissolved in a 1 per cent. aqueous solution of alum by the aid of heat, and then filtered. This solution only stains the neuroglia, the axis-cylinders and nerve-cells remaining quite uncoloured. Demonstrating the Canalicular Prolongations of Bone-corpuscles.* —Sig. G. Chiarugi in attempting to solve the problem of the existence of protoplasmic prolongations of bone-cells in the primitive canaliculi, answers the question partly on theoretical grounds, for thereby the. formation of the canaliculi is explained, and partly on practical, since they have already been demonstrated in the tooth. The author employed the following method. Small pieces of fresh bone were decalcified in picro-nitrie acid diluted with two parts of distilled water. These were then transferred to spirit, at first dilute, but afterwards gradually concentrated. The sections were stained for some minutes in a one per cent. watery solution of eosin, and then treated with a 3-4 per thousand solution of hydrate of potash until the colour was no longer altered. In this way the * Bollet. Soc. tra i Cult. Sci. Med. Siena, 1886, Fasc. viii. and ix. Cf Zeitschr. f£. Wiss. Mikr., iv, (1887) p. 490. 1888. 22 662 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO ground substance was unstained, while the cell elements and their pro- longations remained of a bright red hue. This staining was fixed by immersing the sections for some hours in a one per cent. solution of alum. They were then examined, and mounted in the alum solution, which must be sterilized. The prolongations of adjacent cells were found to anastomose. Preparing Mammalian Ovaries.*— From his investigation on the ovaries of mammalia Prof. G. Paladino finds that these organs are the seat of a continuous movement of destruction and renovation, and further, that in the formation of the ovules, the regeneration of the parenchyma, the development of the follicles, and in the production of the corpora lutea, karyokinesis occurs freely. For hardening the ovaries the author used a 2-4 per cent. bichromate of potash solution, Miller’s fluid, 1/2 to 1 per cent. osmic acid, saturated aqueous solution of sublimate, 2 per cent. chromic acid, and also Flemming’s chrom-osmium aceticacid. The staining seems to have been effected entirely with picro-carminate of ammonia, of which two solutions were used, a 1 and 2 percent. The pieces were placed in these solutions fur a short time only, and then transferred to very dilute solution of picric acid. The pieces were always completely freed from the hardening fluids, and rendered neutral as the neutral reaction is indispensable for properly staining the nucleus. Preparing and Staining Annelida.;—M. B. Jourdan found that 90° alcohol and picric acid gave very bad results in examination of Annelida ; the tissues being crumpled and their elements unrecognizable. From bichromate of ammonia in 2 per cent. solution, sublimate in 5 per cent., or a saturated solution and Lang’s fluid, beautiful preparations were obtained, One per cent. solution of osmic acid was found to give excel- lent results for examining antenne and other delicate organs. After fixation in the above-mentioned fluids, the preparations were hardened in spirit. The objects were stained with carmine solution, principally with Grenacher’s alum-carmine, and were imbedded in celloidin or in paraffin. The sections, which were stuck on by Schallibaum’s method, were, for studying gland-cells, stained with hematoxylin eosin and with Hoffmann’s green. Preparing Polygordius.t—Dr. J. Fraipont hardens the entire animal in 1 per cent osmic acid, washes with water, stains with ammoniacal picrocarmine, and after treating with alcohol and turpentine oil mounts in balsam. Macerated specimens are prepared in 40 per cent. spirit for 36 to 48 hours, or still better in chromic acid 1/10000 for 24 hours. Besides employing the usual methods for macerated specimens, the author found it also advisable to squeeze half macerated parts between cover-glass and slide, by which the separated parts and their relation to one another were recognizable. Living animals treated with 1 per cent. gold chloride and citric acid, and afterwards teased out, is not a very easy method, but sometimes gives very instructive pictures. The macerated parts can be * «Ulteriore ricerche sulla distruzione e rinnovamento continuo del parenchyma ovarico nei mammiferi: nuove contribuzioni alla morfologia e fisiologia dell’ ovaja.’ 8vo, Naples, 1887, 230 pp. (9 pls.). Cf. Journ. de Microgr., xii. (1888) pp. 223-6. ¢ Ann. Sci. Nat. (Zool.), ii. (1887) pp. 239-304 (5 pls.). { Fauna u. Flora d. Golfes von Neapel, xiv. (1887) 125 pp. (16 pls. and 1 fig.). ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 663 stained with borax-carmine, haematoxylin or ammoniacal picrocarmine, and mounted in glycerinor balsam. In order to kill the animals without contraction, so that they may be suitable for sectioning, the author re- commends benumbing them by pouring spirit into sea water aml then hardening, or to pour a hot and strong solution of sublimate over them. Hot sublimate, however, alters the tissues somewhat, especially the epi- dermis, but even by the first mentioned method the epidermis, and also the central nervous system, are not quite satisfactory. For hardening, the author used strong spirit, osmic acid, picro-sulphuric acid, chromic acid, cold sublimate, and then treated the animals with the foregoing fiuids or with acetic acid, absolute alcohol, 1 per cent. gold chloride, and a mixture of 1 per cent. osmic acid and of chromic acid 2/1000 For staining, picrocarmine and borax-carmine gave the best results. The former colours badly after chromic acid or sublimate, but after being allowed to act for 24 hours, the hue may be increased by the aid of borax-carmine. Hzmatoxylin and the anilins were tried on the chromic acid specimens. Zacharias’ Method of Preparing the Eggs of Ascaris megalo- cephala.*—Dr. O. Zacharias has discovered an acid mixture which over- comes the resistance of the egg membrane and fixes the egg completely within 25 to 80 minutes. The mixture consist of—alcohol 90 to 100 per cent., 80 ccm.; glacial acetic acid, 20 ccm.; osmic acid 1 per cent, 20 to 30 drops. A little glycerin or chloroform increases the clarifying power of the mixture. Van Beneden employed a stronger mixture, consisting of absolute alcohol and acetic acid in equal parts, without the addition of osmic acid. (1) Ascaris females obtained from the living horse by means of arsenic pills, are placed between two sheets of cotton which have been slightly moistened in a 3 per cent. salt solution, then covered with a bell-glass and exposed one to three hours to an incubation temperature of 25° C. This procedure brings the polar globules to development in the younger eggs, and forces the cleavage in the older eggs. (2) After an hour’s incubation it is well to preserve a part of the material at disposal. The genital sacs are laid bare by a longitudinal slit in the body-wall opposite the sexual aperture; the vagina is then cut free from the body, the alimentary tract lying between the two sacs is carefully removed, and the ovarian portions of the sacs are cut off, leaving the uterine portions with their contents for preservation. The anterior ends of the uteri contain eggs in all stages of maturation and fecundation ; the posterior ends contain eggs already beginning to cleave. The killing and hardening process should vary considerably for these © different stages. (8) It is advisable, therefore, to cut each uterus into thirds, and to expose the anterior third to the action of the acid mixture only 5 to 7 minutes, and the posterior third at least 25 minutes. After fixation the anterior and middle thirds are transferred to 30 per cent. alcohol, and after a few hours to 50 per cent. alcohol, in which they may be kept for along time. Eggs in process of cleavage—found in the posterior third —should be removed to absolute alcohol the moment they begin to show a light brown staining. After two or three hours they are to be trans- ferred to 70 per cent. alcohol for preservation. If the acid mixture be * Anat. Anzeig., iii, (i888) p. 24. Cf. Amer. Naturalist, xxii. (1888) pp. 277-9. 222 664 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO heated to about 24° C., the posterior third of the uterus will require an exposure of only 10 to 15 minutes. (4) Schneider’s acid carmine is an excellent staining agent. It is prepared as follows :—Glacial acetic acid is diluted with distilled water to about 50 per cent,, then as much pulverized carmine is added to the boiling acid as will dissolve. After filtering until the fluid becomes clear, a little rectified wood-vinegar is added (one drop A. pyrolignosum to 10 cem. of the carmine solution) for the purpose of strengthening the clarifying power of the mixture. The younger stages may be left in the dye 3 to 4 hours, the older stages 8 to 10. Beautiful views of the karyokinetic figures are thus obtained, but they are not permanent; after 3 or 4 hours they begin to lose in distinct- ness. Grenacher’s alcohol carmine gives more durable preparations. Eggs thus stained may be improved by treatment with methyl-green (2 per cent.) to which have been added a few drops of glycerin. The spindle-fibres of the first and second amphiasters may be most success- fully stained with “ Modebraun” in very dilute aqueous solution. Pre- parations are mounted in two-thirds glycerin. Boveri’s Method of Preparing the Eggs of Ascaris megalo- cephala.*—The following is Prof. T. Boveri’s method :— (1) The egg-sacs are plunged for a few seconds in boiling absolute alcohol which contains 1 per cent. glacial acetic acid. The eggs are thus killed instantly, and at the same time the egg-membrane is rendered penetrable to the reagents. The alcohol is allowed to cool gradually, and after a few hours the eggs are transferred to pure alcohol, coloured, and examined in glycerin or clove oil. This method shows the achro- matic spindles and the chromatic equatorial plates, but not a trace of protoplasmic asters. (2) The following mixture was used cold, with excellent results. A saturated solution of picric acid is diluted with twice its volume of water, and then 1 per cent. glacial acetic acid is added. The egg-sacs are left at least twenty-four hours in this mixture, then washed in 70 per cent. alcohol, stained in Grenacher’s alcoholic borax-carmine (24 hours), transferred to 70 per cent. alcohol plus 1 per cent. hydro- chloric acid (24 hours), and finally placed in pure alcohol. For examination, glycerin is preferred to clove oil. If the egg-sacs are removed from alcohol to a mixture of glycerin (1 part) and absolute alcohol (3 parts), and then allowed to stand until the alcohol has evaporated, the eggs do not shrink. It will be found, however, that the eggs are not all equally well preserved with the cold mixture, owing probably to individual differences in the constitution of the membranes, some being more, others less permeable to the fixing reagent. Isolating Foraminifera.}—Herr C. C. Keller states that Foraminifera can be obtained from marl in a very short time and in a very clean con- dition in the following manner. The marl is first reduced by means of highly concentrated Glauber’s salts. When the pulverization has pro- ceeded sufficiently, the sulphate of soda is washed out and the residue poured into a glass vessel in which there is a little water. The vessel is then filled up with carbonic acid water, and then placed in some warm spot or 1s warmed in a water-bath, its contents being carefully stirred up Se Jenaisch. Zeitschr. f. Naturwiss., xxi. (1887) p. 482. Cf. Amer. Naturalist, XXil. (1888) pp. 381-2, + Zeitschr. f. Wiss. Mikr., iv. (1887) pp. 474-5. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 665 from time to time with a glass rod. The carbonic acid then bubbles up and escapes, and at the same time numerous Foraminifera collect on the surface. The explanation of this is simple. Small bubbles of the gas, owing to the heat, are developed and become entangled in the shells of the Foraminifera, and the latter are raised to the surface. The Foraminifera may then be skimmed off with the sieve used for diatoms. Permanent preparations are made by placing the Foraminifera thus obtained in absolute alcohol in order to expel the air. They are then cleared up in oil of cloves or xylol, and mounted in Canada balsam. Preparing Sphzrozoa.*—For examining living Spherozoa, Dr. K. Brandt recommends the use of a polarizing apparatus and also staining the organisms while alive. He points out that while 0:1 per cent. osmic acid fixes well, its value is discounted by the great blackening it causes, especially of the pseudopodia. The author notes also that all Spherozoa are not equally susceptible to the action of the same reagent. (1) For Collozoum inerme, C. pelagicum, C. fuluum, Spherozoum punctatum, S. acuferum, and S. neapolitanum, the most advantageous is a tincture of iodine (1 part 70 per cent. spirit; 1 part sea water; and so much tincture of iodine as will impart a distinctly yellow colour to the mixture). The tube in which the animals are killed is very gently shaken, and after 15-80 minutes its contents are washed with water to remove the sea salt, and then the colonies are removed to spirit of 30,50, and 70 per cent. successively. (2) Myxosphzra czrulea, Collosphera Hualeyt, and Aerosphzra spinosa are well fixed in 0°5 to 1°0 per cent. chromic acid. After having been well washed they are transferred to 30, 50, and 70 per cent. spirits. By the iodine tincture the jelly of the species last mentioned is either dissolved or completely altered in form, while those mentioned under number (1) with the exception of S. acuferum, lose their jelly by the action of chromic acid, or at least their shape is damaged. (3) Strong solutions of picric acid (and picro-sulphuric acid too) behave like weak solutions of chromic acid. The species given under (2) retain some connection, but in the others the jelly is dissolved. (4) Hydro- fluoric acid fixes the plasma well. (5) A 5 to 15 per cent. solution of sublimate in sea water retains the shape of C. pelagicum, S. punctatum, S. neapolitanum well (after acting 15-30 minutes they are well washed in sea water, then in sweet water; afterwards alcohols 30, 50, 70 per cent.). The most useful stain was found to be a watery solution of hematoxylin, but for Collosphera Hualeyi Grenacher’s alcohol carmine. Besides these were used dahlia, the other carmine solutions of Grenacher, and Mayer’s alcoholic cochineal solution. Preparation and Mounting of Ferns.{—Mr. J. D. King remarks that the selection of the fern is all-important. It should be of robust growth and free from dirt. If not fully ripe the spores will be shrunken, if over ripe, absent. Have ready wide-mouthed bottles, to hold about an ounce, and filled with a mixture of equal parts of spirit and water. In this place the selected pinne. If the pinne are to be kept for some time, add one-fourth part spirit, put only one kind in a bottle, avoid shaking the bottles, and handle the material with forceps without touching the sori. For bleaching, the following mixture is successful :—Dry chloride of * Fauna u. Flora d. Golfes v. Neapel, xiii. (1885) 276 pp. (8 pls.). ¢ The Microscope, viii. (1888) pp. 78-81. 666 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO lime, 2 0z.; common soda, 3 oz.; water, 2 pints. Mix the chloride of lime with half the water, and the soda with the other half, then mix the two solutions and let settle in a well-corked bottle; pour off the clear liquid for use, and keep in stoppered bottles. Pour the spirit and water from the fern and replace it with tho bleaching fluid, and put ina strong light if you wish to hasten the process. Look at them often, and when there is no longer any appear- ance of chlorophyll in the sporangia or in the leaf, the bleaching has gone far enough. It is not always safe to wait for a stout mid-vein to become perfectly clear, for a very little over-bleaching may injure or ruin the fern. In some cases, however, it may be necessary to change the bleaching fluid two or three times. When the bleaching is completed, remove to a liberal supply of soft water and change frequently until no trace of chlorine remains, for if the chlorine be not quite removed the staining will be a failure. Then harden the material in alcohol. For staining epidermal structure the author advises alum-carmine and methyl-green in the proportion of one drop of methyl-green to ten drops of alum-carmine. The time required is variable. The spores and cases stain green and the leaf red; sometimes the larger veins also take on the green. If stained too long the red will supplant the green. Transfer to at least two ounces of water and soak for three or more hours to remove the alum. For thick-leaved ferns, and for showing the fibro-vascular system and sporangia, the following procedure will be found more satisfactory : To forty drops of borax-carmine add one drop of methyl-green. The time required is longer than with alum-carmine. Then soak in water as before. A saturated solution of ammonia acetate used as a mordant will heighten the colour a trifle. The best medium for mounting is glycerin jelly made after Kaiser’s formula, with additional gelatin to give it hardness. First transfer to a mixture of equal parts of glycerin and alcohol. Then heat the glycerin jelly in a water-bath, keeping hot while using to prevent air-bubbles. With a glass rod place a few drops on the slide with or without a cell; a cell makes a better finish. Place the ferns in the glycerin jelly, add a few drops, and pour off to get rid of the alcohol and glycerin, replace what is poured off and examine with a dissecting Microscope for air- bubbles, which must be removed before the cover is applied. Breathe on the cover and apply a drop or two of hot glycerin jelly, then breathe on the slide and impose the cover. Another way is to let the glycerin jelly harden on the slide with the fern on it and afterwards apply some hot jelly to the surface before putting on the cover. Wood sections may be stained and mounted in the foregoing manner. Application of Lactic Acid to the Examination of Alge.*—Herr G. Lagerheim recommends the use of lactic acid for restoring the turgidity to dry algez. Thre acid is used in a concentrated semi-fluid form. The dry alga is first softened in water, and then placed in small pieces in a few drops of the acid on a glass slide, and heated until small bubbles make their appearance in the acid. The alga must be prevented from becoming too fluid and flowing away by heaping up with a knife. After * Hedwigia, xxvii. (1888) pp. 58-9. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY,-MICROSCOPY, ETC. 667 being heated for a sufficiently long time, the cover-glass is placed on, and the alga, which was previously dry and shrunk, is now found to have swollen up to its natural form. The cell-contents are at least partially dissolved or clarified if the preparation has been boiled sufficiently long, a point of great importance, especially in the examination of desmids. Tempere’s Preparations of Diatoms.* —M. J. Tempére is preparing series of all the known genera of diatoms. Tach series will comprise twenty-five preparations, and each preparation will contain one to three species or varieties. The first series has recently appeared. FREEBORN, G. C.—Notices of new Methods. III., IV. [Sublimate as a hardening medium for the brain (Diomidoff). New methods of preparing nerve-cells (Thanhoffer). Neutral anilin staining fluid (Babes). Safranin solution with anilin oil (Babes). Amer. Mon. Micr. Journ., YX. (1888) pp. 84, 111-2. LucGeEr, O.—A new Method of Preserving transparent Aquatic Insects for the Microscope. Proc, Entom. Soc. Washington, I. (1888) pp. 101-2. Manton, W. P.—Rudiments of Practical Embryology. III. [Preparation of the Embryo. Hardening. ] The Microscope, VIII. (1888) pp. 144-5. PELLETAN, J.—Les Diatomees, histoire naturelle, préparation, classification et description des principales espéces, avec une introduction a l'étude des diatomées par M. J. Deby et un chapitre sur la classification des diatomées par M. Paul Petit. (The Diatomacesx, natural history, preparation, classification and description of the principal species, with an introduction on the study of the Diatomacez by M. J. Deby, and a chapter on classification by M. Paul Petit.) [Contains chapters on collecting, preparing and mounting.] vol. i., 350 pp., 5 pls, and 250 figs., 8vo, Paris, 1888. (3) Cutting, including Imbedding. Collodion for Imbedding in Embryology.t{—In a note appended to a paper on “ Collodion in the Technique of Embryology,” Prof. M. Duval states that celloidin has no advantage over collodion ; with thick collodion the same hard and resisting mass is produced, and this is always quite transparent, which is not the case with celloidin. The method given for imbedding in collodion is as follows :—When the piece is removed from spirit after having been hardened, it is placed for some short time in a mixture of alcohol and ether (1 spirit, 10 ether). It is then placed in a solution of pure collodion for 10 minutes to 24 hours, according to size, after which it is immersed in a solution of collodion of a syrupy or pasty consistence, according to the degree of hardness required for the imbedding mass. On removal the mass is exposed to the air for not more than a minute, and it is then plunged into alcohol of 36°; the vessel containing the spirit is left open. In 6 to 10 hours the collodion is sufficiently solidified, and transparent as glass. The mass is then stuck on a piece of elder-pith with collodion, and fixed then in any position for cutting sections, which are made with a wet knife. Under certain circumstances, as, for example, when it is desired to obtain sections of batrachian ova, which are extremely friable, it is necessary to smear the surface of every section with collodion, in order to prevent the sections breaking up or evacuating their contents. The collodion for this purpose is made very thin, and a few minutes after it * Journ, de Microgr., xii. (1888) pp. 226-7. + Ibid.. pp. 197-204. 668 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO is laid on the surface of the section is washed with spirit. In practice this does not involve any waste of time. These collodion sections may be mounted in glycerin or in balsam, in which latter case the author proceeds in two ways. First, when he deals with sections of the blasto- derm with an embryo up to the sixth day; secondly, when the embryo is larger and exceeds six days. (1) The embryos are hardened, stained, and kept in some provisional medium. When required for sections they are passed through 36° spirit, absolute alcohol, the mixture of spirit and ether, very thin collodion, and lastly the thick collodion. A piece of elder-pith cut straight is washed with ether and then immersed in the thick collodion wherein is the blastodermie dise. The latter is then placed on the pith in the desired position and then carefully withdrawn, and after being allowed to dry in the air for a minute or two is immersed in absolute alcohol for at least 24 hours. The sections are then made, with or without brushing the surface each time with collodion, and are swept into water, from which they are easily placed upon the slide in the proper order. The sections are then dehydrated completely, and this done, the cover- glass is imposed. Clarifying is then effected by running benzine under the cover-glass, and when this is complete the section is mounted in balsam dissolved in benzine. The benzine and the benzine-balsam are run under the cover-glass, and their entrance facilitated by drawing out the fluid at the opposite side with filter-paper. The benzine used is that known as benzine Collas. 2) If the embryo be too large to be stained en masse, the section is stained on the slide ; moreover, the largeness of the embryo necessitates special care in the imbedding. They must be inclosed in a block of collodion, and the hardening of a block requires that the evaporation of the ether should be slow. This is effected by placing the cup in which the embryo lies imbedded in thick collodion in a saucer con- taining 36° spirit, and covering the two vessels with a bell-jar. In 12-36 hours the consistence of the mass is examined, and if the embryo appear above the level, more thick collodion is added and the process continued until the desired consistence is attained. The mass is then dug out and cut into a block, which is stuck on elder-pith with collodion. The sections must be stained on the slide, and this is done by coating the sections with glycerin coloured with the staining solution (picro- carmine, Grenacher, alum-carmine, &e.). Owing to the glycerin, there is no fear that the section will dry: an aqueous solution may be used for staining, but in this case the slide must be placed in a moist chamber. In 24 hours the sections are well stained with carmine. The sections are mounted in balsam, but, owing to their size, the benzin and balsam cannot be run under the cover. The sections are first dehydrated with 36° alcohol, the slide is then placed on a warm brick and washed with absolute alcohol, then with benzin, and finally the balsam is dropped or brushed on, and this followed by putting on the cover-glass. Schwabe’s Sliding Microtome.*—Schwabe’s microtome consists of three separate parts; an oblong support a (fig. 109) which also serves for the slide-way, the piece b which carries the object, and the knife c. The slide-way e is grooved, and d flat; in both cases ivory pegs are used to prevent friction, these are shown at f, g,andh. The stability * Zeitschr. f. Wiss. Mikr., iv. (1887) pp. 463-4 (1 fig.). ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 669 of the carrier is insured by its weight and by its working along the triangular grooved slide-way e. In the cross pieces 7 k are several holes, these are for the purpose of altering the angle of the knife c, which is fixed by means of the screws / and m. The angle which the knife makes with the slide- ways depends on the size or diameter of the prepa- ration, and must always be so selected that the edge of the knife can be used as far as possible throughout its extent. The upper part b carries the micrometer screw 2 which moves the object- carrier o up and down. This screw has a turn of 1 mm., and as the head is divided into 100 parts the carrier can be raised 0:01 mm. The lower part of the microtome can either be constructed as a pan, or the instrument be placed in one, so that it can be made to work under fluid, and is therefore very useful for the preparation of nervous Fic. 109. tissue. In the later constructions the object-clamp is made indepen- dent of the micrometer screw for its coarse-adjustment. Fic. 110. ie, In Accessory to the Cambridge Rocking Microtome.*—Dr. H Zwaardemaker has in conjunction with h is amanuensis L. Hasselaer * Zeitschr. f. Wiss. Mikr., iv. (1887) pp. 465-6 (2 figs.). 670 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO adapted to this microtome an adjunct which is intended to obviate the defect in this instrument of not being able to alter the position of the object in an easy way. Instead of the tube in which the object is fixed with paraflin, the author devised the apparatus shown in figs. 110 and 111. This consists of a copper tube which fits over the main piece, and carries two parallel semicircular rings. Along these half rings runs a steel block, which by means of a binding-screw can be fixed at any point of their circuit. The block carries the small movable cylinder which takes the place of the English contrivance. In use the semicircular rings are placed horizontally, and by combination of the movement along the rings with that of the cylinder about its own axis, the prepara- tion is moved in all directions. But on account of the construction of the microtome, this movement is cramped, and only a turn of 60° instead of 90° is possible. This amount, however, suffices for most cases. Inexpensive Section-smoother.*—Fig. 112 shows a device for pre- venting the curling of paraffin sections, which Mr. H. C. Bumpus considers is extremely simple and easily made. After cutting off the head and point of an ordinary brass pin, fix it parallel to the edge of Fie. 112. the knife by pressing its ends into two small pellets of beeswax. The proper elevation is easily determined by testing on the waste paraffin before the object is reached. The pin can only be used with the trans- verse knife. With the knife set obliquely, a piece of drawn wire will serve the same purpose. Preparing Long Series of Sections with Celloidin.j—The pro- cedure which Dr. J. Apathy advocates very warmly consists in dehydrating the surface of the celloidin block immediately previous to and during the act of sectioning and removing the section to a strip of paper kept moist with bergamot oil. The method in detail is as follows :— After fixation by any method, and hardening in spirit, the preparation is passed into absolute alcohol, and when imbedded in celloidin kept in 80 per cent. alcohol. Staining is done in toto by the hematoxylin and chromic acid method. The strength of the chromic acid salt (mono- or bichromate of potash) is 1/2 to 1 per cent., and this, frequently renewed, is allowed to act for not more than one hour. The hematoxylin solution is 1/2 per cent., and allowed to act for ten minutes to one hour, according to size of object. The object is then washed, and next transferred to spirit, first 70 per cent., then absolute. The imbedding then follows, and when cutting, in the right hand are held a camel’s-hair brush and a needle, while this hand also works the microtome. In the left is held a strip of tracing paper, which is at the same time flexible and stiff. The paper strip is about as broad as the slide and thrice as long as the cover-glass. The * Amer. Naturalist, xxii. (1888) p. 382 (1 fig.). + MT. Zool. Station Neapel, vii. (1887) pp, 742-8. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 671 free end of the paper strip, which is well saturated with bergamot oil, is allowed to dip into a capsule of this oil. The surface of the celloidin block is then brushed over with absolute alcohol, the section made and transferred to the oil, from which it is picked up by the needle and arranged on the paper strip. When the required number of sections have been duly placed in position on the strip of paper, the latter is drained. The paper is then laid, the section side downwards, on a carefully dried slide, and then dried with blotting-paper. The paper strip is then carefully removed by rolling it off from one end or corner. If a section should stick to the paper the surface may be moistened with the oil again, and the strip pressed down again, and if this fail it must be taken with a brush and placed in its proper position. When all the sections are properly arranged, the surface is smoothed down and all the oil removed with smooth blotting-paper. The balsam is then applied, and the cover-glass imposed. The sections, in order to prevent decoloration, should not be allowed to get too near the edge of the cover-glass. In imbedding long objects as certain worms, the process may be hastened by imbedding first the whole object and then cutting it into pieces and arranging these in their proper order in a second imbedding, so that one action of the knife produces ten to twenty sections serially arranged. Proper Thickness of Microscopical Sections.*— Nowadays, says the Editor of the ‘ Microscope, it seems to be the aim of many possessors of good microtomes to cut their sections as thin as possible, e.g. from 1/2000 to 1/4000 of an inch in thickness. The origin of this fashion of cutting over-thin sections is difficult to determine, for such sections are, in the majority of cases, quite useless for any purpose of study, and the time involved in their preparation is as good as wasted. It is probably due to a desire to exhibit one’s skill without regard for utility—something like that which induces one to write 10,000 words on a post-card, simply because some one else has succeeded in writing 9000. Friedlander in his excellent little ‘Manual of Microscopical Tech-- nology,’ raises the following objections to sections of extreme thinness :— “‘(1) They are manipulated with difficulty and considerable time is often lost in spreading them on the slide. (2) The various elements contained in the meshes of these sections are very apt to fall out, and as these are generally of extreme importance, the object of the examination may be defeated. (38) Structures which are sparingly distributed throughout an organ, as, for example, animal and vegetable parasites, are naturally more apt to be discovered in thick sections. (4) In thick sections definite stereometric conceptions of the structure of an object are frequently obtained, inasmuch as several superimposed strata are scanned directly, in situ et im continuo, while with extremely thin sections plane images alone appear.” For sections of fresh organs he recommends a thickness of from 1/500-1/250 in.; for hardened preparations from 1/2500 to about 1/850 in. The rule should be, then, not to make sections as thin as possible, but rather to have them of a thickness that will include as many layers as can be clearly studied. Preparing Sections from Test-tube Cultivations.t—Prof. A. Neisser first warms the test-tube containing the cultivation, so that the gelatin * The Microscope, viii. (1888) pp. 147-8. + Centratbl. f. Bacteriol. u. Parasitenk., iii. (1888) pp. 506-10. 672 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO cast slips easily out of the tube. According to its size and thickness it is placed for 1-4-8 days in 1 per cent. bichromate of potash solution, which must stand in the light so as to produce a modification of gelatin insoluble in water. The gelatin is then carefully washed and hardened in 70° and 96° spirit. When the desired consistence has been attained the gelatin cast is cut up longitudinally or transversely into pieces, and these are stuck with gum on cork, and then placed in absolute alcohol for twenty-four hours. Before making sections it is advisable to remove the external layer of gelatin, as it is too hard, and interferes with manipulation. Drying, staining, decolorizing, and clearing up are to be carried out on the cover-glass. For staining the author used— (1) Léfiler’s alkaline methylen-blue solution, but did not employ the 1/2 per cent. acetic acid, and decolorized with the spirit. This usually gave good results. (2) Watery methyl-violet solution (b B extra, Stuttgart Fabrik, Catal. 528) was not so useful, as although the bacteria were well stained, they easily lost their colour. (3) Gentian-violet in watery solution was a failure, as it had some solvent action on the gelatin. (4, 5) Bismarck brown and Babes’s anilin safranin stained well, but the decoloration of the gelatin was slow and rarely perfect. (6) Gram’s and Weigert’s method gave excellent results. The former requires oil of cloves for decolorizing, as spirit alone is insufficient. The decolorized sections should always be cleared up with bergamot oil. (7) Double staining with anilin methyl-violet, Bismarck brown, or anilin fuchsin-methylen blue did not produce favourable results. When decolorizing it is advisable to wash in water before using the spirit; clearing up should be performed in bergamot oil, and the specimen mounted in thickened balsam. Though this method has the advantage of allowing spore-formation to be observed under high powers, of showing the way in which the individuals are disposed, and even of disclosing impurities otherwise unsuspected, it is not available for micro-organisms which fluidify gelatin. Agar cultivations were manipulated by stripping off small lumps of the cultures and plunging them into agar liquefied at 40°, so that they became imbedded when the agar set. The agar was removed from the tube and hardened just as in the gelatin cultivations, but as it was not susceptible of being sectioned, the pieces were saturated with bergamot oil, then plunged into a mixture of paraflin and bergamot oil, and lastly left in pure paraffin for twelve to twenty-four hours in an incubator. When cooled very fine sections can be made, and the process is then reversed to rid them of the paraffin, and they are then treated like the gelatin sections. The staining is not so satisfactory as with the gelatin method, but the photographic results are very good. A mixture of agar and gelatin was also used by the author for certain organisms which require a firm medium. This method does not offer any other advan- tage, as the microscopical appearances are deceptive and hardening an impossibility. CAMPBELL, D, H.—Paraffin-Einbettungs-Methode fiir pflanzliche Objecte. (Paraffin imbedding method for vegetable objects.) Naturwiss. Wochenschr., II. (1888) p. 61. Romittr, G.—Presentazione di un Microtomo. (Exhibition of a microtome.) Atti Soc. Tosc. Sci. Nat. Pisa, V. (1888) pp. 250-1. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 673 (4) Staining and Injecting. Double-staining of Nucleated Blood-corpuscles.*—Dr. W. M. Gray gives the following directions :-~-Spread a thin layer of blood on a clean slide, and dry; immerse the slide in a beaker of alum-carmine (Grenacher’s formula) for five minutes; wash in clean water, and im- merse in a beaker of a weak solution of sulphindigotate of soda or potash (the solution should be of a dark-blue colour, not black-blue as in a strong solution). After the slide has acquired a purplish hue, wash in water and dry. After drying, warm slightly and mount in balsam. The nuclei will be a beautiful red, and the protoplasm a greenish blue. Staining Nerve-endings with Gold Chloride.{|—In his new researches on motor nerve endings, Dr. W. Kihne gives the following as the best methods for manipulating gold chloride :— (1) Lowit’s method, sometimes to be followed by strong formic acid, is especially useful, as thin muscles need not be dissociated. (2) First, 1/2 per cent. formic acid, gold chloride 1 per cent., then equal parts of a mixture of glycerin and water, to which 1/4 to 1/5 volume formic acid has been added. Specially useful for muscle of warm-blooded animals. (3) Same as (2), but without preliminary acidulation. For cold- blooded animals. (4) Golgi’s method. 1/2 per cent. arsenious acid, 1/2 per cent. gold chloride of potash, then 1 per cent. arsenious acid, and reduction in sunlight. Useful for all objects. (5) Modification of 4, consists of laying the strips of muscle in a mixture of 1/2 per cent. arsenious acid, 1/4 per cent. gold chloride of potassium, and 0-1 per cent. osmic acid, then 1 per cent. arsenious acid, and reduction in sunlight. Best suited for reptiles. With regard to the rest of the preparation, the author says that the finer dissociation should be effected at the most favourable stage of the hardening, therefore always in the gold solution. Secondly, many small - bits of muscle (ten to twenty from 1-2 mm. broad) should be placed in 2-5 cem. of the fluid, which should be allowed to act for different lengths of time, then in the gold solution from four to thirty minutes; from the reduction fluid they are to be removed, say hour by hour, and transferred to unacidulated dilute glycerin. In Golgi’s method the separate portions were transferred to fresh arsenious acid in the dark when staining began. In this way various degrees in the effects can be obtained. With the exception of Golgi’s all the methods are usually found to overstain, and this has therefore to be removed. The effect of acid on nerve-endings is always disadvantageous; it is, therefore, a great advantage to produce gold preparations without previous acidulation, and the acidulation stage should always be shortened as much as possible. Preservation of preparations in dilute glycerin acidulated with formic acid is not very favourable for details. Golgi’s method, therefore, has a great advantage in not employing glycerin, but mounting in balsam after dehydration in absolute alcohol is perfectly suitable for showing the stained nerve-endings. The certainty of the results varies with * Queen’s Micr. Bulletin, v. (1888) p. 15. + Zeitschr. f. Biol., xxiii. (1887) pp. 1-148 (pls. A-Q). 674 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO different animals, being most favourable in Reptilia, most unfavourable in the osseous fishes and in the Invertebrata, Staining Nerve-endings with Gold Chloride.*—Dr. G. Boccardi recommends the following method for staining nerve-endings in muscle with gold. The muscles are treated by Ranvier’s method with lemon juice and gold chloride, or the mixture of gold chloride and formic acid; they are then washed in distilled water and the preparations laid for about 2 hours in a 0°1 or even 0°25-0°3 per cent. solution of oxalic acid. A still better mixture is, acid. formic. pur. 5 cem.; acid. oxalic. 1 per cent. 1 cem.; aq. destil. 25 com. Then wash in water, and mount in glycerin. Weigert’s Hematoxylin Method as applied to other than Nervous Tissues.;—Dr. P. Schiefferdecker states that Weigert’s hematoxylin ferridcyanide method can be usefully employed on other tissues than nervous, for example it shows the nuclei of connective tissue well, but has little or no effect on lymph-corpuscles, hence its applicability to lymphatic glands for distinguishing between the framework of the gland and the corpuscles. It seems to have different actions on _ blood- corpuscles, but it is on the epithelium that its speciality is prominent, the sweat-glands, blood-vessels, and nerves standing out very clearly. Yet on the whole the method seems uncertain, and it is questionable how far the chemical, and how far the physical properties of the tissues are the important factors. Staining Mitoses.{—Dr. G. Bizzozero and Dr. G. Vassale found the following method gave the best results for fixing mitoses. The sections made from pieces hardened in absolute alcohol were placed for 5-10 minutes in Ehrlich’s fluid (gentian violet 1, aleohol 75, anilin oil 3, water 80), then rapidly washed in absolute alcohol, and then transferred to chromic acid solution 1:1000 for 30-40 seconds, whereupon they were replaced in absolute alechol wherein they lost part of their colour. To better fix the mitoses it is well to put the sections back again in the chromic acid solution, and afterwards in absolute alcohol. After 30-40 seconds they are placed in oil of cloves; this process may be required to be repeated like the last stage. When no dye is any longer given off in the cloves, the sections may be mounted in dammar. This method gave good results with all tissues and organs. In many cases, however, a still better result was attained by treating the sections, previously to the chromic acid, with the Gram iodine solution (iodine 1, potassium iodide 2, water 300). The former method was found better for lymphatic glands, the latter for those organs in which the nucleus is easily decolorized, e. g. liver, salivary gland, kidney, &c. The foregoing staining method is also available for preparations stained in Flemming’s chrom-osmium acetic acid mixture; the sections, however, must be well washed before they are placed in absolute alcohol. But whatever the hardening method, the cell-substance was uncoloured or slightly yellowish ; in resting nuclei the nucleoli were slightly stained while the mitoses were violet or almost black. * Lavori eseguiti nell’ Ist. fisiol. di Napoli, 1886, p. 27. t Anat. Anzeig., ii. (1887) pp. 680-4. { Arch. f. Pathol. Anat., ex. (1887) pp. 165-244 (1 pl.). ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 675 Staining Leucoplasts, Protein-granules, Bordered Pit Membranes, and Woody Tissue.*—In his treatise on the morphology and physiology of the vegetable cell, Dr. A. Zimmerman recommends acid fuchsin for staining leucoplasts and chromatophores. After the objects have been placed in a concentrated solution of the dye for some minutes, they are shaken about in a solution of picric acid in 50 per cent. alcohol for one minute, and then washed in 50-70 per cent. spirit. The preparations are mounted in balsam. For the fixation of the protein-granules a saturated solution of picric acid in strong spirit is recommended. When fixed and stained the protein-granules can be mounted at once in balsam. Ina mixture of hematoxylin and Bismarck brown, woody membranes are stained brown, the others violet. For showing the membrane of the bordered pits in material preserved in spirit, gentian-violet is recom- mended. The dye is picked up from a watery solution by this mem- brane, which becomes deeply stained, while others are almost colourless. Next to the bordered pit membrane the middle lamelle stain best. The sections may be examined in oil of cloves and then mounted in balsam. New Method for Staining Fibrin and Micro-organisms.{—Prof. C. Weigert has devised a modification of Gram’s method in which the alcohol and oil of cloves are replaced by anilin oil. The procedure is as follows:—The section (hardening in spirit) is stained with the anilin- gentian violet solution. ‘The staining may be done either on the slide or in a watch-glass. In the latter case the section must be washed with water or with NaCl solution to remove excess of dye before it is placed on the slide. The section is then mopped up with bibulous paper and the iodine solution dropped on; when the latter has acted sufficiently the section is again blotted and then covered with a drop of anilin oil, which must be removed several times as it quickly picks up the stain. The section becomes gradually transparent and the anilin oil is removed with xylol and then mounted in balsam. If a double stain be desired the additional colour must be imparted before the violet. In this method there is no need to remove the celloidin. By this procedure fungi and pneumonia cocci are more easily demonstrated than by Gram’s method, but its principal recom- mendation is the sharp stain it imparts to threads of fibrin. Bacteria and fungi appear quite dark, almost black, the fibrin threads a beautiful blue. New Nuclear Stain and Note on Fixation.{ —Dr. G. Platner describes a new pigment to which he gives the name nucleus-black. It is imported from Russia as a black solution, and appears to be a metal base in combination with an organic acid. When used in weak solution it is specially adapted for staining nuclei, nucleoli, and axis cylinders, the protoplasm, connective tissue, and nerve-sheath remaining unstained. If used in concentrated solution the staining is more diffused, but may be reduced by alkalies. Thus five or six drops of liquor ammoniz to a watch-glassful of water or a saturated solution of lithium carbonate diluted, if required, with distilled water, are convenient for limiting the stain to the nucleus and showing up the karyokinstic figures. * Sep. Repr. from ‘ Encyklopedie der Naturwissenschaften,’ Abtheilung : Hand- buch d. Botanik, Schenk, 1887, 223 pp. Cf. Zeitschr. f. Wiss. Mikr., iv. (1887) pp. 529-80. + Fortschr. d, Med., v. (1887) p. 228. { Zeitschr. f. Wiss. Mikr., iv. (1887) pp. 349-52. 676 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO The time required for staining sections with this nuclear stain is as a rule only a few minutes, but if the material have been hardened in Flemming’s mixture 24 hours are necessary. The duration of decoloriz- ing must be judged by the desired effect and from the previous staining. The author notes that this black pigment seems to be very resisting, and the preparations are very suitable for photographic purposes. The author then proceeds to advocate the use of heat for fixing and preserving material, especially for certain objects such as the ova of Ascaris megalocephala which are impenetrable to the action of ordinary reagents. The thin oviduct of the animal is placed in a test-tube and exposed to the action of water at a temperature which need not exceed 50° C., for Max Schulze has shown that the protoplasm is killed and stiffened at this degree. The test-tube must be continually shaken during the heating. The ova are afterwards hardened in spirit which must be increased in strength. Care must be taken not to overheat the preparation, as their form is thereby much altered. By this method certain details in the ova of Ascaris can be brought out which have hitherto escaped notice. For example, certain elements of the equatorial plate, hitherto described as spherical, now appear as short thick rods which by a distinct fissure may be seen to separate into two dumbbell-shaped daughter elements; an important point, as it shows agreement with the ordinary type of nuclear fission. Baumgarten’s Method of Triple-staining.*—Dr. A. Lewin says that excellent results are obtainable by means of Baumgarten’s triple- staining method, for which the procedure is as follows :— (1) After having washed the sections in absolute alcohol, they are immersed for five minutes in borax-picrocarmine; excess of stain is then removed with filter paper. This picrocarmine is prepared by adding crystals of powdered picric acid to Grenacher’s borax-carmine until the solution assumes a blood-red colour. (2) The sections are then passed twice successively into absolute alcohol for two minutes ; to the spirit picric acid is added until the hue resembles that of hock. (3) The sections are then soaked in a freshly prepared solution of Ehrlich’s gentian-violet (100 parts anilin-oil water and 11 parts alco- holic solution of gentian-violet) for one minute. (4) The sections are then immersed in Lugol’s iodine solution (iodine 1, iodide of potash 2, water 300) for one minute, after which they are washed in absolute alcohol for thirty seconds. 5) Excess of gentian-violet is removed with acidulated spirit (HCl 3, absolute alcohol 97). (6) The preparations are then dehydrated in absolute alcohol to which picric acid has been added until the colour is pale yellow (about five minutes), Afterwards the sections are cleared up in oil of cloves and mounted in xylol balsam. Anilin-oil Safranin Solution.j—Dr. V. Babes gives the following modification of his anilin-oil safranin, and which he states gives very superior results. It colours sections almost in a moment, is available for all kinds of tissues, and is especially good for showing up mitoses. To 100 parts of water are added 2 parts of anilin oil and excess of * Bull. Soc. Belge de Micr., xiv. (1888) pp. 146 -7. + Zeitschr. f. Wiss. Mikr., iv. (1887) pp. 470-1. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 677 safranin powder. The mixture is then heated to 60°-80° and filtered. Thus made the fluid is clear and deep red, and it will keep for one or two months. Metanil-yellow.*—This is a yellow powder with sp. gr. 1-3102, soluble in water, 12 parts aq. destil. at 16° C. dissolving 0-031 grm. The watery solution is orange coloured and neutral on reaction. On evaporation, crystals are formed which belong to the rhombic system. Dr. H. Griesbach says that, for microscopical investigation it may be used for staining tissues, to which it imparts usually a yellow colour, the tone of which may vary from a bright toa dark hue. It may also be used as a double stain in conjunction with other dyes, such as Congo red, methyl-violet, acid fuchsin, so that a double or triple staining, according to the combination, is effected. Simple Method for clearing Methylen Iodide.{—Herr R. Brauns found quite accidentally a method for clearing methylen iodide which has become brown. Some brownish methylen iodide happened to become frozen, only a small quantity, dark brown in colour, remaining fluid. When the latter was poured off, and the methylen iodide melted, the methylen iodide was found to be of a pale yellow colour and of excellent quality. At 15° C. the sp. gr. = 3°330. As methylen iodide solidifies at 5° C., it is only necessary to expose it to comparatively slight cold to clarify it in the best and simplest manner. Carmine Injections.{—Trouble with carmine gelatin fluids when used for micro-injections, arises, says Dr. W. C. Borden, in two ways, either from an excess or deficiency in the amount of acid used to pre- cipitate the carmine. In the first case the carmine precipitates in a too coarsely granular form, in the second, all the ammonia not being neutralized, the ammoniacal solution of carmine will diffuse through the walls of the blood-vessels. The difficulty is obviated by determining beforehand the exact amount of acid which it takes to neutralize a given quantity of ammonia—that quantity which is to be used in the fluid made. To this end take a drachm of aq. ammoniz, and add gradually, with constant stirring, acetic acid, testing with blue litmus paper. The instant the paper changes to red stop adding the acid and note the amount which has been used. Suppose that it is 1% dr., then the proportion of acetic acid will be 11 to 6, and if the amount of ammonia used be 4 dr., then the amount of acid needed will be 74 dr. In this way the proper amount of acetic acid to ammonia may be found in any formula. The following formula is recommended as being the best of the gelatin- carmine warm flowing masses. Carmine solution :—Carmine No. 40, 4 dr.; aq. ammonie fort., 4 dr.; water, 6 oz. Grind the carmine in a mortar, gradually adding the water, then add the ammonia, and heat gently until the carmine is dissolved. Gelatin solution :—Gelatin, 14 oz.; water, 7% oz. Soak the gelatin in the water until soft, and then dissolve by heating. Take 5 oz. of the gelatin solution and add to it the solution of carmine. Add to the re- mainder of the gelatin solution sufficient acetic acid as found by previous trial to neutralize 4 dr. of ammonia contained in the carmine solution. * Zeitschr. f. Wiss. Mikr., iv. (1887) pp. 439-62 (4 figs.). + Neues Jahrb. f. Mineral., Geol. u. Palzontol., 1888 G.) pp. 213-4. { Amer, Mon. Micr. Journ., ix. (1888) pp. 39-41 (1 fig.). 1888. oA 678 SUMMARY OF OURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO Heat the solution containing the carmine and that containing the acid to the same degree, by placing the bottles containing them in a pan of water kept hot on a stove or over a lamp. Add gradually with constant stirring the gelatin solution containing the acid to that containing the carmine. Filter while hot through two thicknesses of flannel. The fluid can be poured into the flannel shaped into a bag, when pressure on the sides of the bag will cause the contained fluid to pass through the cloth. Add four dr. of chloral hydrate and shake until dissolved. The chloral will preserve the mass for quite a long time, but if it is to be used within a day or two the chloral is not necessary. A mass made up by the formula given is sufficient in amount to inject a cat or rabbit. If needed for a single organ the ingredients can be reduced to the relative proportion. A manometer should always be used for injecting and the apparatus suggested by the author consists of a wide-mouthed bottle fitted with a manometer made from a piece of bent glass tubing fastened to an upright board with a scale in inches or millimetres marked on it. The only other articles necessary are a tin box with a shelf inside on which to lay the animal to be injected; a sheet of glass large enough to cover the box, a thermometer, a few feet of rubber and glass tubing, and a couple of spring clamps for closing the tubing when it is necessary to stop the flow. Good atomizer bulbs are also required. There is no difficulty in maintaining a pressure of 100 mm. while injecting. Before making an injection the apparatus should be tested by closing the exit tube and gradually raising the pressure to 100 mm., in order that any defects may be remedied. Before killing the animal the box is filled below the shelf with water at 40°C., and a lamp placed underneath to keep the temperature at that point. The melted injecting mass is then poured into the injecting bottle in order that it may attain the same temperature. About 12 oz. of a 3/4 per cent. salt solution is poured into another bottle also arranged with injection-tubes and placed in the box. The animal is chloroformed, and the apex of the heart having been snipped off, the salt solution is injected at a pressure of 50 mm. until it runs clear. The carmine mass is then injected, begin- ning with a pressure of 50 mm., and gradually increased to 100 mm. When the injection is finished the animal is cooled down in ice-water or a refrigerator, and the selected parts afterwards hardened in spirit. Robin’s, Lacaze-Duthiers’, and Farabeuf’s Injecting Syringes.*— Dr. Beale ¢ prefers the syringe to any of the contrivances described in this Journal, 1884, pp. 643-51, for producing pressure by the fall of a liquid. The ordinary syringe has, however, several inconveniences which it is the object of the following modified forms to remedy. Robin’s syringe (fig. 113), has a rack-and-pinion movement to the piston so as to avoid the dangerous irregularities of pressure which are very liable to occur, especially after prolonged work. It also has a second tube and tap at the side for taking up the injecting fluid. * Fol’s Lehrbuch der Vergl. Mikr. Anatomie, 1884, pp. 21-4 (3 figs.). + “After having tried many different methods of proceeding, I find that upon the whole the ordinary injecting syringe is the most successful as well as the cheapest, the most convenient, and the most simple instrument, and it is very easily kept in good order. It need scarcely be said that by no mechanical means can such varieties of pressure be obtained as by the aid of the muscles of the fingers and thumb, while the pressure can be instantly modified or removed at the pleasure of the operator.”—‘ How to work with the Microscope,’ 1880, p. 104. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETO. 679 Lacaze-Duthiers’ (fig. 114), has also a rack-and-pinion arrangement and double tube but is designed to obviate the difficulties found to arise in many cases from movement of the syringe, as well as unequal pressure. It is attached to a heavy base, so that it will stand upright by itself, and a disc is placed on the top of the piston for weights, by which the piston ean be made to descend automatically and at any given rate. The Fic. 113. Fig. 114. syringe can be placed in a vessel of warm water when it is necessary to keep the injecting fluid at a given temperature. M. Robin* preferred, instead of the disc, a stretched indiarubber band, which passes through a ring at the top of the piston, the ends being fastened to the cylinder. The two tubes can be used for injecting two orders of vessels simultaneously. Farabceuf’s (fig. 115) is covered with a non-conducting material so as Fig. 115. th T il Thal fi tf Fil 1] | { to protect the hand from the heat when fluids are used which must be kept very hot. The intervals allow the contents of the glass syringe to be seen. * Robin’s ‘ Traité du Microscope, 1877, pp. 990-1 (1 fig.). 3A 2 630 SUMMARY OF OURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO Collin’s Automatic Cannula-holder.—On the other hand, Prof. H. Fol * prefers a pressure arrangement, on the ground that with all forms of syringe the leather dries up when it has not been used for some time, with the result that when the syringe is wanted it is not in a serviceable condition. Whatever form of pressure-apparatus is used, it is very convenient, he points out, to have a cannula-holder with an automatic closing arrange- ment, such as that of MM. Collin shown in fig. 116. Fie. 116. The holder is hollow, and is connected with the tube from the pressure apparatus. Having been filled with the fluid, and some having been allowed to run out of the cannula, the cock is closed and the cannula is placed in the vessel to be injected, the holder being held in the hand like a pen. By pressing the lever the flow of the fluid can be regulated as desired. Prof. Fol says, “ Whoever has worked with such an instru- ment will hardly again use the old syringe, especially where difficult injections of invertebrate animals have to be performed.” (5) Mounting, including Slides, Preservative Fluids, &c. Half-clearing method of preparing Nerve Sections.|—Dr. Byrom Bramwell lays the section previously stained with carmine on a slide, and then pours on methylated spirit; the spirit is then mopped up, and a small quantity of oil of cloves poured on. While the prepara- tion is still cloudy the oil of cloves is drained off quickly, and having been replaced by Canada balsam, the cover-glass is put on. The results attained, although in some cases extremely good, are eminently uncertain on the whole, the preparations being spotty, irregularly or too much cleared up. Adaptation of Kaiser’s gelatin for arranging microscopic prepara- tions in rows.{—Signor A. Poli commends to the notice of botanists, especially for the preservation of alge, the mixture of gelatin and glycerin known as Kaiser’s glycerinated gelatin, as first proposed by Nordstedt, and recommended in Strasburger’s ‘ Botanisches Practicum.’ He finds it especially convenient when it is desired to arrange a number of minute objects in rows under the same cover-glass. A fine streak of the fused gelatin, which melts at 45° or even lower, is first placed on the * Fol’s Lehrbuch, p. 24 and pp. 25-6 (1 fig.). {+ Edinburgh Med. Journ., Oct. 1886. t Malpighia, ii. (1888) pp. 107-9. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 681 slide by a very fine brush, at the spot intended to be occupied by the object, which is then deposited on the gelatin by a pencil, and adheres to it directly, and the cover-glass at once placedon. If they do not adhere immediately, the slide may be slightly warmed, and then allowed to cool. Purification of Tolu Balsam for Microscopical Purposes.*—Herr C. C. Keller who has already advocated the use of tolu for mounting diatoms, gives the following method for purifying the balsam. 1 kilo- gramme of crude tolu balsam is heated in a water-bath until it is com- pletely melted, when an equal quantity (up to 1200 grm.) of pure spirit of at least 95 per cent. is added. The solution is then filtered, and to it are added 500-600 grm. of petroleum ether in small portions. At first a clear solution results, the petroleum ether being taken up by the alcoholic balsam solution, but soon it separates into two layers. It is then shaken up vigorously, and allowed to stand for 24 hours. Two clear layers are then found, the upper yellowish one consisting principally of cinnamic and benzoic acids, the lower brown one being composed of the tolu resin plus much cinnamic and benzoic acids dissolved in alcohol and a little petroleum ether. The two layers are next separated by decantation. The following step consists in heating 4 litres of distilled water in a capacious vessel almost up to boiling point, and when the flame is put out the resinous solution is poured slowly in. As the petroleum ether boils at 65°-75° C. it disappears, the resin is precipitated, and when cold the cinnamic and benzoic acids crystallize out. The resinous mass is then stirred up several times with boiling water in order to get rid of the last traces of the acid. The resin is best dried over sulphuric acid or by the aid of gentle heat, and dissolved in benzol or chloroform. If, as may happen, when dried by heat, the balsam becomes red or brown-red, it should not be used. PTT Hot Plate Apparatus.t—It is uscful for microscopists to have at hand an apparatus capable of being heated to different temperatures in * Zeitschr. f. Wiss. Mikr., iv. (1887) pp. 471-4. + Arch. de Physiol., viii. (1886) pp. 275-5 (2 figs.). 682 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO order to melt paraffin mixtures of wax and oil for imbedding, for heating specimens mounted in balsam, for drying and coagulating blood, sputum, &e. For this purpose M. L. Malassez has devised the apparatus (fig. 117) which consists of a metal plate bent into the shape of a capital S. The whole length of the plate is 50 cm., and it is 6 cm. broad and 2-5 mm. thick. The apparatus takes up very little room, as it is only 12 cm. long, 12 cm. high, and 6 cm. broad. It may be heated from below or Fie. 118. from above ; if from below it must be supported on four legs, and the Bunsen burner placed underneath (fig. 117). If from above, then the topmost shelf must be made to project so that the burner can go under- neath (fig. 118). MacDonneELu.—{Exhibition of Slides.] [“« Three dozen slides (chiefly entomological, and sections of wood) mounted by Mr. H. Sharp in balsam in an ingenious manner, so as to obviate pressure and distortion of the object, by pasting a rim of paper on the slide, and thus leaving a space of any requisite thickness for the object. This process was invented by Mr. Sharp, of Adelong, and the results were excellent.”] Journ. and Proc. Roy. Soc. of N. 8S. Wales, X XI. (1887) p. 294. Minot, C. S.—The Mounting of Serial Sections. [Summary of existing state of knowledge on the subject. The Microscope, VIII. (1888) pp. 133-8. (6) Miscellaneous. Method of calculating the rapidity of Bacterial Increase.*—Drs. H. Buchner, T. Longard, and G. Riedlin, who have been investigating the rapidity with which certain micro-organisms increase, remark that the following six conditions must be fulfilled in any attempt to determine maximum rapidity of development:—(1) The nutrient medium must be as favourable as possible (they used cold meat infusion: peptone 5 per cent., sugar 1 per cent., salt 1/2 per cent.; solution alkaline; in some * Centralbl. f. Bacteriol. u. Parasitenk.,, ii, (1887) pp. 1-7 (1 fig.). ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 683 cases the sugar was omitted). (2) The temperature must be the most favourable—37° C. (3) The cultivation must be not only pure, but strong. (4) The number of individuals in the nutrient medium must be accurately determined ; this number must be small. (5) At the con- clusion of the experiment the number of individuals must also be calcu- lated. (6) The duration of the experiment must be known, and also short (2-5 hours). The actual procedure was as follows:—From a pure cultivation of the bacillus in the meat-peptone solution a small quantity on a platinum wire is transferred to 50 ccm. of a sterile 0°6 per cent. salt solution. After having been well shaken up, 1 ccm. is taken up with a pipette and trans- ferred to 50 ccm. of meat-peptone solution. With the last solution, which contains at most a couple of hundred individuals to the cubic centimetre, three plate cultivations are made with 1 ccm. each of the solution. In this way the bacterial contents of the solution are determined with suffi- cient accuracy. These quantities having been removed, the nutrient solution, which has previously to the inoculation been raised to 37° C., is kept at this temperature for 2-5 hours. At the expiration of this time three more (secondary) plate cultivations are inoculated with 1 ccm. each of the solution. This gives the number of individuals present at the conclusion of the experiment. The enumeration of the colonies was made by numbering those visible under the field of the Microscope and striking an average from 10-30 such enumerations. The gelatin layer of the plate should be perfectly even, and not too thick. Having obtained the average number of colonies to the field of vision, and then having ascertained the size of the field, the number of colonies on the whole plate was calculated. As the size of the field for a given objective diminishes with the strength of the eye-piece, the size of the field Fic. 119. for each individual eye-piece should be determined once for all. The higher eye-pieces with the smaller fields are more convenient for the more thickly crowded plates. This method may be further developed by adapting to the diaphragm of a high eye-piece two pairs of crossed threads (fig. 119). The distance between the threads should amount to about 1/10-1/12 of the diameter of the diaphragm. The small square in the middle of the field is convenient for enumerating very thickly sown colonies. The number of colonies seen within the small square is ascertained at many different places of the cultivation plate. Colonies which happen to lie on the boundary of the square are only numbered if their larger half fall within the square. From many enumerations an average is obtained which serves as a basis for calculating the contents of the colonies of the whole plate. In this way a plate with 5-10 millions of colonies can be numbered. _ In the eye-piece used by the authors the small square had the apparent size of 1:7 sq. cm., but the actual space with the objective used was 0-0156 sq. cm., that is, the 6410th part of asq.cm. If, therefore, there were ten colonies to the square, in the gelatin layer of 80 sq. cm. super- ficies there would be a total of 5,128,800 colonies. 684 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO The method for calculating was as follows :— Let a = number of primary colonies. b= . secondary colonies. n= “ generations. : a cells or rods after 1 generation = a x 2. 2 generations = a X 2 x 2 n - =ax 2". oo 6 2 = Be = PA a oe log, -— log log, The cholera vibrio was chiefly experimented on, and the results of seven examinations are given. In number these are too few for any precise knowledge ; in certain details of time they vary considerably, and the last experiment given was apparently the first made, and seems to have been thrown in to add length to a too short series. The following are the numbers given :— Experiment 1. (Feb. 1887.) Duration 3 hours. Primary colonies = Secondary ,, = 7250 ee oy A -, each brood developed in 20°7 minutes. Experiment 2. (Feb, 1887.) Duration 3 hours. Primary colonies = 149 Secondary ,, n Period of development Hou tl to) oo 9-3 minutes. Experiment 3. (Feb. 1887.) Duration 2 hours. Primary colonies = 3,583 Secondary ,, = 90,666 n Period of development = 25°5 minutes. Experiment 4. (March 1887.) Duration 2 hours. l| > ~] Primary colonies = 15,345 Secondary ,, = 133,545 io Period of development = 38'7 minutes. Experiment 5. (March 1887.) Duration 2 hours. Primary colonies = 3,550 Secondary ,, = 27,608 n=3 Period of development = 40 minutes. Experiment 6. (April 1887.) Duration 2 hours. Primary colonies = 143 Secondary ,, = 1291 n= 3°18 Period of development = 37'7 minutes. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 685 Experiment 7. (June 1886.) Duration 5 hours. Primary colonies = 35 Secondary ,, = 981,792 n = 14°8 Period of development = 20°3 minutes. It may be noted that either the period of development of each brood yaried considerably, or the method of experimentation or of calculation was at fault. Analysis of Water used for Brewing as regards Micro-organisms.* —The examination of drinking-water, remarks Dr. EH. C. Hansen, is made by means of Koch’s plate-cultivation method, by means of meat- peptone gelatin; and this method is also employed in zymotechnical laboratories. But for the analysis of water used in brewing another method must be adopted. The question at issue is not so much to find out what and how many micro-organisms exist in the water, nor what will-develope in gelatin with or without the addition of meat and peptone, but rather how the water behaves towards the wort and the beer, to what degree it is rich in micro-organisms which can develope in these media, and if among them there be any kinds capable of exerting a detrimental action. The analysis, in short, must be carried out under conditions obtaining in the brewery itself. The nutrient solutions, the beer and the wort, are placed in small flasks plugged with cotton-wool. ach flask, fifteen filled with beer and fifteen with wort, was inoculated with 0:02 cm. of cold tap-water. The water was inserted by means of a pipette, the upper end of which was fixed to a rubber tube, in order to prevent any germs entering from the air. The number of drops was regulated by means of a stopcock. It need hardly be remarked that the apparatus and the media were carefully sterilized. Also, the amount of water placed in each bulb was accurately measured, in order that the result could be calculated up to 1 ccm. For the sake of comparison, an analysis was made by Koch’s method from the same water, and also on another plate; but instead of meat- peptone gelatin; wort-gelatin (wort with about 5 per cent. gelatin) was used here. The cultivations were placed in a thermostat at 24°-25° C., and the experiment was suspended after fourteen days. None of the beer- or wort-flasks contained a trace of vegetation. In Koch’s gelatin there were 111 spots of vegetation, that is 222 for 1 ccm. water; all contained bacteria, but only a few fluidified the gelatin, The wort gelatin showed fifteen vegetations, or thirty to 1 ccm. water. Other experiments gave analogous results, and on the whole showed that while the hygienic method put the total too high, the estimates from the wort- gelatin cultivations were too low, and that very few of the bacteria present in the water had any effect on the wort, and none at all on the beer. Yet, when both of these fluids were much diluted, they lost their original power of resistance, but then of course they were neither what is usually understood by beer and wort. Some further experiments established the fact that bacteria from water, even though introduced in large quantity, were unable to develope in beer, but hyphomycetes of water occasionally did so. Based on these observations, the author made an analysis of the * Centralbl. f. Backteriol. u. Parasitenk, iii. (1888) pp. 377-9, from Zeitschr. f. d. Gesell. Brauwesen, 1888, No. 1. 686 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES, ETC. properties of the Alt-Carlsberg water. Fifteen flasks of beer and fifteen flasks of wort were inoculated with one drop of water (0°04 ccm.) and ten flasks of each sort with 1/4 ccm. of water; they were then shaken up, and for fourteen days kept at a temperature of 24°-25°C. The result was that 1 ccm. water contained 1*3 wort-bacteria and 1-3 moulds, or 2°6 vegetations altogether. They were all in the wort; the beer was quite unaffected. Brown, F. W.—A Course in Animal Histology. II. (concluded.)—Practical Work. The Microscope, VIII. (1888) pp. 145-7. DetMER.—Das Pflanzenphysiologie Praktikum. (Practical Vegetable Physiology.) 352 pp., 8vo, Jena, 1888. Dusier, H.—Manuel pratique de Microbiologie comprenant les Fermentations, la Physiologie, la Technique histologique, la culture des Bactéries et l’etude des maladies d’origine bacterienne. (Practical Manual of Microbiology, comprising Fermentations, Physiology, Histological Technique, tlie culture of Bacteria and the study of the diseases of bacterial origin.) 600 pp., 162 figs. and 8 pls., 12mo, Paris, 1888. Ea@ex, J.—The value of microscopical examination of Phthisical Sputum as a means of giving a correct Prognosis. Queen’s Micr, Bulletin, V. (1888) p. 16. Hessez, W.—Zur quantitativen Bestimmung der Keime in Flissigkeiten. (On the quantitative determination of germs in fluids.) Zeitschr. f. Hygeine, TV. (1888) pp. 22-4. His, W.—Srrasser, H.—Ueber die Methoden der plastischen Reconstruction und iiber deren Bedeutung fiir Anatomie und Entwicklungsgeschichte. (On the methods of Plastic Reconstruction and their importance for Anatomy and Embryology.) Anatom. Anzeiger, II. (1887), pp. 382-92, 392-4. KASTSCHENKO, N.—Eine kurze Notiz in Bezug auf meine Methode. (A short note in reference to my method.) Zeitschr. f. Wiss. Mikr., TV. (1887) pp. 353-6. Mayer, P.—Aus der Microtechnik. (Microtechnique.) Monatschr. f. Anat., 1887, 10 pp. and figs. Mayer, S.—Histologisches Taschenbuch. (Histological Pocket-book.) 9 Hefte and 158 figs., 8vo, Prag, 1887. M‘Cassry, G. H.—Microscopy and Histology for Office Students. Arch. of Dent., 1887, May. Ne son, S. N.—Methods of examination of Bacteria for laboratory purposes. Journ, Amer. Med, Assoc., 1888, pp. 381-6. Oszorn, H. L.—Studies for Beginners. II. Amer. Mon. Micr. Journ., 1X. (1888) pp. 85-6, ParkKER, W. N.—On the objects of the Biological and Microscopical Section of the Cardiff Naturalists’ Society. Rep. and Trans. Cardiff Naturalists’ Soc., XIX. (1887) pp. 107-10. PEAL, C. N.—Microscopy for Beginners. [Report of Lecture.] Ann. Rep. Ealing Micr. and Nat. Hist. Soc. for 1887-8, 4 pp. Ranvier, L.—Traite technique d’Histologie. (Technical Treatise on Histology.) Fase. VII. (and last), pp. 977-1109, figs. 325-79, 8vo, Paris, 1888. Sanvperson, B., Foster, M., and BrunTron.—Manuel du Laboratoire de Physiologie. (Manual of the Physiological Laboratory.) Transl. ty G. Moquin- Tandon. ii. and 620 pp., 184 figs., 8vo, Paris, 1888. Sr6ur, P.—Lehrbuch der Histologie und der mikroskopischen Anatomie des Menschen mit Einschluss der mikroskopischen Technik. (Handbook of Histo- logy and Human Microscopical Anatomy, including Microscopical Technique.) 2nd ed., 209 figs., 8vo, Jena, 1888. TirMANN, F.—Illustrirter Leitfaden fiir die praktische mikroskospische Unter- suchung des Schweinefleisches auf Trichinen. (Illustrated guide to the practical microscopical investigation of hog’s flesh for Trichinz.) 3rd ed., 8vo, Breslau, 1887, viii. and 139 pp., 29 figs. Zune, A.—Cours de Microscopie médicale et pharmaceutique. (Course of medical and pharmaceutical microscopy.) Contd. Moniteur du Praticien, III. (1887) pp. 190, 215, and 249. PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY. Maetine or 137TH Junz, 1888, at Kine’s Cottner, Stranp, W.C., W. T. Surrotz, Hse., Viczr-Presipent, IN THE CHAIR. The Minutes of the meeting of 9th May last were read and confirmed, and were signed by the Chairman. The List of Donations (exclusive of exchanges and reprints) received since the last meeting was submitted, and the thanks of the Society given to the donors. From Cutter, E., Clinical Morphologies. xviii. and 81 pp. ee New York, 1888) ee The Author. Slides (12) of Foraminifera from the ‘London. Clay, Wimbledon .. Mr. W. Godden. Slides (9) and 21 drawings of Insect i eae omar deGy. ies Mr. F. Enock. Diatomaceous Earth from Oamaru, N. Z. .. ws wee on Ur W. G. Watson: Mr. Crisp said that a letter had been received from the President expressing his great regret and disappointment at being unable again to be present, but his visit to London last time had been rather too soon, and he had been thrown back again in consequence. The President had in fact offered to resign, but of course they could not entertain that suggestion, especially as there would not be another meeting until October, by which time they hoped that Dr. Hudson would be completely recovered. Mr. A. W. Bennett said it would probably interest the Society to know that an exceedingly rare Alga had lately been found in this country at Kew, where it was discovered in considerable quantity. This was especially interesting because, although mentioned by Dr. M. C. Cooke as a British species it had, so far as he was aware, never been found in England before. This species, Spheroplea annulina, was well marked and exceedingly interesting in several particulars. He thought this must be regarded as the most interesting discovery of the kind which had been made in this country for many years. Mr. J. Deby exhibited slides, mounted at his request by Mr. F. Enock, of a curious and interesting Dipterous insect collected by himself at Biarritz during the latter days of April last. This small fly does not possess the pelagic habits of Halobates, so well figured and described by Mr. Buchanan White, but is strictly a littoral marine form, whose larva lives among the green alge, which along that iron-bound coast cover all the rocks between tide-marks. The adult form is found swarming on the wet sea-weed as the tide recedes, and seems to enjoy the sunshine. Its movements are remarkably swift, and its life must be short as the waves of the Bay of Biscay break in heavy surf upon these rocks at high tide. A peculiarity of this dipteron is that the male is possessed of only rudimentary and nervureless wings, while those of the female are nearly obsolete, so as to make this last resemble a dark-coloured overgrown louse, when observed superficially. 688 PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY. The structure of the insect’s foot is very remarkable and beautiful as seen under the Microscope, being furnished with a singular comb-like branching apparatus facing the two ordinary claws. The habits of the insect are also peculiar, as the males, which are furnished with a power- ful pair of anal forceps, are in the habit of using these for the purpose of seizing the females by the back of the neck and dragging them along, seemingly much against their will, while stopping ever and anon to allow their spouses to oviposit among the weeds or in minute crevices in the bare rock. Not having had time to wade through the bibliography of this tribe of insects he deferred describing it until its novelty had been fully ascertained. It evidently belongs to the division Nemocera- Tipularia, having six joints to the antenne. Its details can only be studied with advantage under the Microscope, as its total length does not exceed 1/4 in. Mr. C. Waterhouse of the British Museum stated that the insect did not exist in the collection, but that it is very like the Halirytus of the Rey. A. Eaton, found in exactly similar conditions at Kerguelen Island. The European insect is in consequence most probably generically and specifically new to science. Mr. Deby also exhibited a series of sections of the Myrmecophilous plants, Myrmecodia tuberosa and Hydnophytum formicarium, from Java, brought back in spirits by himself from Buitenzorg, through the kindness of Dr. Treub who gave him the living plants. The stained sections, of unusually large size, were beautifully prepared by Mr. A. Cole. Natural size drawings of the plants and of the sections of their tubers executed by the late Mr. Draper (being the last performances of this artist before his death) were also shown. These sections seem to demonstrate successfully that the cork lining of the cavities is always quite continuous, and that lenticelle, or some similar ‘structures, exist abundantly within them. This, Mr. Deby thought, demonstrates that the ants have had really little or nothing whatever to do with the formation of these curious meandering excava- tions in which they live. Thus Mr. Deby considered that Dr. Treub in his original communication published in the ‘Annals of the Botanical Garden of Buitenzorg, was nearer the truth in this matter than were MM. Beccari, Forbes, Huth, Moseley, Wallace, and J. Brittain. The ant infesting both these plants in Java is the Iridomyrmex cordata Sm. var. Myrmecodiz Emery. In many specimens of flourishing plants, not a sign of ants was to be seen, while in many they were very few in number; thus contradicting the assertion that the plants cannot live without the ants. Prof. Stewart said that Mr. Deby’s observations showed how im- portant it was to use one’s eyes, even in places where it might be supposed that the fauna and flora were thoroughly well known. The question now seemed to be whether if the original cavities had been made by ants it might in course of time have come to be a race peculiarity. Mr. H. B. Brady said that in confirmation of the remark as to the desirability of collecting under all circumstances he might mention that having to visit the cinchona plantations he found there an insect pest which was said to be Helopeltis Antonii, and was supposed to be the same insect as that which ravaged the tea-plantations of Assam. On inquiry, he afterwards found that there was no specimen at the British Museum, and on further investigation it turned out not to be Heliopeltis at all, but another species altogether. PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY. 689 Mr. A. D. Michael said that the account which Mr. Deby had given of the Dipterous insect was of very great interest; the point which struck him most being the kind of parallelism shown to what was found in the case of some of the Calcidide. Most of the members of this family were free-flying creatures, but from the fact of many kinds acquir- ing running habits the wing power had been lost, the organs becoming small and feeble. The degradation of the wings in the specimens shown might probably be due to a similar alteration of habits. With regard to the peculiar foot, there were one or two instances of a similar kind found amongst the outlying groups of the Diptera, which were chiefly parasitic, where, between the properly developed claws, the sucker had been modified into a comb-like structure, which was very curious, and was certainly an approach to that shown in the specimen exhibited. Prof. Stewart said they had a familiar example of the reverse of this ‘process in cases where the comb-like structure was the usual form in the case of some of the spiders. Usually amongst spiders there was a claw deeply toothed in the manner so well known to all who had examined a spider’s foot, but in the case of the hunting spiders this had been developed into a sucking foot. Mr. Crisp read a letter from Mr. Enock, in which he said that having succeeded in tracing out the life-history of the Hessian fly, he hoped to be able to exhibit a complete set of slides at the meeting. Mr. Enock said that having unfortunately spoilt one of the slides, he was unable to show a complete series that evening; he hoped, however, to be in a position to do so on a future occasion. He had bred both the American and the Russian species to see if they were the same as those found in this country, but he found that whilst Dr. Reinsman (?) said they laid from 80 to 100 eggs, the first specimen he bred laid 158 eggs on a stalk of barley. He had spent a great amount of time in watching the transformation of the fly, which emerges generally between 4 and 5a.m., though he had found them in the act soon after 3 a.m. Mr. Crisp called attention to two slides which had been sent by Mr. Cole, and asked Prof. Stewart to describe them. Prof. Stewart said that the first of these was a section of the eye of a newt, which showed most of the features of the retina, and at the same time the general relations of the other elements of the eye. The other slide was a section of the head of the human embryo, a thing always difficult to obtain, especially in a sufficiently fresh condition for cutting sections of much value. This slide was labelled as showing the primary and secondary optic vesicles ; this however was a slip, because it was not possible for these to be seen at the same time. Prof. Stewart then, by means of drawings on the blackboard, described the process of development of the eyes in the embryo, and showed the difference between the primary and secondary vesicles with their relation to the ultimate structure of the organs. Mr. Badcock said that he had the pleasure on one or two occasions of calling attention to a pond which in all his experience of collecting was the most extraordinary he had ever found, in consequence of the rarity of the forms and the variety to be obtained from it. Dr. Millar had asked him more than once to write a paper or to make a cata- 690 PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY. logue of the various forms of life to be found there, and as the pond was almost within a stone's throw of where he lived, he had promised to do so in the course of this summer. But to his great dismay the Metropolitan Board of Works, who had taken over the manage- ment of some of the parks, had carted rubbish into these ponds, with the idea of improving them, but of course with the result of destroying them. Two or three years ago the Corporation of London began the same process at Epping Forest, with the object of trying to make it pretty ; a deputation waited upon them on the subject, and succeeded in pre- serving something. As regarded the pond in Victoria Park, it was especially to be regretted on account of the great variety of forms which had been thus destroyed. Mr. Ingpen said he could quite confirm all that Mr. Badcock had said by his own experience of the similar doings of the Board on Wimbledon Common and Putney Heath, where the old ponds had been completely spoilt. In some instances a pond of some years’ standing had found its natural level, but by cutting a trench from the pond not only had it been spoilt, but the neighbouring ground had been converted into a quagmire. Mr. Crisp called attention to two slides which had been sent up by Dr. Peter Yates, of Bolton Infirmary, and which were exhibited under Microscopes in the room. They consisted of thin transverse sections cut with a Cambridge microtome of Sycon ciliatum, a calcareous sponge sur- rounded by a siliceous sponge, Isodictya varians—a very curious and rather abnormal condition. Also sections of Sycon ciliatum cut longitudinally, showing ova, &c., but especially noticeable for the fine specimens of entomostracans which back to back filled up the cloacal cavity within the Sycon. These entomostracans do occasionally find shelter within the Sycon, but these seem so large that it was suggested they had grown with the sponge’s growth. The slides were mounted by Dr. Yates from specimens gathered in Jersey by Mr. George Swainson, F.L.S. Sarcode stained blue-black. Professor Stewart said he had looked at these specimens, but could searcely reconcile the appearance with ordinary facts, because where, as on the Devonshire coast, they constantly found sponges of various sorts growing up together, they found that as a rule they stopped short as soon as they touched, and there was nothing like union between them. In one of the specimens shown a siliceous sponge had apparently com- pletely surrounded a calcareous one, without seeming to destroy it. He should very much like to know how it happened that the sarcode of the inner sponge seemed to be in such a well-nourished and healthy condition. By means of drawings on the board he pointed out the difficulty of understanding how the process by which the currents of water were drawn into and expelled from the living sponge, by means of which it supplied itself with necessary nourishment, could be carried on if the sponge were entirely invested by the wall of siliceous material. The other slide showing entomostraca inclosed in the sponge was a matter of comparatively common occurrence. It was well known that crustacea were often found inside Huplectella, and this was so frequently the case that the Spaniards thought that the Euplectella was something which had been spun by the crustacean. In the Hyalonema from Japan, the same kind of thing occurred, and they hardly ever obtained specimens PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY. 691 in which the outer portions did not show depressions dotting the surface. These were merely the small holes where the crustacea had lived. Mr. H. B. Brady communicated to the Society a paper by the Rev. Walter Howchin, of Adelaide, South Australia, “On some additions to the Knowledge of the Carboniferous Foraminifera ” (see p. 533). He said that when he was working some years ago on his paper on Carboniferous Fora- minifera, Mr. Howchin, then living in England, collected a number of speci- mens; shortly afterwards his health failed him and he went to Australia, taking with him a large quantity of material to look through and examine. The result was that about a year ago he sent over to England an elaborate paper detailing what he had done. Situated, however, as Mr. Howchin then was, without access to current literature upon the subject, he was not aware of much which had been done since the publication of his (Mr. Brady’s) monograph. As it was not possible to present the paper in its then form, he communicated with Mr. Howchin, and was asked in reply to do what was necessary in the way of revision, and then to offer it either to that or some other Society as he might think fit. As he felt deeply grateful to the Royal Microscopical Society for the interest it had taken in the Rhizopods and other subjects, he had great pleasure in pre- senting the paper to them that evening. It formed a remarkably interesting addition to their knowledge, and was well worthy of a place in their T'ransactions. The most interesting thing to him was the fact that many of these palzeozoic forms were identical with those dredged up by the ‘ Porcupine’ and ‘ Challenger’ expeditions. Mr. Crisp said that, speaking for their Publication Committee, he could only say they were very pleased to have the paper, and thanked Mr. Brady for handing it over to them. His name was with every microscopist quite a household word, and they were all very glad to have that opportunity of seeing him with them. Mr. A. Frazer’s improved form of microtome for objects imbedded in paraffin was exhibited, the instrument being a modification and extension of the Cathcart microtome. Mr. J. Mayall, Jun., referring to the new Nelson-Curties Microscope for Photomicrography exhibited in the room, with the differential screw for the fine-adjustment applied under the arm, said that the application of the same thing to the substage, he might point out, was due to Mr. Lombardi. This arrangement for purposes of photography was extremely important, enabling the condenser to be adjusted with great accuracy, without which the high degree of excellence shown in some photographs could never have been obtained. With regard to the old Microscope before them, if his conjecture as to its age was correct, this instrument would be of great interest as enabling them to claim the so-called “Continental” form of fine-adjust- ment, which was made upon exactly the same principle. The Chairman said that in adjourning to October he could only express a hope that during the recess they would be able to collect plenty of matter for the work of the next session, and that when the time came for their next meeting they might have the pleasure of seeing Dr. Hudson again with them. The Library would be closed from the 13th August to the 8th September inclusive. 692 PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY. The following Instruments, Objects, &c., were exhibited :— Mr. Bolton :—Notommata brachionus. Mr. Cole :—Section of head of Human Embryo, six weeks in utero. Eye of Newt, V.T.S. Mr. Crisp :—Nachet’s Crane-arm Microscope. Nachet’s Photographie Microscope. Old Microscope with “Continental” fine-adjustment. Klénne and Miiller’s Focusing arrangement for Photomicrography. Mr. Curties :—New Nelson-Curties Microscope for Photomicrography. Mr. Deby :—Slides of a Dipterous Insect. Slides of Myrmecophilous Plants. Mr. F. Enock :—Slides of Hessian Fly. Mr. A. Frazer:—Improved Microtome for Objects imbedded in Paraffin. Dr. P. Yates :—Slides of Sycon and Isodictya. { To Newey ee Price 5s. 2 « 1888. Part 5. : OCTOBER. ‘JOURNAL OF THE = ROYAL : | MICROSCOPICAL SoclETY: CONTAINING ITS TRANSACTIONS AND PROCEEDINGS, AND A SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO ZOOLOGY AND BOTAND (principally Invertebrata and Cryptogamia), MICROSCOPY, &c. Ldited by FRANK CRISP, LLB. B.A, One of the Secretaries of the Society and a Vice-President and Treasurer of the Linnean Society of Londost ; WITH THE ASSISTANCE OF THE PUBLICATION COMMITTEE: AND 2 A W. BENNETT, M.A., B.Sc., F.LS., F, JEFFREY BELL, M.A., F.Z.S., Lectureron Botanyat St. Thomas's Hospital, Professor of Comparative Anatouy in King’s College, JOHN MAYALL, Jon., F.Z5S., R. G. HEBB, M.A., M.D. (Canéab.), % AND J. ARTHUR THOMSON, M.A.,, Lecturer on Zoology in. the School of Medicine, Edinburgh, FELLOWS OF THE SOCIETY, “ WILLIAMS & NORGATE, ~ LONDON AND EDINBURGH. PRINTED BY WM. CLOWES AND SONS, LIMITED : STAMFORD STREET AND CHARING CROSS: Fahy 5 y “ge 2 : CONTENTS. ——— Transactions oF THE SooretTy— PLANATA, VAR. LACINIATA. By Ferny Be peace RS 4 (Plate X.) 59 Meek Etats aes ree’, ae : X.—Nortoes or New Inrvsorta ee FROM ‘Ascrmrcay ri Fresn Waters. By Alfred C. Stokes, M.D, (Plate ue " SUMMARY OF CURREN T RESEARCHES. ZOOLOGY. | a. Embryology. rower . WEISMAN, A., + LC. Iscurcawa— Formation of Polar Globules ¢ in dntad Pete ‘ HorrMann, 0. K <.—Origin and Significance of the so-called free Nuclei 4 Nutrient Yolk of Bony Fishes .. © .: ohn hae Ryper, J. A.—Resemblance of Ovarian Ova and. the Primilive Foraminifera” BieurtGer, J.—Inversion of the Germinal Layers in the Shrew... .. Epner, V. v., & E. Serrori—Spermatogenests of Mammals ., ts ate Sanrevice, F'.—Spermatogenesis in Guinea-pig ss. 1. ae 3 Massarv, J. —“Trritability of Spermatozoa of Frog Hovssay, F., & BaratLton—Development of the Axolotl gate stg KUPFFER, C.—Development of the Lamprey .. .. wo raise ate ae Weismann, A., & C. Iscurkawa—Partial Impregnation Wai tiots Hertwie’s (0.) ‘Human and Vertebrate Embryology’ — .. B. Histology. Leypic, F.—Cells and Tissues Sf SSE ES Rua Ne oy ARNOLD, J.—Cell-division phe Sees cia ee Ive, M.—Cell-membrane. .. Pg Hees Lee Sremuats, J.—Goblet-cells of. Intestine of Salamander Pie ee iy Be Fiescn, M.—Micro-chemistry of Nerve-cella .. 4. 0 st ee ke Janosik, J.—THistology of the Ovary... ees ; : y: General. - ERE oe a Bs - #8 oe a : ee oe oe” (te fp. Nemathelminthes. 0, Li.— Structure and Position of Gordiacez.. . eer age ee —Integument of Heterodera Schachtit..- se 6, ee ne Foe ca we 05 CaLanpruccio—Echinorhynchus ‘parasitic in Man, and whose itermediary host isa Blaps .. «+ 41 es ne ap ohh wet 7, O.—Ankylostomum DANE: a al eens alee ak ee se ee LY Se ee N 2 SINGHAM—Gape mes) Sonne: de Bed pba oe ne See gi REE oath 0s Incertio Sedis, j Se = "Echinodermata. ; oe 29 os ve oo oe ie a! ea see Coelenterata, System of Siphonophora RSS be ge it ee os OT K.— Life-history of Epenthesis HMeCradyi, n LLY OO EE PA Ty -Arachnactis and Cerianthus .. 2. 2. we eee aE er gt C.—New Be of Anthozoa 44. Ap Ree ie meee Porifera. peg y LL, FL O—Natural Fistor RS SVONGCE Sa oe FS wee sop ign ae oe A.—Presh-water Sponges PER ross pes ea eene a yea awe pia Sian the he eoe New eee Ff Uruguay ‘8 eb See nes noe. $509 awe Ae oe OK, A J.—WMorphology of the Legs of Hymenoptera Leva oltead ieee eate, Van aoe LET, G.—Mode of Locomotion of Caterpillars - 2... a beuhre pa pana eee B,. W.—Colour-relation between Pupez and ‘Surroundings ag Oe Sips Poa soe os WeAnatomy of Gannsie eae EL eS 38 eee g Z. oe G.—So-called Mucous Gland of Male Cane Bap Se alate Saestegeon ts ae rr ORY, WN: __ Fertilization of Ascaris ae irene dn ge yaw SP oa! ae Seats ;, A.—Structure and Developinent of Heterodera Schachtit.. See Te Pt era See Te ee ee ee oe oh. G. H. Tiga Ponenipgi? Pennatulida ae are juLzE, F. B=‘ Challenger’ Hexactinellida Pca get aoPey NAYS Seeia ee ery ees ae PAGE 722 - 723 7124 C23 Protozoa. Kounsturn, J.—Vesicular Elements of Protoplasm in Protozoa see © is es Metssner, M.—Physiology of Nutrition in Protozoa... 6. e+ than ewe Brvyxe, ©. pe—Nature of Contractile Vacuole .. 1.0 4s ae ee te ne Groner, A A.—Further Observations on Multinuclear Infusoria .. 4. eee Fapre-Domercur—Researches on Ciliated Infusoria .. -. sn ee ewe Maurras, E.—Conjugation of Vorticellide 16 oe ee oe ne ae ae oe Fasre-Domercue—Structure of Urceolaria .. 9s. 40 ae ee oe aw wt FaNKHAUSER, J:—Figlena v0 day 0 ed foe ey ean, eee nee es loo tae Dancearp, P. A.—Cryptomonadine® .) 0s se ee ee ee ae ee) ae te Gournret, P., & P. Rorser—Protozoa of Corsica soe os ve we te VERWORN, M. —Biological Studies on Protista +. ee ee ae ee wt Gruper, A.—New Rhizopods.. 2s ee ee 9 oe oe ne oe ae ee oe , Carter, H. J.—Observations on Parkeria .... oq, eal 2 oe een Surerporn’s (C. D.) Bibliography of the Foraminifera. PRN ey ge oe TAs BOTANY. A. GENERAL, including the Anatomy and Physiology of the Phanerogamia. a. Anatomy. (1) Cell-structure and Protoplasm. — : Bororyy, T.—Action of basic substances on living Protoplasm.., + > ss ERRERA, L.—Forms of Cells oe. “* oo” oe oe ae oe ee oe *e oe Kures, G.—Physiology of the Cell... abi eho eee Wierer, A.—Plasmolysis in Flowering Plants ~) ane rh > (2) Other Cell-contents (including Secretions). Micnacp, G.—Alkaloid and Sugar in Cyclamen... .. is Pee: HEcKEL, RB, & F, pre ein: an Giags. CBs Rootpresswre ss! nck ee. tty Feet Neae) de eaten 0 Kate jae LOD ‘Exvine, F.—Curvature of Plants AS 769 RIFFITHS, A. B., & Mrs. Gacuiras teres of certain “Raye. of the ‘Solar Spectrum on Root-absorption- and on the Growth of Plants .. s. «+ es + 769 > epee & late eens tad aie of Nitrogen by Plants.. 4... -.. +. 770 : (8). Irritability. Sees Bartsox, a & F. Darwis—Method of Studying Geotropism.. +» arin 4! as PFEFFER, W.—Chemotactic Movements of Bacteria, Plagellata, and Volvocines reer iit) (4) Chemical Changes (including Respiration and Fermentation). c : WALD, H.—Changes of Substance and Force connected with Respiration... .. 771 pare I og ees of Starch from various substances... ss vn ws we TTL ' -», General. Beis ite, A. BF, W.— Relationship between Ants and Plants in ‘the Tropics... +. T72 Prinesurmt, N.—Deposition of Caleareous Incrustations on Fresh-water Plants ., 773 RENSTELN, G.—Action of Ether on Plant-lfe <<. (00) ee ay oe ne ne we TD ee -B. CRYPTOGAMIA. ; Cryptogamia Vascularia, INES, ‘s. Fes ycteinuiie Position of Isoctes’ 2. vs. se ae on anes ‘78 V. Be R.— Development of the Root of Equisetum Opes a ET ian Pe ee Ee Muscinez, Ps BTZLER, es; B.—Reproduetion of Thamnium alopecurum .. ss +6 ae on TTB. Nout, F. —Protonema of Schistosteya osmundacea i Be bies ila ah Cae ~ Russow, E.—Physiological and Comparative Anatomy of Sphagnacez mahi teed saya Ro: iL— Forms 3 Ee eu. sateen OSes garth uty eye Pape: wat CAd oot oper a aeRO ee $ : 4 F Algee. F Z ; oy: B. pi —Classéfieation BF OMT DWC og wa aia Pee ok Aad oe teed AIOE scirG, A.—Classification of Confervoider .. Sete re peed WO BNET, E., & C. Franautr—New Genera of Perforating Ag Ste Cee a ae IO = ‘DEMAN, "B. pe—Ulothrix and Stichococeus ... ++ ss Pee yee re ey eet Seed ROME PIDIGLLOs “hee ec psa COP tae) ite ade te ae WO OR ee! LAS NI, 2s Bz pE—Diatoms from a LUG ie Ae MV GL te URES 5 RU OS + Se AT opp EE k <5 ; Fungi. LIPS, SWE Lunia Gf POU Ge EA iis Fe NS ot ip GN Gee vag? Spe soe AED ER—Conidiferous Form of Lapin biennis Ee ees ened ic eaaera BCT ey pales LD, O.— Classification of Basidiomycetes .. 1. ss ss ax ew ws 178 ILLARD, N N.—New Tubercularia .; ES eg BE ey ere rE rs gee ETE! , G—Calostoma Desv. (Mitremyces Nees) .. 38 Rp lige teite (patty oe ete te OU , W. B.—Pimina, a new Genus of Hyphumyectes pi A ST are re, arpecne ko}l EN a ngs. of Mirutbtsces oe A's ey Seo tn eS Eas ay ae i H.—Parasitism of the Trugie .._.. Giediighe Sie ee ae Sept eee pais RA DO J. DE—Fungus Parasitic on the Pine-apple Bae ea 5 wt & Vurrtemin—* Rouge” of the Scotch Fir... 1. +6 0s 0 ee ee 781 MANGHARD, A.—Pavrasites of the Peridiniex Au tela taw 1 eee rapa pier tes ee OLR er Vouemin, P.—Disease attacking AiG die pI See ia, Pee flay gan crea on AOE f Wie Haplncoccun reticmlatus, shes, Mast onc ow fo ees os ea tae ae oy EBS Symbiotic Fungus in Molgulide — 3 ee : eeaeiae See re Lcaeur $04 wer, A.—Plasmodium of Badhamia and Brefeldia Bae ig eet ty eA he D: ee P. ee tela NOS Seen bt ae eden a eben a et reat ee Poe Aires -~ Protophyta. ey OMONT, M— Relationship between Phormidium and ae ope age S oe tee es BA AGERHEIM, G.— New Pleurocapsa-__- hig ona: LOE TZLER, J. B.—Colouring matter of the waters: of the ‘Lake of Bret . Sig eel UEMIN, G. — Saccharomyces ellipsoideus and, its Use in the Preparation of Wine peso ae tas ee a ey. Boke oe ee Cr ee os ee eo ee oe oe “ee 785 Sy PAGE - HoRST, J.—Fungus Parasitie on the Salt-fish .. .. .. + 2 Se Bee coe GC NEE PUCCIO 6 ab oe ds aes ae eS oe es Ma BE ee ACE, — Cultures of Cladothrie dichotoma Sewer peal tae Giese ae pea SEE Cece: Laurent, E.—Organic nourishment of Beer-ferment +» «+ «+ Ermencem, E. Van—Scheuerlen’s Cancer Bacillus.» +s ee Wrnoagrapsky, §.—IZron-bacteria .. PSO ws Tye TomascHek, A., & A. Hansatre— Bacillus muralie Sy hs Bata PRAZMOWSKI, A.—Spore-formation tn Bacteria 1. 10 ee ae Buuer, A.— New Marine Bacterium .. és FRANKLAND, GRACE C., & Percy F. FRANELAND —Nein and organisms from Wi ater did Bet ode ec Bae eee aS BavumGarten’s Pathological Mycology ’ Mee seijin wes Se Sept MICROSCOPY. a, Instruments, Accessories, &c. (1) ees Tuvry’s Five-tube Microscope (Fig. 120) tele peu Scuiecr’s (FE. W.) Meat-examining Mitroasene ig, 121) Pe ae 33» cee ee TD Ss Travelling Microscope (Fig. 122)... .. .. bat Tien: Paty he eee Zetss’s IIa Microscope—Babuchin’s Microscope ve Lxitz’s Demonstration Microscope — Old Demonstration Microscope Pigs: 123 and Se 124) . . o* “e -* Me we! Wuite, 8. S.—Dentist’s Examining Glass (Fig. 125) vena ® : Bavscu anp Lomp Opricat Co.’s ‘Watchmaker Glass” (Fig. 126). a8 eh, latarel, fa Ganz’s (J.) Pinakoscope with Dreyfus’s Reflector (Pig. 127)... ee ee ne te TRI-OCULAR, Quadri-ocular, &c., Prisms (Figs. 128-132) .. 6. +s ee ae we (2) Eye-pieces and Objectives. Ryetse Ze1ss’s “ Compensation Eye-piece 6 with 1/1 Micron-division” (Fig. 133) a4 gnome (3) Illuminating and other Apparatus. , sy Ae Erernov's (A.) Drawing-board (Figs. 184-139) ., 2. eee ee ae te . 798 Bars’ (V.) Hot Stage (Figs. 140 and 141) .. Bae ; Cuasry, L.—Capillary Slide and accessories for the examination of Ova (Figs. 14 42 and 143) ... oa OEY sats Berke, F. .— Measuring Corrosion Surfaces in Iron Pyrites (Fig. 148) Spire Row.anyp’s (W.) Reversible Compressorium (Fig. 145) + © ee ee ee ee Bravmonn’s (C. R.) Reservoir Life-slide ee Nae Had 147) 3.6 eR es Hoiman’s Current Slide...» se se Bot Sagtnd eae ive ae. eee Sroxes, A: C.—Life Slides 00. 60) ne tn o> PO oe we ey ae eee Lames for pak a hoes Work >... Pere he Mavassez, L.—Tubes for Microspectroscopic “Analysis (Big: 148) Breer tl? pues (4) Photomicrography. eri s hy Bunrstert’s (H.) Photomicrographic Apparatus (Fig. 149). wor tage daies Nevnatss’s (R.) Focusing Arrangement (Fig. 150 8 Piersot, G. A.— Drawings v. Photographs.—Screen for the Abbe Camera “Lucida ae Srenciemn, M.—Instantaneous Photomicrography = +. ++ ee ty tee ERRERA, if —Photographing moving Microscopie Objects .... Felines eens Fiscurn—Photographing phosphorescent bacilli by means of their own light br Rts © (5) Microscopical Optics and Manipulation. if ba Cay ae Fasotpr, C.—Variation in Micrometric Measurements due to different Wiiméasdou: ge | : LEINHERTZ— Testing Screw-Micrometers of Reading-Microscopes .. ss se “aoe ES, Smirn, ‘TI’. F.—Arachnoidiseus as a new Test for High-power Objectives .. vet) 6m oe 815 ay NELSON, E. M.—Tests for Modern Oberiavey Be alae hone Sly leigh: eee ae 816 F AsoLpr’s (C.) Test-plates .. Sey waraeateuees se MicroscoricaL Optics and the Quelcett Club Téjuatad 2 Be Wi wet ig ht oe aa ae 7 (6) Miscellaneous. Sestak eer Quiny, E. P.—Simple method of Projecting upon the ‘ Sections, both by ordinary and by polarized light .. Jupp, J. W.—Microscopy and the Study of Rocks — +. Hovzeav, J. C.—Microscope and Telescope .. 6. B. Technique. ‘ (1) Collecting Objects, including Culture Procssase: x Birou-HirsonrELD— Cultivation of Schizomycetes in Coloured Nutritive Media’ . ; : FRANKEL, O.—Cultivation of Anaerobic Micro-organisms 1... se oe ee te Grose — Bacterial Growth between 50° and 70°C. se oe ee ee oe es ty Rovux—Cultivation on Potato— : or, Pea bDE—Simple Method for “reproducing Koch's Cilkivation ‘Plates eS B V-) modified Cultivation Vessel (Fig. 151) Lae Rater iwaege tee , A.—Cooler for quickly setting Gelatin Plates — .. ae eS gee dade Soke EN, T. F.— Collecting and Preparing Characee .. Ciuanne eres e nen, A.—Cultivation of Lichen-forming Ascomycetes. poeta Wine: a wv ano TLLIET,. 4 A.—Differential Staining of the Tissues of Living Animals .. Sr RT 40 Pe Aas, JUN. aa se Nutrient Gelatin and tag ee ea ok ok [UPPH, aes Cultivation purposes 1. we eon ee ae et sR —Photozylin for Imbedding .. .. Eo et Oe Br cu’s (A.) Microtome for cutting whole sections of the Brain and bier organs. Rorvterer, eae ates Oe Ba Muscle and. ae ee “Tissue bres Ma Sie ER, J. Sonia in ihe ‘Study of “Bone Delonte Seer en wt, A.—Preparing and Staining Mammalian Testicle’ .. 2. ss _ EF. L.—Stain for the Morphological Elements in Urine Pe eye a ri rR, G.—Staining Spores... Nhe N mess Paar ae piMorr, N.—Staining Tubercle and Lepr osy Placita PR ee ae een oe x G.—Aleoholie Solution of Haematoxylin. see ee ue ee ae A:—Osmic Acid and Gold chloride MEROASY pce a Suk seers va kee as ut, H).—Phenol in Microscopical Technique... +. 20 ee ne ee wes H.—Double Staining... .. a Ppa Rlaar ok weg as oe ee H.—Injection Mass for the Vessels of the age Terese Neteeaiset ne ree , K.— Injection with Indian Ink -.. —. Nears. eight vale i ee arte Cite (6). Mounting, including Slides, Preservative Fluids, Sex Acu’s (.) Filter-capsule (Figs. 158 and. 159) ts a objects mounted in glycerin Big. 160)... us, H. pE—Preservation of Plants in Spirit and. the Prevention of Browning «. (6) Miscellaneous, pe Le oes proved method for Enumerating Blood-corpuseles cone relatin Culture Test for. Miero- Sean Of Welker 0 a5. wot sven sox Fane Ele. oe oe aE ice ee or oe ST mae Coie on gig t tS aha: OF THE Socmry ere As ae See LG a as, aoe - es ; oe O81 E.— Hardening and Staining Plate-cultivations Eris tei pean a egcis Gees a, M.—Beck's Microsyringe (Fig. 197) ~ Hp tinel Sede ay NO apse IRR ZABRISKTE, J. Li.— Continuous Centering of a Cover jie. FM ipe OR eee ae LD, M.—Apparatus for tnclosing microscopical preparations of boli : ee Sections. to the Slide... Caner se ree: pater aoe H— Methods of Plastic Reconstruction ES ide pees a eer ee s oe W.—Making Mounts Photographic .. 2.0 2 8y ew be ae uRTZ—Improved method for the Bacteriological Eaneae of Air ae I.—APERTURE TABLE. Co : ye eae MOTE caste Sierla tas — Lach Limit of Resol Sipe Pr 20 o esolvi >, . Ly naymne: Air Water | Howinsscus Tr Power, in Lines to an Inch. _ ~ . ont Rag ae (m= 1°00). | (n= 1°33). | trl tts Pace Light. (Bine) Light ; meeey 5) ; on RTE Bat aot “3 | A=0" - | Photo; 10g Hp Bik sora Feb wl hss bee wad Rida bi yc Fe 1-51 2 “ Teoe o | 446,543 “Tine Fr)" petra Pepe Dit 1-50 3 ss | 166° 51’ 146,543 158.845 ine A.) a ae e "| gore os | adverse ay ee eye oh or cE ef, | 157° 12° ; f % , 767 ate 1:47 i "| TBge Bor | a42'687 188, 756 ag ae vag | “. |AMe gor | auatosr | ibe60s | 057 2-280. é 147° 42’ y72: 158 7,957 1 9: % 1:44 Bey oy ae BEEN ,620° | 186. 190 46 : 45° , 4 152.5 , 687 2° ¥ 1°43 5 14 6 139.795 3979 185.4 161 F- : ae f g° 89g! ? 151.530 s417 2: s 1-42 taka 138,830 ,530 | 184 13%, ° ¥ ee 0° 99! ’ 150 48 147 : 2-1 a, io 1-41 : 137,866 485 | 182 03 | : a8 . 3° 12" 0 149.4 877 2-074 1-40 ; 136 12’ | 136,902 440} 181 a “- x 86° , ; 148.3 , 607 2-045. 1:39 m 8’ | 1385,9: ,395 | 180 2045, eS ms 34° 0! »938 147.35 »337 -P. 2: is brs * 9° 16! ; 146 5067 1° < 1:37 ; 1 16’ | 134,010 305 | 177.7 988. v 30° 267 145,2 77,797 | 1-960 1:36 | 198 6’ | 133,046 ,260 | 176 960 / < 28° 40’ ; 144 3927 1-932 - 1°35 \ 1 40 132,082 »215 175 932-3 o :: 26° 58" ; 143,17 6257 | 1-904 1:34 ; 1 131,118 170 173 904 — ; “ 25° 18" cher i peered rag | | 186 9 me rie | 1a) | 1850 1:31 s 165° 56’, 120° a 128,225 sagions 170177 | ee eo . ieee iS he 127,261 | 137,944 168,907 | 1-769 | Tee : 1952 38" 117° 35/ 126,297 | 136,899 1e7 oa Lee eet a we 50" | 116° 8° orgie 135,854 ee tiicd ‘ 1-716 _ He oe 145° a eit 44! eet 134,809 alee : 1-690 1:25 - 1499 39 L11¢ oy ae be 495 708 | Lea cee = . 137° Pe vith ss me Aa 131,674 lentes ; 1-613” 1-22 -- 135° 177} 10 : 119.548 ,629 158. 3 [588 - : ae ‘ 8° ? ? 1 > 747 ~hes 121 |. 1g 4" | toe 46 | 117620 129,584 | 197,477 1368 7' 1 105° 30’ > 620 127. 3,207 1513. 1:19 “Sy 128° 55’ | 104° 0 116.656 - , 494 154,937 : 1513 1:18 9 122 , 857 a +e 1-12 " ise | 97241 | 1097907 hare pent 1-346 he 116° 20'| 96° 2 | 109,907 tI sak 146.048 | 1-393 ee re | ae . . ' ; ; ? ees $ ee 90° set 10m 088 The 139.698 _ ee me ae 8° 89° 30’ janie 3 112 864 138 423 1: 5 oe J fh 42’ 8s° 27' 03,159 111.819 137,158 Hs. oe al 16’ 87° 94! 102,195 110.774 135,888 1:0 29 ggo 10’} 84° 18’ 9,302 107.639 32,078 nag 180° 0’ ee “at 83° 17’ a te 106,598 ae 163° 48° 1* | 82°17 374 105 ,938 0:98 63" 48 96° 9 17 96 ; 548 | 12 157° ’ 6° 12 81° 17% ,410 10 8,268 0:97 1 22 94° 56! 17 95 4,503 |° 12 51° 59" 56 80° 17° ,446 10 6,998 0-96 ane 93° 40! 17 94 3.458 | 125.7 147° 99" 40 79° 18° »482 10 Aes 25,728 43° 36’ 24’| 78° 90° ,518 | 101,36 4,458 Pe pss 140° 6’ oe ad Lae a ee toutes ae “941 op ’ 136° 52’ 3 1) 76° 94! , 990 ; 918 Berets Ry 4 0-92 | 133° Bee Bee tf Be (ee Ee ek 100 '6he | ood area one 131° 0’ 87° 39'1 74° 30! 89, 661 onan 119,378 Rye = -1°058 i 0-89 || 125° 45" ne eg Bah Sgr 87.733 On iae. ane ee 884 J 17064 ; 25° 45° r} go 34 1 7103 9 5838 ) fee | 82° 51" | 70° 44" 85,805 ayes 114,298 111,758 APERTURE TABLE—continued. Corresponding Angle (2 w) for Limit of Resolving Power, in Lines to an Inch, Panes ee eR eh Pee er La Te Gee ee eA ee eumatniatin ay trating Poe Wea Monochromatic ee Air, 4} Water — Hambgcnc gas | White Light. | (Blue) Light. | Photography. i (a2y’ | Power. (m = 1°33), | (n= 1°52) (A= 0°5269 pn, bar 4861 p14) (A= 0° 4000 jx, G eee a es aie eer 2 Line b.) Line FE.) “| near Line 2.) § "190° 55" | 81° 49 | 69°49’ | 93,877 |- 90,918 | 110,488 | +757 J 1-149 3 jj 1is°.3s’ | 80° 3¥ | 68° 54’ 82,913 89.873 | 109,218 740 | 1°16 || 118° 25" | 79°87" | 68° oO! 81,949 88,828 |. 107,948 793 11-176 “114° 17’ | 78° 90" | 67°. 6 80,984 87,783 | 106,678 -706 | 1-190 112° 12’ | 77° 14’ | 66° 12’ | 80,020 | 86,738 | 105,408 “689 | 1-205 110° 10' | 76° $' | 65° 18’ 79,056 | $5,693 | 104,138 | -672 -} 1-220 108° 10’ | 75° 3" | 64° 24! 78,092 | 84,648 | 102,868 | -656 | 1-235 106°.16" | 73° 58’ | 63° 31’ 77,128 83,603 | 101,598 | °640 | 1-250 104° 99’ | 72° 53’ |}. 62° 38’ 76, 164 82,558 | 100,328 | -624 | 1-266 102° 31’ | 71° 49° | 61° 45’ |> 75,200 | 81,513 99,058 608 | 1-282 100° 42’ | 70° 45’ | 60° 52’ 74,236 80,468 | 97,788-| -593 | 1-299 "98° 56’ | 69° 42’ | 60°. 0! 73,272 79.423 96,518 | °578 | 1-316 97° 11" | 68° 40’ | 59° 8° 72,308 78,378 95,248 | +563 | 1-333 95° 28’ |. 67° 87% | 58° 16! 71,343 17 333 93,979 | -548 |.1-351 98° 46’. | 66° 34" | 57° 24" 70,379 76,288 92,709 -533 | 1-370 99° 6’ | 65°32’ | 56° 32° 69,415 75 ,242 91,439 | +518 | 1-389 90° 29’ | 64° 32’ | 55° 41’ 68,451 74,197 90,169 -504 | 1-408 88° 51’ | 63° 31’ | 54° 50’ | 67,487 | 73,152 88,899 | -490 | 1-429 87° 16’ | 62° 30’ | 53° 59° 66,523 | 72,107 87, 629 476 | 1:449 "85° 41’ |. 619-30? | 53° 9! 65,559 71,062 86,359 -462 | 1-471 “4° 8” | 60° 30’ | 52° 187 64,595 70,017 85,089 -449 | 1-493 82° 36’ | 59° 30’ | 51° 28” 63,631 68,972 83,819 436 | 1-515 B12. 6’. | 58° 30’ | 50° 38” 62, 667 67,927 82,549 -493 | 1+538 79° 36’ | 87° 31’ |. 49° 48° 61,702 66,882 81,279 -410 | 1-562 “78° 6’ | 56° 32’ | 48° 58 60,738 65,837 80,009 +397 | 1-587 76° 88’ | 55° 34’ | 48° 9’ 59,774 64,792 78,739 “384 | 1-613 75° 10’ | 54° 36" | 47° 19° 58,810 63,747 | -77,469 -372 | 1:639 73° 44’ | 53° 38” | 46° 30! 57,846 62,702 76,199 “360 [1-667 72918’ |. §2°-40" | 45° 40° 56,881 61,657 74,929 -348 | 1-695 0° 54’ | 51° 49’ | 44° 51’ 55,918 60, 612 73, 659 -336 | 1-724 69° 30’ | 50° 45" |. 44° 9° 54, 954 59, 567 72,389 “825 | 1°754 “68°. 6" | 49° 48"-| 43° 14’ 53,990 58,522 71,119 “314 1 1°786- 66° 44” | 49° 51’ | - 490-95" 53,026 57,477 69,849 | +303 | 1-818 65° 29’ | 47°54’ | 41° 37° 52, 061. 56,432 68,579 | -292 | 1-852 64° 0" | 46° 58’ | 40° 48” | ~51,097 55,387 67,309 -281 | 1-887 62° 40’ | 46° 2° | 40° 0! 50,188 54,342 66.039 270 | 1-923 61° 20’ | 45° 6 | 39°12’ | - 49,169 53,297 64,769 -260 | 1-961 60° 0" |. 44°. 10" | 38° 24" | 48,205. | -52,952 | 63,499 950. | 2-000 57° 29° | 49° 18’ | ~36° 49’ | 46,277 50, 162 60,959 “230 | 2-083 54° 47’ | 40° 28” | 35° 157 44 349 48,072 58,419 “212, | 9-174 53° 30" | 39° 33° | 34° 27’ 43.385 47,026 | 57,149 | -203 | 2-299 52° 13’ | 38°38" | 33° 40! 42,420 45,981 | 55,879 -194 | 2-973 49° 40’ | 36° 49’-| 39° “5” 40,492 | - 43.891 53,339 176 | 2-381 AT? 9" | 35°. Or | 30° 31’ 38,564 41,801 50,799 -160 | 2-500 44° 49’ | 33° 12’ | 98° 57’ 36,636 | 39,711. | 48,259 | -144- | 2-632. - 49° 19" | 31° 24 | 97° 94° | 34.708 | 37,621 45,719 | -130 | 2-778 - 40° 58’ | 30°30" | 26° 38° 33,744 | - 36,576 44,449 123 | 2-857 39° 44" | 29° By" | 95° 51’ | 32,779 | 35,531 43,179 116 | 2-911 87° 20" | 27° 51 | 94° 18’ | 30,851 33,441 | 40,639 102 | 3125 34° 56” | 26° 4° | 99° 46’ | 98,993 .| 31,351 38,099 -090 | 3°333 390-39 | 940-18 | 91°14" | 26.995 | 29.961 35,559 078 | 3°571 || 30° 10" | 29° 33° | 19° 49" | 25°067 27,171 83,019. “068 | 3-846 98° 58” | 21° 40” | 18° 56’ | 24,103 26,126 | 81,749 -063 | 4-000 “97° 46' | 20° 48' | 18°10’ | 23,138 | 25,081 30,479 “058 | 4-167 95° 96’ | 19° 9° | 16° 38’ | 21,210. | — 22,991 97,940 | -048 | 4-545 Page 4 | VPABt =| 15°: 7" 19,282 20,901 25,400 | -040 } 5-000 90° 44” | 15° 34’ | 13° 36" | 17,354 | 18,811-—|~ 22,860 “032 | 5-555 18° 24" | 13° 50’ | 12° 5 | 15,496 16,721 | 20,320 } -026 | 6-250 179 14’ | 12° 58’ | 11° 19’ |. 14,462 | 15,676 | 19,050 | +023 | 6-667 ~ 16° 5’ | 12° 6’ | 10° 34" | 13,498 | 14,630 17,780 020 | 7-143 “13° 47" | 10° 29' | 9° 4’ | 11,570 | 19,540 | 15,240 “O14 | 8-333 |. 11° 29° ge 38! 7° 34’ | -9,641 | 10,450 | 12,700 | +010 410-000 98-11! | 69.54’ 1 6? BA 7,713 | 8,360 | 10; 160 -006 {12-500 6° 53! 5° 10’ | 4° 397 5,785. 6,270 7,620 | -004 416-667 5° 44’ | 4° 18’ | 3° 46 | 4,897 5,295 | 6,350 -003 {20-000 ( 20°53 = GREATLY REDUCED PRICES OBJECT-GLASSES MANUFACTURED ‘BY R. & J. BECK, 68, CORNHILL, LONDON, E.C.. PRICES OF BEST ACHROMATIC OBJECT-GLASSES. ee 93 Linear magnifying-power, with ro-inch No. Focal length. aper- Price. body eebeidnd Tye: ete ture Sh PPR ais DIT ee | about | No. 1.| No. 2.| No. 3.!'Now4.| No. 5. es peep a | a £8.00. : 100 | 4inches .. 9 110 0 30 40 50 101 | 3 inches 7 EIO=-05 60 . 102 | 3 inches 42 to 20*. 0 ay i) 103 | 2 inches be) 110 0O 104 | Qinches .. 17 | 210 0 6746 90 2 Bee 105 | Ifineh.. ©... 23 < . 2 go-| 120 150 106: |: Sanches 25 107 3 inch .. 32 210 0 hs As 35° 108 | $ inch 45 210 0 300 | 400 500 109 | +4;inch.. 65 4 0 0 375. | 500 }>- 625 PEO.) St neh 253 95 5 0 0 450.| 600 | ~ 750 i Oe Or BS Ss) eee aes 75 310 0 600} 800°]. 1000 1722 iineh .. -. 120 410 0 750 | 1000 | 1250 113 | dinch .. 130 6.20"-9 1200 | 1600 | 2000 114 | 3, imm. | 180 5 O 1500 | 2000 | 2500 115 | 34 imm. 180 8 0 0 2250 | 3000 }: 3750 116 | 2; imm. | 180 | 10°00 3000 | 4000 |. “5000-, i160 | 20 0 0 6000°| 8000 | 10,000 117 | Pinole ECONOMIC ACHROMATIC OBJECT-GLASSES, APPLICABLE TO ALL INSTRUMENTS MADE WITH THE UNIVERSAL SorEwW, Angle MAGNIFYING-POWER, of with 6-inch body and No. Focal length. aper- Price. eye-pieces, ture, Ss Bude s FA about No, 1.| No. 2, No. 3. 5 £3. a. | 150 | Sinches .... 6 AP DE4O I2 15 161 |.2 inches»... 3 Sn 18 23 163-4 a Snck 42S VS 8 1 6.0 46 61 L5S | dine eo eel 38 Lo 9°. | 116 £64") neh? i ea et BO gg 9 eae © pe ine ey foe ap bee v0} L5G inch we eee Se LO 2 5 O | 250 |-330 EG} Fn Fis oes] ERO 310 0 } 350 | 450 | 157 | + imm. wens oh B80." | Be Oy OF 6a Bae Revised Catalogue sent on application to RR. & J. BECK, GS, Cornhill. ,amb. Sci. Inst Co. ae JOURNAL OF THE ROYAL MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY. OCTOBER 1888. TRANSACTIONS OF THE SOCIETY. IX.—Note on the Reproductive Condition of Orbitolites complanata, var. laciniata. By Henry B. Brapy, F.R.S. (Read 10th October, 1888.) PLATE X. Amonest the Foraminifera that have their home in the shallow waters of the coral-islands of the South Pacific, one of the most remarkable is the large Orbitolite with “crumpled” edges, known as Orbitolites complanata, var. laciniata. It can scarcely be called a common form, in... uch as its occurrence, so far as at present known, is confined to the Friendly Islands and the Fiji group, though in certain favourable localities it is tolerably abundant. I have never observed it in New Caledonia, where the more typical forms exist in the greatest profusion and specimens of Orbitolites complanata in the normal condition often attain dimensions nearly as great; nor, so far as I recollect, on the reefs of Samoa. A considerable gathering of the variety referred to was made on the ‘ Challenger’ expedition, and some of these specimens EXPLANATION OF PLATE X. Fig. 1.—Orbitolites complanata, var. laciniata, from the Suva reef; natural size. »; 2.—Peripheral view of a portion of the margin, the perforated external wall broken away, showing the outer annulus crowded with young embryonic shells, corresponding to the “ primitive discs” of adult normal specimens .. x 15 diam. - » o.—Transparent horizontal section of the marginal annuli of a portion of the shell with embryos in situ » 4, 5.—Embryos (“primitive discs”); lateral aspect 25 AY) cg x xX op 6, 7.— - , one showing a single row of seers the other two rows ;—peripheral aspect .. x 40 ,, Se o>. o-— —_—_—. , horizontal sections, seen by nel light . x 40 ,, » 10—Young specimen, with three annuli of chamberlets, laid open to show the interior... x 40° 5, », L1, 12.—Masses of embryos—horizontal and transverse sections —hby transmitted light son 40023 » 13.—Horizontal section of the central portion of an adult : specimen, by transmitted light EMCI DR RAE Pee 4) aoe oA 14,—Transverse section of a similar shell .. x 1888. one 694 Transactions of the Society. were described in more or less detail by the late Dr. Carpenter * and myself. . On as visit to Fiji at the end of the year 1884, my attention was naturally turned to this amongst other Foraminifera peculiar to the region, but beyond a few worn examples, apparently dead shells, found on the beach at Loma-Loma, my search for it was at first almost fruit- less. The weather was stormy, I had been delayed by vexatious quarantine regulations until the hurricane season had set in, and I could rarely get out to the reefs. When at last I was able to land on the reef off Suva, I soon met with the object of my quest, though the specimens, as we shall presently see, did not correspond in all respects with those collected in such numbers by the ‘ Challenger’ naturalists. To my surprise the shells were parasitic, generally firmly attached to a green Alga which flourishes amongst the coral-sand at the bottom of the shallower pools on the reef ;—I had previously supposed that the adherent habit of the Orbitolite ceased at a very early stage in the growth of the disc. Their peripheral edges were exceedingly brittle —so fragile indeed that it was often impossible to remove the speci- mens without more or less breakage. Other slight peculiarities were apparent, but there was little opportunity for close examination on the spot. a working over the material collected in Fiji, since my return, my attention was attracted to these specimens, not only by the peculiarity of their general appearance, but more particularly by what seemed to the naked eye to be a number of very young indi- viduals adhering to the central portion of one of the flatter discs; and on further investigation I found that not only was this inference correct, but that the marginal annuli, wherever the interior was exposed by fracture, were crowded with similar minute embryonic shells; and further, that the coral-sand obtained from the same pools contained enormous numbers of young specimens in various stages of develop- ment, together with fragments of the thin, perforated, annular septa of the parent shells. The occurrence of young individuals in this position is not altogether a new fact. Many years ago Prof. W. K. Parker found “a number of very young specimens, consisting simply of the primordial chamber and the one surrounding it” in the “deeply channelled margin of one of these plicated forms of Orbitolites”’ ; t and the same specimens are referred to in Dr. Carpenter’s ‘ Challenger’ Report, as “consisting only of the ‘nucleus’ and a single annulus of sub-segments,” the author adding that he had found “similar speci- mens in the same situation in some of the large Fijian dises.”’§ My own examination of a considerable number of the ‘Challenger’ specimens leads me to think that the occurrence amongst them of such examples must be comparatively rare; and not one of the * ‘Report on the Genus Orbitolites,’ p. 35, pl. vii. + ‘Report on the Challenger Foraminifera,’ p. 220, pl. xvi., figs. 8-11. ¢ Carpenter, ‘ Introduction to the Study of the Foraminifera,’ p. 38, pl.iv., fig. 22. § ‘Report on the Genus Orbitolites,’ p. 16, Reproductive Condition of Orbditolites, &e. By H. B. Brady. 695 numerous sections I have made from them reveals a single such embryo z# siéi. Be this as it may, it is quite safe to say that specimens in the precise condition of those now brought under notice are practically new to morphologists. The specimens obtained on the Suva reef vary a good deal as to size and external characters; the drawing, Plate X. fig. 1, represents one of the larger and more characteristic of them. ‘The dimensions range from a diameter of about a quarter of an inch to very nearly an inch (6 mm. to 24 or 25 mm.); but from the broken edges of the smaller discs it may be inferred that they have lost some of their outer annuli. At the centre, the disc is often not more than 1/300 of an inch (0°08 mm.) in thickness, but this increases rapidly, though by no means regularly, towards the circumference. The shells are seldom so massively built as those in the ‘Challenger’ collection or as others which have come under my notice. The ‘Challenger’ specimens, if I understand rightly, were found unattached, in some of the more sheltered pools on the reefs, and as they were taken at a different season of the year (in July) they may perhaps represent a later stage in the history of the animal. The plication of the margin is also a very variable feature ; for whilst some of the discs are very deeply lobed and divided, others, generally those of smaller size, are only slightly crenulated, and the peripheral edge shows little tendency to duplication. The edges are often ragged and grooved, owing to the breaking away of the external annular septum, whilst the lateral walls are left standing. Wherever the peripheral wall is fractured, the annular space it inclosed is seen to be completely filled with young shells in the earliest stages of develop- ment, as shown in fig. 2. These, however, are not confined to the outermost circlet. If a horizontal section of the dise be made no less than five or six of the outer annuli may often be found more or less closely packed with these little bodies (fig. 3). It was previously known that the later chambers of this variety of Orbitolites were not regularly subdivided into chamberlets on the normal] plan,* but the explanation which could only be conjectured is now obvious. The embryo shells correspond exactly with what is termed by Carpenter the “ primitive disc ” or “ nucleus” of the typical Orbitolctes complanata. They are compressed discs generally rounded, often ~ nearly circular, in outline, but sometimes slightly irregular, or even subangular (figs. 4 -7). Their diameter ranges from 1/60 to 1/30 in. (0°4 mm. to U'8 mm.), their thickness averaging about 1/100 in. (0°25 mm.). The lateral surfaces are flat or somewhat convex, seldom perfectly even, but more frequently marked by slight irregular eleva- tions and depressions (figs. 4, 5). The peripheral edge is rounded and presents either one or two rows of perforations placed at tolerably regular intervals on a slightly elevated ridge (figs. 6, 7). The orifices are sometimes situated in small nipple-like protuberances. The * This is well shown in the drawing of a transverse section in the ‘Report on the Challenger Foraminifera,’ pl. xvi., fig. 11. 3B 2 696 Transactions of the Society. interior invariably presents the same general characters—a primordial chamber of relatively small dimensions, and a curved shelly process springing from its base—apparently the incomplete septum of a second segment; the whole inclosed in a large “ circumambient chamber” (figs. 8, 11). I have not in any case observed the com- mencement of the annular mode of growth characteristic of the mature shell, until after the embryo has left the parent. Subsequently the peripheral apertures form the connection with the first annulus of chamberlets (fig. 9); and from this point it is easy to follow the successive stages of the growth of the test. Fig. 10 is drawn from a young specimen consisting of the embryo or “ primitive disc” and three annuli of chamberlets, the test laid open so as to show the interior. One interesting point remains. There is no difficulty, as has just been remarked, in tracing the growth of the shell, by the addition of successive annuli of gradually increasing thickness, until the full size of the adult Orbitolites complanata is reached. The relatively large “ primitive disc” remains a conspicuous feature throughout, as shown in almost every published drawing illustrating the structure of the complex type of the genus. But the adult specimens under notice— that is to say, the parent shells—present no such feature. ‘The draw- ings, figs. 13, 14, represent horizontal and transverse sections of the central portions of two of these large viviparous specimens, the magnifying power employed being the same as in figs. 4-12. By the horizontal section it will be seen that, in place of the “ primitive disc,” the centre is occupied by a multitude of small chamberlets arranged on no very regular plan ; and what is more remarkable is the fact revealed by the transverse section, namely, that at its centre the adult test is scarcely 1/300 in. (0°08 mm.) in thickness, or only about one-third of the thickness of an embryo of average size. ‘he ‘Challenger’ specimens of the same form, such as I have examined, though more stoutly built, show the same absence of a “primitive disc.” In one or two instances I have observed at the centre of the shell a small convexity, not unlike the structure referred to in point of size and outline; but further examination showed that in every case it consisted of a labyrinthic mass of little chamberlets, to all appearance of exogenous growth. We are indebted mainly to the labours of two French naturalists, MM. Munier-Chalmas and Schlumberger, for a knowledge of the existence of a sort of ‘ dimorphism ” amongst the Foraminifera. They have shown that in certain families, perhaps in all, but notably in the Miliolide, each species presents itself in two forms; one of which, called by them “Form A,” has a large primordial chamber and consists altogether of but few segments; whilst the other, ‘ Form B,” has a small initial chamber, and the succeeding segments are relatively numerous. ‘Two possible explanations are indicated by the authors, the one which they prefer is based upon the supposition that “each individual passes through two successive phases, the first of which would Reproductive Condition of Orbitolites, &c. By H. B. Brady. 697 correspond to Form A, but that after a process of resorption of the large central chamber, the animal constructs a series of new chambers corresponding to Form B.”* ‘The authors further state, as an objection to the alternative theory of the distinct origin of the two forms, that they “ have not been able to discover amongst the numerous species they have studied any very young individuals of Form B.” The case before us, in which the young individuals taken from the parent shell exhibit the large initial chambers, whilst in the parent itself the centre is occupied by numerous chambers of relatively minute size, gives great weight to the former explanation. The question naturally arises, whether the embryonic forms which have been described are the result of sexual intercourse of any kind, or simply of a process of gemmation. With reference to the “di- morphism” of the Foraminifera, Mr. Geddes has suggested that “ the better grown and less modified” shell “ with fewer partitions and a ‘grand loge central’ seems distinctly the anabolic or female, the other, since smaller and more modified, the male; ” ¢ but as yet this view is founded on analogy rather than direct observation. The probabilities in the present case are in favour of simple gemmation, and, if this be correct, the mere fact of the presence of very young shells in the manner described has no bearing either way on the question of sex. On the other hand, it must be admitted that the change of the individual from one form to the other, if clearly established, would render the sexual theory superfluous. It is possible that the same explanation may serve both for the plicate margin of the discs and the production of large broods of young individuals, and that both may be due to redundant growth consequent upon exceptionally favourable external conditions and a plentiful supply of food. It is to be regretted that none of the specimens were preserved in alcohol. Verworn has recently shown that the presence of a nucleus is essential to even simple, scarcely more than vegetative, processes amongst the Foraminifera,t and it would have been interesting to trace the relation, which may be assumed to exist, between the numerous minute nuclei, found by Biitschli in the plasma of the peripheral chambers of the Orbitolite§ and the young individuals which make their appearance in such abundance in the same portion of the test. ; * Comptes Rendus, xcvi. (1883) p. 1601. + Proc. Roy. Soc. Kdinb., xiii. (1886) p. 931. The idea originated with de la Harpe, but does not appear to have been seriously entertained by him. t Zeitschr. fiir Wiss. Zool., xlvi. (1888) pp. 455-470, pl. xxxii. § Morph. Jahrb., xi. (1885) p. 80, &c., pl. vii. figs. 1, 4. 698 Transactions of the Society. X.—Notices of New Infusoria Flagellata from American Fresh Waters. By Aurrep C. Sroxes, M.D. (Reud 9th May, 1888.) Piate XI. Mastigameba flexuosa, sp. nov. Fig. 1. ExtENDED body elongate-ovate or sublinear, from five to six times as long as broad ; the anterior extremity obtusely pointed ; ee a numerous, their length equalling or exceeding the breadth of the body, smooth, tapering, seldom branching, those of the posterior extremity similar to the lateral ones, or fine, filamentous and short, or both; the posterior border also often emitting a broad, irregular, wave-like pseudopodium ; anterior extremity usually exhibiting a lateral, ante- riorly directed pseudopodium on each side of the flagelliferous apex ; endoplasm of the pseudopodia containing many short, fine, colourless, rod-like structures; endoplasm of the body eoarsely granular, fre- quently inclosing numerous greenish-yellow food-masses, the granules entering the pseudopodic extensions for only a short distance ; flagellum about one-half the length of the body; contractile vesicle apparently single, near the posterior extremity; nucleus (?) subpyriform, close to the anterior extremity. Length of body 1/150 in. Habitat: Pond water. The movements are slow so far as progression is concerned, but quite active in connection with change of form, the soft body bending on itself, shortening, lengthening, and undergoing various other changes of shape with considerable rapidity. Excrementitious par- ticles are extruded with some force, apparently from any portion of the surface. Cercomonas truncata, sp. nov. Figs. 2-6. Body ovate or elongate flask-shaped, soft, flexible and changeable im form, especially posteriorly; length from two to four times the breadth ; dorsal surface rounded, the ventral flattened, sometimes slightly concave; posterior extremity usually rounded, the anterior narrow and truncate; posterior appendage trailing, stout, exceeding the body in length, largest near the body, tapering and changeable in EXPLANATION OF PLATE XI. Fig. 1.—WMastigameba fleruosa. Fig. 18.—Heteromita nasuta. », 2-6.—Cercomonas truncata. » 19.— ” parvifilum. > T— = heterofilum. » 20.—Tetramitus frondarius. » &— “a lapsa. *,, 21.—Hexamita truncata. » o— a undulans. »» 22.—Atractonema pusilla. 10-12. = mutabilis, » 23.—Hymenomonas flava. » 13.—Heteromita granulifera. » 24.—Hymenomonas fusiformis. ULE amen tremula. 5 25.—Zygoselmis obovata. » 16— i stagnatilis, »» 26.—Sterromonas parvula. » 17i— Z Sphagni. 3 27.—Anisonema obliqua. JOURN.R.MICR.SOC.1888.P1 XI paren aaah emo a ES @ a MG 27 West, Newman &Co hth. New American Infusoria Flagellata. New American Infusoria. By Dr. A. C. Stokes. 699 thickness and contour, the anterior flagellum short, fine, originating from the left-hand angle of the truncate frontal margin, its length not exceeding one-half that of the body, its movements not rapid; con- tractile vesicle single, located near the posterior extremity ; endoplasm often inclosing numerous granules. Length of body from 1/4500 to 1/2250 in. Habitat: Standing pond water with Sphagnum. Move- ments slowly gliding. Cercomonas heterofilum, sp. nov. Fig. 7. Body ovate, obovate, or suboval, soft and changeable in shape, about twice as long as broad; anterior border rounded; posterior margin tapering and obtusely pointed; anterior vibratile flagellum about one and one-half times as long as the body, the trailing caudal prolongation subequal to the zooid in length; nucleus apparently subcentral ; contractile vesicles two, one near the posterior extremity close to the left-hand body margin, the other near the centre of the right-hand side; endoplasm finely granular. Length of body 1/2250 in. Habitat: Standing pond water with aquatic plants. Cercomonas lapsa, sp. nov. Fig. 8. Body obovate, about three times as long as broad, rounded and widest anteriorly, tapering to the posterior extremity, where it is continued as a flexible tail-like prolongation equalling or exceeding the body in length, and not rarely extending and retracting a fine, flexible filament; anterior flagellum not equalling the body in length; contractile vesicle apparently single, subcentrally located ; endoplasm finely granular and occasionally inclosing several small, dark-bordered particles which change their position with the motion of the sarcode ; zooid’s movements slow and smoothly gliding. Length of body, 1/2250 in. Habitat: Pond water with decaying Sphagnum. Cercomonas undulans, sp. nov. Fig. 9. Body elongate obovate, from five to six times as long as broad, much depressed, very soft, flexible and changeable in shape ; posterior border tapering and terminating in a fine, flexible, tail-like trailing appendage about one-third as long as the zooid; anterior border rounded ; vibratile flagellum slender, about one-third as long as the zooid ; anterior extremity expanded, flattened, constricted behind the rounded frontal border; contractile vesicle single, near the posterior extremity, close to one lateral border. Length of body 1/1800 in. Habitat: An infusion of decaying Sphagnum. Movements by lateral flexure and undulations of the soft body. Cercomonas mutabilis, sp. nov. Figs. 10, 11, 12. Body obovate, soft, flexible and changeable in shape, twice as long as broad, the anterior border rounded ; the posterior extremity pointed, soft and plastic, emitting one or more short, lobate, sarcodic extensions, or one or more long, irregularly linear pseudopodic prolongations which 700 Transactions of the Society. are quickly withdrawn ; anterior flagellum scarcely equalling the body in length, apparently arising from the lower surface a short distance behind the frontal margin; caudal flagelliform appendage trailing, not equalling the body in length, constant and unchangeable in shape ; contractile vesicle double, spherical, close to the frontal border ; nucleus spherical, subcentrally situated; endoplasm granular, often inclosing numerous yellowish food-particles; excrementitious matters extruded near the posterior extremity, apparently from the right-hand side only. Length of body 1/1500 in. Habitat: Standing pond water. Heteromita granulifera, sp. nov. Fig. 13. Body subspherical, smooth, slightly changeable in shape; endo- plasm often densely crowded with comparatively coarse, dark-bordered granules; nucleus and contractile vesicle obscured by the endoplasmic granules; flagella slender, originating close together at the centre of the frontal border, the anterior subequal to the body in length, the trailing appendage from four to five times as long as the zooid; anal aperture near the posterior extremity. Length of body 1/3000 in. Habitat: An infusion of decaying Sphagnum with pond-water. This differs from H. globosa (Stein) 8. K., in its somewhat smaller size, its smooth surface, and especially in the comparative length of the flagella, and their point of origin, these appendages in H. globosa being subequal in length, and arising from a point on the anterior portion of the ventral surface. Heteromita tremula, sp. nov. Figs. 14, 15. Body elongate, subcylindrical or subfusiform, from four to five times as long as broad, not conspicuously changeable in shape, usually slightly curved toward the ventral surface ; both extremities obtusely pointed, the anterior somewhat the narrower; flagella unequal in length and size, the anterior stout, about one-half as long as the body, the posterior, or trailing, appendage slender, arising at some distance from the anterior border, twice as long as the body; nucleus appa- rently subcentral; contractile vesicle near the anterior extremity. Length of body 1/4500 to 1/3000 in. Habitat: Standing pond water. Movements by rapid lateral undulations, with a sudden reversal of the direction of the zooid’s forward progression. Heteromita stagnatilis, sp. nov. Fig. 16. Body cylindrical, three times as long as broad, not noticeably changeable in shape. the surface smooth; posterior margin rounded ; anterior border convexly truncate; flagella diverse in length, ori- ginating close together at the frontal margin, the anterior or vibratile appendage less than one-half as long as the body, the trailing about twice the body in length; contractile vesicles several, scattered ; nucleus subcentrally located. Length of body 1/2250 in. Habitat: Standing pond water, with Lemna and other aquatic plants. New American Infusoria. By Dr. A. C. Stokes. 701 Heteronuta Sphagni, sp. nov. Fig. 17. Body elongate ovate, smooth, about four times as long as broad, somewhat depressed; anterior border acutely pointed, the posterior rounded, the posterior region flattened; one lateral border convex, the opposite flattened, nearly straight; flagella subequal in size and length, each about twice as long as the body, inserted at the anterior apex of the zooid ; contractile vesicle single, conspicuous, situated in the posterior body-half, near the flattened lateral border; nucleus represented by a circular light spot near the posterior extremity, in the median line. Length of body 1/750 in. Habitat: Standing pond water, with Sphagnum. Heteromita nasuta, sp. nov. Fig. 18. Body ovate, smooth, somewhat depressed, very slightly change- able in form, about twice as long as broad, the posterior extremity rounded, the anterior produced into a stout, undulating flagellum less than one-half as long as the zooid; posterior or trailing flagellum slender, about twice as long as the body, arising from the ventral surface at some distance from the frontal border; contractile vesicle apparently single, situated near the anterior extremity ; nucleus pre- sumably subcentrally located. Length of body 1/4500 in. Habitat: Standing pond water, with decaying Sphagnum. This form is readily recognizable by the peculiar and characteristic condition of the anterior flagellum. This appendage is thick, stout, and apparently a continuation of the apical extremity of the body. It presents much the appearance of a comparatively robust, vibratile, proboscidiform prolongation. In a few instances it has been observed to become thickened by a temporary outflow of sarcode from the body. Heteronuta parvifilum, sp. nov. Fig. 19. Body ovate, smooth, slightly changeable in form, less than twice as long as broad, the posterior extremity rounded, the anterior obtusely pointed ; flagella subequal, less than one-half as long as the body ; contractile vesicles two, situated side by side, at the anterior extremity ; nucleus broadly ovate or subspherical, subcentrally located ; endoplasm granular, especially at the posterior extremity. Length of the body 1/3000 to 1/2250 in. Habitat: A vegetable infusion. Tetramitus frondarius, sp. nov. Fig. 20. Body very soft and changeable in form, normally elongate, sub- cylindrical, about three times as long as broad, the posterior border obtusely pointed, the anterior truncate and often centrally emar- ginate; flagella in length somewhat exceeding the width of the body, originating close together near the centre of the frontal margin; nucleus apparently subspherical, situated in the anterior body-half; 702 Transactions of the Society. contractile vesicles two, small, one placed on each side near the anterior extremity ; endoplasm inclosing numerous dark-bordered corpuscles. Length of body 1/640 in. Habitat: An infusion of dead leaves. Hewxamita truncata, sp. nov. Fig. 21. Body broadly obovate, soft and changeable in shape, less than twice as long as broad; frontal border rounded, the posterior ex- tremity usually constricted and prolonged as a short, somewhat flattened extension with subparallel lateral borders, and a truncate posterior margin ; anterior flagella four, arising from the body at some distance from the anterior border, each extended rigidly at right angles with the surface, the distal extremities more or less curved ; posterior trailing flagella two, less than three times as long as the body, each arising from a lateral border of the posterior truncate prolongation ; contractile vesicles two, placed near the origin of the posterior body extension; endoplasm granular; movements rotatory on the longi- tudinal axis. Length of body 1/2250 in. Habitat: Standing water, with Sphagnum. Petalomonas orbicularis, sp. nov. Body suborbicular or broadly ovate, the length but slightly ex- ceeding the breadth, much depressed, the lateral borders curved toward the ventral aspect, so that the dorsal surface is evenly convex, the ventral concave; lateral and anterior borders rounded, the anterior slightly emarginate centrally, the posterior extremity rounded or slightly tapering and obtusely pointed; flagellum subequal to the body in length; oral aperture distinct, apparently followed by a short pharyngeal passage; nucleus spherical, subcentrally located; con- tractile vesicle single, placed in the median line in close proximity to the pharyngeal passage; endoplasm often inclosing numerous dark- bordered, probably amylaceous corpuscles, which slowly change their position. Length of body 1/1500 in.; greatest width 1/1285 in. Habitat: Standing pond water, with Sphagnum. Movements rotatory on the longitudinal axis. Atractonema pusilla, sp. nov. Fig. 22. Body subcylindrical, from 3-5 times as long as broad, curved toward the lower or ventral surface, the dorsal aspect evenly convex, the opposite or ventral border concave, the surfaces longitudinally traversed by from 6-8 straight or slightly oblique furrows; frontal margin slightly emarginate, the posterior border rounded ; flagellum subequal to the body in length ; endoplasm colourless, often inclosing near the extremities of the body several dark-bordered, probably amylaceous corpuscles; contractile vesicle single, near the centre of one lateral border ; pharyngeal passage small but distinct. Length of the body 1/1000-1/1200 in. Movements rotatory on the longi- tudinal axis. Habitat: Standing water with decaying Sphagnum. Reproduction by longitudinal fission. New American Infusoria. By Dr. A. C. Stokes. 703 Hymenonema (ipnv, membrane ; vnwa, thread), gen. nov. Animalcules free-swimming, inhabiting a flexible, membranous lorica, and inclosing two laterally developed pigment-bands ; flagellum single; no eye-spot. Habitat: Fresh water. The presence of but one flagellum is the only distinguishing feature between the animalcules of this generic group and the Hymenomonas of Stein. The lorica apparently possesses the same peculiarity of flexibility and the power to somewhat change its contour as are possessed by Hymenomonas. Hymenonema Sphagni, sp. nov. Lorica ovate, flexible and slowly changeable in form, often less than twice as long as broad, the entire surface covered with rounded, shallow depressions ; inclosed zooid entirely filling the cavity of the lorica; colour-bands yellowish-brown, broad, almost meeting in the centre of the body ; flagellum single, shorter than the lorica, its distal end usually arcuately curved; contractile vesicle single or double, situated at the anterior extremity; a refractive corpuscle usually conspicuously developed in the anterior body-half, near the centre of one lateral border. Length of lorica 1/750 in. Habitat: Pond water with Sphagnum. Hymenomonas flava, sp. nov. Fig. 23. Lorica ovate, punctate, twice as long as broad, very slightly flexible, the posterior extremity rounded, the anterior prolonged into a short, inconspicuous, neck-like extension, the frontal margin trun- eate; body filling the entire lorica except the neck-like prolongation ; endoplasm yellow, inclosing numerous granules; contractile vesicle apparently single, antero-terminal ; flagella not equalling the lorica in length, usually only one-fourth as long. Length of lorica 1/1125in. Habitat: Standing pond water, with decaying Sphagnum. Hymenomonas fusiformis, sp. nov. Fig. 24. Lorica subfusiform, less than four times as long as broad, widest centrally, the anterior border pointed, the posterior extremity obtusely and narrowly rounded; the body usually filling the entire lorica, but often somewhat removed from both extremities of the sheath; endoplasm yellow; contractile vesicle double, small, near the anterior extremity ; nucleus obscure, apparently subcentrally located ; flagella about one-half as long as the lorica. Length 1/690 in. Habitat: Standing pond water, with Sphagnum. Movements rotatory on the longitudinal axis. Zygoselmis obovata, sp. nov. Fig. 25. Body normally elongate obovate, about seven times as long as broad; anterior extremity obtusely pointed, the posterior rounded ; flagella diverse, the longer subequal to the extended body in length, 704 Transactions of the Society. shorter from one-third to one-fourth as long ; contractile vesicle near the frontal border; nucleus ovate, subcentrally placed; endoplasm inclosing numerous dark-bordered corpuscles, usually aggregated at the anterior extremity, thus leaving the posterior region clear and transparent. Length of body 1/428 in. Habitat: A standing vegetable infusion in fresh water. Sterromonas parvula, sp. nov. Fig. 26. Body elongate ovate, somewhat gibbous, about twice as long as broad, the posterior extremity rounded, the anterior obliquely truncate, slightly excavate; flagella rising from near the centre of the frontal margin, close together, the longer about one-half as long as the body, held stiffly in advance, the distal extremity arcuately curved; the shorter flagellum extremely small, about one-third, or less, as long as the primary appendage; contractile vesicles two or three, near the anterior extremity, two near the frontal border (one on each side), a third often developed near one lateral margin; nucleus (?) large, ovate, subcentral; endoplasm granular posteriorly. Length of body 1/2250 in. Habitat: A vegetable infusion. Anisonema obliqua, sp. nov. Fig. 27. Body ovate, about twice as long as broad, the anterior extremity narrowed, obtusely pointed, the posterior obliquely truncate and emarginate; dorsal surface smooth, convex, the ventral concave ; flagella diverse in length, arising near together at the anterior extremity, the vibratile short, the trailing rather less than twice as long as the zooid; contractile vesicles two, one on each side of the median line near the anterior extremity; nucleus subcentral ; pharyngeal passage obscure; endoplasm usually granular posteriorly. Length of body 1/1500 in. Habitat: Standing pond water. 9705. } SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO ZOO L.0: Ga¥e A) Ne D::4 BeOVl sANaY: (principally Invertebrata and Cryptogamia), MICROSCOPY, &c., INCLUDING ORIGINAL COMMUNICATIONS FROM FELLOWS AND’ OTHERS.* ZOOLOGY. A. VERTEBRATA :—Embryology, Histology, and General. a. Embryology.t Formation of Polar Globules in Animal Ova.t—Prof. A. Weis- mann and Mr. C. Ischikawa have investigated the history of the polar globules in various parthenogenetic ova. It will be remembered that, in 1885, the former of these writers discovered that a polar globule was formed in the parthenogenetic egg of Polyphemus oculus ; the conversion of the germinal vesicle into the globule, the cellular nature of the latter, and its later division into two cells were observed, as well as the fate of the portion of the nucleus which remained in the egg, and which became the cleavage-nucleus. An account is now given of the fourteen cases recently observed, chiefly by the authors of this paper, in which it is certain that parthenogenetic ova give rise to one polar globule only; among these are Leptodora hyalina, Sida crystallina, Cypris reptans, Conochilus volvox, and an Aphis (Blochmann). A list is given of a number of cases in which two primary globules have been observed, and this extends from Ccelenterates to Mammals; it would have been much longer had it not been confined to a record of the cases in which the describer distinctly states that the globules have been successively given off from the nucleus of theegg. In afew cases where sexual reproduction occurs, it has been stated that only one globule has been observed ; but there is only one case, that of Gonothyreea Loveni, in which the observer (in that case Bergh) remarks definitely that there is never more than one globule. It is to be noted, however, that Bergh himself states that the ova were difficult to isolate, and the finer processes could only be seen with great difficulty through the walls of the gonozooid. If we confine ourselves to observations that may be certainly trusted, * The Society are not intended to be denoted by the editorial “we,” and they do not hold themselves responsible for the views of the authors of the papers noted, nor for any claim to novelty or otherwise made by them. The object of this part of the Journal is to present a summary of the papers as actually published, and to deseribe and illustrate Instruments, Apparatus, &c., which are either new or have not been previously described in this country. ’ + This section includes not only papers relating to Embryology properly so called, but also those dealing with Evolution, Development, and Reproduction, and allied subjects. t Ber. Naturf. Gesell. Freiburg i. B., iii. (1886) pp. 1-44 (4 pls.). 706 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO we find that in sixty-six species of animals the eggs gave off two primary polar globules, and that for all these the necessity for fertilization was certain, and in most of them fertilization was observed. On the other hand we know of fourteen species, the ova of which undoubtedly pro- duced only one polar globule, and these were without exception partheno- genetic. We cannot, therefore, but conclude that eggs that require to be fertilized form two polar globules, and parthenogenetic eggs one. The significance of these facts has already been pointed out by Prof. Weismann.* Origin and Significance of the so-called free Nuclei in the Nutrient Yolk of Bony Fishes.t—Prof. C. K. Hoffmann has a paper, largely critical and controversial, in which he deals with the observations of embryologists who have treated of the matter since the time when he asserted that these nuclei arise directly from the first cleavage- nucleus. Resemblance of Ovarian Ova and the Primitive Foraminifera.t —Prof. J. A. Ryder remarks that upon cutting sections of nearly mature ovarian ova with their investing membrane, zona radiata, in place, it was found that in quite a number of cases fine protoplasmic processes or pseudopods extended from the peripheral layer of protoplasm of the egg, through its capsule or zona, and joining the cells of the granulosa or discus proligerus. This arrangement reminded one forcibly of the filamentous pseudopods extended from a Heliozoon, or of the slender pseudopods extended through the perforations in the walls of the single chambers of Globigerina. This resemblance is all the more suggestive if one will compare a section of one of the chambers of a Globigerina made through the calcareous shell and its contained protoplasm with a similar section through the ovum of the Gar pike, where the zona is formed of pillars of homogeneous matter. Such prolongations of pseudopods through the investing zona radiata in the case of many species of animal forms show fairly well that this must be the principal means by which new matter is taken up from without and incorporated, as there is no direct extension of the vascular system into the egg by which it can take up nutriment. It is thus seen that the early stages of the growing ovum not only resemble some of the lower forms of Heliozoa and Foraminifera as respects the grade of their morphological differentiation, but also as to the mode in which they exhibit their nutritive or physiological activities. This resemblance is still further heightened if a form like Arbulina is compared with certain stages of the development of ova. It is thus seen that in many cases the ovarian germ, at least, passes through a stage which may be morphologically as well as physiologically compared with some of the lowest grades of the Protozoa. Inversion of the Germinal Layers in the Shrew.$—Herr J. Bich- ringer reports the results of some studies on the development of the germinal layers in Arvicola amphibius Desm. He gives a short ei: of previous investigations. He begins with the 42-cell stage, a roundish mass without segmenta- * See this Journal, 1887, p. 934. ¢ Zeitschr. f. Wiss. Zool., xlvi. (1888) pp. 517-48 (1 pl.). t Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philad., 1888, p. 73. § Arch. f. Anat. u. Physiol. (Anat. Abth.), 1888, pp. 279-86 (1 pl.). ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETO. 107 tion cavity, and surrounded by a zona pellucida. The next stage, with 64 cells, is also without distinct cavity, and is somewhat elongated and curved. When segmentation is complete, a simple layer of cells with large nuclei is seen close under the zona pellucida. This corresponds to what Rauber described in other rodents as the “‘ Deckschicht.” It incloses a cavity filled with fluid, in which lies the mass of germinal cells. In the latter hints of separation into ectodermic and endodermic layers were discernible. In the next stage the endoderm cells begin to broaden out as a lining of Rauber’s sheath, while the ectoderm les as a connected mass at one pole. The modification of the free germinal mass into a germinal cylinder closely united with the uterus, the invagination of the germinal layers, the changes in Rauber’s sheath, &c., are discussed, and Biehringer’s results corroborate those of Kupffer and Selenka. The inversion of the germinal layers in rodents is essentially similar in all forms yet inves- tigated, but the genera vary in details. Cavia stands by itself; Mus musculus, M. sylvaticus, and M. decumanus form a group; while the inversion in Arvicola amphibius most closely resembles that of A. arvalis. Spermatogenesis of Mammals.*—Prof. V. v. Ebner calls attention to a research by Prof. E. Sertolit on the spermatogenesis of the rat, which appears to have been overlooked by many. Division was observed only in the movable cells, and that always in definite periodic order, as von Ebner has corroborated. The ‘‘ nematoblasts” or sperm-cells have at first nuclei which remain unstained by safranin, and only gradually exhibit this property. Spermatogenesis in Guinea-pig.{—Sig. F. Sanfelice has studied the regeneration of the testicular cells in the guinea-pig. The testicle regenerates, not from the interstitial substance, but from the pre-existent epithelium. The germinal cells (“ cellules fixes” of Sertoli, “ cellules de soutien ” of Merkel) take part in this regenerative process. Irritability of Spermatozoa of Frog.s—Dr. J. Massart gives an account of some observations made with the object of demonstrating the irritability of the spermatozoa of the frog. They are preparatory toa future demonstration of how sensitiveness to touch aids in the penetration of the spermatozoon into the ovum. Development of the Axolotl.|-MM. F. Houssay and Bataillon give an account of the formation of the gastrula, of the mesoblast, and of the notochord in the Axolotl. About twenty hours after deposition the egg consists of a sphere with two poles; one is black and made up of small cells, the other is a clear grey, and is formed of larger cells. Between these there is a segmentation cavity, but there is not yet any radical dis- tinction between the two kinds of cells. The epiblast is, indeed, derived from both the large and the small cells, the whole peripheral layer of the egg differentiating and separating itself from the subjacent cells. After a little the epiblast divides into two layers; this is in accordance with the views of Scott and Osborn, who regard the possession of a unilaminate epiblast as a primitive condition among the Urodela. It is clear from * Arch. f. Mikr. Anat., xxxi. (1888) pp. 424-5. + Rend. R. Istit. Lomb., xviii. fase. 16, and Arch. Ital. Biol., vii. (1888) p- 369, ¢ Arch. Ital. Biol., ix. (1888) pp. 425-6. Rev. Internaz. Napoli, 1887, | pl. § Bull. Acad. R. Sci. Belg., lvii. (1888) pp. 750-4. || Comptes Rendus, cvil. (1888) pp. 434-6. 708 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO this description that it would be inexact to speak of epiboly in connec- tion with the egg of the Axolotl. While this differentiation has been going on the gastrula has begun to be invaginated ; the first sign of this is the appearance of a broken line; sections show that this line is a groove, and that it exists among cells not yet differentiated, or, in other words, at the dense pole of the egg. The line takes the form of a horse-shoe, and the two branches meet. In this way an invagination is produced ; the segmentation cavity becomes reduced, and another cavity—which will become the mesenteron—appears, and begins to put itself into rela- tion with the invagination. The differences between this mode of invagination and that which obtains in the Anura are pointed out. As there is at first no mesoblast along the axial line of the body, it would seem that the notochord must be developed at the expense of the hypoblast; and this is the view of all embryologists who have written on the question, with the exception of Goette. But, a little later, the medullary plates rise, and leave between them a rounded pad. The interior of the egg is the seat of active work, and the result is that the mesoblast forms a continuous layer which passes below the axis. The authors, therefore, are of Goette’s opinion that the notochord of the Axolotl is of mesoblastic origin. To avoid any verbal dispute, in face of the fact that the mesoblast itself is derived from the hypoblast, they definitely state that the vitelline cells which give rise to the notochord are first organized in the mesoblast, and do not form it directly. In another communication * the authors state that in the segmenta- tion of the egg there are 2, 4, 8, 24, 32, cells; it was difficult to follow the segmentation later on. As to the fate of the blastopore which is so various among the Urodela, they find that in the Axolotl it remains always open, and becomes the definite anus; there is no neurenteric canal. Development of the Lamprey.|—Herr C. Kupffer reports the results of his further study of the development of the lamprey. The material was the result of artificial fertilization. Some ova kept at Kénigsberg, at a temperature of 8-10° C., developed into larve on the 16-17th day, while others kept at Naples did the same in 8 days. In both cases the larve, when liberated, had reached the same stage, and measured 3 mm. In the formation of the blastoderm there is not an “ overgrowth ” of one half of the ovum by the elements of the other. The outer layer of morula cells acquires epithelial characters ; this begins, not at the ger- minal or animal pole, but at the region which is subsequently dorsal. This region appears along with the formation of a special keel or em- bryonic shield. Gastrulation begins before the epithelial blastoderm has quite surrounded the ovum. The blastopore appears at the posterior border of the embryonic shield. The archenteron arises as a closed sac, with its dorsal wall directly in contact with the ectoderm, though between them a group of smaller cells is subsequently insinuated. These arise from the cells of the in- vaginated margin, and are not to be regarded as mesodermic. They serve for the caudal extension of the dorsal axial structures, and represent the terminal bud in Teleostei, the sickle or terminal pad of Amniota. Herr Kupffer proposes the term Teloblast. In the lamprey no neurenteric canal is formed, the blastopore is not * Loe. cit., pp. 282-4. + SB. K. Bayer. Akad. Wiss., i. (1888) pp. 71-9. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 709 closed, but remains as anus. The teloblast lies in front of or dorsal to the blastopore, the reverse of its position when neurenteric canal or corresponding strandis formed. ‘The teloblast is not the primitive streak, but corresponds only to its posterior end, and possibly also to the pole- cells of the mesoderm described by Hatschek in Amphioxus. The spinal cord and notochord are formed together from a simul- taneous activity of both germinal layers, resulting in the development of a massive double keel before alluded to. The separation and further development of both axial organs are then described. The mesoderm appears differently in head and trunk. In the former, celomic diverticula are formed as in Amphioxus. In the latter the two external layers of reserve yolk-cells form first the dorsal blocks, and then the lateral plates, the somatic before the splanchnic. The ccelomic cleft appears at the same time as fore-kidney and heart. The pronephric duct is ectodermic. The rest of the memoir is mainly devoted to a description of the development of the nerves. The optic nerve is an exception to the usual rule in this, that its ganglion appears much earlier than all the rest, and arises not from a peripheral portion of the epidermis, but from the median keel—that is, from the common origin for brain, spinal cord, and this pair of ganglia. The branchial nerves form a second series, and the dorsal spinal nerves a third. An anterior endodermic diverticulum is protruded between notochord and epidermis dorsalwards to the brain. It forms a narrow median por- tion and two lateral pockets. The former represents the well-known diverticulum between hypophysis and notochord; the latter form the paired pre-oral head-cavities, which Kupffer regards as homologous with the anterior endodermice diverticula in Amphioxus. Partial Impregnation.*—Prof. A. Weismann and Mr. C. Ischikawa report that on examining the sexual cells of certain species of Moina they found to their astonishment that those in which four segmental cells were already present still contained a sperm-cell. This was found, by further observation, to be a case of partial impregnation, only one of the first four segmental cells and not the entire egg-cell becoming united with the sperm-cell. In Moina paradoxa a spermatozoon penetrates into the region of the vegetative pole of the egg, immediately after its extrusion into the brood-chamber, where the egg is a naked sausage- shaped mass. The vitelline membrane then becomes formed and prevents the entrance of a second spermatozoon. The two polar bodies become constricted off, and the nucleus of the ovum migrates to the centre of the egg. The first two segmental cells appear, the sperm-cell always lying in the neighbourhood of the one which is nearest the vegetative pole, - without, however, becoming united with it. The four-cell stage follows, and the sperm-cell is now seen to exhibit amceboid movements, and to approach a segmental cell; fusion then follows and in the next following stage, that of eight segmental cells, no sperm-cell can any longer be seen in the egg. Since making these observations t the authors have found that, “in spite of the entire accuracy of our facts, we were mistaken as to the * Ber. Naturf. Gesell. Freiburg i. B., iv. (1888) p. 51. See Nature, xxxviii. (1888) p. 329. ¢ Translated (from a proof) in Nature, xxxviii. (1888) pp. 329-30. 1888. 3.0 710 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO explanation of the phenomenon described”; the first segmentation nucleus is here, as in all sexual cells, formed by the fusion of the nucleus of the ovum with the sperm-nucleus, and the fusion of the two cells observed at a later stage is something additional to the ordinary impreg- nation. They urge a number of facts in extenuation. They propose to call this additional body the conjugating cell, and at present only apply to it the epithet of enigmatical. Hertwig’s ‘Human and Vertebrate Embryology.’*—In the earlier portion of Dr. O. Hertwig’s recently published text-book of vertebrate embryology, the sexual elements, the maturation of the egg, fertilization and cleavage, the development of the germinal layers, the blood and connective tissue and egg-envelopes of reptiles, birds, and mammals are described, and the formation of the organs from the epiblast, hypoblast, mesoblast,and mesenchyma. The genesis of the organs from the primary layers is admirably illustrated with special reference to its bearings on the anatomy of the adult human body, while enough data from com- parative embryology are laid under contribution to give the reader a fair knowledge of the wide application of the principles laid down. It is believed that this little work will be found of great value to the medical student in understanding many questions in pathology, physiology, the structure of the brain and the mechanism of the nervous system. 8. Histology.f Cells and Tissues.t—Prof. F'. Leydig has published another sugges- tive essay, which is based on the study of the cells and tissues of Argulus. Tn dealing with cells he treats first of spongioplasm and hyaloplasm ; it may always be considered an advance in knowledge to be able to break up into structures parts of an organism which have been hitherto sup- posed to be of one and the same nature. This is now the case with the cell. In 1876 the author pointed out that there might be (a) concentrie striation of protoplasm, as in the ganglionic spheres of Insects and Annelids; or (8) striped differentiation, which might be longitudinal, transverse, or radial; or (y) there may be plexiform differentiation of the protoplasm, as in the cell-nuclei and blood-corpuscles of Triton. Tt is now generally recognized that there are in the cell-substance two substances; one of these forms a kind of network, and has been called the substantia opaca, the other lies in the interspaces and is soft and clear; it is the s. hyalina. With these the newer terms of spongio- plasm and hyaloplasm are synonymous. Leydig has also shown that these two parts play a definite réle in the conversion of the cells into tissues, and this has been confirmed by Rabl and by Sedgwick. Argulus is well adapted for the kind of investigations the author wished to undertake ; for not only the eggs, but also the large cells which belong to the fat-body, and, especially, the unicellular glands show the plexiform and radiate arrangement of the spongioplasm. The space around the nucleus was distinctly observed. In the large cells of the fat-body it was possible to see numerous nucleoli without any inclosing membrane. * Hertwig, O., ‘Lehrbuch der Entwickelungsgeschichte des Menschen u. der Wirtelthiere,’ 8vo, Jena, 1887-8, viii. and 507 pp. (figs.). Cf. Amer. Naturalist, xxii. (1888) pp. 179-82. + This section is limited to papers relating to Cells and Fibres. t Zool. Anzeig., xi. (1888) pp. 254-9, 274-80, 309-15, 328-33. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETO. Faull Leydig knows of several cases in which whole cells have become cuticu- larized, and cites the jaws of Paludina, Ancylus, and Lymneus. In treating of the tissues, Prof. Leydig deals with some recent remarks of Dr. H. Hisig.. As to the mode of origin of the cuticular fringe, it is to be observed that, as long as the cell-substance was regarded as a homogeneous mass containing granules, the fringe could only be regarded as a secretion of the matrix-cells; but when the difference between hyaloplasm and spongioplasm was recognized, the question arose —Is the cuticle formed by the hyaloplasm only, or does the spongioplasm take any share in it? ‘The author believes that both take a part, but the cardinal point is that the cuticular substances are formed by the secretory and metamorphic activity of the matrix-cells. Hisig’s view that the cuticle is formed by agglomeration of rod-like structures formed by glandular cells may be shown to he erroneous by the following obser- vations :—In some German Gastropods peculiarly-formed corpuscles are to be found in the dermal glands, and the byssus, and the “bloom” on some shells, as well as the powder of some insects, are all formations of dermal glands, yet they never take any part in giving rise to the fibrous differentiation of the cuticle. Prof. Leydig is of opinion that cuticular tissue is allied to connective tissue. This view is based on a number of observations :— (1) The cuticular tissue forms the hard or skeletal parts of Arthro- pods (dermal carapace as well as skeletal parts), and represents therefore the tissue which takes its place in Vertebrates. 2) In the form of their early development the cuticular tissue of an Arthropod and the connective tissue of a Vertebrate agree ; in both cases it consists of matrix-cells and an overlying layer of homogeneous sub- stance. Sarcolemma or neurilemma or the corium of a Batrachian larva present the same characters as the cuticular tissue of an Arthropod. (3) The cuticular tissue of the integument is in Arthropods con- nected uninterruptedly with the connective tissue of the interior of the body. (a) When the minute structure of cuticular tissue, especially that of the dermal carapace of Arthropoda, is compared with the connective tissue of Vertebrates, we find in both striated homogeneous layers and parts condensed into fibres, and in both cases there is a traversing system of lacune, clefts, and pore-canals. While some recent authors have taken different views as to the struc- ture of the dotted substance of Vertebrates from those held by Leydig, it has been a matter of satisfaction to him that the most exact (Nansen) holds his doctrine. He does not doubt that Nansen’s explanation of the dotted substance as a thick plexus of very fine nerve-tubesis correct. It is clear from Leydig’s earlier observations that we ought to speak of the nerve-tubes rather than the nerve-fibres of Annelids and Arthropods. In these tubes one may distinguish a spongioplasm, which forms the investment, and the hyaloplasm or inclosed soft and semi-fluid nerve- material. The former may be continued inwards as a framework. The nerve-fibres of Vertebrates also ought to be called nerve-tubes and not fibres, and in them there appear to be at least remnants of an internal meshwork. Here again the author finds matter for criticism in Hisig’s latest work. The hyaloplasm ought to be regarded as the “ primum agens” in the nerve-tissue. Leydig has spoken of the spaces in the spongework as an 30 2 712 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO uninterrupted system of hollow ducts, and this agrees very closely with the view of Nansen, who regards the grey substance, as a whole, as a plexus of fine nerve-tubes. The well-known physiological phenomenon of the dependence of the parts of the organism on the nervous system is, from a morphological point of view, seen more clearly when we know that the nervous material is intermixed with the protoplasm of the cell- substance in all parts of the living body. Cell-division.* —Prof. J. Arnold makes a further communication on the division of cell and nucleus in the spleen, and also discusses such processes as diverge from the typical mitos‘s. He thus describes “ pluri- polar mitosis,” “‘ indirect fragmentation,” the “ homaotypic” and “ hetero- typic” forms of Flemming, and the pathological phases described by Rabl. The distinctiveness of indirect fragmentation is maintained, though it is not denied that transitions occur between it and the forms of pluripolar mitosis. The main object of his present contribution is to show the agreement and the difference between mitosis proper and indirect frag- mentation. Cell-membrane.t{—M. M. Ide has investigated the nature of the mem- brane in the cells of the mucous Malpighian layer of the epithelium. The best material was obtained from embryonic epithelium in the skin and digestive tract. He regards the reticulated peripheral layers of the cells as cellular membranes in the true sense, and that for two reasons: first, because they exhibit the general and typical structure of cellular membranes; and further, because they are derived from the primitive membrane of the young cells by a simple cleavage. As to the bridges which connect the cells, he regards them as forming part of the cellular membrane. They are in substantial continuity with its reticulum ; they present the same structure as its trabecule, and are derived, ke the envelope itself, from the original membrane. Goblet-cells of Intestine of Salamander.t—Herr J. Steinhaus has investigated the so-called goblet-cells in the epithelium of the intestine of Salamandra maculosa. They are neither exclusively epithelial cells under- going mucous degeneration, nor cells modified into unicellular mucus- glands. They are partly the one, partly the other. 1f nosecond nucleus be present in the cell it completely degenerates ; if one be present the cell functions as a gland, and is regenerated after secretion. In forming a goblet the nucleus undergoes mucous metamorphosis ; the theca is iden- tical with the nuclear membrane, the foot of the goblet is never inclosed in the theca, but is protoplasmic to its end. Any cylindrical cell of the intestine may become a goblet-cell, and the change, though not yet understood, is in association with physiological processes in the intestine. The more energetic the processes, the greater the number of goblet-cells. As the number increases greatly in certain pathological processes (e.g. intestinal catarrh), it is of importance to understand the conditions of the development of goblet-cells. Micro-Chemistry of Nerve-cells.—Prof. M. Flesch § sums up the re- sults of investigations made by himself and others on the differences in the * Arch. f. Mikr. Anat., xxxi. (1888) pp. 541-64 (8 pls.). + La Cellule, iv. (1888) pp. 403-33 (1 pl.). + Arch. f. Anat. u. Physiol. (Physiol. Abth.), 1888, pp. 311-22 (3 pls.). § MT. Naturf. Gesell. Bern, 1888, pp. 192-9. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 713 chemical reactions of nerve-cells. (1) The specific cells of the nervous system are distinguishable, not only by their morphological characters and the number of their processes, but also by their chemical reactions. (2) The chemical differences of the nerve-cells are demonstrable by their varied characteristics in the living tissue, by their various reactions to alkaline tests, by their variable amount of free oxygen present, and by their unequal reducing powers. (3) The chemical difference is a function of the protoplasm, and not of the contained granula. (4) The chemical characters of the protoplasm of nerve-cells are different from those of all other cells in the body. The only exceptions are those chromophilous cells which from the nature of their nuclei appear to be in process of degeneration. (5) The chromophilous character is seen in the younger cells only next the nucleus, and gradually extends over the cell. The differences vary with age. The smallest nerve-cells are intermediate between chromophilous and chromophobic cells. (6) The chromophilous or chromophobic character depends on the functional import of the cells. The demonstration of change in chemical con- stitution in association with difference of function is the most important result. Frl. Anna Kotlarewsky * has continued the investigations of Prof. M. Flesch and Frl. Koneff on the micro-chemistry of the nerve-cells in peripheral ganglia. Her observations were made in part on living, in part on hardened tissues. As the result of the former, it is shown that the chromophilous and chromophobic cells of the spinal ganglia in their living state differ widely in their chemical state and in the intensity of their metabolism. It seems most probable that the chromophilous cells have a stronger alkalinity and a greater proportion of oxygen than the chromophobic elements. The latter exhibit less reducing power than the former. - Observations made on hardened nerve-cells led the author to the result that under all conditions the different forms of nerve-cells may exhibit their differences of constitution, that hardening in alkaline media is the best condition for the demonstration of the chemical differences in the body of the cell, and that the chromophilous cells show, without exception, a stronger affinity for metallic solutions than do the chromo- phobic elements. The results of staining went to show that the nerve-cells have dis- tribution of cellular substance different from that of the other tissues. The nucleus is poor in chromatin, and the protoplasm is readily stained by various reagents. It seems also possible to determine various metabolic or functional stages by fixing the corresponding morphological conditions. Histology of the Ovary.t—Prof. J. Janosik has investigated the structure of the ovary in various vertebrates. He finds that the egg and the follicular epithelium have their origin in the superficial epithelium of the ovary. The structures described by Kélliker and Mihalkovics do not develope into follicles; they are merely modified medullary cords which have the appearance of follicles. They were seen in all the forms, including man, which he examined, but they do not appear always at the same stage, nor do they all attain the same grade of development. In all * MT. Naturf. Gesell. Bern, 1888, pp. 3-23. 7 SB. K. Akad. Wiss. Wien, xevi. (1888) pp. 172-93 (1 pl.). 714 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO these ovaries, although at different and ordinarily later periods, there also appear special cells, which are the homologues of the intermediate cells of the testis. In some cases special structures, which are perhaps analogous to the adrenals, are developed in connection with the medul- lary cords. In all ovaries a large number of follicles atrophy ; this atrophy varies in various follicles, and especially with regard to the dis- tribution of the cells of the granulosa. The impulse to atrophy appears to arise in all cases from the connective-tissue cells of the three folliculi. The membrane which incloses the egg seems to be merely a product of the granulosa-cells. y. General.* Influence of Light on Oxidation.t—Herr J. Loeb has made a num- ber of experiments with pupe to test the influence of light on the processes of oxidation withia the organism. He measured the variation in the expiration of CO, under different conditions of illumination. There is no doubt that the light stimulus increases oxidizing pro- cesses. ‘This increase has its seat mainly in the muscles, but may be observed when there is no movement, as was the case obviously in the pup. Moleschott’s opinion that the light influenced the muscles through the central nervous system, is confirmed. In the lower animals the stimulus may be influential without the presence of eyes ; in mammals light has no appreciable local influence in increasing oxidation; this is only to be observed in plants where the proportion of surface to mass is so much greater. The results of the author’s experiments are summed up in two tables. B. INVERTEBRATA. Problematical Organs of the Invertebrata.t—Dr. A. B. Griffiths has made a chemical and physiological study of some of the problematical organs of the Invertebrata, and states the results as follows:—A. (1) The nephridia of Cephalopoda are true kidneys; (2) the renal organs of Astacus fluviatilis, Anodonta cygnea, Limaa flavus, Helix aspersa, and Periplaneta orientalis, are analogous in function to the renal organs of higher animals; (3) the renal organs of the Lamellibranchiata and Crustacea are true kidneys; and (4) the “segmental organs” of the Oligochta and of the leech are renal in function. B. The “salivary glands” of the Gasteropoda and Insecta are similar in function to the salivary glands of higher animals. C. The so-called “livers” of the Gasteropoda, Lamellibranchiata, Crustacea, and Insecta are pancreatic in function. Distribution of Striped Muscle.§—Prof. H. Fol discusses the dis- tribution of striped muscular tissue in Invertebrate types. The distri- bution of the two kinds of muscle in the different systems in Vertebrates hardly holds good among the lower animals. In Celenterates the striped tissue is only found in swimming forms, in the umbrella and tentacles; the same is true of Tunicata; but most of the agile worm types have only unstriped muscles. In the Arthropods, on the other * This section is limited to papers which, while relating to Vertebrata, have a direct or indirect bearing on Invertebrata also. t Arch. f. d. gesammt. Physiol. (Pfliiger), xlii. (1888) pp. 393-407. t Proc. Roy. Soc. Edin., xiv. (1887) p. 230. § Comptes Rendus, cyi. (1888) pp. 1178-80. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETO. 115 hand, no unstriped muscle-fibres seem to occur; while the most mobile organs of molluscs, the arms, the siphon, the heart of Cephalopods, the fins of Pteropods and Heteropods, do not include any truly striped fibres. But all Molluscs are not without striped muscle, for this may be seen, as R. Blanchard observed, and as the author confirms, in one portion of the adductor muscle of Pecten. In Lima also, striated fibres were seen. Mollusca. y. Gastropoda. Comparative Histology of Glandular Epithelium of Kidney of Prosobranch Gastropods.*—-M. R. Perrier, who has already described the structure of the kidney in Littorina, now enters on a comparison between various allied forms. He finds that in some of the lower Prosobranchs, such as Fissurella, the epithelial cells are not so much differentiated as in the Limpet. As Haller has shown, the cells are all of the same kind, and all glandular and ciliated, but they differ both from the ciliated and from the vesicular cells of the higher Monotocardia, for they are large, and have no excretory vesicles. Sometimes they con- tain no concretions, while at others they are so loaded with them that the nucleus is invisible. The epithelial investment is of an almost diagram- matic regularity ; the elements are clearly all of the same age, and one cannot distinguish between cells that have performed and others that are about to perform their function. Secretion appears to be effected by osmosis, but if the production of renal material becomes exaggerated, it is deposited in the form of small granules in the interior of the cell. There is no absolute line of demarcation between granular and vesicular cells. A very different arrangement obtains in the higher Tenioglossata, such as, for example, Cassidaria. The structure of the kidney is here extremely complex. Instead of the simple lamelle found in Littorina, there is a complicated network of connective trabecule; these are hollowed by blood-lacune, and invested with a continuous epithelial layer. The whole forms a thick spongy mass which leads the author to propose the term of “ glande hématique.” The free surface of this mass is grooved by afferent vessels, and the epithelial layer is differentiated in a remarkable way. In addition to the numerous ciliated elements, there are glandular cells, which have not, however, the ordinary appearance of the vesicular renal cells which abound in the deeper parts of the mass. The vacuole is not clear, nor does it contain a solid con- cretion, but is loaded with granulations which take a blue colour with methylene. They have all the characters of mucus-cells. The numerous intermediate types found in the kidney of the Gastro- poda will be described in a detailed memoir. The author differs from M. Garnault in his interpretation of the structure of the kidney of Valvata and Cyclostoma. He is further convinced of the accuracy of -his views as to the mechanism of the secretion of the vesicular cells, but he does not, of course, mean that the renal cells are eternal; like the cells of all glands they become worn out and absorbed, but there is no direct connection between the secretion and the death of the cell. The gentian-violet used by M. Garnault has nof a sufficient selective power ; * Comptes Rendus, evii. (1888) pp. 188-91. 716 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO methylene-green and picrocarmine are to be preferred. The best way to fix the cells is to place the organ for some time in a saturated solution of acetic and picric acids. Anatomy and Histology of Limax agrestis.*—Dr. R. Hanitsch has a contribution to the knowledge of the Slug. He is of opinion that the chief part of the movement of the radula is due to the extrinsic muscles, The roof of the mouth is provided with a jaw, the epithelium of which rests in a layer of muscle-fibres which run in longitudinal, transverse, and dorsoventral directions, and seem to enable this upper jaw to move freely in various directions, The epithelium of the kidney, unlike that of the Lamellibranchs and Nudibranchs, is not ciliated. The lobes of Semper’s organ were found to be masses of pyriform glandular cells, arranged in the form of a bouquet; the pointed ends of the pyriform cells lie anteriorly, and the ends of the individual cells are continued into long canals of very small diameter, which lead to a papilla placed immediately above; each canal seems to open separately to the exterior. The pedal gland has been lately investigated by Dr. Székely who describes its opening as being elliptical in transverse section; further back the lumen has the form of a fungus, and the posterior part is flattened and lanceolate. ‘The floor of the duct is raised into two longitudinal folds, which are separated in the median line by a slight depression ; these folds and depression are covered by ciliated epi- thelium; glandular cells are numerous on the ventral and lateral portions of the duct. The fine fibres which form a network at the base of the ciliated cells are regarded by Székely as connective tissue, and not nervous, and he comes to the conclusion that the pedal gland is not a sense-organ, but simply a secretory gland which furnishes the mucus necessary for creeping. Dr. Hanitsch agrees generally with the Hungarian anatomist, but he found elongated and pointed cells of apparently a sensory nature, and so numerous that he cannot accept Székely’s explanation of Sochaczewer’s observation, that they were accidental products. Numerous ganglion-cells were found lying beneath them, but he has not yet been able to trace nerve-fibres from one to the other. What Sochaczewer took for nerve-fibres were probably fibres of the connective tissue from the capsules which inclose the ganglion- cells. Anatomy and Histology of Cyclostoma elegans.t—M. P. Garnault has made a detailed study of the anatomy and histology of Cyclostoma elegans. He begins with describing the crystalline structure of the shell. The alimentary system is then discussed ; the stomach is clothed by a cuticle pierced with minute canals; all the parts of the canal have an alkaline reaction. In regard to the vascular system, he denies the existence of a clothing endothelium on the walls of the lacune, and regards the afferent veins as narrowed lacune. The venous network of the mantle is described. Sections of the superior region compared with the same in Bithynia tentaculata show that Cyclostoma has a rudimentary gill in process of disappearance. Analyses of the contents of the respiratory cavity demonstrated, even with the animal inclosed in its shell, the occurrence of gaseous interchange with the exterior. The glandular lamelle and very complex arrangement of the * Proc. Biol. Soc. Liverpool, ii. (1888) pp. 152-70 (3 pls.). { Actes Soc. Linn. Bordeaux, 1887, pp. 1-152 (9 CS : ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. (ws secondary chambers of the organ of Bojanus are studied. The author shows that it is principally the blood from the lower parts of the body which traverses this organ. The vascular system within the organ is formed from modified lacunz. Distributed in the kidney are cells with green concretions, and others granular and ciliated. Careful attention is given to the course and structure of the reno- pericardial canal. The glandular character of the pericardial wall is noticed. Uric acid is absent from the kidney, and the author’s observa- tions on this head agree with those of Barfurth. He has also proved that neither by kidney nor by pericardium can blood flow to the exterior. The globules of the concretionary gland consist almost entirely of uric acid. The formation and absorption of the concretions is discussed. The gland has no excretory canal, is filled with bacilli, is a reservoir for uric acid, which is afterwards eliminated by the kidney. The bacilli appear to act as true symbions. The pedal glands are next described in detail. The supra-pedal exhibits a curious histological diversity in its walls. Sections of the concave wall show a network of pericellular canals, opening on one side into the general cavity, on the other into the excretory canal of the gland. This communication between interior and exterior raises interesting morphological and physiological problems. The anatomy and histology of the nervous system was investigated in great detail, but the results hardly admit of summary. The different forms of muscular fibre, the nerve terminations, the apparently olfactory epithelium-of the tentacle extremity, the otocyst and the eye, and the special olfactory organ of Spengel, &c., are described, and the structure and development of the egg discussed. The follicular cells are not formed from within the ovum. The oviduct and uterus are fully described. Finally, the male reproductive organs are dealt with. The sperma- togenesis was not fully elucidated. The spermatocytes result from the repeated nuclear division of spermatogonia. The nucleus of the spermatocyte forms the head of the spermatozoon, after the elimination into the protoplasm of a portion of its substance. Effects of Lesion of Supra-csophageal Ganglia in Snails.*—M. L. Petit has made some observations on the rotatory movements produced by the lesion of the supra-cesophageal ganglia in Molluscs. This group has been hitherto neglected by physiologists. The form selected for experiment was Helix aspersa. 'The animal takes about three weeks or a month to recover from the effects of the operation. A snail which had its left supra-cesophageal ganglion removed on the 26th of June began to crawl about on the 29th of July. The right tentacle was normal, and 18 mm. long, while the left was partly retracted and only 6 mm. The animal described spirals, turning from right to left, or from the uninjured towards the injured side. ‘The removal of the right ganglion produced corresponding results. A snail which had its left cerebro-pedal-visceral connectives cut crawled about in curves, which were broken in upon by short circles, in which it turned towards the left. Five months after the operation it crawled about almost normally. When the commissure connecting the supra-cesophageal ganglia was cut the tentacles preserved their normal length; in one case the snail * Comptes Rendus, evi. (1888) pp. 1809-11. 718 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO was observed to take a zigzag course, but in most cases there were curves and rings; the latter might be to the right or to the left, but either direction was constant in any given snail. After removal of both supra-cesophageal ganglia, the snail was enticed from its shell with difficulty, and soon retired again. Removal of the pedal-visceral ganglia paralysed the animal and it could no longer return to its shell ; it bled profusely and soon died. In slugs the effect of removal of a supra-cesophageal ganglion is the immediate curvature of the body from the opposite side; the head is applied to the foot, and the animal forms a ring. If it moves it turns from the uninjured towards the injured ganglion, or in the opposite direction to the snail. This difference may be due to the slugs having been examined immediately after the operation had been performed on them. Creeping Movements.*—Prof. V. Willem seeks to explain the facts that fresh-water Gastropods can glide slowly along the surface of the water, with the foot upwards, as if they were creeping along the inferior surface of a horizontal plate of glass; and that when they do so the motions of the foot are the same as when the animal is moving on a solid surface. After discussing the various explanations which have already been offered, Prof. Willem proceeds to give an account of his own observations and experiments. These have led him to conclude that the animal begins by attaching itself to the thin superficial skin which always covers pond-water, and that then it creeps along the inferior surface of a thin coat of mucus secreted by its foot. ‘This locomotion,” he says, “ only differs from locomotion on solid substances in that here the mollusc has to depend on the rigidity of the train of mucus alone, while in the other case the train of mucus is attached to a solid surface.” Systematic Position of Hero.;,—M. A. Vayssiére has some notes on the organization of this opisthobranch mollusc, whose exact syste- matic position is still a matter of some uncertainty. The dendritic form of the appendage of the edge of the mantle, which has led to the creature being placed with the Dendronotide, appears to be due to the action of alcohol. In life, however, these appendages are seen to be true dorsal fusiform cirri, which are arranged symmetrically by pedun- culated groups on the lateral parts of the back. They have considerable resemblance to those of Calona Cavolinii, but there are, in addition, on the sides of the cephalic region a pair of tufts, which carry the largest number and the longest of the cirri, the posterior groups having only one, two, or three rudimentary cirri. The arrangement of the append- ages shows that Hero is one of the Aeolidide, and this is confirmed by the odontophore. As the radular characters of the species found in the Bay of Marseilles differ from those of H. formosa described by Sars and Bergh, the author regards it as a new species, to which, however, he gives no name. Anatomy of Valvata piscinalis.—M. F. Garnault { has investigated the anatomy of this hermaphrodite mollusc. He finds that the renal tube is simple above, but that the greater part is divided by a partition into two secondary tubes. Of these the right communicates with the * Bull. Acad. R. Sci. Belg., lvii. (1888) pp. 421-9. + Comptes Rendus, cvii. (1888) pp. 136-8. } Ibid., evi. (1888) pp. 1813-15. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. a19 pericardium by a very wide canal, which passes between the left renal tube and the dorsal wall of the pallial cavity; the epithelium of this canal has very long and powerful cilia, which are turned towards the kidney. As in Cyclostoma, there may be one or more rows of cells on the transverse lamelle which project into the renal cavity. In the kidney of Valvata there is only one kind of cell; these are ciliated, and contain a number of very small yellowish granules. When they are about to fall away their protoplasm contains fine vacuoles. Their débris form a kind of mucus in the middle of the renal cavity, and in this their nuclei, only slightly modified, may be made out in sections. Some points raised by M. Remy Perrier with regard to the physiology of secretion are criticized. The pericardiac epithelium is not glandular, but in the wall of the auricle there are racemose masses of cells with homogeneous contents, which absorb powerfully colouring reagents; these cells correspond almost exactly to those described by M. Sabatier in the heart of Mytilus, and that author is probably right in regarding them as having a secreting function. M. Garnault’s observations on the nervous system correspond pretty closely to those of M. Bouvier; neuro-epithelial cells on the part of the mantle between the gill and the body-wall appear to represent an ill- defined organ of Spengel. Neither the structure nor the innervation of the pallial filament justify us in regarding it as a gill or false gill; Moquin-Tandon was probably right in considering it to be the homo- logue of the pallial filaments of young Paludine. M. F. Bernard has also written* on the anatomy of Valvata piscinalis. The epithelial cells of the auricle described by M. Garnault are always met with in the Diotocardia, and are identical with those which Grobben has described in the Acephala. There are no arterial capillaries. The abdominal sinuses are prolonged anteriorly by several systems; there is an anterior abdominal sinus which ends near the cardia and arises from the general cavity of the body; in the mantle there is a large sinus between the rectum and the genital ducts, and there is a system of sinuses which ends in the formation of a transverse pallial vein. The whole surface of the mantle is covered by a network with distinct meshes, which connects the transverse vein, the afferent and efferent branchial veins, the circumrectal lacune, and a circumpallial sinus which is given off from the anterior abdominal sinus near the pericardium. At first sight this plexus appears to be formed of true capillaries, but it really only consists of lacune. The gill receives its blood by a large afferent sinus, which is enlarged at the point of attachment of the organ. It differs from that of all the Diotocardia by not being prolonged behind the line of inser- tion into the mantle. The branchial nerve is very large, and gives off to the epithelium delicate fibres, as in Fisswrella, and not large bundles, as in Haliotis and the Trochide. As to the kidney, the author agrees with M. R. Perrier (see supra). The visceral commissure arises partly from the so-called supra-intestinal ganglion and partly from the large right pallial nerve. The visceral ganglion is to the right and at the bottom of the pallial cavity, on the cesophagus, and at the end of the right salivary gland. There are two * Comptes Rendus, cyii. (1888) pp. 191-4, 720 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO pallial commissures. The penial nerve arises near the right pallial, has a large ganglion at the base of the penis, and remains ganglionic to near its extremity. There is a small but distinct olfactory ganglion. On the whole the nervous system is very much like that of Bithynia. The tentaculiform filament is almost identical in structure with the tentacle itself; like it, it has an axis of ramifying connective tissue, and longitudinal and circular muscular bundles, but there is only one nerve in- stead of two, and the blood-lacuna is very reduced. The genital organs are difficult to make out. The hermaphrodite gland produces eggs at the periphery and spermatospores at the centre; the oviduct has an important dilatation, and receives the united products of the two albuminiparous glands. Contrary to the statement of Moquin-Tandon, the author found that the genital ducts were separated. The salivary and albuminiparous glands and all the pallial organs have only one layer of epithelial cells, and the distinction between ciliated and secretory cells may be observed very distinctly. The zvological affinities of Valvata are somewhat obscure, for the various organs have points of resemblance to those of the most various Gastropods. It is clearly enough a tenioglossate Prosobranch, but it is an aberrant type in which some of the points of the organization of the Diotocardia are retained, but it is not, strictly speaking, an intermediate form. 5. Lamellibranchiate, Pericardial Gland.*—Prof. C. Grobben gives a full account of his investigation of the but little-known pericardial gland of Lamellibranchs. His memoir discusses the structure of the organ, the occurrence of con- cretionary deposits in other parts of the body, the function of the gland, and its morphological relations. The chief results may be condensed as follows :— The pericardial gland occurs in numerous Lamellibranchs as an epithelial modification in two regions, namely, above the auricles and in the anterior angles of the pericardium. In the first position it is in- cipient in Arca, well developed with processes in Pectunculus, especially large in Mytilus and Lithodomus, but tending to degenerate in the Monomyaria—Pecten, Spondylus, Lima, Ostrea. It is more or less markedly developed in Dreissena, Unio, Anodonta, Venus, Cardium, Scro- bicularia, Solen, Pholas, and Teredo. The glandular sacs formed by invagination of the mantle lamelle in the anterior angles of the peri- cardium occur in Unio, Anodonta, Venus, Cardium, Scrobicularia, Solen, and Pholas, while in the series of Heteromyaria and Monomyaria they are exhibited by Dreissena alone. In Pholas the openings of the pallial- pericardial gland are lost, and the sacs exhibit a partial division, as is also seen in the auricular glands of Arca, Pectunculus, and Lithodomus. In Meleagrina there are projecting tufts on the posterior margin of the pericardial cavity. The epithelial cells of the pericardial glands of Arca, Pectunculus, Mytilus, and Lithodomus bear flagella and contain concretions. When richly laden with the latter they are thrown off, and most probably pass to the exterior from the pericardial space vid the kidneys. The function is excretory and kidney-like. The dark colour seen even when the * Arbeit. Zool. Inst. Uniy. Wien, vii. (1888) pp. 355-444 (6 pls.). ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. on glands are degenerate or absent may be due to excretion inside the auricles (Pecten, Spondylus, Ostrea, Lima, Pinna, Meleagrina), or to concretions in the mantle (Arca). The double character of the heart-chamber in Arca is a secondary result of the marked development of the posterior retractor. The ciliated funnel of the kidney is not absent in Pecten or Spondylus, and lies in front of, and dorsal to the atria. The union of the two atria in Monomyaria in front of the ventricle is the same as the posterior union in Arca, Pectunculus, Mytilus, and Lithodomus, the change in position being due to the torsion of the body. The position of the heart behind the posterior adductor in Teredo is due to the posterior and ventral displacement of the body. The single aorta is due to the union of the anterior and posterior. The anterior adductor is present, as in all other Pholadide, but is weakly developed. Molluscoida. B. Bryozoa. Embryogeny of Ectoproctous Bryozoa.*—Mr. S. F. Harmer has studied, at Roscoff, the development of Alcyonidium polyoum. The ova are large and contain a number of vitelline spherules, which, in the early stages of development, are found indifferently in all the cells. The segmentation is of the remarkable type which appears to be characteristic of the Ctenostomata and Cheilostomata. At the 48-stage the aboral region has two longitudinal rows of four cells, which are disposed symmetrically right and left of the median plane, and occupy the centre of the aboral surface ; there is a complete circle of eight cells which surround the central group, and are themselves surrounded by a peripheral ring of sixteen cells, which are, as Barrois has shown, the commencement of the ciliated circlet. The oral half has a central group of four large cells, which are surrounded by twelve peripheral cells. The segmentation-cavity is, at this stage, relatively large, but is partly filled by four ceils which are placed immediately above the central oral cells, from which they are probably derived; these four cells are the commencement of the hypoblast. Ata slightly more advanced stage the blastopore appears as a well-marked depression, which is continuous with a rather irregular cavity surrounded by several large hypoblastic cells. The segmentation-cavity becomes completely obliterated by the internal cellular mass, and the various organs of the larva begin to make their appearance. The alimentary canal of the embryo is well developed ; it consists of a vast stomach, bounded by an extremely irregular epithelium; the cesophagus, which is perhaps formed as a stomodcum, has a very narrow cavity; the mouth is larger and more evident in early than in later stages. There is some reason for thinking that the region immedi- ately behind the opening of the sucker (which is placed a little behind the middle of the ventral surface) represents the anal region. If this be really the case, the embryo is entoproctous. When the alimentary canal has acquired its maximum of development, which it does at an early stage, the cavity of the stomach may be justly called gigantic. It is not, however, easy to make out the epithelium which lines it, for it is composed of a mass of vitelline spherules enveloped in protoplasm with * Arch. Zool. Expér. et Gén., v. (1887) pp. 443-58 (2 pls.). 722 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO rare nuclei, or it has the appearance of a very delicate layer of proto- plasm with scattered nuclei. In a word, the epithelium of the stomach is as completely different from an ordinary secreting epithelium as one can well imagine, and this fact, in connection with the diminution of the lumen of the stomach as development advances, leads Mr. Harmer to con- sider the alimentary canal of Alcyonidium as a “ rudimentary organ.” It is owing to the considerable amount of nutrient yolk in the egg, to » the fact that development is accomplished in the wall of the body of the parent, to the extreme shortness of the free larval life, and to the degenera- tion of many embryonic organs during metamorphosis that the ali- mentary canal does not long preserve its functional form. The groove which appears in the aboral region of the embryo, and which has been regarded by Barrois and others as the pallial cavity, has probably the function of allowing the involution of the ciliary circlet into the interior vestibule, which is formed during the process of fixation. With regard to the much discussed pyriform organ, Mr. Harmer states that it has, at first sight, the appearance of a mucous gland, owing to the presence in its interior of a transparent substance which does not stain easily. When examined more carefully, it is seen to be composed of a series of cells closely packed together at their outer extremity, while on their inner side they are prolonged into fine pro- cesses, among which are other cells full of vacuolated spaces. It is important to note that there is no sharp limit between the pyriform organ and the central mass of nerve fibres, which are prolonged into the bases of the cells of the pyriform organ. It may, therefore, be justly supposed that the pyriform organ has a sensory function; as the larva ordinarily swims with this organ in front it is possible that its duty is to test the bodies to which the larva desires to fix itself. It may be noted that this organ has considerable resemblance to the cephalic shield described by Kleinenberg in the larva of Lopadorhynchus. It is probable that the greater part of the nervous system arises from the dorsal epiblast; if this be so, the “brain” of Alcyonidium is the homologue of the “ dorsal organ” of entoproctous Bryozoa. On this point the author discusses the views of preceding writers, such as Repiachoff and Vigelius. It is probable that Cyphonautes is not an archaic larva, but rather one very much modified, in which the alimentary canal has preserved its functional forms (owing, perhaps, to its larval life being longer than that of other Bryozoa), while the oral surface is transformed into an atrium in which the pyriform organ and sucker are situated. The descriptions given by Repiachoff of the larva of Bowerbankia cannot be easily brought into accord with Mr. Harmer’s observations on Alcyonidium, unless (as is probably the case) Repiachoft’s mantle-cavity is really the internal sac or sucker, and the ciliated dorsal groove the pyriform organ. Arthropoda. a. Insecta. Egg-membranes of Insects.*—Dr. E. Korschelt publishes a full account of his researches on the formation of the egg-membranes, micro- pyles, and chorionic appendages in Insects. The vitelline membrane * Nova Acta Acad. Czs. Leop.-Carol., li. (1887) pp. 183-252 (5 pls.). ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 123 arises by the hardening of a thin layer differentiated as a fringe from the rest of the yolk. It may appear before or after the chorion, and at different stages of egg ripeness. On the growing egg it cannot be very firm, and is capable of extension. The chorion is a cuticular secreted product of epithelial cells. In its young state it is soft and plastic. The chorion of Musca in process of being formed remained, on the contraction of the yolk, in part adherent to the latter, in part to the epithelium, and became drawn out in threads. Towards the close of its formation the chorion seems at length to become hard ; it also undergoes, as the staining reactions show, some change in its constitution. In its origin it is often unequal, forming first on the inferior portion, and becoming subsequently extended upwards. The cellular-like appearance of the chorion is deceptive. As the internal surface of the epithelial layer changes its form in the course of chorion formation, it may be the condition of manifold structures on the same chorion. Korschelt also shows that the same cells may successively produce very different substances. The close association between epi- thelial layer and chorion is emphasized, and numerous modifications are described. The secretion of cuticular substance is not always confined to the free surface of the epithelial cells, but sometimes occurs on their lateral surfaces, and therefore between the individual cells. In this way flat or filiform structures are formed which are in connection with the forming chorion, and appear on the mature egg as little basket-like structures or as a network. The pore-canals which penetrate the chorion often in great abun- dance have their origin from processes of the epithelial cells. By longer and stronger processes, yet essentially in the same way, arise the elongated and superiorly expanded canals of the multiple micropyles. In a general way the origin of the chorion may be said to be the same as that of the cuticle. A marked deviation from the typical cuticular mode of formation of the chorion and its associated struc- tures is that exhibited in the formation of the “egg-rays” (“ Hi- strahlen ”) in Nepa, which take origin in the interior of modified epithelial cells. In investigating the details of this process Korschelt has been led to conclude that the nuclei exercise a direct and essential influence on the secretory activity of the cell. Two cells fuse before the forma- tion of the rays, but the fusion is quite complete, and the process takes place not between two cells, but within a double bi-nucleate cell. This mode of formation of chitin is indeed unique. Antennary Sensory Organs of Insects.*—Herr F. Ruland points out that, notwithstanding the great variations in the antenne of Insects, they may, with perhaps one exception, be referred to a common funda- mental type. The external apparatus is a more or less well-developed chitinous hair which is supplied by a branch of an antennary nerve. Free nerve-endings, such as have been described by Hauser in Caloptenus, Tabanus, Vanessa, and others, do not really exist. The first function of these organs is tactile, for there can be no doubt that a large number of the structures which are found on the antennze have this office. Some of the hairs are stronger and are articulated at their base. Necrophorus and Geotrupes have peculiar organs of this * Zeitschr. f. Wiss. Zool., xlvi. (1888) pp. 602-27 (1 pl.). 724 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO kind in the form of bent or straight sete, which are very strongly chitinized, and appear to be connected with a wineglass-shaped pore- canal, by means of a chitinous membrane ; the pore-canal in its narrower lower part was, as a rule, filled by a homogeneous mass, which was found to be coloured red by carmine. The olfactory organs may be in the form of cones placed on the surface or in pits; the typical structure of the former has already been investigated by Leydig in the Hymeno- ptera. Organs of this kind appear to be found not only in all orders of Insects, but also in Myriopoda and Crustacea; they may, therefore, be regarded as the chief form of olfactory organ among Arthropods. When the cone is placed in a pit there may be one (simple pits) or several cones (compound pits); these cones agree in all essential points with those which are set on the surface. The differences in the pits are fully pointed out. The auditory organs are not hair-like structures; they were first distinguished by Kriipelin, who called them pore-plates; there is a firm, thick membrane, without any orifice, which completely shuts off the lumen of the pore-canal from the outer air. The author’s observations on the structure of these organs confirms Kriipelin’s account. When separate antenne of Hymenoptera were boiled with concentrated potash the plates were found, after the disappearance of all the soft parts, to be completely uninjured and to still lie in their original position; this showed that they did not consist of modified nerve-substance, but of firm chitin. In Vespa crabro the greater part of the pore-canal closed by the plate was seen to be filled by epithelial cells; through these there extends a central nerve-cord which arises from the basal ganglion. Just below the pore-plate there is a cavity closed by two plates, which at first lie close to one another, but then separate; these are connected with a hyaline intermediate piece of the ring. It seems to be clear that the nerve from the ganglion is not directly inserted into the pore-plate, but its exact course could not be made out. As the structure of this organ forbids us.from regarding it as either tactile or olfactory, Herr Ruland thinks it probable it is auditory; the form and mode of attachment of the plates are such as to adapt it to vibratory movements, and the cavity below is such as we might expect to find in an auditory organ. The structures were also examined in Ichneumonide, Cynipide, and the Ants; in the last of which they were the most complicated. Pure- plates were also found in the coleopterous genus Necrophorus. Poison of Hymenoptera.*—M. G. Carlet has a note on the poison of Hymenoptera with a smooth sting, and on the existence of a poison- chamber in the Mellifera. The forms examined were Philanthus, Pompilus, and others. In them the alkaline gland, which the author has already shown to be well-developed in the Bee and others, is rudi- mentary. These are the Hymenoptera whose incomplete poison does not kill the insects with which they provision their nest, for the purpose of feeding their larve with living prey. In M. Carlet’s opinion it is the presence of two liquids or of one only which produces respectively the mortal poison or the anesthetic, and not the asserted power to select the point of the body at which the Hymenopteron will sting its victim. The poison-chamber is useful as furnishing poison immediately to the Hymenopteron, while it protects the poison from the air which would * Comptes Rendus, evi. (1888) pp. 1737-40. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 725 alter it; as it empties it is filled by aspiration. This reservoir is only found in the Mellifera, where it is necessarily correlated with the perforation syringe which forms the stinging apparatus of these Insects. Morphology of the Legs of Hymenoptera.*—Prof. A. J. Cook dis- cusses some points in the morphology of the legs of hymenopterous insects. He begins with the prothoracic legs of the honey-bee, and traces the modifications of the ‘‘ antenna cleaner” throughout a series of forms. From the study of this organ alone (so persistent is the type within each family) the species of Hymenoptera might, with very few exceptions, be arranged in their respective families. The discussion of this apparatus in its details and varied occurrence forms the greater part of the paper. Salivary Glands of Cockroach.;—Herr Bruno Hofer has made an intimate investigation of the structure of the salivary glands in Blatia and of the nature of the associated nervous arrangements. (a) The general structure and mechanism of the glands is first de- described. Special attention is directed to the paired muscle passing from the under side of the cesophagus to the gland, and probably in part contracting the reservoir and accommodating the gland to the movements of the body. In B. germanica there is another muscle from the posterior end of the reservoir, which it probably serves to empty. Any connection of the salivary duct with the cesophagus is excluded by the interposition of the very massive hypopharynx. ‘The duct opens between hypophysis and under lip, to the outer walls of which it is completely fused. (b) The histology of the glands is next discussed. The formation of the secretion is apparently as follows :—In the fine protoplasmic threads of the unencapsuled cells, fine glancing secretion-granules appear; these become more numerous, form larger spherules, and replace the proto- plasm; these granules must then in some way (probably by a water- stream) become soluble and diffuse into the capsules and ducts; the secretion passes from capsules to ducts, and thence into the reservoir; at the same time the unencapsuled glandular cells re-exhibit fine proto- plasmic threads extending from their margin into the lumen of the gland. The second chapter of the memoir deals with the nervous apparatus, Herr Hofer first discusses the unpaired and paired visceral nervous system, and describes the distribution and histology of the nerves. They have a double function, serving as a centre for the peristalsis of the cesophagus, and forming the innervation of the salivary glands. Passing to the more intricate question of the exact connection between nerves and glands, the author confirms the correctness of Kupffer’s observation that the nerves do really penetrate into the glandular cells. He completes it in the more detailed observation that several nerve-fibrils fuse with the striated protoplasm of the encapsuled glandular cells, but do not exhibit any peculiar terminations, Parthenogenesis in Bombyx mori.{—Prof. A. Tichomiroff urges that both well-known and recent observations confirm the statement that true parthenogenesis does occur in Bombyx mori, though it has been recently doubted by Prof. Verson.§ * Amer. Natural., xxii. (1888) pp. 193-201 (10 figs.). + Nova Acta Acad. Cees. Leop.-Carol., li. (1887) pp. 349-95 (3 pls.). { Zool. Anzeig., xi. (1888) pp. 342-4. § See this Journal, ante, p. 571. 1888. oe D 726 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO Respiration of Silk-worm Ova.*—Profs. L. Luciani and A. Piutti have made a long series of experiments on the respiratory phenomena in the eggs of Bombyx mori. Their general results are as follows :—The respiratory activity is usually much depressed during hibernation. Lowering of the surrounding temperature has the same effect. Dry air causes them to lose moisture, while they gain from damp. With these alterations in humidity the respiratory activity also varies. Consider- able desiccation at medium temperature may cause absolute latent life. The respiratory activity of hibernating ova varies, ceteris paribus, with the quantity of available oxygen. Limited space brings about progres- sive diminution of the CO, eliminated; when too prolonged asphyxia results. During artificial incubation there is a gradual increase in the quantity of CO, developed in unit time; humidity or dryness favours or depresses activity. The curve of respiratory activity is an index to the internal rate of life or development. The respiratory ratio of CO, and O, is not constant, but is a fraction progressively increasing even above unity. “Itis probable that during embryonic development there are formed, besides the formative materials, chemical molecules less oxy- genated, and therefore provided with a sum of potential energy always ou the increase.” Mode of Locomotion of Caterpillars.;—M. G. Carlet has been investigating the mode of locomotion of caterpillars. He finds that the ordinary statement that two limbs of the same pair never move simul- taneously in terrestrial locomotion is incorrect. If observation is started on a caterpillar which has come to rest with its body well extended, it is found that its first movement is to detach the anal appendage and to approximate it to the one in front by contracting the two intermediate apodal rings. The four pairs of false limbs are then detached in order from behind forwards, and are at the same time pushed forwards by the extension of the two hinder apodal rings. This series of progressive movements of the rings reaches, in the form of a wave, the first two apodal rings of the abdomen, which are held in position by the ap- pendages of the first three rings. These two apodal rings become com- pressed, and the fourth appendage (or one nearest behind them) is approximated to the third appendage, or one nearest in front of them. This third appendage is immediately raised, and, almost simultaneously, though successively, the second and first pairs of appendages are raised. We can now understand why it is that the “false legs” are so strong as compared with the others; they may be appropriately called mooring legs (“« pattes-amarres ”), for it is they which maintain the caterpillar and order its progression. Physiologically, they are the true legs, and the true legs (or “ pattes écailleuses”) are the false legs of the caterpillars. The author proposes to do away with the term of false legs, and to replace it by that of membranous legs (“ pattes membraneuses”’). The loss of hooks from the membranous legs of Cossus and some other xylophagous caterpillars is correlated with their habitation of trunks in which they hollow out galleries; but, as compensation, the masticatory apparatus is exceedingly well developed. The looping caterpillars loop so as to bring their remaining two pairs of membranous legs into * Arch. Ital. Biol., ix. (1888) pp. 319-58 (1 pl.). t+ Comptes Rendus, cvii. (1888) pp. 131-4. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETO. 727 apposition with their true legs; this leech-like mode of progression is less satisfactory, but its defects are made up for by the protective colouring of the bodies of these caterpillars. Colour-relation between Pupe and Surroundings.*—Mr. W. White describes some experiments made by Mr. G.C. Griffiths upon the colour- relation between the pupe of Pieris rape and their immediate sur- roundings. (a) Poulton’s observation that dark surroundings exercise a retarding influence upon the period before pupation is confirmed, (b) To all appearance the freshly formed pupa is not photographically sensitive. (c) The general results of the colours themselves also entirely confirm Poulton’s observations, notably in the case of dark pupe produced by black and of green pup produced by yellow. (d) The special effects of yellow surroundings in arresting the formation of dark superficial pigment, and in tending towards the production of green pups, were very striking, and confirm Poulton’s suggestion that rays from this part of the spectrum, when predominant in the light incident upon the sus- ceptible larva, determine the production of these results whenever green pupz are produced by the influence of surroundings. When green pupa of Pieris are produced, as in nature, on green leaves, it is probable that the effect is wholly due to the reflected yellow rays. Though these experiments do not exactly furnish materials for new conclusions, they are valuable as independent corroborations of Poulton’s results. Aphides.t—Dr. H. F. Kessler discusses the development and life- history of Chaitophorus aceris Koch, Ch. testudinatus Thornton, Ch. lyro- pictus Kessler, which he regards as three distinct species instead of as one (Aphis aceris Linné) as they have been hitherto considered. 8B. Myriopoda. Post-embryonic Development of Julus terrestris.t—In his second memoir on the development of the Myriopoda, Mr. F. G. Heathcote describes the development of different organs. The mode of develop- ment of the somites is essentially the same as that of Peripatus, for the ceelomic spaces are found to have nothing to do with the body-cavity or vascular system of Julus; the body-cavity is a series of spaces contained between the gut and the body-wall, and is a pseudocele. With this general resemblance there are considerable differences in the details. In the hinder part of the body of Julus, that is behind the third body- segment, part of the somite is in the limbs, and part in the body; the latter passes towards the top of the nerve-cord, and not to the dorsal part of the body as in Peripatus; the part of the somite within the limbs, which in Peripatus forms the nephridium and its vesicle, furnishes in Julus the muscles of the limbs. One of the most interesting points about the development of the somites is the fact that the so-called double segments have two meso- blastic segments each; this is against the suggestion of Balfour that the double segments might represent single segments which had developed a second pair of limbs, and had altered the nervous system and other organs to suit them. * Trans. Entomol. Soc. Lond., ii. (1888) pp. 247-67. + Nova Acta Acad. Ces. Leop.-Carol., li. (1887) pp. 151-79 (1 pl.). } Phil. Trans., clxxix. B (1888) pp. 157-79 (4 pls.). 3D 2 728 SUMMARY OF OURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO In the history of the nervous system we may note the appearance of a pair of cerebral grooves resembling those of Peripatus ; they become obliterated and disappear entirely later on. Temporary cavities appear in the ganglia which disappear when the two cords unite to form one; as to the function of these the author has no suggestion to offer, but he thinks that the cerebral grooves may be for the aeration of the cerebral tissue, as they disappear as soon as the tracheal invaginations begin to be formed. The trachem arise as pit-like invaginations formed just behind and a little externally to the bases of each pair of appendages; the walls are thick and composed of cells like those of the epidermis; as the pit becomes deeper it forms a kind of vesicle within the body. As this vesicle changes its form it gives off two short thick diverticula; the cells composing these break up, alter their arrangement, and form the tracheal tubes. The stink-glands also arise as invaginations. The heart of the adult Julus, which has never been fully described, has two pairs of ostia in each segment; these are originally spaces left in the tubes during development; the lips of the ostia which project into the tube of the heart are formed by four peculiarly-shaped muscle- cells, which evidently control the operations of the ostium; there are two pairs of arteries to each segment, and they lead directly into the spaces of the fat-body. The internal coat of the cardiac tube is not nucleated, being secreted by the cells of the middle coat early in development; this middle coat has a well-developed muscular structure ; the fibres are circular and disposed in bands, a narrow band alternating with a broad one. The heart is suspended by thin muscle-fibres which are attached to the hypodermic matrix layer; there are also muscle- fibres attached to the fat-body which probably correspond to the aleform muscles of the heart of insects. The cavity in which the adult heart of Julus is inclosed is partially cut off from the rest of the body-cavity by a pericardial membrane, formed from the same network of cells which gives rise to the heart, and which is continuous with the fat-bodies. In the formation of the eye a single ocellus appears first, and the rest are added on one by one till the full number is reached; in each case the process of development is the same. A deposition of pigment- granules of a dark red-brown colour takes place within a thickened mass, which has been formed by a multiplication of the cells of the hypodermis, and this secretion of pigment is accompanied by a separation from one another of certain cells within the mass.. As a result, we have the formation of a vesicle bounded by a mass of dark pigment. The cells which compose the external wall of this vesicle give rise to the lens which fuses with the chitin of the exoskeleton, and the same cells continually add layers to the lens till it assumes its full size. This development of the eye-spots from a vesicle agrees with Patten’s belief that the simple myriopod eye has been developed from a vesicle invaginated from the ectoderm; but what Patten describes as the vitreous layer is clearly the corneal hypodermis. The original hypo- dermis present before the formation of the eye is represented by the external chitin of the exoskeleton formed by it and now fused with the external wall of the vesicle. With regard to the phylogeny of the Myriopoda, it is observed that the essential features which they have in common with Peripatus, are such as would be likely to occur in many Tracheata, if the latter are ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 729 derived from a Peripatus-like ancestor. The carboniferous Myriopod Euphoberia, as described by Scudder, presents arrangements which are found during the development of Julus. The Archipolypoda have the dorsal part of the body ring, which is now single, distinctly divided. Tt is probably best to regard each part of the so-called double-segments as a segment complete in itself, but joined to its fellow by the fusion of two dorsal plates. It seems likely that the Chilopods and Diplopods branched off from a common ancestor at some period not very long before the appearance of the Archipolypoda, and that both are remotely descended from some Peripatus-like stock. 5. Arachnida. Anatomy of Gamaside.*—Herr W. Winkler has investigated the structure of Gamaside, especially of the genera Gamasus and Uropoda. In regard to the general segmentation of the body, he regards the boundary of the “capitulum” as marked by a chitinous ridge which extends directly in front of the first pair of legs. As to the mouth appendages, the chelicere are equivalent to the mandibles, for their nerves come from the sub-cesophageal ganglion, from a portion distinct from the rest of the mass. The maxille, lower lip, and tongue are carefully described, and their relations and modifications discussed. In discussing the other appendages, he emphasizes, against Méenin and Pagenstecher, that the first pair are not labial palps, but true legs. The terminations are very fully described. The cuticle with its plates and layers, the interstitial connective tissue, the musculature like that of Tyroglyphide, the nervous system, and the sensory bristles are then briefly described, and the author discusses the richly-branched tracheal system. The actively pulsating heart lies in the anterior half of the abdomen, above the posterior end - of the mid-gut. It is one-chambered, short and broad, with two valved openings and a long aorta. It may be regarded as a reduction from the heart of Araneidz, and between the two the hearts of Chernetide and Phalangidz may be placed. In the alimentary system Herr Winkler describes the pharynx with its six pairs of muscles, the narrow cesophagus, the wide mid-gut with six sacs and hepatic glands, the simple glandular hind-gut, and the vesicular rectum. The excretory organs are certainly homologous with Malpighian vessels. They consist of two separate long tubes, which open along with the hind-gut into a capacious collecting bladder, which is really part of the excretory and not of the alimentary system. Finally, the author describes at length the male and female reproductive organs, and makes a few notes on development. e. Crustacea. Intestine and Digestive Glands of Decapods.j—Prof. G. Cattaneo has investigated the histology of the intestine in Decapoda, and the function of the associated glands. In the intestine of Palinurus vulgaris he distinguishes and describes seven layers—the chitinous cuticle, the cylindrical epithelium, the connective layer, the longitudinal muscles, the radial muscles, the circular muscles, the external connective tissue. Many types are discussed. The histological part of the research evi- * Arbeit. Zool. Inst. Univ. Wien, vii. (1888) pp. 317-54 pl). + Arch. Ital, Biol., ix. (1888) pp. 255-66. 730 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO dently suffers from delayed publication, since the not very recent memoir by Frenzel on the same subject was not seen by the author until his results, which are corroboratory, were being published. As to the function of the glands, the author demonstrated the presence of diastase, pepsine, and trypsine, of emulsionizing enzymes, of pigments analogous to those of the bile. These substances were not free, but incorporated in adipose drops, which probably lose their contents in digestion and are reabsorbed. Effects of Lesions of the Supra-cesophageal Ganglia of the Crab (Carcinus Mcenas).*—M. L. Petit has been partly induced to study the effects of lesion of the supra-cesophageal ganglia of the Crab by their curious habit of lateral locomotion. If the animal attempts to move after the operation has been performed on the left side, it describes a series of circles in the direction of the hands of a watch, but its head is directed sometimes outside and sometimes inside the circle. It passes from one to the other of these positions by a half-turn. There is the same spoke-wheel movement which is observed in Mammals, when the brain is injured ; but, whereas in them, the head of the animal is always opposite to the axis of rotation, it may be opposite to, or turned to it in the Crab. If the right supra-cesophageal ganglion be injured, the move- ments of rotation are in the opposite direction to those of the hands of a watch. Male Appendages on Females.}—Herr D. Bergendal describes the occurrence of distinctly male copulatory appendages on female crabs. In many cases there were no appendages on the first somite of the ab- domen; in other cases they were rudimentary ; in others spoon-shaped ; in a few like those of the male. Herr Bergendal regards this abnor- mality as due to inheritance from the male parent, and lays stress on the fact that only the useless and normally rudimentary first pair of appen- dages are thus modified, while the second pair which are functional never exhibit modification. A fuller description is in course of publication. Eyes of Cymothoide.{—Mr. F. E. Beddard has investigated the minute structure of the eye in certain Cymothoide. His chief con- clusions are as follows :— The Serolide and Cymothoide possess eyes which differ in certain important particulars from the compound eyes of all other Crustaceans as at present understood. The points of difference concern the retinule. Each retinula consists, in the first place, of four (Serolis) or seven (Cymothoide) elongated cells resembling those of other Isopoda; each of these cells secretes a chitinous body, the rhabdomere. In Cymothoa (Bullar) the individual rhabdomeres retain their distinctness. In other Cymothoide and in the Serolide the rhabdomeres become fused to form an axially placed rhabdom, which has often a complicated form, and in which a large quantity of pigment is deposited. The Serolide (not the deep-sea species) and many Cymothoidz possess a pair of large hyaline nucleated cells, surrounded by the other retinula cells. In the axis of these, and inclosed by them (in the Serolide), is a delicate fibre, passing back as far as the ommatial membrane, and expanding anteriorly into a conical body, which appears to penetrate into the axis of the rhabdom. * Comptes Rendus, evii. (1888) pp. 278-9. + Ofvers. K. Vetensk. Akad. Férhandlingar, 1888, pp. 343-6. t Trans. R. Soc. Edin., xxxiii. (1888) pp. 443-52 (1 pl.). ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. tok In young specimens of Serolis schythet the future hyaline cells are small and granular, and inclose the extremity of this axial cone and fibres, which may be partly a product of their activity, though chiefly formed by the other retinula cells. Hach retinula, therefore, consists of two central clear cells (corresponding in number to the cells of each vitrella), surrounded by four or seven pigmented cells. The pigmented retinula cells are connected with transversely striate fibres, which pass into the ganglion, and are generally regarded as nerve-fibres. The hyaline cells do not end in a nervous filament, unless the axial cuticular rod, which is hollow, incloses a nerve-fibre. The specialization of the retinula into clear and pigmented cells recalls the eye of certain Annelids and Molluscs. The eye is ‘ diplostichous,’ the upper row of cells forming the vitrella, and the lower row the retinula. To this extent, therefore, Mr. Beddard’s results harmonize rather with those of Grenacher than with those of Patten. New Species of Ceponine.*—MM. A. Giard and J. Bonnier have, since the publication of their monograph on Cepon elegans, received a number of new forms allied to that parasite. On Nautilograpsus there is a species which it is proposed to call Grapsicepon Edwards ; it is apparently rather common. Although it does not produce any apparent deformation of the carapace, its presence can be easily enough detected on account of the transparency of its host’s integument. The male is much less degraded than that of other Ceponine, and therein it approaches Leidya. The species found on Trapezia dentifrons is called G. amicorum, but unfortunately, only one example is as yet known; on the whole, however, its characters, so far as it has been possible to make them out, are rather those of members of the group which are parasitic on Grapsidee than of the parasites of Gelasimide; and, as is known, it is with the former that Milne-Edwards, in opposition to Nauck, is inclined to place the genus Trapezia. The name of Portunicepon Hendersoni is given to a parasite of Thalamita callianassa, which appears to be pretty common at Madras. This parasite produces a very slight deformation of the carapace; the male is very degraded, pigment being rare, and the lateral lobes of the pygidium almost fused with the median part. Grapsicepon Edwardsi is the first example of a Bopyrid being found parasitic on other Crustacea than those of small bays with quiet waters, for it was brought from the Sargasso Sea. Prof. A. Milne-Hdwards has lately found a magnificent Bopyrid, which it is proposed to call Pleurocrypta formosa, on Piychogaster formosus, a splendid Galatheid, which was dredged by the ‘ Talisman’ at a depth of 946 metres. Geographical Distribution of Diaptomus.j —MM. J. de Guerne and J. Richard bring forward evidence in favour of the cosmopolitan range of this fresh-water Copepod; further investigations will probably show that many of the species already described have a wider range than is yet assigned to them. So-called Mucous Gland of Male Cypride.t—Herr C. G. Schwarz has investigated the structure of the so-called mucous gland of the male Cypridz. It is, as he observes, a remarkable thing that we should be * Comptes Rendus, cvii. (1888) pp. 44-7. + Ibid., pp. 47-50. t Ber, Naturf. Gesell. Freiburg i. B., ili. (1888) pp. 133-48 (2 pls.). 132 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO in doubt as to the function of an appendage of the male generative apparatus which is nearly one-fourth of the size of the whole body of the animal. In Cypris monacha the organ is thus constituted: it is made up of a chitinous framework, a contained glandular tube, and an investing musculature. The framework consists of a chitinous tube formed of about sixty rings connected by a membrane, and of the spines placed thereon. Every ring carries several spines, which, at the proximal and distal ends, are arranged in circlets, and are specially attached at their tips by a strong chitinous ring; while all the rest stand at right angles to the long axis these are inclined outwards, and so form funnel-like structures, in the walls of which the spines run like ribs. These spines consist of one piece, while all the rest not only divide into two arms, but each of these breaks up again into two secondary arms, which are so arranged that the last arm of one and the first of the following spine always belong to the same ring. The chitinous tube passes at its hinder end into a knob-shaped enlargement, which very rapidly narrows to a fine efferent duct which is proportionately short, and opens into the penis; at its anterior end it passes into a shallow cup which is bored by a narrow orifice hardly wider than a spermatozoon; around the inner concave side of this small chitinous cup corpuscles are arranged. Thence a tube is invaginated into the chitinous tube; this appears to consist of a single layer of cells, but the examination of young forms teaches that the layer is double. This invaginated tube only extends to about the middle of the chitinous tube; the rest of the latter contains a secretion which is coloured a light-blue by hematoxylin, and which passes into the efferent duct, and, when the latter is injured, escapes as a small, mucous, and highly re- fractive droplet. The secretion is probably formed by the cells of the invaginated tube, for which the author proposes the term of glandular tube in place of Nordquist’s name of internal epithelium ; this secretion is of great importance for the spermatozoa, which, in Cypris punctata, were observed to be rolled up in it. After some observations on the differences which obtain in different species, the author proceeds to inquire how the apparatus works. The activities of the muscles and of the spine-arms appear to be antagonistic, for the rings of the chitinous tube are approximated by the contraction of the muscles, while, when these relax, the elasticity of the spines must tend to separate the rings from one another. In this way the chitinous tube is alternately, and rapidly, shortened and elongated. We have, therefore, to do with a pumping apparatus, the suction-power and driving power of which are produced by the alternate action of the spine-arms and muscles. The shallow cup at the anterior end of the tube seems to act as a valve. As soon as the spermatozoon has completely entered the apparatus it must be driven out into the ductus ejaculatorius by renewed shortenings of the tube. It may be concluded that the “slime gland” is morphologically an invagination of the vas deferens into itself; its function is to isolate the spermatozoa which lie collected in quantities in front of it, and to pump them onward. It may also, as Weismann has suggested, have some ejaculatory power. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETO. 733 Vermes. a, Annelida. Criodrilus lacuum.*—Dr. A. Collin has made a detailed investigation ef this Oligochete. Lxceptionally large specimens from the Spree were as much as 30 centimetres long, and had 450 segments. The clitellum, which has been overlooked by all writers except Dr. Benham, is not distinctly marked off, but is merely a slight swelling; its colour, like- wise, differs but little from that of the rest of the body, and it is only by its histological structure that it can be recognized. This worm has, in Berlin, as yet only been found in the Tegeler-See and in the Spree, where it lives on mud rich in organic substances. The author was able to keep specimens alive for some months in a glass basin, but they never became sexually mature; as they live, naturally, at a depth of from 8 to 10 feet, the difference in the pressure may be the cause of this. In Berlin the worm is sexually mature in June and July. The cocoons are chitinous, and about 5 centimetres long ; they exhibit a slight indication of a transverse marking, which is probably the expression of the several segments of which the cocoon is formed. The cuticle is like that of Lumbricus, but much thinner; there is no longitudinal or circular arrangement of the fibres, but an oblique one only ; the mechanical disadvantage of circular fibres to the contraction of the longitudinal muscles is obvious. The whole of the hypodermis, especially in the hinder region, is traversed by closely set, fine, capillary vessels which aid in respiration. Between the cylindrical there are here and there filamentar cells, with a swelling in the middle, which corresponds to the position of the nucleus. Unicellular glands are not nearly so numerous as in Lumbricus. 'The hypodermis of the cephalic lobes differs somewhat from that of the rest of the body; it consists of extremely delicate cylindrical cells, which are twice as long as those of the hypodermis of other parts of the body. A number of the cells of the hypodermis of the cephalic lobes and of the first segment are specially differentiated, and form groups of goblet-shaped cells, which appear to have a gustatory function. The circular muscles consist of flattened fibres which, in transverse section, do not exhibit any lumen; with high magnifying powers, however, a darkish line may be seen in the middle, and this indicates the lumen of the compressed tubular fibre. There are scattered nuclei, which belong to the intermuscular connective substance between the muscles. The arrangement of the longitudinal muscles of Criodrilus differs somewhat from that of the Lumbricide. Rosa has distinguished a ventral, four lateral, and two dorsal muscular bands. Dr. Collin, however, does not find any break in the median dorsal line, but only a thinning of the layer. Into the septa which separate the bundles of muscular fibres there are inserted transverse muscles, which extend to the enteric tract, and the chief longitudinal vessels. The bundles of the Lumbricide consist of two regularly arranged rows of muscular lamelle, which are grouped around the central lamella, but in Criodrilus they consist of a number of muscular lamelle which are irregularly scattered in the space between two neighbouring central lamellez. ‘The separate muscular fibres can be easily isolated by potash. * Zeitschr. f. Wiss. Zool., xlvi. (1888) pp. 471-96 (1 pl.). 734 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO The lining of the peritoneum is a thin layer of large very flat cells, of which, in section, one can generally distinguish only the nuclei, which are placed at some distance from one another. The celom is only incompletely separated into segments by dissepiments, as the cavities, especially around the ventral medulla, are in communication with one another. The dorsal mesentery of Criodrilus appears to be aborted. The surface of the intestine and of the dorsal vessel is invested by a layer of much modified peritoneum—the chloragogue-glands. These are pyriform or saccular cells, with brown, coarsely granular contents, which, as a rule, hide the nucleus. The muscles of the dissepiments and of the ccelom extend in very various directions. On the whole, the author confirms the description given by Vejdovsky of the structure and arrangement of the nervous system, but he was not able to detect the well-developed layer of cells which that author describes as lying on the ventral half of the ventral medulla; he finds, indeed, that the ganglionic cells are arranged in four rows; the whole of the median part of the cord is occupied by fibrous substance in which tracts, which follow various directions, can be made out. The walls of the large neural canals appear to have double contours. In the hinder part of the body there are two, but in the median part three canals, so that Vejdovsky’s figure represents a section of the hinder part of the body. The median canal is at first of the same size as the two lateral, but in the median and anterior part of the body it has a considerably greater diameter. In some of his sections the author was astonished to find a fourth canal underlying the median third, with which at one point it was observed to become connected. Around the tip of the tail there are groups of hairs, which are much longer than the sete of the gustatory knobs. As it was often observed that worms which had extended the caudal portion for the purpose of breathing were very sensitive to sudden movements of the water, it may be supposed that these hairs are special tactile organs for the perception of movements of the water. Like the Lumbricide, but unlike the Limicole, Criodrilus has a longitudinal subneural, as well as a dorsal and ventral vessel. In segments seven to eleven the lateral vessels take on the function of a heart. In the dorsal vessel there are valves, which are arranged in a segmental manner; the author does not agree with Kuppfer in re- garding them as blood-forming organs, but as true valves which, on the contraction of the vessels, shut off two adjoining chambers from one another, and prevent the return of the blood. In addition to the super- ficial capillaries at the hinder end of the body, it was observed that there is a large collection of capillaries in the hypodermis of the cephalic region, by means of which a good supply of oxygen is obtained for the brain. Segmental organs are present in the generative segments, and this points to close relations between Criodrilus and the Lumbricide. The pharyngeal mass, which can be protruded, is provided with three strong groups of retractor muscles, but with only one protractor. The author agrees with Rosa and Benham in asserting the presence of a typhlosole, which was stated by Vejdoysky to be absent. In most points he agrees with the descriptions of the generative organs which have been recently given by Rosa, Oerley, and Benham. In a few cases, but then in large number, the ccelom, and especially ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 735 the genital segments, was found to contain encysted Gregarines in the pseudo-navicella-stage, which resembled the Monocystis of Lumbricus. Dr. Collin agrees with Rosa in believing that Criodrilus has close systematic affinities to the Lumbricide. Rosa’s views are supported by Benham’s discovery of the clitellum. Formation of Embryonic Layers and Celom of a Limicolous Oligochete.*—M. L. Roule has investigated the earlier stages in the development of Enchytreoides Marioni (sp. n.). The nutrient yolk, though abundant, is distributed uniformly through the egg, and the first two blastomeres are, consequently, almost equal. Afterwards segmenta- tion is very irregular, but the germinal does not separate from the nutrient yolk and develope much more rapidly. In the morula-stage the outer cells form the ectoblast, and the inner the meso-endoblast ; of the latter the central cells will give rise to the endoblast. There is no definite blastoccel. At the end of the morula-stage a cavity, which is at first irregular, appears in its centre; this is the first indication of the digestive cavity ; the cells which surround it become cylindrical. As the digestive cavity increases in size spaces appear in the mass of mesoblastic elements ; these spaces fuse with one another, and there is thus formed a cavity which divides the mesoblast into two layers, and which will become the ceelom. At no period was it observed to communicate with the enteric cavity. As the embryo grows the ccelom increases in size; the inner- most cells of the parietal layer of mesoblast proliferate, and some become free in the cavity, where they produce the formed elements of ccelom ; others remain in their places and advance towards the visceral mesoblast, with which they fuse; in this way the septa which separate the segments are produced. Others of the cells of the parietal layer of the mesoblast elongate, secrete a contractile substance, which accumulates round the protoplasm which surrounds the nucleus, or become smooth muscular fibres. This mesenchymatous origin of the muscular fibres is comparable to what happens among the Mollusca; it and the absence of initial mesoblast-cells are facts which appear to be explicable by the abundance of nutrient yolk, and they must be set against the existence of initial mesoblast-cells in most chetopod Annelids, and the epithelial origin of the muscular tissue of the adult in the Archi-annelids. It is clear from these considerations that the more or less large quantity of yolk has an influence on the mode of development of the germinal layers and of the tissues, and that consequently we cannot base the embryo-genetic relations of animals solely on their histogenetic characters. Nephridia of Lanice conchilega.t—Mr. J. T. Cunningham gives an interesting account of the excretory system of Lanice conchilega Malmgren. It consists of eleven nephridia, three rudimentary, in somites 3-5; four perfect, in somites 6-9; and four imperfect, in somites 10-13. The eight posterior nephridia communicate with each other by means of a longitudinal tube formed by the fusion of their distal parts. “This,” Mr. Cunningham concludes, “is the first case in which such a longitudinal coalescence of nephridia has been discovered, and its morphological similarity to vertebrates is obvious.” * Comptes Rendus, cvi. (1888) pp. 1811-13. + Proc. R. Sos. Edin., xiv. (1887) p. 2388. 736 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO New Enchytreide.*—Dr. W. Michaelsen continues his researches on Enchytreide. He first describes the new genus Sterculus. The bristles are S-shaped ; there is no head-pore; the dorsal vessel springs from the girdle segment and is associated with a heart-body ; the blood is colourless; there are no salivary glands, the gut is adapted for fluid or semi-fluid nutriment, and is blind; the vasa deferentia are long. S. niveus n. sp. is described in detail, also Pachydrilus sphagnetorum Vejdowsky, var. nov. glandulosus, Mesenchytreeus setosus n. sp. B. Nemathelminthes. Fertilization of Ascaris.;—Dr. N. Kultschitzky reports in more detail the results of his investigation of the processes of fertilization in Ascaris megalocephala. The importance of the subject justifies a fuller summary than was possible from the preliminary communication. He emphasizes the deceptiveness of using different optical appliances in the observation of these fine details, and rightly insists on the necessity of investigators noting in their researches what objectives, apertures, &e., they have used. The best fixing medium is an equal mixture of alcohol and acetic acid. Acetic ether was also utilized. For studying polar globules and pronuclei fresh material from living animals is essential. For segmentation the dead worm, not later than 3-4 hours after death, must be kept for some hours, or for a stage beyond four for 2-3 days, in damp warmth of 35-38° C. There are several advantages in inclosing in balsam instead of the usual glycerin. The polar globule formation is accomplished after the manner of ordinary karyokinesis. By giving off minute amceboid processes, the protoplasm of the sperm is gradually reduced during the formation of the polar globules. Nor is the entire chromatin of the sperm nucleus utilized in the formation of the male pronucleus. When the second polar globule is extruded, the sperm nucleus has always a distinctly reticular structure. As it is at this stage only rarely quite surrounded by its protoplasm, it is partially in direct contact with the protoplasm of the ovum. In the formation of pronuclei, there is no mixture of male and female chromatin. Both pronuclei arise quite independently of one another. Each consists of a tolerably firm shining achromatic sheath, of a chromatin substance lying apparently in the peripheral portions of the pronucleus, and forming there a thick network with a number of nodes, of an achromatic substance, and of nucleoli which are usually peripheral. The two pronuclei are quite homologous, they originate in a manner sui generis. The number of pronuclei was sufficiently noted in the previous summary. Lach pronucleus begins its karyokinetic changes independently. The coil stage, the mother aster, the metakinesis, the dyaster stage, the daughter coils, and the resting stage are described in detail. The attractive spheres of van Beneden were often observed. ‘They belong to the protoplasm of the egg and represent the first sign of the division of the cell. Kultschitzky calls them “ Richtungssonnen,” and is convinced that they belong entirely to the protoplasm. * Arch. f. Mikr. Anat., xxxi. (1888) pp. 483-98 (1 pl.). ~ Ibid., pp, 567-93 (2 pls.). ~ See this Journal, ante, p. 583. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 737 Finally, he discusses the various theories of the ultimate nature of fertilization. The essential fact is the process by which the sperm- nucleus becomes modified into an inseparable portion—a nucleus—of the ovum, ‘The act is finished with the establishment of the male pro- nucleus, the rest is developmental. The punctum saliens is the modifica- tion of the nucleus of the sperm-cell into a nucleus of the ovum, and not in a replacement of extruded portions of the germinal vesicle by the male pronucleus. No fusion of pronuclei was observed. Structure and Position of Gordiacew.*—Dr. L. Camerano discusses the structure of adult-free-living species of Gordius, gives an anatomical diagnosis of the genus, and debates the question of their systematic position. Villot regards them as an order of Nemathelminthes, Vejdowsky places them as an independent order of “ Nematomorpha,” and considers them as degenerate Annulata. The author maintains their close affinity with Nematoda, connecting them with Acanthocephala, Kinorhyncha, and further back with the Protoannelids. Structure and Development of Heterodera Schachtiit—Dr. A. Strubell has investigated the structure and development of this nematode parasite of the turnip. He has no doubt that during its life-history this creature not only passes through a metamorphosis, but through one which is more complicated than that of other round-worms, and which is of a very extraordinary character. The first larva, which has externally the appearance of a nematode, is capable of movement, and lives freely in earth, is succeeded by a second form in which the sexual characters are also not marked, but which is sessile and parasitic, and of a plump appearance. ‘The female generative forms never become developed beyond this stage ; they remain all through their lives in a larval con- dition. In the male, on the other hand, the second larval stage appears to be followed by a period of quiescence, after which the mobile sexual form appears, with a partial fresh formation of organs, and a further development of the rudiments of the generative apparatus. Notwithstanding the observations of Leuckart, which have demon- strated the unexpected variability of the nematode type, and have proved the existence of heterogeny, no form has yet been described whose history can be compared to that of Heterodera. The closest resemblance is perhaps established by Hchinorhynchus, for in them, as in Heterodera, - there is a pupal stage, during which the old larval skin incloses the new worm like a cyst. But Hchinorhynchus has no second larval form, the embryo, after a brief period of wandering, passing into the quiescent stage. ‘lhe only parallel to the otherwise isolated history of Heterodera is to be found in some Insects, and particularly among the Coccide, which also lead a phytophagous life. In them there are two larval stages with similar biological characteristics; the first larval form is freely mobile and of an elongated form, while the second is incapable of movement and is plumper. In the Coccide the females likewise retain their larval characters, remaining sessile at one spot, and forming a brood-capsule which protects the young. The male has a somewhat similar history to the male of Heterodera, for, after a pupal stage, in which no nourishment is taken, an agile creature is produced, provided with all the attributes necessary to copulation. * Arch. Ital. Biol., ix. (1888) pp. 243-8. + Leuckart and Chun’s Bibliotheca Zoologica, ii. (1888) 52 pp., 2 pls. 738 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO The author is careful to point out that, in this comparison, he is speaking only of resemblances, and does not suppose that there are close relations between the Nematode and the Insect. The parallelism in life-history is due to similarity in external conditions. Both forms lead a parasitic life, and both have adapted themselves to its require- ments. The author deals in detail with the structure of the male, of the female, with the embryonic and the post-embryonic development. All the forms, except the pregnant females, are of microscopic size; the free-living larve were found in sufficient numbers in the earth, sticking to the root-fibres. The best media for investigations were found to be a 1/2 per cent. salt solution, or egg-albumen ; to stop their movements the animals were slightly warmed over a spirit-lamp, and were thus extended though not killed. Integument of Heterodera Schachtii.*—M. J. Chatin has investi- gated the structure of the integument of Heterodera Schachtii, and the modifications which it undergoes in fertilized females. Ina young adult female the integument is formed of a cuticle with a hypodermis, which invests the musculature of the body. The superficial layer of the cuticle is striated, and the deeper layer is fibrillar. The former is transparent, refractive, and capable of resisting most chemical agents, and above all alkalies; its elegant circular strie are due to the presence of ringlike elevations, which are separated by fine grooves. The hypodermis is formed of a granular layer in which there are well-marked but not very numerous nuclei. Immediately below it there are thick layers of muscular tissue. The first change which is observed as a result of fertilization is a diminution in the number of the nuclei of the hypodermis, which at the same time becomes clearer. As the female increases rapidly in size, the muscular layers become more and more delicate, and undergo a sort of delamination. Later on their retrograde change is marked by others which obtain in the hypodermis. In that layer the number of nuclei increases remarkably, and with the proliferation which obtains there is also to be noted the appearance of viscous and refractive droplets, which collect at the surface of the cuticle. This exudation does not escape by cutaneous pores, of which there seem to be none, but by local ruptures of the cuticle, which yields to the enormous growth of the body distended by ova. ‘ The muscular layers disappear, sometimes a vestige being left in the form of a delicate band attached to the hypodermis, which becomes very delicate, and tends to fuse with the cuticle. If the ova are set at liberty directly, the cuticle breaks at several points and follows the other tissues of the integument in their fate of disintegration. The facts just detailed show that those histologists have erred who have refused to distinguish sharply the integument from the musculature, Some of the changes that are undergone recall the phenomena of histo- lysis in other Invertebrates. The brown cyst which is sometimes formed for the eggs, being constituted by the exsudation from the hypodermis, is neither a new pathological form nor an induration of the integument of the worm. Asa measure of prophylaxis it would be well to look for mothers with disorganized integuments. * Comptes Rendus, cvii. (1888) pp. 139-41. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 739 Echinorhynchus parasitic in Man, and whose intermediary host is a Blaps.*—Prof. B. Grassi and Sig. 8. Calandruccio find in Catania that not only is the Echinorhynchus gigas widely disseminated (being found in 40 per cent. of the pigs slaughtered), but also another Hchino- rhynchus in the small intestine of the dog, and a third in the intestine of Mus decumanus and of Myoxus quercinus. Of this last, which is identical with Echinorhynchus moniliformis Bremser, and has also been found in Arvicola arvalis and Cricetus vulgaris, the most important characteristics are given. Greatest length of the female, 7-8 cm. ; of the male, 4-44 cm. Diameter 1-13 mm. The anterior extremity is somewhat tapered, and the body is marked by a series of constrictions, so that it seems divided into segments, except near the tail, which in the female is smooth for the last two centimetres, and for the last one in the male. Length of proboscis is 425-450 p, and its breadth, 176-190 ». The hooklets are arranged in the proboscis in a quincuncial manner (not always evident), and form fifteen transverse and fourteen longitudinal rows. Each hooklet is much curved. The lemnisci are more than 1 em. long, and 169 » thick. In the vascular apparatus are many annular vessels, which encircle the body. The bell-like bursa of the male is visible to the naked eye. The eggs are elliptical, 85 « long and 45 »% broad. They have three inyest- ments: a thin outer yellowish shell ; a middle thick, colourless, and homo- geneous one, which is without the hollowings characteristic of Hchino- rhynchus gigas; the innermost is likewise colourless, pretty thick, and extensile. In its posterior two-thirds the embryo shows a transverse striation, and is beset with points, which towards the anterior end increase in size and become hooklets, of which at least four are distinguished by their greater size (17 ;). The Echinorhynchus. just described inhabits the small intestine, and principally its upper two-thirds. The common beetle Blaps mucronata Lat., is the intermediate host. 'The authors have thrice found more than a hundred young of Echinorhynchus moniliformis in a single Blaps. The young Hchinorhynchi, easily visible to the naked eye, were encysted, had the same characteristics as in the adults, and were oval in shape, their long axis being about 1100 » with the investment, and without it 600 p. Some of these young Hchinorhynchi were given toa young rat, and others were swallowed by one of the authors, Dr. Calandruccio. This was done on December 26th, 1887, and on January 10th, 1888, numerous Echino- rhynchi, 1 em. long, were found in the intestine of the rat. On January 15th Sig. Calandruccio was seized with severe pains in the abdomen, accom- panied by occasional diarrhoea, buzzing in the ears, malaise, and drowsi- ness. On February 1st a few Echinorhynchi were found in the feces, and by February 13th the symptoms became so severe that he was forced to take Hair. Fil. liq. This was followed by the expulsion of 53 Echino- rhynchi, chiefly female, and in a few days he became quite well, and no more ova were found in the feces. From this it will be seen that a parasite of Mus decumanus, Echinorhynchus moniliformis, is capable of developing in man. Ankylostomum duodenale.j|—Herr O. Seifert continues his study of Ankylostomum duodenale, the occurrence of which as a human parasite makes it an important subject of research practically. After giving an * Centralbl. f. Bakteriol. u. Parasitenk., iii. (1888) pp. 521-5 (7 figs.). + Verh. Phys, Med. Gesell. Wirzburg, xxi, (1888) pp. 283-94 (1 pl.). 740 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO account of its general occurrence, the author notes its special prevalence in the tile-works near Cologne, and points out how its local distribution shows that the encapsuled larvee passed from the clay, by way of un- washed hands and the like, to their human hosts. Several obvious hygienic precautions are suggested, the symptoms of the disease are described at length, and the mode of treatment noted. The observations of Leichtenstern as to eggs and larve are corrobo- rated. The mature animals are more abundant in jejunum and upper regions of the ileum than in the duodenum. They attach themselves to the mucous membrane, and suck blood. The number present varies from 15-8000. The differences between the sexes and some of the prominent features are then described. The average length of life is five years. Gape Worm of Fowls.*—Lord Walsingham calls attention to Dr. H. D. Walker’s recent paper t on the Gape Worm of Fowls (Syngamus trachealis). The American naturalist claims to have discovered that the common earthworm (Lumbricus terrestris) is the intermediate host of this parasite, and suggests the use of common salt on infected poultry runs with the object of destroying the hosts. This theory is strongly sup- ported by the experience of game preservers; those who have fed birds with food carefully moistened with pure spring water only have had good results, though they have not always escaped from attacks of the disease. Dry summers are always much more favourable for rearing pheasants and partridges than those in which there is much rain; as everybody knows, earthworms do not come to the surface so long as the ground is dry and hard, but when it becomes sufficiently moistened they reach the surface, and all species of birds of which they form a natural or favourite food are eager to seek and devour them. Notwithstanding the incredulity with which Dr. Walker’s results have been received in America, Lord Walsingham thinks that men with field experience will be inclined to endorse them. 3. Incertz# Sedis. Asplanchnide.t{—M. J. de Guerne takes the opportunity of having to describe a new species (A. Imhofi) of Asplanchna from Lagoa Grande, to write a monographic note on this family of Rotifers. The other new species described are A. Herricki, A. Krameri, and A. Girodi. A key- table of the known species is given, the characters of the masticatory apparatus being taken as one of the most important aids in distinction. A new genus (Asplanchnopus) is proposed for Brachionus multiceps of Schrank. The author is of opinion that the genus Ascomorpha should not be placed with the Asplanchnide; it has only been so assigned because of the absence of an anal aperture, but this is a character due to adaptation to a peculiar mode of life, and if generally adopted, would lead to a very incorrect idea of the relationship of Rotifers. In Asco- morpha the mastax is feeble, and the form and appendages of the stomach are very peculiar ; for the present it had better be left among the forms incerte sedis. The synonymy of the three known species is given, * Nature, xxxviii. (1888) pp. 324-5. t Bull. Buffalo Soc. Nat. Sci., v. (1886-7) No. 2. ~ Ann, and Mag. Nat. Hist., ii. (1888) pp. 28-40. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 741 Echinedermata. Nervous System of Echinodermata.*—Dr. C. F. Jickeli deals, in his second preliminary communication, with the nervous system of Asterids. He is able to confirm the chief results of preceding inquirers. The ambulacral nervous system, in the region of the mouth, exhibits a distinction of the parts of the masses of nerve-fibres; the ventral longi- tudinal fibrous masses of the radial ambulacral nerves pass into the circular fibres of the oral ring. If a transverse section be made through an ambulacrum of Asterias rubens close to the mouth, fibres are found in the dorsal part which run parallel to the direction of the section, while ventrally there is a rounded body made up of fibrils which have been cut across. In Stichaster roseus, a separation of a ventral from a dorsal mass may be made out throughout the whole length of the ambulacral nerve. The subepithelial plexus is much more highly differentiated than has been hitherto supposed. Lange’s nerve is seen in cross sections to be a paired thickening of the ventral wall of the perihemal canal. Careful histological investigation shows that it is made up of a delicate flattened epithelium which invests the whole of the perihemal cavity, of large ganglionic cells lying directly beneath this, and having their processes woven into a fibrous layer, in which separate ganglionic cells are imbedded, and of a lamella of connective tissue which forms a parti- tion between the ambulacral nerves and those of Lange. The latter accompany the ambulacral nerves along the groove, and take part in the formation of the oral ring. Between two successive ambulacral plates the nerve extends, with a continuation of the perihemal canal, as far as the adambulacral plate, where it forms a swelling; from this a cord may be traced into the fibrous mass of the muscle between the ambulacral and adambulacral plate; in some cases, e.g. Luidia Sarsi, it may be traced on to the neighbouring parts of the body-wall. Dr. Jickeli announces the discovery of a fourth system of nerves, which forms a layer of fine fibrils intermixed with stellate cells at the base of the epithelium of the digestive tract. This was best seen near the anus of Astropecten andromeda. Ceelenterata. System of Siphonophora.}—Prof. E. Haeckel proposes a new theory to explain the organization of the Siphonophora. ‘This he calls the medusome theory. (1) The primary larva which first arises from the gastrula of the Siphonophora is always a simple medusa-person. It may be more or less modified cenogenetically, but it has always great palingenetic significance. (2) This primary larva appears in two essentially different forms which may be called the Disconula and the Siphonula ; according to the presence of one or the other we haye the two subclasses of Disconanthe and Siphonanthe. (3) The Disconanthe, which contain the single order of Chondro- phoride or Porpitariz, are developed from the regular and octoradial * Zool. Anzeig., xi. (1888) pp. 339-42. + Jenaische Zeitschr. f. Naturwiss., xxii. (1888) pp. 1-46. 1888. 38 742 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO medusa-larva Disconula ; it has a marginal circlet of tentacles throughout life, and produces the persons of the colony by budding from the subumbrella. (4) The Siphonanthe, which include the Calycophoride, Physo- phoridw, Pheumatophoride, and Aurophoride, have as a primary larva a bilateral medusa, which is distinguished by a ventral umbrella-cleft, and the possession of a single tentacle (Siphonula)., The persons of the colony are produced by unilateral budding from the gastric wall of the manubrium. (5) The primary larva of the Disconanthe is to be regarded as the ontogenetic repet tion of a common and archaic octoradial stem-form (Archimeda), and its phylogenetic origin is probably t» be sought for among the Trachomeduse (Trachynemidx, Pectyllide). (6) The primary larva of the Siphonanthe is to be regarded as the ontogenetic repetition of a common archaic bilateral stem-form (Protomeda), whose origin is probably to be sought for among the Anthomedusze (Codonidz, Euphyride). (7) All the parts which arise by budding from the primary larva of the Siphonophora are either medusiform persons or special organs thereof. (8) All the organs which primitively belong to a medusa-person may be comprehended under the medusoma, and that whether they arise from a common basis on the trunk, or separately in various places, in con- sequence of cenogenetic migration or dislocation, The multiplication of separate equivalent parts (such as nectophores or bracts) are not to be regarded as multiplication of persons or medusome, but merely of organs. *9) Although the medusome arises under two distinct forms these cannot be sharply separated from one another; in the palingenetic medusomes the chief organs remain more or less in their primitive con- nection (as, for example, in the gonophore of Hudoaia); in the cenogenetic medusomes the primary organs are more or less dislocated, as in the sterile medusa of Hudowia. (10) The lateral budding of the secondary medusomes (appendages) on the trunk may be solitary or in groups; the name of cormidia is given to the groups which are composed of several medusomes. (11) The cormidia are primitively simple segmental repetitions of a medusome-group in metameric succession, which are separated by free internodes (cormidia ordinata) as in the Hudoxiz of the Calyco- phorida, &e. (12) By the breaking up of such primitive cormidia there arose those centralized cormi in which the persons bud at various points of the trunk ; in this way the several organs become separated from one another (cormidia dissoluta), e.g. Agalmopsis, Polyphyes. (13) The retrograde development of the several medusomes and their dislocated organs is of very great significance in the development of the Siphonophorous colonies, and is greater proportionately to the centraliza- tion of the cormus. The several points here noted are then treated separately and in more detail. Notes then follow on monogastric and polygastrice cor- midia, on the stem or trunk, the nectosoma (or swimming body), and the siphosoma (or nutrient body), the nectophores or swimming bells, the pneumatophore or swim-bladder, and the aurophore or air-bell; 9 ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 743 there may be one or more siphons. The palpones or tactile organs, the cystones or anal bladders, the seizing organs and touch-filaments, the bracts or covering pieces, the gonostyle or generative stalk, and the gonephores or generative persons are all separately dealt with. The Disconanthe have one order, the Disconecte, in which the family Discalide is new. Among the Siphonanthe we have the Calyconecte as the equivalent of the Calycophoride, the Physonectx for the Physo- phoridz, and the new order of Auronecte, and the Cystonecte, which are equivalent to the Pneumatophoride. Life-history of Epenthesis McCradyi, n. sp.*—Prof. W. K. Brooks describes the life-history of an interesting Hydro-medusa (Hpenthesis MecCradyi n. sp.), remarkable and indeed unique in the possession of “buds which, like ege-embryos, recapitulate, in their own ontogenetic development, larval stages which their parent has already passed.” The medusa carries on its reproductive organs campanularian hydroid blastostyles, inclosed in chitinous gonangia. These do not multiply by budding or form hydroid corms, but produce meduse by budding. The ectoderm of the blastostyle is produced by ordinary gemmation, and is directly continuous with the ectoderm of the medusa. The endoderm has no direct connection with that of the medusa, though the germ cells from which it arose were probably in remote origin endo- dermic. The germ cells form the endoderm of the blastostyle by a process of specialization like that which Metschnikoff has described in Cunina as sporogenesis. The blastostyles and their medusa buds have no direct nutritive communication with the medusa. They are parasites upon the tissue of its reproductive organ. The Eucopide, to which Epenthesis belongs, is not among the families in which proliferous meduse are common. Haeckel doubts the occurrence of budding in the family. The new species under discussion, however, certainly produces buds, and it is very probable that another species, E. folliata, multiplies asexually by fission. Brooks notes that his drawings (made in 1881) of ZH. folliata in all essential particulars duplicate those recently published by Lang in regard to his Gastroblasta raffaelii. “It is not improbable that Gastroblasta raffaelii is also an Epenthesis which in addition to this power (of multiplying by fission) is also able to build up, by incomplete fission, polygastric meduse of con- siderable size.” Just as Lang pointed out how his species illustrated the way in which a form like Porpita may have been evolved from a polygastric medusa, so Brooks notes that Hpenthesis McCradyi, with its pendant blastostyles hanging from a swim-bell and carrying medusa buds, stands in a somewhat similar relation to the ordinary Siphono- phores. Arachnactis and Cerianthus.t—Prof. C. Vogt has no doubt that Mr. Alexander Agassiz is wrong in thinking Arachnactis to be a larval form of Edwardsia. It is an Anthozoon which swims about during the whole of its life, exhibits in its organization a well-marked bilateral symmetry, and is closely allied to the Cerianthide. Cerianthus is an animal which is strictly bilateral in its symmetry, for its body is divided * Stud, Biol. Lab. Johns Hopkins Uniy., iv. (1888) pp. 147-62 (3 pls.). + Arch. de Biol., viii. (1888) pp. 1-41 (8 pls.). SoBe 744 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO into two identical halves by a plane which passes through the axis of the body, the buccal cleft, the unpaired tentacles and ventral chamber, the groove between the two continuous septa, and the dorsal chamber of multiplication. This symmetry is due to the primitive formation of the unpaired ventral chamber and the two (buccal and marginal) unpaired tentacles; it is continued, during life, by the formation of new septa and cavities, with their external or tentacular and internal or mesen- teric appendages, from a single median point whence the products pass towards either side. Though the ventral chamber undergoes no change, the dorsal one is repeatedly subdivided owing to the forma- tion of new internal septa. Arachnactis and Cerianthus appear to be the only living Anthozoa which preserve this bilateral symmetry intact during the whole of their lives. In others this symmetry is affected by the growth of new septa from other points of the periphery of the body. The Cerianthide may be defined as free Actinie with persistent bilateral symmetry, a terminal pore leading into the general cavity, a large buccal disc, surrounded by two circlets of tentacles, marginal and buccal, which are separated by a wide smooth peristome. The tentacles are arranged by pairs in such a way that a tentacle of each kind opens in each lateral chamber. The septa do not reach to the floor of the general cavity, with the exception of the two which correspond to the unpaired tentacle, and these form an internal groove which leads to the pore. The genus Arachnactis (Sars) has a rounded body, a few tentacles, and short similar septa; the animals are pelagic and swim by means of vibratile cilia. Cerianthus (Delle Chiaje) has an elongated body which is surrounded by a sheath formed by mucus and nematocysts; the tentacles are numerous; the short septa are either sterile or repro- ductive. The animals live in tubes at the bottom of the water. Bathy- anthus of Moseley is regarded as a doubtful genus. The observations of Lacaze-Duthiers have shown that bilateral symmetry is characteristic of larval Anthozoa, and is a point of great importance. Such forms as retain it throughout life may be justly regarded as presenting a primitive arrangement. Haime drew attention to the resemblance between Cerianthus and the rugose corals; these paleozoic forms reached their highest development in the Silurian period. Another point to be noted is that the development of Arach- nactis is continuous, and that there is no intermediate secondary stage. There is a certain primitive conformation common to the Anthozoa and the Acalephe among the Meduse, whence Arachnactis goes off in one and Pelagia and its allies in another direction. But they always remain free, and produce ova and larve in that condition. In most Anthozoa and Acalephe there is a more or less well-marked period of fixation, due to different causes, and characterized by the asexual production of buds. Now, no one will deny that the primitive and ancestral form of the Anthozoa was an animal swimming freely in the sea, provided with an invaginated buccal tube which is retained in that position by vertical septa developed symmetrically on either side of the buccal cleft; this bilaterally symmetrical form produced eggs and not buds, and the young grew up directly into the likeness of their parent. Nor will any one deny that the fixed state is secondary and is generally characterized by asexual modes of reproduction. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 745 If an Anthozoon had produced medusoid buds it would, on the analogy of our explanation of the morphology of the Hydrozoa, be said that the fixed stage was the primitive, ancestral, and normal. At this the author stops, but it is not difficult for the reader to see the significance of these considerations. New Type of Anthozoa.—M. C. Viguier describes,* under the name of Fascicularia radicans, a new type of Anthozoa which was collected in the port of Algiers. The single specimen was a female colony which formed a fixed network of anastomosing stolons from 3 to 6 mm. wide. The polyps which rose from these had, when completely retracted, very much the appearance of those of Paralcyonium ; when expanded, how- ever, they were seen to be very different. The polyps of the new form are entirely distinct from one another, and their separation is very strongly marked by white lines, formed by the spicules which lie at the top of the septa between the polyps. The common wall which surrounds the cluster of polyps is supported by a palisade of long white spicules, which are set vertically. The free portion of the polyps may expand to twice the height of the basal column or to a length of from 16 to 18 mm. The number of polyps in one cluster is uot more than ten or twelve. The author proposes to form for the reception of this new type a sub- family of Fascicularine, intermediate between the Cornularine and the Alcyonine. M. Lacaze-Duthierst thinks this new type is his Paralcyonium edwardsit. ‘Porcupine’ Pennatulida.t—Prof. A. Milnes Marshall and Mr. G. H. Fowler report on the Pennatulida dredged by H.MLS. ‘ Porcupine.’ The collection included seven genera and nine species, of which one genus (Deutocaulon), and one variety (candida) of Pennatula phosphorea are new to science. Kélliker’s classification is followed, though not regarded as satisfactory, e.g. in the wide separation of Protocaulide and Virgu- laride. Descriptive notes are given in regard to Piteroides griseum KOU. ; Pennatula phosphorea L. var. aculeata Koll.; var. lancifolia, sub-var. variegata K6ll.; var. candida, n.; P. rubra Ell.; Svava glacialis, var. alba Kor. and Dan.; Funiculina quadrangularis Pall.; Kophobelemnon stelliferum Mill.; Deutocaulon n. g., D. hystricis n. sp.; Protoptilum carpenteri. Deutocaulon is intermediate between the simple Protocaulon and such forms as Oladiscus and Svava. It is defined as—Pennatulida ex familia Protocaulidarum, quorum autozooidea, singulatim orta, penne laterales fiunt; calyx nullus; axis cylindratus. Porifera. Natural History of Siliceous Sponges.§—Prof. F. C. Noll, in the first of his essays on the natural history of siliceous sponges, deals with Desmacidon Bosci Noll from the coast of Norway, and makes some ob- servations on Craniella carnosa and Spongilla fragilis. ‘The new species is about 6 cm. high, and from 5 to 6 mm. thick; it is of a greyish- yellow colour, and becomes whitish-grey in spirit. There are a large * Comptes Rendus, evii. (1888) pp. 186-7. + Loe. cit., p. 215, t Trans. R. Soc. Edin., xxxiii. (1888) pp. 453-64 (2 pls.). § Abh. Senckenberg. Nat. Gesell., xv. (1888) pp. 1-58 (8 pls.). 746 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO number of oscula, which are found on both sides of the sponge, and which vary a good deal in size. No afferent pores could be detected on the surface of the sponge. There are various forms of siliceous structures, into the detailed account of which the author enters very fully. He discusses also their mode of growth, and comes to the conclusion that the skeletal spicules probably grow by apposition, while those of the cortex are not essentially increased in size by such process. Prof, Noll was unable to make out the ectoderm, but he ascribes this to the mode of preparation, as he does not accept the doctrine of Gétte that the ectoderm of all sponges is lost during metamorphosis, and he brings evidence afforded by his own observations on Spongilla fluviatilis as opposing it. The surface of the Desmacidon is thin and transparent ; it generally lies close to the parenchyma, and cannot be easily torn off in large shreds. Sometimes the layer appears to be merely formed of a homogeneous ground substance with a few cell-nuclei, but in other cases there are cellular elements, some contractile fibres, or non-nucleated fibres. Where the clear ground-substance is predominant, numerous cell-nuclei of various sizes are imbedded in it; these do not colour strongly, and never lie so close to one another that their boundaries touch. The non-nucleated fibres generally lie close to one another and form bands which run in various directions. The contractile fibres appear to be the elongated terminal poles of long spindle-shaped cells ; the nuclei of these cells are oval, and the cell-contents finely granular. One would be inclined to speak of these as muscle-cells, if they could be shown to be provided with nerves. In any case it is possible that they have some reflex activity, and changes in the form of the surface of the sponge may be often observed. Around the osculum there is a circlet of the so-called muscle-cells, and by their elongation the orifice could certainly be narrowed. The contractile fibres are wanting in the neighbourhood of the smaller openings which serve as incurrent orifices. The parenchyma is very well developed, and forms the chief part of the sponge; in it the cellular elements are predominant, and the ground- substance is considerably reduced; compared with those of Spongilla, the cells are proportionately small, but they vary considerably in form and size. Non-nucleated protoplasmic corpuscles make up the chief part of the parenchyma; between them a number of free ccell-nuclei are to be seen in the parenchyma, and these are all spherical in form. Complete cells with protoplasm and nucleus, but in all cases without a membrane, are not so numerous as the bodies just mentioned. Occasionally there are two nuclei in one cell; wandering cells are also to be seen, and they may or may not have a nucleus; indeed, it might almost be thought that the nuclei and protoplasm of the cells can lead an independent life. With regard to the formation of spicules, the author concludes that definite cells are set apart for the purpose ; these silicoblasts elongate, their contents clear up, and the central filament first appears. As the delicate membrane of the body of a Rhizopod conditions the form of the calcareous shell, and as the test of the diatom is preformed by the delicate cell-membrane which serves as its basis, so we may, with Bowerbank, call the central filament a membrane formed internally by the cell. Its form depends on that of the silicoblast, and so we see the spicular mother-cells of the spicula of Spongilla elongate like the ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 747 spicules, while the amphidiscs arise in almost spherical and only laterally compressed silicoblasts. The central filament is rich in water. As to the origin of the silex we know nothing definitely. The activity of the mother-cells appears to be periodic, for it sometimes secretes spiculin, and then again silex. The cell-contents of the silicoblast are soluble and give rise to the central filament; around this silica is deposited, and so the axial cylinder is formed; layers of silica with their membrane succeed one another until the mother-cell is used up. The spongoblasts are cells which differ essentially from the silicoblasts, and in Spongilla are often remarkable for their large size; in it and Desmacidon they have the same form and position. The water, which passes by numerous pores into the sponge, first passes into the meshes of the subdermal network, whence itis distributed to numerous fine canaliculi, to pass to the flagellated chambers which are scattered throughout the whole of the parenchyma. Other canaliculi surround them and carry off the water directly to the efferent orifices. D. Bosci appears to belong to Vosmaer’s third type, for the region of collar-cells opens directly into wide canals, and then again into wider vessels, or cloacal cavities which open to the exterior. It is possible that the new sponge is bisexual, but the evidence as to the spermatozoa isincomplete. Ova are developed in great numbers and are found in all parts of the tissue; they are rapidly aud easily stained, and can also be recognized by their considerable size from the cells among which they he. The nucleus and nucleolus are well marked, but the finely granular protoplasm is not bounded by any membrane; indeed, they vary in form, and are certainly amceboid. Their further develop- ment is commenced within the sponge ; when four blastomeres are formed a follicle becomes developed, which has the form of an extremely fine membranous investment, and is found in all further stages of develop- ment observed within the sponge as a closed capsule. The author concludes with some observations on the systematic characters of the genus Desmacidon. ‘Challenger’ Hexactinellida.*—Apart from the systematic portion of Prof. F. EH. Schulze’s monograph on Hexactinellida included in the reports of the ‘ Challenger’ expedition, the results of most value are to be found in the discussion of the general structure of the soft and hard parts, and of the general system of the group. Of the ninety forms collected by the ‘ Challenger,’ fifty-nine were new, and in addition to these nine new species from other sources are described. The geographical and bathymetrical distribution of the Hexactinellida are discussed at length, and furnish valuable results. From the nature of the case, but few histo- logical results were forthcoming. Thus Schulze was unable to demon-_ strate the collars or flagella of the ciliated chambers, or the contours of the flat epithelial cells. The only chapter in regard to which serious difference of opinion can arise is of course that which deals with the phylogeny. The Hexactinellida are all derived from a common stem. From this the Hyalonematide early diverged. The other branch in- cludes the Uncinataria (Dictyonina minus Meandrospongie), an offshoot for the Huplectellide, Rossellide, and Asconematide, and the Mzandro- spongie. ( * Reports of the Voyage of H.M.S. ‘Challenger,’ Zoology, xxi. (1888) 513 pp. 105 pls.). 748 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO Fresh-water Sponges.*—Dr. A. Wicrzejski found near Lemberg in Galicia, what appeared to be a new form of fresh-water sponge, most nearly resembling Spongilla nove terre, described by Potts from Newfound- land. More accurate examination convinced him, however, that the form in question was a deformed Meyenia (Ephydatia) miilleri Lieberk., and he believes that the same is true of the Newfoundland species. The author makes a detailed comparison of the two forms, showing their close resemblance and the reasons for regarding both as abnormal varieties. He believes that the conditions affecting the abnormal development, especially of the gemmules, are environmental. The various forms of Euspongilla are briefly discussed, and aceording to Wierzejski are all referable to one species. The paper is mainly of systematic interest. New Species of Uruguaya.{—Dr. G. J. Hinde gives an account of two new species of this fresh-water sponge—U. macandrewi and U. pygmea—from Paraguay, together with notes on U. coralliodes. Dr. Hinde shows that Mr. Carter was wrong in thinking that gemmules were not developed in this genus ; in one species gemmules have not yet been found, and in another they are scarce. These facts may be correlated with the evident conditions of existence to which they are subjected ; their large size results from an uninterrupted growth of several years’ duration, so that the specimens must have lived in positions where they were not exposed to those influences of heat, drought, or cold which limit the existence of most fresh-water sponges to a single season. In other words, their conditions of existence must have approximated closely to those of marine forms. The gemmules are only found in the basal layer of the sponge, and it is probable that they are not produced after the first year. Uruguaya is probably related to Meyenia. Dr. Hinde approves of Dr. Marshall’s suggestion that fresh-water sponges are of polyphyletic origin. Protozoa. Vesicular Elements of Protoplasm in Protozoa.t—M. J. Kunstler remarks that for the last six years he has taught that the protoplasm of certain beings, especially Protozoa, is not the continuous material— sarcode—as some have declared, but that it has a special and constant structure, which, now that his view has become almost classical, he proposes to speak of as areolar and alveolar. This structure is charac- terized by an intimate mixture of denser and more fluid matter, the former forming the closed alveoli which contain the latter. In some recent observations on a Foraminifer M. Kunstler observed that, in a young stage, the protoplasm was perforated by fine vacuoles with thick walls and containing a small quantity of fluid; externally it was covered by a delicate pellicle with oblique striw. In the course of development these small cavities, in the internal region, become altered in appearance; they grow into small vesicles. At the periphery of the body the primitive appearance persists for a longer time, and there thus arises a differentiation between endo- and ectoplasm. We arrive at a stage in which we have not to do with a protoplasmic being merely * Verh. K. K. Zool.-Bot. Gesell., xxxiii. (1858) pp. 529-36 (1 pl.). + Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., ti. (1888) pp. 1-12 (1 pl.). t~ Comptes Rendus, evi. (1888) pp. 1684-6. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETO. 749 hollowed by vacuoles, but we see distinct, rounded, floating vesicles, with a dense wall and a contained liquid. As the animal grows the number of vesicles increases at the expense of the ectoplastic vacuoles, and they end by constituting by far the greater part of the mass of the body, while the importance of the ecto- plasm gradually diminishes. There may, indeed, be at last merely a more or less thick sheath formed by the ectoplasm. The vesicular elements do not only increase by the transformation of the primitive areole of the protoplasm, for they are often found elongated or con- stricted in the middle, as though they were about to divide. The degree of disappearance of the ectoplasm varies much in different creatures. In some the whole of the body is transformed, and, when there is no inter- vesicular liquid, the protoplasm is completely formed by a reticulation with polygonal alveoli; in this case all ectoplasm disappears. In other cases only a few vesicles are produced, the liquid is abundant, and the ectoplasm is more or less distinct. The author denies the existence of the plexus which has been described as being present in the ectoplasm of ciliated Infusoria, and regards it as an optical illusion. Physiology of Nutrition in Protozoa.*—Dr. M. Meissner finds that in the Rhizopods which he examined no chemical or optical change could be detected in starch-grains or oil-drops, but that in many cases a digestion of vegetable and animal albumen was observed. Many Infu- soria, if deprived of other food, convert the starch they take up into a substance (? dextrin) which stains red when treated with iodine solution, and, later on, becomes dissolved in the body. Oil, however, remains unchanged. Vegetable and animal albumens are easily dissolved by Infusoria, while albumen that has been cooked appears to undergo no change. The author remarks that in most text-books Amebe are described as “flowing around” their food; Duncan, Leidy, and Greenwood have described them as drawing in foreign particles with their hinder im- mobile parts. He has himself observed both kinds of ingestion, and the latter, which is not easy to make out, in Ameba princeps. The animal drew in its prey, which was in this particular case a Bacterium, by means of its hinder fringe-like protoplasmic processes, while the water taken in at the same time formed the ingestion-vacu le. In the anterior part of the Ameba, in which the nucleus was visible, there was no movement forwards of the protoplasm, but a very lively Brownian movement, during this process. The Rhizopoda used for observation were Ameba princeps, A. radiosa, Pelomyxa palustris, and Actinophrys sol. The Infusoria were Climaco- stomum virens, Vorticella nebulifera, and Peranema trichophorum. The first-named infusorian digested a Difflugia in about twenty-five minutes, when the completely unaltered test was found in a vacuole. The un- altered chlorophyll was generally excreted by the Infusoria, and the chitinous carapace of a Rotifer, which had served as food for a Stentor, was also seen to be extruded. Nature of Contractile Vacuole.{—Dr. C. de Bruyne is of opinion that the contractile vacuole of Protozoa has no communication with the exterior. He does not regard it as an excretory organ, but thinks it * Zeitschr. f. Wiss. Zool., xlvi. (L888) pp. 498-516 (1 pl.). + Bull, Acad. R. Sci. Belg., lvi_ (1888) pp. 718-44 (1 pl.). 750 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO probable that it has respiratory and circulatory functions, while its con- tained liquid may possibly be of a nutrient nature. This judgment is chiefly based on the fact that in no case has the author been able to observe a direct communication with the exterior. He regards it as certain that the liquid which is driven out by the vacuole does not quit the protoplasmic body, but is distributed throughout it. A confirmatory fact is to be found in the observation that in the protoplasm droplets appear which fuse to form the first sign of the contractile vacuole. As the droplets leave the vacuole they grow smaller and smaller till they are, at last, invisible. Further Observations on Multinuclear Infusoria.* — Prof. A. Gruber has made some further observations on multinuclear Infusoria. He finds that there are a considerable number of marine Infusoria, holotrichous, and, especially, hypotrichous forms, in which numerous, sometimes hundreds of nuclei are scattered in the plasma. The fact that these bodies show, when dividing, the well-known striated structure, proves that they are really nuclei. When a division is about to take place they fuse into a single mass; but this may again break up before the daughter-individuals have separated, and so in each of these there may be a large number of nuclei. It is difficult to say what this multinuclear condition means; it is possible that it is an advantage against injuries, for each separate piece would contain at least a nucleus or a paranucleus, and so be capable of regeneration ; such pieces are, also, capable of growing up into complete individuals, while non-nucleated pieces do not last long. In support of this supposition it should be noted that these multinuclear Infusoria are all very soft and changeable in form ; some also are greatly elongated, and so frequently exposed to injuries. The multinuclear fresh-water Infusoria, Loxodes rostrum, is also a fragile organism, and here too the numerous nuclei have perhaps the same significance. In Opalina ranarum the large number of nuclei is connected with the mode of reproduction which, as is well known, consists in a number of rapidly succeeding divisions, or what might be called a breaking up of the body into a number of pieces, each of which has one or more nuclei. The case of Holosticha scutellum shows us that we are not justified in concluding that a substance is absent because we cannot see it at once with the best of our optical instruments. The paranuclei are here so small, owing to repeated division, that they cannot be seen by our eyes. In Chenia teres and in Trachelocerca the nuclei themselves are so small that they only appear as fine granulations. If the author’s idea that the nucleus is the seat of the histogenetic plasma, and the paranucleus that of the idioplasma (germ-plasma) be correct, Holosticha scutellum affords us a proof that the latter, although of material nature, may be removed from our perception, in consequence of repeated divisions. This is generally the case in the metazoic cell, although at certain times of cell-life it may be visible to us. In the process of division in Holosticha the nuclear mass, which is at first single, becomes broken up into pieces, not in any chance way, but by a succession of nuclear divisions; we must suppose that the same happens to the substance of the para- nucleus, recognizing that we have to do with values which are so small that we cannot perceive them with our present means of research. What * Ber. Nat. Gesell. Freiburg i. B., iii. (1888) pp. 57-69 (2 pls.). ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. fol we do know is that a body which is at one time visible becomes invisible by repeated divisions, but we recognize that it is still present. The chief multinuclear holotrichous Infusoria are Holophrya oblonga, Lagynus elongatus, Cheenia teres, Trachelocerca pheenicopterus, and T. minor (sp. n.); while the hypotrichous are Holosticha lacazei, multinucleata, flava, scutellum, Uroleptus roscovianus, zignis, Epiclinites auricularis, vermis (sp. n.), and Gonsstomum pediculiforme. Researches on Ciliated Infusoria.*—M. Fabre-Domergue divides his present memoir on the ciliated Infusoria into a descriptive and a general part. The former is necessary on account of the disorder and confusion which obtains in our knowledge of the holotrichous forms, on which we have not such fine monographs as those of Stein on the other groups. The species dealt with are Prorodon niveus, Cyrtostomum leucas, Ophryoglena atra and O. flava of Ehrenberg, Plagyopyla fusca of Quennerstedt, Balantidium elongatum of Stein, and Monodinium Balbianti g.et sp.nov. The last differs from Didinium nasutum by having only one anterior circlet of cilia in the adult stage, and two in that of division, and by its smaller size. From Mesodinium it differs in the character of its cilia. In the general part the author commences with an account of the protoplasm ; this is made up of two elements which are closely united — a solid reticulated hyaloplasm and a liquid paraplasm. Both these elements are endowed with a very high degree of osmotic power, but they cannot mix with water during life. It is on the hyaloplasm that the density of the protoplasm depends ; it is contractile, and is capable of fusing with itself; it is in its mass that true nutrition is effected, and in it that reserve or excreted material is deposited; it is eminently coagulable by acids, heat, &c. When fresh it is soluble in potash, but cannot be attacked by that reagent after it has been coagulated. The paraplasm corresponds to the sarcode of Dujardin, as he studied it by transudation through the cuticle of Paramecia. Its chemical properties are the same as those of hyaloplasm, but it has no contractility. The ectoplasm is a more or less dense layer of hyaloplasm; in some cases the reticulations of the endoplasm are closely packed, when it is dense and exhibits no cyclosis, which, however, may be seen when the reticula- tion is loose. The endoplasm sometimes presents a disposition to form a digestive tube without proper walls; the most marked differentiation is met with in Didinium nasutum and Monodinium Balbianii. The con- tractile system is exclusively situated in the innermost layer of ectoplasm ; it may be localized at one point of the body in the form of a simple vesicle, with or without a differentiated peripheral layer, or it may form a plexus which completely surrounds the body of the Infusoria. The contractile vesicle opens to the exterior by one or several pores, which, in species with a thick ectoplasm, always remain open, and are only closed by a layer of contractile hyaloplasm. This last may be differentiated to give rise to the contractile fibres of Vorticella, Stentor, or other contractile forms. There seems to be a relation between the muscular differentiation and that of the layer of trichocysts, the one excluding the other. The ectoplasm corresponding to the cortical layer may give rise to a secretion layer, the presence of which is more or less constant, and which may be considered as the homologue of the cuticle. * Ann. Sci. Nat., v. (1888) pp. 1-140 ( pls.). 752 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO The second chapter deals with the phenomena of encystation. This may, in a general way, be said to be provoked by modifications of the medium which become unsuitable for the life of the individual. The author is of opinion that desiccation, or the evaporation of water, which is so often invoked as the sole cause of encystation, has not the import- ance which has been attached to it, for the modifications which are due to putrefaction play an equal if not a greater part than those due to evaporation. The secretion of the membranes of the envelope of the cyst takes place from within outwards, and the density of the membranes diminishes in the same order. Preservation-cysts must be distinguished from division-cysts ; the membrane of the former is quite membranous, while that of the latter is more or less mucous, and soluble in potash, or even in water. The membrane of the cyst is permeable to liquids, but has the property of opposing the passage of certain bodies, or, in other words, acts like a dead dialysing membrane. Active life persists in the cyst until the complete elimination of the food-material which it contains. The residue may be rejected between the body and the membrane, or remain in the interior of the protoplasm under the form of refractive masses. The contents of the cyst are rich in reserve-material (glycogen) which gradually diminishes in cysts preserved in water. Appendicular organs such as cilia, cirri, or hooks are completely absorbed at the time when the latest life-stage is complete ; the nucleus preserves its normal form, and, if it is composed of several granules, these only fuse with one another in the preservation-cysts. Cysts which are preserved in air become highly refractive, and, after a diminution in their volume resulting from the loss of water, they preserve the same volume for an indefinite time. Cysts, on the other hand, which are preserved in water, die after a more or less long time. Revivescence is variable, and is often effected by simple aeration or under the influence of repeated movements of the support on which the cyst is fixed. Thisis due to the permeable membrane of the cyst allowing the passage of soluble matters which are favourable to the life of the infusorian. The mechanism of revivescence appears to be an absorption of water considerable enough to swell the protoplasm and dilate the membrane. Some Infusoria have no power of secreting a membranous envelope. Bodies that produce an anesthetic effect on animals that have a nervous system appear, doubtless on account of the rapidity of the osmotic changes, to have a mortal influence on Infusoria. In one case only—that of Nassula ornata—was a real anesthetic influence only; in this species there is a grey spot which is constantly found in the left anterior region, and is, possibly, a sort of localization of the nervous element; this spot takes on a deep brown colour with osmic acid. The observations which M. Fabre-Domergue has made on the physio- logy of nutrition lead him to think that the digestion of food is effected by the same chemical process in all the forms examined ; they absorb food presented to them in larger quantities than they can consume, for they reject part without utilizing it. In perfect conditions of nutrition (looked at in the largest way) reserve-material is stored up which is used when the conditions become unfavourable to life. Conjugation of Vorticellide.*—M. E. Maupas states that he has been able to make complete observations on Vorticella monilata, almost * Comptes Rendus, evi. (1885) pp. 1607-10. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. Lae as complete on Carchesium polypinum, V. nebulifera, and V. cucullus, and -to observe some isolated facts in V. putrina and V. microstoma. In V. monilata and others the microgametes are produced by equal and simple binary divisions; in V. microstoma the binary divisions are unequal and gemmeform, while in C. polypinum they are equal, but are repeated twice or perhaps thrice. The microgamete is only provided with a single micronucleus; it attaches itself to the macrogamete by fixing itself at first to the stalk, immediately below its point of attachment to the body ; it thence ascends to the lower part of the body of the macrogamete, and fuses with it. As soon as it is thus fixed its micronucleus divides by karyomitosis; while this division is being effected, the two gametes coalesce. The micronuclei, of which one is simple in the macrogamete and double in the microgamete, now grow, and four micronuclear corpuscles are produced in the former and eight in the latter. Tull this is done the macrogamete, which has kept its peristome open, has continued to feed; it now contracts itself and closes its peristome hermetically. Water accumulates within and forms a large vacuole, which pushes all the contents of the body of the macrogamete backwards towards the microgamete. The micronuclear corpuscles of the former have till now been at some distance from the microgamete. Three of the micronuclear corpuscles of the latter and seven of the former now become absorbed and disappear; the two that survive increase considerably in size and enter into contact. They have the form of two large longitudinally striated spindles, and as they elongate they divide; of the four micro- nuclear corpuscles thus formed two are placed in the microgamete, and two in the macrogamete; the two former become absorbed, while the others fuse and form a single nucleus of mixed origin. Fecundation is now accomplished; the large watery vacuole dis- appears, and the contents of the microgamete empty themselves slowly into the body of the macrogamete. ‘The cilia of the peristome which disappeared become renewed, the peristome reopens, and the Vorticella begins to eat again. The new mixed nucleus now passes through several stages of division, and gives rise to eight corpuscles. One of these takes on the type of the micronucleus, while the other seven grow considerably. When this growth has reached its maximum, and if the Vorticellz are well fed, the micronucleus divides into two, and the creature undergoes fission, one half having three nuclear bodies, and the other one. After two analogous divisions each piece has only one large nuclear body of discoidal form, which soon takes on the normal band-shape. The primitive nucleus of the two gametes divides into a number of small spherical corpuscles, each of which persists for a long time, and only disappears during the fissiparous divisions. It is obvious that this mode of reproduction in the Vorticellide does not differ essentially from that of other Ciliata. Notwithstanding the difference in size and fate the two gametes play an identical sexual part; both possess a hermaphrodite nucleus which has exactly equivalent reproductive properties. Structure of Urceolarie.*—M. Fabre-Domergue has studied the structure of Urceolarie both in marine and in fresh-water forms, and * Journ. Anat. et Physiol., xxiii. (1888) pp. 214-60 (2 pls.). 754 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO also of certain types closely related to this family. His memoir includes a lengthened historical review, a general description of the structure of Urceolariw, and in the third place special descriptions of the various genera and species examined. In discussing the general form, the author notes the weakness of the evidence in fayour of Biitschli’s theory that the forms of Licnophora have their origin from Hypotricha, and that the Trichodine are directly descended from Licnophora. The interesting fixing apparatus is dis- cussed at length. In sucha peritrichous type as Scyphidia the structure is seen at its simplest; it is specialized in varying degrees in the Urceolariz. The suctorial mechanism is described. A few notes on the minute structure of ectoplasm and endoplasm are communicated. As to reproduction, the Trichodinide multiply by longitudinal division, but this was never observed in the Licnophoride. In the division of the former the solid covering pieces split up and regenerate like the rest of the body; they are certainly merely ectoplasmic. The processes of division in Leiotrocha serpularum and Anhymenia scorpenz were especially observed. As a general character of the group, the author emphasizes especially the fixing apparatus, and discusses the classificatory value of the direction of the buccal spire, the presence or absence of a striated cupola on the fixing apparatus, the form of the supporting ring, the character of the resting nucleus, &c. Buccal spire to left, no } Licnophora C striated cupola £ iS supporting circle of cilia »» « Orceolaria St. 3/4 seals cilia and cirri Leiotrocha n §$ { (= | Buccal spire | smooth a eS oe g |4 to right, a circle of cilia... .. .. Anhymenian.g. ~ striated ciliaand cirri .. .. Cyclocyrrhan.g. cupola toothed ciliaand velum .. .. TZrichodina Ehrb. cilia, with atrophied peristome .. .. i; Cyclocheta Jack, Ciliated body * 15.5 cy oe ee’ ce ne ws we, ioROdnOpeT Oe All the known species are parasitic on the surface or in the interior of marine or fresh-water animals. Amphibians, fishes, molluscs, worms, ceelenterates are all infested. The same species may frequent very different hosts; thus Trichodina pediculus of the Hydra is the same as that which infests frog tadpoles and the abdominal cavity of newts. Euglena.*—Herr J. Fankhauser has observed that when Euglene are treated so as to remove the water, spiral furrows make their appear- ance on the surface of the body running in the direction of the ciliary movement. Cryptomonadinee.t—M. P. A. Dangeard states that Ehrenberg places in Cryptomonadina the genera Cryptomonas, Ophidomonas, Prorocentrum, Lagenella, Cryptoglena, and Trachelomonas. ‘The author’s conclusions are as follows :—(1) That the work of M. Kunstler must be regarded as inaccurate. (2) The development of Cryptomonas includes reproduction by longitudinal division, a production of colonies or palmelloid forma- * MT. Naturf. Gesell. Bern, 1888, p. xxiii. + Bull. Soc. Bot. France, xxxyv. (1888) pp. 127-30. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETO. CD) tions, and an encystment providing new colonies. (8) Solid nourishment is not introduced into the interior of the protoplasm. (4) Chilomonas Paramecium is distinct from Cryptomonas. Protozoa of Corsica.*—Prof. P. Gourret and M. P. Roeser report on the fifty-seven Protozoa which they have found in the new port of Bastia. Among the new forms described by them, Colpodopsis latifrons g.et sp. n. is a holotrichous Infusorian which has close relations to Colpoda, but differs in the absence of the tuft of oral cilia, and by the possession of a posterior tuft of large cilia; as in Cryptochilum, the body is compressed laterally. Cryptochilum fusiforme sp. n. has no long rigid seta at its hinder extremity, nor has it any longitudinal cuticular strie. Aulaz paucisetosa g. et sp. n. has a more or less oval body, provided with four tufts of cilia, two of which are antero-lateral and two postero- dorsal and postero-ventral, there is a caudal seta, and the body is divided by 2 ventral groove (whence the generic name) into two equal parts. In front of the mouth, which is situated in this groove, there is a triangular vibratile membrane. It seems to be most closely allied to Lembadion, with affinities to Cyclidium and Colpidium. Clypeolum is a new genus of the Peritricha, which does not appear to be closely allied to any known form. The body is conical, with the apex posterior; the dorsal surface is divided by a transverse groove into two unequal parts, of which the posterior is the larger. The ventral surface is moderately convex; the buccal pit describes the half of a spire, occupies the anterior portion of the ventral surface, and is pro- vided with vibratile cilia and a membranella; the dorsal cones are armed with cilia, which serve to fix the animal. Among the Hypotricha Chilodon auricula, Afigyria semilunaris, cris- tata, compressa, Kerona ciliata, and Holosticha coronata are regarded as new species. Amphisiella is a new genus allied to Amphisia, but it has only one row of ventral cirri, and the oral pit is completely ventral and not at all anterior in position. Stylonethes fusiformis sp. n. has much resemblance to the incompletely known Oxytricha scutellum, which Cohn has, there can be little doubt, referred to a wrong genus. Psilotrix ovalis g. et sp. n. seems to be most closely allied to Actinotricha saltans, but it differs in the form of its mouth. Paramonas ovalis is a new species of Hustomata-monomastiga cha- racterized by its oral excavation, and Dinomonas mediocanella and D. acuta are new Hustomata-dimastiga. The only new Rhizopod is Ameba monociliata. Biological Studies on Protista.j—Dr. M. Verworn, in the course of some psychophysiological investigations, has observed the process of test-formation in some of the test-bearing fresh-water Rhizopods. The form selected was Difflugia urceolata, and some further observations were made on the marine Polystomella crispa. The author found that, in Diflugia, the formation of the test was effected in just the same way as in other fresh-water Rhizopods, with the difference that only foreign bodies were taken up to form the test by certain reflex processes. ‘There was no regeneration of an injured or removed test by the protoplasmic body, though the vital functions were carried on normally. With Polystomella the result was very different ; * Arch. de Biol., viii. (1888) pp. 139-204 (3 pls.). + Zeitschr. f. Wiss. Zool., xlvi. (1888) pp. 455-70 (1 pl.). 756 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO here there was regeneration, if the nucleus was contained in the injured part, but not otherwise. ‘he processes of regeneration were found to be either in the form of a healing of the wound by deposit of carbonate of lime, which was excreted by the surface of the protoplasm, or in the formation of new chambers. There is a similar process of regeneration in Orbitolites tenuissima and O. complanata, but the formation of new chambers was more frequent than in Polystomella. When we come to ask how it is that there can be such a difference in regenerative processes between a Diflugia and an Orbitolites, it is obvious that there must be a difference in the shell. This difference appears to lie in its mode of formation. In the former, as in all Mono- thalamia, the shell appears at the moment of division, and is quite perfect after the separation of the newly-formed individual. There are no further changes—that is to say, there is no growth of the shell. Put in terms of the protoplasm, this means that it has no secretory activity, and it is in consequence of this that there is no regeneration of a shell which has been injured or totally removed. In the Polythalamia the relations are quite different; their forms almost certainly reproduce themselves by a kind of spore-formation, although this has not yet been directly observed. It is, however, known that young Polythalamia are to be found as unicamerate Protista in the body of the mother. If these develope into complete Polythalamia a new chamber is formed on the primitive one, to which again another new one is attached, and so on. From this it follows that the Poly- thalamia, so long as they continue to form new chambers, must have the power of secreting tests. A natural consequence of this mode of test- formation in the Polythalamia is the phenomenon that the forms with a relatively small number of chambers, such as Polystomella, have much less power of regeneration than forms with an enormous number of chambers, such as Orbitolites. The capacity for regeneration in the Polythalamia is, therefore, proportional to their capacity for forming new chambers; the latter, again, marks the extent of development, and the power of regeneration is, therefore, at least continuous with the whole period of development. Dr. Verworn cannot accept the view of Gruber that we ought not to speak of the development of Protozoa, for he sees in the chamber-formation of the Polythalamia a process which is not mere growth, for the chambers do not resemble one another, and the Protist has quite a different appearance when it has only a few chambers from that which it presents when it has many. Regarding the process as representing a true development, he believes that it may be made useful in determining the phylogenetic relations of some forms of tests. It would be of interest to discover whether the capacity for regene- ration diminishes or is lost when new chambers cease to be formed. The influence exerted by the nucleus in the regeneration of the test of Polystomella appears to be of especial importance. Among recent obser- vations on the formation of the nucleus are those which bear on its relation to secretion ; Korschelt observed in the epithelial cells which secrete the chitinous ovarian rays in the eggs of Nepa and Ranatra that the nucleus, at the time of secretion, has a peculiar rhizopodal form, and sends out pseudopodia-like processes to the side in which the chitin is secreted. He further convinced himself that all cells which are known to have branched nuclei have a secretory character. As, however, ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 757 there have been no direct observations on the share taken by the cell- nucleus in the secretory activity of the cell, it was of great interest to observe such a case in the regenerative processes of the Polythalamia. New Rhizopods.*—Dr. A. Gruber gives an account of new, or as yet imperfectly described, species of Rhizopods found by him in the harbour of Genoa. (a) Protomyxa pallida, n. sp. The protoplasm is colourless; it has a tendency to flow out in thread-like processes, so that the whole is some- times a perfect network. The substance of the nucleus is distributed in such small particles that, during life, they cannot be distinguished from the other granules contained in the protoplasm. (b) Various Amebe—Ameba fluida, A. globifera, inclosing yellowish globules, and A. flavescens, yellowish in colour, rich in fine granules, unusually fluid, and with many small nuclei of the vesicular type. (c) Schultzia diffluens. The fine skin which seems to cover the whole is in reality only a slight thickening of the outer layer, and pseudopodia may be given off at any point. The nucleus consists of a great many very small granules. (d) Lieberkiihnia Biitschlii n. sp. This species differs from others of the genus in being larger and in having only one nucleus. The skin is easily seen. At the anterior end there is an opening through which the main pseudopodia stalk is projected. From it there ramify a great many fine pseudopodia, and the skin becomes covered so that it seems as if pseudopodia were given off from the whole circumference. (e) Polymastix sol Gruber. The nucleus is of the type usual among Flagellates. Fine thread-like processes radiate from the whole cir- cumference and give it the appearance of a Heliozoon, but these processes have a flagellate motion. Observations on Parkeria.t—Mr. H. J. Carter has some observa- tions on the organic and inorganic changes of Parkeria, in which he deals with their “ transformations” and not with natural structure. There are also some further observations on the nature of the opaque scarlet spherules in Foraminifera. Sherborn’s Bibliography of the Foraminifera.t—Mr. C. D. Sherborn has published a very useful Bibliography of the Foraminifera founded on previously published Bibliographies, but containing a large amount of original work in the way of enlargement and amendment, and with a number of explanatory notes which much increase the value of the book. * Ber. Naturf. Gesell. Freiburg i. B., 1888, pp. 33-40. + Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., ii. (1888) pp. 45-55 (1 pl.).. t ‘A Bibliography of the Foraminifera Recent and Fossil, from 1565-1888, with notes explanatory of some of the rare and little-known publications,’ vii. and 152 pp. Svo, London, 1888. : 1888. oF 758 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO BOTANY. A. GENERAL, including the Anatomy and Physiology of the Phanerogamia. a. Anatomy.* Q) Cell-structure and Protoplasm. Action of basic substances on living Protoplasm.t—Herr T. Bokorny has investigated the action of a number of different basic sub- stances on living protoplasm. In all cases they agree with the action of ammonia in causing granulation both in the protoplasm and in the cell- sap. Experiments were made with the following substances :—potassa, soda,* amine-bases, diamide or hydrazin, hydroxylamin, strychnine, chinine, atropine, veratrine, chinoline, and caffeine. Forms of Cells.t—Prof. L. Errera offers 2 mathematical explanation of the various forms assumed by vegetable cells, from the corresponding phenomena observed in the blowing of soap-bubbles. Physiology of the Cell.§—Herr G. Klebs has collected his recent observations on various points in the structure of the cell, adding also some fresh ones. Alge, leaves of mosses, and similar structures, can be preserved in a living condition in solutions which afford a supply of nutriment, to which 0:05 per cent. of normal potassium chromate has been added. The author describes the artificial fresh formation of the cell-wall after plasmolysis in concentrated solutions of cane-sugar and glycerin. This takes place with Vaucheria within an hour, in most other alge after 1 or2days. A similar formation of cell-wall after plasmolysis takes place also with some leaves of mosses, and prothallia of ferns, and with leaves of Elodea canadensis ; but was not observed with desmids or diatoms, or with the tissues of dicotyledonous plants. The formation of the new cell-wall is best exhibited by the use of congo-red. In a 1 per cent. solution of sugar coloured by congo-red, the first formation of the cell- wall could be detected in opened tubes of Vaucheria. The author does not agree with de Vries that the parietal utricle has the special faculty of forming cellulose; it belongs, on the contrary, to every part of the protoplasm. It was distinctly seen that the growth of the new cell-wall takes place by apposition. In Zygnema also he found no evidence of growth by intussusception. The growth and division of protoplasts was observed in Gidogonium, Cladophora, and other objects plasmolysed in a concentrated solution of sugar. Growth of the protoplasts and formation of starch may take place in the dark, but apparently not division. Portions of the protoplast which contain no nucleus can assimilate and form starch, but appear to have no power of growing or forming a new cell-wall. A peculiar degradation of the chlorophyll-bodies was observed in * This subdivision contains (1) Cell-structure and Protoplasm; (2) Other Cell- contents (including Secretions); (3) Structure of Tissues; and (4) Structure of Organs. “+t Pringsheim’s Jahrb. f. Wiss. Bot., xix. (1888) pp. 206-20 (1 pl.). + Versamml. Deutscher Naturf. u. Aerzte, Wiesbaden, Sept. 21, 1887. See Bot. Centralbl., xxxiv. (1888) p. 395. § Unters. Bot. Inst. Tiibingen, ii. (1888) pp. 489-568 (2 pls.). See Bot. Centralbl., xXxXiy. (1888) p. 228. Cf. this Journal, 1887, p. 254. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETO. 759 Elodea and Funaria, especially in solutions containing potassium chromate ; they are finally transformed into small red balls. The tannin-vesicles of the Zygnemaceze may, under certain conditions, be expelled from the cytoplasm ; but this is probably only a pathological phenomenon. Plasmolysis in Flowering Plants.*—Herr A. Wieler has repeated on flowering plants (Phaseolus multiflorus, Vicia Faba, Helianthus annuus), the experiments made by Janse on fresh- and salt-water algze, and with the same result, viz. that after remaining for a Jong time in plasmolysing media, the plasmolysis disappears. The phenomenon regarded by Janse as exceptional, appears therefore to be of wider dis- tribution ; the results obtained by Wieler being in direct opposition to those of De Vries. f (2) Other Cell-contents (including Secretions). Alkaloid and Sugar in Cyclamen.{—M. G. Michaud finds in the rhizome of the Cyclamen a poisonous principle, cyclamine, and in addi- tion, a new sugar, a levogyrous saccharose, to which he gives the name cyclamose. Laticiferous product of Mimusops and Payena.§ —MM. E. Heckel and F. Schlagdenhauffen state that their attention has been lately turned to the product obtained from Mimusops and Payena, as it has been suggested that it might be capable of replacing the gutta-percha obtained from Isonandra gutta. After giving the analyses of the various products, the authors state in conclusion that the gutta obtained from the Mimusops . somewhat resembles in composition and properties that obtained from Isonandra, but that it would be necessary to mix it in order to make it a useful industrial product, while, on the contrary, that obtained from Payena might more properly be classed among the caoutchoucs. Formation of Sugars in the Septal Glands of Narcissus.|| —Mr. E. H. Acton states that in the genus Narcissus there are three separate glands, one in each septum of the ovary, not united, and simple; they only occupy the upper part of each septum, not extending below the middle of the ovary. The author gives the details of various experiments, and draws the following conclusions as to the nature of the process of secretion of sugars in Narcissus and other plants having the kind of nectaries called septal glands:—(1) That the first stage consists in a maximum formation of protoplasm containing a large amount of meta- plasm, especially in the form of proteid granules, but not of starch-grains, mucilage, or any form of solid carbohydrate. (2) That the sugars are probably derived from the decomposition of this metaplasm, and con- stitute one of the products of the change. That both glucose and saccharose are formed simultaneously. (3) That the excretion of the. saccharine liquid into the gland-cavity in the first instance takes place through the cell-walls without any rupture, splitting away of the cells of the epithelium from one another, or mucilaginous degeneration, and must therefore be supposed to result, in the first instance at least, from the direct activity of the protoplasm in the secreting cells. * Ber. Deutsch. Bot. Gesell., v. (1887) pp. 375-80. + See this Journal, 1885, p. 84. t Arch. Sci. Phys. et Nat., xviii. (1887) pp. 198-212. § Comptes Rendus, evi. (1888) pp. 1625-7. || Ann. of Bot., 11. (1888) pp. 53-63 (6 figs.). oF 2 760 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO Contents of the Cells of the Aril of the Nutmeg.*—Herr A. Tschirch finds the cells of the aril of Myristica fragrans to be character- ized by the presence of a large amount of amylodextrin. ‘The grains are from 2 to 10 » in size, and are coloured reddish-brown by an aqueous solution of iodine; they do not contain even a nucleus of true starch. They are usually rod-shaped, rarely roundish or disc-shaped, but often curved or coiled; they seldom exhibit distinct stratification. Phosphorus and Phosphoric Acid in Plants.;t—MM. Berthelot and G. André give the results of some experiments with Amaranthus caudatus and A. pyramidalis, protected from rain but freely exposed to the air, which show that the plant absorbs both phosphorus and potassium from the soil in the early stages of its growth, though the amount of both, and especially of phosphorus, increases less rapidly than the weight of the plant. When flowering begins, the absorption of phosphorus practically ceases, but the absorption of potassium continues so long as the plant grows, and the increase in the quantity of this element during flowering is very considerable. The increase in the quantity of nitrogen is almost proportional to the increase in the weight of the plant up to the beginning of inflorescence, although somewhat smaller in the early stages of growth. When the plant flowers, the total quantity of nitrogen increases but little, and therefore the propor- tion of this element decreases. In a soil containing about 8 grams of potassium acetate per kilo., the plant grew with some difficulty, but those which survived became much larger. They contained nearly twice as much potassium as under normal conditions, but the increase in the amount of phosphorus followed the ordinary law. From the results detailed in this paper, it follows that manures con- taining phosphorus and nitrogen are of no value after the plant has begun to flower, but manures containing potassium may be useful throughout the whole period of growth. (3) Structure of Tissues. Oil-receptacles in the Roots of Composite.{—Herr R. Triebel gives the following general results from the examination of a number of species. : The oil-passages are always the result of the tangential division of the protecting-sheath (endoderm). In most cases they always remain in contact with the protecting-sheath; exceptions occur in Ligularia and Telckia. 'The cells surrounding the oil-passage contain more protoplasm than the other cells, in proportion to the size of the passage; as the oil- passage increases in size, these cells become shorter by horizontal division. Fully formed oil is never found outside the oil-passage; the protoplasm of the passage-cells appears to take an important part in its formation. Although formed in the protecting-sheath, the walls of the oil-passage are never suberized; even in comparatively large passages the walls are thinner than those of the surrounding cells. When mature the oil is often entirely replaced by protoplasm. They are intercellular spaces with no special wall of their own; they never contain starch. No * Ber. Deutsch. Bot. Gesell., vi. (1888) pp. 138-41. + Comptes Rendus, evi. (1888) pp. 711-6. . ~ Nova Acta Acad. Cs, Leop.-Carol. Germ, i. (1887) pp. 1-44 (7 pls.). Cf. this Journal, ante, p. 447. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 761 connection could be traced between the formation of oil and that of inulin. Besides the oil-passages, there oceur in Inula Helenium, in the middle of the root, special oil-receptacles bounded on all sides, also of schizo- genous origin. In some roots (Inula Helenium, Cirsium oleraceum, C. canum, Tagetes patula, Lappa tomentosa), a gradual separation takes place sooner or later of the elements of the cortex, often aided by a previous formation of cavities. In Inula and Lappa this proceeds so far as to attack the oil-passages, and then the protecting-sheath, and even parts which lie beneath it. Formation of Periderm.*—M. H. Douliot points out that, in con- sidering the origin of the periderm, one has five cases to deal with, viz. :—(1) Epidermal periderm ; (2) Exodermal periderm ; (3) Cortical periderm ; (4) Endodermal periderm, and (5) Pericyclic periderm. In the Rosacez, where the periderm is pericyclic, it is formed of layers of hard cork, which from the first present on their radial walls foldings analogous to those of the endoderm. 'The same phenomenon is shown in the Ginotherez, and in several genera of Myrtacez, where the periderm is pericyclic. In the Ginothereex the periderm is in immediate contact with the endoderm ; it is the same in the Rosacez. Protecting-wood and Duramen.j—Herr E. Praél, adopting Frank’s designation of “ protecting-wood” (Schutzholz) for the brown-coloured wood formed at spots where injury has been inflicted, has examined the relationship in structure between this and ordinary duramen in a large number of different trees. The following are the more important results. The protecting-wood formed as the result of injury always agrees in structure with the duramen of the same species. The three substances which fill up the vessels of the duramen—gum, resin, and thylla—occur also in the protecting-wood, in contradistinction to the alburnum of the same age. The filling up by thylle and by gum takes place in the same plant; larger vessels have a tendency to become filled by thylle. The colour of the cell-wall agrees in the alburnum and in the protecting- wood. In some species the formation of thylle in the wood takes place at an early period; the tendency to their formation is increased by age and by injury to the wood. The strong colouring of the duramen is produced by characteristic pigments, which are probably formed within the cell, and infiltrate into the cell-walls when the tension of the cells ceases. The intimate deposition of these in the cell-wall, and possibly also a chemical combination with lignin, are the reason why they cannot be entirely removed from the cell-wall by substances in which they are soluble. Hermetic closing of cut surfaces of the wood prevents or hinders the formation of protecting wood. The “wood-gum” of Thomsen must be regarded as a modification of cellulose. Causes which produce Eccentricity of the Pith in Pines.t—M. E. Mer states that transverse sections taken from the trunks of trees are far from being always circular, especially towards the base. The pith is often eccentric because the annual rings are not constant in thick- ness. This is brought about by various causes, among which may be mentioned :—The influence of the slope on which the tree grows, and * Morot’s Journ. de Bot., ii. (1888) pp. 158-60. + Pringsheim’s Jahrb. f. Wiss. Bot., xix. (1888) pp. 1-81 (1 pl.). Cf. this Journal, ante, p. 248, } Comptes Rendus, cvi. (1888) pp. 313-6. 762 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO whether the aspect is north, south, east, or west; then there is the effect of other trees which happen to grow in the immediate neighbourhood ; and finally the influence of curvature or lesions. Influence of Exposure on the Formation of the Annual Rings in the Savin.*—M. E. Mer gives the details of a number of observations made to determine the influence of exposure on the formation of the annual rings in the savin. The results may be stited in the fact that nutrition had evidently been made much more active on the east side of the trees than on the west. A southern exposure had produced an analogous though less accentuated effect upon the cambium than a westerly one. One of the tables shows the difference in the breadth of the annual rings east and west. Mal nero of the Vine.,j—Sig. O. Comes has studied the cause of the “mal nero” or gummosis of the vine, and finds it to be characterized by the presence of brown corpuscles in the amyliferous parenchyma, which, though described by some writers as elements of solid tannin, he regards as produced by gummy degeneration of the starch-bearing cells. (4) Structure of Organs. Formation of Lateral Roots in Monocotyledones.{—In further instalments of this paper Prof. A. Borzi describes a second type of the lateral roots of Monocotyledons, in which the meristem is composed of only three distinct kinds of initial cells, producing the plerome, the periblem, and the root-cap, the dermatogen being a dependency of the periblem. He describes in detail the structure of the root in Elegia deusta and Scirpus lacustris. In the former case the pericambium is constituted of a double row of cells, and this type is characteristic of the Cyperacesw, Graminer, and Musacez. In a third type the growing apices of the radicles are made up of two distinct kinds of initial cells; the one are the common origin of the periblem, dermatogen, and root-cap, the other of the plerome. Examples of this type are furnished by Richardia africana and by a number of other Aroidez. In the fourth type the apex of the cone of growth with the initial cells are the common origin of the plerome, periblem, and dermatogen, and normally also of the root-cap. This may again be divided into two subdivisions :—in the first the root-cap is altogether distinct from the other histogenous elements of the cone of the root. This occurs in Sparazis versicolor and in many other Iridexw. In the second subdivision, of which Lilium candidum may be taken as an example, the root-cap is not distinct from the apex of the cone of growth. Here the initial rows of plerome give birth to the periblem, the outer layers of which are con- verted into the root-cap. The endoderm of the root forms the dermatogen, laterally to the nascent cone of growth, and, in the region of the apex, a thin temporary protecting sheath. In a further stage of development the increase of the growing apex of a radicle takes place by means of initial cells situated at the apex of the plerome-cylinder, which, as long as they renew this cylinder, generate the periblem. The outer central * Morot’s Journ. de Bot., ii. (1888) pp. 165-70, 184-91. + Atti R. Ist. d’Incoraggiamento alle Sci. Nat., 1887. See Rev. Mycol., x. (1888) p- 165. } Malpighia, i. (1887) pp. 541-50; ii. (1888) pp. 53-85. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 763 layers of this cylinder are converted into root-cap, the lateral external layers into dermatogen and root-cap. Permeability of the Epidermis of Leaves for Gases.*—M. L. Mangin gives the details of a number of experiments made to determine the permeability of the epidermis for gases. The following are his conclusions :— (1) That the permeability of the epidermis of aerial leaves is very limited ; ordinarily feeble for plants with persistent leaves, it is rather more considerable in plants with deciduous leaves. (2) In leaves in which the upper and lower surfaces are dissimilar, the permeability of the lower epidermis is greater than that of the upper. (3) The permeability of the epidermis of submerged leaves which are destitute of stomata is very great,—five, ten, or even twenty times more than that of aerial leaves. (4) The permeability of cutinized surfaces is notably weakened by the waxy matter which is found in the cuticle of all leaves; this applies to submerged as well as to aerial leaves. Influence of the Turgidity of the Epidermal Cells on the Stomata.t —Dr. R. Schaefer contests the theory of Schwendener { that the chief cause of the widening and narrowing of the cleft of the stomata is the changing pressure exercised on them by the varying turgidity of the epidermal cells which adjoin the guard-cells. From observations on a number of plants (Polygonum, Lilium, Potamogeton, Azolla, &c.), he comes to the conclusion that the stomatic apparatus is endowed with an independent function, and that this function is rendered possible only by the changes in the turgidity of the guard-cells. It must, however, be admitted that the turgidity of the neighbouring cells of the epidermis prevents the free expansion of the guard-cells. The width of the cleft at any particular time is therefore the resultant of two opposing forces, the stronger of these being the turgidity of the guard-cells, the weaker that of the adjoining epidermal cells. The observations on the stomata of Azolla were especially instructive, as here the opening and closing of the cleft takes place in the ordinary way, and must be brought about by internal forces only, as the thickening-bands which occur in other plants in the neighbouring epidermal cells are here wanting. In grasses, also, the case is very similar, the changes in the width of the cleft being obviously due to forces which have their origin in the guard-cells. Anatomy of Spines.s—Under the term spine Herr R. Mittmann in- cludes all structures which end in a sharp point, and which are adapted by their anatomical construction for the protection of the plant, and for the dissemination of the seeds or fruits through the agency of animals. The following are, with some exceptions, the general anatomical charac- teristics of all spines :—A strong development of the mechanical tissue ; its situation near the surface, and increase in strength from the base towards the apex; the strong thickening and lignification of the walls of the cells of which this tissue is composed. A corresponding reduction of the assimilating and conducting tissues. The peculiarity, especially striking in stem-spines, that growth continues longest at the base of the * Comptes Rendus, evi. (1888) pp. 771-4. + Pringsheim’s Jahrb. f. Wiss. Bot., xix. (1888) pp. 178-205 C1 fig.). ft See this Journal, 1882, p. 216. § ‘Beitr. z. Kenntniss d. Anat. d. Pflanzenstacheln,’ 43 pp., Berlin, 1888. See Bot. Centralbl., xxxiv. (1888) p. 359. 764 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO organ, so that its apex is its oldest part, and the one which first passes over into its permanent condition. Propagula of Pinguicula.*—M. M. Hovelacque describes organs of propagation hitherto unknown in Pinguicula vulgaris, in the form of buds or propagula seated in the axil of the lower leaves of the underground stem, which ultimately become detached. Each bud consists of a short axis and four or five leaves.. The first internode elongates considerably. The axis of the bud contains atits base only two vascular bundles ; higher up they unite, but not so completely but that the two bundles can still be distinguished. The planes of insertion of the roots do not form at the periphery of the vascular cord a layer resembling that which clothes the vascular system of the underground stem. Nothing warrants the hypo- thesis that the axis of the propagulum is a stem with several confluent central cylinders. Flower of Orchidez.|—Herr E. Pfitzer commences a series of papers dealing with the details in the structure and development of the flowers of Orchidese. The present instalment deals with the Cypripediline (Cypripedilum, Selenipedilum, Paphiopedilum), Ophry dine (Orchis Morio), and Neottiine (Hpipactis, Cephalanthera). Ovules of Rumex.{—From examination of the structure of anomalous flowers of Rumex scutatus, Dr. 8. Calloni draws conclusions favourable to the hypothesis of Sachs, that the ovule of Rumex is an axial structure, and not a production of the carpel. In the anomalous flowers examined it has become modified in a way opposite to that of the ovary. It is the result of a vertical and lateral prolification of the axis, and becomes changed into a floral organ, i.e. into a pistil. The mode of evolution of the ovule leads to the same conclusion. Seeds of Pharbitis triloba.s—M. K. Hyrano describes in detail the structure of this plant, a native of Japan, and especially of the seeds, from which he obtains a resin identical in composition and in medicinal properties with the convolvulin contained in jalap-root; and suggests that the seeds of the Japanese plant may be introduced into commerce as a purgative. A resin was obtained by dissolving the finely powdered seeds in alcohol, precipitating with acetate of lead, and purifying the filtrate. The resin thus obtained consisted partly of an oil, the remainder being nearly pure convolvulin. Structure of Impatiens.||—Dr. E. Heinricher describes several pecu- liarities of structure in different species of Impatiens examined by him. Alone among Dicotyledons, with the exception of Cucurbita, and in all the species examined, he finds in the embryo four secondary roots formed already in the seed, which develope rapidly on germination and serve to fix the young plant in the soil. In I. Balsamina (Balsamina hortensis), capensis, and other species, the cells of the embryo, and especially those of the cotyledons, display strong thickenings of their walls; these thickenings serving as reserve food-materials, which are dissolved and used up in germination. The micro-chemical reactions of these thickenings are given in detail, and * Comptes Rendus, evi. (1888) pp. 507-10. + Pringsheim’s Jahrb. f. Wiss. Bot., xix. (1888) pp. 155-77 (2 pls.). ~ Mém. Soc. Phys. Geneve, xxix. (1887) 23 pp. and 2 pls. § MT. Med. Facultat K. Japanischen Universitat, i. (1888) pp. 201-8 (2 pls.). || Flora, 1xxi. (1888) pp. 163-75, 179-85 (1 pl.). ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 765 the author concludes from them, in the case of I. Balsamina, that they are not composed of cellulose, but of a substance probably identical with Schleiden’s amyloid. Similar thickenings occur in the embryos of some species of Papilionacee, Ceesalpinies, and Tropzolum. During germina- tion large quantities of starch are formed, and the author states that this is not the direct result of assimilation, but of the transformation of the substance of these thickenings. This is shown by the fact that starch is formed in just the same way when the germination takes place in the dark. The object of these thickenings appears to be to protect the seeds from injury by mechanical pressure, and also to a certain extent against being devoured by birds and other animals. Anatomy of Nelumbium.*—Dr. E. Dennert publishes a monograph of Nelumbium speciosum, completed from an unpublished MS. of Dr. A. Wigand. The following points are treated of in detail :—The structure of the seedling; the arrangement and imbrication of the leaves; the morphology of the leaf; the structure of the flower; the structure and form of the ripe fruit ; the mode of growth of the rhizome; the develop- ment of the leaves and flowers; the development of the ovule; the anatomy of the rhizome and stem; the structure and development of the vascular bundles; the structure and formation of the air-passages; the anatomy of the leaf and leaf-stalk; the anatomy of the receptacle and floral organs; the formation of the starch in the leaves and rhizome. The vascular bundles of Nelumbiwm agree with those of Monocoty- ledons in their isolated position, and in the absence of cambium; but differ in the fact that the xylem and phloém do not coalesce, but remain distinct ; only in some small bundles were they found united into a closed ring. The large air-passages of the internodes are separated from one another by the pith of the nodes; only in the periphery, where they unite into a white, spongy, structureless mass, are they in communication from one internode to another. The air-passages of the nodes contain unstalked clusters of crystals. The larger part of the leaf is occupied by large air-passages ; they are in immediate contact with the epidermis of the under surface, which is entirely destitute of stomata; the single layer of cells of which the lower epidermis is composed is united with the spongy parenchyma above the air-passages by strings composed of a single row of cells; attached to the spongy parenchyma are clusters of crystals projecting into the air-passages. Between the spongy paren- chyma and the upper epidermis is a layer of palisade-cells. The upper epidermis consists of a single layer of thick-walled cells, penetrated by numerous stomata. It is elevated here and there into warts consisting of several layers of cells. B. Physiology.f (1) Reproduction and Germination. Formation of Endosperm in Dicotyledons.t—Dr. F. Hegelmaier has investigated with especial care the cases where the endosperm is formed in Dicotyledons by free cell-formation. The filling up of the entire * Uhlworm u. Haenlein’s Biblioth. Bot., 1888, Heft 11, 68 pp. and 6 pls. + This subdivision contains (1) Reproduction and Germination; (2) Nutrition and Growth (including Movements of Fluids); (3) Irritability; and (4) Chemical Changes (including Respiration and Fermentation). { Nova Acta Acad. Cees. Leop.-Carol. Germ., xxix. (1887) pp. 1-103 (5 pls.). Cf. this Journal, 1887, p. 116. 766 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO cavity of the embryo-sac with tissue may take place in three different ways, viz.:—(1) The endogenous type, by the division of a nucleated mass of protoplasm which fills up the cavity, as in Eranthis; (2) By the formation of tissues, which commences at the periphery on all sides, and advances centripetally ; this occurs in other Ranunculaces, as Helleborus, Nigella, Ranunculus, Adonis, and Caltha, in the Rosaces (Cotoneaster), Umbellifere (Archangelica), Malvacee (Malva, Hibiscus), certain Legu- minosex (Hippocrepis, Coronilla, Anthyllis, Lotus), and some Papaveraces (Glaucium, Chelidonium, Hypecoum, Eschscholtzia, Fumaria), also, in a modified way, in Bocconia, Scabiosa, and Euphorbia; (3) A formation of tissue commencing at the periphery on one side only, at the micropylar end, and leaving the chalazal part at first more or less unaffected, but afterwards advancing towards it; this was observed in many Leguminose (Cytisus, Sarothamnus, Baptisia, Hedysarum, Onobrychis, Trigonella, Galega, Colutea (?)), and in Polygonacesee (Fagopyrum, Polygonum, Rumex). In Ae third case the formation of parenchyma from the micropylar end may be so sparing as not entirely to envelope the embryo, as in the Caryophyllacee ; or the enveloping tissue may be broken through and ruptured before it reaches the hinder part of the embryo-sac, as in Chenopodiaceew, Nyctaginer, Phytolacca, and some Leguminosae. A peculiar modification of this process occurs in those cases where it is localized to some other part of the embryo-sac than its apex, namely, in a concavity, as in strongly campylotropous ovules ; this is characteristic of the majority of species of Lupinus. Tropzeolum is peculiar in the parietal layer of protoplasm not breaking up into cells. These various modes of formation of endosperm only correspond to a certain extent to systematic affinities; thus Hranthis differs from the other Helleborer, and the Leguminose are broken up into several groups. Free cell-formation, in the narrowest sense of the term, has not at present been observed ; the ordinary process being an intermediate one between that and true cell-division. The author points out various essential differences between the process of the formation of the endosperm in Dicotyledons and that of the primary and secondary prothallium in the heterosporous Vascular Cryptogams, such as Selaginella. In Marsiliacew and Salviniaces, and in the formation of the primary prothallium in Selaginella, a true process of cell-division takes place. The prothallium of Conifers, in which there is not the sharp differentiation into two distinct portions which occurs in Selaginella, is at first formed by free cell-formation round distinct nuclei; though cell-division afterwards takes place in the formation of the tissue. The endosperm-tissue has two distinct functions, separated from one another in time by a period of rest. In the first place it serves as a reservoir for the reserve-substances subsequently consumed by the embryo ; and in the second place it conveys nutrient materials to the embryo on its free surface during the period of its development. In some cases, however, this latter function is performed vicariously by the fluid of the embryo-sac, or a portion of the material is conveyed by the enlarged base of the embryo, whether developed into a suspensor or not; but in these cases the endosperm always co-operates in the conveyance of the nutrient material. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETO. 767 Fertilization of Euphrasia.*—Herr A. K. v. Marilaun discusses the modes of fertilization in species of Huphrasia—E. rostkoviana, E. minima, E. Odontites, E. lutea. In reference to the first of these species, the flowers are protogynous ; in the first stage the style protrudes for some distance beyond the anthers, and self-fertilization is impossible; after twenty-four hours an intercalary growth occurs in the corolla, by which the tube is lengthened, the stamens pushed forward, and the style straightened. In this second stage the stigma now lies on the anthers of the anterior stamens, but cannot sink deeper because of the long hairs binding the two anthers together. Meanwhile the anthers have opened, but the pollen is not allowed to escape until an insect visiting the nectary shoves apart the obstructing anthers and dusts itself with pollen. When the animal withdraws, it cannot touch the stigma, but takes its load to a stigma in the first stage. In the next stage a growth again takes place in the lower portion of the corolla, the stamens are again shoved forward, the stigma lies above the two posterior anthers. These are not felted together by hairs, they are pressed apart by the style, the stigma passes into the pollen-filled space between the anthers, and in this stage self-fertilization may occur. The slightly different conditions in the other three species are then described, and the author notes how the differences form not only specific distinctions, but generic characters. Thus Huphrasia Odontites is nearer to Barisia than to the white-flowered species of Huphrasia; while E. lutea strikingly suggests Tozzia. In establishing the genera more emphasis should be laid upon the reproductive than upon the floral organs. Adaptation of the Flowers of Eremurus altaicus to Cross-fertili- zation.;—Herr U. Dammer describes the arrangements in this flower for hindering self-pollination and promoting cross-fertilization. He con- siders the chief agents in pollination to be Syrphus pyrastri and other Syrphide, and not, as H. Muller states, night-flying moths. Germination of Monocotyledons.{—Herr M. Lewin has studied the development of the seedling in a large number of Monocotyledons belonging to the orders Alismacez, Liliacez, Iridee, Commelynacea, Scitaminez, Aroidez, Palme, and Graminez. In Monocotyledons the first leaves which develope have often special characters. One of the species specially studied is Tamus communis. Almost at the commence- ment of germination the tubercle begins to develope at the base of the cotyledon, in the region corresponding to the tigellum; from different points of the small spherical tubercle thus formed grow adventitious roots, which increase rapidly in number. Other interesting details are given in the cases of other plants. Chemistry of Germination.s—Dr. A. Menozzi publishes a pre- liminary account of his chemical researches on the germination of Phaseolus vulgaris. His object was to study the transformations of nitrogenous and non-nitrogenous substances in germination. As far as he could observe, the most abundant product was asparagin, then amido- valerianic acid, then phenyl-amido-propionic acid. A substance like leucine * Verh. K. K. Zool.-Bot. Gesell., xxxviii. (1888) pp. 562-6 (1 pl.). + Flora, lxxi. (1888) pp. 185-8 (1 fig.). } ‘Bidr. t. Kjertbladets anat. hos Monocotyledonerna,’ Stockholm, 1887. See Bull. Soc. Bot. France, xxxv. (1888), Rev. Bibl., p. 77. § Arch. Ital. Biol., ix. (1888) pp. 235-42. 768 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO was also obtained, beside hypoxanthin and xanthin. That the substances obtained result from the transformation of reserve products in the seeds, is of course shown by the fact that before germination there was no asparagin nor any of the substances afterwards present. The author meanwhile abstains from general conclusions. (2) Nutrition and Growth (including Movements of Fluids). Assimilation and Expiration of Plants.*—Herr U. Kreusler de- scribes experiments instituted to ascertain the influence of lower tem- perature on the assimilation of plants. The plants observed were the bramble, bean, castor-oil, and cherry- laurel; the conditions of experiment and the methods employed were the same as on former occasions, but the temperatures were lower. At zero the exhalation of carbonic anhydride was 17-20 per cent. of that which occurs at 20° C. in the case of the cherry-laurel and castor-oil plant; in the case of the bramble, the exhalation was only one-half of that at 10°. Assimilation at zero is for the cherry-laurel only 8 per cent. of the possible maximum. Production of Vegetative from Fertile Shoots of Opuntia.;— Herr F. Hildebrand describes in detail experiments in causing fruits of Opuntia to vegetate by detaching them and placing them in contact with the soil. The species experimented on were O. Ficus-indica, O. Raffines- quiana, and an unnamed cultivated species. In all cases the tendency was for cultivation of this kind to produce vegetative rather than fertile shoots. In some cases fertile shoots were first produced, but the tendency to the production of vegetative shoots gradually gained the upper hand. The tendency to produce both fertile and vegetative shoots can, however, be incited in almost any part of the plant by external influences. Viviparous Plants and Apogamy.{—Herr E. H. Hunger describes the appearance of viviparous buds in Poa bulbosa and alpina, Polygonum viviparum, Atherurus ternatus, Ficaria, and Fourcroya. In Poa bulbosa he thinks we have a true instance of apogamy combined with viviparous- ness, and to a less extent in P. alpina, Polygonum viviparum, and Fourcroya, but not in Atherurus ternatus or Ficaria ranunculoides. In Poa bulbosa the bulbs are formed in the fructification, but not in con- nection with the flowers, which are usually altogether wanting, or, if present, unfruitful; they consist of two or three leaves strongly thickened at the base. Where seeds are produced, the resulting seed- lings show no special hereditary tendency to the formation of bulbs. The bulbs borne in the inflorescence also usually produced, on germination, normal plants with no well-marked tendency in this direction; while, on the other hand, the terrestrial buds displayed the inherited tendency very strongly. Conduction of Sap through the Secondary Wood.§ —Herr A. Wieler has investigated, in the case of a number of different dicotyledonous trees, * Bied. Centr., 1888, pp. 265-7. See Journ. Chem. Soc. Lond., Abstracts, 1888, p- 742. + Ber. Deutsch. Bot. Gesell., vi. (1888) pp. 109-12 (1 pl.). ¢ ‘ Ueb. einige vivipare Pflanzen u. d. Erscheinung d. Apogamie b. derselben,’ 63 pp., Bautzen, 1887. See Bot. Ztg., xlvi. (1888) p. 332. § Pringsheim’s Jahrb. f. Wiss. Bot., xix. (1888) pp. 82-137 (1 pl.). ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 769 the part played by the secondary wood in the conduction of sap, and the importance of the anastomosing of the veins in the leaves for the supply of water to the transpiring surfaces. In all the trees examined, with possibly the exception of the horse- chestnut, only a portion of the alburnum of the branches has the power of conduction, and even this portion displays the property in very different degrees, the last annual ring exhibiting it the most strongly. The method of examination was by causing the wood to absorb a soluble pigment, and the same results were obtained with fuchsin and with methylene-blue. The different vessels in the same vascular bundle display very different properties in this respect. The author confirms Pfeffer’s statement that many soluble aniline-pigments pass readily through the protoplasm. Development of Wheat.*—M. Balland states that an ear of corn rapidly increases in weight and attains its maximum about the thirtieth day after flowering ; it then diminishes progressively during the fifteen days which precede harvest. The grain follows the same course, but it attains its maximum a few days later. Inversely the other parts of the ear (the rachis and chaff) diminish up to the moment when the grain attains its maximum; they are then to the grains nearly in the pro- portion of one to four. While the grain grows, the acidity of the nutrient fluids diminishes, and we are able to follow the condensation of the soluble alluminoid matter simultaneously with the transformation of the sugar into starch. Root-pressure.t—Mr. C. B. Clarke represents the accepted doctrine regarding root-pressure thus :—‘‘ Another kind of motion of water in the plant, depending not on suction but on pressure from below, is caused by the roots. It is the root-pressure which forces out drops at particular points of the leaves.” The author denies that root-pressure exists in any case, and maintains that the whole mechanical fluid action in plants must be considered in accordance with the laws of capillarity. Curvature of Plants.{—M. F. Elving states that it is well known that plants grow in a certain direction, and that this direction is deter- mined by their weight, by radiation, humidity, &c., and that they seek to regain their normal position by characteristic curvatures if they are in any way disturbed. Ifa tube containing Phycomyces nitens is placed horizontally, the first effect noticeable is a movement of the protoplasm towards the uppermost wall of the cell; in consequence of this, growth takes place to a greater extent in the upper part. It may be taken as a general rule, then, that flexion of a stem favours the development of the collenchyma on the convex side, while hindering it on the other side. Influence of certain Rays of the Solar Spectrum on Root-absorp- tion and on the Growth of Plants.s—Mr. A. B. Griffiths and Mrs. Griffiths daily exposed mustard and bean plants grown in calcareous soil, to which had been added a definite amount of ferrous sulphate, to various portions of the solar spectrum. Incineration of the plants showed that the greatest amount of ferric oxide was contained in those exposed to the * Comptes Rendus, evi. (1888) pp. 1610-2. + Journ. of Bot., xxvi. (1888) pp. 201-3. { Morot’s Journ. de Bot., ii. (1888) pp. 197-200. § Proc. Roy. Soc. Edin., cxxiii. (1887) pp. 125-9. 770 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO yellow-green rays D-E, under the influence of which rays also the greatest amount of oxygen is evolved. Examination of the plant for sulphur as representing the albuminoids, which must have derived their sulphur from the ferrous sulphate, showed that the maximum of albuminoids was attained under the influence of the rays D-E, Absorption of Nitrogen by Plants.*—Herren Helriegel and Will- farth have made some experiments in boxes in which were sown oats, peas, buckwheat, &c. It was found that those of the order Papilionacew were able to grow and flourish long after all the nitrogen present in the soil had been absorbed by them, whereas oats, &c., only grew as long as there was any of the nitrogen left that had been originally contained in the seed, &c. (3) Irritability. Method of Studying Geotropism.t—Miss A. Bateson and Mr. F. Darwin describe a method for studying geotropic curvatures. If a flower-stalk remains for an hour or two pinned down to a board ina horizontal position, so that no curvature can take place, a well-known result is seen on its being released. The freed ends spring up with a sudden geotropic curvature. The method employed by the authors is based upon this fact. Geotropic stems were immovably fixed at various angles, and the amounts of curvature occurring on release were taken as representing the geotropic stimulus corresponding to each position. Whatever may be the faults of the method, it has one merit, that the organ is exposed to a constant instead of to a varying stimulus, as must be the case if the stem is free to curve during the period of stimulation. The authors then give the results of a series of experiments made with the young flower-stalks of plantain (Plantago lanceolata). Chemotactic Movements of Bacteria, Flagellata, and Volvocineez. —Dr. W. Pfeffer in a previous work has shown that the spermatozooids of ferns and Selaginella are attracted by malic acid, and that this serves to conduct them into the archegonial canal. In the present paper t he proves that motile bacteria, colourless Flagellata, and some chlorophyll- containing Volvocinez are in a similar manner enticed or dispersed by certain substances, a phenomenon which he designates by the term “‘chemo- taxis.” The method of investigation is very simple. A capillary tube closed at one end, from 0:03 to 0:08 mm. wide, and 4 to 7 mm. long, is furnished with a definite solution, and its open end pushed into the drop of fluid containing the organisms in a state of equal distribution. To obtain a striking congregation of bacteria for instance, it suffices to introduce a capillary tube charged with a 2 to 4 per cent. meat sc tion in a drop containing B. termo. In a few seconds there is alr dya marked confluence of the bacteria, and in from 1 to 2 minute. the anterior part of the tube is thickly filled with them. The author worked out completely the chemotaxis of Bacterium termo, Spirillum undula, and Bodo saltans; Bacillus subtilis, Spirillum rubrum, * Bied. Centr., 1888, pp. 228-30. See Journ. Chem. Soc. Lond., Abstracts, i888, p. 742. + Ann. of Bot., ii. (1888) 65-8. ¢ Untersuch, Bot. Inst. Tiibingen, ii. (1888) p.582. Cf. this Journal, 1884, p. 412. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. Vwial typhoid bacillus, Spirillum cholere asiatice, &c., were also investigated with positive results. On the other hand, the colourless Flagellate, Astasia proteus and Chilomonas paramecium were found to be absolutely non-chemotactic, as also were the green Flagellata and all the Infusoria investigated (12); the latter indeed seemed to possess no chemotactic susceptibility whatever, oxygen excepted. The organisms examined were found to be positively or negatively chemotactic according to the nature of the stimulant material, and sensitive in different degrees. A given substance may act upon one organism, but not upon another, e.g. dextrin excites B. termo to an extraordinary degree, but not Spirillum. Among inorganic bodies the salts of potassium in general, and among the organic bodies peptones particularly act as lures, the carbo- hydrates less, whilst glycerin has no effect. Negative chemotaxis or dispersion of the organisms is usually pro- duced by alcohol, acid and alkaline reactions, and by a too great concentration of the stimulant material. The nutritive value of any substance, and its stimulant capacity, stand in no direct relation; glycerin, for instance, possesses no chemotactic action, although an excellent nutritive material for many bacteria. How extremely sensitive organisms are to certain substances is shown by the fact that B. termo is attracted by even a 0:001 per cent. peptone solution. The paper contains numerous remarks on the convenient application of chemotaxis for catching certain organisms, which if correct may be found of service in shortening the time taken in obtaining pure cultivations. M. J. Massart* has repeated, and to a large extent confirmed, Dr. Pfeffer’s observations. The Flagellata, Tetramitrus rostratus and Chilomonas paramecium, stated by Pfeffer to be non-chemotactic, he finds, on the other hand, to be very sensitive. (4) Chemical Changes (including Respiration and Fermentation). Changes of Substance and Force connected with Respiration.t— Dr. H. Rodewald continues his observations on the chemical and mechanical changes which accompany the process of respiration of plants. The average value of the fraction = he finds to be 1:061; for 1 ccm. of CO, there is given off 4°37 cal., and for 1 ccm. of O, 4°46 cal. Formation of Starch from various substances.{—By immersing filaments of Spirogyra in the substances in question, Herr T. Bokorny finds that plants have the power of producing starch from various sub- stances of the nature of alcohols, as well as from glucoses, viz. from methylol (probably in consequence of its splitting up readily into formic aldehyd and methyl alcohol), glycol, glycerin, and mannite. All these substances agree in being compounds of hydroxyl OH with carbon and hydrogen. * CR. Soc. R. Bot. Belg., 1888, pp. 88-98. + Pringsheim’s Jahrb. f. Wiss. Bot., xix. (1888) pp. 221-94 (1pl.). Cf this Journal, ante, p. 455. t Ber. Deutsch. Bot. Gesell., vi. 1888) pp. 116-20. 772 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO y. General. Relationship between Ants and Plants in the Tropics.*—Herr A. F. W. Schimper publishes the results of observations on the nature of the connection between myrmecophilous plauts and the ants which inhabit them in tropical America. The leaf-cutting ants are probably the most powerful enemy to which vegetation is subject ia tropical and subtropical America. Other species of ants, on the other hand, afford protection to vegetation by destroying or keeping aloof the leaf-cutting ants and other enemies of plants. The orange trees in the province of Canton in China are in this way protected by nests of tree-dwelling ants. With regard to myrmecophilous trees and shrubs, the author states that in most cases no special adaptation in the structure of the plant to its habitation by ants can be proved. In other cases, however, observed by him in Brazil, it is evident that such adaptations do exist, and this is especially the case with Cecropia adenopus. In this and in other species of the genus, the ants inhabit hollow cavities in the tubular inter- nodes, which serve, in the first place, to add to the flexibility of the branches, but also as a dwelling-place for countless myriads of ants. The protective function of these ants is shown by the facts that in every specimen in which these cavities were not inhabited by ants, the leaves were found to be entirely destroyed by leaf-cutting ants. In another species of Cecropia which is not inhabited by ants, and which does not possess these cavities, the tree is protected from the visits of the leaf- cutting ants by the extreme smoothness of the stem, which is covered by a coating of wax. In C. adenopus a special source of nutriment is fur- nished to the ants which inhabit it, in a quantity of ovoid or pear-shaped bodies, which cover the under side of the base of the leaf-stalk with a velvety coating. These bodies, known as “ Miiller’s corpuscles,” are probably metamorphosed organs for the excretion of mucilage or resin. They are but slightly attached to the hairs, and are very rich in albumi- noid substances and in fatty oils. They are entirely wanting in the species of Cecropia which are not inhabited by ants. In Acacia sphzro- cephala, the spines of which are inhabited by ants, similar bodies, which serve for their nourishment, are found at the apex of the pinne. If these bodies are removed they are formed again with great rapidity. Extra-floral nectaries are regarded by Schimper, along with Belt and Delpino, as having for their primary function the attraction of friendly ants which proteet the plant from the attacks of leaf-cutting species. The formation of the nectar in these nectaries may extend over a period of several weeks. The nectaries are not in themselves directly service- able to the plant, as can be shown by removing them, when the health and vigour of the plant are not injured. The sugar in the nectar is undoubtedly a product of the assimilating power of the leaf itself. Extra-floral nectaries are especially numerous in the Tropics where the leaf-cutting ants most abound; and they are found most frequently in the floral region, where they are most serviceable in rendering protection to the organs of reproduction. * «Die Wechselbeziehungen zw. Pflanzen u. Ameisen im tropischen Amerika,’ 96 pp. and 3 pls., Jena, 1888. See Naturforscher, xxi, (1888) pp. 171-4, Cf. this Journal, unte, p. 87. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETO. Ta Deposition of Calcareous Incrustations on Fresh-water Plants.*— Herr N. Pringsheim maintains that the deposition of a calcareous incrustation on plants growing in fresh water is necessarily connected with the process of assimilation, and takes place only in the light. This can be shown by experimenting on Chara, Nitella, Confervacer, the leaves of some mosses (Mnium) or aquatic flowering plants, with a satu- rated solution of calcium bicarbonate. The lime-salt used is by no means indifferent, no precipitation taking place from neutral calcium carbonate. The deposition is accompanied by the evolution of bubbles of oxygen, and is evidently a function dependent on transpiration. Action of Ether on Plant-life.;—Dr. G. Brenstein finds that an atmosphere saturated with ether kills barley and wheat sprouts within thirty minutes. Five minutes’ exposure affected the plants, the tips of the leaves, consequently the oldest portions, being first killed, whilst the basal portions of the leaves, and therefore the youngest parts, resisted longest. EXxperiments made with portions of Hlodea canadensis showed that five minutes’ exposure to the ether atmosphere sufficed to kill the plant ; the thin texture of the leaf of this plant seems to make it more permeable to ether than are the leaves of wheat and barley. B. CRYPTOGAMIA. Cryptogamia Vascularia. Systematic Position of Isoetes.i—Dr. 8. H. Vines points out the objections to the position now generally assigned to the Isoetee—that proposed by Sachs and Goebel, according to which they, together with the Selaginellacezs, make up the class Ligulate. He suggests, on the other hand, that they are a heterosporous form—and the only one hitherto recognized as such—of the Eusporangiate Filicine. In its general habit, and in the absence of sporangiferous cones and of specially differentiated sporophylls, Isoetes resembles Filices, as also in the more general features of its embryogeny. The velum of Isoetes may also be homologous with the indusium of many Filices. Development of the Root of Equisetum.s—Mr. J. R. Vaizey has investigated the origin of the double endoderm of the root of Equisetum. He finds that the apical cell gives rise to two kinds of tissue, the outer layer or cylinder constituting the exomeristem, which incloses the central cord constituting the endomeristem of Russow. The exomeri- stem is distinguished from first to last by its cells being arranged in radial rows, while those of the endomeristem are not so arranged, and are smaller than those of the exomeristem. Muscinez., Reproduction of Thamnium alopecurum.|—Herr J- B. Schnetzler describes specimens of Thamniwm alopecurum, which were fructifying freely, and the sporanges filled with well-developed spores. The author placed the moss under water; it continued to grow all the winter, and * Pringsheim’s Jahrb. f. Wiss. Bot., xix. (1888) pp. 138-54, + Arch. Pharm., xxv. pp. 918-24. Cf. Journ. Cliem. Soc. Lond., 1888, Abstr., p. 624. ¢ Ann. of Bot., ii. (1888) pp. 117-23. § Ibid., pp. 123-4, | Bull. Soc, Vaud. Sci. Nat., xxiii, (1888) pp. 161-4. SO. 3G 774 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO in the spring formed a number of new shoots. After growing under water the moss exactly resembled a sub-lacustrine variety of 7’. alope- curum, which grows at a depth of 200 metres in the Lake of Geneva. On examining the young shoots, brown filaments which were formed of cells with oblique septa were seen. On these filaments or rhizoids gemmz were developed, Protonema of Schistostega osmundacea.*—Herr F. Noll describes the mode of vegetative reproduction of the protonema of this moss, and explains its shining appearance by its peculiar construction, which causes its lenticular cells to concentrate all the light that falls upon them on their posterior wall, and to illuminate intensely the chlorophyll-grains which collect on these walls. The rays which enter these cells in a parallel direction are so reflected that they again emerge parallel or slightly convergent, by which the bright shining appearance is brought about. Physiological and Comparative Anatomy of Sphagnacee.f—In this treatise Herr E. Russow treats especially of the anatomy of the leaves of Sphagnum from a physiological point of view. He shows that not only the leaves on both the erect and the pendent branches, but also the separate parts of the leaf, are adapted, by their structure, to the various requirements as regards firmness. This firmness is chiefly secured by the stiffening of the hyaline cells by means of annular and spiral fibres. These occur in all the cells of the leaves of the pendent branches, and in those of the basal half of the cells of the erect branches, in the form of bands projecting slightly into the cell-cavity. In the cells of the upper half of the leaves on the erect branches there are, on the other hand, a larger or smaller number of broad stiffening plates or bands placed at right angles to the cell-wall. The diameter of these plates at right angles to the cell-wall decreases from the apex towards the base of the leaf. It is chiefly by these plates that the surface of the leaf becomes folded in; they run across the leaf, and are united by anastomoses running in the direction of the length of the leaf. The leaves belonging to the fertile stem and branches, which are usually completely concealed, have no similar stiffening-bands; they consist simply of uniform chlorophyllous cells, their main function being the nutrition of the sporogonium. The pseudo-fibres of the stem-leaves must be distinguished from the true fibres of the hyaline cells, being nothing more than portions of cell-wall which remain behind between the orifices resulting from resorption. The pores of the hyaline cells have, in all the species which do not permanently live in water, their margins strongly thickened in a peculiar way, for the purpose of preventing the rupture of the margins, and in order to facilitate the absorption and the retention of water. The stiffening-bands increase the inner surface of the hyaline cells, and hence their capillary power. The position of the chlorophyll- cells is determined by the necessity of protection from light. Hither on both sides or on the one most exposed to the light they are partially or entirely covered on both sides by the hyaline cells. When this is not the case, the free walls of the chlorophyll-cells are imbricately apicu- * Versamml. Deutscher Naturf. u. Aerzte, Wiesbaden, Sept. 21, 1887. See Bot. Centralbl., xxxiv. (1888) p. 399. + ‘Zur Anat. resp. physiolog. u. vergleich. Anat. d. Torfmoose,’ 35 pp, and 5 pls., Dorpat, 1887. See Bot. Ztg., xlvi. (1888) p. 335. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETO. 775 late, and the light can reach them only after being repeatedly refracted in the cells. In the pendent branches, where the leaves are better pro- tected from light, the two kinds of cell lie side by side without covering one another, but the hyaline cells are more tumid. Further protection from the light is afforded by papille, and the deposition of pigment in the cell-walls, giving the living plant a brown appearance, especially in sunny spots. The use of these morphological characters for purposes of classifica- tion is then discussed. Forms of Sphagnum.*—Dr. Réll defends his previously published views against the objections of Warnstorf, and adduces additional arguments in favour of classifying the numberless forms of bog-mosses into a number of series passing into one another by insensible gradations, rather than into sharply differentiated species and varieties. Algee. Classification of Chlorophycee.t—Dr. J. B. de Toni proposes the following classification of the green algew, viz. :— Order I. ConFervomwsEzZ. Suborder 1. Oogamz. Families :—Coleochetacex, Mycoideacer, (idogoniacez, Spheropleacew, Cylindrocapsacee. Suborder 2. Isogamz. Families:—Ulvacee, Chetophoracee, Ulothricacee, Cladophoracew, Pithophoracee, Pheo- thamnacee, Trentepohliacee. Order II. SrpHonez. Suborder 1. Oogamez. Family :—Vaucheriacee. Suborder 2. Anogamzx. Families :—Botrydiacew, Phyllo- siphonacee, Bryopsidaceze, Derbesiacee, Spongodiacee, Udoteacez, Valoniaceze, Caulerpacez, Dasycladacee. Order III. ProrococcipEZ. Ist Family. Volvocacee. Subfamilies:—Volvocee (Oogames, Isogamez), Hematococcee, Cylindromonadee. 2nd Family. Palmellacee. Subfamilies :—Ccenobiex (Hydro- dictyez, Pediastree, Scenedesmezx), Pseudo-ccenobier, Hremobiee (Rhaphidiex, Characiee, Endospheriex), Tetrasporee, Dictyospheriez, Nephrocyties, Palmellezx. Order IV. DrsmipioIibEz. Ist Family. Desmidiaceze. Subfamilies :—Hudesmidiex, Didy- moidez (Closteriex, Docidiew, Micrasteriez). 2nd Family. Zygnemacez. Subfamilies :—Mesocarper, Zyg- nemeee. Classification of Confervoides.{—Prof. A. Hansgirg points out that two quite different genera of alge have been confounded under the name Aphanochxte, viz.:—(1) the true Aphanochete Berth., distinguished by its vegetative cells being furnished with stiff bristles, which appears to be nearly allied to Coleochzxte, but differing in having no oogamous mode of reproduction, and in its zoogonidia being provided with four vibratile cilia instead of two ; and (2) Aphanochzte A. Br. = Herposteiron Nag., belonging to the Chetophoracez. * Bot. Centralbl., xxxiv. (1888) pp. 510-4, 338-42, 374-7, 385-9. Cf. this Journal, 1886, p. 108. + Notarisia, iii. (1888) pp. 447-53. ¢ Flora, lxxi. (1888) pp. 211-23. 342 776 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO Dr. Hansgirg proposes the following classification of the Confervoides or Nematophycer :— A. Vegetative cells uninucleated. 1. CoLEoCHETACER. a. Anoogame :—Aphanochexte Berth., Chetopeltis Berth. ; doubtful, Ochlochzete Thw., Acrochzte Prings., Pheophila Hauck, Bolbocoleon Prings. b. Oogame :—Coleochzte Bréb. 2. CHDOGONIACER. (Edogonium Link, Bulbochete Ag. . CYLINDROCAPSACER. Cylindrocapsa Reinsch. . TRENTEPOHLIACE. a. Chroolepidacese :—Trentepohlia Mart., Leptosira Bazi., Trichophilus Web., Ctenocladus Bzi., Microthamnion Ktz., Chlorotylium Ktz., Pilinia Ktz., Acroblaste Reinsch, Chlorothamnion Bzi. ; doubtful, Bulbotrichia Ktz. b. Mycoidacese :—Phycopeltis Mill., Mycoidea Cunn. . ULoOTHRICHACER. a. Ulothrichess :—Hormidium Ktz., Schizogonium Ktz., Hormiscia Aresch., Ulothrix Ktz., Gleotila Ktz. ex p. b. Chetophoracez :—Stigeoclonium Ktz., Endoclonium Szym., Entocladia Reinke, Chetophora Schr., Draparnaldia Ag., Chetonema Now., Herposteiron Nig., Reinkia Bzi., Chloroclonium Bzi., Lithobryon Rupr. c. Ulvacee:—Ulva L., Monostroma Thr., Enteromorpha Link., Zetterstedtia Ag., Ilea Ag., Diplonema Kjell., Schizomeris Ktz., Protoderma Ktz., Dermatophyton Pet., Ulvella Crouan, Prasiola Ag. B. Vegetative cells 2-multinucleated. 6. ConFERVACER. a. Conferves :—Conferva L., Microspora Thr., Chaetomorpha Ktz., Binuclearia Wittr., Rhizoclonium Ktz.; doubtful, Confervites Brongn., Dictyothele Bzi., Urospora Aresch. b. Cladophoracese :—Cladophora Ktz., Chloropteris Mont., Periphlegmatium Ktz., Gongrosira Ktz. ex p. c. Pithophoraces :—Pithophora Wittr. C. Vegetative cells multinucleated. 7. SPHHROPLEACER. Spheroplea Ag. New Genera of Perforating Alge.*—MM. E. Bornet and C. Flahault refer to the two alge described by Lagerheim + as perforating the shells of molluses, viz. Codiolum polyrhizwm and Mastigocoleus testarum. They point out that the so-called chroococcoid cells of the latter alga do not belong to it at all, but to an altogether distinct species, which they’ now describe as the type of a new genus under the name Hyella cxespitosa. The genus Hyella is regarded by the authors as the highest type yet known of the order Chamesiphonacee. It forms, when young, circular patches of an olive colour composed of radiating filaments permeating mem co iy 4 * Morot’s Journ. de Bot., ii. (1888) pp. 161-5. ¢ See this Journal, 1886, p. 665, 1887, p. 285. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 777 the chitinous coat of the shell, and striking branches downwards into the test. Each filament is composed of a number of cells which readily separate from one another, and which may divide internally into secon- dary cells, and then present a remarkable chroococcoid appearance, the cells thus formed being without doubt organs of propagation. In addition to these Hyella produces sporangia resembling those of Dermocarpa, usually terminal, pyriform, and containing a large number of minute globular spores. The organism described by Lagerheim as Codiolum polyrhizum is in reality the sporange of an alga most nearly allied to the Siphonocladacee, and named by the present writers Gomontia polyrhiza. The sporanges, however, differ from any hitherto known. Gomontia forms green patches, especially on dead shells, composed of branched segmented filaments. The sporanges result from a total or partial usually unilateral swelling of one of the cells of the horizontal filaments. From these sporanges proceed two kinds of reproductive bodies, biciliated zoospores which conjugate without germination, and aplanospores. These aplano- spores do not germinate directly, but give birth to bodies resembling the sporanges from which they spring. After remaining for a time in this form, they put out rhizoids into the shell, or divide into from 2 to 8 secondary aplanospores. Ulothrix and Stichococcus.*—M. E. de Wildeman agrees with Hansgirg in regarding Ulothrix nitens Men. and U. flaccida Ktz. as forms of the same species, but differs from that authority in his view that Stichococcus bacillaris belongs to the cycle of evolution of the same species. Ulothrix undoubtedly has a tendency to break up into isolated cells bearing a strong analogy to those of Stichococcus, but in their filamentous condition there is always a sufficient difference between them. M. de Wildeman has found, associated with U. tenerrima Ktz., another filamentous alga which also has a tendency to break up into isolated cells, and which he identifies with Gleotila. He suggests that it is this alga which is really another phase of Stichococcus. Trentepohlia.j—M. E. de Wildeman defines the characters of several species of this genus, and confirms the observation that species of Trentepohlia enter into the composition of Coccogonium and of other genera of lichens. Diatoms from a Trygon.{—Dr. G. B. de Toni has examined the contents of the digestive apparatus of a specimen of Trygon violacea, caught in the Adriatic. Besides a few filaments of Ulothria implexa and some fragments of an undetermined Cladothrixz, he found a large number of diatoms, of which two, Isthmia enervis and Rhabdonema arcuatum, were additions to the diatom-flora of the Adriatic. Fungi. Luminosity of Fungi.§—Mr. W. Phillips enumerates the following species of fungus as certainly known to be luminous :— Agaricus olearius from Europe, A. igneus, Amboyna, A. noctilucens, Manila, A. Gardner, Brazil, A. lampas, Australia, A. Hmerici, Andaman Isles, Polyporus * CR. Soc. R. Bot. Belg., 1888, pp. 80-7. Cf. this Journal, ante, p. 632. + CR. Soc. R. Bot. Bele. 1888, pp. 140-8. t Atti R. Istit. Veneto ‘Sci., vi. (1888) 5 pp. § Proce. Woolhope Club. See Rey. Mycol., x. (1888) p. 120. 778 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO annosus, and P. sulphwreus, Europe, and Didymium sp., Jamaica. The luminosity of the following species, all from Europe, rests on more doubtful observations :—Agaricus fascicularis, Corticium cceruleum and lactewm, and Cladosporium umbrinum. To these must be added the structures known as Rhizomorpha, probably the mycelium of other fungi. The author believes that the seat of the phosphorescence is always the mycelium, and that when the case appears to be otherwise, it is due to a mycelium parasitic on the fungus, and imparting to the latter its luminosity. Conidiferous Form of Polyporus biennis.*—M. Boudier has met with a curious form of Polyporus biennis Bull., which may be specified under the name of Ptychogaster alveolatus. It was composed of two oblong club-shaped bodies, of from 23 to 3 cm, in height and 1 em. in breadth ; the pedicels were united in a common stipe some mm. from the base. These club-shaped bodies were of a reddish-white colour, and were tomentose on the surface, which was covered with a slightly prominent network composed of roundish angular or labyrinthiform pores. Classification of Basidiomycetes.{—In the last-published part of_his ‘ Mycological Observations’ Herr O. Brefeld proposes the primary clas- sification of the Basidiomycetes into two groups, PRoTOBAsSIDIOMYCETES and AvrosasipiomycetEs. In the former the basidia are septated and pluricellular, each cell producing one spore; in the latter the basidia are unicellular, usually giving birth to two or four spores. The Protobasidiomycetes are again divided into three families, Pilacrex, Auriculariex, and Tremellinee, distinguished by the internal or external position of the basidia and the mode of their septation. In the Pilacree the basidium is septated transversely, and is composed of four superposed cells, and the fructification is angiocarpous, an envelope being formed round the basidial apparatus, which must perish in order to set the spores free. In the Auriculariee the basidium is also septated transversely, but the fructification is gymnocarpous. The Tremellines have their basidia septated longitudinally, the primitive mother-cell being divided into four by two septa at right angles to one another; each of the four cells is a long sterigma terminated by a spore. The Autobasidiomycetes are divided into the following ten families, according to the degree of protection of the fructification :— Dacryomycetes. Gymnocarpi J Clavariee. { Thelephorez. Tulostomee (Lycoperdacez). Hymenogastree. Nidulariez. Phalloidez. Hydnee. Hemi-angiocarpi | Agaricinee. Polyporez. Angiocarpi Comparing this with the ordinary classification, the group usually designated Hymenomycetes includes the last two families of Brefeld’s * Soc. Bot. et Mycol. de France, Session Cryptogamique, 1887 (1888) pp. 55-8. + ‘Unters. aus d. Gesammtgeb. d. Mykologie,’ Heft vii., 178 pp. and 11 pls., Leipzig, 1888. See Morot’s Journ. de Bot., ii. (1888) Rey. Bibl., p. 69. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETO. 779 Protobasidiomycetes, and the angiocarpous and hemi-angiocarpous Autobasidiomycetes. The Tremellini in the ordinary sense of the term include the author’s Auriculariez, Tremellinee, and the greater part of the Dacryomycetes. The angiocarpous Autobasidiomycetes correspond to the Gasteromycetes. The Pilacreze consist of the single genus Pilacre. It possesses a peridium composed of the ultimate ramifications of the hyphe, while the lower parts of the same hyphe give birth to the basidia. The germinating spore developes into a mycelium, a portion of which grows beneath the surface of the nutrient fluid, while the aerial portion gives birth to conidia. Pilacre may be regarded as a Gasteromycete with its basidia septated transversely. The fructification of the Auriculariez: consists of irregular masses enveloped in abundant mucilage; it is gymnocarpous, the basidia being formed on the surface ; each of the four superposed cells of which they are composed puts out a long broad sterigma which traverses the whole of the mucilaginous envelope, and terminates in a large reniform spore. Brefeld divides it into two genera :—Auricularia, with which Hirneola is united, and a new genus T'achaphantium, composed of a single species, which forms small warts on the bark of branches of the lime. The Tremellinez have a gymnocarpous fructification, and the basidia are divided longitudinally by two septa at right angles to one another. It comprises the genera Exidia, Ulocolla, Craterocolla, Sebacina, Tremella, aud Gyrocephalus. The new genus Ulocolla (formed of Tremella saccha- rina and foliacea) is distinguished by the mode of germination of the spores, which resembles that of Hxidia, the spore dividing into two cells, each of which puts out a short filament ending in a group of conidia having the form of straight rods. Craterocolla is also a new genus, formed from the single species Tremella Cerasi, distinguished by conidi- ferous filaments differing greatly in appearance from those which give birth to the basidia. Gyrocephalus is also composed of a single species, Guepinia helvelloides Tul. Of the Autobasidiomycetes the only family treated of in this section of the work is the Dacryomycetes, composed of the genera Dacryomyces, Guepinia, and Dacryomitra, usually placed under Clavarieex, sometimes under Tremellini. ‘The Dacryomycetes are distinguished by their basidia having the form of an elongated bifurcate club, bearing at its extremity two long arms or sterigmata, which narrow gradually up- wards, each ending in a single large spore. The characters of the four genera are given by the author in detail. New Tubercularia.*—M. N. Patouillard, while examining some fungi sent from the Jura, noticed on the stems and leaves of some grasses small white spots, which presented a remarkable structure. These little tubercles were round, from 0:5 to 2 mm. in diameter, and sessile, hyaline, and gelatinous. Under the Microscope these tubercles were seen to be composed of colourless and branching filaments; a slight swelling can be observed at the end of these, and this forms an ovoid mass, which is the commencement of the spore. This spore is Separated by a septum, and below this the filament emits a lateral branch which continues to elongate. The author gives a diagnosis of this plant, to which he has given the name of Tubercularia chztospora. * Soc. Bot. et Mycol. de France, Session Cryptogamique, 1887 (1888) pp. 29-30. 780 SUMMARY OF OURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO Calostoma Desv. (Mitremyces Nees).*—Mr. G. Massee discusses the morphology of the genus Calostoma Desy. He was enabled in one case especially to follow the course of development from the period of differentiation of the gleba to that of dehiscence. The structure was found to be in every respect homologous with the peridium of the Phalloidex, but differs in being entirely deliquescent at an early period. Calostoma is morphologically most nearly related to the genus Geaster, the homology in many respects being absolute, the differences at the same time extreme. The external peridium of Geaster, which splits in a stellate manner when ripe, corresponds to the exoperidium and endo- peridium in Calostoma, the inner peridium in Geaster being the morpho- logical equivalent of the spore-sac in Calostoma. Although the species of the genus Calostoma are, with two exceptions, restricted to narrow areas, the genus is widely distributed, extending from Massachusetts to the south of Tasmania, and from New Granada to Tasmania, with a vertical range from near the sea-level to 9000 feet in the SikkimHimalayas. The author concludes with descriptions of the various species of the genus. Pimina, a new Genus of Hyphomycetes.t—Mr. W. B. Groves describes a new genus of Hyphomycetes parasitic on the hyphe of Polyactis, and on the leaves of Passijflora princeps and P. quadrangu- laris from Monkstown, Dublin. Pimina:—Hyphe steriles repentes, hyaline y. subcolorate; fertiles erectw, fuliginem, sursum basidiis coronate. Conidia simplicia, hyalina, acrogena. Fungi of Fruit-trees.{—Herr F. v. Thiimen enumerates 4202 species of parasitic fungus which attack 77 different kinds of fruit. The sweet chestnut appears to have the largest number of enemies, as many as 326 species, and the vine comes next with 323. The author remarks that when the same fungus appears on different organs of the same plant, it is constantly described under different names. Parasitism of the Truffle$—M. H. Bonnet states that M. Tulasne first observed truffles entirely covered by their mycelium. Numerous white cylindrical threads were noticed, and these adhered to particles of earth by the extremity of their branches. Microscopical examination of these threads shows them to be composed of septated cylindrical fila- ments which are straight and parallel to one another. As to the anatomical relation of the mycelium with the surface of the fungus, the filaments which compose the first are all connected with the surface of the truffle, and it is not at all easy to discover where the peridium separates itself from its byssoid envelope. Fungus Parasitic on the Pine-apple.||-M. J. de Seynes, in a recent work on the formation of acrospores, described a Hyphomycete belonging to the genus Sporoschisma, which he calls S. paradoxum. In this paper he adds more particulars about the same species. This fungus vegetates in the pulp of the fruit of the pine-apple. The mycelium is composed of filaments which intertwine with the elements of the parenchyma of the host; these filaments are colourless, and but * Ann. of Bot., ii. (1888) pp. 25-45. ¢ Journ. of Bot., xxvi. (1888) p. 206. t+ ‘Die Pilze der Obstgewiachse,’ 126 pp., Vienna, 1887. See Bot. Centralbl., Exxiv. (1888) p. 307. § Rey. Mycol., x. (1888) pp. 69-73. Cf. this Journal, 1887, p. 791. || Soe. Bot. et Mycol. de France, Session Cryptogamique, 1887 (1888) pp. 26-30. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 781 little branched. The sporophore appears first as a small spherical eminence which becomes divided off by a septum from the mycelial cell. The sporophores bear at their summit the spores or conidia, which are unilocular and cylindrical. Fungus Parasitic on the Salt-fish.*—Herr J. Brunchorst describes a mould-fungus parasitic on the salt-fish, and very destructive to it (Torula pulvinata Sace., Wallerina ichthyophaga Johan-Olsen). It forms on the skin brownish, more or less hemispherical patches 1-3 mm. in diameter, or a brownish coating. It produces conidiophores, from which are abstricted brown spherical smooth conidia 4-5 » in diameter, which, on germinating, divide into a kind of parenchymatous tissue which produces root-like hyphe and flask-shaped conidiophores. “Rouge” of the Scotch Fir.t— According to MM. Bartet and Vuillemin, the disease which is exceedingly destructive to Scotch firs in the neighbourhood of Nancy, known as “rouge,” is quite distinct from the “rouille,” and probably identical with that known in Germany as “ Schiitte.” It makes its appearance in the form of brown spots on the leaves, the spermogonia of Leptostroma Pinastri Desm. The best remedy for the disease they found to be the use of “‘ bouillie bordelaise,” a preparation containing copper, which is also very efficacious against the Peronospora of the vine and of the potato. Parasites of the Peridinieze.{—According to M. A. Dangeard, the Peridiniez form a very interesting group, but as yet imperfectly known. The species which furnished a good part of the material for this paper was Glenodinium cinctum Ehrb., which is very common in fresh water. The body of this species is covered with a membrane of cellulose, its anterior part being shorter than the posterior; under the membrane yellow chromatophores may be seen. Multiplication takes place by longitudinal division, and spherical resting-spores having a thick membrane are formed. The author then goes on to discuss the nature of the endogenous germs which exist in the Peridiniew. Inthecase of Glenodinium cinctum the protoplasm incloses from one to four germs, and sometimes even a greater number may be observed; these germs are spherical or sometimes elliptical, and after a time give rise to an Olpidium. The endogenous germs do not belong then to the Peridiniex, but are parasitic structures. The author describes various species of Chytridium in which the sporangia remain exterior to the host. C. echinatwm was met with on Glenodinium cinctum; it is easily distinguished by the form of its sporange. The genus Chytridium can be divided into three sections, in the first two there is only one opening in the sporange for the escape of the zoospores, while in the third there are several. Disease attacking Amygdalez.§s—M. P. Vuillemin describes a disease which attacked various Amygdalew in Lorraine in 1887. The first examination revealed the parasitic nature of the disease; the laminz of the leaves, petioles, and fruits were found covered with more or less numerous spots. If one of the spots is examined the spore may * Norsk Fiskeritidende, 1886, pp. 136-60, and 1888, pp. 65-80 (2 figs.) (Nor- wegian). See Bot. Centralbl., xxxiv. (1888) p. 133. + Comptes Rendus, cvi. (1888) pp. 628-30. t Morot’s Journ. de Bot., ii. (1888) pp. 126-32, 141-6 (1 pl.). § Soc. Bot. et Mycol. de France, Session Cryptogamique, 1887 (1888) pp. 40-7. 782 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO be seen frequently in the centre of the altered region. The infecting spore is composed of a thread of cells, and is able to emit simultaneously several germinating tubes. The mycelium is composed of cylindrical filaments. 'The fungus hardly seems to comport itself like an ordinary parasite, but rather like certain Sclerotinia described by Prof. de Bary. The history of this fungus is not complete, as the perithecia have not been discovered ; the conidiferous condition is, however, already known as Coryneum Beijerinckii ; this is admitted to be a stage in the evolution of a Spheria. Haplococcus reticulatus.*—Prof. W. Zopf had described under the above name a presumed parasite of the flesh of swine. ‘This he notes, however, was a mistake due to accidental contact with Lycopodium spores. He justly expects that his “ youthful error may be gently overlooked.” New Puccinia.t—Herr G. Lagerheim describes a new species of Puccinia, which he calls P. gibberosa, found on leaves of Festuca sylvatica. It is distinguished by its large uredospores provided with a great number of germinal pores, by the paraphyses among the uredospores, and by the apex of the teleutospores being furnished with a few short warts instead of a larger number of horn-like protuberances. Sexual Organs in Acidium.{—Mr. G. Masscee has noticed, on leaves of Ranunculus Ficaria, a spherical weit of interlaced hyphe, the tip of one thread situated in the centre of the mass ending in a clavate head rich in coarsely granular protoplasm. Being desirous of ascertaining whether the clavate body mentioned was in any way connected with the Aicidium, numerous young unopened peridia were cut, but without result ; it was only when sections were made through those portions of the leat first showing traces of the fungus in the form of a slight dis- colouration, or the appearance of spermogonia, that the clavate body in a ball of mycelium, which represented the initial stage of an Aicidiwm, was discovered. In this instance the object of search was in a more advanced stage, clearly showing it to be an oogonium, accompanied by an antheri- dium. The oogonium was much larger than the one first seen, in form irregularly oblong, measuring about 50 by 25 », terminal on a thread, from which it was cut off by a transverse septum, and containing finely granular protoplasm with numerous refractive globules. The author could see no trace of a nucleus. The antheridium is cylindrical, about 40 by 12 p, and, like the oogonium, filled with protoplasm and oil-globules, and terminated by a short lateral branch springing from a thread distinct from the one sup- porting the oogonium, as far as the two could be traced in the mass of mycelium. The antheridium is cut off from its supporting hypha by a transverse septum. The point of contact between the antheridium and oogonium was on the side turned away from the eye, so that the author is unable to state the exact manner in which fertilization is effected. Symbiotic Fungus in Molgulide. §—M. A. Giard has observed in the kidneys of Molgulide various species of a new genus of Fungi (Nephro- myces) living in apparent symbiosis. The genus seems most akin to * Biol. Centralbl., viii. (1888) pp. 144-5. + Ber. Deutsch. Bot. Gesell., vi. (1888) pp. 124-6 (2 figs.). } Ann. of Bot., ii. (1888) pp. 47-51 (1 pl.). § Comptes Rendus, cyi. (1888) pp. 1180-2. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 783 Catenaria Sorokine. The sporangia are always terminal. The unicellular mycelium with fine filaments, the zoosporangia, zoospores, and zygospores are described. ‘The two species especially studied were Nephromyces Molgularum from Molgula socialis Alder, and Nephromyces Sorokini from Lithonephrya eugyranda Lacaze Duthiers. M. Giard believes that the fungus is of use to the Tunicate which they infest, in helping to break up the waste products which would otherwise soon obstruct the ductless kidney. Plasmodium of Badhamia and Brefeldia.*—Mr. A. Lister finds Bad- hamia utricularis and Brefeldia maxima very favourable species for observ- ing the phenomena connected with the plasmodium of the Myxomycetes The plasmodium of B. utricularis can be kept in constant streaming movement on various kinds of woody fungi for more than a year, often covering large spaces, and it may with great facility be thrown into the sclerotium or resting-stage, in which condition it can be stored away for months, and brought back at any time into the active state by moistening. When placed in a glass box it will soon crawl up the sides, and is then in a favourable condition for observation. The application of small pieces of any digestible substance excites the streaming of the plasmodium to an extraordinary degree; but it possesses a remarkable power of discriminating between different kinds of food. Thus raw potato-starch is scarcely if at all affected, while if the starch is swollen by moderate heat, it is rapidly digested. Cotton-wool is not affected. The plasmodium can be raised from a sluggish and almost quiescent condition to one of great activity by supplying it with Agaricus campestris, Boletus flavus, or the prepared hymenial surface of Stereum hirsutwm, while the coarser fibres of the latter fungus are more slowly absorbed ; and this is also the case with Agaricus melleusand A. rubescens and still more so with A. fuscicularis. The digestive principle of the plasmodium is not confined to any special part of the mass; it may take place in the streaming interior or in the hyaline margin alone. The author is unable to suggest any explanation of the rhythmic streaming motion of the plasmodium, or of the causes of the sudden changes from a quiescent to a streaming condition, or of the impulse which occasions the change into sporangia, though the latter is no doubt favoured by hot weather. In Brefeldia maxima Mr. Lister records the remarkable observation of an instance of spore-formation not confined by any inclosing wall. The presence of nuclei and nucleoli in the plasmodium of Badhamia is easily proved. ‘They are most readily detected by suddenly dipping into absolute alcohol cover-slips which have been smeared with it, and then staining with magenta. Mycological Notes.;—M. P. A. Dangeard follows up his researches on the Chytridinez { by giving the descriptions of several new species. Chytridium Brauni grows on Apiocystis brauniana ; the sporangia are oval, and each forms at maturity from fifteen to twenty-five zoospores. C. zoophthorum resembles the preceding species, but the radicular system is much more developed and more strongly branched; it attacks Rotifers. * Ann. of Bot., ii. C588) pp. 1-24 (2 pls.). + Soc. Bot. et Mycol. de France, Session Cryptogamique, 1887 (1888) pp. 21-5. + See this Journal, 1887, p. 284. P que, (1888) pp. 21-5 784 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO In reference to Dentigera, which has been established as a section of Chytridium by M. Félix Rosen,* if all the species whose sporangia possess a basilar swelling are placed in the genus Rhizidium, the section Denti- gera ought not to remain in the genus Chytridium, but become a part of the genus Rhizidium. When the author in his former paper gave a description of the genus Spherita, he was unable to follow the development of the cysts for want of proper material. Since then the cultures have been continued, and a number of cysts obtained ; their development resembles that of the sporangia, but from the first the protoplasm is denser, and there are no sexual phenomena apparent. Their form is sometimes spherical ; more often they are elongated and elliptical. The author then describes a new Pyrenomycete which attacks Sali- cornia herbacea, under the name of Pleospora Salicorniz. Protophyta. Relationship between Phormidium and Lyngbya.{—M. M. Gomont has been able to follow the course of development of an Oscillaria, the study of which was interesting as bearing on the relationship between the genera Phormidium and Lyngbya. The plant (Oscillaria viridis), which presented all the characters of a Phormidium, was cultivated in two ways—in a vase filled with water, and on a brick which was simply kept moist. The trichomes in both cases became strongly flexuous, and were surrounded by solid sheaths. These sheaths had, however, no tendency to agglomerate, and the filaments could be separated without tearing by the aid of needles. In fact, it appeared as a true Lyngbya. It remains then proved that the same plant can possess the characters of Phormidium as well as those attributed to Lyngbya. Cultures of Cladothrix dichotoma.{—M. E. Macé states that Olado- ihrix dichotoma Cohn is a filamentous bacterium found in fresh or salt, but especially abundant in stagnant water. In the cultures made with gelatin, the colonies appear on the fourth or fifth day as very small yellowish points surrounded by a brown ring. All the cultures emitted a somewhat mouldy odour. On the filaments of the cultures true ramifi- cation could be observed ; on the side of the filament a rupture appeared which was indicative of a lateral branch. This bud enlarged and formed a cylindrical prolongation until it attained to the same size as the mother filament. On the same filament, frequently a series of these lateral branches at different stages of development could be observed, and it was thus possible to follow the transformations. The author concludes by stating that Cladothrix dichotoma appears to be a saprophytic bacterium inoffensive to men and animals. It very probably may take a large part in the calcareous concretions which are found deposited in the pipes used to conduct certain waters. The bacterium brings about the precipi- tation of lime salts around its very long filaments, in the same manner as Leptothrix buccalis occasions the precipitation of the lime salts in saliva, New Pleurocapsa.S—Herr G. Lagerheim describes a new species of this genus, hitherto exclusively marine, P. fluviatilis, growing attached to mosses on wet planks in the canal of the Dreisam near Freiburg-i.-Br. * See this Journal, 1888, p. 1002. + Soc. Bot. et Mycol. de France, Session Cryptogamique, 1887 (1888) pp. 18-21. } Comptes Rendus, evi. (1888) pp. 1622-3. § Notarisia, iii, (1888) pp. 429-31 (1 fig.) ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 785 Colouring matter of the waters of the Lake of Bret.*—Herr J. B. Schnetzler states that last autumn a red colouring matter, held in suspension in the waters of the Lake of Bret, was brought for his examination. Under the Micrcscope it appeared as irregularly lobed masses of a red colour, and consisted of micrococci. These the author identified as the zooglea of Beggiatoa roseo-persicina. A second search was made this spring in the Lake of Bret for the red colouring matter, which, however, could not be found but, instead, a bluish-black substance. When this was examined, a number of diptera were seen, the decomposi- tion of which served as the points of departure of the long colourless filaments of Beggiatoa. Saccharomyces ellipsoideus and its Use in the Preparation of Wine from Barley.t—M. G. Jacquemin gives the details of some experiments which were made to determine whether Saccharomyces ellipsoideus is a stable or merely an abnormal form of beer-yeast developed under special conditions, and liable to revert to the original form; but these experiments are not yet complete. The action of elliptical yeast on barley-wort pro- duced a liquid with an alcoholic strength of 6°, containing 60 grams of dry extract and 3 grams of ash per litre. It had the following percentage com- position :—Alcohol, 4:80; reducing sugar, 1:00; dextrine, 3°00; albu- minoids, &c., 1°28; glycerol, 0°20; succinic acid, 0:04; acetic acid, 0:02; potassium hydrogen tartrate, 0°25; ash, 0°23; water, 89°18. This liquid has an agreeable flavour, and contains a greater proportion of albuminoids and phosphates than wine from grapes. It differs from the latter in giving an abundant precipitate with tannin. In these experiments it was found that the elliptical wine-yeast remained stable for eighteen months, and it would therefore seem to be quite distinct from beer-yeast. When wine obtained in this way from barley is distilled, it yields brandy of good flavour, whilst the brandy from wine produced by beer-yeast has a bad flavour. Organic nourishment of Beer-ferment.t—M. H. Laurent has tried the nourishing effect of different organic bodies on beer-ferment, the object being to find from what organic bodies glycogen could be formed by the ferment; as there can be no doubt, after the results obtained by Hrrera,§ that this body plays the part of reserve carbohydrate in fungi as in animals, The author then gives a long list of bodies which were to a greater or less extent assimilated :—e.g., acetates, lactates, glycerin, mannite, asparagine, salicin. In many cases the presence of glycogen has been determined in these bodies. Scheuerlen’s Cancer Bacillus.|—Dr. EH. Van Ermengem concludes from experiments made on dogs, guinea-pigs, and rats that Scheuerlen’s cancer bacillusis non-pathogenic. Twoccm. of the pure cultivation were injected, and after two months all the animals were quite well. The author finds that the pseudo-cancerous bacillus is an organism very common in the air, dust, soil, &c., and identifies it with the “ bacille rosé” found in an impure cultivation of bacillus tuberculosis. * Bull. Soc. Vaud. Sci. Nat., xxiii. (1888) pp. 152-5. Cf. this Journal, 1887, p- 1007. t+ Comptes Rendus, evi. (1888) pp. 643-4. t CR. Soc. R. Bot. Belg., 1888, pp. 131-40. § See this Journal, ante, p. 96. || Bull. Soc. Belg. Micr., xiv. (1888) pp. 92-5. 786 SUMMARY OF OURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO Tron-bacteria.*—Bacteria which assume a rust-coloured hue were denominated iron-bacteria by Ehrenberg, who found that this coloration was due to the presence of compounds of iron oxide deposited in the substance of the jelly, and regularly distributed. The exact significance of this deposition of iron and the conditions under which it is called forth, are at present problematical. According to one view, that of Cohn, the brown coloration is due to the deposition of iron oxide by the vegetative activity of the cells, just like silex in diatoms or carbonate of lime in the cell-membrane of Melobesiacew. The other view is that the process is purely mechanical, and is effected by the deposition of iron compounds dissolved in water in the gelatinous parts. To ascertain which and how far either of these views were correct, Herr 8S. Winogradsky made experiments chiefly with Leptothrix ochracea Ktz. (1) When finely-powdered iron oxide was placed in water containing colourless Leptothriz, no brown staining was produced; but directly water containing carbonate of iron in solution (Pyrmont, Schwalbach) was used, in 10-15 hours a yellowish-brown colour appeared. (2) The co-operation of the living plasma is shown by the fact that where the brown coloration is produced, there is no deposit of iron oxide in the immediate vicinity ; consequently the effect is not due to the action of the oxygen in the air. Moreover, the sheaths are only stained when the cells are alive. (3) Without the presence of iron oxide, Leptothrix ochracea does not grow. This is clearly shown by changing the fluids; when the water contains no iron the threads stop their development, but directly it is added growth proceeds again. (4) The oxidation process is therefore as follows:—The salts of the oxide of iron are eagerly taken up by the cells, oxidized in the protoplasm, and the compounds formed excreted by the cells. These compounds are soluble; and after twenty-four hours the colour may usually be removed by washing the threads in water, especially if it contain CO,. Very dilute acids seem to remove the brown hue jmost efficaciously, but are not always successful. (5) Leptothrix ochracea can grow in water which contains very little organic matter, e.g. the natural ferruginous waters. The addition of 0:005-0-01 per cent. butyrate of lime or acetate of soda to Strasburg water sufficed to make this bacterium grow well. The author does not draw any conclusion from the foregoing experi- ments, except that the oxidizing power of the cells of iron-bacteria must be extremely great, but promises a more complete account in some future publication. Bacillus muralis.— Prof. A. Tomaschek,f in reply to Prof. A. Hans- girg, who identifies Bacillus muralis with Glaucothria gracillima Zopf,t points out that the rods in Glaucothrix (Aphanothece caldariorum Richter) are distinctly green, while those of B. muralis consist of a plasma which is perfectly homogeneous and almost transparent. The author then pro- ceeds to call attention to the endogenous spore-formation of B. muralis. The commencement of this process is indicated by a number of strongly refracting roundish corpuscles with a bluish reflex, collecting together * Bot. Ztg., xlvi. (1888) pp. 261-70. + Bot. Centralbl., xxxiv. (1888) pp. 279-83 (2 figs.). t See this Journal, ante, pp. 276-7. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 787 from the ends and gradually drawing together towards the more central parts. This is the case chiefly with the two-celled rodlets. In the longer ones the corpuscles make their appearance about the middle of the rodlet. When these forms have attained a certain size and distinct- ness, the plasma surrounding them gradually clears up and they seem as if environed by a bright halo. The brightness of the spore afterwards disappears and it assumes the pale homogeneous appearance of the vegetative rod, and, though still roundish, attains the ordinary breadth of the rods. In this transition from the spherical to the cylindrical shape no striation of the spore membrane is observable. The membrane, like the parent-cell, seems to disappear by dissolution or absorption. The spores, however, remain inclosed in a general gelatinous invest- ment, which may contain from two to eight rodlets. The arrangement of these rodlets in relation to the common envelope and to each other is quite irregular. The author then proceeds to notice the effect of iron or its rust on B. muralis. The accidental mixture of some scales of rust produced a dark olive-green colour in the zoogloea mass surrounding the rust. Examination under the Microscope showed that each cell-membrane was now distinctly laminated or consisted of a number of concentric layers. Two mosses were found thriving luxuriantly on the zoogloea, Hphe- merum tenerum and Ephemerella recurvifolia. Prof. A. Hansgirg* replies at some length to Prof. Tomaschek, and at the same time takes the opportunity of copiously recapitulating certain facts bearing on the subject of jelly-formation by Algae. Tomaschek had pointed out that B. muralis differs from Aphanothece caldariorum Richter in being green. This, says the author, is of no consequence, inasmuch as Alge grown without access of light become blanched. He considers that not only is the green rod of B. muralis identical with its colourless variation known as Plectonema gracillimum (Glaucothria gracillima Zopf), but that there exists a coccus-form derived by continuous subdivision which is common to Plectonema gracillimum and B. muralis. The author points out that Tomaschek himself throws some doubt on the truly bacillous nature of B. muralis, as he was unable from direct observation to trace the transition from the motionless rod to the mobile condition, a stage which is easily ascertainable in the transformations of real bacilli. The author then turns to the highly refracting granules found at the ends of the rods both in Aphanothece caldariorum and B. muralis. In the latter Tomaschek considers that they are intimately connected with endogenous spore-formation, while Prof. Hansgirg says that there is no difference between the corpuscles, and is disposed to regard them simply in the light of the resting cells (aplanospores, cysts) of Alge and Fungi. Referring to the gelatinous laminated sheath, Prof. Hansgirg shows that the formation of jelly is not uncommon in certain kinds of Alga, and that this sheath may consist of several layers, the innermost being the most recent. Spore-formation in Bacteria.j—Dr. A. Prazmowski deduces from his experiments on micrococcus and bacterium that the earlier view * Bot. Centralbl., xxxv. (1888) pp. 54-7, 102-9 (2 figs.). + Biol. Centralbl., viii. (1888) pp. 301-7. 788 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO respecting the fructification of bacteria is more correct than that at pre- sent adopted, which was promulgated by de Bary and Hueppe. This doctrine, which also served as a means of classification, subdivided bacteria into the endosporous and the arthrosporous, according as on the plasma there arose small, refracting globular bodies surrounded by a definite membrane, which were set free from the parent cell by some process of softening of the parental cell membrane or not. When these spores found suitable conditions, they lost their refracting qualities, their investing membrane swelled up, and they began to assume the appear- ance of the predecessor from which they had sprung. In the arthro- sporous bacteria it was understood that any single individual, without going through the process of endogenous formation, was able to assume a reproductive condition, and thus start a new series similar to that from which itself had been developed. The micrococeus selected by the author was the coccus which has been long associated with the ammoniacal fermentation of urine. On account of its cruciform fission the author calls it Merista ureex. Notwithstanding that this urinary ferment had been subjected to search- ing investigation (Pasteur, Leube, Cohn, &c.), spore-formation had not been observed, and yet spores are regularly formed as soon as the urinary fermentation is drawing to a close. When added to sterilized urine, there are found at the commencement of the process, and as long as fermentation is energetic, relatively large cocci of an oval or elliptical form, the long diameter of which varies from 1°5 to 2-2 p, and the short from 0°8 to 1:2. Dividing cruciformly they form diplo- or tetra-cocci which may accumulate into irregular heaps or shorter or longer chains. Vegetation having come to an end, the relatively large form of coccus gives place to a much smaller spherical cell which shows special differences from the first kind. The one sort is large, strongly refracting, and invested in a firm dark membrane, the others, which show several gradations of size, have pale contents and no noticeable contour. The bright, refracting cells are really spores, the pallid cells are in a condi- tion of involution, that is, are dead vegetative cocci. The spores are distinguished by their great resistance to injury. They withstand prolonged drying, and are only killed by a temperature of 100° C., resisting 90° C. for a minute, and 80° C. for 2 minutes. Dried under a cover-glass, they show a double outline, the outer of which is dark and thick, the inner thin and delicate. Placed in fresh urine, they germinate with appearances similar to endogenous spores, becoming pale, assuming the form and size of the vegetative cocci, and multiplying by cruciform fission. With regard to the spore membrane, it could not be ascertained by direct observation if it originated as a thickening of the primary membrane of the vegetative cell, or was a new formation, the parental cell membrane being dissolved. Apart from this, which the author considers of little importance, the spores of Merista urez behave so much like the endogenous spores of other bacteria that their endo- genous origin must be conceded. This view is strengthened by observa- tions on bacteria obtained from the excrement of cattle. In their early stage in pure cultivations they are short rods 2°5 to 4 » long, and 1:0 to 1:5 p broad, usually single or in pairs, more rarely in very short chains. On the 3rd or 4th day a dirty white scum forms on the surface, and this afterwards falls to the bottom. It is in this scum that the spore-formation takes place. The rodlets become thickened, and at the ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 789 pyriform expansion a spherical highly - refracting spore is formed. Sometimes the parental membrane is dissolved, sometimes it is retained, and invests the spore even for months. Placed in fresh nutrient solution, the spores present appearances similar to those of Merista urex, they become pallid, larger in one direction, and divide by fission. During the act of germination no separation of a membrane is observable. Dried on a cover-glass, the spores are seen to be highly refracting, and surrounded by a double outline, the outer contour being thick and black, the inner one fine and thin. In their resistance to high tempera- tures they closely resemble the spores of Merista wre. This con- sonance in structure, germination, and general characteristics, shows that no difference exists between spores of fecal bacteria and of urinary ferment—in other words, the latter develope endogenously. The author concludes by pointing out that where spore-formation can be controlled throughout its whole course, only one form of fructifica- tion has been observed, namely the endogenous. The cases of arthro- sporous fructification only refer to bacteria wherein, on account of their smallness, or the special form of the vegetative or fructifying cells, it was impossible to follow the processes throughout their course. New Marine Bacterium.*—M. A. Billet has observed in sea-water a new Bacterium, to which he has given the name of B. Laminariz ; and describes its life-history and its morphological variations. In the fila- menious or initial stage it consists of colourless, immobile filaments, which appear to consist at first of homogeneous and uninterrupted protoplasm ; later, however, fine transverse strie can be detected. ‘The protoplasm then commences to segment, the separate portions being divided by more or less pronounced intervals, and the filamentous sheath can be distinguished. The second or dissociated stage is thus reached. The third stage is characterized by a peculiar disposition which affects the filaments of the initial stage, these latter interlacing one with another and extending and forming variable groups, which finish by spreading like a veil on the surface of the liquid. The fourth stage is characterized by the formation of the zooglcew, which are ageregates of bacterian elements, and are enveloped in a common gelatinous matrix. The author has only been able to study imperfectly the formation of the spores. On the surface of certain filaments roundish corpuscles with a thick membrane were noticed; these were probably the endospores. New and Typical Micro-organisms from Water and Soil.;—In their paper on Micro-organisms obtained from soil and water, the authors, Mrs. Grace C. Frankland and Dr. Percy F. Frankland, point out the striking difference between the aerial and aquatic micro-organisms, - micrococci being predominant forms amongst the former, whilst bacillar forms are almost exclusively present in water. In fact, all the aquatic forms described are bacilli. With regard to the chemical action which these micro-organisms exert upon certain solutions containing salts of ammonia and of nitric acid, it was found that while none of the forms were found to oxidize ammonia, either to nitrous or nitric acid, several of them exerted a powerfully reducing action on nitrates, converting the latter into nitrites; others * Comptes Rendus, evi. (1888) pp. 293-5. + Proc. R. Soc. Lond., xliii. (1888) pp. 414-8. 1888. 3H 790 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO were without any action on nitric acid ; and others again caused the dis- appearance of an appreciable proportion of the nitric acid without the production of a corresponding amount of nitrite. These differences in the behaviour of micro-organisms when introduced into solutions con- taining nitrates, are capable of furnishing important data for distinguish- ing between forms which otherwise present a very close resemblance. Thus Bacillus subtilis and Bacillus cereus, which closely resemble each other, can be easily distinguished by their behaviour towards the nitrate solution; for whilst both grow luxuriantly in this medium, Bacillus subtilis has no action on the nitric acid, which can be quantita- tively recovered; Bacillus cereus powerfully reduces the nitrate with formation of nitrite. The nitrate solution employed contained potassium phosphate, magnesium sulphate, calcium chloride, calcium nitrate, invert sugar, peptone, and an excess of calcium carbonate. The following is a brief account of the various micro-organisms :— Bacillus arborescens, under a high power (x 1000) isa slender bacillus giving rise to long wavy threads; no spores were observed. In drop cultivations it is seen to be vibratory. On gelatin plates (x 100) the centre of the colony consists of a thin axial stem, with root-like branches from each of its two extremities, which, when largely developed, give the whole colony the appearance of a wheat-sheaf. The plate is slowly liquefied. On potatoes it produces a fine deep-coloured orange pigment. On nitrates it has no action in the solution employed. Bacillus aquatilis.—A slender bacillus giving rise to wavy threads. No spores were observed. The individual bacilli in drop cultivations show only an oscillatory motion. Gelatin is liquefied very slowly by this bacillus, which grows with great difficulty in all the media except the aqueous solution, wherein it grows abundantly. It does not convert nitrate into nitrite. Bacillus liquidus.—A short fat bacillus of very variable dimensions. In drop cultivations they are exceedingly motile and usually in pairs. Gelatin is rapidly liquefied into large circular depressions with clear contents. On agar is produced a clear shining expansion, and on potato a thick flesh-coloured pigment. The nitrate in the aqueous solution is powerfully reduced. Bacillus vermicularis.—A large bacillus with rounded ends giving rise to vermiform threads, It produces fine oval spores. In drop cultivations it shows oscillatory motion only. It powerfully reduces nitrates to nitrites. Bacillus nubilus.—A fine slender bacillus giving rise to wavy threads ; no spores observed. In drop cultivations the isolated bacilli show violent circular movements; on gelatin plates only patches of cloudy expansions with, in some cases, a faintly defined centre. Gelatin is rapidly softened and liquefied. In the aqueous solution it reduces a small proportion of nitrate to nitrite. Bacillus ramosus.—A large bacillus much resembling B. subtilis, giving rise to long threads and spores which are, however, rounder in shape than those of the latter organism. Slight oscillatory movements seen in drop cultivations. On gelatin plates the colonies show a cloudy centre with tangled root-like branches which extend in every direction. The gelatin is liquefied. In tubes the gelatin first becomes impregnated with fluffy ramifications, later liquefaction ensues, and a tough pellicle ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETO. 791 forms on the surface. On potatoes there forms a dry, continuous, almost white surface expansion. Nitrates are powerfully reduced in the aqueous solution. Bacillus awrantiacus.—A short fat bacillus of variable dimensions. No spores were observed. In drop cultivations the isolated bacilli are seen to be motile. On gelatin plates it produces bright orange pin-heads ; on potatoes a brilliant red orange pigment not extending far beyond the point of inoculation. Nitrates are only slightly reduced to nitrites. Bacillus viscosus.—A short bacillus about three or four times as long as broad, occurs mostly in pairs; no spores were seen; is exceedingly motile. Gelatin is rapidly liquefied, becoming viscid and green-coloured ; on agar the whole surface quickly assumes a green tint; no reduction of nitrates in the aqueous solution. Bacillus violaceus.—A bacillus of variable thickness, on agar being more slender; sometimes gives rise to short threads. Spore-formation observed. Vibratory motions observed in drop cultivations. It produces on agar a dark violet expansion. Powerful reduction of nitrates to nitrites. Bacillus diffusus—A slender bacillus, frequently in pairs, but occasionally in long undulating threads. No spores observed. Oscil- latory movements seen in the drop cultivations. On gelatin plates the colonies on reaching the surface give rise to a halo which, extending from the centre, spreads considerably, and is composed of a thin mottled expansion. Nitrates are slightly reduced. Bacillus candicans varies in form both in the same cultivation and in different media ; sometimes looks like a micrococcus, sometimes shows a tendency to grow into short threads. On gelatin plates the surface expansions resemble milk drops. Has no reducing action on nitric acid, but grows abundantly in the medium. Bacillus scissus much resembles B. prodigiosus. No spores observed. Is seen to be very motile in drop cultivations. On gelatin plates it produces light-green surface expansions which, under a low power (x 100), are seen to be of a fine granular texture, and both their edges much frayed out. In tubes the gelatin and agar become tinted green. It powerfully reduces nitrates to nitrites. Of the foregoing the first nine were derived from water, the last three from garden soil. Baumgarten’s Pathological Mycology.*—This part of Prof. Baum- garten’s work on pathological mycology treats specially of the pathogenic cocci, which are exhaustively discussed. * Baumgarten, P., ‘ Lehrbuch der pathologischen Mykologie,’ ii. Halfte, 1 Halb- band, 48 Abbildungen, Braunschweig, 1887. : oon 2 792 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO MICROSCOPY. a. Instruments, Accessories, &c.* (1) Stands, Thury’s Five-tube Microscope.—M. Thury has designed, and the Geneva Society for the Construction of Physical Instruments have con- structed the Microscope with five body-tubes shown in fig. 120. Fic. 120. _* This subdivision contains (1) Stands; (2) Eye-pieces and Objectives; (3) Illu- minating and other Apparatus; (4) Photomicrography; (5) Microscopical Optics and Manipulation ; (6) Miscellaneous. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 793 The principle of the instrument is the same as was described in this Journal, 1887, p. 796, where a Microscope with four tubes was figured. A totally reflecting prism is placed over the objective, and as this is rotated by the milled-head at the top, the image is thrown into each of the tubes in succession, thus enabling a Professor to show the same object to various members of his class. Four of the tubes have each two screws for centering in two rect- angular directions. They also have each a rack and pinion for focusing. An unavoidable difficulty of the instrument is, that the object appears differently placed to the different observers, but a mark in the field of each of the four tubes shows which was the right-hand side of the object to the observer using the first tube. Schieck’s Meat-examining -Microscope.—Herr F. W. Schieck has applied to this Microscope (fig. 121), an arrangement for inclination, Fic. 121. which, although adopted in the case of small instruments, has not been hitherto applied, so far as we know, to those of the sixe of his 794 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO Microscope, which is stated to be 12 in. high, stage 4 in. by 4 in., “weight 23 kilo.” The tail-piece attached to the under side of the stage turns on an axis projecting laterally from the standard, the latter having a diagonal stop-piece at the bottom, against which the end of the tail-piece, which is sloped off as shown in the fig., abuts when the instrument is upright. Schieck’s Travelling Microscope.— We are reminded that Herr Schieck some years ago brought out the Microscope shown in fig. 122, which anticipates those of Dr. Zeiss Fic. 122. described ante, p. 637, inasmuch as the prolongation of the stem beneath the stage slides in a socket on the base, and can be clamped at any point. The object of this device was stated to be to enable the instrument to go into a case of reduced dimensions for travelling. Zeiss’s Ila Microscope—Babuchin’s — Microscope.—In the description of these Microscopes, ante, p. 637, we should have explained that by means of the screw at the back of the limb, the fine- adjustment can be thrown out of gear when travelling, thus preventing the point of the micrometer-screw from getting damaged. Leitz’s Demonstration Microscope— Old Demonstration Microscope. — The design of this Microscope sufficiently appears from fig. 123. The form of the frame in which the body-tube socket screws, is devised to enable it to be held in the hand and passed round for class demonstration (the object being viewed by transmitted light), and at the same time to allow of its being rested on the table when not in use. We are forcibly reminded by this Microscope of the tendency to the repetition—with more or less modifications—of antique forms. On page 109 we reproduced a figure from the ‘ Acta Eruditorum’ (1686), illus- trating the employment of Campani’s Compound Microscope on opaque and transparent objects, and it is evident that Leitz’s Demonstration Microscope might be substituted for Campani’s, the difference of form being only a simplification certainly not suggestive of an intervai of upwards of two centuries in their construction. Fig. 124 shows what appears to have been a Demonstration Microscope of the last century. It is constructed of wood and cardboard, and is apparently a modification of Culpeper and Scarlet’s Microscope figured. in Dr. Robert Smith’s ‘ Opticks’ (Cambridge, 1738, 2 vols. 4to.). The body-tube slides in a socket for focusing, and has a draw-tube in which the lenses of a Huyghenian eye-piece are applied respectively above and below, the draw-tube serving not only to increase the amplification, but also (probably) as a means of focusing the image more accurately, as in some of the modern “ miniature” Microscopes. Mounted transparent ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 795 Fie. 122. Fig. 124. objects were viewed on “sliders” passing through a bent staple on either side of the under face of the base, the instrument being directed to the source of light. For viewing opaque objects, some such method as that shown with Campani’s Micro- scope (above quoted), was probably employed. Dentist’s Examining Glass.—In Mr. §. S. White’s Catalogue of Dental Materials,* we find an ex- amining glass figured, consisting of a low-power lens (fig. 125), mounted in a metal ring, hinged on a socket that slides on a rod terminating in a spiral, by which it is carried on the finger in examining teeth, &c. In practice we should expect the difficulty of holding the lens steady a great drawback to its utility. Bausch and Lomb Optical Co.’s Fie. 126. “Watchmaker Glass.”—The Bausch and — Lomb Co. have obtained a patent for the application of a spiral spring to a watch- maker’s glass to encircle the head and thus keep the lens in position. We are unable to say how far this arrangement has been found to be of practical utility, nor can we trace its origin with certainty. We have, however been informed that such a device was in use in the last century, if not earlier. * Philadelphia, 1877, p. 227. 796 SUMMARY OF OURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO Ganz’s Pinakoscope with Dreyfus’s Reflector.— Herr J. Ganz’s instrument, which was exhibited at the Wiesbaden Exhibition last year, is practically a Sciopticon,* but for microscopic purposes it is fitted with a stage and carrier for objectives. Mr, L. Dreyfus (now of Wiesbaden), has added a reflector fixed in a short tube which can be pushed over the end of the tube carrying the objective (fig. 127), so that the images in place of being shown on a screen, can be thrown on the table, an arrange- Fig. 127. soll - i _ a | UU HH ment which is very effective for drawing objects. Mr. Dreyfus writes, “By the aid of this apparatus we make all the drawings used in the lectures here with perfect ease, sitting at the table. The drawing can be left, and finished whenever we have time again.” The illumination being obtained from a mineral-oil lamp is not strong enough to show objects under powers higher than a 2/3 in. objective. Tri-ocular, Quadri-ocular, &c., Prisms.—Figs. 128 to 132 show the various prisms belonging to the Microscopes described in this Journal, 1887, pp. 796-800. Fig. 128 is the prism over the objective of Nachet’s double-bodied Microscope, fig. 129 that of Nachet’s triple-bodied, and fig. 130 the small four-sided prism for which M. Nachet (pp. 1067-8) * Of. J. Scherrer, ‘Das Pinakoskop und seine Anwendung,’ &c., 61 pp. and 30 figs., 8vo, Speicher, 1886. Cf. also Boll. Accad. Med. Roma, 1886, pp. 178-92. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 197 claimed priority over that of Prof. Harting (p. 799) shown in fig. 131. The prisms of Mr, Ahrens’s Tri-ocular Microscope (p. 799) are shown in fig. 182. Fic. 129. Fie. 130. Fig. 128. Hevrck, H. van.—lLe Microscope Anglo-Continental ou Microscope d’Etudiant de M. Watson and Sons. (Watson and Sons’ Anglo-Continental or Student’s Microscope.) : inetades also a photomicrographic apparatus. ] Journ. de Micr., XI. (1888) pp. 314-8 (2 figs.). SEamMAN, W. H.—American and Foreign Microscopes. Science, XI. (1888) p. 120. kK2) Eye-pieces and Objectives. Zeiss’s “Compensation Eye-piece 6 with 1/1 Micron-division.” *— The graduation of the eye-piece micrometers hitherto made is arbitrary, and has no intimate connection with the magnifying power of the objec- tives used with them for micrometric measurement. For this reason it is necessary to have a table giving the value of an interval for each objective and eye-piece ; for example, the interval may be— With eye-piece 2, for objectives A, C, E, and 1/12 = 16, 6-7, 2°7, 1°82 p. With eye-piece 3, for the same objectives = 14, 6:0, 2:4, 1°67 p. If, then, the image of an object observed with a 1/12-in. homo- geneous-immersion objective covers 3°75 intervals of the micrometer eye-piece 2, the true dimension is 3°75 x 1°82 = 6°82 yu. * From the description issued by Dr. Zeiss. Cf. also K. Schliephacke in Flora, Ixxi. (1888) pp. 33-44. 798 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO The rational gradation in the focal lengths of the apochromatic objectives has made it possible to essentially simplify both in calculation and tabulation the measurements to be made with them. The micro- meter eye-piece (fig. 133) used is a compensation eye-piece, No. 6, of the usual form (new construction), and a graduation Fic. 133. in which the intervals for an ideal objective of 1-0 mm. focal length (with normal tube-length) are 0°001 mm. = 1 p. The value of an interval rises in the same ratio as the focal lengths of the objectives, and is represented by the same numbers, it is there- fore 2°0 » for apochromatic 2:0 mm.| ( 40. NAD 2°5 ” ” 2°5 ” 1-30 and soils » 3-0 » {M40 N.A.) 4-0 ” ” 4-0 ” aU 3, a S50" 5, 1670) 5; 7 cis Cee so that the same number denotes the interval in terms of », and the focal length inmm. The use of this eye-piece there- fore renders a special table unnecessary. Measurements made in this way will always be correct within a slight percentage, since individual variations of particular eye-pieces and objectives always lie within very small limits. If, however, it is necessary in special cases to find a very exact value of an interval for a particular objective, it must be tested in the ordinary way by a stage micrometer, and then the small deviation in the value of an interval from its true value for a given objective, as expressed by its number, can be corrected by a slight alteration of the tube-length. In such a case the objective in question is focused upon a stage micrometer, and if an interval of the micron-division does not cover exactly so many thousandths of a mm. as are given by the focal length of the objective, the correction is made by a small lengthening or shortening of the tube- length, and the exact tube-length shown by the graduations of the draw- tube noted for each objective. American y. Foreign Microscopes; the Verdict of an Impartial Expert. {Results of Dr. H. J. Detmers’ examination of objectives by Leitz, Seibert, and Zeiss. | St. Louis Med. and Surg. Journ., LY. (1888) pp. 160-3. (3) Illuminating and other Apparatus. Eternod’s Drawing-board.*—Prof. A. Eternod recommends the use of a drawing-board invented by him, and which he has found useful for microscopical drawing, as it is very stable and easy of management. It consists of a shallow box (fig. 134, a), the sides of which are strongly * Internat. Monatschr. f. Anat. u. Histol., ii. (1885) pp. 269-70 (6 figs. of a plate). ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. -- 799 morticed together ; a drawing-board (fig. 184, b) made of poplar; a rackwork arrangement (fig. 134, c) by which the board can be fixed in or altered to any desired position with great rapidity ; and a brass catch by which it can be fixed instantly with a turn of a screw (fig 134, d, e). The advantages of this apparatus pointed out are: (1) it can be raised Fig. 134. () \ QS ST SN TH ir @& e SS or lowered to any level, and still kept in the horizontal position (figs. 134, 136, 188, 139); (2) it can be placed obliquely (figs. 1385 and 137) ; (8) it Fig. 135. Fic, 136. S can be displaced laterally (fig. 188), and obliquely (fig. 137); (4) when ‘folded up, the apparatus only takes up a very small space; the measure- ments given by the author are 70 em. by 55 cm. Fic. 137. Fic. 138. Fie. 139. i en Tf the rackwork arrangement be made to a curve (fig. 137, a) the teeth will hold more firmly, but this is not necessary, as the apparatus is perfectly steady. 800 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO Babes’ Hot Stage.*—In figs. 140 and 141 are shown different aspects of Dr. V. Babes’ hot stage for constant temperatures. By means of the two screws sch it is fas- tened to the stage of the Microscope or to Reichert’s movable stage. The hot stage consists of a gnomon- shaped box filled with water or glycerin. The preparation is slipped in through the aperture o, and it can be moved about. It is warmed both from above and below. The objective and the Abbe condenser are partly surrounded by the box. Heat is imparted by a thick copper wire k heated in a gas flame. The other end, which is within the box, is convoluted. The copper wire is insulated from the sides of the box by a layer of asbestos. The regulation is ef- fected by means of an electrical thermometer T inserted in the same orifice as that in which the pre- paration is placed, and con- sequently exposed to the same temperature. The wires of the electric ther- mometer pass to the appa- ratus shown in fig. 140, which is supplied by a small Leclanché battery. By the movement of the pole to a point previously settled upon, the current is closed, and the plate V attracted towards the elec- tro-magnets. This reduces the stream of gas at Z, and the flame is consequently diminished. As the mer- cury sinks, the valve V is again opened, and the gas again flows through the pipe Z tothe jet. To the thermostat there is also 140, Ita. * Centralbl. f, Bakteriol. u. Parasitenk., iy. (1888) pp. 23-5 (2 figs). ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 801 attached a screw (R, fig. 140) for specially regulating the flame when it has been reduced by the regulation apparatus. As the regulation of the Fic. 141. temperature is instantaneous, the vital conditions of bacteria at definite temperatures can be studied exactly. Capillary Slide and accessories for the examination of Ova.*— This apparatus, which was designed by M. L. Chabry for the examina- tion of Ascidian ova, has now received several additions rendering it more serviceable than the original form (see this Journal, 1887, p. 319). It consists of a thick glass plate p (fig. 142) placed on the stage of the Microscope, and upon which rests a capillary tube T bent at a right angle, the latter part projecting over the stage. The tube lies in a couple of glass sockets d d fixed to the plate with shellac. This allows the capillary tube to be pushed up and down from left to right, and also to turn on its axis. This axial revolution is effected by a special con- trivance. Po is a metal plate bent at a right angle with a long anda short leg. The longer leg is clamped to the stage by a screw, so that the shorter leg is parallel to the side of the stage and about 5 cm. distant from it. Through the short leg passes the rod M B, bent twice at a right angle, and one end of which is fixed on a dise, about the size of a penny piece. Kisa plate of shellac fastened to the short leg. By turning the disc the capillary tube is made to revolve. The tubes must be per- fectly free from air-bubbles, and it is advised to keep a quantity of them on hand. They should be about 10cm. long and arranged accord~ ing to the breadth of their lumen, and that tube should be selected of which the diameter is about equal to that of the object to be examined, so that when the tube is made to revolve the ova may not be damaged. The ova are introduced into the capillary tube by a suction-pump made out of a piece of glass tubing fitted at both ends with a piece of rubber tube. On one piece of the rubber tube is fitted a self-acting clamp, between the clips of which is slipped the capillary tube. To the other piece is fitted a small syringe, by the use of which the ova are sucked * Journ. de Anat. et de Ja Physiol., xxiii. (1887) pp. 167-320 (5 pls.). Cf. Zeitschr. f. Wiss. Mikr., v. (1888) pp. 60-5 (2 figs.). 802 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO into the tube. This operation may be performed under the Microscope if necessary. If any other movements are to be imparted to the ovum an additional apparatus is required. This is called the perforator, and consists of a needle, its case, and motor apparatus—a lever controlling screw and spring. The needles are made out of glass by drawing out very fine threads from a glass rod over a lamp. A quantity of these about 10 cm. Fig. 143. long should be made. Those which are quite regular in thickness are then to be arranged in packets, after inspecting them under the Micro- scope ; the points are then fixed on to capillary tubes by means of a thermo- cautery. This piece of manipulation requires much practice and patience. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 803 In order to introduce a needle into the capillary tube upon the slide, a special protector is necessary. This is shown in fig. 143 where it appears as a black tube fastened to the slide by shellac G. The difference between the parts sliding on one another must not amount to more than 10 pw. The lever L, figs. 142 and 143, is fixed to the capillary tube with a minute drop of marine glue. The other extremity lies upon the screw V fixed to the standard of the Microscope at A, and between the milled head E and the spring R, made of brass wire. The perforation of an ovum is effected by just flicking the spring after having turned the screw back to the required degree. There are numerous minute details given by the author as to points of manipulation, but for these the original must be consulted. Measuring Corrosion Surfaces in Iron Pyrites.*—Herr F. Beeke, while examining iron pyrites, came to the conclusion that the primary corrosion surfaces were those of greatest resistance, and in order to prove this measured the difference between several parallel surfaces on the same crystal. For this purpose a screw micrometer by Zeiss Fig. 144. was used in conjunction with an apparatus (shown half its natural size, fig. 144) for measuring the thickness of the crystal under the Microscope. To the metal plate A inter- : rupted at O, the upright piece B is attached, and to this a piece of plate glass E is fixed. Upon A are also fixed two more uprights C D, through which the screws S and F work. The screw § is rounded off at one end, pointed at the other, and bears a milled head. The screw F is pointed at one extremity, and at its other terminates in a milled head. This screw during the experiments is fixed. The crystal K is placed between the glass plate and the screw S, which is made to fix it closely both before and after corrosion. Then the difference in distance between the points S and F shows the amount of substance lost. Rowland’s Reversible Compressorium.—This device of Mr. W. Rowland (fig. 145) consists of two thin German silver plates each with a Fic. 145. ring having a piece of cover-glass cemented to it. The lower plate is attached to a rod turning in a socket, while the upper pivots on a milled * Tschermak’s Mineral. u. Petrogr. Mittheil., viii. (1887) p. 318. Cf. Zeitschr. f. Wiss. Mikr., iv. (1887) pp. 411-2 (1 fig.). 804 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO head which clamps it if required, or releases it when needed for more easy cleaning. Varying pressures of the cover-glasses are obtained by turning the milled head in the centre of the plate as in Wenham’s com- pressorium. ‘The socket fits in a hole in the stage, in the same way as stage forceps. Beaumont’s Reservoir Life-slide-—Mr. C. R. Beaumont describes this (figs. 146 and 147) as follows :—“ Haying long felt that if a cell were constructed in which minute organisms could be kept alive under as nearly as possible natural conditions, and at the same time allow of fairly high Fie. 146. powers being used for their examination, a much more accurate knowledge of the life-history of such organisms would be obtained, I at last con- ceived the idea of making a slide having reservoirs at each end, in which could be stored a supply of water; and so made that a small current could be continually kept flowing through the cell, from one reservoir to the other, either on or off the Microscope, thereby keeping the organ- isms in the cell constantly supplied with fresh water, in amanner as near as could be similar to the conditions obtained in their natural habitat. Fic, 147. The gentle percolation of water through the life-cell serves the treble purposes of keeping the organisms cool, and supplying them with food and aeration. It is not necessary to remind experienced microscopists that when small organisms are placed with a drop of water in a shallow cell and subjected to the concéntrated light and heat from a condenser during protracted observations with the Microscope, very great changes are induced in the environment of the organisms, which very frequently lead to important physiological changes. Assuming these changes to be mainly caused by the concentrated heat from the condenser on so small a quantity of water, the immense advantage of using a slide wherein ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 805 fresh water is constantly percolating the cell, and regulating the temperature will be self-evident. The slide consists of a slip of non-oxidizing metal 13 by 3} by 1/8 in., having a central opening of 1/2 in. D, with a dise of glass forming the bottom of the central cell, and fitting flush with the underside of the base, allowing of illumination with a paraboloid. Surrounding the glass on the upper surface is a slightly raised edge of metal forming a central flat cell, having a uniform depth about equal to the thickness of ordinary blotting-paper. Outside this central cell is a slight recess in the metallic base, which forms an annular cell C, surrounding the central one through which water percolates when in use. The central and annular cells are ciosed by means of a thin cover-glass, cemented toa rim of metal E, which fits watertight over the two cells; the under surface of the cover-glass being held close against the raised edge of metal forming the boundary of the inner cell, thus closing and preventing the escape of organisms placed therein. There is water communication between the central and annular cells, by a series of very fine capillary lines, ruled in the metallic edge between the cells. On each end of the metallic base is fixed a reservoir A having a glass cover. These reservoirs are directly connected with the annular cell by fine tubes B, through which water flows when in use from one reservoir to the other. The action is as follows :—Organisms are placed in the central cell and the cover-glass pressed tightly down; one of the reservoirs is then filled with water and the circulation established. If the slide be now placed on the stage of a Microscope provided with a revolving slide carrier so that the full reservoir is highest, the water will flow through the fine tube to the annular cell; a portion of which will percolate to the inner cell by capillary motion, and thence through the second tube into the other reservoir. When the upper reservoir is empty the motion may be reversed, thus enabling a constant circulation to be kept up during microscopic examination. Hach reservoir is provided with a small air- vent, drilled coincidently through the upper edge of the reservoir and the rim of the cover. These vents may be entirely closed when desirable, by simply turning the covers slightly round so that the holes do not coincide. The flow of water may also be regulated, by placing bristles within the fine tubes leading from the reservoirs to the annular cell. To continue the water circulation when off the Microscope several methods are available, two of which I will here mention. The method which recommends itself as the simplest, and perhaps gives the best results, consists of a stand or support for carrying the slide and large supply reservoir for coutaining enough water to last several days. The supply vezsel is placed at a higher level than the slide, and a siphon may be used to convey water from this vessel into one of the reservoirs. A suitable siphon is easily made by bending a length of vaccine tube (to be had from most chemists) having a short piece of thread pushed inside the long end to regulate the drip. Another shorter siphon made from the same material is placed in the hole near the top of the other reservoir, to conduct the overflow into a vessel placed beneath. A better arrange- ment is obtained when the supply cistern is fitted with a miniature water- tap near the bottom, the water beiug allowed to fall in drops into the first reservoir of the slide, and flow out as before stated. 1888. oI 806 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO Another system of keeping up the circulation is by means of an auto- matic tilter. ‘This apparatus consists of a small balanced table having an oscillating motion on a central axis, and made to carry one or more slides. The slides rest on the table with the reservoirs at right angles to its axis, so that each reservoir may be raised or depressed at intervals of about three hours; this being about the time occupied for the water to flow from one reservoir to the other when properly adjusted. The tilting is obtained from clockwork placed in a box underneath. The first method has the advantage of simplicity and also of giving a complete change of water, and on that account is perhaps the best for most organisms. I may say that with a slide of this kind I have had the pleasure of watching three generations of Floscularia in succession. These organisms are probably amongst the most difficult objects to keep in a small slide on account of their voracious habits.” Mr. Beaumont also informs us that a friend who uses one of the slides without any tilting arrangement, finds that all that is necessary is to lay the slide on a flat surface and remove the cover from one of the reservoirs ; this allows free evaporation to take place in the uncovered reservoir, thus setting up a current through the slide. Mr. Beaumont thinks that, on the whole, an arrangement without tilting is preferable, as the organisms are not precipitated against the sides of the cell so much. Holman’s Current Slide.*—Dr. Holman says that on his slide Protococcus may be kept alive many days; Amelba three weeks; and Bacteria for six months. In the minute canal, 1/100 in. wide, and 1/1000 in. deep, between the two concavities with shallow margins in his slide, blood-corpuscles may be caused to flow in either direction, to roll over, or to stand on edge by the warmth of the hands of the operator, brought towards the stage of the Microscope at a distance of about six inches. Life Slides.j—Dr. A. C. Stokes in studying the morphology of minute animal organisms, uses only a shallow shellac cell, with about one-fourth of the ring scraped from both the upper and the lower margins, thus leaving two curved supports for the square cover, one on each side. This gives the inclosed drop with its animal life plenty of air, and facilitates the application of the wet brush at the point where the square cover projects beyond the lateral cell-wall. The secret of success consists in leaving enough of the cement ring to properly support the cover, and to lessen the force of the inflowing water supply, and also in having the cell shallow or deep according as the animals are microscopically small or large. Much depends on the depth of the cell in all cases. A comparatively large Infusorian, a Rotifer, or a Chzetonotus can be injuriously hampered in its movements and in the proper performance of its functions by a cell of insufficient depth, and a good objective can be greatly hampered in its functions by a cell of too great depth. The author also proposes the following form :—A small square, cut from glass of any desired thickness, is cemented with Canada balsam to a slip, and surrounded by a thick glass or zinc ring so as to leave a wide space between these parts. On the ring place a ring of wax, and, * Journ. New York Mier. Soc., iv. (1888) p. 168. + The Microscope, vii. (1887) pp. 129-33 (8 figs.). ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 807 after the object has been arranged on the central square, cover the whole with a thin circle and cement it fast by running a warm wire around the edge to melt the wax. A small drop of water may be placed in the annular space if desired. The thickness of the slip and square, and the depth of the cell must of course be determined by each worker according to his needs. The secret of success here is, to be sure that the joint between the ring and the slip is air-tight, and to firmly secure the cover, using an abundance of wax. Lamps for Microscopical Work.*—The Editors of ‘The Micro- scope’ consider that in the efforts to put before the microscopical public attractive illuminating apparatus, writers seem to have lost sight of the excellencies of the humble hand-lamp. Beginners are thus led to pur- chase the expensive German student’s lamp or some still more costly microscopical lamp. It can safely be asserted that for the general pur- poses of the working microscopist, a small hand-lamp giving a broad, flat flame (such a lamp as can be bought anywhere for 25 or 30 cents) is superior to any of the expensive lamps made especially for the pur- pose, and we are convinced from our observation of the methods of many microscopists that this is not realised by many except the experts. By the size of the flame and the distance of the lamp from the Micro- scope, the intensity of the light can be readily adapted for any work, from the use of the lowest powers to the examination of histological and biological specimens with the highest immersion lenses. For bacterio- logical work with the 1/12 in. or 1/18 in. immersion lenses this light is unsurpassed. In the examination of opaque objects this lamp is not so convenient, as it is necessary then to have the source of light at quite an elevation. It is very easy, however, to improvise a stand. Tubes for Microspectroscopic Analysis.t—For microspectroscopic analysis it is necessary to be able to alter the depth of the liquids ex- amined and to know exactly what these depths are. Three forms of tubes answer these requirements. The first is a prismatic tube with the same proportions as that of the author’s (M. L. Malassez) first hemochromometer, so that the glass plates at the end of a length of 10 cm. are 10 mm. apart; consequently at distances, say, of 1, 2, or 3 cm. from the top the thickness of the liquid layer is 1, 2, or 3 mm. A millimetre scale placed along the side of the tube indicates the depths corresponding to different points in the length. In the two other tubes there is an internal sliding tube (“ tube plongeant”). The simpler form consists of a metal tube, 2 to 3 cm. long and 5 mm. in diameter; the lower extremity is closed by a piece of glass, and the upper expands like a basin. This is the tube into which the liquid to be examined is poured and it is placed in the aperture of the Microscope stage where it is held by the expansion at the upper end. The tube which slips into this is made of metal, and is a little longer and narrower than the outer one. Its lower end is closed by a glass, and its upper screws into the Microscope tube in place of the objective. By screwing down the Microscope tube the layer of liquid is thereby diminished. If on the Microscope tube there is a millimetre scale, and * The Microscope, viii. (1888) p. 206-7. + Arch. de Physiol., viii. (1886) pp. 268-71 (1 fig). Saal ae SUS SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO if the milled head of the fine-adjustment be graduated, the thickness of the liquid layer is easily ascertained. The third tube (fig. 148) is less simple than the foregoing, but it is constructed so that it gives the thickness of the liquid layer at once. It consists of (1) a metal tube, the lower end closed by glass, while the upper end is expanded ; (2) of another tube to dip into the former and closed at the lower end by glass. But the Fig. 148. latter tube, instead of being screwed to the Microscope, is screwed to an arm, the upright of which is fixed to the edge of the first or outer tube, so that by turning the inner tube round it sinks or rises, and thereby produces a thinner or thicker layer of fluid. The depth of the liquid is measured by means of a millimetre scale marked on one side of the upright. The head of the internal tube almost touches this scale, and hence it is easy to read off the number of millimetres the tube has risen or fallen. This procedure is facilitated for fractions of millimetres by dividing the upper surface of the disc into 10, and each of these divisions into two parts, by which a tenth or twentieth of a millimetre is given. In order that the instrument may be more M easily cleaned and fixed at zero, the upright Se is made in two pieces, the outer being fixed i to the inner tube, and the inner one to the mi] . outer tube. The two pieces are kept tight 2, by a binding-screw. When a liquid is to be examined, the outer piece is withdrawn, and the milled head of the other turned until the zeros of the two scales coincide; the tube is then slipped in so that the two glasses at the lower extremities are in apposition. The binding-screw is then tightened up. This position evidently corresponds to the thickness 0. Weiss, D.—Ueber das Fleischl’sche Hamometer. (On the Fleischl Heemometer.) Prager Med, Wochenschr., XIII. (1888) p. 20. (4) Photomicrography. Burstert’s Photomicrographic Apparatus.*—Dr. H. Burstert’s appa- ratus is shown in fig. 149. The camera A is attached to the wooden stand L RS, the end of the expanding bellows being also fixed to the piece W which carries the Microscope, the stage m, and the illuminating apparatus fed. W slides in a slot on R, and may be adjusted to any desired distance from the focusing plate. The various parts of the illu- minating apparatus are made to slide upon an iron bar screwed to W, so that they may be adjusted independently. The whole apparatus is set at any desired inclination by means of the chain K and leg 8, and it may be used vertically or horizontally. In the latter case the mirror f is removed, and replaced by the source of * Jeserich, P., ‘ Die Mikrophotographie,’ 8vo, Berlin, 1888, pp. 98-9 (1 fig.). ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 809 light. Upon R is ascale which gives the d:stance of the objective from the focusing plate. The advantages claimed for the instrument are “the firm stand resting on three points, and the attach- Fic. 149. ment of the whole (illuminating apparatus and camera) to a com- mon stand,’ “the Microscope, illuminating apparatus, and front part of the camera being capable of being brought to different distances from the focusing plate without the posi- tion of the separate parts to each other being in any way changed.” Neuhauss’s Focusing Ar- rangement.—Dr. R. Neuhauss uses for the camera described ante, p. 294, the mechanism shown in fig. 150. j AINA Pa A piece of watch-spring is bent as shown in the figure, and is secured to a pin attached to a plate. The Microscope being horizontal, the plate is placed vertically with the ends of the watch-spring engaging in the milling of the micrometer-screw of the fine-adjustment, To the sides of the bottom of the plate cords are attached, which pass over hori- zontal pulleys on the right and left of the Microscope and are fastened to a wooden rod at the end of the camera. By pulling the one cord or the other the fine-adjustment screw is turned to the left or right. “In this way” (see p. 294) “the fine-adjustment is made without any inconvenient connecting rods, and can be effected directly by one hand, while the other is engaged with the focusing lens.” The motion obtained by the action of the clamp on the micrometer-screw is, it is claimed, quite fine enough to secure the complete sharpness of the image. Drawings v. Photographs.—Screen for the Abbe Camera Lucida.* —At the present time, when to almost every Microscope a photographic camera is being attached, and when photomicrographs, of every degree of merit, are being produced on all sides, it may be well, Dr. G. A. Piersol considers, to weigh the respective values of the pencil and sunbeam as * Amer. Mon. Micr. Journ., ix. (1888) pp. 103-4. 810 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO means of recording the observations of the investigator. The idea of reproducing, by photography, what is seen in the Microscope, is so captivating, that it is a matter for little surprise that so many undertake the work. These remarks do not apply to the photographing of pre- parations for the purpose of producing excellent pictures, but bear upon the merits of the two methods as auxiliaries to the work-table. That the pencil is being unwisely neglected, owing to a too implicit reliance on photography, is an unfortunate present tendency, especially for the young investigator, who loses the training to accurate observation which the conscientious use of the pencil brings. But both the photographie camera and the drawing-prism have their advantages, and the investigator can afford to dispense with neither, as, by their judicious employment —sometimes by their combination—more satisfactory and valuable results are obtained than are possible by any exclusive adherence to either. An experience in photomicrography, which warrants a full appre- ciation of its value and capability, has taught that the most serviceable and satisfactory field of photography lies at the extremes of the table of amplification, with very low (20 to 70 diam.), and with very high powers (500 to 1500 diam.). What drawing can equal, in beauty of detail, a really good photograph of a suitable specimen taken with a fine low- power objective ? who can draw fibrille of striated muscle, a group of bacteria, or a delicately marked diatom in competition with photo- graphs? Excellent pictures are made under ordinary magnifications (200 to 350 diam)., but in the majority of cases there is much less cause for congratulation. Under these circumstances, the conscientiously and skilfully used pencil will produce a more valuable and satisfactory record for the investigator than the camera. The reason that good photographs, with very low or very high powers, are so satisfactory is, that under both conditions suitable lenses reproduce all the planes of tissue necessary for a serviceable representation of the object ; nine times in ten this will not be the case with the pictures demanded of the 1/4 or 1/6. While it is unreasonable to expect the lens to reproduce more than the plane accurately in focus, it is nevertheless true that this physical limitation (reduced to a minimum by the thinnest possible sections) frequently renders photographs, under medium powers, unsatisfactory substitutes for more diagrammatic drawings. At the present time the investigator who depends upon photographs for his illustrations, finds himself con- fronted by the pertinent question as to the manner in which his pictures shall serve as journal illustrations. That photography, in its applica- tions to book-making, is yet in its infancy, no one doubts; that really beautiful results are already accomplished by the best methods is equally certain ; if, therefore, the liberality of the publisher places one of the unexceptional “processes” at his command, the investigator may feel confident. Let him, however, be cautious as to where he places his hopes when economy is consulted, for there is nothing more annoying to the worker himself, or more unfortunate for the cause of photomicro- graphy, than the dissemination of those monstrosities whose harsh black and white masses, devoid of half-tone and detail, are supposed to “re- produce” a really fine negative. Frequently, however, the use of the photograph is out of the question, and the investigator or the artist must make the necessary substitute ; by all means let it be the microscopist himself, for he will then have the guarantee that the feature of the drawing, especially valuable, is ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 811 appreciated. Under such circumstances, a combination of the camera and pencil, which the writer has employed since the introduction of the Eastman ‘“‘ bromide paper,’ may often be found very satisfactory. Selecting the “B” grade, and marking out all undesired parts of the negative, a somewhat under-exposed print is made and developed until the cardinal parts of the picture are visible; this, when dried, yields a black and white sketch which, after being worked over with Indian ink and hard lead-pencil, presents the appearance of an elaborately finished drawing, and, as such, will be satisfactorily copied by the artist on the block or stone. Where details are very simple, the outlines of the photograph are easily transferred to the drawing-paper by means of the interposed sheet of “ graphite ” or “ carbon” paper and the tracing point. But, after all, for the busy worker the direct sketch on paper is frequently the most convenient and economical. It is to be regretted that the drawing-prisms in use on the Continent are not more generally used among our own microscopists. An experience embracing all the usual forms has resulted in a settling down to the Abbe apparatus as being the most satisfactory, and, due regard to the inclination of the mirror and the warranted size of the sketch being observed, as leaving little to be desired. After a long observation of struggles with the drawing-prisms usually furnished by American and English makers, it is truly refreshing to see with what ease and accuracy complicated contours are followed with this instrument even at the first attempt. With any form of drawing attachment the nice balance between the illumination of the microscopical image and that of the paper is an all- important condition; having had occasion recently to use the Abbe prism to sketch some 1400 sections, the author found a simple device of great service. This consisted of a light stand supporting a small glass plate (10 x 15 em.), two-thirds of which was “matt,” being very finely ground, leaving the remaining third as a clear strip extending in the direction of the greatest length of the plate. The section being well lighted and focused, and the paper adjusted for the drawing, the screen should be interposed between the source of illumination and the mirror, when the object becomes illuminated by a soft diffuse light, very favourable for the rapid and accurate sketching of details. Slight lateral movements of the screen by the left hand soon determine its best position. When a doubt arises as to some detail, a movement of the wrist floods the field-with light, enabling an exact observation to be made, while a second change restores the mellow illumination so favour- able for drawing. All this can be done without moving the eye from the tube or taking the pencil from the paper. The position of the screen between the light and mirror is more effective than when the ground glass is mounted as part of the substage apparatus. Those who have never used this simple contrivance in drawing will find it a material aid in many cases. Its frequent usefulness on other occasions, as a light- moderator for low-power examinations, will insure it a permanent place on the work-table. Instantaneous Photomicrography.*—Herr M. Stenglein, who has been trying to adapt the instantaneous method to photomicrography, recommends a mixture of magnesium, chlorate of potash, and sulphide of antimony, which gives a flash lasting for 1/50-1/30 of a second. The * Centralbl. f. Bakteriol. u. Parasitenk., iii, (1888) pp. 670-4, 702-7 (1 fig.). $12 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO percentage composition is 60 parts (by weight) chlorate of potash, 30 parts magnesium in powder, 10 parts sulphide of antimony. The combustion of this powder is effected in a lantern L, the body of which is a metal tube, closed at one end and provided at the other with a glass plate and a diaphragm, the aperture of which corresponds accurately with the diameter of the illuminating lens. Within the lantern, and on a level with its central point, is a metal plate, upon which the powder and touch-paper are placed. On the left side of the lantern is a slit closed by a shutter; through the slit the touch-paper is lighted. The lantern is further provided with a chimney, bent at an angle and about 5 metres long. The chimney, which fits on the lantern, is not shown in the illustration. About 0°75-1 metre from its end the chimney is fitted with a special apparatus for absorbing the smoke. The camera is placed vertically and the illuminating lens B horizon- tally. The preliminary focusing is made with a mineral-oil lamp, after- wards exchanged for the lantern. For instantaneous photography the sensitiveness of the plate must be known, and to estimate it for this magnesium powder the author has devised a special sensitometer. This consists of a glass plate 12 x 15 em., divided up into thirty rectangular spaces of 2 x 3 cm. and covered with tissue paper. The spaces are numbered according to the number of layers of paper. This sensitometer is fixed in a copying frame and then inside a pasteboard box open in front. The frame is then placed in a room lighted by a candle and exposed for a certain time. The ordinary developer is used, but without the addition of bromide. Then the number on the sensitometer gives the sensitiveness of the plate. The author’s results were obtained from stearine candles (eight to the pound), distance 30 cm., exposure one minute, and developing five minutes with the pyrogallic developer ; he found that plates 22 and 23 were quite distinct, and that No. 2£ was almost as good. As most objectives differ more or less in their focus, it is obviously advisable to obtain a filter which will permit sharp photographic pictures to be produced by their aid. A mixture of copper nitrate and chromic acid in water allows only 7 per cent. of all spectrum colours to pass through (or diluted 12-14 per cent.). By using this as a light filter in combination with erythrosin the focal differences are quite ob- viated. As dry plates are not usually obtainable in a condition suitable for the erythrosin emulsion, wet plates are recommended. All opera- tions with these plates must be conducted in a very subdued red light. Mixtures of erythrosin and silver nitrate give precipitates of a silver compound which are very sensitive to yellow light, and act more power- fully in bromide-gelatin than the pure dye. For making this mixture the following formula is given:—25 ccm. erythrosin solution, 1:1000; 1 cem. silver nitrate solution, 1:80; 1/2 ccm. ammonia; 75 ccm. water. The plates are bathed therein for one minute and dried in the dark. Photographing moving Microscopic Objects.*—M. L. Errera pro- poses to apply to microscopic objects the process already employed for recording each phase of the movement of a horse, &c., more especially the plan adopted by Anschiitz in his “ Schnellseher,” which is fixed in a dark chamber which that author describes as follows : |—“ The succes- * Bull. Soc. Belg. Micr., xiv. (1887) pp. 32-5. t Catalogue of the Wiesbaden Exhibition, 1887, ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 813 sive images on the glass of the man or animal in movement are fixed on a circular plate turning on its centre, and they are made to pass one after another behind an opening in a large screen in front of the ob- server. Hvery time that one of the images reaches the middle of the aperture it is illuminated during the fraction of a second (about 1/10,000) by the discharge of an induction coil through a Geissler tube placed behind the movable disc.” The effect is of course the same as that of the zoetrope or “ wheel of life.” M. Errera’s idea of applying this process to microscopic objects is thus expressed :— “The details and the mechanism of the movements of microscopic beings are still very imperfectly known. The cells with vibratile cilia, the infusoria, and the zoospores still present a crowd of problems to be resolved. i can hardly think that photography, which has rendered such great services in analysing the leap of man, the flight of the sea- gull, and the gallop of the horse, could not also be employed with success in the case of fishes, insects, worms, protozoa, alge, or isolated histological elements. I propose, in conjunction with a skilful photo- grapher, to make some experiments in this direction. The aquarium Microscope of Klénne and Miiller, and that of Nachet with several bodies, suitably modified, will probably allow of the instantaneous photography of microscopic movements.” Photographing Phosphorescent Bacilli by means of their own light.*—Dr. Fischer has taken good photographs from cultivations of three different phosphorescent bacteria. To do this successfully it is necessary that the cultivation should shed an intense light, the dry plates must be very sensitive, and the exposure long (24~36 hours). The best pictures were obtained from B. phosphorescens, the cultivations of which in a dark room at 5°-10° C. gave out their brightest light. In these photograms not only are the colonies seen distinctly and sharply formed, but the outlines of the test-tubes and other vessels are recognizable. A herring illuminated with B. phosphorescens took extremely well, the scales showing with perfect distinctness. The head and tail, which were not illuminated, did not appear in the photograph. Dr. Fischer then went a step farther, and obtained photographs of external objects, e.g. a watch, by the illumination of these phospho- rescent colonies in a dark room. Not only could the time be read, but the hands and second-hands were distinctly visible. The illuminant bacteria alluded to are those commented on before in this Journal (ante, p. 277)—the “ West Indian” and the “ endemic” phosphorescent bacilli, and B. phosphorescens. Gray, W. M.—Photo-micrography. : [Methods used by the author in photomicrography of sections of animal tissues. ] The Microscope, VIII. (1888) pp. 172-5. NevuuHAvSS, R.—Die Entwickelung der Mikrophotographie in den letzten zwei Jahren mit besonderer Berticksichtigung ihrer Bedeutung fiir die Lehre von den Mikroorganismen. (The development of Pliotomicrography in the last two years with special reference to its importance for the theory of micro-organisms.) Centralbl. f. Bacteriol. u. Parasitenk., TV. (1888) pp. 81-4, 111-6, 283-4. [Also reply by M. Stenglein, zbid., pp. 282-3.] RAFTER’s (G. W.) Photomicrographs. [Commendatory notice of them.] Amer. Mon. Mier. Journ., 1X. (1888) p. 113. * Centralbl. f. Bakteriol. u. Parasitenk., iv. (1888) pp. 89-92. 814 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO (5) Microscopical Optics and Manipulation. Variation in Micrometric Measurements due to different illumi- nation.—Mr. C. Fasoldt sends us the following ‘“ Table showing the variation in measurements due to the different applications of light and illuminations.” “The image of 4/10 in. was the object on which these measure- ments were made, and was ruled on a glass dise of No. 2 covering glass, 7/1000 in, in thickness. « All measurements were taken on one and the same ruling, with the same Microscope, objective, and eye-piece, under the same focus, and having the Microscope in the same position continually, and only changing the mirror and excluding the one light while the other was used. Unmounted—Lamplight. Lines downward. Lines upward. Concave mirror 4/10 in. 10/100,000 — | Coneave mirror 4/10 in. 10/100,000 + Plane » 4/10 in. 5/100,000 + | Plane » 4/10 in. 14/100,000 + Il. through , Ill. through 2 objective \ 4/10 in. 5/100,000 + objective \ 4/10 in, 15/100,000 + Mounted on Glass. Lamplight. Daylight. Coneave mirror 4/10 in. 0 Concave mirror 4/10 in. 39/100,000 + Plane » 4/10 in. 15/100,000 + | Plane » 4/10 in. 20/100,000 + Til. through : fuecute \ 4/10 in, 31/100,000 + “ A number of comparisons were made at each position and in the same temperature. «A Spencer objective was used for these measurements ; but Bausch and Lomb and Gundlach objectives were also tried, obtaining the same results. “The Microscope used is one constructed on my late patents, and has a micrometer for measuring similar to a cobweb micrometer. But instead of cobwebs, three movable steel pointers are used, which are worked as fine as this metal will permit. The stage is mechanical, and the main slide is moved with great precision by a fine screw 100 threads per inch.” Error was therefore eliminated in the case only of the lines mounted on glass when the concave mirror and lamplight was used. Testing Screw-Micrometers of Reading-Microscopes.*—Prof. Rein- hertz points out that every micrometer is liable to special errors and that these must be studied before the requisite corrections can be applied. The errors are due to (1) the screw itself; (2) the mounting of the screw ; (3) the remaining parts of the micrometer. (1) According as the screw produces unequal linear movements at different parts for a complete turn, or unequal linear movements for equal fractions of a single turn, the errors may be called “ progressive ” or “ periodic”; the former are due to inequalities of pitch, the latter to irregularities of the thread. (2) The position of the screw is fixed by its point or head being maintained in constant pressure against a plane surface; if this surface * Central-Ztg. f. Optik u. Mech., ix. (1888) pp. 37-40. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 815 has inequalities, or is not perpendicular to the screw, or if the screw- point is out of centre, the errors in the readings are functions of corre- sponding fractions of a single turn, or are “ periodic.” (3) Imperfections in the other parts may introduce numerous irregu- lar errors, capable of entirely destroying the advantantages of micro- metric reading. The errors may therefore be either progressive, periodic, or irregular; the first may practically be neglected since only one or two or at the most five turns are employed in theodolite readings; the irregular errors must be determined and eliminated by repeated readjustment to the same graduation mark, the vernier being clamped, and by observing the mean errors of adjustment and reading; if these are subject to occasional large variation they indicate imperfections in the mechanism, lubricant, &e. It remains to determine the periodic errors; i.e. to compare the different values found for the same interval on the scale as measured at different parts of the drum. The most convenient interval to use is the distance on the scale between some graduation and a supplementary mark which corresponds to 1/10, 1/8, or 1/5 of a complete turn. The drum is set to 0, one end of the interval is brought on to the cross wires by the vernier screw, and then the other end by a movement of the drum ; the first position is then recovered by a movement of the vernier- screw ; and in this way a series of measurements are made by alternate use of the vernier-screw and drum until the zero-reading upon the latter is again reached; the readings are then reversed. A series of such double sets of observations will give a mean value of the interval which may be regarded as the true value, and tke differences between this and the values obtained at different parts of the drum will be the corrections to be applied. An example quoted by Prof. Reinhertz shows how the periodic error was determined on a micrometer screw, so that by applying the correction the mean error of a single measurement could be reduced from 8°5 in. to 4:4 in.; and was finally removed altogether by correcting the eccentricity of the hollow cone in which the screw point was made to work. If the periodic errors do not lie within the mean errors of adjustment and reading the screw should be rejected, and in any case the periodic errors should be eliminated by repeated readings at different parts of the drum. ; Arachnoidiscus as a new Test for High-power Objectives.*—Mr. T. EF. Smith says that there are two great objections to using the Podura scale as a test object for an oil-immersion. The first is that the conventional markings can only be seen when the scale is a little way off the cover-glass, and, consequently, the objective not working at its full aperture; and, secondly, it is impossible to tell the best oint. A dry glass, on the Podura scale, is exceeding sensitive, and a little turn of the correction-collar, or a little difference in the length of the draw-tube, will make all the difference between fine definition and no definition at all. With the oil-immersion, however, you can go through the whole range of the correction-collar without making any difference in the markings, beyond changing them from red to blue. Of course, * Journ. Quek. Micr. Club, iii. (1888) pp. 247-53, 816 SUMMARY OF OURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO opticians will tell you that they know the best point, but his experience is as follows: Four object-glasses, with a correction-collar, were supposed to be set with best definition on the Podura scale at the point 0; the first was best on a balsam-mounted slide at point 24; No. 2 glass was at its best at point 5; No. 3 at point 74; and the last glass at its best on the same slide at point 10, or as far as it could go. It is no use blaming opticians, for the English microscopists have been brought up (and rightly, up to a certain point) to believe in the Podura scale, and makers cannot be expected to run the risk of producing a glass that is not at its best on that test. The only way then is to offer a substitute that shall stand for the oil-immersion in the same relation as the Podura scale does to the dry glass, and for that purpose Mr. Smith “ offers the outer plate of the Arachnoidiscus (anything) mounted in balsam.” To him there is a particular appropriateness in choosing this as a test object, from the fact that although its main features for the last forty years have been as well known as the Podura scale itself, the discovery of the finer markings or structure is due entirely to the oil-immersion objective. The advantages claimed for the new test-object for an oil-immersion are that the little projecting points or spines can only be clearly defined where the objective is perfectly corrected and set at its best point. It is not every disc of the diatom that will act as a test, any more than will every scale of Podura. Some will show no projecting spines even with the widest-angled objective, and others are so coarse as to be no test at all; but a properly selected one will answer all the purpose, both for defining and resolving power. Tests for Modern Objectives.*—Mr. E. M. Nelson considers that the advance of the Microscope in recent years is due to the Podura scale and the following diatoms :—I1st, Rhomboides ; 2ndly, Grammatophora subti- lissima ; 3rdly, and probably to a greater extent, Amphipleura pellucida ; lastly, and at the present time, to Pleurosigma angulatum, N. rhomboides, and the secondary markings of diatoms in general with large angled cones of central light. It was the demand for glasses that would give classical images of the Podura scale which improved the central portions of the objectives, and it was the demand for diatom-resolving lenses which spurred on the opticians to make wide angles and to correct the margins. But however much we may regret it, these old tests—the Podura and the Amphipleura pellucida—which have been of great service to the cause of microscopy, must be laid aside. The classical picture of Podura demands such a very small area of the centre of an objective that it tests too little of the glass. The following are a few tests for modern objectives :— 1, Pleurosigma angulatum, showing dark perforations on a light ground, with a fracture passing through them. While the dioptric beam passes though the centre of the lens the diffraction spectra sweep the margin. Unless a lens be truly centered it will not stand this test. 2. A Cherryfield Rhomboides in balsam or styrax with the full aper- ture of Powell’s latest condenser is a very severe test. * Engl. Mech., xlviii. (1888) p. 51. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 817 3. To these may be added the secondary marking on diatoms, e.g. Coscinodiscus asteromphalus, &e. 4. The fracture passing through the secondary markings, such as (a) Triceratium, (b) Isthmia nervosa. 5. The secondary markings in the areolations on the hoop of Isthmia nervosa in balsam. All these tests are intended for solid cones of direct light of various apertures. ‘T'wo classes of tests are comprised in this list. The first, and perhaps the best, is the way a fairly large test is presented. 1, 2, 4 (a), and some of 3 are in this class. The other class consists in the possibility of making out the test at all. 4 (6), 5, and some of 3 are in this class. Fasoldt’s Test-plates.*—Mr. C. Fasoldt replies to Dr. R. H. Ward’s report on the examination of one of his test-plates. He claims that Dr. T. F.C. Van Allen “resolved every band up to and including the 200,000 lines per inch in the presence of Dr. Ward.” Also that “a number of gentlemen ” have resolved all bands up to and including the 200,000, “ seeing plainly lines and spaces.” “The successful resolution of the lines is not dependent on the mode of ruling, but on the eyes. And, considering the admitted inability in Dr. Ward’s eyes, it would seem no more than an act of justice to all concerned had the Doctor delegated his position on the committee to some one whose eyes were more reliable, and who would have been equally unprejudiced as himself in making the investigations. Good eyesight is certainly an essential factor in such close tests as the resolution of even 120,000 lines per inch, and there may perhaps be a reasonable doubt whether the Doctor was able to resolve the 120,000 lines per inch, as he claimed he was able to do. His admissions are, however, very candid, and his report can, therefore, have no value as to the number or resolvability of the rulings under discussion.” Microscopical Optics and the Quekett Club Journal.—When an esteemed friend goes astray it is often very perplexing to know what course to take. Are we to leave him unadmonished out of fear of impairing the ties of friendship, or are we to openly recognize the evil of his ways and act accordingly ? The friend who has more especially brought this difficulty to mind at the present moment is the Quekett Microscopical Club, for which we retain unimpaired all the regard of early days, and the evil in this case relates to some papers printed in its Journal. We recently had occasion to comment upon some comical blunders occurring in a paper in which optical principles were turned upside down in a very naive manner, but the last part of the Journal goes beyond even that extraordinary paper, and we find page after page containing the most terrible nonsense that has ever been published hitherto in a microscopical journal. The paper to which we more particu- larly refer is one entitled “On True and False Images in Microscopy,” the writer of which, as he shows in paragraph after paragraph, has not taken the trouble to master even the rudiments of the subject about which he writes, although he starts with the ludicrous statement that, “ to him the subject presents no difficulty whatever”! One of the more strik- * The Microscope, viil. (1888) pp. 220-3. t Journ. Quek. Micr. Club, iii. (1888) pp. 267-72. 818 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO ing instances of this will be found in the author’s statement (p. 268) that a passage quoted from Prof. Abbe “clearly means that, given perfect * correction of the objective, there is perfect definition of the object, which “ to me seems to contradict the former part of the paper.” The writer there- fore has avowedly not a glimmering of a notion of that most elementary point of the diffraction theory—the difference between, “ delineation” and “definition,” or that perfect definition is quite consistent with imperfect delineation. If the only result of publishing the paper were to raise a laugh at the expense of the author, the matter might be treated as not being of more than personal interest, but when we find the Quekett Club printing such rubbish, it is necessary to make a protest in the interest of micro- scopical science against so retrograde a proceeding, and this the more so as it was at the Quekett Club that one of the earliest demonstrations was given of the fact that microscopic images cannot be interpreted by simply “ believing the evidence of one’s own eyes,” as it is now suggested is all that is necessary. ; In another part of the same No. we have a bewildering mixture of conflicting statements.* As will be seen from the extracts we print below, the speaker declares as “‘ absurd on the face of it, and Prof. Abbe did not believe anything of the kind,” just what Prof. Abbe, as appears from another part of the same Journal, does believe, and which is nothing less than the cardinal fact of the diffraction theory, while the speaker himself later on, apparently quite unconscious of the discrepancy, states his belief in the very thing which he had before denounced as absurd. Speaker’s first Statement. “There had no doubt “been some very objec- “tionable passages written ‘in connection with the “subject—not perhaps by “Prof. Abbe, but in such “away as to appear to “put them into Prof. “ Abbe’s mouth; such for “instance, as the state- “ment that because the “whole of the diffraction “images were not taken “in, therefore the whole “structure of the object “could not be known. “That, of course, was “absurd on the face of it, “and Prof. Abbe did not “believe anything of the “kind.” Prof. Abbe’s own Statement. “Perfect similarity be- “tween the microscopical “image and the object “always depends on the “admission to and utiliza- “tion by the objective of “the whole of the dif- “fracted rays which the ‘structure is competent to “emit. When a portion “only of the total diffrac- “tion fan appertaining to “a given structure is lost, “the image is more or less “incomplete or dissimilar.” Speaker’s second Statement. “With these difficult “ objects, however, though “they could get a fair “knowledge of them with- “in the limits of their “optical power, yet they “came at length to a point “where the largeness of “the angle required was “such that they could not “yet grasp the diffraction “spectra, and at that point “their entire knowledge “necessarily ended,” The mischief of all this is that it must necessarily have the effect of making a student believe that the subject is so confused and unsettled that it is of no use to try and understand it. ; There is plenty of room for most interesting criticism on the subject of diffraction, but to be worth printing it must be founded on intelligent doubt, and must not consist of raw and undigested ideas arising from simple ignorance of the subject, which renders it necessary to win over * Journ. Quek. Micr, Club, iii. (1888) p. 288. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 819 again (for some minds) the ground formerly won and now so incon- siderately put in peril of being lost. HARcCHER, A.—Optometer und Apparat zum Messen der Brennweiten und zum Centriren optischer Linsen, System North Harchek. (Optometer and apparatus for measuring the foci of and centering optical lenses, —North Harchek’s system.) Breslauer Aertztl. Zeitschr., XII. (1888) p. 139. Highest Magnifying Power. [Another specimen of the general ignorance on this subject. ‘What is the highest magnifying power that has been obtained? In 1864 an eminent microscopist expressed his opinion that in object-glasses with one twenty-fifth of an inch focus the Microscope had reached its utmost attainable limit of perfection. He added that it appeared impossible to separate or define lines more numerous than 90,000 in an inch on account of the decomposition of light. Yet within a few years after this opinion had been expressed, an object-glass with a one-fiftieth of an inch focus was made which magnified 1,575,000,000 times. This revealed the one four hundred thousandth part of an inch; but it again has been left far behind by a glass recently made in Sweden, which enables us to distinguish the one two hundred and four million seven hundred thousandth part of an inch.’’] Tit- Bits, XIV. (1888) p. 310. Mercizr, G. H.—Traité pratique de Manipulations de Physique a V'usage des Etudiants en Médecine, précédé d’une Préface par M. le Prof. C. M. Gariel. Optique. (Practical treatise on physical manipulations for students in medicine. With a preface by Prof. C. M. Gariel. Optics.) iv. and 251 pp. and 90 figs., 8vo, Paris, 1888. NeEtson, E. M.—On the Interpretation of a Photomicrographic Phenomenon by the Abbe Diffraction Theory. Journ. Quek. Micr, Club, I11. (1888) pp. 273-9. ¢: 33 True and False Images in Microscopy. Journ. Quek. Micr. Club, III. (1888) p. 288. a f Amphipleura pellucida. [Report of resolution with Powell’s 1/4 in. objective 1:17 N.A. with dry front, i.e. with 1:0 N.A.] Engl. Mech., XUIII. (1888) p. 51. Smiru, T. F.—On True versus False Images in Microscopy. Journ. Quek. Mier. Club, III. (1888) pp. 267-72, 288-9. TANAKADATE, A.—Note on the Constants of a Lens. Journ, Coll. of Sci. Tokio, I. (1888) p. 333. VEREKER, J. G. P.—Numerical Aperture. Journ. of Micr., I. (1888) pp. 155-66 (4 figs. ). (6) Miscellaneous. Simple method of Projecting upon the screen Microscopic Rock Sections, both by ordinary and by polarized light.*—Mr. E. P. Quinn “knowing the difficulty experienced in pointing out to students any particular crystal in a rock section when viewed with the Microscope direct, attempted to project the images on the screen, and by the aid of comparatively simple apparatus met with very gratifying success, both with ordinary and with polarized light. The tube of the Microscope was screwed out and replaced with a cork, through which a hole had been cut to carry the ordinary 1 in. objective, and behind it the analyser of the Microscope. The polariscope and rock section occupied their usual position as when used with the Microscope in the ordinary way. The Microscope-stand being inclined into the horizontal position was placed in front of the object-lens of the limelight lantern. The object-lens of a lantern usually consists of a combination of two lenses. If so the back lens is taken out and the front lens only used, acting as an extra condenser, concentrating the light upon the rock section and causing it to pass through the polarizer and the analyser. * Rep. Brit. Assoc. Adv. Sci., 1887, p, 725. 820 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO A little adjustment of the light was required to get it well through both polarizer and analyser, but this with a little care was soon dune, and a bright picture, several feet in diameter, was projected upon the screen, showing the crystals well defined and exhibiting very strikingly the changes of colour, &c., characteristic of the crystals when viewed by polarized light, and in such a manner as to be well seen by a number of people at once and also allowing the lecturer to readily point out any particular crystal or crystals to which he desires to draw the attention of his audience. As the optical axis of the lantern and Microscope did not coincide, the lantern was placed on a board provided with four levelling screws, with which the necessary adjustments were readgly made. Much better effects may be got if the ‘ Prazmowski’ form of prisms made by Zeiss are used instead of the usual Nicol’s prism on account of their greater aperture and shorter length, and the most brilliant results with the 1 in. objective of fifty angular apertures (sic) by Wray of London.” Microscopy and the Study of Rocks.*—Prof. J. W. Judd thinks there is perhaps just now a danger of our exaggerating the importance of the microscopic method as applied to the study of rocks. That the method has already done much in enabling us to follow out and trace the effects of the slow processes of change within the earth’s crust, and that it will do still more in the future no one can doubt. But when it is sought to make the Microscope a “ court of final appeal” in geological questions, and in doing so to disregard the importance of field observa- tion, we perceive the same source of danger as is now perhaps being experienced in connection with almost every branch of natural history research. It must be remembered that while the Microscope enables us to see a little more than the naked eye or the pocket lens, yet, neverthe- less, between what is actually seen by the very highest powers of our Microscopes and the molecular groupings and reactions which give rise to the varied phenomena of the mineral kingdom, there is room f:r almost infinite possibilities. We accept the teaching of the Micro- scope with all thankfulness, but we recognize the fact at the same time that it has enabled us to get only a very little nearer to the heart of those great physical problems which we aim at solving. Microscope and Telescope.t—M. J. C. Houzeau, formerly Director of the Brussels Observatory, has a lengthy paper under this title, from which we extract the following :— “ The field of scientific research was immensely widened by the simul- taneous invention of the Microscope and Telescope. In the whole course of history there is not another invention which has exerted a similar influence in the sphere of material facts. The circle of individual action was extended in an unexpected degree by gunpowder ; it was this which enabled Cortez and his four hundred followers to put to flight armies which outnumbered his own in the proportion of 100 to 1. In the strictly material order of things. gunpowder is the first signal triumph of applied science—of modern science. But we must grant that it had an essentially destructive character; it belonged to the arts of war, which in our social childhood take precedence of the arts of peace. The second invention which—still in the material world—produced a profound revolution, belonged to the useful arts. This was the steam engine, by which our industrial forces have been enlarged to an enor- * Nature, xxxviii. (1888) p. 386. + Bull. Soc. Belg. Micr., xiii. (1887) pp. 90-110. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 821 mous extent; it constituted an addition of energy which was equivalent to the creation of millions of workmen. The steam engines at work in civilised countries represent the labour of ten or twelve times the total number of adult males in the population of the world. This was an acquisition of power, but not of intelligence. But after these two inventions, the one warlike, the other industrial, there came one belonging to science, that. of the Microscope and Tele- scope, which has had no parallel in history for the extent and the effects of its material results. Outside the world as perceptible by our senses, there was, above and below, a sort of immense envelope, which had for thousands of years escaped the eyes of man. Beyond the boundaries of the visible, both in the large and the little, there was, as it were, a second sphere, vaster than that in which so many generations had lived, which had remained up to that time an impenetrable domain. One day, thanks to what I shall call the new eyes with which man learnt to endow himself, the previously unknown world was revealed to us; and we know now whether it contained sufficient subjects of interest and wonder. Viewed thus in its glory, the double invention of the Microscope and the Telescope appears a sudden thing. Yet this great and extra- ordinary extension of the sense of sight was not altogether new. Primitive man could not remain a stranger to certain facts of magnifica- tion which, so to speak, forced themselves upon his attention. When I was living in the Antilles, I once saw a black, who had been brought from his native land of Africa before the suppression of slavery, and who was consequently a savage, looking through a drop of dew at a gnat upon a leaf. This was a temporary observation, unintentional and the effect of chance; still it was none the less an observation, and the chance would naturally recur in certain circumstances. Primitive man could not then be entirely ignorant of the magnifying power of drops of water. ... The two instruments, the Microscope and Telescope, thus appear to us as proceeding from the same germ. We see that they were produced at the same time, the beginning of that 17th century to which they were destined to reveal so many marvels, and in the same form, namely a convex lens associated with a concave lens. The first improvement was made contemporaneously in both, by the substitution in both cases of a convex for a concave eye-piece ; for the Telescope in 1613 by Scheiner at the suggestion of Kepler, for the Microscope in 1618 by Francesco Fontana. Both profited, so to speak, by Huyghens’ idea of using three lenses, and both were at the same time invested with a new power by the application of achromatism. There is a further resemblance; the names of the two instruments remained vague and to some extent confused ; the Academy dei Lincei, at Rome, judged it necessary to have distinct names, and a Greek, named Remiscianus, settled in Italy, supplied the two words Microscope and Telescope; so that the two instruments born together received baptism at the same time, after having shared every- thing at their entrance into the world. If they have subsequently separated, and if they tend to separate more widely in their construction, it is only in consequence of the different purposes to which they are applied. Practical convenience has led by degrees to distinct arrangements adapted on both sides to the conditions which they have to satisfy. But this diverging course should not make us forgct the original similarity of the types... . 1888. 3K 822 SUMMARY OF OURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO The invention of the Microscope and Telescope has not only contri- buted to open out a new sphere to us so vast that we cannot yet realize its extent, but it has also shown us the contrast which exists between our mental faculties and the fertility of nature; we have here an evident proof that the imagination, however potent it may at first appear, is only rich in combinations of known things; it forms combinations of great variety, often fantastic and unnatural; it can magnify or reduce images to any extent; but from its own source it extracts nothing that is really new ; and however inventive it may imagine itself to be, it would discover nothing if nature did not supply examples.” og Brain Markings. [“ A well-known New York physician has just published the sort of discovery which Lord Lytton would have made a novel out of. An aged Polish count, formerly professor of languages and a famous oriental scholar, died in the hospital, and Dr. Rookwood had oceasion, in conjunction with other experts, to make a microscopical examination of a certain part of the cerebrum. They noticed a peculiar set of markings, which took the form of Egyptian and Chinese hieroglyphics. These were amplified to a magnitude of 3000 diameters, and the results shown to another oriental scholar, who declared them to be true characters in the Ethiopic, Syriac, and Egyptian languages. Dr. Rookwood suggests that his discovery will lead to extracting from the dead their literary achievements as well as their suppressed opinions.’ Sci.-Gossip, 1888, p. 67. Conservirung von Zeichnungen. (Preserving drawings.) (Lay the drawing on a flat surface and pour over it collodion in which 2 per cent. of stearine has been dissolved. In twenty minutes it is dry and fixed.] Neueste Erfind. u. Erfahr., 1887, p. 571. DALLINGER, Rev. W. H.—Memoir. Research, I, (1888) pp. 40-1 (portrait). Dallinger, Dr., Presentation to. [‘** All Sheffield, of any public note, took its leave of Dr. and Mrs. Dallinger in the Council Chamber of the cutlery metropolis on Tuesday. The Mayor, on behalf of numerous subscribers, presented Mrs. Dallinger with a silver tray, and the Dr. with a substantial sum of money, the value of the gifts being enhanced by the kindest expressions of regard for the recipients. The Mayor regarded Dr. Dallinger’s removal from the town almost as a public calamity. The Doctor said that since he came to Sheffield he had been privileged with companionship and friendships and intercourse which had made his life, that was full of labour, equally full of sweetness. His labour during the past eight years had not been barren; some work had been accomplished. He had been enabled, by increasingly powerful instruments, to penetrate still further and further down, but so far as this portion of his life had been serviceable to science, it had been more powerful than it otherwise could have been because he was surrounded by such friends and such interests in this never-to-be-forgotten town. He thanked them for the present to his wife, without whose constant assistance he could never have performed the work that had been done at Wesley College. The gift to himself would be devoted to the purchase of any new instrument that he required, so long as it lasted. He had been working in a department of science that had been absolutely untouched, and he was constantly finding that something was wanting that was not existing in scientific instruments before. It was a source of joy to him that through its gift Sheffield would be permanently represented on the scientific side of his house.”’] Christian World, Aug. 16, 1888. Fritscu, G.—See Neumayer, G., infra. Gosse, P. H., Hon. F.R.M.S.—Obituary. Athenxum, 1888, Sept. 1, pp. 294-5. Gray, Asa, Hon. F.R.M.S.—Obituary. Nature, XX XVII. (1888) pp. 375-7. [Manton W. P., and oruEers.—Use and Abuse of the Microscope. | [‘‘Dr. E. L. Nealey, of Bangor, read a paper on the ‘Use and Abuse of the Microscope’ before the recent meeting of the Maine Medical Society. Our experience leads us to think that most physicians abuse the instrument by not using it.”] The Microscope, VILL, (1886) p. 217. —- ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETO. 823 NEumMAYeER, G.—Anleitung zu wissenschaftlichen Beobachtungen auf Reisen. (Guide to scientific observations in travelling.) Contains Fritsch, G., Praktische Gesichtspunkte fiir die Verwendung zweier dem Reisenden wichtigen techni- schen Hilfsmittel : Das Mikroskop und der photographische Apparat. (Practical suggestions for the use of two of the traveller’s important technical aids: the Microscope and the photographic apparatus, pp. 512-612, 8 figs.) 2nd ed., 2 vols. 8vo, Berlin, 1888. Routwey, F.—Rock-forming Minerals. [Contains chapters on (1) Apparatus, Methods of Preparation, Examination, &e., (2) Propagation of Light, Reflection, Refraction, Double Refraction, Optic Axes, &c., (8) Polarization of Light, (4) Axes of Optical Elasticity, Examination in Polarized Light, (5) Wave Surfaces, (6) Bisectrices and Optic Normal, (7) Examination in Convergent Polarized Light, (8) Pleo- chroism. | iv. and 252 pp., 126 figs., 8vo, London, 1888. VEREKER, J. G. P.—(0n the Choice of a Microscope.] Scientif. Enquirer, III. (1888) pp. 152-4. Wiesbaden, Katalog zur wissenschaftlichen Ausstellung der 60. Versammlung deutscher Naturforscher und Aerzte zu. (Catalogue of the Scientific Exhibition of the 60th Meeting of German Naturalists and Physicians at Wiesbaden.) Edited by L. Dreyfus. ix. and 224 pp., 8vo, Wiesbaden, 1887. Cf. also Zeitschr. f. Instrumentenk., VII. (1887) pp. 428-9. Zeitschr. f. Wiss. Mikr., LV. (1887) pp. 303-25 (1 fig.). 8B. Technique.* (1) Collecting Objects, including Culture Processes. Cultivation of Schizomycetes in Coloured Nutritive Media.t—Herr Birch-Hirschfeld found three years ago that the comma bacilli of cholera not only retained their lively movements in stained bouillon, but multiplied in a manner similar to what they do in unstained hang- ing drops. It was afterwards found that other kinds of bacteria, both mobile and immobile varieties, behaved in a similar manner, and this method of staining Schizomycetes was then used by the author for demonstration purposes. Besides fuchsin, other anilin pigments were employed (dahlia, Victoria blue, &c.) For the observation of fission fungi in hanging drops, this method offers decided advantages, as the small and motile forms are more easily found and focused, and the morphological characters of the bacteria are also rendered more evident by the staining of their protoplasm. The author remarks that bacteriological literature scarcely notices the relation of living bacteria towards anilin pigments, and seems to think that such a method might afford information about the morpho- logical changes bacteria undergo in their development and multiplica- tion, and that inoculation experiments with living stained pathogenic bacteria might help to decide certain questions anent the localization and spread of germs imported into the organism. With regard to these points, it may be mentioned that anthrax bacilli deeply stained with diamond-fuchsin or victoria-blue, and grown on gelatin, retain their virulence quite unchanged. For observing the morphological changes connected with growth * This subdivision contains (1) Collecting Objects, including Culture Pro- cesses; (2) Preparing Objects; (8) Cutting, including Imbedding and Microtomes; (4) Staining and Injecting; (5) Mounting, including slides, preservative fluids, &c.; (6) Miscellaneous. + Arch. f. Hygeine, vii. pp. 341-53. Centralbl. f. Bakteriol. u. Parasitenk., iii, (1888) pp. 447-9. 3K 2 824 SUMMARY OF OURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO and spore-formation, the dyes previously mentioned are of little value, but phloxin-red may be employed with advantage. It is extremely soluble in water, stains spores quite intensely, and cultivations on gelatin and bouillon stained with this dye throve luxuriantly. Experi- ments on typhoid bacillus made by this method confirmed the formation of spores as first stated by Gaffky. Benzo-purpurin was also found to be a useful dye, as it stained the spores alone, and left the rest of the proto- plasm uncoloured. . Cultivation of Anaerobic Micro-organisms.*—Dr. C. Friinkel has invented an apparatus for the cultivation of anaerobic microbes, which he says combines the advantages of the methods of Liborius and Gruber, The nutrient media, bouillon, gelatin, agar, are placed in test-tubes somewhat wider than the ordinary ones. Sterilization, inoculation, &c., are then performed in the usual way. ‘This done, the tube is closed with a caoutchouc plug, through which pass two glass tubes bent at a right angle. One of these reaches to the bottom of the test-tube, the shorter one goes no farther than the bottom of the caoutchoue plug. The exposed extremities are drawn out to fine points, and this arm of the longer tube, besides containing a plug of cotton-wool, is connected with a hydrogen apparatus by means of a piece of rubber tubing. The gas then passes through the nutrient medium and escapes through the shorter leg. When the air is thoroughly expelled, the pointed ends are melted up, and then the medium is spread over the surface of the test- tube in the manner proposed by Ehrlich. In order to prevent certain sources of error, two points must be rigorously observed ; first, the two pieces of glass tubing and the rubber plug must be thoroughly sterilized. This is best done by laying them for an hour in a 1 per cent. sublimate solution. The second source of error is the escape of the hydrogen and the entrance of air. This is avoided by covering the plug with paraffin which melts at about 80°. When bouillon is the medium, the test-tube can be freed from every trace of air in 14-2 minutes. If gelatin be used, then the test-tube must be placed in water at 37° while the gas is passing through. This takes only 3-4 minutes. Agar must be used in 2 per cent. solution to which 1 per cent. grape sugar is added. As the agar solidifies rapidly below 40°, it is necessary to be quick in passing the gas through and wetting off the points. The tube must then be rolled round in lukewarm water or in the hand. The advantages claimed for this method are cheapness, convenience, and suitability for its intended purpose. Bacterial Growth between 50° and 70° C.j—Dr. Globig who has been experimenting with Bacteria found in garden mould, made his preliminary isolation in covered capsules of 5-7 cm. diameter, and grew the micro-organisms on pieces of potato. The colonies thus obtained were cultivated in test-tubes on blocks of potato cut obliquely. For the latter step, potatoes were boiled and disinfected with sublimate solution, and then cylindrical blocks punched out of them with a cork- borer, the diameter of which was just less than that of the test-tubes. The blocks were then cut obliquely, and jammed in the test-tubes so that they did not move, and closed with the usual precautions. By this * Centralbl. f. Bakteriol. u. Parasitenk., iii. (1888) pp. 735-40, 763-8 (1 fig.). + Zeitschr, f. Hygeine, iii. (1887) p. 295. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 825 procedure 30 different kinds of bacteria were bred, which developed between 56° and 58°. With higher and lower temperatures different kinds of bacteria appeared. At 68°-70°, only a few colonies developed, while if the temperature were lowered to 50° or below, the potato bacillus appeared, and this overgrew all other colonies. The author notes that these bacilli are located on the superficial layers of the mould, and that the sun’s warmth must be the most powerful factor in their genesis. Alkali-Albuminate as a Nutrient Medium.*—Prof. J. Rosenthal and Dr. O. Schulz make alkali-albuminate in the following manner which is simpler than that of Tarchanoff. The albumen taken from fresh hens’ eggs is separated from the chalaze, and clarified before it is mixed with the alkali solution. ‘This is done in the most simple way by straining the albumen through a bag made of a double layer of muslin. It should be squeezed through slowly with the hand. The filtrate, quite clean and free from bubbles, is then poured into a graduated vessel closed with a ground-glass stopper and diluted with a 1 per cent. solution of caustic soda or potash and distilled water. The proportions are, to every 5 ccm. albumen, 3 ccm. alkali solution, and 2 ccm. water. The mixture is then shaken until it froths, after which it is allowed to stand for some hours, when the shaking is repeated in order that the three constituents may be inti- mately mixed. The alkali-albuminate is then poured into test-tubes, Erlenmayer’s bulbs, or flat glass pans, and heated over water to a tempera- ture of 95°-98° C. for a short time. In a few minutes a jelly is pro- duced, which in thin layers is perfectly clear, in thick somewhat opal- escent, but which always possesses the consistence and transparency requisite for a nutrient medium. Heating up to 100°C. should be avoided, as bubbles are produced owing to the vaporization of the water. The alkali-albuminate may, if desired, be modified by the addition of certain inorganic salts (NaCl, KCl, Na,CO,, Na,SO,, NaHPO,, &c.), or by diluting with other nutrient fluids; thus the authors have obtained very good results from the following mixture:—5 ccm. albumen and 2°2 ccm. 1 per cent. alkali solution mixed with meat infusion, diluted about one-half with distilled water so that the whole quantity amounted to 10 ccm. Preparation of Nutrient Gelatin and Agar.;—The practical worker in bacteriology deplores, says Dr. T. L. Cheesman, jun., the loss of time usually attendant upon the preparation, and especially upon the filtration of nutrient gelatin and agar. The method formulated by Koch and closely followed by most workers, is very satisfactory in producing good, clear culture media, but a few modifications render the procedure a much less formidable one, and as the changes to be suggested are simply those of detail, it may be well to state in brief the method now in use in the Bacterial Laboratory of the College of Physicians and Surgeons, New York, which after considerable trial gives uniform and satisfactory results. One pound of finely chopped beef, as free as possible from fat and gristle, is mixed with 1000 ccm. of distilled water and kept in a cool place for 12 or 18 hours. It is then strained, cold, through a coarse cloth, into a wide-mouthed “agate ware” or “enamelled iron” vessel of sufficient size, and 5 gm. of C.P. sodium chloride, 10 gm. of * Biol. Centralbl., viii. (1888) pp. 307-11. + Amer. Naturalist, xxii. (1888) pp. 472-3. 826 SUMMARY OF OURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO pepton, and 100 gm. of gelatin (or 10 gm. of agar) are added. This is then placed in a water-bath (to which a large handful of rock salt has been added, if agar is to be prepared) and the gelatin (or agar) melted as rapidly as possible. The fluid is then neutralized by the careful addition of sodium bicarbonate in solution, and the boiling continued for a few minutes after, in order to precipitate the phosphates. The fluid is now cooled by running water, to such a temperature as will not coagulate the white of egg, yet not enough to solidify it, when the whites of two eggs, thoroughly beaten up, are mixed with it, and the whole boiled for half an hour. Filtration which has usually been effected by means of filter paper, can be much more rapidly performed by the use of absorbent cotton in large quantity. ‘The pores of the paper become clogged by the fine pre- cipitates and by the cooling of the medium, and even with the use of the “hot funnel” the filtration is sometimes very slow. Cotton, on the other hand, presents in its meshes a much larger surface for the entanglement of the fine precipitates, and when used in large quantity, allows the gelatin (or agar) even when not very hot, to flow through it rapidly. The preparation of the filter is as follows :—The absorbent cotton is un- - rolled and sterilized in bulk in the hot-air chamber, care being taken not to char it. A 6-in. (15 cem.) glass funnel is packed full with the dry sterilized cotton, placed in in layers, in such a way as to keep it well out of the neck, and having no folds nor ridges of cotton next the glass, through which the precipitates might pass into the receiving flask. The neutralized culture medium, after being boiled with the white of egg, as above described, is strained through coarse flannel into a flask, and poured slowly upon the centre of the filter until the cotton is thoroughly soaked, and the fluid begins to run into the flask below. This moistening causes the cotton to sink considerably, and packs it in the funnel, and when packed, the fluid filters through it almost as rapidly as it is poured into the funnel. The funnel is now filled and the fluid filtered as fast as it will run through. The first filtration seldom produces a clear medium, but through the same filter the fluid may be poured again and again, each time becoming clearer, and the moderate cooling which necessarily occurs, does not sensibly retard the rapidity of filtration. When filtra- tion is completed, a considerable portion of the medium entangled in the filter can be saved, by pressing upon the cotton with a sterilized glass rod, gently at first and near the sides, then in the centre and with con- siderable force. The gelatin or agar pressed from the cotton is some- times cloudy, for which reason it is well to catch it in a separate flask. It not infrequently happens that gelatin which filters clear pre- cipitates phosphates on boiling; and that agar, on cooling, forms a flocculent precipitate. To insure against filling tubes with such media, it is safest always to fill one tube with the medium, and by first cooling, then by boiling and again cooling, to test the permanence of the trans- parency obtained. Should these precipitates form, it will be necessary to boil the gelatin in the flask, and to refilter it through a small plug of dry cotton placed in a funnel; while agar should be allowed to com- pletely solidify, when it is again melted and filtered through a small plug of cotton. The media are now ready for tubing and sterilizing in the usual way. The large quantity of absorbent cotton used and the considerable amount of medium lost, by remaining entangled in the meshes of the ——<—S OO ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY,. MICROSCOPY, ETC. 827 cotton (this may amount to 200 ccm. for each of the large cotton filters employed) are unquestionably objections to this method of filtration, but in its favour it may be stated that one filter, when properly packed, serves to clear a large quantity of medium, and the great saving of time in filtering enables one to prepare a large amount of these nutrients at one operation, which may be stored for future use. Furthermore, the “hot funnel” is dispened with. The modifications here described may be best appreciated by the fact that they render it possible to prepare within three hours several litres of the above-mentioned culture media. Eggs for Cultivation purposes.*—Dr. F. Hiippe has used eggs in the natural condition for the cultivation of micro-organisms for about twelve months. Fresh eggs are first cleaned and the shell is then sterilized with sublimate solution. They are next washed with sterilized water and wiped with sterilized cotton-wool. This done, an opening is made in the shell with an instrument (previously heat-sterilized) and then the contents are inoculated in the usual way. Before the opening is made the egg is well shaken in order to mix its contents. The opening is closed with a thin piece of sterilized paper, and then the paper coated over with collodion. By this procedure experiments have been made as to the reduction of sulphur compounds to sulphuretted hydrogen and on the cholera bacillus. For the latter purpose the pro- cedure is very favourable, as the conditions resembling those of the intestine with regard to oxygenation are imitated very closely. Cultivation on Potato.;—M. Roux has for more than a year used the following method of cultivating on potato. Without any disinfecting washing the potato is cut up into long slices and these put into test- tubes about 24 cm. in diameter. About the lower fourth of these tubes is a constriction which prevents the potato slice from slipping to the bottom. The tubes (not hitherto sterilized) are then plugged with cotton wool and heated in a steam sterilizer to 115° for about 15 minutes. The pieces of potato should be thick enough not to bend. When removed from the sterilizer the surface of the potato is damp, but after being placed in a vertical position in an incubator it dries in a few hours. The potato is then ready for use. The tubes are then covered with a rubber cap and kept till wanted. This method, by a simple modification, is applicable to the cultivation of anaerobic micro-organisms. For this purpose a side-piece is added to the test-tube just below the constriction. After inoculation the top of the tube is melted up and then the air is evacuated through the side- piece. Another done, this tube is also melted up. The bacilli of malignant cedema, when cultivated in this way, thrive extremely well. Simple Method for reproducing Koch’s Cultivation Plates.{— Prof. de Giaxa records a simple method for obtaining copies of the colonies on cultivation plates by asystem of coarse photography. After the plate has been removed from the moist chamber, its under surface is wiped with blotting-paper moistened with ether, and it is then placed on a piece of albumen paper which has been sensitized with nitrate of silver. The plate and paper supported by a board are then covered with * Centralbl. f. Bacteriol., u. Parasitenk., iv. (1888) pp. 80-1. + Ann. Inst. Pasteur, 1888, p. 28 (2 figs.). t Centralbl. f. Bakteriol. u. Parasitenk., iii. (1888) pp. 700-2 (1 fig.). 828 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO a bell-jar. These manipulations are carried out in a dark room, and having been finished the apparatus is placed in the sunlight about half a minute. The paper is next repeatedly washed in a dark room to remove the excess of silver, then placed in a gold chloride bath, and afterwards fixed in one of hyposulphite of soda. After this it is well washed and finally dried. Babes’ modified Cultivation Vessel.*—In fig. 151 is shown Dr. V. Babes’ recent modification of his cultivation capsule. In this the edge of the lower pan is made oblique, a, so that the agar does not slip down when the capsule is turned about in microscopical examination. Fie. 151. The condensation water now no longer drops upon the cultivation, but 1uns away down a fissure between the upper and lower pans (at c¢). Vessels made with this shape are much less exposed to infection from without than those with parallel edges. The cultivation can be closed up by means of a rubber ring c. Cooler for quickly setting Gelatin Plates.t—Dr. A. Pfeifer recom- mends instead of the glass apparatus usually employed, a box made of zinc plate (the sides = 25 cm. each, and the height = 14-2 em.) and supported at each corner on cast-iron feet. When filled with water the box may be made to acquire any temperature. Water from 8°-10° R. suffices to set gelatin in a very short time, and when manipulating agar plates, warm water may be used to prevent the agar from setting too quickly. This apparatus does away with ice, is very cheap, certain, and saves a lot of time. Collecting and Preparing Characee.{—Mr. T. F. Allen says that to gather Characez successfully a dredge must be used; for shallow water a small fine-toothed rake is preferred, but for deeper water (one rarely finds them at a greater depth than 10 feet) the dredge and line are essential. The best dredge for all purposes is the one recommended by Prof. Nordstedt, made as follows:—A disc of lead about 3 in. diam., and 3/4 in. thick has imbedded in its circumference a row of hooks, about 10 in number; through the centre of this disc is passed an iron rod, which projects about 3 in. below the disc, and about 9 in. above ; to the ring in the upper end toward which the points of the hooks are directed, a cord is attached. The dredge weighs about 25 1b., and catches all sorts of “ weeds” growing on the bottom. The dissection of these plants is perfectly simple. The delicate species are placed in water until their normal form is restored (if they have been dried), and a portion is put in a “cell” on a glass slide, and examined under a 2 in. objective ; sometimes, but rarely, a higher power * Centralbl. f. Bakteriol. u. Parasitenk., iv. (1888) p. 26 (1 fig.). ft Deutsche Med. Wochenschr., 1887, No. 42. t ‘The Characex of America.’ Cf. Amer. Naturalist, xxii. (1888) pp. 455-7. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 829 is needed for determining fine points, such as the structure of the cortex. Should these species be incrusted with lime, a piece should be placed in a little strong vinegar till the lime is completely dissolved, then washed in pure water and examined. Specimens foul with mud must be cleaned in water with a camel’s hair brush, but this is liable to detach the globules of fruit, and is only occasionally to be resorted to. Should it be desirable to preserve bits for future reference, they are best mounted in glycerin-jelly, in cells deep enough to avoid crushing, and shallow enough to permit free examination (flattened brass curtain-rings make excellent cells). When the jelly has dried at the edges, turn on a ring of white zinc cement. Cultivation of Lichen-forming Ascomycetes without Alge.*— Dr. A. Méller has, in a number of lichens, especially crustaceous lichens, succeeded in cultivating on nutrient media the fungus from ascospores and spermatia to the exclusion of gonidia, considerable thalli being formed, and in two kinds even spermogonia. ‘The cultivations were rendered difficult in one way by the extremely slow growth of the objects, and in another by the presence of bacteria and saccharomyces. To meet the latter inconvenience the author took the apothecia from places which were as free from dust as possible, and placed them under a stream of water for 10 minutes, and by so doing a few pure cultivations were obtained. When the cultivations on the slides had become visible to the naked eye they were placed in flasks of the same shape as Exlenmayer’s bulbs, some in nutrient media, some on sawdust &c., and the flasks closed with filter paper. Apparatus for Infecting.t—Herr N. W. Diakonow proposes the following plan for the culture of fungi. The advantages claimed for the process are :—(1) the absolute purity of the cuiture from admixture with any other species ; (2) the possibility of carrying on the culture in several different vessels at the same time; and (8) the equal distribution of the spores over the whole surface of the nutrient fluid, and the consequent unimpeded growth of every separate mycelium. The author has culti- vated Penicillium glaucum with great success in this way. The apparatus (fig. 152) consists of a centre-vessel A, and a number of side-vessels C surrounding it in a cirele. To the upper neck of A is fixed, by an india-rubber connection, a tube B, dipping deep down into the vessel ; the upper broad half of this tube is loosely filled with cotton- wool; the whole tube is easily movable in all directions. A number of short glass tubes a, usually from 4 to 7, are fused into the vessel A in a horizontal plane, at equal distances from one another. To these glass tubes a are fixed, by india-rubber connections, the side vessels C of any desired form and size. Hach of these vessels has a small glass tube c fused into it at the same level as the tubes a; the ends of these tubes, about 2 cm. in length, project into the vessels, and are curved at right angles downwards. When the apparatus is about to be used, each of the side vessels is provided either with the same or with different nutrient fluids. In the centre vessel is also placed a nutrient mixture of glucose and peptone. The side-necks d and e are then stopped with wads, and all the vessels sterilized at the same time by boiling. During the boiling the cocks b * Unters. Bot. Inst. Mister i. W., 1887, 52 pp. + Ber. Deutsch. Bot. Gesell., vi. 1888) pp. 120-6 (1 fig.). 830 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO are left open, so that the steam may produce its sterilizing effect in all parts of the apparatus. When the sterilizing is completed, the cocks b are closed, and then, after cooling, the germs are introduced with all Fic. 152. needful precautions, into A through the side-neck d. As soon as the conidia in A have developed fertile mycelia, the infection of the side- vessels may be effected. For this purpose the side-neck d is closed by an india-rubber cap or in some other way, and an india-rubber tube f fixed to the glass tube B. The cocks b are then opened, the tube B moved by the hand in all direc- tions, and a current of air blown through f and B into the centre vessel A; and the conidia are thus blown through the connecting-tubes a and c into all the side-vessels C. The side-vessels can then be detached at pleasure. HANseN.—La culture pure de la levure. (The pure culture of yeast. Mon. Scientif., XXIX. (1887) p. 1033. Jackson, R. T.—Catching fixed forms of Animal life on transparent media for study. Science, XI. (1888) No. 275, 3 pp. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 831 KLEMENSIEWICz, R.—Hin Vegetationskasten fiir niedrige Temperatur. (A culture chamber for low temperatures.) Wiener Klin. Wochenschr., 1888, p. 283. NorGGERATH, H.—Ueber eine neue Methode der Bacterienziichtung auf gefarbten Nahrmedien zu diagnostischen Zwecken. (On a new method of bacteria culti- vation on coloured nutrient media for diagnostic purposes.) Fortschr. d. Med., V1. (1888) pp. 1-3 (1 pl). Unna, P. G.—Die Ziichtung der Oberhautpilze. (The cultivation of skin fungi.) Monatschrift fiir Prakt. Dermatol., 1888, pp. 465-76. ZAGARI, G.—La Coltura dei Micro-organisme Anaerobi. (The culture of anaerobic micro-organisms. ) Giorn. Internaz. Sci. Med., 1888, p. 218. (2) Preparing Objects. Effect of Hardening Agents on the Ganglion-cells of the Spinal Cord.*—Dr. 8. Trzebinski has experimented on a number of hardening media to ascertain whether and in what way they affect the ganglion- cells of the spinal cord in rabbits and dogs. (1) Miiller’s fluid: hardening 4 to 5 weeks. The preparations were either washed before being placed in spirit, or were placed in spirit in the dark without being washed. The spirit was from the first of 96° or it was made weak (10°), and increased in 5 days to 96°. (2) Hardening in spirit either of 96° at once or by increased strengths as in No. 1. (3) Hardening in chromic acid. The preparations were placed for 6 hours in a 0°1 per cent. solution, then for 48 hours in a 0°25 per cent. solution, and were afterwards hardened in spirit or in a mixture of Miiller’s fluid and spirit. (4) Hardening in 10 per cent. sublimate solution (8 days) with subsequent hardening in spirit which contained 0°5 per cent. iodine. The stains used were, borax-carmine, alum-carmine, with or without previous staining in Weigert’s hematoxylin solution, magenta-red, and Weigert’s method. Fresh preparations were coloured with methyl-green. In fresh preparations stained with methyl-green the ganglion-cells were on the whole well stained, their finer structure recognizable, and there was no evidence of pericellular spaces. In all the preparations treated by the above hardening methods the ganglion-cells were altered, (1) peri- cellular spaces appeared ; (2) vacuoles in the cell-substance ; (3) the cell contents did not show the same structure as in the fresh cells; (4) the susceptibility of the cell contents for dyes had become inconstant. On the whole the most satisfactory method seemed to be the sublimate process which was followed by iodized alcohol. Sublimate as a Hardening Medium for the Brain.tj—Herr A. Diomidoff hardens brains and cords in 7 per cent, watery sublimate solution. The preparations, which should not be larger than 1 ccm., are left in the solution not longer than five to nine days, and then passed through successively 50°, 70°, and 90° spirit. In each spirit the pre- paration remains about twenty-four hours, so that the whole hardening occupies about eight days. The chief point in the author’s paper consists in his observation that all hardening fluids which contain mercury salts alone or in com- bination with silver solutions, or solutions of the latter in combination with chromic or copper salts, produce after long action on nerve prepara- * Virchow’s Archiv, cvii. (1887) pp. 1-17. + Wratsch, 1887, pp. 472-4. Cf. Zeitschr. f. Wiss, Mikr., iv. (1887) pp. 499-500. 832 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO tions, precipitates or albuminates which are indistinguishable from natural pigment, and for which they have been repeatedly mistaken. Preparations hardened in the above manner can be made into very thin sections, and are easily stained with anilin colours, but are not susceptible of being treated by Weigert’s haematoxylin method. Safranin stains the chromoleptic substance very beautifully. Over the freezing and aleohol hardening the sublimate alcohol method has the important advantage of not altering the contour of the cells. With regard to the pigment produced along the vessels and in the nerve-cells, it was found that it disappeared entirely therefrom after long immersion in warm distilled water. Alcohol and ether had no effect except to change the black into brown. Caustic potash dissolved in spirit or 25 per cent. acetic acid had no action. 25 per cent. nitric acid destroyed it slowly, while a 30 per cent. solution of iodide of potassium converted it into a yellow-brown, and the strong Lugol solution quite effaced it in five minutes. Cold distilled water dissolves it after several weeks. This artificial black pigment, according to the author, is either a compound of a metal and of albumen, or the result of a simple mechanical saturation of the tissue, probably the former. Preparation of Criodrilus lacuum.*—In his investigation into the structure of Criodrilus lacwwm Dr. A. Collin examined living specimens, and sections prepared with Jung’s microtome. Hardening was generally effected by a mixture of one part of corrosive sublimate and one part 70 per cent. alcohol. The pieces were left in the mixture for from thirty minutes to one hour, according to their size. They were then placed in water or weak spirit for some time, dehydrated by alcohol and chloroform, and imbedded in paraffin. Neither chromic nor picric acids are adapted for hardening worms. Specimens were killed with chloroform, and died without any violent muscular contraction. The staining of the pieces was best effected by ammoniacal picrocarmine ; the sections were successfully stained by methylen-blue or borax- carmine with acetic acid ; the former coloured the ganglionic cells, and the latter the nuclei of the epithelia and of the connective tissue. Macerations were effected partly with Miiller’s solution and partly with potash. Method of Preparing Tegumentary Filaments of Flagellata.t— M. J. Kiinstler refers to the well-known fact that flagellate Infusoria, when treated with certain reagents, become covered with a variable, though often very considerable quantity of filaments, which are sometimes very long, and that an analogous phenomenon may be observed in ciliate Infusoria. In the latter, however, each filament is derived from a small refractive capsule, placed in the peripheral layer of the body. Till their homology shall be disproved all these processes may be called tricho- cysts. The best way to prepare them is to treat perfectly fresh speci- mens with concentrated osmic acid, so as to fix them, and then to colour them very slowly by diffusion by means of picrocarminate of ammonia. A less delicate method, by which one can at least determine whether or no a given species has trichocysts, is to fix a specimen with concentrated * Zeitschr. f. Wiss. Zool., xlvi. (1888) pp. 474-5. + Comptes Rendus, cvii. (1888) pp. 138-9. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 833 osmic acid, and colour it with Collin-black acidulated by chromic acid to which glycerin has been added. New Method for making Microscopical Preparations from Test- tube Cultivations.*—Dr. R. Fisch] recommends the following procedure for obtaining microscopical preparations from test-tube cultivations :— By means of a cork-borer the central track is removed from the gelatin. This gelatin cylinder containing the micro-organisms is then placed for 24-48 hours in 96 per cent. alcohol or in a mixture of equal parts of ether and alcohol, and then sectioned on a microtome between cork layers. The sections are then stained by Gram’s method, the micro- organisms alone retaining the stain. ‘The author has applied the foregoing to the examination of ferment-fungi with excellent results. Chitin Solvents.;—Mr. T. H. Morgan reports the results of experi- ments which he has made with chitin solvents. He followed a prescrip- tion recommended by Dr. Loob,} namely, Labaraque solution (potassium hypochlorite) and Javelle solution (the corresponding sodium com- pound). Mr. Morgan used the solutions successfully in two forms, strong as in the commercial fluid, weak when diluted from five to six times with water. In most cases the strong solution acts too rapidly and powerfully. The preparations after removal of the chitin were hardened in picro-sulphuric acid, corrosive sublimate, or different strengths of alcohol. The method was also used for specimens already hardened and preserved. The experiments seem to show that something else in the compound besides free chlorine is brought into play. Preparing Slides to show Brownian Movement.§—Prof. H. M. Whelpley says that permanent mounts to illustrate the phenomenon of pedesis are not difficult to make, “ provided, however, that the motion does not cease after a few days, as claimed by some authorities.” He has “no reason for doubting the statement of one writer, who says he has a mount six years old that shows the movement nicely and as well as it ever did.” Place a well-cleaned slide on the turntable and run a ring of cement on it about 0°5 mm. high. In warm weather, or in a warm room during winter, the cement will become sufficiently dry in a half hour to permit of finishing the mount. This is accomplished by placing in the cell a large drop of a liquid made by mixing carmine or other powders || with 100 times its volume of water, and placing in posi- tion a well-cleaned cover-glass. When the cover is pressed down, the superfluous liquid will be pressed out and the fresh cement will hold the cover firmly to the cell. The pressure reduces the depth of the cell to about 0°25 mm. The slides should be washed to remove any par- ticles of the powder that may have run out with the liquid and been deposited on the cover-glass. When dried it is ready for use, and such a mount, at least as far as the mechanical part is concerned, will last a lifetime. Hither white zinc cement or Brunswick black can be used. * Fortschr. d. Med., v. (1887) p. 653. + Stud. Biol. Lab. Johns-Hopkins Univ., iv. (1888) pp. 217-9. ft See this Journal, 1885, p. 896. § Amer. Mon. Micr. Journ., ix (1888) pp. 125-7. || Vermilion, cobalt, wood charcoal, indigo, camboge, pumice stone, carbonate of lead, glass. 834 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO Benpa, C.—Eine neue Hartungsmethode besonders fiir das Centralnervensystem. (A new hardening method especially for the central nervous system.) Centralbl. Med, Wiss., XX VI. (1888) p. 497. GirEson, J. vAN.—A Résumé of recent Technical Methods for the Nervous System. Journ, Nerv. and Mental Diseases, XIV. (1887) p. 310. Girrorp, J. W.—Preparations for High Powers. [Beale’s glycerin-carmine fluid—Gum and glycerin and glycerin jelly—Modifi- cation of Flemming’s chromo-aceto-osmic acid.] Journ. of Micr,, I. (1888) pp. 152-4. Kuen, L.—Beitrage zur Technik der mikroskopischen Dauerpriparate. (Contri- butions to the technique of permanent microscopical preparations.) MT. Bot. Vereins Freiburg, 1888, Nos. 49-50. Ru pDANOWwskI.—Making Microscopical Nerve Preparations by dividing the nerves into primitive bundles by chemical processes, and the latter into their component parts. Russhaja Medicina, 1887, No. 38 (Russian) WoopuEAD, G. S.—Method of preparation of large sections of the Lung. Brit. Med. Journ., 1888, p. 737. (3) Cutting, including Imbedding. Photoxylin for Imbedding.—Dr. Krysinski * suggests the use as an imbedding substance of photoxylin, a kind of pyroxylin used by Russian photographers, and which he considers superior to celloidin on account of its keeping without deterioration, and remaining clear in solution or mass. Mr. G. M. Beringer,f who has experimented in the production of photoxylin, finds that the following formula gives the best results:— Nitrous acid, 43° R., 34 lb. av.; sulphuric acid, 4} lb.; potassium nitrate, granular, 8 oz.; wood pulp, 4 oz. The nitrous and sulphuric acids are mixed in an earthenware crock and allowed to stand until the temperature has fallen to 90° F., when the potassium nitrate is added and thoroughly incorporated with the acid mixture. The wood pulp is then immediately immersed in the mixture and allowed to remain for twelve hours. It is then removed from the acid and thoroughly washed. The material thus obtained is quite soluble in equal parts of ether and absolute alcohol. For general work Krysinski recommends two solutions; a thin solution (1/2 to 1 per cent.), anda 5 percent. The specimen is placed from strong alcohol into the thin solution, to remain from twelve to twenty-four hours, when it is transferred to the thicker solution. To fix the specimen before cutting, it is only necessary to place it on a cork. A film soon spreads over the mass, which is then submerged in 70 per cent. alcohol, and after two or three hours is ready for sectioning. Paraffin-imbedding Process in Botany.{—Within a few months there have appeared two articles$ on this subject, and as Mr. D. H. Campbell has been devoting some attention to it lately, he thinks it may be of interest to state briefly the results obtained. It was found con- venient to combine to some extent the methods given in the articles referred to, as neither was found in all respects satisfactory, and some simplifications of the processes were made which were found advan- tageous. * Virchow’s Arch. f. Path. Anat. u. Hist., 1888. Cf. The Microscope, viii. (1888) p- 183. + Amer. Journ. Pharm., 1888. Cf. ibid. t Bot. Gazette, xiii. (1888) pp. 158-60. § Schonland, 8., Bot. Centralbl., xxx. (1887) pp. 283-5. See this Journal, 1887, p. 680. Moll, Bot. Gazette, xiii. (1888) pp. 5-14. See this Journal, ante, p. 315. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 835 The experiments were made upon the germinating macrospores and the young embryos of Pilularia globulifera, and the results obtained warrant a very strong recommendation of the imbedding process where the sectioning of very delicate tissues is necessary; indeed, when the results thus obtained are compared with the imperfect and uncertain methods ordinarily used in such work, no one who has used both will hesitate as to their comparative merits. With the firmer plant tissues there is usually no necessity for any imbedding process, and owing to the time and care necessary to successfully apply this method, it is not to be recommended in such cases. In regard to the best hardening agents, Schonland and Moll disagree, the former recommending alcohol, which Moll does not consider satis- factory, preferring chromic acid or the mixture of chromic, osmic, and acetic acids used by Flemming. There is no question that for many purposes absolute alcohol is to be preferred, owing to its convenience and the perfection with which it ordinarily preserves all plant tissues. With mixtures of chromic, picric, or osmic acid thorough washing is neces- sary after hardening ; but as Moll rightly remarks, where cuticularized cell-walls are present it is extremely difficult to get the paraffin to penetrate such membranes, whereas it is much easier where fixing solu- tions containing chromic acid are employed. A practical illustration of this was found in the very thick-walled macrospores of Pilularia. After the material is thoroughly hardened, and, in the case of alcoholic material, allowed to remain for twenty-four hours in borax-carmine, it is treated as described by Schonland. For the gradual transfer from 30 per cent. to absolute alcohol the Schultz apparatus * was found most serviceable. The following method of imbedding was found practical and simple: —A small paper box is made by taking a strip of pretty firm paper and winding it tightly about an ordinary cylindrical cork, fastening the paper with a little gum arabic, and holding it in place with a pin until dry. On taking out the pin the paper cylinder can of course be slipped off the cork. ‘The box is completed by cutting out a round piece of paper of exactly the size of the cylinder, and putting this into the cylinder as the bottom of the box. The object to be imbedded is placed horizontally upon the bottom, and the melted paraffin poured over it, after which the whole is placed in a shallow flat-bottomed vessel filled with melted parafin. Thus there is no possibility of the parafiin’s escaping, which otherwise it is almost impossible to prevent, and there is also no neces- sity of handling the objects after they are once in the paraffin, which in the case of small objects is a great advantage. In case the objects are displaced in pouring the paraffin over them, it is a simple matter to adjust them, using a heated needle for this purpose. : In order to insure thorough saturation, the objects were usually left overnight in the melted paraffin, and then, as in the articles mentioned, quickly cooled to avoid the formation of bubbles. The vessel containing the paper boxes may be exposed to the air for a few minutes until a thin film has formed over the surface of the paraffin in the latter, when these may be quickly lifted out and plunged into cold water. As soon as the parafiin is thoroughly hard, the pasted seam in the paper cylinder may be loosened with the blade of a knife or scalpel, when it will be found * Strasburger, Bot. Prak., 2nd ed. 836 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO that the paper separates readily from the inclosed paraffin, and on removing the bottom of the box in the same way the result is a solid cylindrical block of paraffin, with the object to be cut lying horizontally close to the smooth lower face, so that the sectioning is easily regulated. Schénland recommends parafiin with a melting-point of about 45° C., but the author found this much too soft to cut well, and prefers (as Moll recommends) a harder sort, melting at about 50°C. Schdnland again says that a temperature above 50° C. is to be avoided, but in no case has the author found that a temperature of 50°-55° C. was in the least degree hurtful. For sectioning the rocking microtome used by Schénland was em- ployed, and found in every way satisfactory. Moll describes fully the fixing processes, but the author’s experience has been that it is not desirable to hasten the staining process. Safranin was mainly used, and the best results were had by allowing the sections to remain for about twenty-four hours in a very dilute watery solution. At the end of this time they should be deeply stained. The slide is then plunged in absolute alcohol until the excess of the colour is re- moved, and when this is accomplished, and most of the alcohol has been removed from the slide with a cloth or blotting-paper, taking care of course not to touch the sections, a few drops of xylol are applied, and allowed to remain until the sections look perfectly transparent, when a drop of Canada balsam dissolved in xylol or chloroform may be applied, and a cover-glass put over the preparation, which is now complete. The employment of soft paraffin in order to make the sections adhere, as described by Schénland, is quite unnecessary, as the sections adhere perfectly without this; indeed, it is much easier to get a good ribbon of sections without the soft paraffin than with it, owing to the difficulty of perfectly removing the surplus soft paraffin. Further Notes on Celloidin Technique.*—Dr. 8. Apathy communi- cates some further instructions for manipulating celloidin by way of supplement to his previous paper.T (1) How to keep celloidin blocks.—If cork be used for sticking the celloidin blocks on, it must first be saturated with soft paraffin in order that the 70-80 per cent. spirit in which the object is to be pre- served may not be spoilt by the tannic acid. But as celloidin will not adhere to paraffin, the latter must be shaved off from one end, and then this end, together with the celloidin block which has been stuck on, is plunged for a second in some paraffin heated above its boiling point. In this way a block of celloidin can be kept even without spirit without any danger of its becoming dry. Sectioning must, of course, be done with a dry knife. The thin casing of paraffin, even if it does not fall off of itself, can be dissolved at once in bergamot oil, and offers no difficulty. If it be desired to discontinue making sections, it is only necessary to cover the exposed surface with a drop of paraffin. (2) Writing on celloidin.—Mark the bottom of the paper case in which the object is to be imbedded with a lead pencil. Then, when the paper case is stripped off from the block consolidated in 70-80 per cent. spirit, the writing will be found transferred to the celloidin, and in order to * Zeitschr. f. Wiss. Mikr., v. (1888) pp. 45-9. t See this Journal, ante, p. 670. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETO. 837 preserve it there it is only necessary to brush over the surface a layer of thin celloidin. (3) Staining of the series.—The arrangement of unstained sections or of very small objects may be facilitated by adding to the bergamot oil a few drops of an alcoholic solution of safranin. The sections stained rose-colour are then easily visible. This staining of the celloidin dis- appears in a day or two, and in a few hours after exposure to sunlight. If now the series, which is placed on a slide, and from which the oil has been mopped up, is to be stained, the slide is placed in a capsule, on the bottom of which are a few drops of ether and absolute alcohol. The series clears up at once, and the celloidin is so far softened that it cleaves firmly to the slide. As soon as drops of ether and of absolute alcohol appear on the slide, it is at once removed to another capsule containing 90 per cent. spirit, whereby the celloidin is hardened, and all trace of the bergamot oil removed. After a quarter of an hour the slide may be placed in any stain which is free from water or contains at least 70 per cent. spirit. If aqueous staining solutions are to be used, care must be taken that when exposed to the alcohol-ether vapour the celloidin sections overlap, or at least touch, so that the series may be treated as one large section. (4) Applying direction-lines to the celloidin block.—As a general rule, the sides of the block suffice as direction-lines, provided that the celloidin is distinguishable from the outline of the object. This dise tinction may be rendered more evident by adding to the fluid celloidin or to the bergamot oil a few drops of some pigment dissolved in 90 per cent. spirit, such as picrie acid or carmine, dyes which stain celloidin much more quickly than the object. If it be necessary that the position of an object should be very accu- rately determined, it is better to imbed in the celloidin a thin plate of gelatin and to arrange the object upon this. By this means there is in each section a fixed outline with fixed end-points, and for the purposes of plastic reconstruction leaves little to be desired as regards orientation. (5) Modification of the method of staining with hematoxylin and the chromic acid salts.—The author finds that a modification of Haidenhain’s method for staining celloidin series prevents the sections from becoming overstained and brittle. He now uses hematoxylin and the chromic salt in 1 per cent. solutions in 70-80 per cent. spirit. The bichromate solution is made by mixing 1 part of a 5 per cent. solution of bickro- mate of potash with 4 parts of 80-90 per cent. spirit. Not only must the solution be kept in the dark, but the object must be stained, treated with alcohol, and imbedded in the dark. Bruce’s Microtome for cutting whole sections of the Brain and other organs.—This instrument (fig. 153) was designed by Dr. A. Bruce to meet the requirements of those who wish to cut sections of 4 in. diameter and upwards. The construction was necessitated by the incon- veniences which were found to attach to large microtomes made after the manner of Rutherford’s microtome. The method of freezing adopted in Rutherford’s instrument is well adapted for freezing tissues of moderate size, where the freezing mixture is at a small distance from the tissue, but is quite unsuited for a tissue of 4 or 5 in. diam., where some part of the object to Le frozen would be at least 24 in. from the freezing mixture. In the new instrument freezing is effected by laying the object to be 1888, 3.L 838 SUMMARY OF OURKENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO frozen upon a zine plate A connected with metallic pillars, which are surrounded by a freezing mixture, as in the Williams microtome. In order that the plate may be quickly and effectively cooled to a tem- perature sufficient to freeze a tissue placed upon it, it is put in con- 153. Fic. nection, not with one, but with twelve pillars, which rest upon the bottom of the freezing-box D, and are in close metallic contact with the plate. Tn order to further increase the effect of the freezing mixture, the pillars are made of a cruciform shape in their transverse section, as shown in fig. 154. The freezing mixture of ice and salt is passed between the ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 839 pillars and against their arms, and this process is found so effective that tissues of 6 in. diam. and upwards, and half an inch in thickness, are frozen through in twenty minutes. Dr. Woodhead has made a further improvement in the method of freezing by placing a shallow box filled with a freezing mixture upon the plate. This box, the under side of which is immediately over the tissue to be Fie. 154. frozen, considerably accelerates the freezing process. ; The knife F is attached to a plate B, which slides in grooves in the “plough” EH, and is moved forward or backward by a screw. The capstan head is shown at G. As the knife is placed obliquely, it moves but a small distance vertically for each forward movemeni of the screw, so that a comparatively coarse screw is as efficient as a fine one would be if acting vertically. The plough is moved backwards and forwards by two handles, one of which is shown at H, travelling in the rails at C C. All the parts are made with “fitting strips,” as in a slide-rest, so that wear may be readily taken up. The dimensions of the apparatus are as follows:—Freezing-box, length 22 in., breadth 12 in., depth 8 in.; rails upon which the plough slides, 34 in. long and 13 in. wide; plough, 14 in. long and 8 in. high; knife, 9 in. on cutting face. The microtome is made by Mr. A. Frazer, scientific instrument maker, of Edinburgh. Thate’s New Microtome.*—Herr P. Thate has invented an immer- sion microtome which possesses advantages in its arrangement of the knife-carrier and circumvents certain difficulties inherent in the sliding microtome. It is fully represented in fig. 155. The three columns §, 8, §; are connected near their base by a trian- gular cast-iron piece. The pillar §, is hollowed out at the top, so that the arm A, about 50 cm. long, may be worked through the ball-joint. The columns §, 8; are joined by the arciform piece B, along the upper surface of which the end of the arm A, expanded at its extremity, works. The expanded end of A is supported on two hard steel knobs. The arm A is moved to and fro by the handle k. About 20 cm. from its tree end the piece A is perforated by a slit through which the tap of the binding-screw C projects, and by means of which the knife-carrier is clamped to the arm A. For this purpose the lower end of C is swallow- tailed, so that it may be pushed into a corresponding opening in the double piece D, and that when the binding-screw is tightened it is fixed to the arm A. The ends of D are gripped by the block E EH, joined together by a flat horizontal plate. To the under surface of E EH the ends of the knife are screwed, while through their upper extremities pass the screws binding EE to D. Consequently, by altering the screws in EE and the screw C, the knife can be placed in any desired position. The amount of vertical movement of the edge of the knife, which, of course, moves through part of a circle, is shown by the indicator at EH. F is the clamp for holding the specimen, and K the pan or well which contains the fluid, water, or spirit. The clamp and well are formed in one piece and fixed to the tube J, which in its turn passes through the block G, and is fixed in any position by the binding-screw S. The fine-adjustment of the block is effected by the micrometer-screw M, * Zeitschr. f. Instrumentenk., viii. (1888) pp. 176-7 (1 fig.}. 3L 2 840 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO which passes through G, and the latter in its turn is supported on an inclined plane formed by the bars L. Every raising of the block G, 0:005 mm., is indicated by an audible click produced by the plate H. The last arrangement is ungeared by means of the handle h when the coarse-adjustment of the preparation is necessary. The pressure of the block G on the micrometer-screw is obviated by the counterpoise N suspended by a cord running over two rollers. Accessory for rapid Cutting with the Thoma Microtome.*—Herr J. Erdés has devised an arrangement for the Thoma microtome whereby the knife-carrier is set in motion by pedals, thus leaving both hands free to manipulate the sections, &e. This is claimed to be an improvement, as heretofore the right hand was employed in moving the knife along, &e., while the left was used merely for preventing the section from rolling up. A plate about 14 cm. in diameter, and perforated by a hole in its centre, is fixed to the knife-carrier by means of its binding-screw. Either end is terminated by a small hook. These hooks are connected with cords which run over pulleys (see fig. 156) to pedals. On the end of the microtome farthest from the pulleys, the cord runs over two pulleys, on the nearer side over one. Both cords then pass over another pair of pulleys which are fixed to the edge of the table, and then pass down to the pedals. It is advised to fix the microtome to the table by means of strips of * Internat. Monatsehr. f. Anat. u. Hist., ii. (1885) pp. 343-6 (1 fig.). ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 841 wood nailed to the table round the instrument, so that it cannot move while being worked. The sections are prevented from rolling up by fixing in the joint of Fie. 156. the object-holder a camel’s-hair brush, so that the latter just touches the surface of the section or the paraffin. New Section-stretcher, with arrangements for removing the Sec- tion.*—Prof. H. Strasser describes a device invented by him for keeping sections straight and causing them at the same time to adhere to a paper band which is one of the principal parts of the apparatus. Over the object and the knife-blade a paper band is arranged parallel to the long axis of the microtome. One end is clamped to the object-holder, and the other kept taut by a weight connected with the band by a cord running over a roller. The band is made to just touch the surface of the object by means of a metal roller of 1 to 15. cm. in diameter. The roller can be placed in any position by means of a universal joint, and it is made to move up and down in the same groove as the knife-carrier, by means of a similar carrier. The roller is then adjusted parallel to the edge of the knife, and thus the section is kept from curling up by the superjacent * Zeitschr f. Wiss. Mikr., iv. (1887) pp. 218-9. 842 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO pressure. The under surface of the paper band is rendered adhesive by means of gum and collodion, and thus by each action of the knife a new section is placed in position along the band, the front end of which must be snipped off to remove the piece carrying the section, and then reclamped. BautTzar, G. and E. ZIMMERMANN.—Microtom mit festem Messer und selbst- thaitigem Vorschub des Objekts. (Microtome with fixed knife and automatic movement of the object.) German Patent, Kl. 42, No. 1431, 1888. [Manron, W. P., and others.}—Modern Methods of Imbedding. The Microscope, VIII. (1888) pp. 181-4. Srowerwu, C. H.—Thin Sections. The Microscope, VIII. (1888) pp. 175. (4) Staining and Injecting. Double-staining of Nucleated Blood-corpuscles.*—Dr. W. M. Gray gives the following directions:—Spread a thin layer of blood on a clean slide and dry. Immerse the slide in a beaker of alum-carmine (Grenacher’s formula) for five minutes; wash in clean water, and immerse in a beaker of a weak solution of sulph-indigotate of soda or potash (the solution should be of a dark-blue colour—not black-blue, as in a strong solution). After the slide has acquired a purplish hue, wash in water and dry. After drying, warm slightly and mount in balsam. The nuclei will be a beautiful red, and the protoplasm a greenish blue. Vital Methylen-blue Reaction of Cell-granules.j—If the larve of the frog or triton, says Dr. O. Schultze, be placed in a watery solution of pure methylen-blue, of the strength of 1:100,000-1,000,000, after twenty-four hours, certain granules in the cells of the cutaneous epithelium become stained with the weakest solution ; the staining is confined to a small spot close to the pylorus which to the naked eye resembles a small blue ring. When the strongest solution is used for eight days, all the parts become of a deep blue colour. The pigment is absorbed by certain granules within the cells and causes them to swell up. These are identical with Altmann’s bioblasts. These granules are not stained, or at any rate very slightly, when the dye is introduced through the blood-current, while, on the other hand, in larve living in the blue solution, the nerves are not stained. If the larve be removed from the blue solution to pure water all trace of the pigment disappears in eight days. Differential Staining of the Tissues of Living Animals.{—M. A. Pilliet has found that, by a simple subcutaneous or intra-peritoneal injection of methyl-blue, in rats, guinea-pigs, and other small animals, the entire kidney and some other organs are stained a diffused blue. By mixing the same material (methyl-blue) with the food of rats and guinea-pigs, only the glomerules of the kidneys were stained. If, instead of blue, fuchsin be used, the entire kidney becomes stained a vinous red, which, under section, however, shows the glomerules and * Queen’s Micr. Bulletin, v. (1888) p. 15. t Anat. Anzcig., ii. (1887) pp. 684-8. _ St. Louis Med. and Surg. Journ., lv. (1888) pp. 28-9 from ‘ Progrés Médical.’ Cf. also Journ. de Microgn, xii. (1888) pp. 285-90. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 843 epithelial nuclei to have taken a much deeper colour than the balance of the structures. So marked was this in the experiments of the author, that in perfectly fresh sections these were very sharply and neatly differentiated. A very remarkable fact was brought out in the course of Pilliet’s experiments, viz. that when methyl-blue is introduced intra-peritoneally into guinea-pigs, the glomerule is stained a rose-carmine. When frogs were placed in an aqueous solution of methyl-blue, so weak that they could live in it several days, it was found that while the balance of the tissues were stained a diffused blue the glomerules showed a colour varying from rose-carmine, or rose-red, to ochre-yellow, the nuclei being more strongly tinted than the balance of the cell. In rats in which the blue had been intraperitoneally introduced, the blue was changed to red only on the surface of the glomerule. From these experiments it follows that in certain cases the glomerule possesses a peculiar oxidizing property in a high degree, since methyl-blue is a sub- stance relatively refractory to oxidation. The significance of this discovery is that, in the kidney, the capillary circulation of the glomerules contains a large quantity of oxygenated blood, a fact which demonstrates the organ to be a true reducing apparatus and not simply a filter. We know that in the Reptilia the dark-blood returning from the tail is collected by a voluminous vein and carried to the glomerule, from which it departs, vid the renal vein, not as black but as red blood. The kidney in this becomes a true reducing appa- ratus, partaking in this respect in the functions of the lung. The experiment of Ehrlich in this direction, made some three years ago, demonstrated these facts in a beautifully exact manner. By introducing intravenously into the system two substances, the combination of which gave rise to a coloured produce (indo-phenol), and which combination could take place only where oxygen existed in exceedingly feeble quantity, he arrived at a very exact knowledge of the degree of oxida- tion existing in any organ or part. In a similar manner, conversely, by using substances easily reducible (alizarine-blue, for instance), a scale of oxygenation may be arrived at. He thus demonstrated the scale of reductive power of the lungs, the cortical substance of the kidney, the mucous membrane of the stomach, &c. Later he established the same functions in the muscles, the liver, glands, &c. Staining-differences of Unstriped Muscle and Connective Tissue Fibres.*—For distinguishing between smooth muscle-fibres and spindle- shaped connective tissue-cells, M. E. Rotterer recommends the following procedure. The fresh preparation is placed for 24 hours in a mixture of 10 vols. 86° alcohol, and 1 vol. formic acid. The hardening fluid is then quite extracted in water, after which the piece is treated with gum and spirit and then sectioned. The sections are stained for 36 hours in Grenacher’s alum-carmine, and having been thoroughly washed, mounted in glycerin or balsam. The protoplasm of the unstriped muscle-fibres then appears red, the nucleus having a darker tinge. The cell contour is quite sharp. Connective tissue is quite colourless or rose-coloured, the cells are swollen, and their boundaries ill-defined. From this the author concludes “that the contractile protoplasm of unstriped muscle is not the same as that of connective tissue.” * Comptes Rend. Soc. Biol., iv. (1887) p. 645. 844 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO Improvements in the Silver-nitrate Method for Staining Nervous Tissue.*—Dr. C. Martinotti obtains the silver-nitrate reaction in large pieces of tissue, e.g. pons Varolii, by altering Golgi’s method as follows :—(1) The quantity of silver-nitrate is increased relatively to the size of the object. (2) The solution is allowed to act for 13-30 days. (3) The pieces are kept at a temperature of 25°, in order that the reaction may reach the ganglion cells, but in order that all the cells of the neuroglia should participate in the reaction, a temperature of 35°-40° is necessary. If 5 per cent. of glycerin be added to the solution, the reaction in the ganglion cells and their ramifications is facilitated. In order to prevent precipitates forming at the periphery of the pieces, these were imbedded in a mass made out of filter paper and distilled water after the objects had been taken out of Miiller’s fluid. This artifice was found to increase the contraction of the silver nitrate solution. Staining in the Study of Bone Development.j—Dr. J. Schaffer in a large and diffuse article recapitulates the various stains which have been recommended from time to time for staining cartilage in the tran- sition stage to bone so as to differentiate the osseous and cartilaginous elements. The method upon which the author dilates most was invented by Bouma, who found that safranin imparted a yellow colour to the cartilage, while the connective and osseous tissues appeared red. This yellow stain was supposed by Bouma to be due to the fact that safranin is not a chemically pure substance, and starting from this observation, the author proceeded to examine the relative staining capacities of several kinds of safranin in watery solution (1:2000). (1) The commercial. (2) Pheno-safranin a chemically pure dye. (3) Tetraethyl-pheno- safranin, a substance which contains NaCl. The commercial safranin gave the best differentiation, cartilage orange, bone colourless, medullary tissue red. The pheno-safranin gave similar but less marked results. The tetraethyl-phenosafranin stained the cartilage red-violet, the bone and medullary tissue blue. The author then gives his method for fixing the stain, a 1 : 2000 watery solution of safranin. The unstained sections, decalcified in nitric acid or in hydrochloric acid and salt solution, are placed for half an hour in the safranin solu- tion. They are then washed in water and transferred for 2 to 3 hours to 1/10 per cent. sublimate solution and mounted in glycerin. If, however, the preparations are to be fixed up permanently, the sections on being removed from the sublimate solution must be passed rapidly through alcohol, dried upon the slide with bibulous paper, and left for a long time in oil of cloves or bergamot. They are then mounted in xylol balsam. Preparing and Staining Mammalian Testicle.t — For hardening the mammalian testicle, Dr. A. Prenant found that osmic acid and Flemming’s fluid were the best media, Kleinenberg’s picro-sulphuric acid, nitric acid, strong oxalic acid, absolute alcohol, 3 and 4 per cent. bichromate of potash being less effective. A 1 per cent. solution of osmic acid acting for one to two hours gave the best results. Of the * Congresso Medico di Pavia, Seduta 6a, Riforma Med., 12 Ott., 1887. Cf. Zeitschr. f. Wiss. Mikr., vy. (1888) p. 88. t Zeitschr. f. Wiss. Mikr., v. (1888) pp. 1-19. } Internat. Monatsschr. f. Anat. u. Physiol., iv. (1887) pp. 358-70. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 845 various “ Flemming” solutions tried, that which contained most osmic acid was the most successful. The preparations were then soaked in chloroform and imbedded in paraffin and then sectioned in a Dumaige microtome. The sections were fixed to the slide with a mixture of equal parts of albumen and glycerin. The stains used were safranin, hema- toxylin, hematoxylin-eosin, acid carmine, picro-carmine, and gentian- violet. These dyes all acted very slowly on preparations treated with the Flemming solutions, but very quickly on those fixed in osmic acid. Bizzozero’s method was employed for staining the nucleus, safranin being found to be quite as good as gentian-violet for this purpose, pro- vided that the iodine solution were allowed to act more effectually, and the spirit less powerfully. Stain for the Morphological Elements in Urine.*—Dr. F. L. James has hitherto recommended for this purpose the ordinary aqueous solution of eosin. It acts rapidly, and but a small amount is needed to give all the elements so decided a tinge that the most delicate hyaline cast will rarely escape the practical eye. He recently made a solution of boro- eosin, and after a number of experiments with it, much prefers it for this purpose to the simple aqueous solution above referred to. The new stain acts more rapidly, and imparts a deeper and richer tinge to the elements. In nucleated elements the nuclei take the stain in a much more intense degree than does the balance of the structure, and as a con- sequence, are clearly and sharply differentially stained by it. As to its lasting properties, it is yet too early to speak, but it is reasonable to suppose that it will be quite as permanent as the stain made with the aqueous solution of eosin. This, however, is a secondary consideration, as the chief value of the stain is the rapidity and the ease with which it enables us to find otherwise difficult objects. The formula for boro-eosin is as follows :—Kosin, 10 parts; sodium biborate in powder, 15 parts; alcohol of 95°, 60 parts ; distilled water, 415 parts. Dissolve the borax in half of the water. Add the alcohol to the remainder of the water, dissolve the eosin in the mixture, mix the two solutions and filter. In using it allow the urine to.stand in a conical glass until the suspended elements have in a great measure subsided. The clear supernatant fluid is siphoned, or otherwise drawn off and the stain added to the remainder. A few drops of perosmic acid solution is added at the same time. This gives the urine a dark or almost black appearance by direct light, but when examined with transmitted light, the colour is a deep rich ruby. A drop withdrawn and examined within a half hour after adding the stains will show all the elements well coloured, the epithelia and granular casts especially so. The hyaline casts will be sufficiently coloured to be very distinct, but require more time for thorough staining. Permanent mounts of urine thus prepared will last a long time without deterioration, but for preservation the author advises the use of glycerin. Staining Spores.f—Dr. G. Hauser recommends the following method for staining spores. ‘The cover-glass is passed thrice through the flame in the usual manner, and is then covered with a strongish watery solution of fuchsin. The cover-glass is then passed through the flame forty or fifty times until the stain evaporates or even simmers, If * St. Louis Med. and Surg. Journ., lv. (1888) pp. 98-9. + Miinchener Med. Wochensehr., 1887, p. 654. 846 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO evaporation takes place too quickly, more stain must be dropped on. The preparation is then decolorized for a few seconds in 25 per cent. sulphuric acid. The acid is washed out with water, and the preparation after stained with a weak solution of methylen blue. The time required for the whole manipulation is not more than five minutes. Staining Tubercle and Leprosy Bacilli.*—Prof. N. Liibimoff recom- mends the following solution for staining the bacilli of tubercle and leprosy. It is called borofuchsin, and consists of fuchsin, 0°5 gr. ; boracic acid, 0°5 gr.; absolute alcohol, 15 cm.; distilled water, 20 em. It is made by first mixing the boracic acid and water, then adding the spirit, and finally the fuchsin. The latter dissolves gradually on agitation. Thus prepared, the staining fluid has a slightly acid reaction, is transparent, clear, and as it does not deteriorate by keeping, is always ready for use. Cover-glass preparations of phthisical sputum are stained in 1-2 minutes. Sulphuric acid in the proportion of 1-5 is used for decolorizing, the cover-glasses are then washed in spirit, and then immersed for 14 minute in a saturated alcoholic solution of methylen blue. The superfluous stain is washed off with water, and the cover-glass dried. It is advised to examine the preparation in Ol. ligni cedri, or in xylol balsam. Sections are treated in exactly the same way, but it is preferable to stain twenty-four hours in the borofuchsin. The author notes that lepra bacilli are much more easily and rapidly decolorized than tubercle bacilli. Alcoholic Solution of Hematoxylin.t—Dr. G. Cuccati gives the following formula for making a hematoxylin solution which possesses the advantages of never going bad, and of staining only the chromatic part of the uuclei, the colour being fixed most deeply in the karyokinetic figures. Z Dissolve 25 grm. of pure iodide of potassium in 25 cem. of distilled water, and pour the mixture into a glass-stoppered bottle containing 75 ecm. absolute alcohol, shaking the while repeatedly. Then grind together in a mortar 75 cgrm. of hematoxylin crystals and 6 grm. of alum. When these are intimately mixed, add 3 ccm. of the iodide solution. Keeping the mixture well stirred, add little by little the rest of the solution, and then pour into a well-stoppered bottle, and leave for 10-15 days. At the end of this period shake up well again, and in an hour or two afterwards filter and preserve the filtrate very carefully to prevent evaporation and deposit of alum or iodide crystals. This solution only stains up to a certain point, consequently the sections may be left in it almost indefinitely. Osmic Acid and Gold chloride Methods.j—Dr. A. Kolossow says that the penetrating power of osmic acid, which is intrinsically almost nil, may be increased by a mixture of the acid with uranium salts. The author prepares a 0°5 per cent. solution of osmic acid in a 2 to 3 per cent. solution of nitrate or acetate of uranium (the former is the better). Large pieces of an object, for example a frog’s tongue cut into two or three pieces, are easily penetrated by this mixture, wherein they may * Centralbl. f. Bakteriol. u. Parasitenk., iii. (1888) pp. 540-3. + Zeitschr. f. Wiss. Mikr., v. (1888) pp. 55-6. ¢ Tbid., pp. 50-3. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETO. 847 remain for 16, 24, 48 hours without becoming brittle, and only being stained a yellowish-brown colour, except the myelin, which is almost black, the medullated fibres and their endings are clearly seen. The author says that he has had quite satisfactory results with Meissner’s and Grandry’s corpuscles. The objects fixed by the foregoing solution should be well soaked in water, and after-hardened in absolute alcohol. The author also gives the following procedure for treating con- nective tissue formations with gold chloride. The objects are placed for two, three, or more hours in a 1 per cent. chloride solution, acidulated with hydrochloric acid (100:1). After having been washed they are placed in the dark in a 1/50-1/100 per cent. solution of chromic acid for reduction. Though reduction may not at this stage be perfect, it is completed later on in oil of cloves, and the preparation is then mounted in balsam. The more carefully the chromic acid is washed out the clearer the picture is. 'The non-medullated nerve-fibres and their rami- fications are stained almost black. The connective tissue cells appear just as distinctly, while the intercellular substance of the connective tissue is unstained. Muscle-fibres, striped and unstriped, are stained a greenish-blue colour. The author states that this method is almost always certain. Phenol in Microscopical Technique.*— When sections imbedded in paraffin curl up and are placed in turpentine oil it is found extremely difficult to flatten them without breaking them. This inconvenience, says Signor HE. Aievoli, may be remedied in the following manner :—the sections are immersed for 15-30 minutes in benzin or turpentine oil, and are then transferred to pure fluid phenol, wherein the sections unroll themselves and come to the surface of the fluid. The carbolic acid does not damage the tissue structure, even if the sections be left in it for twenty-four hours. The sections are then treated in the usual manner. The author found great advantage in staining tissues en masse with a carmine solution prepared in the following manner:—One grm. of carmine is dissolved in 100 ccm. of hot water, and then 7 grm. of powdered carbolate of soda are added. The solution is kept stirred for 30-40 minutes and filtered when coid. In this solution large pieces of tissue may be stained in twenty-four hours. They are then transferred to acidulated (1 per cent.) spirit for some hours. This method is stated to give stronger and clearer colouring to the nuclei than other carmine solutions. It is also especially suitable for tissues which have been fixed with sublimate or absolute alcohol. Double Staining.|—Dr. J. H. List states that the double stains re- commended by him for epithelia, glands, and cartilage have undergone the test of time, the preparations retaining the beauty of the stain after a lapse of four years. (For the original methods see this Journal, 1885, p- 902.) In his present note the author mentions again eosin-methyl-green for epithelium, glands, and cartilage, and hematoxylin-eosin for glands and retina. With this stain it is absolutely necessary that objects hardened in acids should be thoroughly washed to remove all traces of the acid, otherwise a precipitate may form on the preparation. Bismarck brown (Weigert’s formula) gave excellent results with Invertebrates (connective tissue of molluscs), and rosanilin nitrate was * Rivista Internaz. Med. e Chirurg. Napoli, iv. pp. 101-4. + Zeitschr. f. Wiss. Mikr., v. (1888) pp. 53-4. 818 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO very effective for differentiating, for the nuclei of wandering leucocytes and for the mitoses in epithelia. Hardening and Staining Plate-cultivations.*— Dr. E. Jacobi hardens and stains plate-cultivations by putting the plates in flat vessels and pouring over them a 1 per cent. solution of bichromate of potash, which is allowed to act for three days in the light. If the thin gelatin layer does not detach itself it can be easily removed with a knife. Then follows twenty-four hours’ soaking in water and afterwards hardening in 50 per cent. and 70 per cent. spirit. From this small pieces of the gelatin, which are treated just like sections, are stained with Léfiler’s alkaline methylen-blue and afterwards washed in very dilute acetic acid, then placed in absolute alcohol, removed to the slide, where they are cleared up in xylol or in turpentine oil, and then mounted in Canada balsam. Lahille, F., Central Nervous System of ~ Tunicata, 26. | Lake District, English, Fresh-water Alge of, kL Lamb, D. S., Technique of Frozen Ana- tomical Sections, 1047. Lameere, A., Abnormal Ova of Ascaris megalocephala, 953. | Lamellibranchiata. See Contents, xi. Laminariex, Sieve-tubes in, 265. Lamp and Vertical Illuminator, 650. INDEX. Lamplight or Daylight for Microscopical Observation, 302. Lamprey, Development of, 708. Lamps for Microscopical Work, 807. , Magnesium, 494. , schieck’s Microscope, 490. Lancaster’s Gas Chamber, 290. Lanice conchilega, Nephridia of, 739. Lankester, E. R., Coelom and Vascular System of Mollusca and Arthropoda, 395. Lantern Microscope, The Advantages and Deficiencies of, 646. — Shdes, Making, 305. —, Photomicrography and _ the making of, 652. Larva of Culex, 212. of Sarcophila Woblfartii in Gum of Man, 944. Larve and Hges of Teleosteans, 191, 925. Larval Anal Eye in Opisthobranch Gastro- pods, 19. Stage of Species of Ascaris, 45. Lateral Organs, 587. of Nemerteans, 51. — Rootsin Monocotyledones, Formation of, 762 Latham, V. A., Preparing Sections of Buds, oll, —, The Microscope and How to Use It, 322, 523, 1060. , Lo prepare the Head of a Flea. Mounting Tongues of Flies, 511. Laticiferous product of Mimusops and Payena, 759. —— System of Manihot and Hevea, 72. Laurent, E., Organic nourishment of Beer- ferment, 785. Laurie, M., Organ of Verrill in Loligo, 932. : Laux, W., Vascular Bundles Rhizome of Monocotyledons, 74. Lawes, J. B., and J. H. Gilbert, Sources of the Nitrogen of Vegetation, 261. Leach, W., The Lantern Microscope, 646. Leaf, Duration of the Apical Growth of, 455. —— of Dionza, Electromotive Properties of, 995. in the Leaf-fall, Phenomenon analogous to, 88. -stalk, Anatomy of, 448. —— - ——,, Growth of, 258. of Aralia, Thickening of the Cell-walls in, 70. Leaflets, Pitcher-like, of Staphylea pin- nata, 253. Leaves and Fruits, Colours of, 254. , Double, 253. ——, Evergreen, 983. ——, Formation of Oxalate of Lime in, 444, , Influence of Light on the Form and Structure of, 84. Reserve-substances in, of Mimosa pudica, Movement of, 457. - 1095 Leaves, Influence of Light on the Growth of, 614. of Bupleurum, 608. of certain of the Conifer, Structure of, 451. of Orchidez, Anatomical Structure of, 608. of Polypodiacez, 619. —— of Sigillaria and Lepidodendron, 263. —— of some Coniferee, Influence of Climate on the Cuticularization and Thickening of, 608. , Peach, “ Curl” of, 89. , Permeability of the Epidermis of, to Gases, 448, 763. , Vernation of, 252. Leblois, A., Secretory Canals and Secretory Reservoirs, 604. Leclere du Sablon, —., Antherozooids of Cheilanthes hirta, 999. ——, —— of Hepatice, 461. ——, Haustoria of the Rhinantheze and Santalaceze, 250. , Root-hairs of the Rhinanthezx, 450. , Selaginella lepidophylla, 620. Lecomte, H., Effects produced by the Annular Decortication of Trees, 447. Lee, A. B., Spermatogenesis in Cheto- gnatha, 227. Leech, Nerve-endings in, 952. , Salivary Glands of, 38. Leeuwenhoek’s Discovery of Micro-organ- isms, 522. Legs of Hymenoptera, Morphology of, 725. Leguminosez and EHricacez, Super-endo- dermal Network of the Root of, 986. , Periderm of, 606. —, Root-tubercles, of, 251. , Tubercles on the Roots of, 608. Lehmann, O., Apparatus for Microphysical Investigations, 292. —, Homology of Segmental Organs and Efferent Ducts of Genital Products in Oligocheeta, 419. —, Molecular physics, with reference to microscopical tions, 1036. , Photomicrography of Chemical Pre- parations, 293. Leidy, J., Hydra, 236. Leigh’s, R., Preserving Blood-corpuscles for Microscopical Examination, 1041. Leitgeb, H., Incrustation of the Cell-wall of Acetabularia, 463. é. Leitz’s Demonstration Microscope, 794. small Photomicrographic Apparatus, 650. Lemanea, 93, 464. Lemoine, V., Brain of Phylloxera, 408. Lemons, New Disease of, 98. Lenhossék’s (J. v.) Polymicroscope, 104. Lennox, —., Observations on the histology of the Retina by means of the Weigert staining method, 519. Lepadogaster, Egg-shell of, 550. special investiga- 1096 Lepas, First changes in Fecundated Ovam of, 218. Lepidodendron and Sigillaria, Leaves of, 263. Lepidoptera, German, Scent-organs of, 406. , Karyokinesis in, 571. — , Nerve-terminations in, 943. Lepidopterous Laryve, Secretion of Pure Aqueous Formic Acid by, for the Pur- poses of Defence, 405. Lepra and Tubercle Bacilli, Staining, 157, 846. Lerneascus and the Philichthyde, 217. Letalle, —, Process of stable staining of amyloid matter by means of eosin and caustic potash, 1057. Lettsom, —., Death of, 170. Leucochloridium paradoxum, Natural His- tory of, 49. Levi, G. B., Venetian Chlorophycex, 627. Lewin, A., Baumgarten’s Method of Triple- staining, 676. Lewin, M., Germination cf Monocoty- ledons, 767. Lewis’s (T. R.) Moist Slide, 291. , Collected Papers of, 522. Leydig, F., Amcebocytes of Crustacea, 949. ——, Animal Ovum, 13. , Cells and Tissues, 710. Lichen-forming Ascomycetes, Culture of, without Alge, 466, 829. Lichenes. See Contents, xxix. Liebermann, L., Embryovhemical Investi- gations, 551. Liebscher, G., Supply of Food Con- stituents at Different Periods of the Growth of Plants, 614. Lierau, M., Roots of Aracesz, 607. Life, New Mode of, among Medusa, 591. Life-box, Rousselet’s, 112. Light, Action of, on Roots grown in Water, 995. —, Influence of, on Oxidation, 714. —. , on the Growth of Leaves, 614. . —, , on the Form and Structure of Leaves, 84. ——, ——, upon Protoplasmic Movement, 242. Lighton, W. R., Notes on Staining Vege- table Tissues, 159. Lignier, O., Importance of the Foliar Fibrovascular System in Vegetable Anatomy, 985. Ligules and Stomata of Selaginella, 460. arg agrestis, Anatomy and Histology of, 716. Lime, Formation of Oxalate of, in Leaves, 444. Limpricht, K. G., Rabenhorst’s ‘ Crypto- gamic Flora of Germany ” (Musci), 91. Linckia multipora, Gemmation in, 431. os C., Pollination of Alpine Plants, Lindner, P., Stained Yeast-preparations, 156, 519. INDEX. Linton, E., Cestoid Embryos, 46. , Trematode in white of newly-laid Hen’s Egg, 51. List, J. H., Double Staining, 847. Lister, A., Plasmodium of Badhamia and Brefeldia, 783. Live-box and Small Portable Binocular Microscope, 110. Living Preparations, Staining, 515. Lizard, Embryology of, 548. Loasacez, Morphology and Anatomy, 453. Locomotion, Aquatic, 19. of Caterpillars, Mode of, 726. Loeb, J., Influence of Light on Oxidation, 714, Loew, O., Action of Formose on Cells destitute of Starch, 85. ,and T. Bokorny, Chemico-physio- logical Study of Alge, 463. » —, Presence of active Albumen in the Cell-sap, 246. Logwood Stain, Acid, 517. Lohrer, O., Comparative Anatomy of Roots, io. Loligo, Organ of Verrill in, 932. Longard, T., H. Buchner, and G. Riedlin, Method of calculating the rapidity of Bacterial Increase, 682. Loomis, H. P., Simple and Rapid Staining of the Tubercle Bacillus, 1053. Lo; ado: hynchus, Kleinenberg on Develop- ment of, 579. Loranthacex, Formation of Roots in, 450. Lost Parts, Reproduction of, 414. Lothelier, A, Spines of certain Plants, 989. Louisville Microscopical Club, 304. Love-lights of Luciola, 30. Lowenthal, N., Demonstrating the Retien- lated Protoplasm in the Interstitial Cells of the Ovary, 311. Liibimoff, N., Staining Tubercle and Leprosy Bacilli, 846. Luciani, L., and A. Piutti, Respiration of Silk-worm Ova, 726. Luciola, Love-lights of, 30. Ludwig, H., New and Old Holothurians, 991. Lugger, O., A New Method of Preserving Transparent Aquatic Insects for the Microscope, 667. Lukjanow, 8. M., Intestinal Epithelium of Ascaris, 583. —, Morphology of the Cell, 17. —, Nuclei of Muscle-cells, 18. Lumbricide, Larval and Definite Excre- tory Systems in, 220. ——, Russian, 581. Lumbricus, Germ-bands of, 38. Luminosity of Fungi, 777. Luminous Marine Animals, Role of Sym- biosis in, 929. Lundstrém, A. N., Colourless Oil-plastids in Potamogeton, 984. ——, Domatia, 87. INDEX. Lundstrom, A. N., Masked Fruits, 79. , Mycodomatia in the Roots of Papi- lionaceze, 450. , Myrmecophilous Plants, 87. Lung, Preparing large Sections of, 1048. Lungs, Sarcina of, 63+. Lupin, Development of Aleurone-grains in, 982. Lutz, A., Life-history of Ascaris lumbri- coides and Teenia elliptica, 426. Lycopodium, Life-history of, 262. Lymphatic Cell, Fusion of, into Plasmodia, 555. Lyngbya and Phormidium, Relationship between, 784. Lyon, F. M., Dehiscence of the Sporangium of Ferns, 90. M. Macallum, A. B., and Wright, R. R., Methods of studying Sphyranura, 149. ; » Sphyranura osleri, 47. M'‘Cassey, G. H., Microscopy and Histology for Office Students, 686. Macchiati, L., Preparation of Pure Chloro- phyll, 245. M‘Cook, H.C., Age and Habits of American Tarantula, 215. , New Orb-weaving Spider, 412. ——.,, Relations of Structure and Function to Colour Changes in Spiders, 945. ——, Sense of Direction in Formica rufa, MacDonnell, —., Exhibition of Slides, 682. Macé, E., Cultures of Cladothrix dicho- toma, 784. MacGillivray, P. H., Polyzoa of Victoria, 403. Machilis maritima, 408. McIntire, 8. J., Another Evening at the Royal Microscopical Society, 141. wane The Quekett Microscopical Club, Mackay, W. J., Intercoxal Lobe of certain Crayfishes, 577. MacLeod, J., Fertilization of Flowers, 82. MacMunn, ©. A., Chromatology of Sponges, 595. M‘Nab, W. R., Stomata and Ligules of Selaginella, 460. Maddox’s Moist Slide, 291. Madreporaria, Anatomy of, 43+. Madreporic System of Echinodermata, True Nature of, 57. Madreporite of Cribrella ocellata, 431. Magnesium Lamps, 494. Magnification in Photomicrographs, 652. of Microscopic Objects in the Pro- jected Images, Method of Representing and Calculating, 135. Magnifying Power, Highest, 819. ee of Objectives, Measurement of, LOST Magnus, P., Pollination of Silene inflata, 4 ——.,, Self-pollination of Spergularia salina, 994. — , Schinzia, 631. , Sterility of Fungi, 467. Mal nero of the Vine, 762. Malassez, L., Hot Plate Apparatus, 681. , Hot Stage, 488. ——, Improved hemochromometer, 494. ——, Tubes for Microspectroscopic Ana- lysis, 807. Male Appendages on Female Crabs, 730. Mall, F. P., First Branchial Cleft of Chick, 387. Mallard, E., Bertrand’s Refractometer, 291. Malvacez, &c., Comparative Anatomy of, 606. Mammalian Ovaries, Preparing, 662. — Ovum, Polar Globule of, 186. Testicle, Preparing and Staining, 844. Mammals, Action of methyl-blue on, 1057. ——, Spermatogenesis of, 547, 707. Man, Ancestry of, 193. —, Larva of Sarecophila Wohlfartii in Gum of, 944. — , Protozoa, Parasitic in, 240. , Tenia cucumerina in, 955. Mancinia areolata, Development of, 434. Manfredi, L., Fatty Matters in Cultivation Media, 504. Mangeri, C., On the preparation of gelatin from agar-agar, 1040. Mangin, L., Development of Flowers in the Bud, 610. ——, Permeability of the Epidermis of Leaves to Gases, 448, 763. Manihot and Hevea, Laticiferous System of, 72. Manipulation, White’s Elementary Micro- scopical, 165. Mantle of Gastropods and Dependent Organs, 399. Manton, W. P., Rudiments of Practical Embryology, being working notes, with simple methods for beginners, 315, 523, 667, 856, 1060. ——, and others, Photomicrography, 495. —, , Modern Methods of Imbedding, 842. ——, ——, Sub-staye Condensers, 1029 ,——, Use and Abuse of the Micro- scope, 822. : Marcacci, A., Influence of Movement on Developing Eggs, 193. Marcgraviacee, Anatomy of, 449. Marchal, P., Excretion in Brachyurous Crustacea, 216. Marchanties, Hygroscopic Movements of the Thallus of, 1001. Marenzeller, E. v.. Growth of Flabellum, 237. Marilaun, A. K. v., Fertilization of Eu- phrasia, 767. ~ 1098 Marine Alge, Crystalloids in, 463. Marking Objects, May’s Apparatus for, 113. Marktanner’s (T.) Cameras, 117. Marloth, R., Salt-excreting Glands of Tamariscinex, 249. M: arshall, A.M., and G. H. Fowler, ‘ Poreu- pine ’ Pennatulida, 745. , Development of the Frog, 925. — ., ©. F., Methods of Preparing Muscle for investigation, 147. Marsson, H., Preparing Styrax Balsam, 1057. Marsupials, Spermatogenesis of, 586. Martinotti, C., Improvements in the Silver- nitrate Method for Staining Nervous Tissue, 84+. Martinotti, G., Absorption of Anilin Pig- ments by living Animal Cells, 1055. , Nitrate of Silver Method, 319. —, and L. Resegotti, Demonstrating Karyokinetic Figures, 516. Masdevallia muscosa, Sensitive Labellum of, 616. Maskell, W. M., Fresh-water Infusoria of Wellington District, New Zealand, 972. —, Note on Micrasterias americana, Ralfs, and its Varieties, 7, 169. Massalongo, C., Distribution of Hepatice, 264. Massart, J., Chemotactic Movements of Bacteria, Flagellata, and Volvocine, (ii ——.,, Irritability of Spermatozoa of Frog, Photomicrographic 707. Massee, G., Calostoma, Desv. (Mitremyces Nees), 780. ——, Gasterolichenes, 95. —,, Growth and Origin of Multicellular Plants, 83. —, On the Type cf a new Order of Fungi—Matuleex, 173, 335. —, Revision of the genus Boyista, 629. , Sexual Organs in Acidium, 782. ‘Mathematical Instruments,’ Heather’s, 501. Mattirolo, O., Hygroscopic Movements of the Thallus of Marchantiex, 1001. — and L. Buscalioni, Root-tubercles of Leguminose, 251. Matules, The Type of a New Order of | Fungi, 335. Maupas, E., Conjugation of Paramecium, 65. of Vorticellide, 752. May's Apparatus for Marking Objects, ee Roots and Rootlets in, 251. Mayall, J., jun., Lectures on the Micro- scope, 140. —, Necessity for a Sub-stage, 1024. —, The Modern Microscope, 1036. ——, Recent Improvements of the Micro- scope: a Visit to Jena, 304, INDEX. Mayer, A., Exhalation of Oxygen by Fleshy-leaved Plants in absence of Carbonie Anhydride, 85. , P., Fixing Sections, 159. , 8., Histological Pocket-book, 686. ——,, Large Form of Abbe Camera Lucida, 113. —, Microtechnique, 686. Mayet, —, Artificial Serum for Computa- tion of Blood-corpuscles, 162. , Improved Method for Enumerating Blood-corpuscles, 854. Measurement of Magnifying - power of Objectives, 135. Measuring Thin Films, 501. Meat, Determination of the Number of Trichin or other Animal Parasites in, 164. Meat-examining Microscope, Schieck’s, 793. Meates, A. E., Medium of High Refractive Index, 519. Medicine, Photomicrography in, 119. Media, Cultivation, Fatty Matters in, 504. —. of Schizomycetes in Coloured Nutritive, 823. Medical Microscopical Society of Brooklyn, 304. Medicinal Solutions, Thallophytes in, 459. Medicine, The Microscope in, 654. Medico-legal Identification of Blood-stains, 520. Mediterranean Echinids, Researches on Dorocidaris papillata and other, 430. —— Synaptide, 233. Medium, Alkali-albuminate as a Nutrient, 825. — of High Refractive Index, 519. , Milk as a, 1038. Medullary Canal and Primitive Streak, Relation of, 15. Medusz, Acraspedote, Scyphistomata of, 965. —,, Are there Deep-sea? 236. —, New Mode of Life among, 591. —— from New England, 592. Meehan, T., Irritability of the Stamens of Echinocactus, 261. Megastoma entericum, 599. intestinale, Encystation of, 439. Mégnin, P., Fauna of the Tombs, 32. Meissner, M., Physiology of Nutrition in Protozoa, 749. Meloe, Germinal Layers of, 942. Membrane, Protoplasm, and Nucleus of Plant-cells, Properties and Changes of, 980. Membranes, Eternod’s Stretching, 163. Men and Animals, New Pathogenic Micro- phyte in, 634. Menozzi, A., Chemistry of Germination, 767. Mental Powers of Spiders, 575. Apparatus for —_——s SC INDEX. Menze, O., Daily Assimilation of Carbo- hydrates, 994. Mer, E., Causes which produce Eccen- tricity of the Pith in Pines, 761. , Formation of the Duramen, 446.” , Influence of Exposure on the Forma- tion of the Annual Rings in the Savin, 762. Mergier, G. E., Practical Treatise on Physical Manipulations for Students in Medicine, 819. Metamorphosis, Alimentary Canal in, 943. Metanil-yellow, 677. Metastasis, Tannin and its connection with, 984. Methzemoglobin Crystals, 506. Methyl-blue, Action of, on Mammals, 1057. -——, Contribution to the Physio- logical Reaction of, 849. -green for observing the Chemical Reaction and Death of Cells, 1049. Methylen-blue Reaction, Vital, of Cell- granules, 842. , Staining Nerve-endings with, 515. Iodide, Simple Method for Clearing, 7 677. Meyer, E., Organization of Annelids, 222. Mica Stage, Edmonds’s Automatic, 111, 171. Michael, A. D., British Oribatide, 412. , Parasitism, 503. —, Rhodium Oil, 167. Michaelsen, W., Enchytreide, 40. —, New Enchytreide, 736. Michaud, G., Alkaloid and Sugar in Cyclamen, 759. Michel, A., Fusion of Lymphatic Cells into Plasmodia, 555. Micrasterias americana, Ralfs, and its Varieties, 7, 169. Microbe, Chromo-aromatic, 634. , Pathogenic chromo-aromatic, 1017. Microbes, Presence of a Phlogogenous Matter in the Cultures of certain, 634. Microbiology, Practical Manual of, 686. Microchete, 99, 275. Micro-chemical Tests for Callus, 323. -chemistry of Neryve-cells, 712. Micrometer, Radial, 293. Micrometers, Screw, of Reading-Micro- scopes, Testing, 814. Micrometric Measurements, Variation in, due to different Illumination, 814. — Microscope for Horologists, Galfa- relli’s, 103. Micromillimetre, 502, 652. Micro-organisms and Fibrin, New Method for Staining, 675. : - ——, Cultivation of Anzrobic, 824. from Water and Soil, New and Typical, 789. - ——, Improved Method for Culti- vating, on Potatoes, 142. 1099 Micro-organisms, Leeuwenhoek’s Discovery of, 522. - ——, Milk-peptone-gelatin for Culti- vating Pathogenic, 656. Microphotoscope, Galland-Masgon’s, 281. Microphysical Investigations, Apparatus for, 292. Microphyte, New Pathogenic, in Men and Animals, 634. Microscope, Ahrens’ New Erecting, 1020. » A New Method of Preserving Transparent Aquatic Insects for, 667. , Advantages of a Knowledge of the Theory of, 296. cc and Kidney Disease,” 138. — and Microscopical images, on the mode of determining and indicating correctly the amplification of, 304. and Telescope, 820. —— and the Museum, Preparing Tape- worms for, 148. , Apparatus. See Contents, xxxiii. ——, Babuchin’s, 637, 794. —., Bamberg’s Spherometer, 280. ——,, Bastin-Bullock, 285. , Bausch and Lomb Optical Co.’s Petrographical, 279. —,, Collins’s Aquarium, 103. ——, Compound, Development of, 136. , Defective Objectives and the Binocu- lar, 1025, , Duboseq’s Projection, 108. —, Dufet’s Polarizing, 107. —, Dumaige’s Travelling, 476. —, Electric, 285, 1025. for Horologists, Golfarelli’s Micro- metric, 103. —— in Medicine, 654. in the examination of Rock Sec- tions by Polarized Light, The use of, 655. —, Investigating the Effects of Reme- dies by, 1060. —, Joblot’s, 640. ——, Kibbler’s Photomicrographie, 529. ——,, Klein’s Excursion, 1020, ——,, Lamps, Schieck’s, 490. ——,, Lantern, The Advantages and De- ficiencies of, 646. ——,, Learning to see with, 495. ——, Leitz’s Demonstration, 794. —, Nachet’s Crane-arm, 475. ——, Nageli and Schwendener, 141. ——, Old Demonstration, 794. , Photomicrographiec, Israel and Steng- lein’s, 115. , Physicians and the, 523. ——, Quantitative Determination of Silver by means of, 494. ; ——, Recent Improvements of: a visit to Jena, 304. — , Schieck’s Meat-examining, 793. —, —— Travelling, 794. ——, Simple Method of Warming and Cooling under, 113. 1100 Microscope, Small Portable Binocular, and a Live-box, 110. stands. See Contents, xxxii. . , Student’s Handbook to,’ 137. —, Theory of, Nigeli and Schwendener, 140. ——, Thury’s Five-tube, 792. —, Use and Abuse of, 822. —, Watson and Son’s Anglo-Continental or Student’s, 797. with “ Continental ” Fine-adjustment, Pritchard’s, 1022. , Zeiss’s IIa., 637, 794. Microscopes, American, 652. —, , A Complaint, 285, 482. ——, —— and Foreign, 797. ——, —— — ; the Verdict of an Im- partial Expert, 798. —, Ancient, 304. ——, Campani’s Compound, 109. ——, Galileo’s, 639. ——, Hensoldt’s Reading, 640. of historic interest, Recently dis- covered, 485. ——, Testing Screw-micrometers of Read- ing, 814. Microscopic Alge, Collecting, 504. manipulation, 1060. ** Microscopical Advances,” 137, 141. Club of the Buffalo Society of Natural Sciences, 305. Optics and the Quekett Club Journal, 817, 1034. Society, Medical, of Brooklyn, 304. of Pittsburg, 305. Societies, Local, 304. Microscopy and the Study of Rocks, 820. , eXaminations in, 654. Microspectroscopic Analysis, Tubes for, i. Microspora, 94. Microsyringe, Beck’s, 849. Microtome, Accessory for rapid Cutting with the Thoma, 840. : to the Cambridge Rocking, 669. ie and Technique, Pharmacognostic, 13. —, Dale’s, 317. for cutting under alcohol, Schieffer- decker’s, 152. for cutting whole sections of the Brain and other organs, Bruce’s, 837. , Cathcart Improved, 1047. freezing, Combining Weigert’s Hama- toxylin-copper Stain for Nerve-fibre with the use of, 1051. ——, Schwabe’s Sliding, 668. ——, Thate’s New, 839. with fixed knife and automatic move- ment of the object, 842. eae K., Structure of Starch-grains, Milk as a Medium, 1038. , Media prepared from, for micro- cultivation, 145, 658. INDEX. Milk-peptone-gelatin for cultivating Pa- thogenic Micro-organisms, 656. Millar, Dr. J., Death of, 325. Millepora plicata, Sexual Cells and Early Stages in Development of, 964. , Sex-cells and Development of, 236. Miller, M. N., New Injecting Mass, 518. , Practical Microscopy: A course of Normal Histology for Students and Practitioners of Medicine, 166, 523. Milne-Edwards, A., Fresh-water Crabs of Africa, 415. Mimicry and Parasitism of Camponotus lateralis, 30. Mimosa pudica, Movement of Leaf of, 457. Mimusops and Payena, Laticiferous pro- duct of, 759. Minerals, Rock-forming, 823. Mingazzini, P., Reticulum of Muscle- fibre, 928. Minnesota, Arthur’s Report on, 89. Minot, C. S., ‘American Microscopes—A Complaint,” 285, 482. —, The Mounting of Serial Sections, 682. Miquel, P., Bacillus living at a tempera- ture exceeding 70° C., 1013. , Determining the percentage of Atmospheric Bacteria, 1060. ——, On the relative value of the pro- cesses employed for the microscopical analysis of water, 856. Mischococeus confervicola, Development of, 632. Mischtold, A., Preservation of Parts and Organs of Animals, 658. Mistletoe, Biology of, 86. , Development of the Flowers of, 990. Mitremyces Nees, Calostoma, Desv., 780. Mittmann, R., Anatomy of Spines, 763. Mitoses, Staining, 674. Mobius, K., Direct Division of Nucleus in Euplotes harpa, 436. ——,, Folliculina ampulla, 598. ——, M., Anatomical Structure of the Leaves of Orchidex, 608. ——, New Fresh-water Floridea, 93. Models in Metal of Microscopical Prepara- tions, 165. Moeller, H., Tannin and its connection with Metastasis, 984. Moéhring, W., Branching of the Frond of Ferns, 619. Moina bathycolor, and the greatest depths at which Cladocera are found, 578. Moist and Gas Chambers, 287. Molgulide, Symbiotic Fungus in, 782. Molisch, H., Secretion from the Roots, 246. ——, Thylle, 988. Moll, J. W., Application of Paraffin Im- bedding in Botany, 315. Miller, A., Cultivation of Lichen-forming Ascomycetes without Algz, 466, 829. —, “Spermatia” of the Ascomycetes, 1006. INDEX. Mollusca. See Contents, x. Molluseoida, See Contents, xi. Monal, —., and P. v. Tieghem, Sub-epi- dermal Network of the Root of Gerani- aces, 986. Monas Dunali, 973. Moniez, R, New Parasite of the Silk worm, 471. , Tenia nana, 229. Moniligaster, Reproductive Organs of, 221. Monocotyledons, Formation of Lateral Roots in, 762. ——, Germination of, 767. , Vascular Bundles in the Rhizome of, 74. Moore, 8S. Le M., Epidermal Chlorophyll, 245. , Influence of Light upon Protoplasmic Movement, 242. , Studies in Vegetable Biology, 996. Morgan, C. L., Elimination and Selection, 927. , T. H., Chitin Solvents, 833. Morini, F., Ascophorous form of Penicil- lium candidum, 1008. —, Germination of the Ustilago, 270. ——., Sexuality of Ustilaginee, 269. Morot, L., Identity of Polyporus abietinus, Fr, and Irpex fusco-violaceus, Fr., 468. Mosso, A., Methods of Examining Blood- corpuscles, 1040. , Methyl-green for observing the Chemical Reaction and Death of Cells, 1049. Moths and Butterflies, Villi on the Scales of, 498. Mould, New, 1010. Moulds, Preparing, 150. Mounting. See Contents, xi. Mounts, Making Photographic, 854. Mouse, Vestiges of Zonary Decidua in, 186. Mucedinex, New, 631. Mucous Cells in Mussels, 402. Gland, so-called, of Male Cypride, 731. —— — of Urocheta, 422. “‘ Mufte,” Composition of, 633. Miller, C., New Sphagna, 91. , Secreting Canals of Umbelliferss and Araliacese contained in the Phloem, 605. , F., Germination of the Bicuiba, 613. —., H., “ Edelfaule”’ of Grapes, 1009. ——, J., Action of Lichers on Rocks, 95. ——, N. J. C.,, Atlas of wood structure represented in photomicrographs, 651. —,, W., Scent-glands of Phryganide, 406. Multicellular Organs, Movements of Irrita- tion of, 615. Plants, Growth and Origin of, 83. Multinucleate Infusoria, 597. Munchausen still alive, 655. Miintz, A., Occurrence of the Elements of Sugar of Milk in Plants, 604. 1888. Spores in 1101 Murex, Form and Development of Sperma- tozoa in, 200. Murray, G., and L. A. Boodle, Spongo- cladia, 1002. Musca, Development of, 944. — vomitoria, Development in Egg of, 572. Muscines. See Contents, xxvii. Muscle for investigation, Methods of Pre- paring, 147. , Staining-differences of Unstriped, and Connective Tissue Fibres, 843. —, Striped, Distribution of, 714. —, —, of Arthropods, 941. Muscle-cells, Nuclei of, 18. fibre, Reticulum of, 928. Muscles of Lamellibranchiata, Structure of, 935. ——, Longitudinal, and Stewart’s Organ in Eehinothurids, 429. — of Molluscs, Microscopic Structure of, 199. , Striated, in Mollusca, 402. Musculature of Heteropoda and Pteropoda, 560. Museum and the Microscope, Preparing Tape-worms for, 148. Mussels, Mucous Cells in, 402. Mycodomatia in the Roots of Papilionace, 450. Mycorhiza, New Forms of, 268. Myelocytes of Invertebrates, 929. Mutualism, Remarkable Case of, 557. Mycological Notes, 783. Mycology, Baumgarten’s Pathological, 791. Myriopoda. See Contents, xiii. Myristica, surinamensis, Aleurone-grains in the Seed of, 72. Myrmecophilous Plant, Humboldtia lauri- folia as, 88. Plants, 87, 998. Myrtle-wax Imbedding Process, 151. Myzostoma, Nervous System of, 231. Myzostomida, ‘ Challenger,’ 590. N. Nachet’s (A.) Crane-arm Microscope, 475. Gas Chamber, 289. Nagel, W., Human Ovum, 547. Najade, Histology of, 205. Nansen, F., Histological Elements of the Central Nervous System, 194. ——, Methods of investigating Structure of Nerve-tissues, 312. ——, Nervous System of Myzostoma, 231. Naples, Gorgonide of, 435. Narcissus, Formation of Sugars in the Septal Glands of, 759. Nasal Mucus, Vibrio from, 99. Nassonoff, —., Boring Clionids, 965. Nebalizw, Second Species of Turbellarian Living on, 428. Nectar of Rhododendron, 603. 4 1102 Nectary, Floral, of Symphoricarpus, 255. Needle-Teasing, James’s, 520. Neisser, A., Preparing Sections from Test- tube Cultivations, 671. —, Spore-formation in the Bacilli of Xeresis conjunctive, Streptococci, and Cholera spirilla, 1016. Nelson, E. M., Amphipleura pellucida, 819. —, A simple Correction for Curvature of Image, 1036. —, Curious Interference Phenomena with Amphipleura pellucida, 302. — — Optical Effect, 172. —, Development of the Compound Microscope, 136. —, Mechanical Stage, 477. ——,, New form of mechanical stage, 334. —,, Nobert’s Bands, 305. —, Nomenclature of eye-pieces and ob- jectives, 652. —, On a new Eye-piece, 111. —, On the Formation of Diatom Struc- ture, 495. —, On the Interpretation of a Photo- micrographic Phenomenon by the Abbe Diffraction Theory, 819. — Photomicrographic Focusing Screen, —. Spectra of Pleurosigma angulatum, 30 3. —,, Tests for Modern Objectives, 816. “The Microscope,” Nigeli and Schwendener, 141. , True and False Images in Micro- scopy, 819. ,J., Fixing Sections to the Slide, 853. —, 8. N., Methods of examination of Bacteria for laboratory purposes, 686. Nelson-Curties Microscope for Photomicro- graphy, 691. Nelumbium, Anatomy of, 765. Nemathelminthes. See Contents, xv. Nematus Capresx, Cecidium of, 458. Nemertea, ‘ Challenger,’ 52. Nemerteans, Lateral organs of, 51. Nephridia of Earthworms, 421. —— of Lanice conchilega, 735. Nephrocytium, Reproduction of, 1013. Nerve-cells and Axis-cylinder, 556. and Peripheral Ganglia, Pre- paration of, 506. - —, Micro-Chemistry of, 712. -——, Two new Methods for prepar- ing, 658. Nerve-centres and Sensory Organs of Articulata, 403. —— -endings in the Leech, 952. , Staining, with Gold Chloride, 155, 673, 674. » ——, with Methylen-blue, 515. -fibre, Combining Weigert’s Hzma- toxylin-copper Stain for, with the use of the freezing Microtome, 1051. —. - — , Histology of, 395. — -— , Structure of, 197. INDEX, Nerve-sections, Half-clearing method of preparing, 680. -terminations in Lepidoptera, 943. Nerve-tissues, Methods of investigating Structure of, 312. Nerves, Methods for Examining the Strue- ture of the Cerebrospinal, 1041. Nervous Organs, Central, in health and disease, Methods for Investigating the Structure of, 1041. —— System and Vascular Apparatus of Ophiurids, 57. — —, Central, Histological Elements of, 194. ’ , —, of Tunicata, 26. — ——. , Safranin as Stain for, 1051. — —, Classification of Gastropods, based on the Arrangement of, 401. — — of Amphioxus, 390, 920, —— — of Aplysia, 20. —— —— of Chetopterus Valencinii, 225, —— —— of Echinodermata, 741. — — of Myzostoma, 231. — —— of Opheliaces, Preparing, 509. — — of Phylactolematous Fresh- water Bryozoa, 402. of Prosobranchs, 21. —— —— of Pteropods, 25. , Physiology of, 559. — Tissue, Improvements in the Silver- nitrate Method for Staining, 844. —_ Tracts in Aleyonids, 61. Network, Sub-epidermal, of the Root of Gerauiacex, 986. , Super-endodermal, of the Root of Leguminosee and Ericavez, 986. , Supporting, in the Cortex of the Root, 986. Neuhauss, R., Adaptation of the ordinary Eye-piece for Photomicrography, 1032. , Focusing Arrangement, 809. —, Guide to Photomicrography for Physicians, Botanists, &e., 119. — Photomicrographie Camera, 293. —, The Development of Photomicro- graphy in the last two years, 813. Neumayer, G., Guide to Scientific Obser- vations in Travelling, 823. Neumayr, M., Relationships of Foramini- fera, 66. New England, Medusa from, 592. Jersey, Essex County Mi-roscopical Society of, 304. York, Central, Microscopical Club, 304. Zealand, Fossil Marine Diatoms from, 94. ——, Wellington district, Fresh-water Infusoria of, 972. Newcombe, F. C., Dissemination of the Spores of Equisetum, 1000. Ney, O., Magnesium Lamps, 494. Nickel, E., The Colour Reactions of Carbon Combinations. I. Colour Reactions of an Aromatic Character, 849, INDEX. Nicholson, H. A., Structures and Affinities of Parkeria, 237. Nicotra, L., Pollination of Serapias, 256. Nikiforow, M., Short Studies in Micro- scopical Technique, 856. Nuclear Carmine Stain, 1050. , safranin as a Stain for the Central Nervous System, 1051. —, Simple Method for Fixing Cover- glass Preparations, 1047. ——,, Staining the Spirochete of Relapsing Fever, 1054. Nitella, New, 1001. Nitrate of Silver Method for Staining, 319. Nitric Acid in Plants, Formation of, 616. Nitrogen, Absorption of, by Plants, 770. —— ot Vegetation, Sources of, 261. Noack, F., Influence of Climate on the Cuticularization and Thickening of the Leaves of some Coniferze, 608. Nobhe, F., Production of Sex and Pheno- mena of Crossing, 256. Nobert’s Bands, 305. Noeggerath, E., On a new method of bacteria cultivation on coloured nutrient media for diagnostic pur- poses, 831, 1039. Noll, F., Growth of the Cell-wall, 442. , Influence of External Forces on the Form of Plants, 456. : , Protonema of Schistostega osmun- dacea, 774. Staining Membranes Siphonee, 516. ——, F. C., Natural History of Siliceous Sponges, 745. , Silicoblasts. 596. Nordqvist, O., Moina bathycolor and the greatest depths at which Cladocera are found, 578. Nordstedt, O., New Chara, 1001. , New Nitella, 1001. Norman, A. M., New Crustacean Purasite, 418. Norse Alcyonaria, 239. Nose-piece for Changing Objectives, Dumaige’s, 488. Nostocaceze, Cellular Envelope of the Filamentous, 632, 1012. Nostochinez, Filamentous Heterocystous, 472. Notochlena, Apogamy in, 999. Nott, T. E., Staining of Tubercle Bacilli, 849. Nuclear and Cell Division, 243, 440. Carmine Stain, 1050. Fission, Preparing Testicle for Ob- serving, 146. Origin of Hyaloplasm, 440. — Stain, New, and Note on Fixation,675. Nuclei of Muscle-cells, 18. , So-called Free, in the Nutrient Yolk of Bony Fishes, Origin and Signifi- cance of, 706. ——, Three, in Pollen-grains, 440. in Living 1103 Nuclein and Plastin, Demonstrating, 505. Nucleus and Cell, Division of, 978. ——, Artificial, Deformations of, 196. ——, Changes of Position of, 390. —, Chemistry of, 390. ——, Direct Division of, in Euplotes harpa, 436. —, Division of, Cell-division, and Im- preenation, 600. in Cell-division, Part taken by, 69. — in Oscillaria and Tolypothrix, 275. —, Membrane, and Protoplasm of Plant- cells, Properties and Changes of, 980. ——, Relation between the Function and Position of, 601. Nusbaum, J., Germinal Layers of Meloe, 942. , M., First Changes in Fecundated Ovum of Lepas, 218. Nutmeg, Contents of the Cells of the Aril of, 760. Nutrient Media, Coloured, 1039. for microbes from milk, on the preparation of solid, 658. Medium for Micro-crganisms, Albu- men of Plovers’ Eggs, 1037. Nutrition of Phanerogamia. tents, XXV. —,, Physiology of, in Protozoa, 749. Nutritive Media, Preparation of, 655. Nuttall’s, G., Warm Cliamber, 1027. Nutting, C. C., New Species of Acineta, 438. Nyctaginez, 82. Nyctiphanes norvegica, Photospheria of, 415. See Con- O. Oaks, Retrogression in, 88. Oamaru Deposit, Remarkable from, 967. Oberstein, H., Methods for Investigating the Structure of the Central Nervous Organs in health and disease, 1041. Objectives. See Contents, xxxiii. Odontophores of Mollusca, Photomicro- graphs of, 333. Odoriferous Glands of Blaps, 943. Office Students, Microscopy and Histology for, 686. Ohio State Micrescopical Society, 305. Oidium Fragariz, 274. Oil-passages in the Roots of Composite, 447. Ser eas Colourless, in Potamogeton, Spicules ——-receptacles in the Roots of Com- positee, 760. Olbers, A., Fruit of Borragineze, 255. Oleina, Ascomycetes and Podocapsa, New Genera of, 271. Olfactory Ganglia of Cephalopods, 931. Oligocheta, Homology of Segmental Organs and Efferent Ducts of Genital Products in, 419. 4 E 2 1104 Oligochswta, Limicolous, Formation of Em- bryonic Layers and Ccelom, 735. , So-called Prostate Glands of, 221. Oliver, F. W., Microchemical Tests for Callus, 323. , Phenomenon analogous to Leaf-fall, 88. , Sensitive Labellum of Masdeyallia, muscosa, 616. , Sieve-tubes in the Laminariex, 265. —, Trapella, Oliv., a new Genus of Pedalinex, 992. —, L., Physiological Experiments on Organisms of Glairine and Baregine, 1019. Ombrophila and Guepinia, 1008. Onion, Anguillulide of, 585. —, Occurrence of Starch in, 983. Onoclea Struthiopteris, Hoffm., Develop- ment of, 618. Ontogeny of Marine Bryozoa, 936. Oogenesis and Reproductive Organs of Helix, 398. Oophyte of Trichomanes, 617. Opheliacez, Preparing the Nervous System of, 509. Ophiurid, Remarkable, from Brazil, 591. Ophiurids, Anatomy of, 958. — , Morphology of, 432. —, Nervous System and Vascular Ap- paratus of, 57. Optometer and apparatus for measuring the foci of, and centering of optical lenses—North Harchek'’s System, 819. Opuntia, Production of Vegetative from Fertile Shoots of, 768. Orbitolites complanata, var. laciniata, Re- productive Condition of, 693, 1065. Orcanet, Employment of tincture of, in histological technique, 1056. Orchestia, 949. Orchid Hybrids, Bigeneric, 257. Orchides, Anatomical Structure of the Leaves of, 608. — .. Flower of, 764. Orchids, Self-fertilization and Cleistogamy in, 994, Oribatids, British, 412. Orobanche, Biology of, 85. , Development and Structure of, in a young stage and of its suckers, 80. Orr, H., Embryology of Anolis, 387. —, —— of Lizard, 548. Orthoneura, 400. meri H. L., Microscope in Medicine, ——, Microscopical Societies should com- bine for work, 305. —,, Practical Courses, 324. ——,, Studies for Beginners, 686, 856. oe and Tolypothrix, Nucleus in, 279. ae Acid and Gold Chloride Methods, Ossitication Preparations, Staining of, 154. INDEX. Ostracoda,” “On the Generative Organs of, 168. Ova, Abnormal, of Ascaris megalocephala, 953. and Spermatozoa, Formation of, in Spongilla fluviatilis, 966. and Tissues, Bacteria-like Bodies in, 31. ——. Animal, Formation of Polar Globules, 705. ——,, Ascaris, Maturation and Division of, 42 —, Capillary Slide and accessories for the examination of, 801. —— of Amphibia, Preparing, 146. —— of Ascaris megalocephala, Preparing, 508. of Bdellostoma, 192. —,, Respiration of Silk-worm, 726. , Segmentation of Teleostean, 191. Ovarian Oya and the Primitive Forami- nifera, Resemblance of, 706. Ovaries, Preparing Mammalian, 662, Ovary, Histology of, 713. , Reticulated Protoplasm in the Inter- stitial Cells of, 311. Oven and Water-bath, Reeves’s, 163. Overton, C., Conjugation of Spirogyra, 625. Oviatt, B. L., Permanent Preparations of Tissues treated with Potassium Hydrate, 147. Ovules of Grasses, 611. — of Plantago, 452. of Rumex, 764. Ovum, Animal, 13. —, Axis of Frog, 15. —, Human, 547. —, Maturity of, 15. of Lepas, First Changes in Fecun- dated, 218. , Polar Globule of Mammalian, 186. Oxalis rubella, Germination of, 613. —-—, Subterranean Shovts of, 988. Oxidation, Influence of Light on, 714. —, Physiological, in the Protoplasm, 54 -process in Plants after death, 88. Oxygen, Exhalation of, by fleshy-leaved Plants in absence of Carbonic Anhy- dride, 85. Pr Pachydrilus enchytrexoides, Histology of, 22. Pagan’s “ Growing Slide,” Modification of, 1028. Paladino, G., Preparing Mammalian Ovaries, 662. Palsemon and Hippolyte, Parasitic Castra- tion in the Eucyphotes of, 414. Pal-Exner Method of Staining Sections of the Central Nervous System, 1057. Palladin, W., Formation of organic acids in the growing parts of plants, 247. INDEX. Palms, Germination of, 257. Palpiform Organs of Crustacea, 413. Palps of Butterflies, Basal Spot on, 943. Paneth, J., Secreting Cells of Intestinal Epithelium, 556. Pantanelli, D., Mounting small Organisms —Disage¢regation of Rocks, 315. Pantocsek, J., Fossil Diatoms of Hungary, 466. Paper, Microscopical Examination of, 521. Papilionacez, Mycodomatia in the Roots of, 450. Papulaspora, New, 631. Paraffin, Homogeneous, 151. Imbedding in Botany, Application of, 315, 672, 834. Paramecium, Conjugation of, 65. Parasite, New Crustacean, 418. 5 , of the Silk-worm, 471. of the Rotatoria, Chytridium elegans, 1011. of Telphusa, 40. Parasites of Teredo navalis, 199. of the Higher Fungi, 1011. — of the Peridinex, 781. —, Phanerogamous, Origin of the Suckers in, 80. Parasitic Algze on the Sloth, 624, Fungi, Character of the Injuries pro- duced by, upon their Host-plants, 470. —— Fungus on Pineapple, 780. on Salt-fish, 781. on the Plane, 631. — Infusoria, New, 436. Protozoa, 974. —— — in Man, 240. Rotifer, Discopus Synapte, 52. Parasitism and Mimicry of Camponotus lateralis, 30. of the Truffle, 780. Parker, G. H., Eyes in Scorpions, 411. , W. N., On the objects of the Bio- logical and Microscopical Section of the Cardiff Naturalists’ Society, 686. Parkeria, Observations on, 757. ——, Structure and Affinities of, 237. Parthenogenesis in Bombyx mori, 571, 725. Patella vulgata and Sepia officinalis, Salivary Glands of, 932. Pathogenic cliromo-aromatic 1017. Pathological Investigations, Methods for, 154. — Mycology, Baumgarten’s, 791. —— Structure of the Cell-nucleus, 391. Patouillard, N., Classification of the Aga- ricinese, 467. —, New Tubercularia, 779. , Prototremella, 1007. Patten, W., Eyes of Arthropods, 209, 938. Pawlowsky, A. D., Cultivation of Bacillus Tuberculosis on Potato, 1038. Payena and Mimusops, Laticiferous pro- duct of, 759. Peach-leayes, “ Curl” of, 89. Microbe, 1105 Peal, C. N., Microscopy for Beginners, 686. Peckham, G. W., Senses of Anis, 571. and Hi. G., Mental Powers of Spiders, 575. Pedalinex, Trapella, Oliv., a new Genus of, 992. Pediastrum, Development of, 624. Pedicellina, Anatomy of, 208. Pelagic Animals at Great Depths, and their Relations to the Surface Fauna, 558. Pelanechinus corallinus, New Features in, 233. Pelletan, J., Diatomacex, 667. ——, Objectives, 111. Pelomyxa palustris, Minute Structure of, 1 7k: Pelseneer, P., ‘Challenger’ Pteropoda (Gymnosomata), 26. —, P. N., Classification of Gastropoda by the Characters of the Nervous System, 933. ——,, Lamellibranchiata without gills, 564. , Nervous System of Pteropods, 25. Peltospheria, New Genus, 630. Pendent Organs, Mechanical System of, 75. Penicillium candidum, Ascophorous form of, 1008. crustaceum, Asci of, 271. Pennatula, New, from the Bahamas, 593. Pennatulida, ‘ Porcupine,’ 745. Penny, W. G., Eye-pieces—Physical Ab- erration and Distortion, 646. Penzig, O., Anatomy and Diseases of Aurantiaces, 453. Pereyaslawzewa, S., Development of Gam- marus, 949. Perforation in the Walls of Vessels, Sys- tematic Value of, 447. Pericardial Gland in Lamellibranchs, 720. Pericheta, Anatomy of, 422. Periderm, Formation of, 761. of Leguminose, 606. of Rosaceze, 987. Peridermium Pini, 1009. Peridinex, Parasites of, 781. , Spore-formation in, 437. Peripatus capensis and P. Nove Zealandiz, Anatomy of, 577. PEF he Se of a South American, 1 ——, —— of the Cape Species of, 409. ——-, Monograph of the Genus, 576. Nove-Zealandiz, Development of, 33. Peripheral Ganglia and Nerve-cells, Pre- paration of, 506. Periplaneta orientalis, Thermie Experi- ments on, 31. Peristome, 1000. , Internal, of Mosses, 461. — of Mosses, 263, 620. Permeability of Protoplasm, 601. of the Epidermis of Leaves to Gases, 448, 763. 1106 Peronospora of the Rose, 1008. viticola, 1008. Perrier, R., Kidney of Prosobranch Gas- tropods, 399, 715. Perroncito, E., Chytridium elegans, 0. sp., a Parasite of the Rotatoria, 1011. , Encystation of Megastoma testinale, 439. and L. Varalda, Composition of “ Muffe,” 633. Peter, A., Batrachospermum, Chantransia, and Lemanea, 464. Petersen, O, G., Reticulations in Vessels, 986. Petiole, Distribution of Fibro-vascular Bundles in, 74. of Dicotyledons, 610. Petit, L., Distribution of Fibro-vascular Bundles in the Petiole, 74. ——, Effects of Lesion of Supra-ceso- phageal Ganglia in Snails, 717. —., Effects of Lesions of the Supra- cesophageal Ganglia of the Crab (Car- cinus Meenas), 730. , Petiole of Dicotyledons, 610. Petri, R. J., New Method of Demonstra- ting and Counting Bacteria and Fungi Spores in the Air, 1059. Petrographical Microscope, Bausch and Lomb Optical Co.’s, 279. Petromyzon, Development of, 388, 549. Petrone, L., Methods for examining the Structure of the Cerebrospinal Nerves, 1041. Pfeffer, W., Chemotactic Movements of Bacteria, Flagellata, and Volvocinex, in- Pfeifer, A., Cooler for quickly setting Gelatin Plates, 828. Pfitzer, E., Flower of Orchidez, 764. ——, New Imbedding Material, 316. Pfitzner, W., Pathological Structure of the Cell-nucleus, 391. Phzophycex, Physiology of, 462. Phzeozoosporee, New Genera of, 465. Phalangida, Brain of, 576. Phalloidei, Stretching of the Receptacle of, 629. Phanerogamia, Anatomy and Physiology of. See Contents, xx. Pharbitis triloba, Seeds of, 764. Pharmacognostic Microtome and Tech- nique, 513. Pheuol in Microscopical Technique, 847. Philibert, —., Internal Peristome of Mosses, 461, 1000. Peristome of Mosses, 263, 620, 1000. Philichthy¢# and Lerneasens, 217. Phillips, W., Luminosity of Fungi, LEE Phloem, Secreting Canals of Umbellifere and Araliacese contained in, 605. Phlogogenous matter, Presence of a, in the Cultures of certain Microbes, 634. INDEX. ise dactylus, Photogenic Property of, 6. Phormidium and Lyngbya, Relationship between, 784. Phosphorescence in Myriopoda, 945. Phosphorescent Bacilli, Photographing, by means of their own light, 813. — Bacillus, 277. — Bacteria from Sea-water, 101. — Lumbricids, Type of a New Genus, Phosphoric Acid and Phosphorous in Plants, 760. Photodrilus phosphoreus, New Genus of Phosphorescent Lumbricids, 39. eae? Property of Pholas dactylus, Photographing ‘moving Microscopie Ob- jects, 812. Photographs vy. Drawings.—Screen for the Abbe Camera Lucida, 809. Photomicrographs of Diatoms, 295. — of the Odontophores of Molluses, 333. — with high amplification, 526. — , Zeiss’s, 525. Photomicrography. See Contents, xxxiv. Photomicroscope, “ Stein’s ” Large, 295. Photospheria of Nyctiphanes norvegica, 415. Photoxylin for Imbedding, 834. Phreoryctes, Reproductive Organs of, 579. Phryganide, Scent-glands of, 406. Phthisical Sputum, The value of Micro- scopical examination of, as a means of giving a correct Prognosis, 686. Phycoerythrin, 622. Phycomycetes, Cultivation of, 469. Phycophein, 265. Phycotheca universalis, Richter’s, 627. Phyllocarida, ‘ Challenger,’ 36. Phylloxera, Brain of, 408. Phylogeny of Echinodermata, &e., 956. ~— of Lamellibranchs, 565. — of Protozoa, 967. Physalospora Bidwellii, Formation of the Asci in, 629. Physicians and the Microscope, 523. Physophore, New, 592. Pichi, P., Thickening of the Cell-walls in the Leaf-stalk of Aralia, 70. —, Tubercles on the Roots of Legumi- nose, 608. Picrocarmine, Preparing, 518. Piersol, G. A., Benda’s Modified Copper- hematoxylin, 158. —, Drawings v. Photographs.—Screen for the Abbe Camera Lucida, 809. ——, Homogeneous Parafiin, 151. —, Laboratory Jottings, 166. ——, Substitute for Clearing, 160. Pilacre, 1009. Pilliet, A., Differential Staining of the Tissues of Living Animals, $42. ——, Glandular Cells of Stomach, 393. Hauck and INDEX. Pimina, a new Genus of Hyphomycetes, 780. Pinakoscope, Ganz’s, with Dreyfus’s Re- flector, 796. Pine-apple, Fungus Parasitic on, 780. Pines, Causes which produce Kccentricity of the Pith in, 761. Pinguicula, Arrangement of Fibro-vascular Bundles in, 74. ——, Observations on, 987. , Propagula of, 764. Pirotta, R., Endosperm of Gelsomines (Jasmines), 249. Pitcher-like leaflets of Staphylea pinnata, 253. Pith in Pines, Causes which produce EKecentricity of, 761. Pits, Bordered, Mode of rendering visible the closing Membrane of, 315. Pittsburg, Microscopical Society of, 305. Piutti, A., and L. Luciani, Respiration of Silk-worm Ova, 726. Plane, Fungus Parasitic on, 631. Plant Analysis as an Applied Science, 89. Planta, A. v., Nutrient Food-Material of Bees, 942. Plant-cells, Properties and Changes of the a ae Protoplasm and Nucleus of, , new method for Hardening and Staining, 1045. Plantago, Ovules of, 452. Plants, Preservation of, in Spirit and the Prevention of Browning, 852. — which form their Rootlets without a Pocket, 987. Plasmodia, Fusion of Lymphatic Cells into, 555. eee conan of Badhamia and Brefeldia, Plasmolysis in Flowering Plants, 759. of Algee, 93. moo Method, New Application of, ov. Plastic Reconstruction, Methods of, 853. Plastin and Nuclein, Demonstrating, 505. Plate, L., Acinetoides, 974. , Asellicola digitata, 973. ——.,, Organization of Dentalium, 933. Plate-cultivations, Hardening and Stain- ing, 848, Plateau, F., Palpiform Organs of Crus- tacea, 413. , Powers of Vision, 32. ——,, Respiration of Arachnida, 214. — , Vision in Arachnids, 214. —, of Caterpillars and Adult Insects, 404: popeeer, G., Karyokinesis in Lepidoptera, —, New Nuclear Stain and Note on Fixation, 675. Platyhelminthes. See Contents, xvi. Plaut, H., Improvement in Plaut’s Flasks for sterilizing water, 1040. 1107 Plaut, H., Sterilization of Potato, Apples, and Water for cultivation purposes, 310. Pleochromism of coloured Cell-walls, 602. Pleospora, 469. Pleurocapsa, New, 784. Pleurosigma angulatum, Spectra of, 303. formosum, Structure of, 1063. Plitt, C., Anatomy of the Leaf-stalk, 448. Plossl’s (S.) Focusing Arrangement, 651. Plovers’ Eggs, Albumen of, as Nutrient Medium for Micro-organisms, 1037. Plum and Cherry-trees, Disease affecting, 274, Pocket-book, Histological, 686. Podocapsa, Ascomycetes and Oleina, New Genera of, 271. Podocarpus, Emergences on the Roots of, 252. Podura Scale, New Appearances in, 499. Poirier, J.. New Human Distomum, 49. Poison of Hymenoptera, 425, 724. Polar Bodies in Ascaris, 43. — Globule of Mammalian Ovum, 186. — Globules in Animal Ova, Formation of, 705. Polarized Light, The use of the Micro- scope in the examination of Rock Sec- tions by, 655. Polarizing Microscope, Dufet’s, 107. Poli, A., Adaptation of Kaiser’s gelatin for arranging microscopic preparations in rows, 680. — , 304. Pollen-grains, Three Nuclei in, 440. Pollination and Distribution of the Sexual Organs, 612. in Zannichellia palustris, 256. — of Alpine Plants, 454. —— of Serapias, 256. of Silene inflata, 454. Polycheta, Anatomy of, 41. Polyedriacez, 1013. Polygordius, 225. , Preparing, 662. Polymicroscope, Lenhossék’s, 104. Polymorphism attributed to certain generic groups, 453. — of the Hyphomycetes, 468. Polyparium, Nature of, 594. Polypides, Movements of, in Zocecia of Bryozoa, 936. Polypodiacezw, Development of the Spor angium of, 459. : , Leaves of, 619. Polypody of Insect Embryos, 568. Polyporeze, 1007. Polyporus abietinus, Fr., and Irpex fusco- violaceus, F'r., Identity of, 468. —— applanatus, Formation of two fertile hymenia in, 629. — biennis, Conidiferous Form of, 778. Polyzoa. See Bryozoa, Contents, xi. Pond Dredging and Collecting, 505. —- Life, Illustrations of, 855. 1108 Pontederiacem, Apical meristem of the roots of, 248. Pontia brassicw, Decrease of Weight in Winter Pups of, 572. ‘Porcupine’ Pennatulida, 745. Porifera. See Contents, xviii. Portchinski, —., Comparative Biology of Neerophagous and Coprophagous Dip- terous Lary», 407. Post-embryonie Development of Julus, 213. Postal Microseopical Society, 503. Potamogeton, Colourless Oil-plastids in, 984. Potassium Hydrate, Permanent Prepara- tions of Tissues treated with, 147. Potato, Apples, and Water for cultivation purposes, Sterilization of, 310. ——, Cultivation of Bacillus Tuberculosis on, 1038. — Cultivations, 142, 143, 310, 311, 827. —— Fungus, 274. , Respiration of, 85. Potato-disease, New, 471. Potter, M. C., Alga epiphytie on a Tor- toise, 268. Potts, E., Collecting, Growing, and Ex- amining Fresh-water Sponges, 305. —., Fresh-water Sponges, 63. Poulton, E. B., Learning to see with the Microscope, 495. ——, Sceretion of Pure Aqueous Formic Acid by Lepidopterous Larve for the Purposes of Defence, 405. Power and Harris, Manual for the Physio- logical Laboratory, 166. Praél, E., Protecting-wood and Duramen, 248, 761. Prenant, A., Preparing and Staining Mammalian Testicle, 844. ——,, Spermatogenesis of Gastropods, 932. —. of Reptiles, 924. Preservation of Parts and Organs of Ani- mals, 658. President’s Address, 177. Prickle-pores of Victoria regia, 81. Priest, B. W., Remarkable Spicules from Oamaru Deposit, 967. Prillieux, E., Grape-disease — Como- thyrium diplodiella, 98. Primitive Insects, 29. — Streak and Medullary Canal, Relation OL, LD; Pringsheim, N., Deposition of Caleareous Incrustations on Fresh-water Plants, 773. Prisms, Tri-ocular, 796. Pritchard’s Microscope with “ Continen- tal” Fine-adjustment, 1022. Problematical Organs of Invertebrata, 714 Quadri-ocular, &c., Procarp and Cystocarp of Gracilaria, 622. Propagula of Pinguicula, 764. Prosobranchs, Nervous System of, 21. INDEX. a Glands, So-called, of Oligocheta, Protecting-wood and Duramen, 248, 761. Protein-granules, &c., Staining, 675. Prothallium of Equisetum, 262. Protoplasm, Membrane, and Nucleus of Plant-cells, Properties and Changes of, 980. Protista, Biological Studies on, 755. ee of Schistostega osmundacea, 774. Protophyta. See Contents, xxxvi. Protoplasm, Action of basic substances on living, 758. —, Living, Transpiration as a Function of, 456. —— of Certain Cells, Contraetility of, 457. — — —, Power of Contractility exhibited by, 614. ——,, Permeability of, 601. — , Physiological Oxidation in, 454. —— _, Reticulated, in the Interstitial Cells of the Ovary, 311. ee Elements of, in Protozoa, 748. Protoplasmic Movement, Light upon, 242. Prototracheata. See Contents, xiii. Prototremella, 1007. Protozoa. See Contents, xviii. Prouho, H., Researches on Dorocidaris papillata and other Mediterranean Eehinids, 430. Pruvot, G., and H. de Lacaze-Duthiers, Larval Anal Eye in Opisthobranch Gastropods, 19. Prazmowski, A., Spore-formation in Bac- teria, 787. Pseudochlorophyli corpuscles in the vas- cular system of Lameilibranchs, 565. Psorospermium Haeckeli, 240, 598. Pteropoda. See Contents, x. Pteropods, Lamellibranchs and Gastropods, Ingestion of Water in, 199. Pterotrachea, Sucker on Fin of, 205. Puccinia Graminis, Structure and Life- history of, 1007 ——,, New, 782. Pulfrich, C., A new refractometer, specially intended for the use of chemists, 495. Pulmonate Mollusca, Development of Heart of, 204. Pupze and Surroundings, Colour-relation between, 727. Purification of Tolu Balsam for Micro- scopical Purposes, 681. Puteren, D. v., On the preparation of solid ae media for microbes from milk, Pyrenomycetes, New Genus of Sphari- aceous, 630. Pyrenophora and Clathrospora, 631. Pyridin in Histological Technique, 1054. Pythium, New, 98. Influence of INDEX. Q. Quadri-ocular, Tri-ocular, &c., Prisms, 796. Quantitative estimation of Chlorophyll, 71. Queen, J. W., Apparent and Actual Size of Field, Magnifying Power, &c., 501. Quekett Club Journal and Microscopical Optics, 817, 1034. Quélet, L., Ombrophila and Guepinia, 1008. Quimby, B. F., Widening the Scope of Microscopical Societies, 503. Quinn, E. P., Simple method of Projecting upon the screen Microscopie Rock Sec- tions, both by ordinary and by polarized light, 819. ——, The Advantages and Deficiencies of the Lantern Microscope, 646. ——, The use of the Microscope in the examination of Rock Sections by Polar- ized Light, 655. R. Rabenhorst’s ‘ Cryptogamic Germany’ (Musci), 91. Rabl-Riickhard, H., Peculiar Fat-cells, 928. Radiolaria, 437. Radulz of small species of Gastropoda, Preparing, 507. Raffaele, F., Eggs and Larve of Tele- osteans, 925. Rafter, G. W., Making Mounts Photo- graphic, 854. ——,, Photomicrographs, 813. Rana temporaria, Fate of the Blastopore in, 925. Raphides, Position and Number of, 445, Raschke, E. W., Larva of Culex, 212. Raskin, M., Milk as a Medium, 145, 656, 1038. Rath, O. v., Dermal Sensory Organs of Insects, 210, 569. Rathay, E., New Vine-disease, 471. Rattray, J., “A Monograph of the genus Aulacodiscus, 335, 337. —, A Revision of the Genus Auliscus Ehrb. and of some aJlied Genera, 861. , Varieties of Aulacodiscus, 627. Rauwenhoff, N. W. P., Spheeroplea, 267. Rawitz, B., Green Gland of Crayfish, 216. , Mucous Cells in Mussels, 402. Reading Microscopes, Hensoldt’s, 640. Red Chalk, The Foraminifera of, 383. Redfern, J. J., Pal-Exner Method of Stain- ing Sections of the Central Nervous System, 1057. Reess, M., and C. Fisch, Elaphomyces,273. Reeves, J. E., Thin Sections, 1048. Reeves’s Method, 314. — Water-bath and Oven, 163. Reflector, Dreyfus’s, with Ganz’s Pinako- scope, 796. ——, Koch’s and Max Wolz’s, 1025. Flora of. 1109 Refractometer, A new, specially intended for the use of chemists, 495. , Bertrand’s, 291, 649. Regeneration of Lost Parts, 215. Regulator, Swift’s, 649. Reiche, K., Anatomy of the Floral Axis, 254. Reichel, L., Formation of Byssus, 935. Reichert, C., Cover-correction, 496. , Directions for using the Microscope, 141. Reinhertz, —., Testing Screw-Micrometers of Reading-Microscopes, 814. Reinke, J., Oxidation-process in Plants after death, 88. Reinsch, P. F., New Genera of Florides, 1002. , Polyedriaces, 1013. Rejuvenescence of Caulerpa, 464. Relations of Structure and Function to Colour Changes in Spiders, $45. Renal Organ of Echinoids, 590. —— Organs of Star-fishes, 958. Renault, B., Leaves of Sigillaria and Lepidodendron, 263. Rendle, A. B., Development of Aleurone- grains in the Lupin, 982. a Occurrence of Starch in the Onion, 83. Repiachoff, W., Second Species of Tur- bellarian living on Nebaliz, 428. Replum in Crucifere, 611, Reproduction of Planerogamia. Contents, xxiv. Reproductive Organs and Oogenesis of Helix, 398. Reptiles, Spermatogenesis of, 924. Resegotti, L., and G. Martinotti, Demon- strating Karyokinetic Figures, 516. ——, Staining Karyokinetic Figures, 1050. Heer re eubaleuees in Evergreen Leaves, Hoos and Assimilation in Plants, See —, Changes of Substance and Force connected with, 771. of Arachnida, 214. of Hydrophilus, 212. —— of Phanerogamia. See Contents, xxvi. — of Silk-worm Ova, 726. of the Potato, 85. Relation between the Heat and the porbonte Acid given off by Plants in, 5. ——,, Sub-aquatic, 569. Respiratory Organs (of Plants) 76. Restiaceze, Exoderm of the Root of, 987, Reticulations in Vessels, 986. Reticulum of Muscle-fibre, 928. Retrogression in Oaks, 88. Reuter, E., Basal Spot on Palps of Butter- flies, 943. Reynolds, R. N., A new Planisher, 515. ——, Reeves’s Method, 314. Rhamnus, Fruits and Seeds of, 78, 1110 Rhinantheew and Santalacem, Haustoria, | of, 250. , Root-hairs of, 450. Rhizome of Monocotyledons, Bundles in, 7+. Rhizomorpha subcorticalis of Armillaria mellea, 97. Rhizopods, Digestion in, 240. . New, 797. Rhododendron, Nectar of, 603. Rhumbler, L., Various Cyst-formations and Developmental History of Colpoda, 969. Richard, J., and J. de Guerne, Geo- graphical Distribution of Diaptomus, 731. Richter, —, Agar-agar for Cultivation, 1036. and Hauck’s Phycotheca universalis, 627. Ridley, H. N., Self-fertilization and Cleis- togamy in Orchids, 994. , 5. O., and A. Dendy, ‘Challenger’ Sponges, 597. ‘ Riedlin, G., H. Buchner, and T. Longard, Method of calculating the Bacterial Increase, 682. Rings, Annual, in Wood, Formation of, 75. Rinnbock’s Slides of Arranged Diatoms, 1057. Ritzema Bos, J., Natural Tylenchus, 229, 585. Robert, E., Spermatogenesis in Aplysia, 397. Robertson, C., Fertilization of Calopogon parviflorus, 454. , Insect relations of Asclepiadex, 82. Robin’s, Lacaze-Duthiers’, and Farabceuf’s Injecting Syringes, 678. Robinson, B. L., Taphrina, 274. Rocks, Action of Lichens on, 95. , Disaggregation of, 315. ——, Microscopy and the Study of, 820. Rodents’ Blood, Hemoglobin Crystals of, 198. Rodewald, H., Changes of Substance and Force connected with Respiration, 771. —, Relation between the Heat and the Carbonic Acid given off by Plants in Respiration, 455. Roeser, P., and P. Gourret, Protozoa of Corsica, 755. Rohde, E., Nervous System of Amphioxus, 390, 929. me R. A., Bigeneric Orchid Hybrids, ie Roll, —., Forms of Sphagnum, 775. Rolland, L., Blue Coloration of Fungi by Iodine, 628. —, and J. Costantin, Stysanus and Hormodendron, 1010. ai G., Exhibition of a Microtome, ora J. W., New Staining Fluid, Vascular History of INDEX. Root of Caprifoliacesws, Super-endodermal Network in, 73. —, Diaphragms in the Air-canals of, 447 — of Equisetum, Development of, 773. of Geraniacese, Sub-epidermal Net- work of, 986. — of Leguminosex and Ericacem, Super- endodermal Network of, 986. — of Restiacew, Exoderm of, 987. —, Supporting Network in the Cortex of, 986. Root-absorption and the Growth of Plants, Influence of certain Rays of the Solar Spectrum on, 769. -hairs, Geminate, 251. » New Method for Marking, 1045. — — of the Rhinanthea, 450. — -pressure, 769. —— -symbiosis in the Ericacem, 86. —— -tubercles of Leguminosa, 251. —— -tubes and Bacteria, 82. Roots, Comparative Anatomy of, 75. —, Floating, of Sesbania aculeata, 607. — grown in Water, Action of Light on, 95 — in Loranthacex, Formation of, 450. —, Lateral, in Monocotyledons, For- mation of, 762. — of Aracesx, 607. — of Composite, Oil-passages in, 447. —— — , Oil-receptacles in, 760. — of Cycas, Anomalous Thickening in, — of Dicotyledons, Anomalies in the Structure of, 606. — of Leguminosx, Tubercles on, 608. — of Papilionaces, Mycodomatia in, 450. — of Podocarpus, Emergences on, 252. — of Vicia Faba, Tubercular Swellings on, 251. —, Secretion from, 246. —, Structure of, and Arrangement of the Rootlets in Centrolepides, Eriocaulex, Juncee, Mayacee, and Xyridex, 251. Rosacexe, Embryo-sac of, 610. — , Periderm of, 987. Rosanilin Nitrate in watery Glycerin Solu- tion, Staining with, 518. Rose, J. N., and J. M. Coulter, Develop- ment of the Fruit of Umbelliferse, 79. Rose, Peronospora of, 1008. Rosen, F., Mycological Notes, 784. Rosenstadt, B., Structure of Asellus, 948. Rosenthal, J., and O. Schulz, Aljkali- Albuminate as a Nutrient Medium, 825. Rosseter, T. B., ‘“‘On the Generative Organs of Ostracoda,” 168. Rostrup, E., Fungi of Finland, 275. Rotatoria, Chytridium elegans, n. sp. & Parasite of, 1011. Rothert, W., Formation of Sporangia and Spores in the Saprolegniex, 271. INDEX. Rotifer, Parasitic, Discopus Synapte, 52. Rotifers, Contractile Vesicle of, 955. Rotterer, E., Staining-differences of Un- striped Muscle and Connective Tissue Fibres, 843. “ Rouge” of the Scotch Fir, 781. Roule, L., Formation of Embryonic Layers and Colom of a Limicolous Oligochete, 735. : —, Histology of Pachydrilus enchyitre- oides, 222. , Killing contractile Animals in a state of extension, 104+. , Striated Muscles in Mollusca, 402. Roumeguére, C., Fungus Parasitic on the Plane, 631. Rousselet’s (C.) Life-box, 112. » On a small Portable Binocular Microscope and a Life-box, 110. , On some methods of Collecting and Keeping Pond-life for the Microscope, 1040. , Pond Dredging and Collecting, 505. Rouvier, L., Gas Chamber, 289. , Preparation and Staining of the Spinal Cord, 660. —, Technical Treatise on Histology, 686. Roux, E., Colour-test for the detection of Gonococcus, 517. ——~, Cultivation of Anaerobic Microbes, 1038. — , On Potito cultivation, 311. ——,, W., Embryonic Axis, 923. Rowland’s (W.) Reversible Compressorium, 803. Royston - Pigott, G. W., Microscopical Advances, 141, 305, 501, 652, 1036. , Willi on the Scales of Butterflies and Moths, 498. Roze, E., Pollination palustris, 256. Riicker, A. W., Micromillimetre, 502, 652. Rudanowski, —, Microscopical Nerve Pre- parations, 834. Ruland, F., Antennary Sensory Organs of Insects, 723. Rumex, Ovules of, 764. Ruminants, Protozoa found in the Stomach of, 975. Russian Lumbricide, 581. Russow, E., German Sphagnaces, 621. —., Physiological and Comparative Anatomy of Sphagnaces, 774. Rutley, F., Rock-forming Minerals, 823. Ryder, J. A., Celloidin-paraffin Methods of Imbedding, 512. ——, Resemblance of Ovarian Ova and the Primitive Foraminifera, 706. ——, and G. Fetterolf, Vestiges of Zonary Decidua in Mouse, 186. in Zannichellia TTtt 5. Sabatier, A., Spermatozoa of Eledone moschata, 560. Sablon. See Leclere du Sablon. Saccardo, P. A., New Genus of Spheeri- aceous Pyrenomycetes, 630. Saccharomycetes, Cultivation of, 141. ellipsoideus and its Use in the Pre- paration of Wine from Barley, 785. minor, 633. Saefftigen, A., Nervous System of Phylac- tolematous Fresh-water Bryozoa, 402. Safranin and Anilin-blue, Modification of Garbini’s Double Stair, 1054. —— and Chromic Acid, Staining of Elastic Fibres with, 1053. — as a Stain for the Central Nervous System, 1051. St. Louis Club of Microseopists, 305. Saint-Remy, G., Brain of Iulus, 408. . of Phalangida, 576. Salamander, Goblet-cells of Intestine of, 712. ——, Spermatogenesis of, 189. Salensky, M., Development of Annelids, 218. ——, —— of Vermetus, 201. , W., Lateral Organs, 587. Salicorniesze, Foliar Sheath of, 609. Salinity, Influence of, 60. Salivary Glands of Cockroach, 725. — of Insects, 211. of Lecch, 38. of Sepia officinalis and Patella vulgata, 932. Salomons, D., Note on Depth of Focus, 652. Salpa, Histology of, 207. Salsoleze, Anatomy of, 988. Salt-excreting Glands of Tamariscinee, 249. —— -fish, Fungus Parasitic on, 781. Sand-wasps, 30. Sanderson, B., M. Foster, and Brunton, Manual of the Physiological Laboratory, 686. ——, J. B., Electromotive Properties of the Leaf of Dionza, 995. Sanfelice, F., Spermatogenesis in Guiuea- pig, 707. » —— of Vertebrates, $23. Sanford, E., Anatomy of the Common Cedar-apple, 631. : Sanio, C., Hybrid Mosses, 264. Santalaces and Rhinanthes, Haustoria of, 250. Sap, Conduction of, through the Secondary Wood, 768. Saposhnikoff, W., Geotropism, 458. Saprolegnia ferax, Infection of a Frog- tadpole by, 272. Saprolegnies, Formation of Sporangia and Spores in, 271. 1312 Saprolegniew, Recent Researches on, 1010. Sarasin, P. and F., Anatomy of Echino- thurida and Phylogeny of Echinoder- mata, 956, ——, Budding in Star-fishes, 233. ——, Development of Helix Waltoni, 24. ——, Gemmation in Linckia multipora, 431. — , Longitudinal Muscles and Stewart’s Organ in Echinothurids, 429. , Renal Organ of Echinoids, 590. Sarcina of the Lungs, 634. Sarcolemma, 928. Sarcophila Wohlfartii, Larva of, in Gum of Man, 944. Sars, G. O., ‘Challenger’ Cumacea, 35. ; Phyllocarida, 36. Sauvageau, C., Diaphragms in the Air- canals of the Root, 447. Savin, —, Influence of Exposure on the Formation of the Annual Rings in, 762. Seales of Butterflies and Moths, Villi on, 498. Scent-glands of Phryganida, 406. -organs of German Lepidoptera, 406. Schifer’s (E. A.) Hot-water Circulation Stage, and Swift’s Regulator, 649. —, R. P. C., Influence of the Turgidity of the Epidermal Cells on the Stomata, 605, 763. Schaffer, J., Staining in the Study of Bone Development, 844. Schanz, F., Fate of the Blastopore in Amphibians, 189, Schenck, H., Anatomy of Water-plants, 77. Scheurlen’s Cancer Bacillus, 472, 785. Schewiakoff, W., Karyokinesis of Euglypha, 66. —, and B. Grassi, Megastoma entericum, 599. Schieck’s (F. W.) Meat-examining Micro- scope, 793. — Microscope Lamps, 490. — Travelling Microscope, 794. Schiefferdecker, P., Celloidin Corrosion Mass, Modification of, 159. —, Microtome for Cutting Aleohol, 152. — , Structure of Nerve-fibre, 197. —_, Weigert’s Hematoxylin Method as applied to other than Nervous Tissues, 674. Schiemenz, P., Ingestion of Water in Lamellibranchs, Gastropods, and Ptero- pods, 199. Schill, J. F., Leeuwenhoek’s Discovery of Micro-organisms, 522. Schimkewitsch, W., Balanoglossus Meresch- koyskii, 588. , Development of Heart of Pulmonate Mollusea, 204. Schimmelbusch, C., A modification of Kochi’s plate process, 1010. Schimper, A. F. W., Formation of Oxalate of Lime in Leaves, 444. under INDEX, Schimper, A. F. W., Relationship between Ants and Plant in the Tropics, 772. , Starch and Chlorophyll-grains, 71. Schinzia, 631. Schistostega osmundacea, Protonema of, 774. Schizomycetes in coloured media, On the cultivation of, 145, 823. Schlagdenhauffen, F., and E. Heckel, Laticiferous product of Mimusops and Payena, 759. Schmid, E., Sub-aquatice Respiration, 569. Schmidt and Haensch, The new improved enlarging camera of, 1034. —. Zirconium Light for Photomicro- graphy, 1033. ; F., Development of Generative Organs of Cestoda, 426. Schneidemthl, —, Investigating the Ef- fects of Remedies by the Microscope, 1060. Schneider, A., Sarcolemma, 928. Schnetzler, J. B., Colouring matter of the waters of the Lake of Bret, 785. , Infection of a Frog-tadpole by Sapro- legnia ferax, 272. , Reproduction of Thamnium alope- curum, 773. , Tannin in Acanthus spinosus, 72. Schonland, S., Apical meristem of the roots of Pontederiacex, 248. —, Imbedding Plant Tissues, 511. , Modification of Pagan’s “ Growing Slide,” 1028. Schottlander, F., Cell-division, 554. Schrenk, J., Vegetative Organs of Brasenia peltata, 449. Schroder, H., 503. Schroeter, J., Basidiomycetes, 1006. —, Cohn’s ‘Cryptogamic Flora of Silesia’? (Fungi), 99. Schuberg, A., Protozoa found in the Stomach of Ruminants, 975. Schultz, O., Physiological Anatomy of Stipules, 609. Schultze, F. E., A double lens made by Herr Westien of Rostock, 1025. On a binocular dissecting 1025. ——, O., Changes of Position of Nucleus, 390. ——,, Segmentation in Axolotl, 392. —, Vital Methylen-blue Reaction of Cell-granules, 842. Schulz, A., Pollination and Distribution of the Sexual Organs, 612. —., E., Reserve-substances in Ever- green Leaves, 983. —, O., and J. Rosenthal, Alkali-Albu- minate as a Nutrient Medium, 825. Schulze, A., The new Apochromatice Mi- cro-objectives and Compensating Oculars of Dr. Carl Zeiss, 1025. —,, F. E., ‘Challenger’ Hexactinellida, 597, 747. lens, INDEX. Schulze, H., Vegetative reproduction of a Moss, 91. , O., Preparing Ova of Amphibia, 146. Schumann, K., Comparative Morphology of the Flower, 451. —, Morphology of the Flowers of Canna, 611. New Myrmecophilous Plants, 998. Schiitt, F., Cheetoceros, 627. 5 , Formation of Auxospores in Diatoms, 68. —, Phycoerythrin, 622. ——, Phycophein, 265. , Spore-formation in Peridines, 437. Schwabe’s Sliding Microtome, 668. Sehwarz, C. G, So-called Mucous Gland of Male Cypride, 731. Schwerdoff, —., Method of investigation for the earlier stages of the development of Mammalian ova, 511. Schwinck, —., Gastrula of Amphibians, 549. Sclater, W. L., Development of a South American Peripatus, 410. Scorpions, Eyes in, 411. Scotch Fir, “ Rouge ” of, 781. Scott, D. H., Floating-roots of Lesbania aculeata, 607. , Nucleus in Oscillaria and Toly- pothrix, 275. ,G. P., Exhibition of a Microscope, 485. , W. B., Development of Petromyzon, 388. Screen for the Abbe Camera Lucida, 809. Scyphistomata of Acraspedote Medusa, 965. Seaman, W. H., American and Foreign Microscopes, 797. , Lamp and Vertical Illuminator, 650. ——, Myrtle-wax Imbedding Process, 151. , Shellac Cement, 520. Sca-water, Phosphorescent Bacteria from, 101. Scereting Canals of Umbellifere and Araliacez contained in the Phloem, 605. Cells of Intestinal Epithelium, 556. Secretion of Pure Aqueous Formic Acid by Lepidopterous Larve for the Pur- poses of Defence, 405. , Organs of, 77. Secretions, Development of some, and their Receptacles, 604. Secretory Canals and Reservoirs, 604. of Araucaria, 986. Section-cutting. See Contents, xxxviii. Sections, Fixing, 159, 853. » Nerve, Half-clearing preparing, 680. Sedgwick, A., Development of the Cape Species of Peripatus, 409. Sie Monograph of the Genus Peripatus, 40. Seed of Myristica surinamensis, Aleurone- grains in, 72, method of 1113 Seeds and Fruits, Motion of rotating Winged, 612. ———— of Rhamnus, 78. —. of Pharbitis triloba, 764. with Two Integuments, 992. Segmental Organs and Efferent Ducts of genital glands, homology of, in Oligo- cheeta, 419. Segmentation and Fertilization in Ascaris megalocephala, 423. — in Axolotl, 392. — of Telenstean Ova, 191. Primary of the Germ-stripe of Insecis, 941. Seifert, O., Ankylostomum duodenale, 739. , On the Auer incandescent gas- burner, 495. Selaginella lepidophylla, 620. , Stomata and Ligules of, 460. Selection and Elimination, 927. Selenka, E., Models in Metal of Micro- scopical Preparations, 165. Self-fertilization and Cleistogamy in Or- chids, 994. - —— and Heterostylism, 453. ——- pollination of Spergularia salina, - 994. Selvatico, S., Aorta of Bombyx mori, 212. Semon, R., Mediterranean Synaptida, 233. Senecioidee and Ambrosiacez, Compara- tive Anatomy of, 449. Sense of Direction in Formica rufa, 212. Senses, Curiosities of, 500. of Ants, 571. Sensibility to Heat, Apparatus for deter- mining, 114. Sensory Organ, Dermal, of Insects, 569. Organs and Nerve-centres of Articu- lata, 403. , Antennary, of Insects, 723. of Insects, Dermal, 210. Sepia officinalis and Patella vulgata, Sali- vary Glands of, 932 Septal Glands of Narcissus, formation of Sugars in, 759. Serapias, Pollination of, 256. Serial Sections, The Mounting of, 682. Serpula, Structure of, 42. Sertoli, E., and V. v. Ebner, Spermato- genesis of Mammals, 707. Serum, Artificial, for Computation of Blood-corpuseles, 162. Sesbania aculeafai, Floating-roots of, 607. Sex, Production of, and phenomena of Crossing, 256. Sex-cells and Development of Millepora, 236. Sexual Dimorphism in Amphipoda, 949. —— Organs in Atcidium, 782. , Pollination and Distribution of, ? —— 612. — Reproduction, Significance of, 193. Sexuality of Ustilaginesx, 269. 1114 Seymour, A. B., Character of the Injuries | produced by Parasitic Fungi upon their Host-plants, 470. Seynes, J. de, Ceriomyces and Fibrillaria, 630. —, Fungus Parasitic on the Pine-apple, 780. — , Polypores, 1007. , Rhizomorpha subcorticalis of Armil- laria mellea, 97. Sharp, B., Piylogeny of Lamellibranchs, 965. Sheldon, L., Anatomy of Peripatus capensis and P. nove Zealandia, 577. ——, Development of Peripatus Nove Zealandia, 33. Shellac Cement, 520. Shell-growth in Cephalopoda, 397, 559. Shells, Growth of Cephalopod, 200. Sherborn, C. D., H. W. Burrows, and G. Bailey, The Foraminifera of the Red Chalk, 383. — Bibliography of the Foraminifera, 797 Shrew, Inversion of the Germinal Layers in, 706. Sidebotham, H., Fate of the Blastopore in Rana temporaria, 925. Sieve-tules in the Laminaries, 265. Sigillaria and Lepidodendron, Leaves of, 263. Silene inflata, Pollination of, 454. Siliceous Sponges, Natural History of, 745. Silicispongi#, Gemmules of, 596. Silicoblasts, 596. Silk-worm, New Parasite of, 471. Ova, Respiration of, 726. Silver, Quantitative Determination of, by means of the Microscope, 494. —, separation of, by active Albumin, 244. Silver-nitrate, Method for staining Nervous Tissue, Improvements in, 844. Simmons, W. J., Magnification in Photo- micrographs, 652. Simonelli, V., Structure of Serpula, 42. Siphonew, Staining Membranes in Living, 516 Siphonophora, Morphology of, 59. ——,, System of, 741. Skeleton of Calcareous Sponges, 63. Skin, Staining the Elastic Fibres of, 155. Slide, Capillary, and accessories for the examination of Ova, 801. ——,, Fixing Sections to, 159, 853. —— for obsrving Svap-bubble Films, 647. —, Hardy’s Growing, 489. ——,, Holman’s Current, 86. ——, Modification of Pagan’s “ Growing, 1028. ——,, Preparing, to show Brownian Move- ment, 833. Slides, Life, 804, 806. INDEX. Sliding Microtome, Schwabe’s, 668. Sloth, Alga parasitic on, 624. Sluiter, C. P., Remarkable Case of Mutualism, 557. Smart, C., Gelatin Culture Test for Micro- organisms of Water, 855. Smiley, C. W., Rinnbock’s Slide of arranged Diatoms, 1057. Smith, E. A., Abnormal Growth in Haliotis, 561. » G., Nelson’s Photomicrographie Focusing Screen, 119. —, J. A., New Chromogenic Bacillus— Bacillus coeruleus, 472. —, J., Substance containing Sulphur in Cruciferous Plants, 997. —, L. H., Memoir of D. S. Kellicott, Pres. Amer. Soc. Micr., 305. —, T., The Microscope in the Study of Bacteriology, 324. —,, T. F., Arachneidiscus as a new Test for High-power Objectives, 815. —, Finer Structure of Butterfly Scales, 405. ——., New Appearances in Podura Scale, 499 —, On True versus False Images in Microseopy, 819. ——,, Some points in Diatom-structure, 94. , Structure of Pleurosigma formosum, 1063. — , Villi on the Scales of Butterflies and Moths, 498. Snails, Effects of Lesion of Supra-cesop].a- geal Ganglia in, 717. Svap-bubble Films, Slide for observing, 647. Society Screw, 486. Soil and Water, New and Typical Micro- organisms from, 789. Solanacesx, Fruit of, 611. Solur Spectrum, Influence of certain Rays of, on Root-absorption and ou the Growth of Plants, 769. Solereder, —., Systematic Value of the Perforation in tle Walls of Vessels, 447. Sollas, W. J., Sponges, 62. Solms-Laubach’s (H. v.) Introduction to Fossil Botany, 620. Somomya, Brain of, 944. — erythrocephala, Organization of Brain of, 407. Sonntag, P., Duration of the Apical Growth of the Leaf, 455. Sorauer, P., Root-tubers and Bacteria, 82. Soulier, A., Formation of Tube of Annelids, 418, Souza, A. de, On pyridin in histology, 519, 1054. Soyka, J., Bacteriological investigation methods, with special reference to quantitative, 1040. Sparganium and Typha, Flowers and Fruit of, 78. | Speetia of Pleurosigma angulatum, 303. ; | | : INDEX. Spergularia salina, 99+. * Spermatia ” of the Ascomycetes, 1006. Spermatogenesis, 16, 27. in Aleyonella, 566. — in Aplysia, 397. —— in Chetognatha, 227. in Guinea-pig, 707. — of Arthropods, 9+40. —— of Gastropods, 932. — of Mammals, 547, 707. of Marsupials, 386. —— of Reptiles, 924. —— of Salamander, 189. of Vertebrates, 923. Spermatozoa and Ova, Formation of, in Spongilla fluviatilis, 966. — from Triton, 1065. —— in Murex, Form and Development of, 200. of Hledone moschata, 560. of Frog, Irritability of, 707. Spheerocrystals, 603. Spheeroplea, 267. Spheerozoa, Preparing, 665. Sphagna, New, 91. Sphagnacez, German, 621. Physiological and Comparative Anatomy of, 774. Sphaguum and Andrexa, Sporogonium of, 91, 1000. » Horms of, 775. Spherometer Microscope, Bamberg’s, 280. Sphyranura, Methods of studying, 149. osleri, 47. Spicules, Remarkable, from the Oamaru Deposit, 967. Spider, New Orb-weaving, 412. Spillmann, —., and Haushalter, —., Dis- semination of Bacillus by Flies, 635. Spinal Cord, Effect of Hardening Agents on the Ganglion-cells of, 831. —— -——,, Preparation and Staining of, 660. Ganglion-cells, 556. Spines, Anatomy of, 763. of certain Plants, 989. Spinther, Annelid Genus, 42. Spirillum concentricum, a new species from decomposing blood, 278. Spirochzete of Relapsing Fever, Staining, 1054. Spirogyra, Conjugation of, 625. Spleen, Injection Mass for the Vessels of, 848. Sponges. Sce Porifera, Contents, xviii. Spongilla, Development of Generative Products in, 64. fluviatilis, Formation of Ova and Spermatazoa in, 966. ——, Investigation of Generative Products of, 1045. Spongill, Survival of, after Development of Swarm-larve, 596. Spongocladia, 1002. Self-pollination of, 1115 Sporangia and Spores in the Saproleguiex, Formation of, 271. Sporangium of Ferns, Dehiscence of, 90. of Polypodiacez, Development of, 3. Spore-formation in Bacteria, 787. in Peridines, 437. - —— in the Bacilli of Xeresis con- junctive, Streptococci, and Cholera some, 1016. in the Bacillus of Glanders, 473. Spores and Sporangia in the Saprolegnies, Formation of, 271. ——, Germination of, in Ustilago, 270. of Equisetum, Dissemination of, 1000. of the Ferments, 633. , Staining, 845. Sporogonium of Andreza and Sphagnum, Development of, 91, 1009. -—— of Mosses, Anatomy and Development of, 460. Sporophore of Mosses, Transpiration of, 91. Spring-sap in the Birch and Hornbeam, 445. Stage, Babes’ Hot, 800. 111, 171. ——, Fine-adjustment by Tilting, 478. —, Malassez’s Hot, 483. —, Nelson’s Mechanical, 477. , new form of mechanical, 334. —, Schafer’s Hot-water Circulation, 649. Staining. See Contents, xxxviii. Stamati, G., Castration of the Cray-fish, 947. ——,, Digestion in Cray-fishes, 947. Stamens of Echiuocactus, Lrritability of, 261. Standards of Length and their practical application, 503. Stapl O., Explosive Fruits of Alstroemeria, Starhylea pinnata, Pitcher-like Leaflets of, 253. Star-fish, Emigration of Amoceboid Cor- puscles in, 431. — -fishes, Budding in, 233. -——, Renal Organs of, 958. Starch, Action of Formose on Cells — tute of, 85. —— and Chlorophyll-grains, 70. —, Formation of, from various sub- stances, 771. : of, in the Chlorophyll-grains, 71, 983. — Injection-mass, 1056. , Occurrence of, in the Onion, 983. Starch-grains, Structure of, 443. Stedman, J. M., Preparing Tape-worms for the Museum and the Microscope, 148, Stegemann’s (A.) Camera, 116. Photomicrographic 1116 Stein’s (S. T.) “Large Photomicroscope,” 295. Steinach’s (.) Filter-capsule, 850. Steiner, —., Physiology of Nervous System, 559. Steinhaus, J., Goblet-cells of Intestine of Salamander, 712. Stems, Aerial, 451. , Torsion of, 989. , Underground, Morphology of, 450. Stenglein, M., Coarse and Fine Focusing Arrangements, 1032. —, Illumination of Objects in Photo- micrography, 1033. —, Instantaneous Photomicrography, 811. —., and O. Israel’s Photomicrographie Microscope, 115. Sterculiaceew, &c., Comparative Anatomy of, 606. Sterile Fronds, Conversion of Fertile into, 261. Sterility of Fungi, 467. Sterilization of Potato, Apples, Water for cultivation purposes, 310. Sterilizing water, Improvement in Plaut’s Flasks for, 1040. Sternberg, G. M., Photomicrography in Medicine, 119. Stewart, C., Exhibition of remarkable form of Lamellibranch Shell ( Zhecalia), 170. Stewart’s Organ and Longitudinal Muscles in Echinothurids, 429. Stichococeus and Ulothrix, 777. bacillaris, 632. Stipules, 252. : Physiological Anatomy of, 609. Stizenberger, —., and Hegetschweiler, —., Lichens on unusual substrata, 96. Stohr, P., Handbook of Histology and Human Microscopical Anatomy, inelud- ing Microscopical Technique, 686. Stokes, A. C., Fresh-water Infusoria of the United States, 598. —, Life Slides, 806. ——.,, New Fresh-water Infusoria, 65. —, Notices of New Infusoria Flagellata from American Fresh Waters, 698. —, Two new Aquatic Worms from North America, 582. Stomach, Glandular Cells of, 393. of Ruminants, Protozca found in, 975. , So-called Digestive, of some Ants, 570. Stomata and Ligules of Selaginella, 460. — , Development of, 247. ——,, Influence of the Turgidity of the Epidermal Cells on, 605, 763. Stone, W. E., Cultivation of Saccharo- mycetes, 141. Stowell, C. H., Thin Sections, 842. Strasburger, E., Division of the Nucleus, Cell-division, and Impregnation, 600, 978. and INDEX. Strasburger, E., Microscopic Botany. A Manual of the Microscope in Vegetable Histology, 166. Strasser, H., Methods of Plastic Recon- struction, 853. , New Section-stretcher, with arrange- ments for removing the Section, 841. —, and W. His, On the methods of Plastie Reconstruction and their import- ance for Anatomy and Embryology, 686. Straus, —., and Wurtz, —. Improved method for the Bacteriological Examina- tion of Air, 854. Strecker’s Gas Chamber, 288. Streptococci, &c., Spore-formation in, 1016. Streng, A., On some microchemical re- actions, 856. Stricker, 8., Electric Microscope, 1025. Stricker’s Gas Chamber, 288. Stroemfelt, H. F. G., Attachment-organ of Algz, 461. , New Genera of Pheozoospores, 465. Strubeil, A., Structure and Development of Heterodera Schachtii, 737. Struthiopteris germanica, Willd., Develop- ment of, 618. ‘Student’s Handbook to the Microscope,’ 137. Studer, T., Classification of Aleyonaria, 237. Studies in Vegetable Biology, 996. Sturt, G., and E. Grove, Fossil Marine Diatoms from New Zealand, 94. Styrax Balsam, Preparing, 1057. Stysanus and Hormodendron, 1010. Sub-aquatie Respiration, 569. -epidermal Network of the Root of Geraniacex, 986. —— -stage, Necessity for a, 1024. Suberites, Structure of, 239. Suberous Cells, Wall of, 985. Sublimate as a Hardening Medium for the Brain, 831. Subterranean Shoots of Oxalis, 988. Sucker on Fin of Pterotrachea, 205. Suckers in Phanerogamous Parasites, Origin of, 80. Sugar and Alkaloid in Cyclamen, 759. of Milk, Occurrence of the Elements of, in Plants, 604. Sugars in the Septal Glands of Narcissus, Formation of, 759. Sulphur in Cruciferous Plants, Substance containing, 997. Super-endodermal Network in the Root of the Caprifoliaces, 73. of the Root of Legumi- noseze and Ericacee, 986. Sutroa rostrata, New Annelid, 582. Swuen, A., Development of Torpedo ocel- lata, 389, Swarm-larve, Survival of Spongille after Development of, 596. Sweden,” ‘** New Glass just made in, 499. Swift, J., The Jena Optical Glass, 486. — Regulator, 649. INDEX. Sycon, Sections of, 690. Sydow’s (P.) Lichens of Germany, 621. Symbiosis of Bacteria with Glceocapsa polydermatica, 654. , Role of, in Luminous Animals 929. , Root-, in the Ericacee, 86. Symbiotic Fungus in Molgulide, 782. Symphoricarpus, Floral Nectary of, 255. Synaptide, Mediterranean, 233. Synthesis of Albuminoids, 455. Syringes, Robin’s, Lacaze-Duthiers’, and Farabceut’s Injecting, 678. Marine AK “1., F. S.,” “Microscopical Advances,” 137. Tenia cucumerina in Man, 955. -— clliptica and Ascaris lumbricoides, Life-history of, 426. —— nana, 46, 229. saginata, 955. , Interesting Specimen of, 427. Taguchi, K., Injection with Indian Ink, 848. Tamariscines, Salt-excreting Glands of, Tanaide and the Apseudes. 416. Tanakadate, A., Note on the Constants of a Lens, 819. Tange, F., Cell-division, 18. Tannin and its connection with Meta- stasis, 984. , Function of, 444. in Acanthus spinosus, 72. in the Crassulacee, 603. Tanzer, P., On Unna’s staining method for the elastic fibres of the skin, 850. Tape-worm, Methods of preparing, 511. -worms for the Museum and the Microscope, Preparing, 148. , Mounting, 314. Taphrina, 274, 470. Tarantula, American, Age and Habits of, 215. Tarchanoff, J., and Kolessnikoff, —., Alkaline Egg-albumen as a Medium for Bacteria Cultivation, 503. Tassi, F., Nectar of Rhododendron, 603. Tate, A. W., Use of the Microscope for practical purposes, 324. Tavel, F. v., Mechanical Protection of Bulbs, 607. Taylor, T., Crystalline formations of Lard and other Fats, 166, 324. , Wax-cells, 519. Teasing-needle, James’s, 520. Teeth and Bone, Method for making Pre- parations of, and retaining their soft parts, 1042. Tegumentary Filaments of Flagellata, Method of Preparing, 832 Teleostean Ova, Segmentation of, 191. 1888. PEW, Teleosteans, Eggs and Larve of, 191, 920. Teleostei, Germinal Layers in, 189. , Origin of Blood in, 192. Telescope and Microscope, 820. Telphusa, Parasite of, 40. Temnocephala, 50. Tempere’s (J.) Preparations of Diatoms, 667. Teredo navalis, Parasites of, 199. Testacella, 562. Test, Arachnoidiscus as a new, for High- power Objectives, 815. Test-plates, Fasoldt’s, 298, 817. -tube Cultivations, Preparing Sections from, 671, 833. -tubes, Fire-proof Cotton-wool Plug for, 1040. Testicle, Mammalian, Preparing and Stain- ing, 844. , Preparing, Fission, 146. Tests for Callus, Microchemical, 323. for Modern Objectives, 816. Tetraedron and 'Trochiscia, 1013. Thallophytes in Medicinal Solutions, 459. Thallus of certain Algze, Development of, 265. of Marchantiez, Hygroscopic Move- ments of, 1001. Thamnium alopecurum, Reproduction of, 113, Thanhoffer, L. v., Two new Methods for preparing Nerve-cells, 658. Thate’s (P.) New Microtome, 839. Thaxter, R., Entomophthoreze of the United States, 1010. Thecalia, Shell of, 170. Thermic Experiments orientalis, 31. Thickness, Proper, of Microscopical Sec- tions, 671. Thistle-flower, Trigger-hairs of, 452. Thoma Microtome, Accessory for rapid Cutting with, 840. eae J. C., New Parasitic Copepod, Whe Thomson, J. A., Action of the Environ- ment, 927. , Structure of Suberites, 239. Thiimen, F, v., Fungi of Fruit-trees, 780. , New Vine-disease, 471. Thury’s Five-tube Microscope, 792. Thylle, 988. Tichomiroff, A., Parthenogenesis in Bom- byx mori, 725. ? Tieghem, P. v., Arrangement of Secondary Roots and Buds on Roots, 80. : ——, Exoderm of the Restiacez, 987. —, Geminate Root-hairs, 251. ——, New Genera of Ascomycetes, Oleina, and Podocapsa, 271. , Structure of the root and arrange- ment of the rootlets in Centrolepides, Eriocauler, Junece, Mayaces, and Xyridex, 251. AR for observing Nuclear on Periplaneta 1118 Tieghem, P. v., Super-endodermal Net- work of the Root of Leguminoseze and Exvicace, 986. ——, ——— «+ —— Jn the S0ob/Or ane Caprifoliacee, 73. ——, Supporting Network in the Cortex of the Root, 986. , Tubereles on the Roots of Legu- minosx, 608. and H. Donliot, Plants which form their Rootlets without a Pocket, 987. and Monal, —., Sub-epidermal Net- work of the Root of Geraniaces, 986. Tiemann, F., 686. Tiliacew, &e., Comparative Anatomy of, 06 Tindall, S. J., Scales on Red Currants, 856. Tintinnodesw, Monograph of, 436. Tissue of Fossil Plants, Anomalous Cells in the Interior of, 605. Tissues and Cells, 710. —— and Ova, Bacteria-like Bodies in, 31. —--—, Imbedding Plant-, 511. —, Methods of Fixing and Preserving Animal, 510. of Living Animals, Differential Stain- ing of, 842. Tolu Balsam for Microscopical Purposes, Purification of, 681. Tolypothrix and Oscillaria, Nucleus in, 275. Tomaschek, A., Bacillus muralis, 276, 786. , New Chytridium, 1011. —., Symbiosis of Bacteria with Glceo- capsa polydermatica, 634. Tombs, Fauna of, 32. Toni, J. B. de, Bulbotrichia, 1003. ——,, Classification of Chlorophycex, 775. —, Diatoms from a Trygon, 777. —, Hansgirgia, a new genus of aerial Algse, 1003. , Remarkable Flos-aque, 633. Topsent, E., Gemmules ot Silicispongie, 596. , So-called Peripheral Prolongations of Clionz, 239. Torpedo ocellata, Development of, 389. Torsion of Stems, 989. Tortoise, Alga epiphytic on. 268. Transpiration as a Function of Living Protoplasm, 456. , Influence of Atmospheric Movement on, 259. , Literature of, 259. of the Sporosphore of Mosses, 91. Trapella, Oliv., a new Genus of Pedalince, 992. Trautwein, J., Anatomy of Annual Branches and Inflorescences, 451. Treasurer’s Account for 1887, 331 Trees, Acarida on, 34. , Effects produced by the Annular Decortication of, 447. Trelease, W., Subterranean Oxalis, 988, Shoots of | INDEX. Trematoda, General Sketch of, 953. Trematode in white of newly-laid Hen's Evg, 51. Tremella fimetaria, 270. Trentepolhlia, 777, Treub, M., Life-history of Lycopodium, 262. . Myrmecophilous Plants, 998. Trichinz or other Animal Parasites in Meat, Determination of the Number of, 164. Trichoeladium, Development and Fruceti- fication of, 630. Trichomanes, Formation of Gemme in, 262. , Oophyte of, 617. . Trichosphaeria paradoxa and Herpotrichia nigra, 470. Triclades, Some European, 229. Tridacna, So-called Eyes of, &e., 564. Triebel, R., Oil-passages in the Roots of Composite, 447, 760. Trigger-hairs of the Thistle-flower, 452. Tri-ocular, Quadri-ocular, &c., Prisms, 796. Triple-staining, Baumgarten’s Method of, 676. ° Triton, Spermatozoa from, 1065. Trochiscia and Tetraedron, 1013. Troup, F., The Diagnosis of early Phthisis by the Microscope, 856. Truan, A., and O. Witt, Photomicrographs of Diatoms, 295. Truffle, Parasitism of, 780. Trygon, Diatoms from a, 777. Trzebinski, 8., Effect of Hardening Agents on the Ganglion-cells of the Spinal Cord, 831. Tschirch, A., Aleurone-grains in the Seed of Myristica surinamensis, 72. , Contents of the Cells of the Aril of the Nutmeg, 760. Development of some Secretions and their Receptacles, 604. ——, Organs of Secretion, 77. ——, Quantitative estimation of Chloro- phyll, 71. Tube of Annelids, Formation of, 418. Tubercle and Lepra Bacilli, Staining, 157, 846. — Bacillus Stain, Specificness of, 157. —— ——,, Simple and Rapid Staining of, 1053. Tubercles on the Roots of Leguminose, 608. Tubercular Swellings on the Roots of Vicia Faba, 251. Tubercularia, New, 779. Tubes for Microspectroscopie Analysis, 807. Tubeuf, C. v.. Formation of Roots in Loranthaces, 450. , New Disease of the Douglas-pine, 471. Tubular Cells of the Fumariaceex, 73. Tuckerman, F., Tenia saginata, 427, 955. INDEX. Tunicata. See Contents, xi. Turbellarian, Second Species of, Living on Nebaliz, 428. Tylenchus devastatrix, 585. ——, Natural History of, 229. Typha and Sparganium, Flowers and Fruit ot, 78. Typhoid Bacillus, Supposed Spores of, 1016. “Typhus” Bacillus, Cultivation of, coloured nutrient media, 1039. in U. Uhlitzsch, P. G., Growth of the Leaf-stalk, 258. Ulothrix, 465. and Stichococcus, 777. crenulata, 268. , Structure of, 1003. Ulotrichacez, Aerophytic 1002. Species of, Umbellifere and Araliacese, Secreting | Canals of, contained in the Phloem, 605. ——, Development of the Fruit of, 79. Underground Stems, Morphology of, 450. Underhill, H. M. J.,Section-cutting applied to Insects, 152. Ungar, —, On staining Spermotozoa, 850. United States, Entomophthoreze of, 1010. ——, Fresh-water Infusoria of, 498. —— —,, Wolle’s Fresh-water Alge of, 94. Unna, P. G., The cultivation of Skin fungi, 831. Upson, H. S., Carmine staining for nerve- tissue, 850. Ureeolariz, Structure of, 753. Urech, F., Decrease of Weight in Winter Pupze of Pontia brassice, 572. ——, Diminution in Weight of Chrysalis, aie Uredinex, 97. and their Hosts, 1007. Urine, Stain for the Morphological Ele- ments in, 845. Urocheta, Mucous Gland of, 422. Uronema, a new genus of Chlorozoosporee, 626. Uruguaya, New Species of, 748. Uskow, N., Development of Blood-vascular System of the Chick, 187. Ustilagines, Sexuality of, 269. Ustilago, Germination of the Spores in, 270. V. Vacuole, Nature of Contractile, 749. Vacuoles, Increase of Normal, by Division, 981. Vaizey, J. R., Absorption of Water and its Relation to the Constitution of the Cell- wall in Mosses, 263. , Alternation of Generations in Green Plants, 459. 1119 Vaizey, J. R., Anatomy and Develo, ment of the Sporogonium of Mosses, 460. Development of the Root of Equi- setum, 773. — Transpiration of the Sporophore of Mosses, 91 Vallentin, R., and J. T. Cunningham, Photospheria of Nyctiphanes norvegica, 415. Valvata piscinalis, Anatomy of, 718. Van Gieson, J., A résumé of recent Technical Methods for the Nervous System, 511. Varalda, L., and E. Perroncito, Composi- tion of “ Muffe,” 633. Vascular System and Ceelom of Mollusca and Arthropoda, 395. Apparatus and Nervous System of Ophiurids, 57. —— Bundles in the Rhizome of Mono- cotyledons, 74. System of Hirudinea, 219. Vassale, G., and G. Bizzozero, Staining Mitoses, 674. Vayssiere, A., Systematic Position of Hero, 718. Vevetable Biology, Studies in, 996. Vegetative reproduction of a Moss, 91. Veitch, H. J., Fertilization of Cattleya labiata, 994, Vejdovsky, F., Larval and Definite Excre- tory Systems in Lumbricide, 220. , Studies on Gordiide, 583. Venetian Chlorophycez, 627. Vereker, J. G. P., Numerical Aperture, 819. ——, On the Choice of a Microscope, 823. , Presidential Address to the Postal Microscopical Society, 3095. Vermes. See Contents, xiv. | Vermetus, Development of, 201. Vermilia cespitosa, Embryvlogy of, 578. Vernation of Leaves, 252. Verson, E., Parthenogenesis in Bombyx mori, 571. Verworn, M., Biological Studies on Pro- tista, 755. , Fresh-water Bryozoa, 27. ——, Method of investigating Cristatella, 147, Vescovi, P. de, Method of Representing and Calculating the Magnification of Microscopic Objects in the projected images, 135. Vesque, J., Epidermal Reservoirs for Water 448 Vessel for the Culture of Low Organisms, 6957. Vessels, Systematic Value of the Perfora- tion in the Walls of 447. Viallanes, H., Nerve-centres and Sensory Organs of Articulata, 403. | Vibrio from Nasal Mucus, 99. ' Vibrios, 1017. 1120 INDEX. Vibrios, Two kinds of, found in deeompo- | Wagner, W., So-called Auditory Hairs, 411. sing Hay Infusion, 100. Vicia Faba, Tubercular Swellings on the Roots of, 251. Victoria, Polyzoa of, 403. — regia, Prickle-pores of, 81. Vigelius, W. J., Ontogeny of Marine Bryozoa, 936. Viguier, C., New Type of Anthozoa, 745. Villion the Seales of Butterflies and Motlis, 498. Villot, A., Development and Specific De- termination of Gordii, 228. Vinassa, E., Pharmacognostic Microtome and ‘Technique, 513. Vine, Mal nero of, 762. Vine-disease, New, 471. Vines, S. H., Movement of Leaf of Mimosa pudica, 457. , Systematic Position of Isoetes, 773. Virchow, H., Physics of the Yolk, 923. Vision in Arachnids, 214. of Caterpillars and Adult Insects, 404. ——, Powers of, 32. Viviparous Plants and Apogamy, 768. Vochting, H., Influence of Radiant Heat on the Development of the Flower, 995. Voeltzkow, A., Aspidogaster conchicola, 954. , Development in Egg of Musca vomi- toria, 572. Vogt, C., Arachnactis and Cerianthus, 743. Voinoff, R. G., On the different Cements for closing microscopical sections, 853. Volkens, G., Desert Flora, 617. , Salt-excreting glands of Tamaris- cine, 249, Volvocinex, &c., Chemotactic Movements of, 770. Vorce, C. M., Making Lantern Slides, 305. , Tue Meeting of the American Society of Microscopists, 141. Vorticcllidae, Conjuyzation of, 752. Vries, H. de, Isotonie Coefficient of Glycerin, 617. , New Application of tle Plasmolytie Method, 1059. , Preservation of Plants in Spirit and the Prevention of Browning, 852. Vuillemin, P., Ascospora LBeijerinckii, 1007. —, Biological Studies of Fungi, 628. , Disease affecting Cherry and Plum- trees, 274. . attacking Amygdalex, 781]. ——., Epidermal Glands, 81. and Bartet, —., “Rouge” of the Scotch Fir, 781. Wi bis E., Regeneration of Lost Parts, 215. ——,, Tannin in the Crassulacez, 603. —. V., Blood of Spiders, 946. Wahrlich, W., New Pythium, 98. Wainio, I... Cladonia, 621. Wakker, J. H., Crystalloids in Marine Alga, 463. ——,, Crystals of Calcium oxalate, 445. ——,, Elaioplast, 443. ——,, Formation of Aleurone-grains, 443. ——., Rejuvenescence of Caulerpa, 464. Waldeyer, W., Karyokinesis and Heredity, 554. , —— in its Relation to Fertilization, 928. Waldner, M., Development of the Sporo- gonium of Andrea and Sphagnum, 91, 1000. Walker, H. D., Gape Worm of Fowls, 740. Wall of Suberous Cells, 985. Walls of Vessels, Systematic Value of the Perforation in, 447. Walmsley, W. H., Photomicrography and the making of Lantern Slides, 652. Walsingham, Lord, Gape Worm of Fowls, 740. Ward, H. M., Structure and Life-history of Puecinia Graminis, 1007. ——, Tubercular Swellings on the Roots of Vicia Faba, 251. —, and J. Dunlop, Fruits and Seeds of Rhamunus, 78. Ward, R. H., Fasoldt’s Test Plates, 300. , Indexing Microscopical Slides, 320. ——, Instantaneous Mounting in Farrant’s Gum and Glycerin Medium, 520. Warm Chamber, Nuttall’s, 1027. Wasps, Sand, 30. Wasserzug, E., Fusoma, 1009. , Principal processes of staining Bacteria, 159. ——.,, Spores of the Ferments, 633. Watase, 8., Germinal Layers in Cephalo- pods, 931. , Homology of Germinal Layers of Cephalopods, 396. “ Watchmaker Glass,” Bausch and Lomb Optical Co.’s, 795. Water, Absorption of, and its Relation to the Constitution of the Cell-wall iv Mosses, 263. ; , by Gastropoda, 563. and Soil, New and Typical Micro- organisms from, 789. , Epidermal Reservoirs for, 448. , Gelatin Culture Test for Micro- organisms of, 855. , Ingestion of, in Lamellibranchs, Gastropods, and Pteropods, 199. ——, Potato, and Apples for cultivation purposes, Sterilization of, 310. — use for Brewing, Analysis of, as regards Micro-organisms, 680. | Water-bath and Oven, Reeves’s, 163. - —, Garbini’s Closed, 1058. —— -plants, Anatomy of, 77. | Waterhouse, G. R., Obituary Notice, 141. INDEX. Waierman, §8., How to produce Hemo- globin or Hematocrystallin, 856. Watson and Son’s Anglo-Continental or sStudent’s Microscope, 797. Watt, G., Indian Fibres, 495. Wax Cells, 519. Webb, —., Death of, 654. Weber, van Bosse, —., Algz parasitic on the Sloth, 624. Wehmer, C., Action of Formose on Cells destitute of Starch, 85. Weibel, E., Two kinds of Vibrios found in decomposing Hay Infusion, 100. , Vibrio from Nasal Mucus, 99. ——,, Vibrios, 1017. Weigert, C.. New Method for Staining Fibrin and Micro-organisms, 675. Weigert’s Haematoxylin-copper Stain for Nerve-fibre with the use of the freezing Microtome, Combining, 1051. Heematoxylin Method as applied to other than Nervous Tissues, 674. Weight, Decrease of, in Winter Pup of Pontia brassice, 572. of Chrysalis, Diminution in, 31. Weil, L. A., Method for making Prepara- tions of Bone and Teeth and retaining their soft parts, 1042, Weismann, A., Degeneration, 194. , Heredity, 926. , and C. Ischikawa, Formation of Polar Globules in Animal Ova, 705. , Partial Impregnation, 709. ., Henocque’s Heematoscope, Weiss, 1029. ——, On the Fleisch! Hemometer, 808. —, F. H., Some Oigopsid Cuttle-fishes, Ei. Weldon, W. F. R., Haplodiscus piger, 955. Wellington District, New Zealand, Fresh- water Infusoria of, 972. Weltner, M., Survival of Spongille after Development of Swarm-larve, 596. ——, W., New Cirriped, 417.- Wende, E., The Microscope in the Dia- gnosis of Skin Diseases, 856. Wendt, E. C., Roux’s Colour-test for the detection of Gonococcus, 517. Wenhain, F. H., Retirement of, 305. D Went, F. A. T. C., Ewbryo-sac of Rosacez, | 610. , Increase of normal Vacuoles by Division, 981. , Nuclear and Cell Division, 243. Wesener, F., Staining Lepra and Tubercle Bacilli, 157. Wettstein, R. v.. Abnormal Fructification of Agaricus procerus, 269. , Function of Cystids, 96. Wheat, Development of, 769. - Whelpley, H. M., Microscopical Examina- tion of Drugs, 1060. 806. , Microscopy for Amateur Workers, | 1121 Whelpley, H. M., Preparing Slides to show Brownian Movement, 833. White, S. S., Dentists Examining Glass, 795. — (T. C.), Elementary Microscopical Manipulation, 165. , W., Colour-relation between Pup and Surroundings, 727. Whitman, C. O., Germ-layers of Clepsine, 37. ——, Kinetic Phenomena of the Egg during Maturation and Fecundation, 546. Wiedersheim, R., Ancestry of Man, 193. Wieler, A., Conduction of Sap through the Secondary Wood, 768. —, Plasmolysis in Flowering Plants, 759. Wiener, O., Measuring Thin Films, 501. Wierzejski, A., Fresh-water Sponges, 748. , Psorospermium Haeckelii, 598. Wiesner, J., Albumen in the Cell-wall, 602, 982. ——, Influence of Atmospheric Movement on Transpiration of, 259. —, The microscopical investigation of paper, with special reference to the oldest Oriental and European papers, 324, 521. Wigand, A., Colours of Leaves and Fruits, 254. ——,, Crystal-plastids, 243. Wildeman, E. de, Bulbotrichia, 1003. ——. Microspora, 94. ——,, Trentepohlia, 777. ——,, Ulothrix and Stichococcus, 777. —, crenulata, 268. ; Wilfarth, H., Cultivation-bottle, 143. Wilkinson, W. H., Colour-reaction: its use to the Microscopist and to the Biologist, 320. Will, L., Development of Aphides, 573. Wille’s (N.) Contributions to Algology, 626. Willem, Y., Creeping Movements Gastropods], 718. Willfarth, —., and Helriegel, —., Absorp- tion of Nitrogen by Plants, 770. Williams, G. H., Bausch and Lomb Optical Co.’s Petrographical Microscope, 279. Williamson, W. C., Anomalous Cells in the Interior of the Tissue of Fossil Plants, 605. Willot, —., Heterodera Schachtii, 953. [in |; Wilson, E. B., Germ-bands of Lumbricus, 38. , Preparing Moulds, 150. —, H. V., Development of Mancinia areolata, 434. Wine from Barley, Saccharomyces ellip- soideus and its Use in the Preparation of, 785. Winged Fruits and Seeds, motion of rotating, 612. Winkler, W., Anatomy of Gamaside, 729. Winogradsky, §., Iron-bacteria, 786. 1122 Wisselingh, C. v., Wall of Suberous Cells, 985. Witt, O., and A. Truan, Photomicrographs of Diatoms, 295. Wojnoff, K., Some remarks on fixing micro- scopical sections to the slide, 853. Wolle’s (F.) Fresh-water Algae of the United States, 94. Wood, Conduction of Sap through the Secondary, 768. , Formation of Annual Rings in, 75. , Structure, represented in photomicro- graphs, Atlas of, 651. Wood, J. G., The Boy’s Modern Playmate, 305. Woodhead, G. §., Method of preparation of large sections of the Lung, 834. , Preparing large Sections of Lung, 1043. Woodworth, W. M., Apical Cell of Fucus, 621. Woody Plants, Glucose as a Reserve- material in, 984. Tissue, &c., Staining, 675. Worms, New Remarkable, 428. Wortmann, J., Movements of Irritation, 259, 615. Wothschall, E., Micro-chemical reactions of Solanin, 1060. Wray, R. S., Methods of studying typical Bird’s Feather, 314. Wright, R. R., and A. B. Macallum, Methods of studying Sphyranura, 149. , Sphyranura osleri, 47. Wurster, C., Congo-red as a Reagent for Free Acid, 1055. Wurtz, —., and Straus, —., Improved method for the Bacteriological Examina- tion of Air, 854. Pe Xeresis conjunctive, &c., Spore-formation in the Bacilli of, 1016. Xylem, Split, in Clematis, 248. Xyridez, Roots and Rootlets in, 251. x Yeast-preparations, Stained, 156. Yolk, Physics of, 923. Z. Zabriskie, J. L., Continuous Centering of | a Cover-glass, 850. Zacharias, E., Demonstrating Nuclein and Plastin, 505. Cell, 440, 979. cephala, 43, 148. ; Division of the Nucleus and of the | | Zwaardemaker, H., Accessory to the Cam- Fertilization of Ascaris megalo- | INDEX. Zacharias, E., Method of Preparing the Eggs of Ascaris megalocephala, 663. . Part taken by the Nucleus in Cell- division, 69. ——,, Psorospermium Haeckelii, 240. ——, O., Distribution by Birds, 930. , of Arachnida, 215. Zagari, G., The culture of Anaerobic micro- organisms, 831. Zannichellia palustris, Pollination in, 256. Zecli, P., Elementary treatment of lens- systems, 501. Zeiss, C., 1034. , “Compensation Eye-piece 6 with 1/1 Micron-division,” 797. Tris Diaphragm, 111. — Ila. Microscope, 637, 794. —, The New Apochromatie Micro- objectives and Compensating Oculars of, 1025. (R.) Photomicrographs, 525 Zelinka, C., Parasitic Rotifer, Discopus Synapte, 52. Zeller, E., Generative Apparatus of Diplozoon paradoxum, 427. Zentmayer, J., Obituary of, 655. Ziegler, H. E., Origin of Blood in Teleostei, 192. , The technique of the histological investigation of pathologico-anatomical preparations, 166. Ziemacki, J., 320. Zimmerman, A., Demonstrating the Mem- brane of the Bordered Pits in Conifers, 155, 315. , Morphology and Physiology of the Cell, 442. Staining Leucoplasts, Protein- granules, Bordered Pit Membranes, aud Woody Tissue, 675. — , Zeiss’ Iris Diaphragm, 111. , E., and G. Baltzar, Microtome with fixed knife and automatic movement of the object, 842, 1049 Zirconium Light for Photomicrography, 1033. Zonary Decidua in Mouse, Vestiges of, 186. Zopf, W, Chytridiacea parasitic on Diatoms, 99. —,, Cultivation of Phycomycetes, 469. — , Fibrosin, a new cell-content, 246. — , Haplococeus reticulatus, 782. , Isolating Lower Alge, 511. Zukal, H., Asci of Penicillium crustaceum, 271. Zune, A., Course of medical and pharma- ceutical microscopy, 166, 686. bridge Rocking Microtome, 669. | Zygospores of Conjugate, 1002. LONDON: PRINTED BY WILLIAM CLOWES AND SONS, LIMITED, STAMFORD STREET AND CHARING CROs. Supplementary Number, containing: Index, &c. j Gratis with 1888. Part Ga. | DECEMBER. No ev. JOURNAL ROYAL MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY: CONTAINING ITS TRANSACTIONS AND PROCEEDINGS, AND A SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO Zoo LntoGeyY AND BOTAN DW (principally Invertebrata and Cryptogamia), ; MICROSCOPY, &&c. Edited by FRANK CRISP, LL.B., B.A., One of the Secretaries of the Society and a Vice-President and Treasurer of the Linnean Society of London 3 WITH THE ASSISTANCE OF THE PUBLICATION COMMITTEE AND A. W. BENNETT, MLA., BSc, F.LS., ~- — F. JEFFREY BELL, M.A, F.Z.S., _ Lecturer on Botany at St. Thomas's Hospital, Professor of Comparative Anatomy in King’s College. JOHN MAYALL, JUN, » E.ZS., R. G. HEBB, M.A., M.D. (Canzaé.), AND z J. ARTHUR. THOMSON, W.A,, Lecturer on Zoology tn the School of Medicine, E dinburohe FELLOWS OF THE SOCIETY, WILLIAMS & NORGATE. ~~ = se LONDON AND EDINBURGH, Ea _ Owanrer — x ec - ~ x Tirux-Paces. : Contents — Byz-Laws Ring oe eo 1888. Part nhs a eae was 6a. Oa. THE ROYAL MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY. (Founded in 1839. Incorporated by Royal Charter in 1866.) The Society was established for the communication and discussion of observations and discoveries (1) tending to improvements in the con- struction and mode of application of the Microscope, or (2) relating to — Biological or other subjects of Microscopical Research. é It consists of Ordinary, Honorary, and Ex-Officio Fellows. Ordinary Fellows are elected on a Certificate of Recommendation signed by three Fellows, stating the names, residence, description, &c., of — the Candidate, of whom one of the proposers must have personal know- ledge. The Certificate is read at a Monthly Meeting, and the Candidate | | balloted for at the succeeding Meeting. The Annual Subscription is 2/. 2s., payable in advance on election, and subsequently on 1st January annually, with an entrance Fee of 2/, 2s, Future payments of the former may be compounded for at any time for 311. 10s. Fellows elected at a meeting subsequent to that in February are only called upon for a proportionate part of the first year’s subscription, and Fellows absent from the United Kingdom for a year, or permanently re- siding abroad, are exempt from one-fourth of the subscription during absence. ~ Honorary Fellows (limited to 50), consisting of persons eminent in Microscopical or Biological Science, are elected on the Recommendation of three Fellows and the approval of the Council. . Ex-officio Fellows (limited to 100) consist of the Presidents for the time being of such Societies at home and abroad as the Council may — recommend and a Monthly Meeting approve. They are entitled to receive the Society’s Publications, and to exercise all other privileges of Fellows, except voting, but are not required to pay any entrance Fee or Annual Subscription. The Council, in whom the management of the affairs of the Society is vested, is elected annually, and is composed of the President, four Vice- ~ Presidents, Treasurer, two Secretaries, and twelve other Fellows. The Meetings are held on the Second Wednesday in each month, from October to June, in the Society’s Library at King’s College, Strand, — W.C. (commencing at 8 p.m.). Visitors are admitted by the introduction of Fellows. In each Session two additional evenings are deyoted to the exhibition of Instruments, Apparatus, and Objects of novelty or interest relating to the Microscope or the subjects of Microscopical Research. The Journal, containing the Transactions and Proceedings of the Society, with a Summary of Current Researches relating to Zoology and Botany (principally Invertebrata and Cryptogamia), Microscopy, &c., is published bi-monthly, and is forwarded post-free to all Ordinary and Ex-officio Fellows residing in countries within the Postal Union. So eas The Library, with the Instruments, Apparatus, and Cabinet of — Objects, is open for the use of Fellows daily (except Saturdays), from 10 — aM. to 5 p.m., and on Wednesdays from 6 to 9 p.m. also. It is closed for four weeks during August and September. eee Forms of proposal for Fellowship, and any further information, may be obtained by — application to the Secretaries, or Assistant-Secretary, at the Library of the Society, King’s cf College, Strand, W.C. 4 4 & wr Oat, i Pe £5 CTT 3 5185 00266 77/96 2 = 24 G& 4